mm
!JF.'ft).-i'..'''',"VT'vr: : --. .'- ' ...
 
 

 
 
 
 
DR. CASPAEI'S
     f M
   HOMCEOPATHIC
DOMESTIC  PHYSICIAN,
          F. HARTMANN, M. D.,
 AUTHOR OF THE "ACUTE AND CHRONIC DISEASES" IN FOUR VOLUMES.
           TRANSLATED EROM THE
EIGHTH GERMAN EDITION, AND ENRICHED  BY A TREATISE ON

    ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY,
           W. P. ESREY, M. D.


      WITH ADDITIONS AND A PREFACE

                  BY

             C. HERING, M. D.


               CONTAINING ALSO

A CHAPTER ON MESMERISM AND MAGNETISM; DIRECTIONS TO ENABLE PATIENTS
 LIVING AT A DISTANCE FROM A HOMCEOPATHIC PHYSICIAN, TO DESCRIBE
               THEIR SYMPTOMS;
                   A
      TABULAR INDEX OF THE MEDICINES AND THE DISEASES
             IN WHICH THEY ARE USED; AND

 A SKETCH OF THE BIOGRAPHY OF SAMUEL HAHNEMANN,

           THE FOUNDER OF HOMCEOPATHIC.  f I' & "g-v. A T^^T3~*"  "


            •With 30 Illustriitioiis^     ■ - "I «-n/;L«J UrhiOt




             PHILADELPHIA:  / ^ 5 0 6 / ,  '

 PUBLISHED BY RADEMACHER & SHEEE^, No. 23'J ARCH ST._________
        NEW YORK : WM. RADDE, 322 BROADWAY.
      ST. LOUIS : J. G. WESSELHCEFT, 64 FOURTH STREET.
          BOSTON : OTIS CLAPP, 23 SCHOOL ST.

                18 5 2. 
1852.
  Entered according to the Act of Congress, in the year 1851,
             Uy RADEMACHER &■ SHEER,
In the Clerk's OflSce of the  Eastern District of Pennsylvania.
Kino & Baird, Printers, No. 9 Sansom St., Philadelphia. 
PREFACE.
  The translator and the publishers of the following short
adviser for the people have asked me to endorse it, as
neither Caspari nor Hartmann  are much known in this
country, except  to homoeopathic physicians.  And  I do
it with the more pleasure a s I am myself a competitor in
this branch of our literature.  I have been  acquainted
with both authors, and was  even present when Caspari
first spoke of his plan to write a small practical book for
every body, in order to assist the friends  of our cause
when  travelling, or so situated as to be unable to procure
the advice of a homoeopathic physician,  as well as to in-
troduce the new healing art into those families who  were
afraid to call a homoeopathic physician.   This was a few
years after I had joined the ranks of the homeeopathists
—25 years ago—and Caspari had to make his book very
small, in order to find at that time—1826—a publisher.
After its publication three years elapsed before  the  com-
paratively small edition was sold.  In 1829 a new edition
was wanted,  and Caspari having  died  previously, Dr.
Hartmann undertook to make the necessary additions
and improvements.   It could not have fallen  into better
hands, as  Dr. Hartmann was one of the  earliest disciples
of Hahnemann, and a man of more experience and prac-
tical knowledge  than Caspari.
  The criticism  of this second edition by  Dr.  Stapf in
the Archives, Vol. 8, No. 3, page 183, not only acknowl-
edged the greater ability of Hartmann, but at the  same
time urged him to write a larger work on Therapeutics,
saying that " Hartmann is from his practical  experien ce
not only able, but is peculiarly fitted for it."
  Thus urged,  Hartmann  was induced to forward th e
first therapeutical work ever  published on homoeopathy. 
IV
PREFACE.
 In 1831 the first volume appeared, in  1832 the second,
 and in 1834 a new edition was required, which, being a
 larger one, lasted until 1847, when a third edition ap-
 peared very much enlarged and improved.*
   During the same period Hartmann became one of the
 editors of the "Homoeopathic Gazette," a publication
 commenced in 1833 and is now in its 42d volume.   It is
 unnecessary to add a single word to recommend an author
 to the American public after such facts.  And to recom-
 mend the work itself,  nothing more is lequired  than the
 fact that from the year 1829 to the present time it has
 gone through eight editions, and  is so much improved
 and enlarged as to have become more the work  of Hart-
 mann than of the original author.   Each successive edi-
 tion has also  been heavier, and there are at present not
 less than from 15 to 20 thousand copies of this work in
 the hands of the German  people, nothwithstanding the
 simultaneous  appearance of more than a dozen of similar
 domestic books from different authors.  May we soon be
 enabled to say the same  of the American translation.
 Every traveller ought  to have it in his trunk.  More  than
 one-half of the acute  diseases are  either  brought on, or
 prolonged by injudicious treatment, at the commencement
 especially, with purgatives.   Thus  nearly all of the dis-
 eases by which the traveller is liable to be attacked,  may
 be speedily arrested by complying with the rules here laid
 down, and that without any of the vexatious interruptions,
which  the allopathic  pureficatory drugs necessarily  pro-
duce.
  And for family use  it  will also be found well  adapted,
 being short,  concise and yet complete;  for those  who
 want but a brief adviser there is no better work.

                                       C. Hering.
    Philadelphia, Oct. 18, 1851.
* Acute and Chronic Diseases. 
INTRODUCTION.
  It would be superfluous to add to the great number of publi-
cations of this kind, were I  not in hopes, by presenting this, to
diminish their copiousness, and  restrain their influence on  the
health of the community.  All  those works are allopathically
drawn up, and as there is a proportionate quantity of medicines
to each method prescribed, injurious and dangerous though they
are  even in the hands of  the physician; how much more so must
they be in the hand of the unskilled, who know  not in one in-
stance, how to meet the harm ? There are found in the manifold
''Domestic Physicians", "Household Friends", and similar books
for  the people, descriptions of diseases, the most important and
hazardous to life, which  have never been  successfully treated
even by physicians; with what right, then, are they entrusted to
the ignorant, who are in no respect qualified  to know their whole
compass, and to judge of their endless modifications? Will they
not often, without foreseeing the imminent danger,  when trust-
ing to the medicine recommended, suffer  the most suitable time
for  removing a disease to pass by, and thus render it more incu-
rable; will they not frequently, deceived by imperfect views,  ad-
minister  quite unsuitable means, where a superficial  resemblance
of one case to another, appears to call for them and thereby oc-
casion harm?
  To obviate this, I present to  the  public  in the  introduction
a way by which, in conformity with  the  rules of homoeopathy,
aid  may  be obtained  in diseases, in a manner altogether free of
danger.
  Moreover I hope, herewith to contribute towards the extension
of a better, more natural manner of living; by showing, that with
apparently  insignificant substances, usually  deemed articles  of
       1 
2
INTRODICTION.
 diet, such as coffee, chamomile, eldcrblossoms, &c, not  only
 many disorders  may be remedied, by refraining from their too
 free use  but that by these  very medicinal articles, if used as
 food, a host of  diseases may be produced; besides that  in the
 treatment of diseases, a far more careful mode of living must be
 observed, than is commonly the case, and finally that such regu-
 lar mode of life, is the  best preservative against diseases.
   The operation and efficacy of homoeopathic medicines  is suf-
 ficiently known, so that there is no necessity for me to add any-
 thing on that head, except  that their harmlessness lies in  their
 minuteness, by virtue of which, if the layman has made a wrong
 selection, it at least does no injury, and can easily be neutralised.
 Nothing in nature is unconditionally poisonous, that is, places
 the life of any creature in any permanent danger,  but even the
 most powerful article,  provided its  quantity of poison be  duly
 lessened, becomes the most beneficial means of cure. Though there
 are many plants, on which animals do not feed, this is no evidence
 that they are poisonous, for they would indeed be hurtful to them
 as food, if taken in very small quantity would do them no  harm;
 and it would be quite erroneous to conclude from this,  as to their
 uselessness when taken as medicine. It is only an indication, that
 we must use them as such with great caution, and in most minute
 quantity. Thus  the Pulsatilla is rejected  by animals,  but it is,
 when  used cautiously by man, one of the most  indispensable
 and beneficial medicines.
   But who ever wishes  to use medicines, and especially homoeo-
 pathic medicines, with good results, must observe the most care-
 ful diet, that is,  he must avoid every thing that  can retard the
 operation of the medicine, or change or nullify it.
   Before proceeding further, there are perhaps  many of my
readers, who are indebted  to  homoeopathy, and on this account
would willingly  occupy themselves with it at their leisure  and
delight in knowing  something  of  its  history,  founder  pro-
gress, &c, (which  I at this time deem  necessary,  since homoeo-
pathy  has continually  been  spreading itself abroad,) whereby
the well diposed  reader  may become acquainted with the author 
LTFE OF  HAHNEMANN.
3
of this new system of cure, who has long been known only by
name, and may now scientifically approach somewhat nearer to
him, and learn, and from this more intimate acquaintance, may
be enabled  to make this just inference :  that Hahnemann, by
virtue of his eminent qualifications, must have been fully com-
petent for the gigantic work of revolutionizing the practical part
of medicine.
                    SKETCH
       OF THE BIOGRAPHY OF HAHNEMANN,
                THE FOUNDER OF HOMEOPATHY.
   Samuel Christian Frederick Hahnemann, Doctor of
Medicine and Surgery, ducal aulic counsellor of Anhalt-Kothen,
was born on the  10th of April 1755 at Meissen in Saxony.  His
mother  communicated  to him  when a boy the rudiments of
reading  and writing;  almost as in play he acquired with and
from his  father the most circumspect cultivation of his mind,
especially by being industriously taught  to think for himself, and
he uniformly so directed his genius, that the son never ventured
to assume a thing to be right and true, of which he had not been
convinced by some proof. From this foundation the father sedu-
lously required him to learn  geometry and spontaneous designing,
in order to  become acquainted with the  relations of things, even
physically,  so as  clearly and distinctly  to judge of them.  His
father also  encouraged  him  in all  by his own virtuous, steady,
and energetic example.
   For several years Hahnemann attended the public schools of
that place, and there very soon showed a quick capacity, persever-
ing industry, and  an  innate aptitude for  intellectual  activity;
his manifold talents were  more fully  developed in  the  royal
school at Meissen, which he frequented from his eighth year, and
where, by his extraordinary assiduity, he gained the notice and
love  of  Malhr, at that time rector; whom in his later years he
often remembered and acknowledged with  much gratitude, in 
4
INTRODUCTION.
 as much as he had allowed him liberty in the choice  of  his stu-
 dies, essential to the enriching and perfecting of his knowledge.
 Frequently the rector transferred to Hahnemann  the hours  of
 study of the younger scholars in the elements of the Greek lan-
 guage, as  he generally placed such  confidence  in  the  matured
 jugdment and deliberate thought of his pupil, that he took pleas-
 ure in disputing with him on the old languages, and often  adopted
 young Hahnemann's views.  The love  of  the  rector (who, by
 labouring  night and day, brought on a wasting disease, which
 also  gave  him  the impulse  to  study medicine) for him went
 so  far, that he dispensed with those studies, of which  Hahne-
 mann was not particularly fond,  and allowed him, in the mean
 time to employ himself  with natural science and  medicine,  to
 which  he  felt  himself particularly drawn.   He  was not  less
 beloved and respected by the rest of the teachers, which is say-
 ing  much; he  knew also, notwithstanding oft  received praise,
 how by his friendly and affable deportment,  to  secure the love
 of his school fellows.
   According to the determination of his father, who  not being
 wealthy, could not afford the expense of his  further studies, he
 was  obliged to  devote himself to  another  pursuit;  but it be-
 hooved him, if more  cogent reasons had  not urged  him thereto,
 to give up  these thoughts, as he was without any possible means
 on  the part of college education, so that  it  was quite clear
 to young Hahnemann, that even  in the study of medicine  at
 the University,  he could not reckon upon any support from his
 father.  Nevertheless this did not hinder him, in the year 1775,
 after he had written, on leaving the prince's school, a very beau-
 tiful  latin  treatise, on the structure  of the human hand, from
 entering the University of Leipsic, with twenty dollars in his
 purse, and  earnestly devoting  himself to the art of healing.
  By the intercession of the counsellor of the mines, Burner,  in
 Meissen, he was presented with  an honorary admission  to the
lectures of  the  greater part of the Professors  in Leipsic; but
nothwithstanding this, there remained  many anxieties  about a
livelihood,  which he  strove to lessen, by giviug instruction  to a 
LIFE OF  HAHNEMANN.
5
rich  young Greek in German and  French, and by  translating
medical works from the English into German, for which he took
advantage of the nights, in order  that he might suffer no time
to be lost in the prosecution of the science to which he was most
ardently attached.  But despite this iron assiduity, he  found it
still  impossible  to frequent all the necessary lectures, and there-
fore  limited himself to the most needful, and  endeavoured to
make up, for deficiences by a good  selection of medical books.
   In this manner the  theory of medicine  was  soon mastered,
and  he was  irresistibly drawn  to  the  practice.  In respect to
this, his position was far more critical, for he found little oppor-
tunity,  there being  at  that time no common infirmary  in Leip-
sic.   Anxious to entrust himself with it, he labored  day and
night, to enable himself to visit Vienna, where, in the monk's
hospital of Leopoldstadt, under  the direction of the celebrated
physician, Quarin, he so distinguished himself in the treatment
of diseases, that at the end of a year, when Hahnemann's finan-
ces were exhausted,  Quarin strongly recommended him to the
governor of Siebenburgen, Baron v. Brukenthal, as his family
physician, with whom  he also  accepted  at the same  time, in
Hermannstadt  the Office of Librarian  and arranger of ancient
coins.  All his  spare  time he  employed  in learning foreign
languages, and in the practice of his profession in the city. After
about a year and a half  he  had gathered a little capital, and
returned to Germany,  chiefly to study medicine in Erlangen
another year, and there to promote what took place on the 10th
of August 1779 by the public defence of  his Inaugural Disser-
tation.
   Richly endowed with the treasures of knowledge, and  provided
with the needful earthly means for his modest pretentions, he se-
lected Hellstadt in Mannsfeld district for his future residence; but
after remaining a short time there,  he went over as practitioner
to Dessau, where he also employed himself in chemistry, and
increased his knowledge of mineralogy and metallurgy.  Here
also  his stay was brief, and he accepted the office of consulting
physician at  Comment in Magdeburg, which he held two years 
6
INTRODUCTION.
and  nine  months.  In  this station he  learned the uncertainty
and  deficiency  of  the existing science  of  medicine,  more and
more, and his  conscientiousness did not allow him the further
exercise of its practice.  Hence he devoted  himself chiefly to his
favourite  study of chemistry  and  to writing scientific  works.
With this knowledge of things, it may  be  easily imagined that
this  situation was of no further service to him,  and he con-
sequently  gave  it up;  still as he was married and had a family,
it was natural that their support, and the instinct of self preser-
vation  should spur him on, to  procure some other  means  of
subsistence, which with  his rich attainments in knowledge could
not be difficult.  With this conviction he directed his  course
to  Dresden, where  dwelt a number of  his friends, and  where
besides, better  opportunities were  presented for perfecting his
knowledge.   Dr. Warner,  at  that time consulting physician  in
Dresden, introduced him to the hospitals in that place, and pro-
cured for  him,  with the consent of  the  magistrate,  the manage-
ment of them for  a year, and employed him also as assistent
physician  in his extensive practice, which Hahnemann, acknow-
ledged in  after life, to have been of great benefit, as Way iter
was  a very  adroit, experienced and  successful   practitioner.
Through Atlelung  and Dassdorf he enjoyed free access  to the
libraries of which he made  the most extensive use for enlarging
his fund of knowledge.  In  this period of Hahnemann's  life, a
number of chemical and medical treatises,  translations of medi-
cal works from  foreign languages, discoveries in chemistry,
&c. &c, were produced by him.
   In the year 1789, after a four years'  sojourn in Dresden, he
removed  with  a numerous  family  to  Leipsic, in  order  to be
nearer the source  of knowledge.   About  this period, a more
encouraging view into nature was opened to his investigations
when he made  the highly important discovery which has secured
for his name an immortality in the annals of medicine and  of
humanity. Just at this time the most complete  anarchy pre-
vailed in  the treatment of human diseases;  and  the  chaos  of
theories almost caused Hahnemann to faint  with discouragement 
LIFE OF HAHNEMANN.
7
since from none of them could be derived any true and salutary
method of restoring  the sick.  Although he was earnestly enga-
ged as a most accurate observer of nature's  symptoms, and used
the greatest possible simplicity in his treatment,  which even then
gained  for him the reputation of a circumspect and successful
practitioner; yet he had a lively feeling that he could not have
any certainty of its duration, as the foundation  was not  firmly
laid.  He therefore withdrew himself by degrees from medical
practice, and did not resume it, until he had found a more cer-
tain guidingstar, which  he could follow in the treatment  of dis-
eases. Deeply rooted in him was the belief that, on the usual path,
medicine could not be reformed. The healing art, he felt, needed
an entire subversion, but  its accomplishment contributed not in
the least to an easier, safe and more  permanent cure of diseases.
Nevertheless before he  deliberated on this latter, he  deemed it
necessary  to subject the means—the  remedies—to a  stricter
scrutiny than  had been  previously done, as he saw more  and
more clearly that these were too little known,  and their opera-
tion was judged of too superficially, and with a general  rather
than with a special view.
  Accident placed in his hands Cidlcn's Materia Medica, which
he translated into German,  and committed  to press in the year
1790.  He had labored a long time at this translation, and  still
no beneficial  results were obtained, until the confused explana-
tions of the febrifuge virtues of china (Peruvian bark)  excited
his attention, and made  him  more observant and certain,  that
this  matter was not as there described.  In order  to investi-
gate the subject more  accurately, he tested this article on the
healthy persons  of  his family, and  on himself, and  to   his
astonishment  perceived, besides a number  of other symptoms,
effects, that seemed similar to those  of intermittent fever. This
was the corner  stone of  the great system  of cure founded in
nature, which, after  years of investigation,  he at length found;
and with ardor aud habitual sagacity on this hitherto dark field
of medical science, at this  time enveloped in the incomprehen-
sible chaos  of night, he  progressively accumulated such  a trca- 
8
INTRODUCTION.
sure of useful materials, that he was desirous to use them in dis-
eases, and to ascertain if this hint <»f nature could be thoroughly
confirmed according to his previous views.   The opportunity for
this soon presented itself  in the establishment by Duke Ernst.
of Gotha, of an infirmary  for the insane at Georgenthal, three
leagues  from Gotha, in which  he was  appointed manager by
the Duke, and the establishment was opened in  the beginning
of August 1792.  Here he cured, among others, the person who
in Kotzcbite's lampoon is  named  "Bahrdt with the iron  fore-
head", a maniac, who had been private secretary to Kloclcenbring
of Hanover.
   Even  at this period Hahnemann  had detractors and calum-
niators in great  number,  particularly one,  whom he called the
most distinguished and best qualified " Weinjirobe" (liquor vini
probatorius), well  known  as the defamer of Dr.  Gren in Halle
in the year 1793.  This, however, did not disturb Hahnemann,
who pursued his  way quietly  and prudently, and  in the year
1796 he published, in Hnfeland's Journal, the first rudiments,
under the title of:  "Essay  on a new  principle of discovering
the healing virtue of medicinal substances, together with  some
glances  at those  hitherto  made."   For this  he  gained not the
acknowledgement and support of  his efforts, but the most bare-
faced undervaluing and most repulsive coldness.  A cotempo-
rary theory of the englishman Brown, notwithstanding its extra-
vagance, was found more  comprehensible and admissible than
Hahnemann's revolutionary doctrine. But he still persevered,
aud more earnestly, in his simple  path, which he  knew to be
the only true and correct one, for establishing a  pure theory  of
medicine, and building thereon a safe curative practice, and he
manifested greater independence in proportion to his experience
at  the outset of his reformation.
   It must have been only about two years that  he remained  in
Georgenthal, for in 1794  he again lived in a garden in Bruns-
wick, and in 1795 in Kouigslutter, where  he performed  such
decidedly successful cures with his new method of treatment
that physicians and apothecaries joined  in persecuting him, and 
LIFE OF  HAHNEMANN.
9
were instrumental in reviving a law forbidding physicians  to
dispense their  own  medicines,  so  that Hahnemann was com-
pelled  to  leave the country.  In 1799 he went  to Altona, and
soon afterwards to Hamburg, where he made known that pro-
phylactic  or  preventive of scarlet fever, which excited so great
and numerous scruples  among the physicians of that time and
of the present; even at Konigslutter, he had  demonstrated it
as such, against one  of the  most violent and  universally pre-
valent  scarlatina epidemic, which originated in the vicinity  of
Helmstadt.   Since that  time this remedy has found  favor with
many reflecting and  impartial physicians,  it having been suf-
ficiently proved.  In Hamburg, indeed, Hahnemann and  his
natural liberty of self dispensing were respected, but there  he
was too little known,  and was consequently unable,  in  so con-
siderable  a  city,  to  provide  the necessary subsistence for his
family in  a  short time, on  which account, after a short stay in
his fatherland Saxony, he turned back, and provisionally settled
himself in Eilenburg.
   Frequently, even in Hamburg, he was entreated to make known
his preventive, nevertheless  he well knew, by the history of all
times, the ingratitude of the age in regard to great discoveries,
and  he had  no desire,  as had occured to  other great men, to
yield his  fame and  emolument to another, he therefore would
not give publicity to this medicine,  unless 300 Frederic d'ors
were obtained for it by  subscription. This procedure of ILdi-
■nemann embittered  the  physicians,  and many retracted their
former  favorable judgment  of his  preventive, others sought to
make parents who used  it, believe that it was a powerful poison
which would sooner or later have the most fatal effects on youth-
ful constitutions.—Until that time, Hahnemann was diposed  to
treat opposers with mildness, and notwithstanding the unfriendly
treatment, which-he  experienced without intermission, he with
great forbearance spoke  his mind in an essay entitled :  "A glance
at the  humanity of collegiate physicians in the beginning of the
new century."  This was  his  last  genuine manly appeal, but as
it received no attention, it was also the important verge for his 
10
INTRODUCTION.
future position  towards  medicine and physicians.  From  this
time he withdrew himself entirely from the latter, and combated
for his  system,  whether  peaceably or  to the death, against the
prevailing medical systems, to which he was naturally not a little
impelled by the everlasting jarring with apothecaries about the
self-dispensing of his medicines.
    Despite the  manifold inquiries,  I was unable to  get  any
information  respecting the duration  of his residence in  Eilen-
burg, or how long he had  lived in  Maehern, a village four
leagues  from  Leipsic.   During  about two years'  sojourn in
Dessau, there appeared several productions of his mental activ-
ity.   He was previously some time  in  Wittenberg.   He  had
made choice of both places, in order that  he might devote more
time to  the perfecting of  the homoeopathic healing art, on which
account he lived only to himself  aud his study, abandoned all
medical practice, and only resumed it when he went  to Torgau
in the year 1806.  From this  place, too, it must have been,
that his first thoroughly scientific work, which gives the desired
knowledge of his new principle of cure appeared—published by
Arnold in Dresden 1S10, under the title  of " Organon of the
rational art of healing."  This book gave the signal for a violent
warfare against  Hahnemann, and a  number of sharp reviews
against  it, and articles against the revolutionist himself, made
their appearance;  in which his doctrine was pronounced absurd,
and with an assumed superiority and want of respect charged
with insufficiency.  His tests of medicines,  and the minute doses
especially, were denounced as silly nonentities, or hurtful poisons.
—In short the opponents were numerous, and it could be fore-
seen, the incipient war would be of long continuance,  as Hahne-
mann had aroused it by divulging his reformatory doctrine op-
posed to that which had  the sanction  of thousands of years  and
had brought on  himself  implacable enemies," who believed 'their
sacred palladium to be endangered, and  for the preservation of
which they fought, with  the utmost  bitterness, not always with
knightly and honorable, but with illicit weapons, which ill became
them in mutters of such  great importance. 
LIFE OF  HAHNEMANN.
11
  With the intention of instructing young physicians and ren-
dering them favorable  to his doctrines—for  he saw the older
ones were  altogether inaccessible—he came to Leipsic in  the
year 1811^ in order to deliver lectures, and he did not shrink
from  the task, as by so doing he  had  the privilege  of coming
forward  as  a  disputant before the medical faculty;  which  he
took advantage of in a treatise written in Latin, on the 26th
June  1812, and in which he selected his son, Frederick Hahne-
mann, as respondent, and gained unusual applause by the stu-
pendous  erudition displayed therein  From this time forth  he
gave regular semi-annual  lectures, for which his Organon served
as a basis, and which he kept up on Wednesdays and Saturdays,
from 2 to 3 o'clock  in  the afternoon.  The author of this work
attended these lectures  for about two years.  Perhaps he might
have  introduced  his doctrines more easily to the physicians
and students,  if he had more dispassionately discussed  the prin-
cipal points of his Organon, than was his custom in his lectures.
His manner unfortunately was not calculated  to gain for him-
self and his doctrines many friends and adherents; for, whenever
it was  in his  power, he poured forth a  flood  of invective and
abuse against  the old system of medicine and  its advocates, so
that the  number of his hearers hourly diminished, till at length
only a few of his pupils attended.  For several years he continued
these  lectures undisturbed, and occupied  himself constantly till
the year 1822, in completing his Pure Materia  Medica, of which
six volumes in all were published, and which have outlived the
third  edition.   In the year 1813, which  afforded the  medical
profession  so  many  opportunities,  to distinguish itself, Hahne-
mann  appeared in  a point of view, which  no physician  of
that day could controvert;  he celebrated, in  the true sense of
the word, the  triumph of his doctrines, and found, in the treat-
ment of  the hospital fevers—at that time prevailing throughout
Europe,  having  been introduced by the French on their retreat
from Russia,—the repeated confirmation of the remedial law of
nature discovered by him. Out of the great number of patients
in that  part of the  country, treated by him; but two  patients 
12
INTRODUCTION.
died,  one a very aged  man, and  the other in  consequence of
neglect of the rules of diet.
   In the year 1819, the persecution and oppression of this new
doctrine became more and more violent, and continued for some
years.  It was carried to the most disgraceful pitch by the Leip-
sic physicians and apothecaries, and the author of this sketch
could give a picture of the martyrdom of Hahnemann's pupils at
that time, which does not tend much to the honor  of  their per-
secutors.  From  this time  Hahnemann was incessantly held in
check by the Leipsic apothecaries, who were constantly entering
compl  ints against him,  so that he  had no longer any enjoyment
of his  life, and was obliged, in February 1820,  to hand in to the
court  of  aldermen at that  place, a written defence, which, how-
ever, had no other effect, than to cause him to be publicly noti-
fied, at his own dwelling, "That he would be held in the penalty
of 20 dollars for the dispensation of each and every article of
medicine to any person whomsoever, lest he should give occasion
to more severe measures."
   Under such circumstances, to remain in Leipsic was useless,
as he saw,  that his doctrine, to which he had devoted more than
2o years  of his life, and  for the love of which he had denied him-
self every enjoyment, was more and more opposed, and  its  pro-
gress impeded,  contrary to his expectations.   On  this account,
the proposition of His  Highness  Duke Ferdinand of Anhalt-
Kbthen,  to take  up his residence at  Kbthen, and consider it
an asylum  for his doctrines, was  highly agreeable.  With joy he
acceeded  to this proposal,  and soon left Leipsic,  never again to
take up his residence within its walls.   In  Kbthen he found a
friendly reception, and obtained besides the title  of private phy-
sician to the Duke.  From this time his life was more peaceable,
for without further  interruption he lived only for  the more ex-
tensive cultivation of science.  He left unnoticed the malicious
scribblings about him and his remedial system, not deeming them
worthy of  a rejoinder;  he  only labored at the greater  works,
which  he had been preparing for ten years, in  order to complete
them before his death, to lay them openly before the world,  and 
LIFE OF  HAHNEMANN.                 13
establish for himself an imperishable monument of immortality.
They were these:  " Chronic diseases, their peculiar nature and
homoeopathic cure",—his last and greatest work, which appeared
in the year 1828  in 4 volumes, published by Arnold, and the
second edition, ten years later, was enlarged one volume.
   The 10th of August 1829 was a joyful day for the venerable
old man, being the anniversary of the one on which, fifty years
before, he had obtained the doctorate.  Gratifying and memor-
able in more than one respect, was this day for him and for the
homoeopathic  system.  With it he closed half a century, which
had been devoted,  in  the  most candid, zealous, and  successful
manner to the service of humanity and science.  What  he had
sown in the thorny past,  he  now  reaped in the fame-crowned
present; what he had combated for heroically and unremittingly,
now wreathed the sternly-serene brow of the happy conqueror,
and around him  who had been  so long exiled, persecuted and
insulted was entwined the  most gladsome recognition, heart-felt
reverence, gratitude and love, of the wide circle who surrounded
him, far and near, visible and invisible.   Several  of his pupils
and friends assembled on  that day at Hahnemann's dwelling,
having made ready all things  for the celebration.  On a table
resembling an altar, adorned with flowers and entwined, with oak-
leaves, was placed the  well-executed bust of Hahnemann.  On a
side table stood a  beautiful oil portrait of him, and several litho-
graphic copies taken from it.  After Hahnemann was introduced,
his bust was crowned with  laurels, amidst appropriate addresses
and congratulations.  One of his pupils handed him a splendidly
written programme of the feast, and another presented him with
a box, lined with red velvet, containing a gold and silver medal,
on one side of which was a well executed portrait of Hahnemann,
with his name, the date of his birth, and promotion;  and on the
reverse, the fundamental axiom of his doctrine: similia simili-
bus.  I omit, lest I should be tedious, the other beautiful, judi-
cious and rich presents, which on this day were  sent from far
and near to this honored sage by men and women in homage of
homoeopathy.—With deep  emotion, the venerable old man, with 
14
INTRODUCTION.
heartfelt and affecting words, giving thanks to the supreme being,
that he had been permitted to make so great  and important a
discovery, and favored with a long life, full of bodily and mental
vigor.  With equal depth of emotion he also thanked those pre-
sent, who had so much honored him  by their presence on this
day, thereby made memorable in the history of his new system.
And henceforth annually ou this day, a meeting of physicians and
friends  of homoeopathy takes  place by appointment, which  is
known by the name of "Central Union".
  In the next year the so much dreaded Asiatic Cholera infused
new and greater activity into the life of Hahnemann, and gave
fresh evidence of his talent, in finding out the truth among the
numerous and confused experiments  and  observations,  which
only his acutcuess, and  his  excellent gift of observation could
accomplish, and which  added so  much to his reputation,  as he
never had the opportunity of examining for himself the nature
of this disease.
  Soon after  this he was bereaved by death of  his first wife, and
for  several years he lived under the care of his daughter; but
in the year ls3f>, on the 18th of January, he  was married, the
second time,  as an octogenarian, to  Marie  Mtlanie d' Jhrvilljj-
(,'oilier from  Paris, 35 years of age, whom he had become inti-
mately acquainted with as a patient, and whose eminent endow-
ments of mind he admired and prized.   With  her  he desired  to
close the evening of his days in peace and serenity.   The high
estimation in  which they held each other favored and realized
this wish; no  motives of self interest led to this  bond,  for his
wife sprang  from a good  and  rich family, and  had the inde-
pendent disposal of her wealth.  That  this noble hearted wife of
the venerable Hahnemann attained her object, and succeeded in
promoting his happiness, is clearly proved, as she persuaded him
without difficulty, to leave his German fatherland, and live with
her in Paris the remainder of his  life.   This proposal  he carried
out in May of the same year, and exercised from  that time in a
strange land, with decided success, his  new medical experience
with unclouded powers of mind for the good of suffering human- 
LIFE OF  HAHNEMANN.
15
ity.  Here he lived eight years and some months, and died on
the 2d of July 1843, after having suffered for  15 years, regu-
larly every spring from a bronchial catarrh, apparently in con-
sequence of his great age, verging on paralysis of the lungs.
   Hahnemann was an honorable man, and the peculiarities for
which he  was blamed,  probably  indeed,  were owing to the
various unpleasant situations of his  life,  to the mistaking of his
character, the unfounded and malicious calumnies and invectives,
and his final withdrawal from all social intercourse. The author of
this work has had,  for several years, free access to Hahnemann's
house, and might at least pass just judgment on him as a man,
and so young as I was at that time, I have nevertheless by later,
riper  experience and knowledge of the world, not been able  to
change my opinion of his character;  the only faults, of which
I  cannot entirely excuse him, were mistrust  and avarice, but
so modified, that only a long intercourse with him enabled them
to be discovered.  In his  domestic circle he displayed  an  amia-
bility, which charmed every one, as I with others of his favoured
students  had frequent opportunities of observing.   There sat
the silver-haired  old  man, with  his  high,  arched,  thoughtful
brow, his bright, piercing eyes, aud calm, searching countenance,
in  the midst of us,  as among his children, who likewise  parti-
cipated in these evening entertainments.  Here he showed plainly,
that  the serious exterior,  which he exhibited  in every day life,
belonged only to his deep and constant search after the  mark
which  he had fixed for  himself,  but was in no respect the mir-
ror of his interior, the bright side of  which so readily unfolded
itself on suitable occasions in its fairest light, and the mirthful
humor, the familiarity, and openness, the wit,  &c, that he  dis-
played, were alike  engaging.   How comfortable the master felt
in the circle of his beloved and  his friends,  among whom  he
numbered not only his pupils, but also the learned of other facul-
 ties,  who did homage to  his learning;  how beneficial was the
 recreation which he then allowed himself after 8 o'clock in the
 evening seated in his arm-chair, with a glass of light Leipsic white-
 beer. It was highly interesting at such times, to see him become 
16
INTRODUCTION.
cheerful, as he related the procedure of the older physicians at
the bed  of sickness, when with  an  animated countenance  he
shoved his little cap to and fro upon his head, and puffed out
clouds of tobacco smoke, which enveloped him like a fog; when
he spoke of his deeply affecting life,  and related circumstances
of it, his pipe often went out, and one of his daughters was then
instantly required to light it again.  Besides his peculiar science,
he descanted on  chemistry, subjects  of natural science,  condi-
tions  of  foreign countries  and people, with which  last he  was
particularly  entertaining; but he appeared displeased when in
these  hours  his  advice was sought  in cases of disease;  he was
then either laconic, or called out to the patient  in a friendly way :
" to-morrow on this subject", not for the purpose of discouraging
him, but because he felt himself both  bodily and  mentally too
much unbent;  for he often on the next day in  his consulting
hours, would  bring up  the  subject  himself, take  the  patient
aside  and converse with him in a friendly way, and  was well
pleased if he appeared reconciled; he would even go so far as to
condemn himself, or would frequently yield his opinion  to that
of his opponent.
   His hours of audience were from  9 to 12 in the morning, and
from 2 to 4  in the afternoon.  No person was permitted to enter
the hall, who had  not  first passed the review, which function
was performed every week  alternately, by one of his daughters,
and for which she placed herself at a little window next the hall-
door,  like a warder.  Usually his  apartment was filled with
patients when I entered, and  a considerable time consequently
elapsed before my turn came; as he never allowed a visit to prevent
him giving the necessary attention and reflection to  each patient.
He examined accurately, and wrote down in his journal himself
all the symptoms of which the patient complained, even those
apparently insignificant, to which he successively referred, previous
to furnishing the medicine required  and which  was obtained from
another  room.   After the  clock had struck 12 in the morning
and 4 in the afternoon,  no  visit from any quarter was  received
At 12 to the minute, he was called  to  dinner, after which his 
LIFE OF  HAHNEMANN.
17
attention was not easily drawn  to any thing else.  On one occa-
sion, in the warmth  of conversation, having twice disregarded
the call, at the third more earnest one from his wife, he smilingly
observed: "This time I shall get a gloomy look!" This expres-
sion several times heard from him, convinced me, that this great
man, who had  so much influence over others, had to be placed
under a guardian in his own house, which, however, he willingly
endured, and  granted to the wife this small triumph, since she
watched  with  the greatest attention and  punctuality all his
peculiarities, sought to gratify them, permitted him to want for
nothing, and also undertook alone the bringing up  of his chil-
dren, so that they might not  disturb  him in  his numerous
engagements.

   After the expiration of the time allotted to giving advice in the
afternoon, it was the daily custom of himself and family, in all
weathers, to take an  hour's ramble  through the city, where he
walked,  arm in arm  with his  wife in the van, and several paces
behind them came his three daughters  also arm in arm;  occa-
sional only a more extended or morning promenade to Schleuzig,
little Kuchengarden, Gohlis, &c, was undertaken.  As he was
very anxious that his pupils should  assist him in proving drugs,
 he thought it right to treat us now and then; he therefore occa-
 sionally invited us to a social  supper, to which however  those
 only obtained admittance who had distinguished themselves by
 industry, intelligence and strict morality.  Here matters did not
 go on altogether homceopathically;  for, the food was temptingly
 savory, and instead of the usual white-beer,  a good wine made its
 appearance, which however was always used very moderately, out
 of respect  for the master.  Here cheerfulness, humor and wit,
 always reigned, and  the  merry ones still found new incentives
 to mirth; for  usually there were other  highly intellectual men
 invited.  Hahnemann was  on these occasions the happiest man,
 and joined with the  rest in the most mischievous mirth, without
 however violating the dignity of his station, or in any respect
 making himself the  target for wit. About 11 o'clock we took our
        3 
18
INTRODUCTION.
leave of Hahnemann, and banqueted  long after on the recollec-
tion of these delightful evenings.
  He has  truly maintained like a martyr his new system  of
cure, and outlived  many gloomy,  sorrowful hours.  The earnest
pursuit  of  truth was  the sole object  of his  whole life, and  in
consideration of this lofty aim, he freely dispensed with the lesser
and evanescent pleasures of life.  Peace to his ashes ! 
II  0  M  (E 0  P  A T  II  Y.
  HoMffiOPATHY, which half a  century ago was altogether un-
known in the treatment  of  diseases, and which, since  it has
become known, has occasioned so much controversy and  malig-
nity among  physicians with  respect to  its  being  beneficial or
injurious—; has for the last quarter of a century made such
remarkable advances, that its suppression, which had been con-
templated by certain persons in authority, has now become im-
possible.   A fact, which must  now be  admitted,  not merely
from its enormous propagation abroad, but much more from its
ever progressively distinguished  intrinsic worth.  It is  indeed
almost invariably the lot of every great and beneficial discovery
and new truth, to make its way with difficulty, and to  be ex-
posed  to the shafts of derision, and the prejudices of the evil
disposed, whereby the multitude are captivated;  nevertheless,
the greater  the persecution  and malice to which such truth is
exposed, so much greater, purer and more refined has it come
forth from the conflict;  for in reality this is its legitimate touch-
stone,  that unlike a phantom which at first  grasp  relapses into
nonentity, (which has been the fate of so many systems in medi-
cine)  it has on the contrary shown itself able courageously to
withstand the impediments opposed to it, with valid arguments
and striking demonstrations.—But I must not anticipate. Al-
though I now write  only for the laity, it is presumed, that the
sound  judgment of the  reader, will be able to judge  of the
utility or worthlessness of this method of cure, when I  shall
have  accurately presented homoeopathy in its clearest point of
view from its first rise to the present time, with its pre-eminent
and peculiar principles.
   Homoeopathy forms, as a method of cure, a direct opposite to
the older practice,  called Allopathy, inasmuch as  the  former 
2D
INTRODUCTION.
employs for the cure  of  human maladies  such  medicines as
operate directly on  the  diseased organ, while the latter makes
use of remedies which stand in indirect relation  to the existing
disease, that is, such  as  affect  and disorder  another organ not
attacked, with the  view of directing the disease  to a less im-
portant structure in  the human organism.   The word Homeo-
pathy is composed of  the  Greek  words omoios, similar,  and
pathos, suffering;  and by this  signification presents  the govern-
ing principle of this method of  cure : heal similar with similar I
Its author  and founder was that great man,  distinguished  alike
by genius,  sagacity,  and erudition, Dr. Samuel  J/ahuemann.
For several years be had relinquished the treatment  of diseases,
because the art of medicine was less satisfactory than he had ex-
pected; he therefore withdrew from practice,  and employed him-
self entirely with chemistry and authorship, in which however
his constant object was,  to discover a new and safer way of treat-
ing diseases.  In the translation of Culliu's Materia Medica,
he perceived the first ray  of  light,  and  his ever  active  and
searching mind, led him towards the new dawning of a brighter
day.  It was the effect of the Peruvian bark, which  led him to
the idea, that medicines must have the power of removing dis-
eases, through the peculiar similar effects of each remedy.  In
order more accurately to investigate this theory, and not to mix
together the symptoms  of the  disease and of the medicine, he
selected himself, as a sound  person,  for personal  experiment,
took  a quantity of the best China bark in powder, and accurat-
ely noted the symptoms, which he experienced during its action,
by which every  doubt relative  to the operation of medicines was
 wholly removed.  He still did not venture to make  known this
 remedial law, so conformable to nature: like cures like, before he
 had made  experiments with other drugs on himself and on other
 sound  persons,  and  had proved the  results, according to this
 principle, by trials and experience at the bed of sickness.   In a
 word, he observed  how medicines operated on the human  body
 when viewed in the unruffled mirror of health,  with the convic-
 tion, that  the changes and feelings which each  article produces 
HOMOEOPATHY.
21
   in  the  sound organism, are the  only  clear indications—unin-
   fluenced by any conflicting deceptive symptoms of the disease—
   which could afford the unprejudiced observer a distinct idea of
   its specific tendency, its peculiar, clear,  positive power, by which
   to change the condition of the body; that is, to reduce it, when
   sound,  to a diseased  state, similar to that (induced by disease)
   which it has the power of curing.  It  is worthy of  notice, that
   Hahnemann, at the commencement of his great discovery, made
   use of those articles for proof on himself and others, which pos-
   sessed an extensive power of action, and were peculiarly adapted
   to  the  cure of a number of the  most  common, and frequent
   diseases; these medicines, of which some  had become obsolete
   in the old practice, and others on account of their heroic powers
   were very seldom administered, he named "Polychrests"; among
   these  he classed Nux vomica, Rhus toxicodendron, Bryonia,
   Pulsatilla, Ignatia, Belladonna, Acouitum napellus, Arsenicum,
   and many others.—After he had accumulated  a number of clear
   experiments on the sphere  of  action of a number of medicines,
   he came forward openly in his book, published in Latin, entitled:
   " Fragments on the positive effects of medicines", that is, their
   operation observed  on  the healthy  body. Five years afterwards
  his "Organon of the rational art of healing" appeared, in which
   were comprized the principles of this doctrine  of cure, arranged
.  somewhat more accurately.
     The chief precept which originates from the principle  already
   sufficiently spoken of, is : to  select the  medicines  according to
   the symptoms  induced in  the healthy  body  after  careful and
  repeated observation,  and oppose  the group of symptoms, pre-
  sented in each case  of disease, by a similar group of drug symp-
  toms  met with in  the series, and  which the medicine given is
  capable of exciting in the  sound  organism; thus will the
  disease be safely, speedily, mildly  and permanently  cured. Or
  in  other words: ascertain which medicine among those tried on
  the healthy body, has produced effects  most nearly resembling
  the whole of the symptoms met with in the case of disease to be
  treated, and this remedy will effect  a safe and speedy cure.  This 
22                     INTRODUCTION.

leading principle also teaches at the same time, that the homoeo-
pathic  treatment demands  for its exercise a knowledge of the
power of medicines hitherto unknown and also a more than ordi-
nary comprehension  aud estimate of diseased symptoms.   The
knowledge requisite to  this, I have already pointed out, and also,
that this knowledge can only be  acquired by proving the medi-
cines in  healthy  persons.  In these  provings  great precaution,
accuracy,  and close observation during the time of experiment is
necessary; as well as  strict conscientiousness, in order that the
medicines employed may be pure, genuine, and efficacious.  The
more powerful substances are to  be given only in  minute doses,
and to strong persons;  those of  milder action in more consider-
able doses, and the weakest to persons entirely free from disease,
who are delicate, irritable and susceptible to the action of  such
medicines. The best results will be obtained, when these medicines
are taken in the most simple form; the fresh expressed juice of the
indigenous plants for instance should be mixed with equal parts of
spirits of wine; the exotics reduced to a coarse powder and made
into a tincture  with alcohol  diluted with water: and  the  salts
and gums, dissolved in water immediately before they are taken.
According  to the experience of Hahnemann and  some  later
homoeopathic physicians,  even  small quantities  in  the higher
dilutions  act  strongly on healthy persons, and  give  satisfactory
results.   And some medicines,   such as Natrum muriaticum,
Carbo vegetabilis, &c, must be tested in the higher dilutions, if
we wish to ascertain their effects; as virtues are  first developed
by trituration and dilution, not  displayed in their crude state.
   Every medical substance, which is to be proved, must be ad-
ministered alone, without  any admixture of foreign substance;
nor should any thing  of a medicinal nature be taken, as long as
it is desired  to observe the effects.  The diet should also  be
attented to, and all  spices, aromatic herbs, spirituous and stimu-
lating drinks avoided; excessive exertion of body or mind, dis-
 sipation of  every  kind,  and  undue emotions or passions  are
 equally injurious during the time of experiment; it is also  neces-
 sary, in order to  insure acute observation, to avoid any occupy- 
HOMOEOPATHY.                    23
tion requiring  close  mental application.   The person  experi-
mented on must voluntarily assume the requisite attention. And
especially is it indispensable to have a healthy body, and sound
intellect, so that the sensations  noticed may be clearly written
down. When the observations are thus carefully made, it will soon
be  perceived, that every medicine excites a twofold action in the
human organism, a  primary  and  a  secondary  effect.   This is
occasioned by the article taken,  changing more or less the vital
power,  and exciting a certain alteration in the state of health, of
longer  or shorter duration. Although a product of the medicinal
and vital action, it belongs rather to  the influent potency.  This
influence (primary)  strives to oppose  its  energy to our vital
power; this strife is  owing to our tenacity of life—an automatic
activity of the same, an after action or  reaction, but in diseases
called curative  action,  since in these it presents no directly op-
posite  condition,  and  nature  seeks  merely to render her  pre-
ponderance effectual  thereby;  so that she strives to get  clear of
the oppressive excitement (the medicine) as speedily as possible,
and return to her normal state (curative action).
    By the experiments with medicines on himself the physician
gains a twofold advantage; first, he becomes a careful observer
in  diseases, and secondly he  learns  to  know unequivocally and
 truly the characteristic properties of remedies, since no other
 medicinal influence,  no previous diseased symptoms have inter-
 rupted the  developement of the  powers of the medicine,  and
 he therefore obtains a true  image  of  its  peculiar virtues, and
 consequently of  its  true  curative powers  (physiological obser-
 vations of the medicines).—In  this manner homoeopathy has
 gradually and constantly  extended its knowledge of  medicines,
 and formed a  new  system  altogether its  own, with  propriety
 named by Hahnemann, the pure materia  medica; the more,
 as it is established by experience, and  contains only the pure,
 unsophisticated language of nature, most carefully inquired  of
 and well understood, without foreign mixture.  Homoeopathy
 is  now in  possession  of a great  number  of proved  medicines,
 which are  to  be found not only in  Hahnemann's writings, but 
24                    INTRODUCTION.

also in those of many of his pupils and followers.  The difference
between such a materia medica and one of the old school, Hah-
nemann has shown in the treatise entitled: « Illustration of the
Sources of the ordinary Materia Medica."
  Just as simply,  as in the investigation of the effects of medi-
caments, homoeopathy goes to work in tracing out diseases.  She
is  just as surely convinced of the truth, that the foundation  of
every disease is laid in  a change in the interior of the human
organism,  as  the  old  school, but  she  does  not  suffer herself
to be misled  into  recognizing this internal change, this essence
of disease, with perfect certainty, as it can  be but darkly and
fallaciously conjectured  by  our understanding.  Ilomaojmthj,
is also certainly  of the  opinion that  the invisible  morbid
changes in the interior, and  the outward  changes, of the state
of health apparent to our senses, constitute that which we call
disease.  But since that  is in no  wise  free  from illusion, she
depends solely on  the totality of the symptoms, as the side of the
disease turned towards the physician; she recognizes it as that,
which is needful for him to know in order to heal  the disease.
She recognizes these symptoms, these changes of body and mind,
evident to our senses, these external perceivable appearances of
disease, as those signs, to which the most undivided attention is
to be given, without drawing from them  any conclusion concern-
ing  the essence of the deeply hidden  interior of the diseased
organism, and its ever invisible changes.   In  order to investigate
with accuracy such an  image of disease, the appearance of the
symptoms at a particular time of the day or in different positions
of the body, the most probable causes of the disease,  &c. must
not  escape our notice,  so that the nicest  peculiarities  of this out-
wardly reflected image of the innate power,  may  stand livingly
and  distinctly before the mental eye of  the physician.   And  he
 may thus the more safely select a remedy indicated in the whole
 of the symptoms by its pure  effects  on the healthy  human
 organism, which  will by removing these outward  perceptible
 symptoms of  the disease, at the same  time extinguish and de-
 stroy the internal changes; for it is not to be supposed that after 
HOMOEOPATHY.
25
the removal of all the symptoms  of disease, and  of the whole
compass  of perceptible  incidents, any thing but  health  can
remain. In thus investigating disease, every internal case shows
itself as a peculiar one, yet never in all the nice shades described;
and hence it is evident, why Hahnemann  entirely rejected the
classification  and nomenclature of diseases of the  old  school,
when the  curative treatment was  to  be based on such  names,
and  valued them only as a readier means of illustration  and
review.   Although it is true, that the exciting causes of disease
do not remain mechanically, but for the most part disappear
with their effects—mechanical and chemical irritations excepted
—and on that  account also do  not admit of medical treatment,
since sex, age, manner of living, state of the weather, etc., im-
press upon their products a peculiar character.  Yet homoeopathy
requires nevertheless a rigid observance of these signs of disease,
in the investigation of a case, since experience has taught her
that the right choice of a remedy, in many cases, depends solely
on this knowledge, which often  also leads to the specific for the
case in hand.
  When the physician has obtained,  in this way,  a correct and
distinct image of the disease, he must select, according to the
principles before  mentioned, among  those substances, the pure
effects of  which are accurately known, one which  will affect a
healthy person in a manner as similarly as possible; that is, one
which  will  excite in him symptoms very similar to those  pre-
sented by the disease to be treated.  In administering the medi-
cines, the following rules must be observed : First, the medicine
must be given in very minute doses, whereby an unnecessary and
tedious delay in  the recovery  is avoided; indeed, according to
the views of Hahnemann, a dose can be scarcely so small as not
to relieve, overcome, nay perfectly cure  and annihilate, an  ana-
logous disease.  This is clear  and obvious, and  until now an
almost universally unheeded law of nature; which indeed could
not have been discovered sooner, so  long as there was no  other
way of investigating the effects of  medicines discovered, which
was reserved solely for homoeopathy, the law  of nature—that  a
       4 
INTRODUCTION.
weaker dynamic affection in the living organism, will be effaced
durably bv a stronger, when the latter (in a manner deviating
from  it) is very similar to  the former  in  its expression.  This
depends on  the fact, learned from experience, that  the  human
body  is much more easily excited by medical substances,  and
to a change of condition by them, than by  morbid, noxious  and
contagious matters; or, what amounts to the same, that the mor-
bid, noxious matters possess a force subordinate and conditional,
but the remedial agents, an absolute, unconditional, and  greatly
preponderating power, in changing a  diseased state of the human
body.  This law of experience has been gradually, and by long
continued observations,  established;  and has at  the  same time
contributed  more and more to  the  diminution of the doses of
medicine, which were much too large, and in many cases followed
by an unnecessary aggravation of the disease: and also to strip
the material  itself  more  and more, and  thereby develop  its
dynamic, spiritual virtue.  Hence altogether has arisen, from a
view of the  position of medicine hitherto, and the calculations
of ordinary life, a minuteness of dose that borders on  the  in-
credible, the inexplicable,  even  on the ridiculous;  and only
overcomes all prejudices  by the fact, that the efficacy of these
minute doses is being daily established by experience.
  A second rule in the administration of homoeopathic medicines
is: Only to give a single article at a time; because every medicinal
substance was separately tested on the healthy subject, and also
because the effect of two medicines given at once become alien-
ated, modified, and even annulled, or  a mixture of the two is occa-
sioned,  the  pure effects and true properties of which,  in  the
diseased organism, cannot be ascertained, unless an experiment
should be first  made with the medley on the healthy body.   As
yet single  substances  enough present themselves, whose pure
effects it has not  hitherto been  possible  to  investigate.   In
either case, the administering of two remedies at once in a disease
would produce  more harm  than benefit, and therefore  it is in-
cumbent strictly to obey this law;  and likewise, because it has
given evidence that in very many cases  a single  article  suffices 
HOMCEOPATHY.
27
for the removal of a recent disease, otherwise very similar, im-
perceptibly in a few hours,  which,  when somewhat older, would
require some days for its removal.   But where one medicine is
not sufficient for the  complete cure of a  disease,  which is pro-
bably  the case in all chronic affections, after allowing full time
for the action of the first remedy, another suitable one, nearest
in analogy to the existing  state of the disease, must be given,
followed, if the patient be not fully relieved, by a third; and so on,
till the last traces of indisposition  be obliterated.  It is seldom
the  case, that where several medicines are found  necessary in
succession, for  the  cure of a disease, the  last article will be
again  the most suitable one, since almost always the group of
symptoms is so changed, that another remedy is more appropriate.
   A third very important rule in homoeopathy is: Not to admi-
nister a second dose of the same  medicine,  or another suitable
one, before  the  time of action of the first is fully past, that is,.
till it  has accomplished all  that it  is capable of.  This duration
of action extends,  as experiments on the  healthy have shown,
for a length  of time, and in the diseased organism  still longer
the  more suitable the medicine selected; which in the first mo-
ment  of complete  spiritual development,  points out where it
comes in contact with the  morbid  focus, in which the suscepti-
bility for its reception and assimiliation is at the greatest, wherein
 the reaction of the body (opposing action of the vis vine)  is ex-
 cited, and manifests a strife so much the more powerful against
 this heterogeneous irritant of the  organic frame, in order  to re-
 move it as speedily as  possible.   When  once this activity, this
 resistance, this opposing action of the living  power, is aroused,
 it does not, after the removal of the medicinal irritant, soon re-
 turn to its former slumbering state, but continues to be  active,
 in order to restore the  equilibrium of disturbed  organic life, in
 the point once  assailed.   This rule, first instituted by Hahne-
 mann,  has  of late, even  by himself, undergone modifications,
 to  which the so much dreaded  Cholera essentially aided.  In
 this rapid  disease, which  often proves  mortal in a few  hours,
 it was painful for the homoeopathic physician to see the disease 
28                     INTRODUCTION.

become more and more violent, without being able to check it,
for, according to the earlier views, the medicine  had not  com-
pleted  its action.  Necessity exculpated many, and hence it was
also that physicians who used the remedy, which they judged to
be best adapted to the case, gave it in frequently repeated doses,
to their confiding patients.  Even Hahnemann himself, in this
fearful disease, ordered  Camphor internally  in very frequently
repeated doses, and also externally to bathe the extremities. From
this time forward the homoeopathic physicians made use of this
practice in other diseases, and none complained of any disadvan-
tage resulting therefrom. This practice requires some limitation
in chronic  diseases, where  the repetition of doses  are at  least
not called for so often, as in the acute and highly acute diseases.
  After this  accurate statement of the most important principles
of homoeopathic treatment,  I will now notice  the other modes of
administering medicines, so that the reader may be  able to com-
pare them  with these.   According to  Hahnemann's views, and
after the manifold experiments and observations instituted with
Homoeopathy, and the experience drawn from  them, she (Homoeo-
pathy) remains the most important, since, by  virtue of her choice
of the  remedies according to similarity of symptoms, the seat of
the disease must be at all times found, and met in every point;
it follows, consequently,  that she understands how to choose, for
each individual case, the specific, direct, safe, speedy and lasting
curative medicine; and is  therefore rightfully entitled to the
name  of a specific method of cure.   The second  mode of ad-
ministering medicine in  disease is  the allceopathic and hetero-
pathic, which without any particular  reference to  the peculiar
morbid conditions of the body, attacks the parts most free from
disease, in  order to lead off the  evil through these, and remove
it from the body.   This is  not a  conducting  off of  any material
morbid matter, which indeed it was in early times supposed to
be, but an auxiliary method  of cure by derivation, in which
nature sets the example in her efforts to restore  her diseased
organism:  to throw off fever, for instance, by sweat  and urine,
pleurisy by bleeding at the nose, sweating, and expectoration of 
HOMOEOPATHY.
29
mucus; other diseases by vomiting, diarrhoea, hemorrhoidal dis-
charges, &c.;  or by  abscesses and ulcers,  which  nature  sets
up  in  parts distant from the seat of the evil.  It may be called
an imitation, an indirect method of cure, as  the  vital powers of
the patient are reduced  by the application of  stronger, more
active  irritants, at a distance from the seat  of disease; and on
organs least allied to the part affected, by producing evacuations
of various kinds, in order simultaneously to remove the evil. This
allceopathic method of cure seeks, by this imitation, to  excite in
the human system, in parts least disordered, and best able to bear
medicinal disease, powerful new symptoms, (for which they give
massive doses of medicine,) which under the appearance of Crisis,
and under the form of secretions,  overcome and carry off  the
primary disease, thus counteracting its course and determination.
Her near to aud apparent conformity with nature, is the antago-
nistic method  of cure.   The third and only remaining method
of practice, and except the two mentioned, the only possible way
of administering medicine in sickness, is the antipathic, enantio-
pathic,  or palliative,  which consists  in administering against
every troublesome, prominent symptom of the disease a medicine,
which, it is known, will produce the direct  counterpart of the
symptom to be overcome, and from  which afterwards the most
speedy (palliative) relief is expected.  Thus, for instance, this pal-
liative practice prescribes strong doses of Opium against pains of
every kind, since this medicine speedily benumbs the sensibilities;
and in like manner this medicine is prescribed against diarrhoea,
as it speedily checks the vermicular motion  of the bowels,  and
thereby induces constipation; also against wakefulness,  because
Opium suddenly brings  on  a benumbing,   stupid sleep.  This
practice likewise directs purges, when the sick have for  a length
of time suffered from costiveness and constipation; also  to warm
the patient  immediately, when he complains of chilliness  and
want of vital heat, by placing him in a  warm bath; those debili-
tated from weariness, are permitted to drink  wine, whereby they
will be in a moment enlivened and refreshed, &c. However, this
method is the least correct, as it only takes into view one single 
30
INTRODUCTION.
symptom, and consequently attends to but a small part of the
whole; hence it is evident, no help for the totality of the disease
can  be expected; on the contrary, after a relief of very short
duration, a greater aggravation of the symptoms  so  palliatively
quieted follows, and indeed a deterioration of the whole disease.
This method of cure is most admissible in those cases, in which
diseases suddenly affect persons previously healthy, and are mild
—but certainly not in chronic complaints—or when the disease
is incurable by the physician,  and his chief object is to afford
the patient momentary relief of  his sufferings.
   The progress which homoeopathy has  made since its origin,
especially during  the last  quarter of a century, may well be
called extraordinary;  for before that time, it was almost ex-
clusively in the hands of Hahnemann, who could not possibly,
however, himself do all that was necessary  to bring to full  per-
fection this blessed method of cure, designed for the happiness
of all mankind.  From  that time forth the older and younger
physicians  have turned  their attention to it, and according to
their ability have directed  their  efforts towards its completion,
yet still there may be' required many generations before it shall
have  attained perfection.  This  conviction should nevertheless
urge the advocates of this doctrine to labor the more diligently
to hasten this desirable object.   Much  has  already been accom-
plished, by words as well as by deeds, for now one, now another,
has pointed out the way, in which homoeopathy should be man-
aged, if it is to be still  more and more prosperous.  A number
of treatises by men of great mental ability, on different objects
serviceable to homoeopathy, have given instructive hints, in the
numerous communications of successful cures with this method:
the latter very often tell us, that disease was not  merely aggra-
vated by the  old system of cure,  but according to the confession
of physicians themselves, have thereby  been  rendered incurable
What  a triumph for this  youthful doctrine, which can  oppose
scarcely half a  century to  the  almost three thousand  years of
her elder sister, that she proves beneficial  where the other is
at the limit of her skill.  Is this  no evidence  of her practical 
HOMOEOPATHY.
31
usefulness, of  her  pre-eminence?  She  desires no judgment
whatever according to the mere letter, from  a superficial, tran-
sitory view, but she demands to be strictly judged  according to
results, and therefore  calls on every one, who is disposed to ven-
ture on the  earnest scrutiny: Make it close, but make it suffi-
ciently close, and you will find me thoroughly established !  In-
deed, it is not otherwise possible rightly to understand and judge
of homoeopathy, than by its results;  for she, with every other
experimental science, is only  to be  inquired  of by experience,
where she at  all times gives the same results;  while  judged from
theoretical  grounds (which however always depend on the indi-
vidual  opinion  and views of the critic), she  often gives  quite
contradictory judgments.  I remember  well what happened to
the deceased  erudite professor of morbid psychology, Heinroth of
Leipsic, and the deceased city physician, Messerschmidt of Naum-
burg, who where intimate friends, and made a joint  promise that
they would overturn homoeopathy both theoretical and practical.
The theoretic Heinroth  appeared to have effected this fully; on
the contrary, the practical Messerschmidt, from a Saul became
so thorough  a Paul, that from  that time  forth he treated  his
patients in no  other  way than  homoeopathically, whereby  the
former friendship of the two men suffered a  significant check.
And thus, homoeopathy,  in defiance  of the  numerous literary
attacks  which  she  endured, in  greater number formerly than
recently, has marched calmly on her self-beaten way;  and by
her persistence hitherto, we judge that she will attain  to a con-
sideration more consistent with her civil and state rights, on an
equality with the older  practice, which until now hat been alto-
gether  impracticable; since for  a  long time she has not been
recognized, in medical transactions,  as  worthy of consultation,
or deserving  of public appointment to any office of city or state.
This condition  of things cannot continue long, for the number
of her adherents and advocates increases daily;  and her exten-
sion is not  bounded by  Europe alone, but  keeps  equal pace in
all parts of the world, and will even be outflanked  by America,
which can readily be  demonstrated, since this part of the world 
32                     INTRODUCTION.

is not under  the  pressure of a mass of petty laws, but science
and art are permitted to extend  themselves in  every direction,
without fear  of being stretched on the bed of Procrustes.  In a
great measure it is a mistaken  love of  truth, that  urges tho
physicians of the other party, continually to oppose new obstacles
to the progress of homoeopathy, since it bluntly intrudes upon
their habits  of thought, investigation, and treatment.
   A few words now on the defects with which homoeopathy has
been unjustly reproached.   It is said of her, that she lacks both
science and rationality, and even Hnfelaud, her most moderate
antagonist, assigns her a subordinate rank in modern medicine.
Were she  deserving of this reproach, then should she of right
forfeit a station in the ranks of medical science.  But the greatest
part of the censures obliquely cast upon her, rests chiefly on entire
ignorance  of her character, upon a judgment proceeding from a
wrono- point of view, and on intentional  misrepresentation.  I
showed above, in what manner Hahnemann discovered the chief
axiom :  Cure like with like;  in what manner he built upon this
certain and sagacious observation of nature ; how all that he did,
 in order to the establishment of this principle, united to attest
 for him still new confirmations  and results. Consequently this
 method of cure must rest on a firm basis, recognized by nature's
 law, act with it, and enjoy accordingly  a scientific  union  and
 consequence, which no other method of cure can easily disturb.
 That all this could only have been attained by an accurate knowl-
 edge of each  separate branch of  medicine, and  of the natural
 sciences generally, as with the complete  harmony of these, must
 be evident to any one. And he who with calm and unprejudiced
 view, without preconceived opinion, will submit homoeopathy to
 proof, will certainly at  the conclusion be obliged  to say:  that
 she can by  no means dispense with the study of medicine, and
 the preparatory instruction of every physician in the essential
 auxiliary  sciences, as anatomy,  physiology, physics and chemis-
 try, pathology,  dietetics,  &c,  and is therefore  in  no respect
 behind the  older medicine, and claims at least as much scientific
 knowledge as that.  In the strictest sense of  the word, it is an 
HOMOEOPATHY.
33
empiric method of cure, but does not rest on that gross empiri-
cism, which is made use of in the old school; after all the known
remedies  have been  fruitlessly employed, the physician  then
experiments with an article little known, or enters on his irra-
tional treatment on mere conjecture.  Homoeopathy, on the con-
trary, acts circumspectly and honestly, according to  a method
clearly understood, a method founded on  the  purest experience
(empiricism).  That a  method of cure resting entirely on expe-
rience, should not have attained  the greatest possible  perfection
in half a  century, may be easily conceived; as  indeed the old
school of  medicine, in  a period of nearly  three thousand years,
cannot boast of such unanimous consequences  and striking effi-
cacy in  the most frequent and violent diseases,  as can homoeo-
pathy.—To the physicians of the old school,  homoeopathy will
point out a very limited sphere  of action, which has even  been
occasion of reproach, and imputed as a fault.  Were  the limits
within which she is capable of acting, really so narrow, she would
not have made so many epochs in medicine; but her efficiency,
so often demonstrated, even in cases, where, in allceopathic  prac-
tice, every hope of recovery had vanished, refutes this charge of
itself, and shows, that they who cast the reproach, were ignorant
of this new doctrine, and  never  practically proved it at the bed
of sickness.  But let  homoeopathy be tested in a practical  man-
ner, and experience will soon  teach, that her sphere  of action
cannot  be confined  to prescribed  limits, and  the  allegations
against her must be left more and more in the distance; as her
curative powers are not confined to dynamic sufferings alone, but
extend to those which heretofore, and in the view  of the old
schools, belong to the department of surgery.  If the ruling  prin-
ciple be correct—and abundant experience shows it to be  so—
then her  inefficiency in many cases cannot be  imputed  to her
fundamental axiom, but to the want of an adequate number of
medicines, the true virtues of which had been  tested;  in a word,
to the present incomplete state  of the homoeopathic discoveries,
and also to the external circumstances, that are  unfavorable to
the  administration of homoeopathic medicine.   To  this latter
       5 
34
INTRODUCTION.
belongs especially the disobedience of the sick, and of the per-
sons who have  charge of the diet, who often have too little
knowledge properly  to  attend to it, and are also frequently
wanting in good will to follow  the  dietetic directions of the
physician; not unfrequently, too, there  is a want of^moral cour-
age, in continuing that which they have  begun with  good inten-
tion.  May it  not also be possible, that the  physician  himself,
since he is but a man, may sometimes deceive himself, and select
an unsuitable  remedy ?   The  inefficiency existing  may also be
charged,  not  so much to homoeopathy, as to the unfavorable
operation of external circumstances, which deduce nothing from
her as a science.  The idea that it is a poisonous  practice, exists
only in the heads of uncultivated or malicious men, and there-
fore  merits no reply: and there  is as  little need to contradict
the accusation, that  her doses are equal to nothing; because a
little  familiarity with her principles, and some practical trials
at the bedside of the patient, sufficiently refute this calumny,
even if a satisfactory explanation of the operation of this law of
experience  were impossible.   Should any one, nevertheless, be
still  dissatisfied, he  may test it  by administering  larger doses,
for the exercise of homoeopathic practice is not bound by the
doctrine of doses, but by the correct choice of remedies according
to homoeopathic principles; he may therefore traverse once more
 the same practice, which,  if willing  to  be informed by the
 experience of others,  he  might have spared himself.
    And thus nothing stands in the way of homoeopathy, which
 can limit  her further extension,  or exclude  her  from the ranks
 of science, as neither dictatorial sentences nor celebrated authori-
 ties in cases,  where investigation  and calm proof are concerned,
 are of any value,  or can be  of  the least hindrance.  Opinions
 and theories, learned high sounding hypotheses, and disappointed
 attempts at explanation, are influential  only, where laws derived
 from experience are  opposed by experience, and avail nothing
 against an eternal  truth resting on  rock-founded  principles;
 but, on the contrary, tend  only to their greater consolidation,
 confirmation,  and perfection, without inflicting the slightest in-
 jury on the inmost life of an immovable truth. 
                      SECTION FIRST.
     REGIMEN OF THE SICK DURING HOMOEOPATHIC TREATMENT.

   The general rule to be observed is, that patients should par-
take of light, digestible, nourishing food, to satisfy hunger; and
of such drink as nature requires  to  allay thirst;  and  abstain
from everything of a medicinal or injurious nature.
   In acute or febrile diseases, only the lightest and most simple
kinds of nutriment are proper, viz :
   Pure cold water in preference  to all other drinks; or water
with the addition of some sugar, raspberry or strawberry syrups,
or quince and apple jelly prepared without spices. Barley-water,
rice-water, thin oatmeal gruel, panada, gum Arabic water, whey,
milk and water, preparations of arrow-root, sago, tapioca or the
so-called " farina", which is nothing but wheat-grits without the
hull; all these without any other seasoning than a little salt  or
loaf sugar, or one of the syrups mentioned.
   Toast-water,  provided the toast is  made  from stale bread,
either  home-made or from bakers who make  use  of  neither
potash, sala;ratus, or alum; the slices ought to be thin and tho-
roughly toasted, but not too brown, and never black.  To make
a good toast-water, pour boiling water  on the toast while hot
and let it stand.
   Ice-water  is  often  injurious and increases  the thirst.   The
water, after being filtered if impure, should be cooled if possible
without  putting the ice in it.  If this cannot be conveniently
done, put a lump of ice  in the water and take  it out again  as
soon as  the water is sufficiently cooled.
   Most  kinds of ripe succulent fruits,  possessing little or no
acidity,  fresh or  prepared by cooking,  and eaten in moderate
quantities; as ripe grapes, sweet apples, peaches, raspberries.
   Most kinds of dried fruits; as apples, quinces, peaches, cher-
ries, prunes, dates, figs, raisins,  currants, almonds, &c.
                             35 
36
HOMOEOPATHIC DIET.
  All imported dried fruits,  especially raisins, figs, kc, ought
to be well washed before they are used, first in cold and after-
wards in warm water.
  Sweet oranges with a thick soft peel are allowed, but those
having a thin, leather-like peel,  and all decayed, spotted,  and
sour ones, ought to be avoided.
  With regard to apricots, nectarines, plums, gages, watermelons,
cantaloupes and cherries, the  physician should be consulted.
  No fruit whatever should be used in cases of colic, diarrhoea,
dysentery or cholera.
  When the more violent symptoms of acute disease have sub-
sided, and the appetite calls for  more substantial food, a wider
range may be gradually taken in the choice of aliment, and all
the articles used which are allowed in chronic or long-continued
diseases, viz:
  All kinds of light and not  too fresh bread, and plain biscuit
containing no potash, soda, alum, or other similar ingredients;
cakes made of meal, eggs, sugar, and a little butter; buckwheat
and other cakes not raised with fermenting powders; light pud-
dings and dumplings of wheat, farina, wheat grits, rye, Indian
meal, rice,  oat-meal  or  bread, without wines, spices,  or  rich
sauces; hominy, farina,  Indian mush, groats  and pearl barley,
boiled with water, milk,  or soup.
  About using hot corn consult the physician.
  Potatoes, turnips, carrots, beets, salsafie, artichokes, spinach,
cabbage, cauliflower, green  peas  or beans; and  in some cases
also, tomatoes, egg-plant, asparagus, squashes, cucumbers, mush-
rooms, dryed peas, beans, especially lima-bcans, lentils, millet,
green rye, &c.
  Milk, raw or boiled, fresh buttermilk,  whey, milk posset;
but care should be  taken not to use milk from cows poisoned
with slops from distilleries.
   Ice-creams with the syrup  of  strawberries  and that of other
allowed  fruits, and  not flavored with  aromatics nor colored
with cochineal or other  injurious drugs.
   Pure plain chocolate or cocoa, and in some cases weak black tea. 
HOMCEOPATHIC DIET.
37
  Butter, free from any rancid or unusual taste, cream, cottage
cheese, milk cheese, curds, and  other simple  preparations of
milk, plain  custards, pure sweet olive oil.
  Raw or boiled eggs and egg-tea, except in diarrhoea.
  Soups and broths of  animal and vegetable substances else-
where allowed, seasoned with a little salt only; beef tea, mutton
broth, and chicken water after having been  boiled for at least
half an hour.
  Beef, mutton, all kinds of tongues, venison and wild  game,
the lean part of ham, pigeons, chickens and turkeys;  the latter
only in the winter season and not in all cases.
  Fresh perch, rock, sea-bass, and small creek  fish;  salt shad,
mackerel and salmon after being well soaked or par-boiled.
   Oysters,  raw, roasted in the shell, or boiled in soup.
   Salt, and also sugar or molasses, may be  used, but always
with great moderation.
   Should any of the allowed articles  of diet disagree with the
patient, on account of some constitutional  peculiarity, or the
nature of  the disease, they should be  avoided  by him, though
perfectly wholesome for others.
   The patient should  not overload his stomach, nor  oppress it
with various or incongruous dishes.  The demands of the  appe-
tite for solids are to be satisfied at stated and not too frequent
periods, and at no other time.
   Regularity in the time of eating is of great importance.
   The  diet of children at the breast should not be changed
 during their sickness;  but in such cases, that of the mother
 should be regulated according to the preceding rules.

                  ALIMENT  FORBIDDEN,
          Unless especially allowed by the  Physician.
   The flesh of all young animals, and particularly veal; geese,
 tame ducks; the liver,  lungs or tripe of animals, turtles, terra-
 pins, eels, crabs, clams,  old  smoked  salt meat, sausages, mince-
 pies, rancid butter, strong cheese, lard, fat pork, roast pig, fried
 oysters. 
3S
HOMOEOPATHIC DIET.
  Food prepared from blood and much animal fat.
  All highly seasoned soups, sauces, drawn butter, peppcrpot.
  Cakes prepared with much fat or with aromatics; pastry, pies,
honey,  and all  kinds of colored confectionary; all kinds  of
candies, excepting rock and barley sugar.
  All  kinds of  nuts and  fruits not  mentioned amongst  the
allowed articles.
  Vinegar of all kinds, salads or cucumbers prepared with it;
pickles  prepared with spices or greened with copper; parsnips,
parsley, celery, radishes, horse-radish,  garlic, onions; all kinds
of pepper, catsups,  mustard, saffron, nutmeg, ginger, lemon or
orange peel, vanilla, laurel-leaves, bitter almonds, peach kernels
or peach leaves, cloves, cinnamon, allspice, fennel, aniseed, sage,
thyme,  mint, &c.
  All kinds of distilled and fermented  liquors; coffee and green
tea : lemonade and drinks prepared  with acids.
  All natural and artificial  mineral  waters.
  Colored toys, if the colors are not fixed, are  on all occasions
to be withheld from children.
  All  perfumery, particularly musk,  hartshorn,  camphor, bac-
cioli, Cologne water,  Kau de Luce, bay rum,  or other  aromatic
waters,  flowers used for their odor,  cosmetics and tooth-powder
must be avoided.
  Tobacco, if used at all, should be used very moderately.
  Every medicine, excepting those prescribed by the physician,
ought  to  be avoided;  not only all medicines  procured at  the
shops,  and all such as are empirical,  but every description of
domestic medicines, as all  manner  of  herb teas, syrups, medi-
cated poultices and irritating or medicinal substances applied to
the skin.
  Blood-letting by the lancet, or by leeches and cups, and laxa-
tive injections,  except those of cold or lukewarm water, are like-
wise forbidden.
  The cure is disturbed  by cold or hot baths, especially baths
impregnated with herbs, sulphur, and other medicaments.
  Linen, cotton,  silk or leather, worn next the skin, is  prefer- 
       ADMINISTRATION OP HOMCEOPATHIC MEDICINES.    39

able to woolens, excepting for persons much  exposed to the
weather, or for little children.
  The patient should,  if possible, use moderate exercise in the
open air for an hour or more daily;  and his chamber should be
well ventilated every day.
  Recovery is frequently dependent on a good moral regimen.
  Labor, which gives the  mind the proper direction to useful-
ness, while it exercises the body, should be daily used in chronic
diseases as far as the strength will allow of it.
  Homoeopathic medicines should not be  t ken too soon after
eating; and for about half an  hour after taking them the patient
had better  abstain  from  eating  or the use of tobacco, and, if
possible, from much mental or bodily exertion.
   The medicines are to be kept in a dry and not too warm place,
free from odors.
                    SECTION  SECOND.
          ADMINISTRATION OE HOMCEOPATHIC MEDICINES.

   Every medicinal substance heals a determinate case of dis-
ease, therefore one ought never intentionally to interfere with
another.
   To obtain its peculiar virtue, each article must be given in a
definite dose.  I  have observed with great circumspection and
accuracy for years past the different views and assertions of old-
school as well as homoeopathic physicians in respect to the doses
of medicine and their administration in diseases; and not merely
observed, but have myself tested them, and have arrived at the
firm conviction, that neither the lowest nor highest, but  gene-
rally the medium  grades of attenuation of homoeopathic  reme-
dies, are the most beneficial;  and after numerous experiments
have  returned to the conclusion, whence I had  started  at  the
commencement of my practice 30 years ago.  And since  the
virtue and efficacy of every article depends on  the degree of 
40     ADMINISTRATION OF  HOMCEOPATHIC  MEDICINES.

attenuation, and its adaptation to the  disease, I have with each
article marked that which I have found, after  long experience,
to be most effectual, opposite the disease described.  The  more
irritable the constitution of the patients, and  the more severe
the disease, so much the more speedily and powerfully does the
remedy act; hence quickest  in children, and proportionately in
females, more  slowly in adults, and most slowly in persons ad-
vanced in  years.  Therefore children  require the most minute,
adults the  strongest, but  the aged,  being usually more feeble,
require somewhat smaller doses than younger persons.
   Each medicine, when clearly indicated in the existing disease,
soon occasions a visible aggravation of the sufferings,  but which
is only the conflict of the remedy with the disease, soon passes
off, and need excite no apprehensions whatever.
   Most medicines will be most safely  administered in the even-
ing at bedtime, either  in the dry state,  or mixed with a  little
water. Some few articles  are exceptions to this rule,  and these
operate more  mildly and with less  general  disturbance when
taken  at another time  of the day,  which will be particularly
specified under each medicine.  With many remedies there should
be no mental exertion for two hours  after  being taken, since the
consequence would be  injurious; nor ought  anything to  be
eaten for two hours after  taking  the medicine, nor any remedy
be taken for two hours after eating.  And  it is also inadmissible
for the patient to read or be otherwise engaged after lying down.
  But one  dose of the medicine  must  be  given  at a time, and
this  must  be  allowed  to  operate, till  the relief following the
apparent exacerbation of the disease has ceased,  or the symptoms
return again, in which  case the same  article may be given the
second, third or even fourth time. This rule always holds good,
but has  recently suffered some deviation,  experience  having
taught, that  in acute diseases the appropriate remedy may be
repeated the more frequently, the  more severe the complaint; for
instance, iu spasms  from  dentition in  children, many active  in-
flammations,  affections like cholera, &c, it may be given every
quarter or half hour. 
       ADMINISTRATION OF  HOMCEOPATHIC  MEDICINES.     41

  In some cases, particularly in children and females, an aggra-
vation  of the disease  does not always follow after administer-
ing the medicine,  but  a calm sleep and consequent relief.  This
sleep is on no account  to be  disturbed.
  Occasionally a medicine causes immediate relief, without any
previous exacerbation; more  frequently, however, it is otherwise,
and there is a slight increase of the disease followed by complete
convalescence.
  On the other hand,  some few articles have occasional alterna-
tions;  that is, they do  not completely cure the disease, but excite
new sufferings different from those already existing.  In such
cases, as soon as this  state  takes place, the remedy opposite to
that first given is to be administered, which will be followed by
complete recovery.
   In some instances it is sufficient merely to smell the medicine.
This is recommended particularly, when the pain is extreme, for
instance of the teeth, the head, &c; when excessive susceptibility
of the  nervous system  requires to be soothed, when the patient's
mouth, in fainting, cannot  be opened; in violent vomiting, when
the stomach is in a very irritable  condition, &c, and generally
in very irritable subjects, and diseases of a high grade.
   In cases when  the  cause  of the disease cannot be  speedily
removed, or violent and sudden symptoms occur, as in teething
of  children, for instance, the most minute doses should be given,
which, if not  instantly, yet soon relieve, and then should be ex-
changed for the next suitable medicine.
   In some severe pains, the action of the remedy may be much
aided and relief afforded, by rubbing the parts, most intimately
connected with the one affected, with a woolen cloth, for instance
the one foot  and arm, when  the  other is affected, the nape of
the neck, when the  throat is affected; the back, when the breast
suffers, &c. This is especially useful at the onset.
    These principles  will always be found suitable  for laymen, in
the treatment of inflammatory diseases.
6 
                    SECTION THIRD.
     ON TnE PARTICULAR TKKAT.MENT OK INDIVIDUAL DISEASES.
  I shall endeavor in every instance  to present fust the case of
disease, then the remedy aud attenuations to be administered,
afterwards, the many deviations and their appropriate antidotes;
and in general communicate to the reader the experiments made
at the bed of sickness since the publication of the former edi-
tion of this work—providing they do not enter too deeply into
medical science, and consequently demand the presence of  a
thoroughly scientific homoeopathic physician.

                            A.
                 ABORTION,
                        Si'e Miscarriage.
                       Abscess.
  A collection of purulent matter, contained in a sac  or cist  in
some part of the body,  the result of diseased  action, is termed
an abscess.
  There are two kinds of abscess, the acute  and the chronic;
the former is preceded by sensible inflammation in the affected
part, which is speedily  followed by  suppuration.   A boil is  a
familiar illustration  of  an acute abscess.   When  suppuration
is about to take place, the character of the pain  becomes changed,
and is more obscure  and throbbing; the swelling is increased;
and after the matter is formed, and when the abscess is near the
surface, there is perceptible  fluctuation.  Rigors  or chills are
also among the first symptoms which denote the commencement
of suppuration.
  When the abscess is matured, the  tumour points, or some
part of the cutaneous surface  over it—generally about the centre
—becomes  more prominent; the skin  over this spot gradually
becomes thin, and finally bursts and allows the contents of the
cavity to be discharged.
  If  the abscess be large and the discharge profuse, and kept
up for a considerable  length of  time, hectic fever,  and other
signs of constitutional disturbance, generally ensue.
                             42 
ABSCESS.   ACCOUCHMENT.               43
  Chronic abscess is generally unattended  by any of the symp-
toms which  precede the formation of the  acute  abscess.   Fre-
quently its existence is not suspected until the attention is called
to it by the  swelling arising from the approach of the matter to
the surface.
   Treatment.—The acute abscess should be poulticed with warm
bread and milk, or flaxseed poultices, and an occasional dose of
Hepar sulph. or Mercurius vivus,  administered for the purpose
of hastening the  process of suppuration.   Opening the abscess
with a lancet to  evacuate  the pus, will frequently shorten the
period of the patient's  sufferings,  especially if it be extensive.
The incision should be made at the most depending point, where
this can be done with safety; when this is  impracticable in con-
sequence of the thickness of the parts between the  matter  and
the skin, the most prominent part  should be selected.
  To accelerate the healing after the matter is discharged, a few
doses of Hepar or Sulphur may be given; or, if the suppura-
tion should  continue for a  considerable length of time, Silicea
and Mercurius  vivus will be useful.
  In chronic abscess, the matter should always be  evacuated as
early as possible by means of the lancet, to  prevent a large accu-
mulation, and avoid the constitutional disturbance so likely to
ensue  from  the  inflammation  following  the  bursting of  the
abscess.
  The opening should be  small, and at the base of the abscess.
The medicines most useful in preventing or removing unpleasant
symptoms, are  Mercurius  vivus and Hepar,  or  in some cases
Silicea, Calcarea, and Phosphorus.
  For induration  and swelling of the lymphatic glands, situated
in the neck,  and under  the chin and ears, Mercurius solubilis,
Dulcamara, Calcarea carb., etc.,  are the principal remedies.

            Accouchment.  Labor.  Childbirth.
  The act of birth, painful as it  often is, belongs  only to the
natural phenomena of life.
  Here I shall treat only of what is unnatural during this event, 
44
AFTER-PAINS.
and first of the severe  labor pains, which mostly attend first
labors  in subjects of very frail constitution,   livery contrac-
tion of the womb for the expulsion of the child, is painful, and
cannot be prevented by medicine;  but the too great sensibility
of the female to pain, indicated by great restlessness and tossing
in bed, and expressions  of despondency, may be alleviated.   In
such instances a dose or two of the  3d atten. of  Coffea cruda
is beneficial.   Xux  vomica  will  be  preferable,  where  the
patient is  much addicted to the use  of coffee as  a drink.   If
by this treatment the delivery does not  advance, a dose of li<l-
htdonna IS. will soon bring it to a happy termination, especially
when very strong labor-pains  are accompanied with tight  press-
ing pain in the whole abdomen, low down, with a feeling as if
everything was being pressed  out.   Fains which  arc too weak
require most frequently a dose of Pulsatilla 12., particularly
when accompanied with great pain in the back, and painful
cramps in the lower limbs.   In entire cessation of labor  pains,
without any other complaint, I have  often seen a speedy change
effected after one or two drops of the Tinct. of Cinnamon.  When
the pains become  less  and less frequent and  weaker,  Sera In
cornutum 3d.  is a remedy of the greatest importance.   But if
the pains  suddenly cease, and alarming symptoms follow, such
as trembling, drowsiness with snoring, &c. Opium is the best re-
medy to bring the diseased condition into a normal state.  The
cramp-like pains, which, without advancing the delivery, cause
the highest degree of suffering, are often relieved by a dose of
 C/iamomifla,  which may be followed in half an hour by  a dose
of Belladonna, if the  former has had  no effect.  But if there
be cramps, with convulsive movements  of  the limbs  or  entire
body, followed by stiffness of the  body and  loss of conscious-
ness, and accompanied by a flow of bright red blood with every
pain, Hyosciamus 6. is the most suitable  medicine.

                        After-Pains.
   These are painful, cutting contractions in the lower part of the
 abdomen, which occur after delivery, and  often last several days, 
AGUE.   AMENORRHCEA.
45
particularly in very sensitive subjects.  They are mostly met
with in those women who have had several children, but seldom
at first  births.   They are most severe while the child is at the
breast.   Usually these  unnatural pains  are  attributable  to  a
general irritability of the system, to  a violent contusion of the
womb, or even to wounds of the  inner and outer sexual organs.
   When  the after-pains are  inconsiderable, they may safely be
left to nature, without medical interference; but where they are
so  severe,  as  to  deprive the patient of  all rest  and  sleep,
 Chamomilla  should be given in  the 3d atten. and will always
be  found useful.   Coffea cruda, 3d  atten.  will be found bene-
ficial when the patient complains that she feels as  if all the
bowels were being  cut to pieces, and she cannot possibly endure
them ;  and also in after-pains from  excitement, from which the
woman often  suffers soon after delivery,  and which annoys her
exceedingly by preventing her from  sleeping.   But if the  after-
pains, as is frequently the case, are  owing to contusion and
 compression, or laceration of the inner and outer sexual organs,
 there  is no remedy equal to Arnica in  the 6. atten.;  which
remedy may also be used externally in those cases in the form
 of a lotion, say five to  ten drops of the tincture in half a tea-
 spoonful of water,  and  rags wet therewith laid upon the parts.
   I must here remind the layman, that a far more tranquil child-
 bed state will be promoted, by giving immediately after delivery
 a dose of Arnica,  with the understanding that no other import-
 ant  complaints require  the administration of another medicine.

                           AGUE,
                       See intermittent Fever.
         Amenorrhcea.  Suppression of the Menses.
   By this term is  understood  the sudden stoppage of  the men-
 strual flow.  This is frequently consequent upon some accidental
 cause, such as exposure to cold or dampness without a sufficiency
 of clothing, particularly of  the  feet;  putting the  feet in cold
 water;  powerful mental emotions,  &c.   It also often  occurs in
 the course of other diseases, especially those of the lungs, liver, 
46
AMKNORRIKEA.
and  uterus, in  rheumatism, &.c.  In  these latter instances the
difficulty can only be removed by the cure of  the  primary dis-
ease, the appropriate  treatment of which will  be  found  under
their respective heads.
   Treatment.—The medicines  which  are  chiefly  valuable in
sudden  suppression from  cold,  &c, are:  Aconite,  Bell ail o una,
Bryonia,  Pulsatilla, Dulcamara,  Sepia, Sulphur, Jjycopn-
dium, Opium,  Veratrum, Platinum, Graphites, China,  Caus-
ticum, and Kali earbonicum.
  Aconite  will have  the  preference  when the affection  arises
from fright, and especially if there be congestion of blood  to the
head or chest, with redness of the face; giddiness, sick stomach
or faintness;  throbbing or acute shooting pains in the  head,
sometimes  attended by delirium or stupor.  When  the suppres-
sion is occasioned by fright, this remedy should be administered
immediately, and  if not speedily followed  by relief,  or  if the
amelioration be but partial  or  temporary, it may be succeeded
with benefit by Lyvopodium, Opium or Veratrum.
  Bryonia is most suitable for unmarried females,  and will be
indicated when  the suppression  is followed  by a  sensation of
swimming  in the head,  with heaviness and pressure toward the
forehead, aggravated by stooping and by  motion;  pains in the
chest; dry cough;  bleeding at the nose;  bitter or  sour eructa-
tions;  pain  in the pit  of the  stomach after eating;  rising of
food; pains in the  small of the back, and also  pains of a draw-
ing character in the lower part  of the abdomen; constipation.
  Belladonna will  be serviceable after  or alternately with Aco-
nite in plethoric subjects, when there is congestion to the head,
bleeding at the nose, and  for most of the symptoms mentioned
under Aconite when the latter is insufficient.
  Pulsatilla, however, is the chief remedy in this affection, and
will afford  relief in the majority of instances,  especially when
the suppression results  from the effects of cold or  chill by ex-
posure  to  dampness, and  the  patient suffers from  headache
chiefly confined  to  one  side, with shooting pains  extending to
the face, ears and  teeth; palpitation of  the  heart; feeling of 
AMEN0RRIICEA.
47
suffocation; flashes of heat;  nausea or vomiting; disposition to
diarrhoea;  pressure in the lower part of the abdomen; frequent
desire  to  void urine,  and  leucorrhcea.   It is best  adapted to
females of a mild, easy disposition,  with  inclination to  melan-
choly and  tears.
   Sepia is also a valuable remedy in this  disease, particularly
in women of a delicate constitution; the suppression attended
by  sallow complexion or yellowish  spots  on the»face; nervous
headache, worse in the morning;  giddiness; toothache; dispo-
sition  to melancholy and sadness;   great liability  to catarrhs,
especially after getting wet; pains in the  limbs as if they were
beaten;  frequent colic and pain in the loins;  nervous debility,
and delicacy and tenderness of the skin.
   Veratrum,  if there be suppression with nervous  headache;
hysterical  affections;   frequent  nausea  and  vomiting; pale,
earthly color  of the face; coldness of the hand and  feet, or
nose;  great weakness  with fainting fits.
   Kali earbonicum,  in cases attended  by difficult respiration;
palpitation of the heart;  disposition to erysipelatous eruptions
and paleness of the face, frequently alternating with redness.
   Sulphur, against  prcssive headache chiefly in  the back part
of the head, extending to the nape of the neck, or one-sided
head-ache, or pain over the eyes, with heat and throbbing in the
head;  heaviness of the head;  confusion of the head;  giddiness;
dimness of vision;  bluish circle round the eyes; pimples on the
forehead and around the mouth,  and red  spots on  the cheeks;
voracious appetite, sour stomach ;  sour and burning eructations;
fullness and heaviness in the  stomach and abdomen ;  constipa-
tion, with ineffectual efforts to stool;  disposition to hemorrhoids;
sometimes loose, slimy evacuations;  spasms  in  the abdomen;
leucorrhcea; numbness of the limbs;  great disposition  to take
cold;  difficulty of breathing; pain  in the loins; great  depres-
sion after  talking;  fatigue and weakness of the limbs; irrita-
bility  of temper, or disposition to melancholy and tears.
   In cases of long standing, especially when occurring in debi-
litated subjects, China, Graphites,  Causticum, Natrum mur., 
48
ANGER.
Conium, Arsenicum and Jodium will be  useful in addition to
Sepia and Sulphur.

                          Anger.

  Violent anger  often produces the most injurious  effects on
the human body,  and even endangers life; and when it occurs
but seldom, there often take place  the  most intolerable pains,
spasms, jaundice,  bilious fever, and  similar affections.
  The most usual symptoms, observed  after violent  anger, are
the following:  general heat, restlessness, trembling,  heat, and
redness of the face, and of the  eyes;  headache, which usually
affects only one side of the head, and is attended with a sensitive
pressing or  squeezing;  when it occupies the whole  head,  the
pain is generally  of  a dull character; palpitation  of  the heart,
bitter, bilious taste in the mouth,  coagulating yellowish green
saliva, fullness about  the  chest; choking, vomiting of green,
bitterish fluids; cuttings in the bowels, diarrhoea,  loss of sleep,
thirst, &c.
   The most simple and best remedy in  these cases is three or
four pellets of Chamomilla in the third attenuation.
   But as chamomile tea is so commonly used as a domestic me-
dicine for all possible cases of sickness, and  is even  daily used
as an innocent drink, it is often  inadmissible  as a remedy, and
if given, only aggravates the disease.   In such cases a dose of
the third attenuation of Cojfca cruda will quiet all  the sufferings.
   But when, as is so commonly'the case at present,  chamomile
tea or coffee arc daily used as diet, and  moderate vexation may
induce the sufferings above mentioned: neither the one nor the
other as a remedy can be of use, but for removing  the sufferings,
in  most cases, Nux vomica in  the dose of 4 to  6 globules, in
 12th attenuation, should be  given.   There are also  some cases,
 where this remedy alone  does  not  suffice,  but lguatia amara
 or Pulsatilla, in the 12th attenuation,  must be used.
   Chamomilla possesses moreover, in the smallest  dose, espe-
 cially when there is excessive pain, or the mind is much excited, 
ANGER  COMBINED WITH FRIGHT.
49
the peculiarity of soothing it, and hence this medicine is highly
beneficial against affections brought on by too great use of coffee.
   Ignatia amara will be particularly serviceable in affections
caused by anger, which are not manifested externally, but occa-
sion silent chagrin, melancholy, or shame.  In such case recourse
may be had to from three to six globules of the 12th attenuation.
On the contrary, if chilliness and coldness follow a fit of anger,
and are very troublesome to the patient, Bryonia in the 12th
attenuation should be given, and followed by Nux vomica, if the
patient is very prone to anger.
   Pulsatilla, in a like dose with Ignatia, is  indicated,  when
vexation frequently arises from trifling causes, and Chamomilla
alone is found insufficient.  It shows itself decidedly beneficial
when  these cases occur in very sensitive, irritable, complaining,
weakly and extremely pale subjects; and the  omset is  marked
with  very moderate  heat, or general chilliness, and  headache.
Also when the following  symptoms are present, there is no me-
dicine so suitable as Pulsatilla:  aversion  to food, bilious eruc-
tations or belchings, in the evening; bitter taste after vomiting
food, especially in the evening; green, bilious-looking loose stools,
particularly at night, which are preceded  by rumbling in  the
bowels, and intolerable, depressing sense of heat during  sleep.
On the contrary, if the anger be connected with just cause of
displeasure, and be settled in indignation, in abhorrence of what
was done; or if the patient hurl  from him whatever is in his
hand, &c, Staphysagria, 12th attenuation, should be given.
   If with the anger an excessive feeling of anxiety is manifested
of which the patient had  shown no previous signs, a dose of Ar-
senicum album will soon relieve him.

               Anger combined with Fright.
   In these cases I  give precisely the same remedies, as against
the different  symptoms above enumerated, according  to  the  re-
spective indications.   But  none of the articles mentioned will
radically cure affections occasioned by anger and fright together.
If both these simultaneously attack a person, and it is designed
        7 
50
ANUS,  ITCHING  OF THE.
to obviate their injurious effects, Chamomilla is not the antidote
of anaer, nor is opium capable of annulling the effects of fright;
but the article capable as well to quiet the undue excitement  of
the nervous and  vascular  system, as to remove the totality of
symptoms resulting therefrom, is four to six globules of the
12th attenuation  of Aconitum napellus.   If this medicine alone
does not relieve the sufferings, Bryonia will occasionally succeed,
especially when  chills alternate with fever.   Veratrum is like-
wise useful here if, together with chilliness, there is  also an in-
describable feeling  of anxiety.

                    Anus, Itching  of the.
   A very troublesome itching interiorly in the rectum, or out-
wardly about the  anus, which is increased on  going  to stool,
sitting, riding, moving  about and  after stimulating food, and
often accompanied  with a more or less severe, pressing,  drawing,
sticking, biting, or burning pain, also with varices (knots on the
veins).
   The disease thus described depends on a disordered condition
of the haemorrhoidal vessels, and requires for its entire removal
a longer treatment than a layman can undertake; and the patient
must have the advice of a prudent, intelligent homoeopathic phy-
sician. If he determines on  this, he should not make use of the
palliatives here recommended, without informing the physician;
he should only use them, when the  sudden attack of this annoy-
ing itching and severe pain compel  him so to do.
   Nux vomica is among the best medicines, provided coffee and
spirituous drinks  are avoided, when this complaint is brought
on by eating too freely, by stimulating drinks, such as wine, bran-
dy, &c.; also when great mental exertion, sedentary  habits, long
continued compression of the bowels, favor its origin, or when
it has been caused by costiveness, worms, and particularly asca-
rides;  and finally, when the pressure of the  gravid uterus on  the
vessels of the  abdomen occasion  it.  If patients complain of
 having knots on the veins of the rectum called piles, with burn-
 ing, sticking pains; if they  have a  feeling of constriction in  the 
ANUS,  ITCHING OF THE.
51
rectum, and complain of a narrowness of the latter on evacuat-
ing the feces, connected with the itching, and with dull stitches
in the small of the back and sacrum; if, on the slightest motion
of the body, a pain as from a bruise is felt in the loins, which
makes them cry out, and allows them to stand and walk only in
a stooping posture: this  medicine in  the dose of three to six
globules in the 12th attenuation is the  most suitable.
   When there are hsemorrhoidal  tumors which  occasion not so
much  a troublesome itching  as a constant  severe  burning,  in
connection with loose stools, great benefit will be derived from
 Capsicum annum in  the 9th attenuation.   Arsenicum album
is also exceedingly valuable in removing burning pains of a simi-
lar kind about and in the anus on going to stool, especially when
the stools are very watery; it is  serviceable, too, in cases of great
emaciation and debility, and especially  if there be sudden sink-
ings of the system. This medicine  is to be given in the dose of
from two to four globules of the 18th attenuation.
   This burning is often so violent that fever is induced, which
is intolerable on  aecount  of restlessness and  anxiety, sleep  dis-
turbed by frights, tossing  about, fearfulness, burning heat, on
lying, as well as every other position being attended with inflamed
haemorrhoidal knots excessively painful.   In such cases I  have
seen Aconite in the 12th attenuation repeated every two, three,
four, and more hours, give the greatest and most speedy relief.
   For alleviatingt his troublesome itching,  and burning pain
about and in the anus, the patient may apply externally without
injury to the action of the internal remedy, a solution of quince-
seed in water, or a suppository  of Cocoabuller.   With the first
the rectum should be bathed several times a day, and a piece of
the latter about as long as one  joint of the finger, and a  little
pointed, may be introduced into the rectum.
   Were  sufferers with this  disease  to bear their pains  with
patience, in order to enjoy relief of so much the longer duration,
 they would find  in Sidphur the certain remedy for the  follow-
 ing symptoms:   constant urging and  pressing to go to stool,
 sometimes diarrhoea  with bloody evacuations, attended with a 
52
APHTn.E.
 pungent sensation of rawness about and in the anus : the tumors
 of  the vessels (piles) itch, burn, ooze moisture, occasion a press-
 in"1 sensation  in the rectum, are liable to come down;  and are
 accompanied with  severe, pungent  pain in the loins, with stiffness
 and a pinching sensation  as if the parts were too short.  The
 most suitable dose is three to six globules in the 18th attenuation.
   But if the  itching  depends on the small,  seed-like  worms,
 called ascarides, other remedies must  be resorted to.  The asca-
 rides are found only in the  rectum,  mostly about the  margin,
 seldom  high up, and by creeping out and in cause  a  trouble-
 some itching  and tickling, severe burning, chiefly in the even-
 ings, discharges  of mucus and blood from the anus,  vagina,
 and bladder;  also straining to make  water, &c.  Depression of
 spirits,  melancholy, tearfulness,  &c, are  common  symptoms.
 These worms  are  very active, mostly white, two or three  lines
 long, and very much resemble the  skippers in cheese.  They may
 generally be observed  in  the stool, and are most apt to effect
 children.  I have with great advantage given as a remedy two or
 three globules of Ignatia in the 12th attenuation, repeated every
 other day.  If after eight  days the sufferings return,  it  may be
 alternated with Valeriana, 6th, and both remedies given alter-
 nately every other day.  But if a reasonable trial do not succeed,
 a weak infusion of Valeriana as  a lavement is occasionally of
 service.   And if all these  means  prove fruitless, then will Sul-
phur and Calcarea carboniea, 18th, alternated every fourth day,
 most probably be found effectual.

              Aphthae.  Thrush.  Sore Mouth.
   This disease commonly makes its appearance about the second
 or  third week after birth,  and commences  by the  formation of
 small, round, white vesicles, which are at first  isolated and scat-
 tered over the  tongue and interior of the mouth; and if not soon
 checked  run together, forming patches, which sometimes become
 ulcerated and  cover the whole of the mucous membrane of the
 mouth,  and in severe cases extend to the  throat.   Though not
 dangerous, this affection is often  painful to the child, and pre- 
         APPARENT  DEATH OF NEW-BORN CHILDREN.       53

vent suckling.  It may also be communicated to the mother, and
cause soreness and excoriation of the nipples, &c.
   The disorder is frequently owing to some constitutional taint,
and consequently we often find it  attacking every child in some
families, while other families always escape it.   It is most gene-
rally, however, produced by want of a proper attention to clean-
liness.  The use of improper food also gives rise to it; and hence
children raised  either  partially or wholly by hand, are more
liable to this affection  than those who are nourished exclusively
by the mother's milk.
   In the treatment of aphthfe, Mercurius vivus,  Sulphur, and
in some  cases Arsenicum, will be required.  The mouth should
be well washed several times a day with cold water.
   Mercurius vivus  should be given  two or three times a day,
when the disease first  makes its  appearance, and  also in cases
where there is much salivation, and the thrush indicate a ten-
dency to ulceration.
   Sulphur should follow Mercurius vivus when the latter fails
to effect a cure after  having been  continued for a few days.
   Arsenicum will be indicated in  bad cases, the two  preceding
remedies having  failed  to check  the  disease, and the  aphthae
assume a livid, or bluish appearance, attended with great weak-
ness and diarrhoea.
   Bryonia and Nux vomica  may also be useful in some cases.
   A common remedy in old-school practice, and  one which is
homoeopathic too in  many cases of the disease, consists of pow-
dered borax and loaf sugar mixed in equal parts and applied to the
mouth of the child, three  or four times a day.   Or a few grains
of the borax may be dissolved  in  a teacupful of water, and the
mouth of the child washed with the solution two or three times
a day. This remedy  should not, however, be continued too long,
lest it prove injurious by aggravating the disease.

    Apparent Death (Asphyxia) of New-born Children.
  This condition of new-born children, observed immediately after
birth, is generally caused by the drawing of the navel-string tight 
54      APPARENT DEATn  OF NEW-BORN CHILDREN.

round the neck by the long detention of the head, and at times
also by tedious labors.  The following are the symptoms by which
it may be recognized : The child's face is very red, bluish brown
or black, and swollen; the eyes thrust forward, the body warm,
red, with  blue spots here and there;  the vessels  of the  cord
puffed up, often visibly pulsating, and pulse still to be felt; there
appears to be a general congestion of blood, and often the  head
is pressed out in length.
  The second form  of apparent death, which occurs after pre-
mature  births, and great  flow of blood from the womb  during
gestation and labor, differs from the first by the following signs :
The whole body is pale,  flabby, weak, not  duly perfected, the
face wan and sunken, the lips blue, the lower jaw hanging down,
the limbs cold,  the  pulse not to  be felt, and general signs of
weakness and  emptiness.
  In neither of these states ought the child to  be  immediately
separated from the mother; the mucus must be cleared from the
mouth,  the  body  rubbed, particularly the breast, with warm
cloths,  but the soles  of the feet and  palms of the hands with a
moderately stiff brush; drop also on the pit of the  stomach one
or two  drops of vinegar,  and gently rub it in  with  the warm
hand.  But  if the navel string has been cut, sprinkle the child
with cold water, or force a few drops of it by a syringe, from a
height of two  or three feet, on the pit of the  stomach.  If all
these means fail, the warm bath should be  tried, while all the
other efforts are to be repeated.
  It is hardly to be supposed  that these trials are  to be made
at once and indiscriminately, but singly and with suitable per-
severance.  If signs of reanimation  appear, these  external means
must gradually be  withdrawn, but so that they may be renewed
from time to time, till the breath is  restored and regular.  The
first signs of life are: weak twitehings  and tremors about the
mouth,  hardly perceptible contractions of  the  muscles  of the
breast, returning warmth and redness of the lips, motion of the
froth about the mouth,  and finally audible breathing.—When
life is restored, one or two globules of Aconite may be laid upon 
      APPARENT DEATH, ETC.  APPETITE.  APOPLEXY.    55

the child's tongue,  especially in the first form.   In the second,
on the contrary, one or two globules of China is preferable.

      Apparent Death (Asphyxia) from vapor of coal.
   The use of firepans in sitting rooms and bedchambers, the too
sudden closing of the  stove-valves, and badly constructed chim-
neys, are often the  causes of apparent or real death.
   If, in a person in this unfortunate situation, there be perceived
natural animal warmth, twitehings of the muscles  and eyelids,
&c.;  if involuntary evacuations of urine or feces have not taken
place, and  the muscles are  not yet rigid or stiff, there is still
hope of resuscitation.   The unlucky  patient must be placed as
soon  as  possible in a pure atmosphere,  the best  is the open
air; but when this is impracticable, for instance in narrow streets,
or the weather will not permit, let a draught of air be invited
by opening the doors and windows; he is  to be undressed, and
placed in a position so as to have the  head elevated, and his face
and whole  body is to have cold water sprinkled or poured upon
it, and immediately rubbed and  brushed without intermission.
It is equally proper to force cold water by means of a syringe at
some distance, on the face and pit of the stomach, and then wash
with vinegar.   But inflation of the lungs is also at times  neces-
sary, with lavements of water and vinegar, holding to the nose
Bweet spirits  of nitre, sal ammoniac, vinegar  of naphtha,  and
the administration  of magnetism.

                 APPETITE, WANT  OF.
                      See Stomach depraved.
                         Apoplexy.
   Against the premonitory symptoms of this complaint, such ag
 great inclination to sleep; general feeling of dullness or  heavi-
 ness; dimness before  the eyes; buzzing  in  the  ears; hardness
 of hearing;  heavy, profound  sleep,  and stertorous breathing;
 frequent  yawning,  and fatigue after the  least exertion; acute
 pains in  the  head; vertigo  or giddiness; fainting;  irritability
 of temper; loss of memory; forgetfulness of words or things; 
56
ARSENIC,  POISONING  BY.
acuteness  of vision or double vision; difficulty of swallowing;
numbness, torpor,  or pricking sensation in the extremities; con-
gestion of blood to the head, with beating of the  temporal arte-
ries;  red  face, quick, full  pulse, &c.;  the following  medi-
cines  have been used with most success: Aconite, Belladonna,
Ignatia, Pulsatilla, Lachesis, and Nux vomica.  Some  of the
most  prominent symptoms for the choice of these, and also other
remedies, which may sometimes be required, will be found under
" Congestion of Blood to the Head", which  see.
   Aconite, in all cases in which there is congestion to the head,
with full, quick pulse; red face; throbbing of the  arteries of
the neck and temples, &c.
   It may be given twice a day.
   Belladonna, after Aconite,  should the latter be insufficient to
remove the symptoms of congestion.
   Nux vomica, against threatened apoplexy in persons of seden-
tary habits, and those addicted to the use of stimulating drinks,
or to  too great indulgence at the table.
   Pulsatilla, in persons of mild disposition, and especially in
females.
   In  the treatment of the disease itself, Nux vomica, Lachesis,
Opium, Ignatia,  Belladonna,  Arnica, and Pulsatilla,  have
proved most serviceable.
   The disease, however,  is one which assumes such a variety of
forms, and is so dangerous  in its  character, that the greatest
attention  and  skill are required on the part of a physician to
conduct it to  a successful issue.  The limits of this work will
not admit  of  a more extended notice of the disorder;  nor, in-
deed,  is that necessary, as the treatment should  in all cases  be
under the management of a homoeopathic physician.

                   Arsenic,  poisoning by.
   White  arsenic is the  most terrible and destructive poison to
the human body.   The symptoms,  which  however are not the
same  in all subjects, are the following: Burning  in  the  throat,
nausea, choking, incessant painful  vomiting; burning pain in 
ARSENIC,  POISONING BY.
57
the stomach and bowels, which is intolerably  aggravated by
taking food or drinks, insatiable thirst, dry tongue, distention or
retraction of the abdomen, black, very offensive stools, depressed
or irregular slow pulse, palpitation of the heart, fainting, occa-
sional burning over the whole body like fire, at times icy cold-
ness, cold sweat, laborious breathing, red or bloody urine voided
in small quantity, change in the expression of the  countenance,
bluish  yellow circles about the eyes, swelling of the whole body,
with bluish water blisters on the skin; loss of strength, delirium,
convulsions, and finally paralysis, insensibility, and death. These
symptoms  may be induced by the vapor of arsenic, or  by the
imprudent use  of articles prepared with arsenic, for instance
colors for painting toys, or  straining variegated paper, such as
mineral-, Swineford-, Vienna- or Paris-green, king's-yellow, &c,
skins of stuffed beasts, &c.
   In such cases, the most speedy treatment is  necessary, and
those who live at a distance  from a physician will be glad to be
made acquainted with the most suitable means  of giving relief.
I consider the admission of this article  into  the  Domestic Phy-
sician so much the more appropriate as the remedies best adapted
to all such unfortunate cases, may be kept in every family, and
used without harm.
   The first thing to be done is, to excite prompt  vomiting, or
to promote that which  has  already taken place.   For this pur-
pose the patient must drink  plentifully of lukewarm water, con-
taining some drawn butter, sweet oil, or sugar, and at the same
time the throat may be tickled with a feather.  This should be
followed by lukewarm, mucilaginous drinks in  large quantity,
such as rich milk, oatmeal gruel,  water  thickened with white of
egg, &c  If even these drinks should  still be vomited  up, and
when the pain, choking and vomiting have abated, let this treat-
ment  be continued several days. The practice of Hahnemann,
in cases of poisoning by arsenic, was, immediately  at the onset: to
 dissolve a pound of scraped soap in four pounds of hot water, and
 give a teacupful, lukewarm, every three or four minutes.  Next,
 whether the bowels were  confined or loose, a clyster every hour,
         8 
58                 ASCARIDES.   ASTHMA.

consisting of milk or oatmeal gruel, or an infusion of bruis- d flax-
seed mixed with plenty of oil.   Lately the Hydrated Ses,p,i-
oxidc of iron has been recommended as the best antidote.  It is
to be obtained at the apothecary's.  When the poison has  been
chiefly counteracted, the  remaining complaints will generally
be removed by a dose of Hpar sulphuris every 24 hours, altern-
ated with Ipecacuanha.  If, however, all  the morbid symptoms
are not removed by these remedies, China  and Veratrum, altern-
ated every six hours, will mostly suffice for their removal.

                       ASCARIDES.
                    See Itching of the Anus.
              Asthma.  Spasms of the  Chest.
  This malady often comes on so suddenly, and depends  on so
many causes, the operation of which can neither be foreseen nor
guarded  against, and comes as well in the  form of a continued
as of an inflammatory and short-lived disease,  that  a  reference
to its treatment in the latter cases, which though not always dan-
gerous, are highly  distressing, may not be out of place.
   1. In hypochondriac and hysterical persons, and those who
suffer from a general morbid sensibility of the  nervous system,
who are  thrown into this state by circumstances of a trifling na-
ture, such as a surprise, &c.; and in which a sudden  sensation
of constriction  is felt in the windpipe, as if the fumes of sulphur
had been inspired, the chest feels contracted or narrowed, so that
breathing  is  accomplished with  difficulty, and by  short inspira-
tions, anxiety and  restlessness, extreme irritability of the  nerv-
ous system, especially as to noise;  loud wheezing, and weeping,
chills alternating with flushes of heat over the whole body, and
perspiration; Coffea cruda, 3d, provided the patient has not been
in  the daily habit  of  using it, should be  given.  But in cases
where coffee is habitually  used, Aconite;  which, if  relief  is not
 obtained in 36—48 hours, may be followed by Mosehus, 3d.
    Often also in spasms of this kind Pulsatilla, 12th, is service-
 able, particularly in persons of phlegmatic temperament, who are
 of a mild disposition and given to grief; in females who menstru- 
ASTHMA.
59
ate irregularly and with pain, and when the symptoms are aggra-
vated with frequent constriction of the chest, and short cough after
eating, particularly after supper;  constriction of the throat in a
horizontal position in bed, when the attack comes on in sleep, occa-
sionally with headache  tearing through the eyes, crawling on the
tongue, cold feet, cold perspiration of the feet, and much belching.
   In robust, strong, plethoric persons, with ardent temperament,
Nux vomica, 12th attenuation, is found  to be more  beneficial.
This latter medicine suits  also, where by  motion and rising in
the morning, and getting into bed in  the  evening, an attack of
suffocation is experienced, and the patient is obliged to sleep in a
sitting posture;  the symptoms are worse  after  midnight, with
dry cough, affecting the head and abdomen, also loathing of food;
rough, dry and  foul taste in  the morning,  heartburn;  a feeling
as if the joints were too closely put together, a pressive stick-
ing pain in  the  region of the liver, stools  infrequent and hard,
shuuning the air, disinclination  for  exercise of mind, and the
patient  feels worst in the morning early.   Aconite is the most
suitable remedy when  congestions of  blood, plethora, suppressed
 discharges of blood, &c, are the exciting causes, and are followed
 by oppression and stitches  in the chest, short dry cough, general
 increased heat of the body, perspiration on the forehead, redness
 of the cheeks,  and by an  implacable perversity of  mind, great
 impetuosity   of  temper,  impatience,  and  frequent  full  pulse.
 This remedy may be  repeated  every  half  hour  or hour.   It is
 also indicated when the attacks are brought on by fright.
    Bryonia alternated with Nux vomica,  when the patient, when
 free from an attack can lie readily on  the right side, but after the
 accession of a paroxysm can  lie only on his back; when there is
 cou<di with  expectoration of  mucus and inclination to vomit  or
 even vomiting, pain under the short ribs, belching with taste of
 food, costiveness, fretfulness, irritability, propensity to quarrel
 and bluster.
    2. In asthma or spasms of  the chest  arising from vexation,
 and presenting the following symptoms:
    A feeling as if the heart were about to be forced out, sense of 
60
ASTHMA.
constriction, as if the chest were pushed inwards, with difficult
inspiration; catarrhal stricture of the neck and chest, with con-
stant inclination to cough arising from the pit of the stomach; a
dose or two of Aconite will be most serviceable, and may be fol-
lowed if  necessary by Chamomilla, 3d.  The latter medicine is
also suitable in the so-called catarrh on the chest of children, with
constant  tickling in the throat, rattling in the  upper part of the
windpipe and in the  chest, violent cough, often in connection
with convulsions and pain in the bowels.  In those  spasms  of
the chest, which follow a fit of anger in persons who are not in-
clined to break out in violence or to act rashly, but who conceal
their chagrin within themselves, Ignatia, 12th, is the most suit-
able remedy.
   3. When the following symptoms occur:
   Spasms of the chest with dizziness and a feeling of weakness
in the head when lying on the back, which is  relieved by sitting
up; tightness of the chest  towards evening with inclination to
sleep but which is prevented by the spasms, cramplike constric-
tive tightness of the chest with agitation of blood, palpitation
and heat of the  heart, on taking a deep breath it seems to strike
against the lower part of the chest,  a sensation as if it could not
be further expanded, Pulsatilla in the 12th attenuation should
be given.
   4.  Ipecacuanha is indicated against the following symptoms:
Occasional discharges of water from the mouth, with nausea
before, and vomiting, mostly of bile during or after the attack;
dry cough, excited by a tickling commencing  in  the upper  part
of the  throat and extending to the extreme branches of  the
windpipe, with  anxious, melancholic or morose state  of mind,
disposition to find fault with everything and  everybody, cramp-
like constriction of the chest, with  panting respiration and pale-
ness of face, anxious gasping for breath and fear of suffocation •
cold hands and  feet;  rattling in the windpipe, as if from mucus
which moved up and down in breathing;  a sensation  as if  one
were  in a cloud of  dust and could not breathe for it.   This
remedy may be given  in the 3d attenuation  either one drop in 
        SUDDEN ATTACKS  OF ASTHMA IN CHILDREN.      61

water or in the form of globules;  children and sensitive females
will be relieved by smelling it merely.  It may be repeated every
two or three hours, as its action is soon over.

          Sudden attacks of Asthma  in children.
   Although it is not advisable for one unacquainted with medi-
cine  to undertake the  management of  this complaint,  yet it
appears to me to be proper, to point out the best mode of miti-
gating the violence of an attack, previous to  the arrival of the
physician.  This  is  the more  necessary, since  the complaint
commonly comes on in the night and very unexpectedly.
   As soon  as the first  symptoms are observed, which usually
consist of a sudden waking up of the child, with anxiety, dull,
hollow, dry cough, want of air, and a shriek, expressive of  fear
of suffocation, give the patient two  or three  globules moistened
with the undiluted Tincture of Sambucus  nigra,  particularly
if the attack  is accompanied by general  dry heat, except of the
face, which, with the hands and  arms,  is puffed up and blue,
with anxious tossing and  throwing about of the arms, drowsi.
ness without  the  ability to sleep, irregular,  small, intermitting
pulse without thirst.   By  this the most  imminent danger  may
 be obviated  at least for a time, till further  means can  be re-
 sorted to.
   Mesmerism has also  been highly recommended in this affec-
 tion,  especially when occurring in children, and the attack is
 sudden and violent.   It should be applied by passing the hands
 briskly over the head, neck, and whole body  to the soles of the
 feet.  A few passes will sometimes allay the nervous irritability
 and the  patient will fall to sleep;  thus time will be gained for
 summoning the physician.

                   ASIATIC  CHOLERA.
                           See Cholera. 
62         BACKACHE.   BLEEDING AT THE NOSE.

                            B.
                   BACKACHE.
                       See Loins, Pain in.
                          BIRTH.
                        Pee Accouchment.
                  BIRTH, PREMATURE.
                        Sec Miscarriage.
                   Bleeding at the Nose.
   A moderate  loss of blood in this way requires little medical
aid, but when it amounts to a real haemorrhage, and  occurs in
weakly persons, children, or  young girls,  it may become dan-
gerous, and render necessary the use of remedies.
   Where bleeding at the nose depends on general excitement of
the vascular system, and the pulse is found to be very full  and
hurried, and there is a rush of blood to the head, two or three
globules of the 12th attenuation of Aconite will be of  service.
   When a tickling in the forehead and at the nose, as from an
insect,  precedes  the bleeding, the nose is hot,  and the blood
flows in a stream, and is of a bright red color and commonly in
male subjects, Arnica is of  special use.  This is also,  the  best
remedy in injuries of the nose  by a knock, fall, bruise, &c, and
should be given internally and applied outwardly. Thus in most
cases of bleeding at the nose it may be  considered  the most
efficient remedy.
   On the contrary, if it  occurs in females who have  already
menstruated,  but very slightly and in shorter time than when
in sound health, especially in  mild, gentle temperaments,  Pul-
satilla, 12th attenuation, is most appropriate.
   In  very irritable,  susceptible persons,  hypochondriacs  and
 hysterial women, where the  whole vascular system is  in agita-
 tion, with general heat, and a thick dark blackish blood is mostly
 discharged,  Crocus, 3d attenuation, two  or  three globules,  or
 a drop in a teaspoonful of water is to be preferred.
    When the blood coagulates as it flows, and hangs in clots; and 
      BLEEDING  OP THE GUMS.   BLOOD,  SPITTING OP.    63

also  in  children  and persons who are predisposed to inflamma-
tions, Mercury, 6th attenuation, will be found most serviceable.
   About 24 hours after the cessation of the flow, it is advisable
to give  China in suitable attenuation,  in  order to prevent its
return.
              BLEEDING OF THE  GUMS.
                     See Scurvy of the Mouth.
                 Blood,  Spitting  of.
   By this term  is to be understood the throwing off from the
 chest, by coughing,  pure blood, or blood mixed with  mucus.
 Sometimes  the discharge comes on suddenly without any pre-
 monition ; at others it is preceded by some or all of the follow-
 ing symptoms: constriction, oppression, tightness, rising heat or
 ebullition in the chest, with difficult breathing, palpitation of the
 heart, anxiety, and short dry cough, attended with  a peculiar
 bloody taste.  Finally, the coughing up of blood comes on and
 continues for a longer  or  shorter time,  and with  longer or
 shorter intermissions.
   For the  prompt removal of these symptoms, two  remedies,
 Aconite and  Arnica, will often be found suitable,  the first par-
 ticularly when there is determination of blood to, and agitation,
 and a feeling of fulness  in  the chest;  palpitation of the heart,
 anxiety and restlesness;  it should be given every hour or two in
 the 6th attenuation, till relief is obtained.  But if this is not soon
 manifest, and the  coughing of blood continues and threatens a
 rupture of the more important vessels of the lungs, Arnica  must
 be resorted to, and  should  be given in the 3d attenuation, and
 repeated every two or three hours.  This remedy is also suitable,
 when the coughing of blood is occasioned by external violence, by
 lifting heavy weights, &c, also in painful  expectoration of blood
 without much effort; and when the clear blood is mixed with
 clots and mucus, accompanied  with feeling of tightness and
 burning in the chest,  pain as  from a bruise in the shoulder
 blades and back, prostration of strength and faintness.—In fre-
 quent returns of this disease, with constant taste of blood, mode- 
64
BLOOD,  VOMITING OF.
rate cough and expectoration of mucus, Ipecacuanha,  3d, every
two or three hours, is an indispensable remedy,  llyoscyamus  i
indicated,  when dry cough, constant tickling in the throat, and
cramps are present.—Arsenicum, 30th, will be  appropriate  if
after the  remedies above recommended, the feeling of anxiety ?
agitation and palpitation continues, and the attack is apt to come
on at night, particularly about midnight.
  In this  disease  it is indispensable that the greatest bodily
quiet, in  the horizontal posture, be  preserved;  the  chamber
should also be cool,  and the use  of cooling,  but not ice cold,
drinks allowed.  The most suitable are water; a little sweetened
raspberry juice; almond emulsion, made of sweet almonds, and
prepared with a little sugar and white of egg;  and water.
  This malady, when of frequent occurrence, is highly dangerous,
in as much  as  it readily  induces consumption;  therefore  the
timely advice of an experienced physician must be sought.

            Blood, Vomiting of,  (Haematamesis).
  The introduction of so acute a disease  into this work will
require no other apology than, that when the physician resides
at a distance, it may end  fatally before  he can be had.  It is
therefore  proper to trust  the laity in some  measure with the
necessary remedies.
  The name of this disease  sufficiently indicates what  is under-
stood by  it.  Vomiting  of  blood  makes  its onset in repeated
attacks, and the patient is  always able to foretell its approach,
by a gradually increased fulness about the pit of the  stomach,
a feeling of weakness, and a sensation of warmth about the heart,
all of which announce it.  The vomiting is accompanied by sick-
ness, pain  in the  stomach  and fainting,  and all food, without
exception, is again thrown up   Not unfrequently, also, there is
a discharge from the bowels of coagulated, black blood, which is
commonly connected with colic  pains, diarrhoea,  or costiveness.
—After an attack of this kind, the patient is left very much
exhausted,  even to fainting,  and has cold sweats.-—The exciting
causes are  especially:  the  too free  use of  stimulating drinks, 
BLOODY URINE.
65
suppression of menstruation in females  and of the  discharge of
piles in men, and external violence in the region of the stomach
or abdomen.
   One  of the principal  and  most efficient  remedies  is Nux
vomica, particularly in  plethoric subjects, and such as have suf-
fered from  costiveness,  and  for a  long time from  disordered
stomach and bowels, attended with violent vomiting.—If, after
giving this remedy, the next attack  is less violent, it serves to
show that it has been  well chosen, and that its repetition is
called  for at the next onset.  But  on the contrary, if the next
attack should be more severe, Arnica will  be  most suitable,
especially if the vomiting is occasioned  by external violence  on
the abdomen.  Where the disease arises from internal causes,  let
Nux vomica and Arnica be alternated as often as it becomes
worse. If there have already been several attacks, and the patient
has become weak, and pulsations at the pit of  the stomach, nau-
sea,  belchings, and  coldness of the body, indicate a fresh attack,
China is  indicated.  On the contrary, Hyoscyamus is  preferable,
when the disease has been brought on by cold, the blood thrown
up is of a brighter red,  there is a rush of blood to the head and
chest, and spasmodic sufferings.
   Regimen:  A  horizontal  position, cool  apartments, free
draughts  of cold spring water,  and buttermilk.
   Once more I earnestly  recommend, to send immediately  for
a  physician; as the directions here given are only for cases of
emergency.
                       Bloody Urine.
   What  is to be understood here,  is sufficiently plain from the
name;  I mean by it that  condition, which requires no previous
examination  of the urine,  but where  every  drop which issues
from the  urethra, is mixed with blood; and which  is often  the
result of external violence  to  the  bladder  or urethra, such as
a  push, fall, bruise, &c, in which case Arnica must be given
in repeated doses internally, and the parts bathed with it extern-
ally. On the contrary,  if the complaint arise in censequence of
        9 
66
BOIL.
excessive indulgence in spirituous and  stimulating drinks, Nux
vomica  is the appropriate remedy.  When the cause is not ap-
parent,  Tinct. sulph. should be given, especially if there is reason
to suppose  it is  owing to  haemorrhoids.  Ipecacuanha is one of
the chief remedies in this disease, where no particular exciting
cause can be discovered,  and no special concomitant symptoms
show themselves.  It may be taken three times a day, and  will
often remove the disease in a few days.

                     Boil (Purunculus).
   This  is a hard, dark red,  very painful, pointed inflammatory
swelling, located in the cellular membrane, and varying from the
size of a hazle nut to that of  a pigeon's egg, exceedingly difficult
to  dissipate,  and often suppurates speedily, without becoming
remarkably soft.  From the point of such tumor a very little mat-
ter issues,  at first mixed with  blood, but in the centre there
remains for some time a core of thick and tough matter.  After
this is discharged, there comes  from  the bottom of the boil,  a
little thin matter,  followed  by abatement of the pain, and the
gradual disappearance  of the  tumour.   Occasionally also the
redness and pain is  lost in the remaining hardness and swelling,
which always give occasion for a renewal of the boil.  The accom-
panying pain then  is pungent, especially on being touched,  as is
often the case with abscess.
    The  best remedy is Arnica,  3d attenuation, one drop in water,
or four to  six globules three or four times a day.  In this  way
boils are prevented  on persons, who are very subject to them,
by frequently repeated doses  of Arnica  at  suitable intervals,
perhaps every eight or  twelve hours,  thus obviating their future
 recurrence.  Occasionally also,  where Arnica has failed, Bella-
 donna  is serviceable in the  12th attenuation.—Where there  is
 a peculiar liability to the return of boils, through  an  inherent
 chronic predisposition,  it  is very often removed  by  Tinct. sulph.
 repeated every  six days.  Against ill-conditioned boils,  threaten-
 ing to run on to mortification, Arsenic, 30th, is the chief remedy. 
BRAIN,  INFLAMMATION  OF TnE.            67
                Brain, Inflammation of the.
  I could not for a moment think of committing to the hands
of the layman the treatment of a disease, so fraught with danger
as inflammation of the brain, and which often assumes such dif-
ferent  forms.  It is  only my design to point out to him the
most constant signs, which will acquaint him in time with his
imminent danger, so that he may not be too late in seeking the aid
of a physician, by which alone a happy issue can be brought about.
   The most  prominent symptoms of inflammation  of the  brain
are : heat of the head with simultaneous coldness of  the limbs,
shining red, puffed face, redness of the eyes, great irritability of
the organs of sense, deafness, drowsiness, delirium, and numerous
spasmodic symptoms.  In children there is generally a  constant
boring of the head into the pillow; great  intolerance  of  odors
and of bright light, or they lie quite still, with a  very red and
swollen face, visible pulsation  of the arteries of the head and
neck, motion of the lips as if about to speak, and snatching  about
with their hands.   And there is likewise excessive  burning heat
over the whole body, without any remarkable thirst.  The pre-
monitory symptoms of inflammation of the brain are not con-
stant, and may just as readily  indicate the onset of another dis-
ease.  They are as follows : rush of blood  to  the  head, altered
state of mind, hastiness,  anxiety, &c.  Yet there often  appears
in this disease a sudden succession of chill,  heat, restlessness,
tossing to and fro, severe pain and heaviness of the head, and
all the signs of congestion of the brain.  The affection  increases
rapidly, and soon  passes  into  unconsciousness, in which the pa-
tient often moves his hand to the head, and delirium soon fol-
lows, which is  at  times  furious, at others  mild.  In children it
 often commences with unusual and uncontrollable weariness and
 headache;  the child is  peevish, lets the head droop, or leans it
 against something, wishes to  lie  down constantly, and only on
 one side, or with his head low ;  if questioned, does not answer
 at all, or after hesitating a long time; these symptoms  are often
 accompanied by vomiting, constant inclination to sleep, delirium,
 twitching of the face, &c. 
68
BREASTS,  GATHERED.
       If the layman is desirous of doing something before the phy-
     sician arrives, let  him,  if there be much  heat, give a dose  of
     Aconite every two hours,  by which not only the congestion  of
     blood to the head and  fever, will be moderated, but the phy-
     sician  as  soon as he arrives will  be prepared  to administer
     another suitable remedy.   If, however, the arrival  of the phy-
     sician should be protracted by unforeseen and unavoidable events,
     and the disease is unchecked,  and becomes heightened, other
     suitable remedies will be  found under the title of " Congestion
     of blood to the Head".  Belladonna, in  a high attenuation, is
     commonly the best remedy in inflammation of the  brain, a few
     globules of which should be given every four or six hours.
       Inflammation of the  brain, from exposure to the heat of the
     sun, occurs with us less frequently than  in hot climates; it is
     most speedily and certainly cured by  frequent small  doses  of
     Camphora, providing the symptoms do not yield to Belladonna.
     Still I  would caution the lay-reader, against giving any medi-
     cines in this form  of disease, except Aconite, unless it be a case
     of the greatest necessity.

                         Breasts,  gathered.
'      The breasts  are often treated very indiscreetly, especially at
     the time when  they  assume  a  greater activity, a higher life as
     it were;  I mean the time after delivery, the period of suckliug
     and of weaning.  During  the period of suckling or nursing it
     frequently happens, particularly in the beginning, that the milk
     ceases all at once,  which may be of serious consequence, not so
     much  to  the child as to  the mother, inasmuch as a translation
     may take place to  the abdomen or brain, which often endangers
     life.   To  prevent this,  it  is highly important  to  endeavor to
     bring back the  suppressed secretion of  milk; which will be  in
     most instances accomplished in a short time by a few doses of
     Pulsatilla.  If taking cold in the breasts give occasion to the
     check of milk, Dulcamara, 8th attenuation, is to be preferred. A
     sudden recession of the milk, however, in lying-in women, where
     no  cause  can be assigned,  and which is  followed  by a violent 
BREASTS GATHERED.
69
burning heat with great thirst, redness  of the cheeks, and con-
gestion to the head, demands the administration of Belladonna,
which, if no alleviation takes place, may be repeated in three or
four hours.  It is likewise serviceable when the secretion of milk
is checked by taking cold, by a knock or bruise, anger, fright, &c.
If followed  by hardness, and suppuration takes place, it is alto-
gether wrong to make use of wet herb poultices, and softening
plasters, of  butter, and the like, by which the breasts are gene-
rally made worse, as well by the dampness as by the liability to
take fresh cold in changing the poultices.  I shall therefore spe-
cify the homoeopathic remedies acknowledged  to be specific in
these cases, and at  the same  time  direct what length of time
must elapse before a new medicine may be given.
   One  of the  most common  complaints at the beginning of
nursing, and which often gives occasion to too early weaning, is
an excoriation and chapping of the nipples.  The efforts  of  the
child in sucking constantly tears open the sore afresh, causes it
to bleed, and  prevents it from healing.  By  degrees complete
suppuration takes place, in consequence of which the nipples are
sometimes totally destroyed, and the mother becomes partly or
entirely incapable of  resuming  the  duty of nursing.  All  the
vaunted remedies for removing this disagreeable as well as pain-
ful condition are useless, or, if they were even adequate, they
are nevertheless so  disgusting to  the  child by their odor, by
neglect of cleanliness, and even their  taste, that it cannot be
induced to  take to  the breast again.
   In these cases Arnica is very often useful. Let 10—20 drops
of the tincture  be mixed with  half a teacupful of water, and the
nipples bathed with this lotion, after each time of nursing; and
before the child is put to the breast again, wash the nipples with
warm water by means of a sponge,  to prevent it from getting
the medicine.   The frequent application of this remedy is neces-
sary, because the sore is continually renewed when the child is
applied.  But in the worst forms of this complaint, Arnica will
be of no further service; such cases  must be treated by internal
remedies,  among which Sulphur, as tincture or in attenuation, 
70
BREASTS GATHERED.
in drops or in globules, has the pre-eminence, and will often
effect a cure in eight or ten days.  If, however, Suljihur should
be inefficient, Calcarea carboniea, 18th attenuatiou, must be
given.  Of late in these  cases  I  have  frequently found Gra-
phites, 18th attenuation, serviceable, particularly when the  in-
flammation about the nipples was very active, aud approached a
rose color.  It is especially valuable in this affection if the woman
has suffered,  in former  years, from scrofulous eruptions;  scald-
head, for instance, and still complains of itching and small scaly
sores on the head.
   Sore breasts, occasioned by bruises,  fright, anger and other
emotions of the mind, will be removed, or at least mitigated, by
the medicines recommended under these respective heads.   But
if, notwithstanding, there remains hardness with pungent,  throb-
bing pains; one  of the remedies directed above will commonly
answer.
   Kri/sipclatous Inflammation and  Swelling of the Breasts
is of common occurrence  in  females, while nursing, and  is  ex-
ceedingly troublesome;  occasionally it is produced by fright, and
a person who has suffered from it once, is very liable to a recur-
rence;  at times it comes on  without any perceptible cause, but
much oftener it is occasioned by deferring too long the application
of the  infant to the breast; or is afterwards brought on, when
from sickness, or other  cause, the child will not take the breast,
and the milk begins to curdle.  A similar condition  often  fol-
lows the weaning of the child.  The breasts  then  abound with
the  nutritious fluid, become distended, hard, and  inflamed; at
some points  matter is  formed and  discharged, while at  others
there remains considerable hardness and inflammation,  which
likewise run into suppuration,  or finally  become  permanently
hard.   In this manner the complaint continues, alternately dis-
charging matter, and inflaming, with much suffering, often for
months, and leaves the breast at last, covered with odious scars,
in part also hardened, and often forever totally  unfit for nurs-
ing.   Quack-remedies given by self-sufficient midwifes, are too
common, and aggravate the suffering greatly, without being able 
BREATH, SHORTNESS OF.  BRUISES.
71
to afford the least relief.  The remedies which have proved most
useful in these cases, are the following:
   If—after a long pause in nursing, or other cause—the breast
begins to get hard  and swollen, and the milk  stagnates in it,
with  incipient redness of the skin, and  pungent pains  of the
affected parts, accompanied by slight feverish chills, loss  of ap-
petite, &c, Bryonia alba, 12th, or sometimes Belladonna, 15th,
will restore the milk in a short  time, and disperse all hardness
and redness.  The action of the medicine, if there  be any im-
provement, may be waited for several days; on the contrary, if
not better in three days, let the other be given, or the first  re-
peated.
   If, however, considerable  inflammation  have already taken
place, a plaster of Elder syrup will  be found exceedingly useful
in affording relief.  In cases still more severe, with erysipelatous
swelling and  inflammation, attended with incipient, or  already
existing suppuration, Phosphorus, 18th, one drop, or a few glo-
bules, will be beneficial.  But on the contrary, if the complaint
has been neglected for a long time, or, what is worse, been treated
in the usual way with all sorts  of salves  and poultices, so that
the breast  in some  places is suppurating, and in others hard and
inflamed, or fistulous openings are formed  from which  a thin
sometimes offensive smelling  and whitish water exudes—a dose
or two of Silicea, 18th, will often restore it again in  two or three
weeks, and give to it its former rotundity and fulness.  This
medicine should  be allowed to act three or four days, and if the
improvement still goes on, a much longer time; when stationary,
the remedy is to be repeated.

               BREATH, SHORTNESS OF.
                          See Asthma.
                           Bruises.
      See also Congestion of Blood to the Head, and Concussion of the Chest.
    My readers may be surprised to find in this place a description
 of complaints, the treatment  of which is usually committed  to
 surgery; nevertheless, they will readily perceive from what  fol- 
72
BRUISES.
lows, that surgical science itself possesses a very small field  in
which, in the true sense of the word, it can be  efficient.
  Accordingly it is only adapted to the  cure of those evils which
are produced by mechanical  injury, and can  only  be remedied
by  material aid—by mechanical  means.   These  injuries em-
brace merely the mechanical division  of substance, as wounds;
severing of the connection of such parts  as are of mutual use
in a certain state of union, dislocations, many  inequalities in the
direction of the solid parts, distortions, and certain other opera-
tions, which are indispensable in themselves; but  by no means
should it include, swellings, ulcers, abscesses, external inflamma-
tions, pains, diseases of  the eyes, boils,  &c.
  All these last named  diseases rest entirely on a dynamic dis-
turbance of health, which lies at the basis of all inward maladies;
in fact, they are the  inward sufferings, which  only show their
character, by interrupting the health of some  outward organ.
  As soon as the internal disease, which is at the foundation  of
the sufferings,  is removed, the outward disease, which was the
consequence, also  disappears: and  it requires certainly no real
surgical aid from without. All the so-called outward as well  as
the inward complaints  have  their specific remedies, which ho-
moeopathy discovers by  experiments on healthy persons, and con-
firms their curative virtues by giving them to  the sick.
  There is no reason why a contusion should not be treated with
outward applications, poultices, liniments, plasters, &c, provided
there be no destruction  of substance, or rupture of blood-vessels.
By the  shock  made by the instrument on  the  injured part,  an
alteration will  be occasioned in the vessels and  nerves, the pre-
sence and duration of which  is made known by pain, a feeling of
weakness, and loss of use of the parts injured, the infiltration of
blood, and the  consequent bluish red color.
  The injury of the nerves and vessels, which  is expressed  by
these symptoms, consists not in any mechanical division, but in
a chronic disturbance of the vital  power of  the affected  parts,
and this may be restored by  medicine, and  the  existing  dispro-
portion again adjusted. 
BURN.
73
  Experience, within the course of a few years, has shown both
to physicians and laymen, that Arnica is the medicine which can
always be used in sufferings of this kind, with benefit; and ho-
moeopathic physicians have by testing it on  themselves observed,
that it is  capable of producing in  healthy persons most of the
symptoms, which are caused by contusions.  Abundant cases of
these injuries have sufficiently shown the efficacy of Arnica, and
I therefore recommend it here as the very  best remedy.
  It is best for the patient to use it both  externally and  inter-
nally; internally by taking two or three globules of the 6th at-
tenuation; externally in the form of a lotion—15  to 20 drops of
the tincture to half a teacupful of water—applied  by means of
rags, or by wetting the bandage occasionally, to the injured part.
The pain  and stiffness will first disappear, and lastly the infiltra-
tion of blood and the blue color.  Nor do  these last  symptoms
continue as long by this treatment, as by the  other with outward
remedies.
   If the  contusion has affected glandular parts, as  the breasts,
testicles, &c, it may be  necessary, after the application of Ar-
nica, to give a few doses of Conium, 12th, repeated every 48
hours to  complete the cure.   If the contusion has injured the
bone, or the periosteum (skin covering  the bone) only Symphy-
tum, 3d attenuation, is the best remedy.  I need hardly remind
the  reader  that  where  lacerations, dislocations,  fractures,  &c,
take place, they must undergo the manipulations of the surgeon,
before  commencing the external and internal  treatment with
Arnica.  If Arnica, after 24 hours should  not have given relief
which may occur especially in dislocations—Rhus toxicod must
be giveu, and repeated in 12 hours.  If the improvement  ceases
after the  second or  third dose of Rhus toxicod, or if pains at
times manifest themselves in the dislocated  or sprained limb after
the cure,  Ruta in the 3d attenuation will be most suitable.

                        Burn.  Scald.
   Slight burns generally heal, without external applications, in
from 24  to 48 hours; they take a longer time, when cold water
        10 
74                        BURN.

has been used at first, to allay the pain. For such injuries scarcely
any remedy is needed, at least not one like cold water, calculated
to retard the cure.  But against large, severe burns, the best
remedies are not so well known; for with these the common
recourse is to cold water, the most miserable palliative, and in
certain  cases even the most dangerous application  that can  be
used. The very opposite of cold water is the best cure for severe
burns.  An experienced  cook will never hold a hand that  has
been scalded with hot broth or fat, in a pail of cold water,  but
holds it as near as possible to the glowing coals, although  the
pain at first may be heightened by them, and keeps it in this
situation, till the pain of the burn  has perceptibly diminished,
or almost  entirely  disappeared; or he wets it  with the best
alcohol, or oil of terpentine warmed.
   The  best treatment is as follows:  The  burnt part is  to be
constantly kept wet with warm spirituous fluids;  for which pur-
pose linen rags dipped in the  spirits must first be laid on the
affected part, and over these, in order to prevent evaporation,
and to keep all warm, pieces of woolen stuff, or sheep  skin with
the wool on. If a large part of the surface  of the  body be burnt,
a person must  be constantly engaged  in the  outward manage-
ment of the patient, in taking off the pieces of woolen or sheep-
skin one  by one, and  sprinkling the  pieces of linen  next the
skin (which are not to be taken off) as fast as they become dry,
with warm alcohol, or oil of turpentine, by means  of a spoon;
when one part  is thus moistened, it must be covered again, and
the others attended to, so that when the last has been wetted and
covered, he may begin again  with  the first, which, with fluid
which evaporates as quickly as alcohol, will in the mean time
have become almost dry.
   In this manner the patient must be treated without intermis-
sion day  and night, for which purpose two persons had better
be engaged so that they may relieve each other.  The successful
treatment, particularly in extensive injuries from burns, depends
on what is done in the first 24 hours, or in the worst cases, in
the first 48 hours, that is, untill every trace  of pain from the burn 
BURN.
75
is  permanently removed.   A bowl filled with hot water, should
be at hand, in which several vessels filled with alcohol  must be
placed, so  that there may always be a sufficient quantity prop-
erly warmed in readiness.  If those parts of the body on which
the patient has to lie, are likewise burnt, they must be attended
to first, and dressed with the linen rags wet with warm  alcohol,
and over this a layer of oil-cloth ; these dressings will afterwards
be kept moist by the wetting from above.  But if  the greater
part of the body be burnt, the first wetting must be with warm
brandy in order to save the patient as much as possible from the
first sensation of pain, which is the most severe; for the second
wetting, stronger spirits may be used, and afterwards the strongest
alcohol.  And as the dressing is to be uninterruptedly continued
through the night, care must be  taken to place the lamp at a
considerable distance from  the  patient, or to provide a lantern;
as the alcohol is  highly inflammable, and  the vapor rising from
the body of the   patient  may take fire and  be productive of
serious consequences.
   In burns from gunpowder,  the black grains should not be .
 taken out  of the skin, until every trace of pain from  the burn
 shall have been permanently removed.
   Enveloping the burnt parts in raw cotton is also beneficial, if
 made use of directly after the infliction of the burn. The cotton
 is to be left on, and renewed where it has slipped off,  until all
 the pain has disappeared.
    Where many applications have already been made, and  the
 pain of the burn  has ceased, but large suppurating sores remain,
 a salve made of equal parts of oil of white  lilly and white of
 egg, and applied to the affected part with a feather, will be of
 great service.  A salve made of white soap scraped into luke-
 warm water is likewise of great benefit. In very large  and deep
 sores, I have used, with marked advantage, a  preparation con-
 sisting of equal parts of linseed oil and cold water, with which
 linen rags were wet and laid on. 
76
BOWELS.
               Bowels, Inflammation of the.
   So dangerous a disease as inflammation of the bowels  should
not be  trusted to the management of one unacquainted  with
medicine.  This must be plain to any one.  It is  therefore not
my intention to enter into  its treatment here; but I will  only
adduce the chief symptoms, by which the relatives of the  patient
may be sufficiently aware of the danger that threatens him, and
on that account be prompt in procuring a physician.
   The inflammation may occupy a smaller or greater portion of
the abdomen, and is  exceedingly painful, at  times burning, at
times pungent, or tearing, very sensitive to the touch, to motion
and agitation, for instancec, oughing and sneezing;  it is often
also distended and swollen.  The symptoms vary, according  to
the seat and degree of inflammation, and also  according  to the
accompanying  fever.   The  following  are the most frequent:
cramps, great anxiety and restlessness,  constipation, tenesmus
(ineffectual straining to stool), belchings, vomiting, which, how-
ever, gives no relief, colic, distention of the abdomen, coldness
of the limbs, fits of fainting, great debility, emaciation, despon-
dency, languid countenance, trembling voice, small depressed
pulse, and generally fever more or less severe.  The nearer the
inflammation is to the chest, the more laborious and painful is
the breathing, especially inspiration.   In this species of inflam-
mation  the liver,  stomach, intestines, and all the organs  in the
cavity of the abdomen, which  are attacked by a greater or less
number of the symptoms above described, are  included.
   In  all affections of this kind it will be proper, before a physi-
cian can be procured, to  given a dose of Aconite, in order  to
check the further progress of the inflammation.   If after two
hours the physician should not have arrived, and the disease is
on the increase, a second dose  should be given. If after waiting
again, no medical aid  is at hand, the following signs are to  be
well observed: if the patient complains of the least pain  at the
pit of the stomach, on the left side near the ribs, and towards
the back, or extending towards the abdomen, with distention of 
CATARRH AND HOARSENESS.
77
the region of the stomach, great anxiety, much vomiting, after
which he is rather worse than better, Ipecacuanha will be the most
serviceable remedy, and may be repeated every hour.  On the con-
trary, if he is no better, after three or four hours, and the vomit-
ing is still unchecked, if the strength fails more and more, and the
countenance is pale and fallen, he must without delay take Arse-
nicum, a dose every two or three hours.  If the disease has been
occasioned by taking cold, or by cold drinks when overheated, if
the pains and fever be violent, after  the use of Aconite, Bryonia
is the best remedy, and must likewise be repeated; it is also in-
dicated when there is constipation, and a pricking pain, which is
aggravated by every motion.
    Chamomilla will be suitable when the pain is of a dull pres-
 sive character,  and not increased by motion,  inspiration, and
 external pressure, with pressure of the stomach, tightness under
 the ribs, difficult respiration, yellow coated tongue, bitter taste,
 yellowish tinge  of the skin,  and sudden fits of anxiety.  This
 medicine may be repeated  every two or three hours, and if it
 should be insufficient, followed by Mercurius solubilis, which may
 be followed, if necessary, after a few doses have been taken, by
 Belladonna.  If strong tendency to a return  of the disease re-
 main, a few doses of Sulphur should be taken every other day.
                            c.
                 Catarrh and  Hoarseness.
  In  both these cases, where the symptoms, and  causes are
mostly similar, it is necessary to have regard to the  disposition
of the patient, and  the peculiar changes produced in it  by the
catarrh, in order to find out the  proper remedy.
   Chamomilla, 3d attenuation, is indicated when there is hoarse-
ness with snuffling, and dryness of the eyelids, tenacious mucus
in the upper part of the windpipe, burning in the throat, dry-
ness of the mouth and thirst, dry cough with itching or tickling
in the windpipe, fever towards evening, alternate chills and heat, 
78
CATARRH AND HOAKSENESS.
fretfulncss, vexation  at  trifles, melancholy,  and  aversion  to
talking.
  Aconite, one  or  two doses,  followed by Nux vomica when
there is  scraping in  the  throat, dry  painful sensation in the
larynx, which excites coughing, and consequent pain in the pit
of the stomach,  and rawness throughout the chest; the  patient
cannot speak, has a rough, deep, dry cough with stoppage of the
nose, painful breathing, heat in the hands and cheeks, sleepless-
ness in  the evening, with cold feet and shuddering; chilliness
followed  by burning heat with thirst, confusion of ideas, fretful-
ncss, disinclination  to business, moroseness,  loud complaining of
his  sufferings, quarrels about trifles, is  obstinate and self-willed.
  Pulsatilla,  6th attenuation,  against hoarseness, rawness and
painful sensation of soreness at  the back of the throat, feeling of
rawness of the palate, dryness in the throat, sensitiveness of the
throat on swallowing, snuffling with hawking up of bloody mucus;
loose cough, with pain in the chest; tickling in  the fauces which
brings on coughing, and is worse in the evening; chilliness with
drawings  in  the limbs;  fever  towards evening followed by ex-
ternal heat, with weariness and languor, at  night internal heat
with dry skin; restless, interrupted sleep, disturbed by dreams,
mild disposition, disinclination  to  loud speaking, disposition to
weep, irritability, indifference, want of  determination, desire first
for  one thing, then  for another.
  When hoarseness is the most prominent symptom, and after
several days it does  not manifest the least abatement,  Pulsatilla
will be the best remedy, which may  be followed,  after five or
six  days, if the hoarseness be  not removed, by a dose or two
of Mercurius  solubilis.  If the  hoarseness  arise from cold, and
is unaccompanied by  other symptoms,  Dulcamara will be most
suitable.   In long continued and obstinate hoarseness,  Sulphur
is of service in a  high attenuation.   I have often removed a
hoarseness of this  kind  with three or  four doses of  Aconite,
given morning and  evening. 
CATARRH FEVER.   CHEEKS.
79
                       Catarrh Fever.
   When cold in the head, or catarrh, is accompanied by fever,
which shows itself by external fits of cold and heat, especially in
the evening;  by general soreness and prostration of strength,
disagreeable burning in the skin, dulness in the countenance, and
drowsiness; the same remedies directed in these  cases must be
given. But at times these remedies, though alleviating the other
symptoms, are insufficient for the removal of the  fever; in such
cases Nux vomica should be given repeatedly, and if it fail, Mer-
curius solubilis is often serYiceable in the 6th attenuation, espe-
cially when there is profuse  discharge accompanied by internal
and external soreness of the nose, drawing rheumatic pains in
the limbs,  and fever.  In many cases also Hepar sulphur will be
beneficial  after Mercurius  solubilis, particularly when exposure
to cold air occasions  stoppage of the nostrils or headache, or
when only  one  nostril is affected, and  the headache is made
worse by moving.   Aurum is also serviceable in some cases.

                 Cheeks,  Swelling of the.
   Swelling and thickening of the cheeks arises mostly from pains
of the teeth, and in such cases  will be  cured by the remedies
which  are  recommended under  the head of Toothache, namely
Chamomilla,  Mercurius solubilis,  Pulsatilla, and Arsenic ; and
there will seldom be  any occasion  to use a particular medicine
against this complaint. But it sometimes happens that  one of the
remedies prescribed for toothache  and  swelling of the face, will
relieve the  former  but not the  latter; in this case the opposite
medicine must be resorted to;  for  instance where Mercurius solubi-
lis relieved the toothache, Pulsatilla, or vice versa; or when Cha-
momile was first used,  Pulsatilla, and in like manner reversed.
Mercurius  solubilis suits principally  in swelling  of  the  cheek
attended by copious flow of saliva from the  mouth, with tearing
pains and shining redness  of the skin, as in erysipelas, or rose.
   Where the  toothache is dispelled by a remedy,  but  the swell-
ing remains unaltered, and  is very hard and stiff, Arnica, in
the 6th attenuation, commonly relieves. 
80              CHEEKS, SWELLING OF TnE.
   It  is not always  possible speedily to effect the dispersion or
 scattering of the swelling, where the inflammation is very great,
 or the suitable remedy lias not been applied in time, or it has
 been  improperly treated by outward  means.   Nevertheless, even
 in such a case nothing further is  to  be done but leave it to the
 homoeopathic  treatment,  which will  safely hasten the  breaking
 of the swelling and the discharge  of matter,  and lead to a far
 more endurable  state of things, than when plasters, poultices,
 or the lancet, are resorted to.  But  if external applications are
 necessary to satisfy one laboring under a complaint of this kind ;
 if the swelling  be caused by a boil on the  gums, let figs cut
 small, and boiled in milk, be laid  upon the boil;  but if it is
 on the check, or the under jaw, little  bags filled with bran  or
 flaxseed applied warm, will answer better.   The opening of the
 abscess into the mouth needs no particular care, as it soon heals
 of itself; on the contrary, if the opening be external, it will  be
 requisite to apply simple cerate, or unsalted butter, thinly spread
 on lint and secured  by several folds of  a bandage,  to  keep out
 the atmospheric air, and guard against particles of dust or other
 impurities, calculated to retard the process of healing.
  By the expression  thick  cheek, is frequently also understood
 the swelling of the glands  under the ear and chin,  which takes
 place  at times in consequence of toothache, and frequently from
 cold and the noxious influences of the weather.  If such swelling
 of the glands depends on toothache, it is mostly dispersed when
 the latter subsides without the necessity of recurring to any par-
 ticular treatment.   If, however, it arise from  influences that act
immediately on these parts, it is proper  to adopt in time a suit-
able remedy,  since not unfrequently, by neglect, suppuration or
 hardness takes place. Mercurius solubilis is very often service-
able, in the lower attenuations.  If the swelling be  attended by
considerable pain and other symptoms, this medicine may  be
repeated  often, say morning, afternoon  and evening. But if the
pain has entirely disappeared,  or has given place  to throbbing,
having  previously  been  sticking and  pressive,  Chamomilla,
Hepar sulphur, or Calcarea carboniea, should be administered. 
          CHILBLAIN.  CHICKEN POX.  CHILDBED.        81

  Against indurated glands situated on  the  side of the neck,
under the chin, and in the throat, for the removal of which  all
the apparently suitable remedies have  been applied  in vain, I
have often succeeded with Dulcamara in removing the hardness
in two or three weeks; or in some cases, where this remedy was
insufficient, it disappeared after taking a few doses  of Calcarea
carboniea.
                    CHILBLAIN.
                        See Frost-Bite.
                 Chicken Pox  (Varicella).
  The chicken pox  is a disease very similar  to small-pox, but
differs from it by its speedier course and mildness, and by  the
want of  the peculiar odor of the  latter. It very often precedes
the small pox when  the latter is  prevailing epidemically.  The
progress of chicken pox is irregular, very rapid, mild, and free
of danger; and is  only severe when attended by  great irrita-
bility, and connected with other diseases.  The duration of  the
eruption  is mostly from  three  to seven  days;   it generally
shows itself first on the face, is attended with a moderate degree
of fever, or often without fever;  at  times it is accompanied by
some  catarrhal symptoms, followed by slight cough.
   This disease belongs to those which may  be  safely left to
themselves, without  the use of medicine. Only in cases attended
by considerable  fever will it be necessary to resort to a dose or
two of Aconite.  If it be connected with other complaints, espe-
cially with another eruption of the skin, it demands the attention
of a physician.

           Childbed (Duration  of  Confinement).
   The  duration of  confinement  is  reckoned  from the end of
labor to the  period when all discharge from  the womb ceases,
and every trace of a pre-existing pregnancy has disappeared. The
longest term embraces six  weeks, during which time the diet is
to be regulated, with a view to avoid any disturbance, by which
a morbid condition might be induced.  The  patient should not
        11 
82
SUMMER COMPLAINT.
 leave her bed before the ninth day, and from that time should
 be up but an  hour at a time. She is to be kept moderately warm
 in bed for the first two days, and every thing calculated to inter-
 rupt the free  transpiration carefully avoided; her food must be
 easily digestible, not stimulating nor yet containing too  little
 nutriment;  for drink let her have water  that  has been boiled
 and afterwards cooled.  Every thing medicinal, particularly pur-
 gatives, must  be avoided, since costiveness for the first five days
 is not considered at all injurious.
   The morbid conditions that commonly occur,  as, after-pains,
 bruises of the soft parts, haemorrhage, milk-fever, &c, are for the
 most  part treated of in the proper places. Against the diarrhoea
 and costiveness that show themselves in childbed,  no other medi-
 cines  are required than those  directed under their  respective
 heads.  Some attention,  however, is to be paid to that condition
 in which, with full breasts of milk, the mother doing perfectly
 well,  the infant apparently in good  health, and  in general the
 most  perfect  harmony appears to exist in all the  functions, and
 not the slightest cause of disease is perceptible, the child, in spite
 of repeated trials, will not take the breast, and thus the mother
 is deprived of the pleasure of nursing her treasure. Against this
 state of things I have given both Cina and Mercurius solubilis,
 6th attenuation,  to  the  mother, either separately, repeated at
 intervals of 24 hours with the best results,  or in alternation.

          Summer Complaint  (Cholera infantum).
   This disease, so common  in infancy, and so often fatal under
 old-school treatment, usually commences with sick stomach and
 vomiting followed by diarrhoea.  The matters ejected consist at
first of food  and afterwards of mucus; or  there  may be mere
gagging and fruitless efforts to vomit.  The evacuations from the
bowels are very frequent and may assume various appearances,
sometimes they are  greenish,  thin and watery,  or  yellowish;
at others whitish or  slimy  and  mixed with blood.  Often  the
food  is passed undigested,  and  the  odor is occasionally  very
offensive. 
SUMMER COMPLAINT.
83
  If the disease continues for any length of time, the child loses
its appetite, the flesh becomes soft, and the emaciation frequently
so great  that the  skin  hangs in folds about  the person, hectic
fever with evening aggravation sets in, the eyes are sunken  and
but half closed  during  sleep. The thirst for cold water is usu-
ally very great,  and drinks of all kinds are immediately rejected
by the stomach.  The head and  abdomen are hot, and the latter
generally distended, while the feet and hands  are cold.
   The most common  exciting causes of summer complaint,  are,
improper diet either on the part of the  mother or child, vicissi-
tudes of temperature, improper clothing, want of fresh air,  and
teething.   The  latter is probably the most  frequent cause, as
children are more liable to this disease  during their second
summer.
   At the season in which children are most subject to  cholera
infantum,  strict attention should be  given to diet, exercise and
clothing, both by mother and child. In regard to the diet, every
thing stimulating, such  as vinous and fermented beverages, acids,
all highly seasoned food, and  most vegetables should  be  dis-
pensed  with.  And  in general the  homoeopathic  regimen as
recommended in the beginning of this work, closely adhered to.
The clothing should  be adapted  to the season and changed to
suit the vicissitudes of temperature, care being  taken not to clothe
the child too  warmly. The apartments  should be kept  cool
and  well aired, and the children frequently taken out  into the
open air.
   Children living in large cities will be much  benefitted by a
ride out into the country, or on the water.
   The medicines most  efficacious in this complaint are Antimo-
nium crudum,  Arsenicum, Bryonia, Carbo vegetabilis, Dulca-
mara,  Ipecacuanha, Mercurius solubilis, Nux  vomica, Vera-
trum, and Sulphur.  The following are the indications govern-
ing the choice of each.
   Antimonium crudum, when the tongue  is  coated with white
or yellow; dryness of the mouth with thirst;  nausea with vomit- 
84
SUMMER COMPLAINT.
injr, or gagging and cough; distension of the abdomen with flatu-
lency ; offensive, slimy stools,  and frequent  passages of water.
  Arsenicum, if the child be very weak, pale and emaciated;
inflation  of  the abdomen; cold  extremities;  loss of appetite;
nausea and vomiting; intense  thirst; yellow and watery, white
or brownish offensive diarrhoea, which is worse after  midnight,
towards morning, and after eating or drinking.
  Bryonia,  when the diarrhoea comes on in hot weather, and is
accompanied by much  thirst; vomiting of food;  nausea and
vomiting after eating; diarrhoea  with colic; stools have a putrid
smell, are white or brownish and lumpy.
   Carbo vegetabilis:  if  Bryonia afford but temporary relief
give Carbo vegetabilis, especially if the evacuations be very thin
and  offensive, and  are attended with burning, and much pain.
   Dulcamara, if  the complaint return every time the weather
gets cool, or takes place  after  drinking cold water while in  a
heat;  violent thirst for cold water; diarrhoea of a greenish  or
brownish mucus, worse  at night.
   Ipecacuanha, if given  in  the commencement of the disease
will generally arrest its progress at once.  The symptoms which
indicate  this remedy are, chiefly, nausea and vomiting of food
and  drink, or of mucus  and bile, attended with diarrhoea of fer-
mented stools of  white flocks  or tinged with blood;  coated
tongue;  dislike to all food; and raging thirst.
   Mercurius solubilis, when the diarrhoea is worse before mid-
night  and  is  attended with colic, straining  at  stool, and per-
spiration; evacuations scanty,  greenish, sour, and attended with
nausea and eructations.
   Nux vomica :  if Ipecacuanha should not be efficacious  in
arresting the disease at  the outset give one dose of Nux vomica
at night and another next morning.
   Veratrum, when the  weakness from the nausea and vomiting
is so great as almost to  cause fainting;  great exhaustion, vomit-
ing  and diarrhoea; vomiting after swallowing the least  liquid;
the  slightest movement excites vomiting; thirst for cold water; 
CHOLERA  MORBUS.
85
sensitiveness at the pit of the stomach; colic, with burning and
cutting pains in  the abdomen;  loose,  brownish, and blackish
stools; and small, involuntary evacuations of liquid faeces.
   Sulphur will be valuable in protracted cases, especially when
the evacuations from the bowels are frequent, and greenish, thin
and watery, or whitish and slimy.
   Some inveterate cases of this  complaint are said to have been
cured  by  the administration  of fresh, unsalted butter, melted—
a tablespoonful given at a time, and repeated three or four times
a day.
                      Cholera Morbus.
   This disease mostly comes on suddenly; it prevails chiefly as
an epidemic in the heat of summer, hence a high degree of heat
long continued, and sudden reduction of temperature  during hot
weather, are the chief exciting causes.   The patient is suddenly
attacked with violent vomiting; at first all that he has eaten  is
ejected, then a watery, slimy, and finally bilious fluid in  greater
or smaller quantity;  the substances thrown up have occasionally
a very offensive smell, and excite increased loathing.  At the
same time violent and frequent loose evacuations take place, from
the bowels, at first faecal, then watery, greenish, and  frothy, ac-
companied with  severe  burning colicy pains, chiefly about the
navel. When the disease continues for some time, the following
symptoms are also manifest:  fulness at the pit of the stomach,
anxiety, severe cramp of the stomach, cramps in the calves of
the legs,  pulse hardly perceptible, and extreme debility.
    The chief remedy for this disease  is  Veratrum, 12th, every
quarter or half hour, in doses of a drop of the tincture, or a
few globules,  till  the symptoms abate;  the more  seldom the
vomiting and purging occur, the less frequently the medicine  is
 to be given.  If there be no looseness of the bowels, Ipecacu-
 anha, which in this case is  preferable  to Veratrum, should be
 given in the 3d attenuation, and repeated after  every attack  of
 vomiting.  If the disease has been brought on by violent anger,
 Chamomilla is the specific remedy. 
86
CHOLERA.
                     Cholera,  Asiatic.
  Asiatic Cholera is an epidemic disease, which, by its  sudden
attack and rapid progress, often  occasions death  in  a few hours,
if suitable remedies are not promptly administered, which is not
easily practicable at a great distance from a physician.
  The disease attacks persons of all ages,  but very young and
very aged subjects are least liable to it.  Generally for a very short
time before the onset the patient  feels weak, fretful, unfit  for
business, and is then suddenly attacked with vomiting and purg-
ing simultaneously.  The food and feces are first evacuated, and
the passages are often so frequent that the patient is unable to
rise from the night-chair.  Gradually the evacuations degenerate
more and more,  and finally become  like  rice-water, with  in-
creased prostration of strength,'and severe cutting and  griping
pain in the bowels.  Soon succeed contractions  in  the  muscles
of the legs, which gradually end in cramps, and are most  in-
tolerable in the calves of  the legs;  these are followed by tight-
ness of the chest, anxiety, almost entire loss of pulse, and burn-
ing in the pit of the stomach, the skin  is icy-cold, and the hands
and  feet assume  a wrinkled  appearance,  as  if they had  been
long employed in washing; the interior of the mouth, the breath,
and the tongue are cold, the voice hoarse, the countenance sun-
ken, the eyes—directed upwards—are  deeply sunk, with  greyish
brown edges, and the secretion of urine totally suppressed.
  For this disease, particularly at the commencement, there is no
remedy more effectual than Camphora—one part of the tincture
of camphor to twenty parts  of alcohol—of which the  patient
should take one or two drops on sugar, or in a spoonful of water
every two to five  minutes, according to the violence of  the dis-
ease.   As the disease abates, the doses will of course be given
less frequently.  If the disease comes  on at once with great vio-
lence, it  is well to bathe one  part of the body,  under the bed-
clothes, after another with camphorated  spirits, and afterwards
to wrap these parts  in woolen cloths.   If  the disease is so  far
advanced, as to be no longer affected by the camphor, Veratrum
will be most suitable, which in like manner is to be given every 
COLD IN THE HEAD.                  87
quarter, half, or whole hour.  After it Arsenicum, 12th to 18th
attenuation, is most frequently beneficial.  Cuprum metallicum,
12th attenuation,  also deserves attention in  this highly danger-
ous disease, and is particularly beneficial in severe cramps of the
muscles;  it must  be repeated as the preceding.   Besides these,
in the milder cases of Cholerine, so-called, Ipecacuanha, 3d at-
tenuation, and  Veratrum, in alternation, must not be overlooked.
   In  this disease ice-cold  drinks in very small quantities are
most worthy of recommendation, as they are not easily rejected
by the stomach;  warm  drinks cannot be borne.  Ice-water cly-
sters are also useful. Where this dreadful disease prevails, persons
in health should  avoid: acids, stimulating  drinks, overloading
the stomach, taking cold, excessive exercise, and violent emotions
of the mind.

                Cold in the Head.  Catarrh.
   Nux vomica is  indicated in this complaint, when accompanied
with great dryness of the mouth, heat of the face, burning red-
ness of the cheeks in the evening, itching in the nose, stoppage
of the nose at night, and discharge during the day, heat in the
head, dulness in the  head, general feeling of soreness, as if one
had been beaten,  fretfulness,  and proneness to anger.
   Pulsatilla, 12th, against tickling in the nose, as if from fine
snuff,  frequent hard  sneezing,  loss of smell, blowing of blood
from the nose, offensive mucus discharge from the  nose, sore,
painful nostrils, sensitiveness  of the eyes to light, oppressive pain
of the  head, restless sleep, fretfulness, weeping, chilliness  and
hoarseness.
   Chamomilla, 3d,  when there  is discharge of  mucus from the
nose, with  ulcerated  nostrils;  chapped, inflamed; painful  lips
which scale  off; sleepiness, numbness of the head with dizziness,
one red and one pale check, chills and great thirst. It is of spe-
cial use in children, and when suppressed perspiration is the cause
of the catarrh.
   Cold in the  head in infants at the breast which prevents them
from breathing while at suck, makes them impatient  and causes 
88   CONCUSSION, ETC. CONGESTION  OP BLOOD TO  TOE nEAD.

them to cry out;  generally arises in consequence of slight cold,
which is at first accompanied by a discharge from  the nostrils,
the check of which causes a disagreeable dryness.   Children of
considerable growth also suffer from it, and in these it induces a
disagreeable habit of always keeping the mouth open, and breath-
ing through it.
  My treatment of this complaint is as follows: I have the out-
side of the nose rubbed several times a day with some fatty sub-
stance such as chicken fat, almond oil, or thick  cream, and the
steam of warm milk occasionally introduced into the nose.   But
as in this affection the natural secretion of mucus from the lin-
ing membrane of the nose is deficient, which is the  cause of the
affection, it is advisable to anoint the inner surface of the nos-
trils with some oily fluid, by means of a feather, in  order to re-
place the natural mucus.
  If this does not effect a cure, inward remedies must be used,
the most suitable of these is N~ux vomica, of which  two or three
globules  may be given to the child.  Some homoeopathic physi-
cians have found Sambucus nigra, 1st, useful.

            CONCUSSION OF THE CHEST.
                         See Bruises.

             Congestion of Blood to the Head.
  Many persons suffer from frequent congestion of blood to the
head, which  is often  occasioned by  a sedentary life, incessant
thinking, indulging too freely in rich  food, and in spirituous and
other stimulating  drinks, such as coffee.  It  is  known by the
following symptoms: swelling of  the vessels of the  head, with
strong pulsations in the head, which the patient feels through the
whole body;  heat, chiefly in the forehead and over  the sockets
of the eyes,  much  aggravated by stooping or coughing,  and
troublesome dreams.  The most  suitable remedy in most cases
is Aconite in several successive doses.   But should this remedy
not  suffice, if coffee is entirely abstained from, a small dose of
A'ux vomica will remove it most safely. 
CONGESTION  OP BLOOD TO  THE  HEAD.         89
  Belladonna is also often of service in the dose of two or three
globules of the 15th attenuation, when there is  great swellings
of the veins of  the head, in connection with violent fits of burn-
ing, sticking pain  on one side of the head, which by any motion
of the body, or by any noise,  bright light, &c, is perceptibly
increased; and always after a dose of Aconite.  Frequently also
we  find  in  such congestion  of blood, sparks,  glimmering, and
darkness before  the eyes; double vision, ringing in the ears, also
fits of fainting, and drowsiness.   This remedy  should be admin-
istered, when  this complaint occurs to children  while teething,
or when frequent spasms arise from this source.  Very often also
at the  period of puberty in girls, when menstruation has  not
been  completely established;  also after taking cold in  conse-
quence of getting wet feet, at the commencement  of  menstrua-
tion,  which interrupts its course.  When this congestion of blood
is very great, the  Belladonna will be assisted in  its action by a
thick warm poultice of oatmeal on the soles of  the feet.  It is
necessary to wait after giving Aconite for four to six  hours, be-
fore either Nux vomica or Belladonna can be given.   Aconite
is also  the best medicine, when the congestion has been caused
by fright and anger.
   Arnica, two  or three globules of the  6th attenuation,  is  the
 chief remedy, when the affection is occasioned by a serious fall,
 thrust, or blow on the head.   Cases of this kind should always,
 if possible, be  committed to the physician, but at a great distance
 from one it is desirable for the laity to  be acquainted with the
 most suitable  remedy.   The  more serious symptoms from such
 injuries are, stupor, fainting, coldness on a small part of the head,
 compression, disposition of one or both eyes to close, fearfulness,
 vomiting, &c.   As it frequently happens that  blood has been
 extravasated  either  exteriorly or interiorly, it is very proper to
 apply the Arnica outwardly;  a good lotion for this purpose may
 be made by mixing 10 or 12 drops of the tincture in two to three
 ounces of water; this can be applied by wetting cloths with it,
 and  laying them  upon the injured parts.  If bleeding at the nose
 follow the application of Arnica, it must not be  suppressed, as it
         12 
90         CONGESTION  OP BLOOD TO THE  CHEST.
is a favorable symptom.  If the symptoms return after 16 to 24
hours, the medicine must be given once more internally, the con-
ditions being otherwise favorable.  In great excitability and sleep-
lessness six or eight globules, or a drop of the 3d attenuation of
Coffea cruda may be given;  this remedy is also useful, when
the congestion of blood has been occasioned by powerful excite-
ment of mind either pleasantly or otherwise, as frequently  met
with in irritable persons.  Congestion of blood after anger is re-
lieved by Chamomilla; after intense anger or gnawing grief, by
Ignatia amara; after sudden  fits of passion, by Nux vomica;
after  fright, by  Opium; and  during menstruation, by Crocus,
as I have had often occasion to prove; most commonly conges-
tion of this kind shows itself some days before the expected
period,  or soon after the cessation.
   In congestions to the head with sleeplessness  and anxiety in
debilitated persons—where there  is an  unnatural accumulation
of vital power, while in the other parts of the system it  is  un-
equally distributed—a very useful auxiliary is, a few passes of
animal  magnetism with  moderately strong will, by gentle pres-
sure of the hand, from the crown of the head,  slowly over  the
body, to the ends of the toes.

             Congestion of Blood to the  Chest.
   This disease is frequently removed by Nux vomica, if it arise
from causes similar to  those producing  congestion  to  the head,
and is  characterised by  palpitation of the  heart, short, hurried
breathing, pressure, anxiety and  difficulty of breathing, and its
frequent return occasions long  continued spasms of the chest.
   A similar condition I  have often observed at the time of men-
struation (as well before and during, as after it)  in delicate girls,
who lived very sedentary lives, and yet were plethoric. The pa-
tients complain some days before  menstruation  of want  of air,
especially when  going up stairs;  all at once,  and often when
sitting, there comes on anxiety, loss of breath, oppression of the
chest, great restlessness (the patients being obliged to be con-
stantly moving, or at  least assuming different positions), a sen- 
         CONGESTION  OF BLOOD TO TnE ABDOMEN.       91

sation of fulness in the chest, which they usually make known
by such expressions, as, "my heart will be pulled off"—"it is
forced upwards";—the latter really seems to be the case, for a
disposition to vomit takes place, a taste of blood in the mouth,
and a penetrating short cough brings up blood somewhat frothy.
Against this discouraging and dangerous condition, there  should
be no delay in administering the proper medicine, which is Aco-
nite, of which three to six globules may be given, according to
the violence of the symptoms, every hour or half hour; the best
mode of administering it is to put 16—20 globules  (or two,
three, four, or more drops, if the tincture be used) in two  ounces
of water, and let the patient take a teaspoonful every quarter, or
half hour, &c.
   As the patient becomes more quiet, the intervals between the
doses must  be gradually lengthened.  Belladonna also relieves
this condition, when   it is  induced by  similar causes  to those
which occasion congestion to the head. The following symptoms
especially demand this remedy: great shortness of  breath, with
an incessant, short, harassing cough; anxiety, restlessness, strong
and hurried pulsation  of the heart (a symptom of commencing
spasm of the  chest),   burning heat,  sometimes attended  with
symptoms of congestion to the head. If at the same time, parti-
cularly in young subjects, there be costiveness, the symptoms
will be much  alleviated by a lavement of cold water.
   In this affection, as  well as in congestion to the head, the same
medicines may be administered under the same conditions.

           Congestion of Blood to the Abdomen.
   Congestion of blood to the abdomen causes a distressing sensa-
tion of heat, burning pain, hardness and  tightness, without there
having been any  overloading of the stomach.  We find this con-
gestion chiefly in persons subject to piles or hypochondria.  If
these symptoms have been of long standing, they will seldom be
removed  by the usual remedies, and the patient will do well to
place himself in the care of an intelligent and skillful physician,
in order to avoid greater obstinacy, and even incurableness of 
92
CONSTIPATION.
the disease.   Generally in a disease of this  kind it is necessary
strictly to observe the prescribed rules of diet, as it depends very
often on a sedentary, debauched, and dissolute life, and a strictly
discreet way of living, active exercise  in the open air, and avoid-
ance of dissipation, must be rigidly observed.
   If besides  the symptoms above mentioned, there be pains in
the back, as if it would break, and there were no strength at all
in it, so that the patient  is able to  walk with great difficulty,
Nux vomica  is the best remedy.
   The most appropriate remedy, after Nux vomica, is  Sulphur,
which may be given either  in tincture or in attenuation; it may
be given once a day, and when gradual improvement takes place,
every three,  four,  or  six days; or it may  be administered in
alternation with Nux vomica.
   In all these congestive cases, the copious use of cold water is
an indispensable duty for the  patients^ and  in  summer time it
will be advisable to take the shower bath daily.
   The medicines recommended in itching of the anus, are often
of service here, when the  symptoms  are  like those mentioned
under  that head; and  the remedies  directed in the preceding
section are also often  the most suitable.

                        Constipation.
   1. Opium will mostly cure a simple case of constipation which
does not depend on any chronic predisposition, nor on any chronic
disease, but  on external circumstances,  especially those which
have a depressing effect on the nervous system, and without being
particularly painful, manifests the following symptoms :
   Inclination to go to stool, with  the feeling as if the rectum
were closed,  and inability  to effect anything, throbbing in the
abdomen, pressure in  the stomach, want of appetite, thirst, dry-
ness in the mouth and sensation of weight in the abdomen.
   2. Nux vomica, 6th or  12th  attenuation,  is best adapted to
the removal  of constipation consequent upon overloading the
stomach, with indigestible food, or with a great variety; or when 
CONSTIPATION.
93
it  is the result of a previous diarrhoea, which has either been
checked too suddenly by improper medicine, or without medicine
its disappearance is followed  by costiveness, and presents the
following symptoms:
   Want of appetite, disagreeable taste in the mouth, tongue
covered with mucus, loathing, nausea, relaxation of the abdomen
with pressure, painful  stitches in the abdomen.   A feeling  of
weight low down, cutting pains, general heat, flushed face, con-
fused headache, aversion and inability to labor, disturbed sleep,
oppressed breathing, unusual warmth in  the abdomen, fretful-
ness, and complaining disposition.
   3. Pulsatilla, 12th attenuation, is indicated in  cases similar
to the  foregoing, the only difference being, that in place of vio-
lent and loud  complaints of his condition, and disposition to find
fault with  others without any cause, and  to quarrel, the patient
is more inclined to secret chagrin, is averse to talking; or when
he is of a quiet, mild temperament; also when the constipation
arises from too free use of fat, of pastry made with rancid lard
or butter, and the following symptoms are presented:
   Bilious, bitter  taste in the mouth, particularly after eat-
ing, want of appetite, sour eructations;  eructations tasting  of
the food eaten; nausea, mucus in  the mouth, burning in the
throat, constriction of the abdomen, as if everything were hard
and impervious, and nothing could pass  by stool; pain  in the
abdomen,  as  if the intestines were bruised or twisted, griping,
dirty paleness of the complexion, languor, chilliness.
   Pulsatilla, though in general much more suitable in diarrhoea
than constipation,  is nevertheless indicated when the exciting
causes  and symptoms  are  as above given.  When it does not
suffice, Nux vomica or Bryonia will mostly answer.
   Bryonia is also a valuable remedy against  constipation, and
may be considered almost  specific,  when the disease occurs  in
summer, and in persons subject to rheumatism, with chilliness;
also when  connected with congestion of blood to the head, oppres-
sive headache, irritability, proneness to anger, in temperaments
too much  given to violent emotions. 
94
CORNS.   COLIC.
   CJiina is likewise a serviceable remedy in constipation, espe-
cially when it occurs in persons of weakly constitutions, and in
females; when there is too great sensibility of the whole nervous
system, with a quarrelsome, fretful disposition, and pressing pain
in the forehead, giddiness and heat in the head; an evacuation
is effected with  great  difficulty;  pain in the rectum, and sub-
sequent irritation.
   In cases  of  great obstinacy, lavements  of water are useful
auxiliaries, and should at first be made use of daily; warm water
may be used  at first, and if ineffectual cold water; or in some
cases warm  soapsuds  with  a spoonful  of linseed oil,  or  milk
with a spoonful of honey or syrup may be preferable.

                          Corns.
   These are callous, hard excrescences on  the  toes, or on the
sides of the feet, arising mostly from tight shoes;  they are seated
deep in the skin, and occasionally become sensitive and painful.
If one wishes to be freed from them, it is necessary that he at
once avoid wearing tight shoes.   However, new excrescences
arc often formed, or the old begin to inflame without any visible
external cause,  and become very painful.  The most beneficial
remedy is Arnica,  two or three globules of the 6th  attenuation
of which generally contributes very much to the eradication of
corns.  But if  this remedy should not  be effectual, then Nux
vomica, Pulsatilla, or Rhus toxicod may be tried.

                          Colic.
   The causes of colic are very various, and equally so are the
remedies.  The most usual causes are the following:
        1.  From cold, wet feet, suppressed perspiration.
   Chamomilla, 3d attenuation, against  severe cutting, tearing
and pinching pains of the  abdomen, which are so  intense as
hardly to be borne; a  sensation as if the whole abdomen were
hollow, with  constant motion of the intestines; blue circles about
the  eyes, and copious collection of  saliva  in the mouth. Severe
tearing pain under the navel, and pain in the small of the back, 
COLIC.
95
as if it were  broken in two;  nausea, or diarrhoea with green,
watery  or  mucus  discharges.  Pulsatilla, 12th attenuation, is
also frequently serviceable.
                    2.  From flatulence.
   Nux vomica, when there is hard stools,  or even complete
constipation, sensation  of  great weight in the abdomen  with
rumbling noise and unusual warmth; rigid  tension of the ab-
domen, with anxious, short and tiresome breathing, the abdomen
seems too full, under the ribs every  thing seems  to be stuffed
out,  drawing,  severe pinching and  contracting pains, as if the
intestines were squeezed between stones; pressure in the pit of the
stomach, and  expansive, dull headache; the abdomen is painful
to the touch, loss of memory, and  cold hands and  feet in the
most severe cases.  This remedy is likewise appropriate; in  flatu-
lent  colic  seated low  down in the  abdomen with sharp pressure
on the bladder, rectum and adjacent  parts, as if from a cutting
or sharp  pointed  instrument; or  as if the  cutting  wind were
forcing all these parts out; the pains are  worse on motion, com-
pelling the patient to bend himself double, but are  relieved or
cease entirely when at rest.
                       3.  From worms.
   Mercurius  solubilis, 6th attenuation: colic with frequent in-
 clination to vomit, and rising of water into  the throat; severe,
 twisting, contracting  pain in the abdomen,  with a feeling of
 hardness about the navel; twitehings of the  abdominal muscles,
 sensation of  crawling in the throat, frequent desire to swallow,
 at times keen appetite, loathing of sweet things, constant inclina-
 tion to stool, distended, hard abdomen;  tensive, burning pain
 about  the navel;  flow of saliva;  eructations, general debility,
 diarrhoea, with evacuations  of  mucus.  The attacks  come on
 more especially about midnight: Frequently also Artemesia, or
  Cina, 6th attenuation, are serviceable.
   4. From overloading the stomach, and unwholesome food.
   Strong coffee in small quantities, frequently repeated, will be
 found serviceable  in colic occasioned  by  surfeiting  or  unwhole- 
96
COLIC.
some food, which presents the following symptoms :  Uneasiness
and  weight in  the abdomen,  disposition to vomit, rumbling in
the lower part of the abdomen, sensation of distension and pain-
ful constriction of the  abdomen;  sudden  griping  pain in  the
abdomen; cutting pain of the bowels, increased by touch; white
frothy  saliva in the mouth, tearing  and pricking pain over  the
navel, nausea; diarrhoea with greenish evacuations and severe pain
in the  stomach, pale face with blue circles about the eyes, con-
vulsive movements of the limbs, doubling up of the whole body,
and pressive, constrictive headache.  After taking a few draughts
of coffee,  the  patient will  mostly  be relieved  by its action in
determining the depraved contents of the stomach upwards  and
downwards. But if this should not be effectual in a few hours,
Pulsatilla must be given.

                  5. Hemorrhoidal colic.
   Pulsatilla,  against  colic  from  haemorrhoids, indicated by
throbbing in the pit of the stomach, an exceedingly disagreeable
feeling of  constriction  in the abdomen, as  if  it were  too  full,
rumbling of wind, and  inability to pass the collected flatulence;
distressing heat in the abdomen as  if from  agitation of blood;
distension of the abdomen, general heat with swollen veins on the
hands  and forehead; inability to bear the least pressure, even
that of  the clothes; the pain is worse when lying down,  and
somewhat easier on moving about;  pain in the small  of  the
back as if it had been beaten;  the patient can hardly stand erect;
the abdomen is sore as if it  had been bruised;  restlessness,
anxiety,  and sleeplessness.
   Nux  vomica is indicated  when  the  urinary bladder is  im-
plicated with hemorrhoidal colic, and the  disease is of an ex-
ceedingly high grade;  the sexual organs and parts in the region
of the bladder  are spasmodically contracted;  the irritability of
the abdomen increases the longer the disease continues, and there
is an incessant desire to  pass  urine, without the ability to void
any; anxiety and restlessness are also common attendants, which
are increased as the complaint continues. 
COLIC.
97
   Colocynth,  in  the 12th attenuation, is one of the best medi-
cines in the different varieties of colic above described, especially
when there is no  cause  assignable.  It is  particularly useful,
when the pain in  the abdomen is continuous,  or with occasion-
ally slight amelioration always returning with renewed violence;
and possessing the peculiarity of leaving,  after its removal, a
feeling of soreness,  as if from a bruise, over the whole abdomen ;
the slightest motion excites  renewed suffering,  and the patient
complains that the intestines feel as if they were suspended on
a small  thread,  on which  account he  is  compelled to move
very slowly and cautiously.
  This remedy will also be useful, when the pain is most severe
at one small spot in the region of the navel, is periodical, return-
ing perhaps every  five or ten minutes,  or less frequently, and
beginning each time with a slight drawing  from the sides to-
wards the centre  of the abdomen, which increases gradually in
severity to a squeezing, pressing, boring  and tearing  pain,  and
becomes so severe  that  the patient is  forced to cry  out, bites
whatever is near him, breaks out in  a profuse perspiration,  and
writhes  about like a  worm.  Here, too, the sensibility of the
abdomen already mentioned remains for  a long time.
                  6.  During menstruation.
   Nux vomica, against a kind of twisting pain in the abdomen
and nausea, as if the menses were about to appear;  rumbling
pain in  the abdomen; or a sensation  as if  it  were distended;
pricking cramplike pain in the uterus;  pain on the pubes as if
from a bruise, which at times increases to a painful pressing and
dragging; pinching pain in the region  of the bladder;  feeling
of great distension in the  abdomen as if  it would burst.
   Coffea  cruda, against extremely violent cramplike pain of the
abdomen, which even extends to the breast; pain as if all the
intestines were  being cut to pieces, by which  the  patient  is
rendered delirious;  violent contractions of the body with convul-
sions of the limbs;  gritting of the teeth with  loud screams, gene-
ral coldness;  spasmodic rigidity of the whole body;  suspended
       13 
98
CROUP.
respiration and groaning;  sensation as if  the  abdomen would
burst- fulness and pressure of the abdomen.  Those persons who
make use of coffee daily as a drink, will not be benefited by it
as a medicine: in such cases,  Chamomilla, 3d attenuation,  is
frequently effectual, and should  be resorted to.  This  remedy
has  been  frequently used with success in these cases,  as a
domestic medicine, but is generally taken in too great quantity
as tea, in which way it does more harm than good.
   Pulsatilla, is indicated when there is sensation of heaviness in
the abdomen, like a stone, with severe pressing pain deep in the
abdomen toward the small of the back; drawing pains extending
from the small of the back down the thighs; numbness of the
thighs by  sitting, accompanied by painful pressure in the rectum
as if to evacuate, and backache.
   Belladonna, 18th attenuation, should be given  if these latter
symptoms are attended by a peculiar urging and  pressure as if
all the parts would fall out.

                          Croup.
   This affection  bears a very great resemblance to spasm of the
chest in children, on  which account,  therefore,  it should not
generally be treated without calling in a physician.  Still it  ap-
pears to me important to make some remarks here on its com-
mencement and  progress, and  at the same time on the remedies
most suitable for the moment,  when perhaps the distance of  the
physician  from the dwelling of the patient may be  so great, that
he may not be able to arrive in a less time than four or six hours.
   The disease usually commences with a slight catarrh, in which
the  child  becomes somewhat hoarse, ill-humored and languid,
especially towards  evening;  to these is added  a dry, short,
broken, hollow, hoarse cough with slight pain and burning or tick-
ling in the windpipe. In winter and after sudden  cold it seldom
shows itself with these mild symptoms, but sets in at once with
considerable fever, in which the symptoms  above  mentioned are
found in a much more active degree; the sound  of the cough,
the inspirations, and the voice are hoarse, ringing, rattling, whist- 
CROUP.
99
ling, or hissing; at times, when the cough continues, the voice
is  sharp,  screaming, fine, and  high toned;  but oftener it is
hoarse, barking, deep, and hollow.  There is  always some pain
felt at and below the head of the windpipe, chiefly when cough-
ing, at which time the child distinctly points to the spot. Speak-
ing is difficult and hasty, the expression anxious, the face is red,
puffed up, and marbled or bluish; lastly, there is a clammy sweat
and rattling respiration which can only be effected by throwing
the head back.
  It will  at once  be perceived  that  the  treatment of a disease
threatening so much danger, should be committed to the care of
an intelligent physician; nevertheless it is certainly desirable to
know the remedies most  suitable at  the  commencement of an
attack.  Frequently the remedies recommended under Cough
and Catarrh will be found most efficient.   But if none of these
appear to suit the symptoms, and the case is urgent,  Aconite
should be given in dilution, or in globules, and repeated every
one and a half or two hours, and continued, if there be  any im-
provement, at longer and longer intervals.  A good way to ad-
minister it is to dissolve a  few  globules,  or two or three drops,
in half a teacupful of  water, and give it by teaspoonsful.   If
after four to six hours there be no improvement, and the physi-
cian has  not  yet  made  his appearance, the medicine  must be
discontinued, as it will  have effected all it  could.  The  best
remedy now is  Spongia, a few globules of  the  6th attenua-
tion, especially if  the respiration is whistling, hurried, anxious,
and difficult; the cough hollow and shrill, with pain  at the head
of the windpipe,  which  symptoms,  if not  speedily relieved,
may lead to a fatal termination in a few hours.  If, by waiting
three or four hours after giving the Spongia, there should be
no  remission of the sufferings, and the same croupy tone of the
cough and respiration continues, and there appears to be great
danger  of suffocation: Hepar sulphur, 6th attenuation, is  the
best remedy,  and  must be repeated every two hours.  If  this
effect some improvement,  but does not fully  relieve, it may be
alternated with  Spongia  every  other hour.   Should, however, 
100
COUGH.
 this treatment fail, or after a  few hours the disease  becomes
 worse, or at least is stationary, Phosphorus must be given in the
 18th attenuation, a dose every three hours. Very great allevia-
 tion, or even speedy termination of the disease is often promoted
 by laying a sponge moistened with warm water over the head of
 the windpipe;  it should be changed frequently.

                          Cough.
   There are numerous species  and grades of cough, and  con-
 sequently a variety of remedies required in its treatment.   It
 would be useless,  to particularize in this place all the  kinds of
 cough together with their remedies; I shall confine myself only
 to those which most commonly occur.
   Nux vomica, 12th attenuation, is indicated  against  a rough,
 scraping sensation  in  the  throat with a tickling in the palate,
 which excites a dry, constant,  troublesome cough,  occasioning
 headache, as if it would burst with every spell of coughing;  at
 times accompanied  with a violent  pain as from a bruise, in the
 whole abdomen; the patient is frequently awoke by the cough
 about three  or four o'clock; pain under the ribs after coughing,
 as  if one had received  a  blow there;  obstructed respiration,
 especially at night, with  a sensation  as  if  something  were
 lying on the breast, and this  excites heat.  To these  may be
 added  the symptoms of cold and  catarrh, which have already
 been described.
   Chamomilla, 3d  attenuation, against a strong, dry cough, even
in sleep, which in day time is excited by an incessant tickling in
the upper part of  the throat; sensation, while coughing, as if
 something were coming into the throat, which threatens to take
 away the breath.  This remedy is peculiarly suited  to children,
and also to cough produced by physical irritants and anger.
   Pulsatilla, 12th  attenuation, when at the beginning there is
a dry cough for half a day, followed for  several days by a free
discharge of mucus  from the upper part  of the  windpipe, which
at times is  streaked with  blood : also when the chest  soon
becomes affected, and the  patient  is obliged to cough and ex- 
COUGH.
101
pectorate a great deal;  the mucus thrown off is yellow and has
a saltish or sometimes a nauseous  or  bitter taste; pain in the
abdomen from coughing, as if it has been bruised,  and scraping
in the windpipe.
   Hyoscyamus, 6th  attenuation, against dry, frequent cough,
which is chiefly troublesome  at night and prevents sleep, con-
tinuing incessantly while  lying  in  bed, but  subsides on sitting
up, so that the  patient is obliged to sit up at short intervals, in
order to mitigate its violence; sensation of tickling in the wind-
pipe, and spasmodic cough.  It is particularly serviceable  in
children.
   Ipecacuanha, 3d  attenuation, against an exceedingly tight
cough, which obstructs respiration, with expectoration of nauseous
mucus; tickling in the upper  part of the larynx; feeling  of
constriction in  the larynx; soreness  in the chest;  the cough
is aggravated  by going into the  cold air, and followed by a beat-
ing pain in the head and  in the pit of the  stomach, with short-
ness of breath and perspiration on the forehead.   The cough is
often of such a violent  character, that it prevents  breathing
altogether, till vomiting ensues.
   Belladonna, against spasmodic cough, which affects the whole
body, and almost  entirely prevents respiration; cough excited
by insufferable tickling in the upper part of the larynx, without
expectoration. The attacks frequently  come on every night about
12 o'clock, arousing the patient from sleep.
   In  the  frequent,  violent and tight  coughs of children,  of
females during menstruation, and persons  who have rupture,
which is  liable to  injury from the concussion, Mesmerism may
be used with  great advantage, as it has this advantage that it
does not  interfere with the medicine previously  administered.
In severe cases occurring at night especially, it may be used with
much benefit.  It will  be equally serviceable in the spasms of
the chest of children.
   Aconite is indicated in that species of cough which is excited
by a sensation of soreness or rawness in the fauces, and gradually 
102      CRYING  OP INFANTS.   DELIRIUM TREMENS.

increases to a short, dry, tight and continuous cough, with a
burning pain in the larynx.  It may be repeated every  four to
six hours.
                    Crying of Infants.
   The crying of infants, which depends on causes easily obviated,
as from too tight dressing, too great warmth, want of changing,
pricking of pins, &c, needs no remark, as it spontaneously ceases
by the removal of the  cause.  But sometimes  it continues for
hours or days together without there  being any coincident dis-
ease or other cause. In such cases a dose or two of Chamomilla
will often  be of  service, or at times also a small dose of Bella-
donna ;  but when the  child is imprudently disturbed in its rest,
and cannot go to sleep  again, Coffea is the remedy. If there be
much restlessness,  tossing about,  or bellyache, which  may be
known  by the twisting motions  of the body,  with  loose acrid
stools, Chamomilla is mostly effectual;  when unaccompanied
by diarrhoea, Jalappa, 3d attenuation. If there be flatulent dis-
tension and  consequent pain, a small dose of Nux vomica will
generally afford relief.  But if this is connected with ineffectual
straining at stool without relieving the bellyache, Rheum, 6th at-
tenuation, is most appropriate.
                            D.
             Delirium tremens.  Drunkenness.
  Who is  there, that is unacquainted with the symptoms of
drunkenness ?  Quite unconsciously the drunkard reels and stag-
gers,  with  stammering speech, with great gravity, sadness or
rage, with ridiculous gestures and attitudes, till finally stupefied
he  tumbles over,  and falls into a snoring, almost unwakable
sleep.  If there be an inclination to vomit in an intoxicated person,
it must not be checked, but should be promoted; this is most
readily done by a dish of strong, black coffee, which at the same
time  often prevents the injurious and very troublesome  after- 
DELIRIUM TREMENS.
103
effects, such as dullness  of intellect, sluggishness, heaviness  of
the limbs, &c.  But in persons who are  not easily disposed  to
vomiting, Nux vomica will be more beneficial than coffee. Nux
vomica is also the remedy most  generally indicated in the pains
which follow drunkenness, and may be given in alternation with
coffee,  till  the bad effects are counteracted; it may be given  in
such cases every two hours, and  in the  intervals a dose of coffee.
In weakness of the stomach, brought on by excessive drinking,  in
which the patient is affected with constant nausea and aversion
to food, the best remedy for removing  the exciting cause is An-
timonium crudum, a dose daily, which may, if necessary, after
a  few  days,  be alternated  daily with Nux vomica.  If, how-
ever, there be much tendency to vomiting, a few doses of Ipeca-
cuanha should be given, at intervals of four or six hours, until
it cease.
   The inordinate love of drink, a true disease which renews its
attacks from time to time, like  an intermittent fever, and then
leaves  the patient free for days, weeks,  and even months, during
which time not the least inclination for it is manifested,—is often
cured by repeated doses of Sulphur. I shall now give the symp-
toms of Mania from drink (Delirium  tremens) with  some dis-
tinctness, and also some of the best remedies.
   Before the onset  of the disease, the  drunkard suffers from
numerous unpleasant symptoms, such  as  want of appetite, nau-
sea, vomiting, and constipation, at times alternately with diarrhoea
which even sometimes amounts to cholera morbus; these are
accompanied with moroseness, weakness  of memory, confusion
of ideas, anxiety, stammering, indistinct  speech, unsteady gait;
restless, anxious sleep with profuse sweats;  dullness of hearing,
and vision.  These last symptoms grow worse at the approach of
the disease;  the  images seen in  sleep are transferred  to the
waking state, and the  patient,  long after waking, thinks them
real.   Entire  inability to sleep at length supervenes, with great
loquacity, activity, and finally the most incongruent mania, some-
times merry, at others of a violently irritable kind, with anxiety
and dread of some imaginary danger.  The pulse can seldom  be 
104
DISTRESS.  DIARRII03A.
distinctly felt, on account of the great trembling and jerking of
all the limbs,  which latter symptoms indeed  generally exist a
long time before the mania comes on.  The face  is red, and at
times of a yellowish  tinge.   The patient  complains of heat in
the head, headache, tingling of the ears, &c.
  Nux vomica and coffee, repeated as above, will also be found
useful here.
   Arsenicum, which is a valuable remedy in  intoxication,  and
often speedily removes the unpleasant effects occasioned thereby,
is also of great benefit  in delirium tremens against the  following
symptoms:  trembling  of the  limbs;  pale, yellowish, bloated
complexion; coldness and blueness of the skin  ; attacks of faint-
ing, especially while vomiting;  inability to sleep, with restless-
ness and tossing about; oppressive heat;  sudden starts as from
fright, with skrinking, attacks of anguish, &c.
   Opium is indicated  in this disease when it presents the fol-
lowing  symptoms:  sleeplessness, with  imaginary appearance of
rats,  mice,  and all  kinds  of animals,  which spring  upon the
patient, and to avoid them he creeps under the  bedclothes; his
manners, gestures, and speech, exhibit the greatest fear  of the
creatures that  are pursuing  him, he neither eats nor drinks;
suffers from obstinate costiveness; trembles in every limb; stag-
gers as if  drunk in walking, and has pimply eruptions  on the
forehead, cheeks and nose; the pulse is slow.

                    DISTRESS.
                           See Grief.
                         Diarrhoea.
   Diarrhoea belongs  to  those  diseases  which  are commonly
thought to be unattended by  danger, and quite easily managed;
but  this is an erroneous impression,  for, as in catarrh, the most
fatal  consequences may ensue  from  neglect or  improper treat-
ment.  For instance,  the sudden  stoppage of a diarrhoea from the
use  of  red  wine, brandy, &c,  containing ginger,  pepper, and
similar articles, is often followed by obstinate constipation which 
DIARRH03A.
105
threatens the patient  with far  more danger, and is much more
painful than the former.  It is equally improper, particularly
with children, whose tender constitutions cannot withstand mor-
bid influences, like  the  bodies  of adults, to use to excess, infu-
sions or teas of chamomile, elder, valerian, peppermint, and other
similar domestic remedies; for most of them, when taken in
large quantity, are not only uncalled for in diarrhoea, but greatly
aggravate it by the addition of symptoms not previously existing;
so that, for instance, the food passes undigested, &c. In homoeo-
pathic treatment, neither the one nor the other  is to be feared.
   Here I would also refer to an error which is occasionally  a
source of uneasiness to  those unacquainted with homoeopathic
treatment;  namely, the belief  that many impurities remain in
the body and occasion other diseases, if the diarrhoea is cured in
a short  time.   This fear proceeds  from the belief, that there
must always be a quantity of impurities heaped up, when diar-
rhoea exists, and that these must be carried off by it: and there-
fore that it is a beneficial  effort  of nature to free  herself from
them.   But this is a false view; for only in the rarest cases are
there impurities previously existing, but they are first occasioned
by  the  change in  the  intestines, which the  diarrhoea brings
 with it,  and this ceases as soon as the latter is cured.  How
 many diarrhoeas are produced in a few minutes by taking cold !
 From whence  then can these impurities come which are thus at
 once discharged ?  How many of such diarrhoeas are cured in a
 few hours by  restoring the transpiration and  general warmth,
 and has any bad consequence ever resulted from remaining im-
 purities ?
   In  cases  where there are really impurities existing, and the
 diarrhoea arises from the efforts of nature to rid herself of them,
 there is always another disease in the back ground, of which
 this is  the  product,  and here  a  homoeopathic remedy, which
 exactly suits the symptoms, cannot cure the diarrhoea before it
 has removed the latent  disorder.
    1.  We often meet with diarrhoea in children, without being
 able to account for it  ourselves, and are unable  to  obtain by
         14 
106
DIARRII03A.
questions any information concerning its particular cause.  In
such cases  we  are  obliged  to  confine ourselves  to  the visible
symptoms accompanying the diarrhoea;  and  I shall therefore
adduce the remedies that have most frequently proved beneficial
in ordinary cases, including those for children.
   Chamomilla, 3d, is indicated when there is want of appetite,
white coated tongue, thirst; cutting pains  in the  bowels, mani-
fested by screaming and restlessness; desire to be  carried, weep-
ing, drawing up the limbs  toward the abdomen; contraction,
tightness and hardness of the abdomen,  frequent loose evacua-
tions of white mucus; watery and  undigested stools,  having the
smell of rotten eggs;   rumbling  in  the  bowels, blue  circles
about the eyes,  and violent belchings as if about to vomit.
   Sulphur, 6th,  is preferable for  children  who suffer from
chronic diarrhoea which is commonly met with in those born of
weak, sickly parents,  who  have been subject to eruptions, or
when an improper, stimulating  diet has been used, and in which
the following symptoms are  presented : bloody or slimy evacua-
tions, with cuttings in the bowels; burning and straining in the
rectum, chiefly  at night; soreness  of  the anus, privates and in-
sides of the thighs, on which parts purple eruptions are frequently
met with, which sometimes gradually overspread the whole body,
and produce great emaciation or atrophy.
   Mercurius solubilis, 6th : offensive breath, inclination to vomit,
or vomiting accompanying the  diarrhoea; cutting pains in the
bowels with screaming; the patient bends himself almost double;
frequently  urging  and pressing to stool, without voiding any-
thing,  with cold sweats;  trembling; green  watery or slimy eva-
cuations, at times of bilious matters mixed  with blood; soreness
of the  anus, and great debility.
   Ipecacuanha, 3d, when  there  is  paleness of the face,  with
blue circles around the eyes, and general debility; desire to lie
down;  coldness;  crying out; the child is  cross at everything;
drowsiness; severe pains in  the abdomen,  causing the child to
scream out, throw  itself about,  and lie extremely restless;  pro-
fuse collection of water in the mouth;  distention of the abdomen, 
DIARRHfEA.
107
frequent colicy pains;  ineffectual efforts at stool, or small  loose
evacuations of a citron or yellowish color  with violent pain in
the rectum; very thin, frothy, slimy,  offensive evacuations; at
times convulsions. Frequently in diarrhoeas of this kind, Rheum,
3d, is serviceable, especially  when  there  is thin,  pappy,  sour
smelling stools, with  cutting pains before an  evacuation, and
bitter taste in the mouth.
  2. From fright, anger, etc.— Opium, 6th, if given immediately
will be found most beneficial  in diarrhoea occasioned by sudden
and powerful mental  emotions, such as fright, joyful surprise,
anxiety; also in  diarrhoea from  exposure to cold* after being
overheated, &c.  But, if this remedy cannot be given at the onset,
 Chamomilla, Mercurius solubilis, Pulsatilla, Veratrum, Rheum,
Ignatia, Phosphoric acid, or any other appropriate remedy, may
be  resorted to.
   3.  From  taking  cold.—Diarrhoeas from cold, which  are un-
attended by pain or any other symptoms than  frequent watery
stools, are  most readily removed by Dulcamara, 3d.
    China,  6th, when there  is  severe cutting or cramplike  pain
in  the bowels, accompanied by pressure and constriction, imme-
diately followed  by diarrhoea  with burning pain in the anus, as
if from a sharp substance;  very copious evacuations of a  thin,
brownish  matter, with pain in  the bowels, belching, rumbling
and feeling of weakness  in the abdomen.
    Chamomilla,  against severe  pain of the bowels, so violent
that  the patient is compelled  to be moving or throwing himself
about constantly ; sensation as  if the whole abdomen were hol-
low,  with  constant motion  in the intestines;  blue circles  about
the eyes;  nausea; vomiting;  flatulence; pain  in the abdomen,
as  if something like a large ball were rolled up; tearing pains;
evacuations watery or  slimy, and having the odor of rotten eggs.
    Mercurius solubilis, 6th, in diarrhoea occasioned by cold, espe-
 cially from exposure to night  air,  accompanied by pinching pain
 in  the pit of the stomach, with  rumbling and feeling of weak-
 ness,  as if  a diarrhoea were coming  on; cutting  pain in the
 lower part of the abdomen,  which is quite  cold;  nausea and 
108
DIARRnCEA.
loathing, trembling and chilliness;  at first sudden and frequent
pressure to stool, without passing anything, then copious green,
watery evacuations, attended with  faintness; frequent  evacua-
tions, consisting of blood and slime.
   4. From  disordered stomach.—Diarrhoea arising  from dis-
ordered stomach is often most speedily and certainly relieved by
Pulsatilla, 12th. Coffea in general is only serviceable in a few
cases, as it is  almost  universally drunk as a beverage.  Nux
vomica, too, is  much less valuable  according to my experience
in diarrhoeas than Ipecacuanha.
   Coffea, 3d, is serviceable in diarrhoea arising  from disordered
stomach in persons  not habituated  to its use as a beverage, and
where the following symptoms  are  presented : loss  of appetite,
with a feeling of dryness and moderate heat of the tongue, with-
out thirst; bitter or saltish taste  in the mouth, without disgust
of food;  eructations, tasting like rotten eggs; hiccough, nausea,
inclination to vomit, or vomiting;  fulness in  the lower  part  of
the abdomen, cutting  pains in the abdomen, flatulence; rumb-
ling in the intestines with urging to stool; restlessness; frequent
attacks of diarrhoea. Drinking a cup of black coffee will also
often effect a cure.  But should  not the diarrhoea be  entirely
removed  by this remedy, a dose of Antimonium crudum will
generally effect it,  especially if pap-like stools, bitter taste  in
the mouth, eructations after eating, cutting  pain in the bowels,
rumbling and rolling in the intestines remain.
   Nux vomica, 12th  attenuation for children, 6th for adults,
should be given : if there  is reason  to believe, as is very often
the case, that the excessive use of coffee as a drink,  is the cause
of the depraved stomach, and consequent diarrhoea  and  the fol-
lowing symptoms are presented:
   White coated tongue; dryness  of the mouth;  pain  in the
throat as if raw  and sore; rough,  scraping sensation in the
throat; heartburn;  loss of appetite;  clammy, disagreeable taste
in the mouth,  almost  as after  eating carrots;  sour taste after
eating and drinking;  hunger and  yet  loathing of  food; parti-
cular aversion  to bread; collection  of water in the mouth; nau- 
DIARRHOEA.
109
sea, copious eructations of a bitter or sour fluid, with sensation
of pain at the pit of the stomach; violent pressure in the stom-
ach, with distention of the  abdomen,  and sensitiveness at the
pit of the stomach from  touch, or motion;  vomiting; tractive,
tearing or cutting pain in the region of the navel, which extends
from  below upwards and  excites nausea; ineffectual efforts at
stool; stools consisting of  slime  and blood, with  unpleasant
rumbling in the lower part of the abdomen; slimy evacuations,
and soreness in the rectum.
   Pulsatilla, 12th attenuation, is the most suitable remedy when
disordered stomach is occasioned by too free use of pork, mutton,
butter and spoiled fat, and  the  following symptoms occur: loss
of appetite; disagreeable  slimy taste in the  mouth,  as if from
putrid flesh, with hawking and  spitting; empyreumatic or burn-
ing taste in the mouth; offensive breath; sweetish taste  of the
food;  coated tongue;  warm, bitter rising in  the throat; bitter
eructations,  putrid  taste of meat; sour taste of  bread;  nausea
with chilliness, even during sleep; vomiting,  chiefly at  night,
with burning in the throat; but little thirst, shortness of breath ;
flatulence, particularly at night;  stools consisting of yellowish
white mucus; greenish evacuations,  with cutting pain  in the
bowels,  and sharp, biting pain in the rectum.
    5.  From vexation.— Chamomilla, 3d, in diarrhoeas,  caused
 by vexation, and accompanied by bilious vomiting of green mat-
 ter ;  bitter taste in the  mouth, and bitter eructations; cutting
 pain in the bowels;  fulness at the pit of the stomach; general
 debility;  redness of  the face, with  pressive headache; copious
 evacuations of green, watery, hot, and very offensive substances.
 Bryonia should be given when after every meal there is griping
 pain in  the abdomen.
    The dietetic treatment  consists in  the application of dry ex-
 ternal warmth, dry poultices of meal, hot flannel cloths, &c, upon
 the abdomen and soles of the  feet;  warm, mucilaginous drinks
 of oaten gruel, barley  water, warm beer without spices, and the
 avoidance of medicinal infusions (balm, chamomile,  &c). 
110             DROPSY.  GENERAL DROPSY.
                     Dropsy.  Hydrops.
  A collection  of watery fluid in the  meshes  of the cellular
membranes is called  Anasarca or General Dropsy.  When the
collection  is found in some of the natural cavities of the body,
as the chest (Hydrothorax), abdomen (Ascities), &c, it is termed
Special or Partial dropsy.
  There are certain characteristics which are common to almost
all forms of the disease;  these are diminished secretion of urine,
oedema (watery swelling  of the feet and ankles),  a paleness of
surface with laxity of muscular fibre, and a peculiar expression
of countenance, which has been termed leucophlegmatic.
   Causes.—These are numerous;  an  obstruction to the  free
circulation of the blood in any large viscus, as the liver, lungs,
or heart, either from mechanical pressure, or in consequence of
disease, may give rise to dropsy.
  But perhaps one of the most frequent causes of  dropsical effu-
sions, is repeated bleedings by the lancet in the  hands of indis-
creet old-school physicians.

                General Dropsy,  Anasarca,
  Is characterized by general  swelling of  the  body,  paleness,
softness, loss of  elasticity  and coldness of the skin. When the
swelling is partial, it is called adema.  The swelling most gene-
rally commences in the lower  extremities, first of the feet  and
ankles, whence it  gradually extends to the whole body. It is
greatest in the evening, when the individual  has been on his feet
during the day, and is scarcely perceptible in the morning. This
is owing to the gravitation  of  the fluid from the upper parts of
the  body, which takes place  with facility through the different
parts of the cellular  tissue.   By pressing  with the  thumb or
fingers on the swollen parts, a depression is made which remains
for a long time.   This is  owing to the fluid  being  forced by the
pressure into the  neighboring parts of the cellular membrane,
and  the depressions do not  disappear until the cells, from which
it has been pressed, become refilled. 
ABDOMINAL DROPSY.
Ill
   Treatment.—Arsenicum, Bryonia, Camphora, Cantharides,
China,  Dulcamara, Kali earbonicum,  Mercurius solubilis, and
Phosphorus, are the principal remedies.
   Arsenicum is  indicated in general dropsy when accompanied
by excessive weakness and general prostration of strength; earthy
or pale, and  greenish color of the skin, especially in the face;
red and dry tongue; great thirst; coldness of the extremities,
and pains in  the back,  loins and extremities.  It  is particularly
valuable in oedema of the feet.
   Bryonia, against oedema of the feet and anasarca; the swell-
ing of the feet is increased by day, and diminished at night.
   Camphora: anasarca, accompanied by red  urine, which de-
posites a copious sediment.
   Cantharides, in dropsy attended with irritability  or atony of
the urinary organs.
   China, in general dropsy, consequent upon profuse hoemor-
rhages; also when accompanied by disease of the liver or spleen.
It is particularly suited  to dropsy occurring in women of ad-
vanced  age.
   Dulcamara,  against anasarca resulting  from  sudden check
of perspiration  by exposure to cold  or damp  air;  or when
attended by thirst, violent nocturnal  heat, with great  agitation,
scanty and offensive urine, eructations and emaciation.
   Mercurius  solubilis, against anasarca, accompanying  disease
of the liver; with oppression of the chest; general heat and per-
spiration ;  short, hacking cough,  and anguish.
   Phosphorus, especially  in dropsical swellings of the feet, hands
and face. Kali earbonicum, against anasarca, particularly when
occurring in  aged persons, more especially women.

      Abdominal Dropsy.  Dropsy of the Peritoneum.
                          Ascites.
   This form of dropsy is known by enlargement of the abdomen,
commencing  below and gradually ascending upwards, until the
abdominal parietes are, at times,  so distended, as to become ex-
tremely thin, and almost transparent,  with  tortuous veins dis- 
112
DROPSY OF THE CnEST.
tinctly to be seen in various parts.  If the  hand or extremities
of the fingers be placed on one side of the  abdomen below the
level of the fluid, and the opposite side be struck with the other
hand, a feeling of fluctuation is perceptible.  The only incon-
venience complained of by the patient is the feeling of weight
in the lower part of the abdomen, until the  accumulation of fluid
pressing upon  the diaphragm excites dyspnoea or difficulty of
breathing.   There is generally in this, as  in  other  forms of
dropsy, diminished secretion of urine, dryness of skin, &c.
   Treatment.—The following medicines are the  most service-
able in this form  of dropsy:  Arsenicum,  China, Mercurius
solubilis, Sulphur, Bryonia, Kali earbonicum, Sepia, and Fcr-
rum metallicum.
   In ascites occurring in consumptives : Arsenicum, China, and
Kali earbonicum.
   In that resulting from  excessive  use of  spirituous liquors:
Arsenicum,  China,  Sulphur.
   That arising from great  loss  of blood,  or  other debilitating
losses : China, Fcrrum metallicum,  Sulphur, and  Mercurius
vivus.
   When caused by abuse of mercury :  China and Dulcamara.
   When following intermittent  fevers: Arsenicum, Dulcamara,
Ferrum metallicum, Mercurius vivus, and Sulphur.
   For more particular indications, consult the preceding article,
" General Dropsy " or " Anasarca."

            Dropsy of the Chest.   Hydrothorax.

   This disease may affect both sides, or but one side of the chest.
 There is  difficulty of breathing, which  is proportionate  to the
 quantity of fluid effused with inability to lie  on the affected side;
 and when both sides are implicated,  scanty respiration, and dif-
 ficulty of breathing, except when in the sitting posture, energetic
 action of all the respiratory muscles, and great anxiety of coun-
 tenance.  There is  generally, too, more or  less swelling of the
 feet and ankles, and the ordinary evidences of dropsy. 
DYSENTERY.
113
   Causes.—These are the same as those of dropsies  in general,
though  perhaps it is more commonly symptomatic of disease of
the heart or lungs.
   Treatment.—The principal remedies  are:  Arsenicum, Bry-
onia, Carbo vegetabilis, Kali earbonicum, Lachesis, Mercurius
solubilis, Spigelia, Aconite.  With reference  to the  cause, and
particular symptoms ordering their selection, see the two previous
articles,  " General Dropsy " and " Abdominal Dropsy".

                        Dysentery.
   Under this name we understand a complaint, in which fluids
of various kinds are evacuated from the rectum, attended with
violent  cutting pains in the  bowels, tenesmus or straining, and
fever.   The disease usually sets in with loss  of appetite; pres-
sure about  the stomach and abdomen; nausea, disposition  to
vomit, dirty coated tongue;  bad taste, flatulency, tendency  to
diarrhoea, disturbed sleep, drawing pains in the limbs, shivering,
chilliness and hurried pulse.  After a longer or shorter duration
of these precursory symptoms, the  evacuations become more
frequent, and are occasionally of a bright red color,  but  mostly
consist  of mucus, or  other substances mixed  with blood; these
discharges are attended with  most  painful gripings and colicy
pains, of a tearing and cutting nature,  at first generally in  the
region of the navel, whence they spread over the whole abdomen,
and immediately precede each evacuation. These last are  accom-
panied  with a very painful straining (tenesmus) on the rectum,
which does  not cease  at once with the evacuation, but continues
for some time with a feeling  as if  there were still more to be
discharged.   The accompanying fever begins with moderate, but
repeated chilliness, followed  by some degree of heat.  The dis-
ease makes  its appearance usually towards the end of summer or
beginning of  autumn, and mostly follows a long and intensely
hot summer.  It is occasioned by  the use of unripe fruit,  by
pulse or other vegetables  tainted with mildew, and by  sudden
vicissitudes of heat and cold.
   If the disease appears in  unhealthy, marshy neighborhoods
        15 
114                  DYSMENORRHEA.

or if it is epidemic, or affects many persons at the same time, a
dose or two of China, 6th attenuation, will usually effect a cure.
When attended  by much  fever and pain, it is best always  to
commence the treatment with one  or two doses  (three or four
hours apart) of Aconite, followed by Chamomilla, 3d, or Pulsa-
tilla, 6th; the latter particularly if there be much mucus in the
evacuations. If these last remedies are insufficient, and the stools
consist of mucus mixed  with blood,  Mercurius  solubilis must
be given and may be repeated every three hours.
   In the more violent  cases,  this preparation of mercury may
not always answer, it will then be necessary to give Mercurius
sublimatus corrosivus  in  the 12th attenuation, repeated three
or four times a day.—In very severe, deep-seated colicy  pains,
Colocynth, 12th, must be given,  three  hours after the  medi-
cine last directed.  The chief remedy in the so-called autumnal
dysentery, besides Mercurius sublimatus corrosivus, is Colchi-
cum, 6th,  which must likewise  be given three or four times
a day.
   Fruit of all kinds, and acids, must be entirely avoided in this
disease.  If the  remedies above mentioned are not  sufficient for
removing the complaint, let  there  be no delay in sending for
an experienced physician.

   Dysmenorrhcea, Painful Menstruation,  Menstrual Colic.

   The remedies which are most  useful in painful and difficult
menstruation are: Belladonna, Chamomilla, Pulsatilla, Nux
vomica, Lachesis, Coffea cruda, Cocculus,  Causticum, and  Ve-
ratrum.
   Belladonna is indicated when there is severe pain in the back,
 and strong bearing down in the lower part of the abdomen, as
 if the parts were about to  fall out, accompanied  with  violent
 congestion  of blood to  the head, confusion  of  sight,  frightful
 visions, great disposition to bite, screaming, redness and bloated
 appearance of the face, and frequent ineffectual efforts to evacuate
 the rectum with much straining. 
DYSMENORRHEA.
115
   Chamomilla, when the pains resemble labor pains, with pres-
sure from the small of the back toward the  front of the abdo-
men and downward;  colic, with tenderness of the lower part of
the abdomen when touched, and discharge of dark-colored and
coagulated blood.
   Pulsatilla is serviceable when there is a feeling of heaviness
as if  from a stone in the lower part of the  abdomen;  violent
pressure in the lower part of the abdomen and small of the back,
attended with a sensation of drawing and numbness extending
down the thighs;  the latter  feeling is felt more particularly
when the patient is in the sitting posture; pressure  in the rec-
tum with ineffectual efforts to evacuate; frequent inclination to
pass water.
   Nux vomica is most useful in relieving writhing pains in the
abdomen, accompanied by nausea, or pains in the back and loins
as if dislocated; feeling as if bruised on the  bones of the pubis;
spasms  and pricking in the lower part of the abdomen;  parox-
ysms of pressing and drawing  pains, frequent desire to evacuate
the bladder, and sensation of distention in the bowels as if they
would burst.
   Coffea cruda will be beneficial if there be much nervous excite-
ment;  colic, with feeling of fulness and pressure in the  bowels,
and violent spasms which extend to the chest; delirium; wring-
ing of  the hands, grinding of  the teeth;  violent  screaming;
difficulty of breathing and groaning;  coldness of the whole
body, and numbness and stiffness.
   Lachesis is of great value in difficult menstruation, especially
when accompanied by diarrhoea with violent tenesmus, which
generally precedes the menstrual flow, and continues  after it has
ceased.
    Cocculus, when there are spasms in the abdomen, cramps in
 the chest;  flatulency; nausea and faintness, and pressive colic.
    Causticum, if there be cutting pains  in the small of the back,
 spasms in  the abdomen;  hysterical symptoms,  and yellowish
 complexion.
    Veratrum,  against menstrual colic,  with  nervous headache; 
116         DROWNING, APPARENT DEATH FROM.
nausea and vomiting;  coldness of the hands, feet or nose;  great
weakness; fainting fits and diarrhoea.
  The foregoing medicines may be given  dry or dissolved in
water, and repeated every hour until the patient is relieved, or
another is selected.

             Drowning,  apparent Death  from.
  There  is hope of resuscitating a person apparently drowned,
when he  has not been in the water longer than five minutes;  if
a quarter of an hour has elapsed, restoration is much more doubt-
ful.   But every  thing depends on prompt and suitable attempts
at resuscitation, and the patient is certainly often lost by want
of method, embarrassment and undue activity.
  As in  very few cases of this kind death results from the en-
trance of water into the lungs or stomach, but in most of  them
from paralysis of the nerves of the brain, the too common prac-
tice of placing the person on his head,  as if emptying a water-
cask, is certainly wrong.  The most suitable way is to  place him
in a horizontal posture in a warm place, and undress him en-
tirely, then dry  the body with warm  flannel-cloths.  Let him
then be placed on the  right side, the head and breast  somewhat
raised, whereby the water which has entered into the mouth and
windpipe may have freer outlet.  The  mouth and nose must be
cleansed  from mucus and other impurities.   To increase the ex-
ternal warmth, there should be warming pans laid to both sides
near the  spine, and also to the feet, but the pit of the stomach
must be covered with  warm cloths, or bladders filled with  warm
water, and the soles of the feet, joints, pit of the stomach, and
Bpine, rubbed by turns with warm flannels, or with a hard brush.
Spirits of hartshorn, naphtha, or other stimulants, should be ap-
plied to  the nose, the skin rubbed with cloths, moistened with
spirituous liquors, and the soles of the feet, and also the mucus
membrane of the nose, mouth and throat, tickled with a feather.
These applications, however, are to be used  successively, and not
all at once.
  A  shower-bath upon the pit of the stomach; dropping melted 
DYSPEPSIA.  EARACHE.
117
sealing-wax on the  skin, and  likewise a bath of warm  ashes,
mixed with salt, and in which the drowned person should remain
several hours, may also be serviceable.
  If  warmth of surface, respiration, and other signs of life ap-
pear,  the patient must be put in a warm bed, and have a cup of
weak  green tea with a few drops of rum, to induce perspiration.
  The attempts at restoration  must be persevered in for several
hours, and only discontinued when the  rigidity of death takes
place.
                       DYSPEPSIA.
                  See disordered and weak  Stomach.
                            E.
                     Earache  (Otalgia).
  This  affection may arise either as a consequence of another
disease, or  it may  be a primary malady.  The first is frequently
the case in toothache, and vanishes as soon as this ceases.  The
second often takes place in persons having  a predisposition to
this form of disease, children especially, from suppressed erup-
tions, sleeping on the ground, taking cold, &c, and is so violent
that it requires medical aid, which must  be varied according to
circumstances.
   Mercurius solubilis, 6th, is indicated  when there  is  tearing
pain in the ear and cheek of the same side;  stitches  in  the  in-
side of the ear; pressing pricking pain in the ear with a feeling
of coldness; spasms and twitching in the ears; sensation of prick-
ing and burning;  burning even in the cartilage of  the ear.
   Arnica, 6th, is  useful when there  is  a predisposition to this
affection with general irritability of the nervous system, which
is excited by the most trifling circumstances, and where the fol-
lowing symptoms  take place:
   Pinching and pricking in  and behind the ear;  tearing pain
with  a feeling of heat;  painful sensitiveness to loud and ringing
sounds. 
118
EARS, DISCHARGE FROM TnE.
   Chamomilla is indicated when cold and repressed perspiration
is the cause, and  the following symptoms occur:  Tearing pains
in the ears; isolated stitches in the ear with irritability of tem-
per, and disposition to resent  trifles; dryness of  the ears for
want of ear-wax.
  Pulsatilla is generally most beneficial  in persons who suffer
from tearing, or spasmodic pains in the ear, which is manifested
by single jerks through the  internal as well as the external ear,
with heat and redness of the outer ear; painful  feeling  in the
ear, as  if something were forcing itself out.  The pains often
extend to the whole side of the face.  Loss of sleep, disposition
to shed tears, and chilliness, especially in sensitive persons.  This
remedy is particularly  adapted  to this kind of earache when oc-
casioned by taking cold.
  It is, however, to be borne in mind that no benefit will be de-
rived from outward applications, and that even stuffing cotton in
the ear is productive of no good.
  A common domestic remedy, and one which though outwardly
applied, nevertheless acts homoeopathically, and has  generally
a good effect in children especially—is to wind a thread  dipped
in Sulphur several times around the  external ear of the  affected
side, and let it remain  until the pain has disappeared.   I was
lately induced, from a  knowledge of this fact, to administer Sul-
phur internally, and according to my experience  it acts as bene-
ficially when employed in this way as when externally applied.

           Ears, discharge  from  the,  (Otorrhcea).
  Discharge from  the ears, which  is mostly met with  in chil-
dren, is a very troublesome  complaint, on  account of the dis-
agreeable smell generally attending it, and the uncleanliness to
which the patients  are exposed. We usually find this complaint
in scrofulous subjects, after small-pox, scar let-fever,  and measles,
and during dentition.
   Sulphur tincture is the remedy which I have found  to  be most
beneficial in this affection—a dose of one drop every  other day.
   Mercurius solubilis, 6th,  will be most appropriate,  if  the dis- 
EAR,  INFLAMMATION OF THE.            119
charge follows an eruptive disease, in which case it is always
very offensive, and  occasions  soreness and pimples about  the
ear; followed by Hepar sulphur, 6th;  or at least these remedies
should be given before the Sulphur.
   Pulsatilla, 6th, will also be  serviceable when the  discharge
succeeds a severe attack  of measles.
   As dietetic means are especially to be considered, the patient
must abstain  from the use of animal food, and every thing  sti-
mulating.   The ear must also be cleansed several times a day
with a soft sponge and warm water, and filled with charpie (lint)
or cotton.

                  Ear, Inflammation of the.

   This affection manifests itself as follows: The outer ear and
the skin of the auditory passage becomes reddened and swollen,
so that the latter appears  much narrower than  in the healthy
state.  A sensation of burning,  itching, pressure, or constriction
is experienced in the ear which may increase to the most severe
earache;  an attempt to introduce the finger into the ear is at-
tended by the greatest suffering.   At first the ear is dry, after-
wards  a thick mucus discharge takes place, followed by amelio-
ration  of  the sufferings.
   Pulsatilla, 12th,  is the best remedy, and almost specific in
this form of disease when  the auditory passage is so swollen, as
to be almost entirely closed, with severe pricking or tearing pains
in the outer and inner ear; intense thirst; swelling and violent
pain behind the ears; disturbed sleep, and loss of appetite.   If
the inflammation  reaches  a higher grade, extends to  the  inner
ear, and excites burning or tearing pains in the  brain with deli-
rium, so that inflammation of  the  brain  is threatened, the  aid
of a physician is necessary to guard against a greater evil.
   Belladonna is generally the  most suitable remedy in cases of
this description, a dose  or two of which may be taken  while
waiting the arrival of the  physician. 
120
EPILEPSY.   ERYSIPELAS.
             Epilepsy  (Epileptic Convulsions).
  The symptoms of this disease are so well known that I shall
spare myself the trouble of recapitulating them here, and I am
even less disposed to give  directions for its treatment; as  the
most experienced physician, with the greatest prudence, and most
accurate knowledge of all the remedies required in its treatment,
has often much to do to bring it to a favorable issue. It would
therefore be useless for  the laity to attempt its treatment.  The
chief remedies against this disease are:  Chamomilla, Ipecacu-
anha, Ignatia amara, Opium, Belladonna, Ilyoscyamus, Stra-
monium,  Veratrum,  China,  Cieuta, Stannum, Zincum,  Cu-
prum metallicum,  Calcarea  carboniea, &c.  See  the article
" Spasms."

          Erysipelas.  Rose.  St. Anthony's Fire.
  I should  not  have introduced this disease in this work, if I
had not learned by experience that, particularly in the country,
a physician  is seldom consulted in its treatment, but on  the con-
trary a variety of domestic remedies are made use  of that are
altogether unsuitable, and do far more injury than the directions
for  the homoeopathic medicines suited to many cases.
  By erysipelas is understood a partial, superficial inflammation
of the skin accompanied by swelling of the part.   The redness
attending it, though generally of a deep hue, is often pale,  and
after a few days changes to a yellowish color;  the  redness,  too,
is not circumscribed,  but  is lost  imperceptibly in  the  natural
color of the skin, and  is  likewise radiating, shining and hot.
The accompanying pain is of a pressive, burning and itching
character.
  Aconite  is  indicated at  the  commencement  if the inflamma-
tion is very great, and accompanied by considerable degree  of
fever; and  one  or two doses  will generally produce a marked
improvement in both fever and inflammation.
   Belladonna may be given with advantage after the  Aconite,
particularly when the erysipelas spreads in rays, and is  attended 
EYES, INFLAMMATION OF THE.            121
by a pungent pain, which is increased by the least motion of the
parts affected.
  Bryonia  is preferable  when the disease  is  located about the
joints, and is more fixed, and the pains are also  aggravated by
motion.
  When this species of inflammation attacks  the face, there  is
often a tendency to the formation of vesicles or blisters. These
are  sometimes very dangerous, and  on this account should not
be treated by the laity without the advice  of  a  physician, and
also because  this form of the disease is usually connected with
other morbid affections of the abdominal organs, or with nervous
symptoms,  which cannot be  properly  understood by  one un-
acquainted  with medicine.   I may mention  however   for the
benefit of those persons who reside  at a distance from a homoeo-
pathic physician, that when the disease assumes this form, Rhus
toxicodendron is the remedy that is most generally serviceable
and a dose or  two of which may be given while waiting the
arrival of the physician.
  If  there remains a disposition to frequent returns of  this dis-
ease, it is generally obviated by a few doses of  Graphites, 18th,
repeated every other day.

                Eyes, Inflammation of the.
  Inflammation of the eyes is so often connected with other dis-
eases,  in  which the exciting  cause, the  general health of the
patient, and the age, at which the inflammation takes place, are
all to be considered in the treatment; that I do not feel willing
to entrust its management to the hands of the laity alone, with-
out requiring them to obtain the advice of a physician, as other-
wise I should do more harm than good.   Nevertheless there are
some inflamed conditions of the eyes, which, in the absence of a
physician, may be treated at the beginning with suitable remedies.
       1. Inflammation of the eyes  of new born children.
   The imprudence with  which infants,  even during  the first
few days  after birth, are  exposed to both natural and  artificial
       16 
122            EYES, INFLAMMATION  OF THE.

light  without considering that so sudden  a change from day
to night must be offensive and hurtful to the eyes of the young
creatures,  is  commonly the  cause of this  disease.   It  may be
known by the intolerance of light; slight redness of the edges
of the eyelids, and eyes; at  the same  time  there is a discharge
of mucus generally yellowish, which  glues the lids together,
becomes more and more adhesive, and often purulent.
   Aconite, 12th attenuation, will  generally allay the  inflam-
mation when  represented by these symptoms : it may be repeated
every six or  eight hours. Ignatia, 12th,  is frequently useful
after Aconite; repeated every 24 hours, and also in cases where
the eyelids are turned out, much swollen and inflamed, with pro-
fuse secretion of mucus, and  great intolerance of light.   If diar-
rhoea accompany the inflammation, Chamomilla is worthy of trial.
   In  this form  of disease  the  attention must be directed  to
the state of health of the mother or nurse, and to the regula-
tion  of her  diet.  The medicine may also be administered  to
the mother or nurse, as well as to the child.  When  the inflam-
mation is more intense, these remedies  are not always sufficient;
in such cases a dose or two of Sulphur should be  given, and
after the lapse of two or three days, if the disease does not yield,
a dose of Calcarea carboniea may follow.
   This inflammation of the  eyes, which may be of serious con-
sequences, as it not unfrequently destroys the entire cornea,  or
so injures it,  that vision is rendered impossible during life, I am
not disposed  to commit to  the hands  of a layman  altogether,
but  have made these  remarks, because there  is danger  to  be
apprehended by delay.  Until the advice of a physician can  be
obtained, these remedies may be given.

      2. Inflammation of the eyes from difficult teething.
   Inflammation of the eyes is frequently attendant on difficult
dentition, especially in weakly irritable children. As a remedy
for this, when very severe, one or two doses of Aconite may be
given in the beginning, at intervals of  six or eight hours, in the
dose  of three to six globules; this remedy may sometimes  bo 
EYES, INFLAMMATION OF  TnE.
123
advantageously alternated with Ciiamomilla.  After the allevia-
tion of the  principal symptoms,  Calcarea carboniea should be
given in  the 18th attenuation, a  drop on  sugar,  or  several
globules, as it is one of the most effectual remedies against diffi-
cult teething. It may be repeated after three or four days.

3. Inflammation of the eyes from the presence of foreign bodies.
   The introduction of foreign bodies  into the eye may readily
give rise to inflammation followed by defects of vision;  in order
to avoid as far as possible all bad effects they should be imme-
diately removed by suitable treatment.  The larger foreign sub-
stances are to be first carefully removed; the smaller ones,  on
the contrary, which cannot be taken out without producing great
irritation of the eye, may remain undisturbed for the first hour
or two only washing out the eye with  a little fresh water, band-
aging it, and giving, to allay the inflammation, one or more doses
of Aconite.   The removal  of the irritating substance  is more
easily effected after some  hours, if  the eyes  has  been suffered
to rest.  Occasionally, the foreign substance may be removed by
means of a camel's-hair pencil, or if it be fixed, by the aid of a
small pincette.  But if it still do not yield, and the inflammation
has increased, a dose or two of Sulphur must be given.  Against
the occasional discharge of tears in  consequence, a few globules
of Euphrasia, 3d, are serviceable.   If nevertheless the inflam-
mation increases, a longer  continuance of self-treatment is not
advisable, but the  cure must be committed  to an experienced
physician.
                      4.  From  a Stye.
   This is an inflammation of a gland found in the eyelid, which
occurs very  often in scrofulous subjects, and is frequently re-
newed.  Its  duration is much shortened by a few doses of Pul-
satilla, which may  also be repeated  at longer or  shorter inter-
vals, with a view to prevent its recurrence.  A very good remedy
in  this  affection  of the eyelids,  is Aurum (gold)  in the 2d to
the 6th attenuation, especially when obstinate obstruction of the
nose, with  ulcerated nostrils, as  well  as swollen and reddened 
124
EYES, INFLAMMATION OF THE.
 eyes  are connected with it.  If,  in consequence of  frequently
 recurring inflammation of the glands of the eyelids, indurations
 remain, which have a tendency to fresh inflammation,  but still
 have  not fully formed,  Staphysagria is generally the most suit-
 able  remedy.  But as  every scrofulous subject is  more or less
 liable to other diseases, for which Pulsatilla is  not always the
 most  suitable or only remedy,  it is easily conceivable that this
 article is not always best adapted to these complaints of the eyes,
 and that others are often required  for its  cure  and prevention,
 of which I shall only mention  here Arsenicum and Sulphur as
 among the best.
           5. Catarrhal inflammation of the  eyes.
   The symptoms of this disease are : redness of the margins of
 the eyelid  and of the eye itself,  more towards the corners; a
 sensation of burning and pressure,  as if sand  were  between the
 eyelids; intolerance of light; increased secretion of tears, accom-
 panied by ordinary symptoms  of catarrh, with or without fever,
 and a constant dry cough.  Although Aconite, in  many cases,
 can do  but little against this affection, it is nevertheless always
 advisable to give it at first with a view to check  the progress of
 the inflammation, and after 24 or  36 hours to  follow it with a
 dose of Nux vomica, which for the symptoms above described,
 is generally the most suitable remedy.
   Chamomilla is  beneficial, particularly in children, in the dose
 of two or three globules of the 3d attenuation,  when the white
 of the eye  is much inflamed, no tears are shed, but  on the con-
 trary  a  dryness is perceived on  opening and shutting the eye,
with ulceration and adhesion of the eyelids  and  slight catarrhal
fever.
  Belladonna, on the other hand, is  indicated after Aconite,
when  there is redness  of the margins of the eyelids, especially
in  the angles; a sensation of burning ; dread of light;  dryness
 of the eyes;  increase of pain by exposure to light, and  redness
of the whites of the eyes, as  if the small  vessels were injected
 and spread  over them.   If, with these symptoms, there  be  a 
EYES, INFLAMMATION OF THE.            125
severe nasal  catarrh which  makes the nose sore, and  inflamed
pimples break  out around the nostrils and on the lips, with a
short, dry, hacking, periodical and spasmodic cough, Belladonna
will  also be found useful.
   Euphrasia is well known to  be  generally useful in inflam-
matory affections of the eyelids, and its almost  specific efficacy
in catarrhal inflammations of the  eyes is strikingly preeminent,
when accompanied by a severe catarrh, with painful pressure in
the eyes, increased secretion of tears; and particularly when the
white of the  eye is inflamed, and there is severe headache with
increased catarrhal discharge,  and  fever.  The most suitable
attenuation is the  3d.
   Ignatia is also appropriate in this variety of  inflammation
when  there  is profuse  catarrhal discharge,  great aversion  to
light, with little or no inflammation  of  the whites of the eyes,
pressure in the eye, and copious flow of tears.
   Pulsatilla, 12 th, is likewise  valuable in this form of disease,
when the edges of the eyelids are inflamed, with redness of the
cornea; pain in the  head over the  eyes, and exacerbations  of
symptoms in the evening.
   In the  greater number of cases of inflammation of the eyes,
of whatever nature they may be, Aconite is sufficient against the
incipient stage, and may be followed after the abatement of the
inflammation and fever, by Sulphur, or Hepar  sulphuris ; which
are  particularly indicated, if after several days' use  of one or
more of  the  remedies above mentioned, the inflammation is not
removed, but becomes protracted.  After giving a single dose of
one  of these medicines its effects should be waited for 24 or 36
hours, before a second  dose is given, but if there be some im-
provement,  manifested by the abatement of  pain, quietude  of
mind, &c, we  should delay still longer—as  long as there  are
evident signs of improvement; but on the other hand if there
be little  or  no improvement, the  same medicine should  be
repeated after 24 hours, or  even  sooner.  With respect to  the
use  of the individual medicines mentioned, the following are the
chief indications: 
126
EYES, INFLAMMATION OF  THE
  Aconite,  against burning, dry heat; restlessness; delirium
from pain;  fearfuluess; anxiety; violent fever with full, quick
pulse, and mitigation of the sufferings on motion.
  Arsenicum, against emaciation;  yellow dirty  complexion
lividity of the edges of the  eyelids; violent thirst; great prostra-
tion  of strength;  diminution of pain by  external warmth, or
at night by going about, anxiety, fear of death, or capricious
temper.
  Belladonna, against violent, pressive pain in the forehead over
the eyes; heavy sleep, or fearful apprehensions on waking; great
terror;  despondency, violent thirst,  burning hot dry skin, with
chilliness, or headache, or inclination to weep.
   Chamomilla, against nightly exacerbations with burning heat
and perspiration; despondency; restlessness; moaning; sighing;
starting up suddenly in sleep, and green or white mucous stools.
  Euphrasia, when  there is  headache  with  dread  of light;
copious flow of tears;  great drowsiness during  the day; pre-
dominant chilliness; night sweats; taciturnity, or disinclination
to speak.
  Ignatia, when there is pressive pain in the head, from within
outward, especially in the forehead and at the root of the nose,
and somewhat relieved by bending forwards; fearfulness; temper
at one time humorous, at another sad.
  Nux vomica, when  the  sufferings are increased in the morn-
ing soon after waking, after eating, and by mental exertion; and
there is costiveness or ineffectual efforts  at stool; aversion to
exercise  in the open  air; character zealous,  rash, disposed to
find  fault, or quarrelsome and contradictory.
   Pulsatilla, in  mild  and phlegmatic temperaments, disposed
to weeping or inward  grief, with sleeplessness;  chilliness and
alternate flushes of heat.
   These general observations on  the remedies above  mentioned,
are characteristic, and will be  useful in any disease, where the
foregoing medicines are indicated. I would advise therefore that
they obtain due consideration,  or at  least be recurred to before
administering any one of the remedies. 
EYES, INFLAMMATION OF  THE.           127
  The frequent return of catarrhal inflammations of the eyes, in
every instance points to a deeper seated malady, that by the most
insignificant atmospheric influence, is easily aroused, and throws
itself again on the parts previously affected and most excitable.
The removal of such  susceptibility of  the eyes to external
irritants, must be committed to the homoeopathic physician, as
they often require for their cure a long and discriminating treat-
ment, which  laymen are unable to give them.

          6.  Scrofulous  inflammation of the  eyes.
  This is the most common of the affections of the eyes, and is
distinguished by its obstinacy and  repeated attacks, above  all
other inflammations of the kind.  Its treatment is difficult and
therefore not to be undertaken without  the assistance of a ho-
moeopathic physician.
  In the onset of the disease, when it  closely approximates to
the catarrhal inflammation, with a burning sensation and slight
redness and swelling of the margins of the eyelids; discharge
of acrid  tears occasioning soreness;  intolerance of light, and a
quantity  of purulent mucus is secreted between the eyelids—■
the remedies mentioned in the preceding disease, are all  worthy
of consideration.
  Belladonna is especially suitable when the ball of the  eye is
inflamed, and the intolerance of light obliges the patient always
to seek a dark place, as the entrance of the  rays  of light into
the eye, occasions the greatest degree of pain and pressure. After
a few doses of Belladonna—at intervals of eight to twelve hours.
—Sulphur is the next suitable remedy, of which one dose may
be given  daily.  This article must also be recurred to, when in
an attack of  this kind watery pustules appear on the ball of the
eye, which quickly change to small  ulcers, and leave cicatrices
behind which materially obstruct vision.  If the dread of light
be only an affection of the nerves of the eye, that is, if no active
inflammation be present, Conium is more serviceable than Bel-
ladonna, and afterwards Sulphur, or Hepar sulphuris.
  Rhus toxicodendron is particularly beneficial  in this affection 
128  EXERTION, INORDINATE.   ERUPTIONS IN GENERAL.

of the eyes, when it recurs often, or leaves the eyes exceedingly
irritable.  It should be given twice a day—morning and even-
ing.   But should this remedy not  be sufficient of  itself for the
removal of the disease it may be alternated daily with Arseni-
cum, in a high attenuation, that is, one day a dose of Rhus toxi-
codendron, and the next a dose of  Arsenicum.

               7.  Film, or  specks on  the eye.
   The above described diseases of  the eyes frequently leave be-
hind them specks or  films on  the eye; if these are not so consi-
derable as to obstruct the sight, they may be left alone; on the
contrary, if  they are seated in the pupil, their removal is very
desirable.   The two principal medicines for this purpose are
Conium and Cannabis, the first taken once  daily,  for six  or
eight days, followed  by the second in the same way.  If  these
are insufficient to remove the disease, they may be succeeded by
Sulphur and Calcarea carboniea,  of which alternate doses may
be given daily.

               EXERTION, INORDINATE.
                         See Fatigue.
                   Eruptions in  general.
   It will suffice here to remark that in general those eruptions,
attended with fever which suddenly appear on the skin, and run
their course speedily are usually unimportant and  free from dan-
ger; the efforts of nature alone  being often sufficient  for their
removal.  When  they are violent in their character, the  reader
will find all that is requisite concerning them  under their par-
ticular forms; measles, chicken-pox,  &c.   I shall in this place
only make a few remarks on the dietetic regimen.
   The nourishment allowed in the violent febrile eruptions, are
gruels and a little wheaten bread and butter;  if the fever is less
violent, the light soups containing groats, pearl-barley, rice, sago,
Sec, are allowable; and when the fever is unimportant,  even ani-
mal food, as  venison, young  poultry, tender beef, and mutton,
with the usual,  not flatulent,  condiments in small quantity and 
       EXCORIATION.  FACE,  SCABS  OF,  IN CHILDREN.    129

the avoidance of acids, fats, and spices.   In these  diseases the
use of cooked fruits, in moderate quantities, are always beneficial.
That  the  use of free air cannot be permitted in eruptive fevers,
and even long after recovery must be avoided, is a rule too well
known to  require further discussion; nevertheless we must make
amends to the patients for this deprivation by suitable precautions;
the best substitutes will be a chamber of moderately warm tem-
perature, regulating the bed clothes according to the wishes of
the patients,  and opening the windows at  suitable times.
  Aconite is generally the most suitable remedy in  eruptive
fevers, at the commencement, and it will in the majority of cases
modify  the violence of the fever very materially.
                        Excoriation.
  This complaint is commonly met with in young  infants; the
best preventive is cleanliness; when  it becomes bad, however,
the following medicines will be found useful.
   Chamomilla  will, in most cases, be sufficient for its removal,
when it has not been produced by the use of chamomile-tea,
taken either  by the mother or child, in which  case Pulsatilla,
Carbo vegetabilis, or Ignatia amara, should be given.
  Mercurius vivus, when the excoriation is extensive, and there
is yellowness of the skin, which Chamomilla has failed to remove.
   Sulphur and  Carbo vegetabilis  in obstinate cases, which the
foregoing  remedies have failed to cure, will frequently be found
efficacious.
   Sepia,  Lycopodium, and Silicea are also worthy of attention.
   Bathing frequently with cold water, or with a weak  lotion of
Tincture of Arnica, will  often remove this affection in its inci-
picncy.

                             F.
                Pace, Scabs  of,  in  Children.
   The  complaint generally attacks infants that  are still at the
breast.   For the most part  it  appears first on the cheeks; the
parts of the skin affected are red and hot, distended, shining,
        17 
130
FACIAL NEURALGIA.
elevated, and itch, making the child restless and causing it to
scratch the diseased parts, within reach.   The eruption consists
of small pustules, which fill with  a thin, transparent, yellowish
lymph, soon burst, and form scabs, that  disfigure the child very
much.  As the purulent secretion  goes  on, the moisture oozes
out, and new pustules arise, which run together and join with the
former, by which larger scabs are formed.  The fluid underneath
is  very acrid.  If the  eruption extends to  the eyes, they also
become inflamed.
   When the child is very restless, and tries constantly to scratch
the affected parts, the eruption is generally of a very inflamma-
tory character, and Aconite is then the best remedy for allaying
the heat of the skin; and it may be followed in 24 to 36 hours
with  the  3d attenuation of Viola  tricolor, which  will soon re-
move the intolerable burning, especially if the itching be worse
at night, and generally within 14 days  very  much relieve, and
sometimes entirely restore the patient.   If the improvement be
slow, a second dose of the last mentioned remedy should be given.
But if this medicine  do not entirely cure  the disease, Sulphur
will effect it, provided it be not complicated with any other disease.
   Recent experience has established the  efficacy of Sarsaparilla
and Mezereum in this form of disease; both in the third or fourth
attenuation. The first is indicated when  small pustules form on
the face, and are torn open  by the child, showing that they are
of a burning, or itching nature.  Mezereum is the most suitable
remedy, when the eruption spreads and forms thick crusts, under
which other moist pustules are continually reformed.  The reme-
dies selected may be repeated every three or  four days.

                      Facial Neuralgia.
   This affection consists of a violent pain, which mostly begins
at a certain spot under the eye, or  at times also before the ear,
and spreads thence over one half of the  face.  It comes at irre-
gular intervals, continues days  and weeks,  runs on to  a fearful
height, is often attended  with  twitching of the facial muscles,
and is frequently exceedingly obstinate. 
FACIAL NEURALGIA.
131
  As the homoeopathic treatment is directed to the peculiar kind
of pain,  as well as to its precise seat, and the disease is also
mostly attended by fever, I shall here name some of the  most
eligible remedies, and advise those residing at a distance from a
physician, to consult with him by writing.
  Aconite is  a most important remedy, when there is a crawling,
burning pain, as if from a deep seated ulcer which comes on by
starts, and is located in the cheek-bones, in the joint of  the jaw-
bones, and in the cheeks.
  Belladonna is most suitable in cases of long standing which
begin with an itching and tickling in the affected parts;  the pain
usually seated in bones of the cheek and  nose, and confined to
one side; frequently too it follows the course of the nerves dis-
tributed  below the eye, and is so severe as to be almost unendur-
able ; at times the pains are pricking and  drawing, accompanied
by a painful  stiffness of  the jaws and neck.
   China is indicated, when there is pressing, sticking, or prick-
ing pains of one side of  the face and nose, which are aggravated
by the touch, or are  renewed without any apparent cause, and
become fearfully severe.
   Veratrum  is indicated in drawing and tensive, or contractive
and pressive pains on one side only, which come on at intervals,
and drive the patient almost to distraction.
  Arsenicum is serviceable, when the  one-sided pain is mostly
about the eye and  temple, is of a burning or sticking nature, as
if from innumerable red  hot needles, and the whole face  presents
a sunken appearance.
  I will add  to these a few more remedies, not so generally used,
respecting the curative effects of which in this form of disease
I have now acquired perfect certainty.  The first is Capsicum
annum, 3d, when  the pain experienced is of a fine penetrating,
or burning, and tearing character, located in  the  nerves of the
right cheek bone, and is aggravated by contact, and especially
toward bed-time.
  Mezereum is indicated, when  there is a cramplike, numbness,
or pressure on the right  cheek bone which extends  to the adjoin- 
132
FAINTING.
ing parts and  often terminates in a violent  tearing pain;  it is
also commonly followed by shuddering and chills.
   Aurum, 6th, deserves attention, when  the predominant pain
is  of a tearing and sticking character, and is increased by  pres-
sure; the patient complains of great irritability of all the senses,
and of a peculiar susceptibility to pain, which may be excited
even by thinking of it.
   Colocynth is also useful in facial  neuralgia, when the pains
are tearing and constrictive, or burning and sticking;  are located
chiefly in the left side of the face, with  swelling, redness and
heat of the parts affected; and likewise when they are produced
or aggravated by an internal gnawing grief or mortification.

                          Fainting.
   Fainting of itself being the momentary loss of consciousness,
and of the use of the muscles, is, for the most part, certainly not
a  dangerous malady, notwithstanding it  excites in most people
a good deal of solicitude, and a desire to afford relief; often too
at the moment of the attack, which in many sensitive persons is
of a high grade, and exceedingly obstinate, and difficult to miti-
gate or put an end to, is the proper  time to  lessen or remove
entirely the disposition to a recurrence;  and  on  this account I
shall here direct  what is to be done in such cases.
   As persons while in a fainting fit are incapable of swallowing
anything, medicines can only be administered by smelling; aid
will often be obtained also by tickling the  nostrils with a feather,
and brushing the soles of the feet, or sprinkling cold water on
the face, and especially by freeing the patient of all tight clothing.
   Respecting the remedies, which may be given here with ad-
vantage, I would recommend in ordinary  cases Spirits of  Cam-
phor.  It may be applied to the nose and the temples, and the
forehead bathed with  it.
   In cases of fainting occasioned by fright, Opium is more suit-
able in the 3d attenuation, given by olfaction.
   Moschus is most appropriate for hypochondriacs;  weakly and
irritable men;  hysterical females,  and especially for chlorotic 
FATIGUE, OR INORDINATE EXERTION.         133
girls, who are often subject to fits of fainting. It may be applied
to the  nose, or two or three globules  of the 3d  attenuation laid
on the tongue.
   China, 6th attenuation, will be most efficient, if the fainting
be caused  by debility induced by great loss of fluids; such as
protracted nursing, frequent bleedings by the lancet, or haemor-
rhages from other cause;  copious discharges of semen (in coition
or by onanism),  long continued diarrhoeas,  &c.  This remedy
is also  particularly serviceable in cases of general debility, and
may be repeated every three or four days.
  After the  patient has come to, he  should be suffered to lie
still, as this is mostly the best way to  regain strength.  But all
is not accomplished by this, and if the patient is to be radically
freed from the evil, and  secured  against its return, a physician
must be consulted on the chronic cause, or origin of the disease.

              Fatigue, or Inordinate Exertion.
   The effects of inordinate exertion of the body, by walking too
much, by long continued exhausting labor, which induces sweat-
ing  and debility, are most readily removed by taking a warm
bath, and afterwards bathing the painful  joints  with  a lotion of
 Tincture of  Arnica—ten drops in  half a teacupful of  water.
Should this not succeed, and the pain of the limbs  continue a
day or two longer, Rhus toxicodendron is the most appropriate
remedy.  If the exertion create so  great a relaxation  of the
system that faintuess is threatened, there is no remedy equal to
 Veratrum, a single dose of  which will generally restore  the
patient.
   Complaints  arising from excessive exertion of mind, require
for  their relief one or more of  the following medicines: Nux
vomica, Colchicum, Pulsatilla,  and  Sepia.  The one most ge-
nerally  serviceable is Nux vomica, 12th, a dose every  other
evening.  If incessant night-work be the exciting cause, Colchi-
cum, 6th, is the remedy.  Occasionally also a dose of Pulsatilla,
or  Sejiia is required.
   Fatigue may  be occasioned  by violent emotions, severe  and 
134           FEET,  SORKS ON,—INJURIES OF.

long continued pain,  watching, spasms,  and in general by all
over exertion of the brain and muscular powers.   The patient
mostly recovers his strength sooner or later, though not always
without bad consequences, especially if exhaustion has been pro-
duced.
   The fatigue following sickness, or severe pains and spasms is
relieved by the same remedies employed  for the removal of the
primary disease, and to  which I shall not therefore refer here;
but speak only of the remedies most useful in  fatigue after long
journeys on  foot, especially in summer,  where  great weariness
and enervation of the entire  body is brought on  by the heat.
This is most readily removed  by washing the  whole body with
fresh water, first allowing a sufficient time for rest  and cooling
off, and quickly wiping it dry.  If the feet only be fatigued by
over exertion, they may be washed  with a mixture  of Arnica
tincture, of the strength mentioned above.  Fatigue from loss of
fluids for instance protracted diarrhoea, long continued nursing,
great loss of blood, night watching, &c,  will be most effectually
removed by  China, 6th attenuation.

                    FEET, SORES  ON.
                           See Ulcers.

                      Feet, injuries of.
   In injuries of the feet from a blow, fall, bruise, mis-step, &c,
followed by difficulty of motion in the foot or toes, with  severe
pain and swelling, the common treatment is rubbing with Opo-
deldoc or volatile linament, or washing with wine, brandy, cam-
phorated spirits, &c.  None of these, however, are so serviceable
as washing with a lotion of Arnica tincture—five to ten drops to
an ounce of water.   If there be an external  wound with fever,
 a dose or two of Arnica, 3d attenuation, internally, is also bene-
 ficial while the external treatment is continued.  If some of the
 large  tendons have been torn, which often causes great  pain, a
 surgeon should be called without delay,  and until  his arrival a
 dose  of Natrum muriaticum  may be given  with advantage, 
       FEET,  SWEATING OP.   FEVER, INTERMITTENT.    135

which will often almost instantly remove the pain, and induce a
more speedy cure.  Ruta, 3d, is almost specific in the so-called
sprains  of the foot, against which, however, I have also  found
Rhus toxicodendron very beneficial.

                     Feet, sweating of.
   Sweating of the feet  is a very great annoyance;  I mean those
clammy, offensive sweats, which  are  so enormous that the pa-
tient is obliged to change his stockings several times in  a day.
Against these very offensive sweats I have often given with advan-
tage a  few doses of Nitric acid, repeated every three or four
days.   If this did not  entirely succeed, I  gave daily a dose of
Baryta acetica;  and occasionally I had recourse to the alternate
use  of remedies.  With the exception of these sweats the  person
is generally quite  well, and  therefore  believes he  can remove
them without danger, by  cold foot-baths, preparations of lead,
&c.   But the suppression is often followed by dangerous  conse-
quences, and  consequently any one who labors under  this com-
plaint must be cautious in his attempts to suppress it.  The best
homoeopathic  remedy I  have found, as well against footsweats as
against the consequences of its  suppression, is Rhus toxicoden-
dron, repeated every three or four days. To aid the cure, wrap-
ping the feet  in blotting paper, or surrounding them with birch
leaves,  has often been of essential service.

                     Fever,  intermittent.
   Against this fever no particular remedy can be  proposed  in
 my  opinion;  on which account I have in both  the  preceding
 editions, excluded it from the  number of  diseases  to be  treated
 by the  laity.   Since that time, however, remedies have been re-
 commended the  efficacy of which  I  have  been obliged in many
 cases, in  justice  to admit; I have therefore no objection to in-
 troduce them here.   This fever  consists of three stages, namely
 a cold, a hot, and a sweating stage, together called  a paroxysm,
 and is  succeeded by an interval of freedom from fever (apyrexia)
 during which the patient mostly feels well, but somewhat weak. 
136               FEVER, INTERMITTENT.

There arc several types of intermittents; those most frequently
met with are : the quotidian, in which there is a daily paroxysm ;
the tertian, in which there is a paroxysm  every other day, and
the quartan, in which  there is a paroxysm  every third day.
Usually the paroxysms take place at the same  hour each day.
   The cold stage begins with stretching of  the limbs, paleness
of the face, blueness of the hands and finger nails, and  gradu-
ally increases to a severe chill with shaking  of the  limbs, chat-
tering of the teeth, &c, it often lasts several hours, during which
time the patient cannot get warm.   To this  succeeds heat with
burning and insatiable thirst, which likewise  often continue seve-
ral hours and then passes off with copious sweating.
   The best  mode  of treating these fevers is as follows:  To ad-
minister in the interval between the paroxysms or commencing
even before the termination of the sweating  stage—cspecicdly in
daily intermittents—every three hours, a dose of the 3d attenua-
tion of Ipecacuanha, so that about four  doses may have been
taken before the next attack, the last  of the four two hours be-
fore the  onset.  During the fever no medicine unless it be a dose
of Aconite should be given.  In  tertian or quartan intermittents
the same remedy may be given at intervals of four hours.  The
Ipecacuanha may be continued in this way until within  two
hours of the third attack.  But after this a dose of Nux vomica
must be given in the evening.
   Some cases I have successfully treated by  Ipecacuanha alone;
in others the Nux vomica was required.  Others again were not
removed by this mode of  treatment;  and their further manage-
ment must be committed to the physician;  for when the treat-
ment above  recommended fails, it is a sure sign that the  cure of
the disease is prevented by a more deeply seated  malady, which
demands other remedies for its eradication.
   China is  the cfiief remedy for this fever, particularly in damp,
marshy places, which, if both the previous  remedies have been
inefficient, should be given, in the 12th attenuation, every three
or four hours, till about three hours before  the commencement
of the next paroxysm. 
FEVER, BILIOUS  AND GASTRIC.         .   137
   Arsenicum, is also a valuable remedy, and deserves especial
attention in intermittents which have been several times removed
by China, but have constantly returned  after the lapse of from
eight to fourteen days.  The low attenuations of this medicine
are preferable;  I give five drops in water three times daily, and
increase the dose gradually up to ten drops.

                 Fever, bilious and gastric.
   It will not  be proper to separate these  two forms of fever for
the laity,  as  their distinctive signs are  too subtile  to be dis-
covered  by one unacquainted with medicine.   I therefore  place
them together, and  the  more willingly as  they frequently have
similar exciting causes, on the  consideration of which the right
choice of the  suitable remedy depends. The symptoms of fevers
of this kind are: Alternating chilliness  and heat with general
debility; yellowish or whitish coated tongue; offensive breath;
sour or  bitter taste and  eructations; loathing of food; nausea;
vomiting; loss of  appetite;  costiveness  or diarrhoea; clay co-
lored or yellowish face;  pressure  and  tightness under the ribs;
headache, restlessness, and great thirst.
   Aconite must be given first, if the fever is very violent, which
is frequently the case in young,  robust subjects, especially in the
spring of the year;  followed, after four to six hours, by Nux
vomica,  especially when there is oppressive headache with cos-
tiveness; vomiting of food with severe  cramplike pain in the pit
of the stomach, and under the  ribs of the left side.   Ipecacu-
anha deserves the preference, when there is severe vomiting and
diarrhoea—two or three doses may be given at intervals of three
hours, after which,  if there  is no  improvement, Antimonium
crudum  should be substituted.  Pulsatilla, repeated every three
hours, is most suitable, when there is vomiting and  diarrhoea,
consisting chiefly of slimy or mucous substances, the patient com-
plains of constant loathing, and inclination to vomit, with  sleep-
lessness  and  tossing  about  at  night,  anxiety, &c.   It is also
appropriate when the remedies already given, have not entirely
removed the sickness, and prostration of  strength, debility, chil-
       18 
138
FKVER, MILIARY.
liness, want of appetite, &c, remain.  In such cases I have also
given, especially when accompanied by excessive night  sweats,
Phosphoric  acid, 3d, every three  hours with great advautage.
If the disease is owing to a violent fit of anger, Chamomilla,
repeated every three hours, is the chief remedy, particularly
when there is a flushed face with dry lips and great thirst;  cold-
ness of the extremities; oppressive weight in the forehead; bitter
bilious taste with a yellowish  coated  tongue; loss of appetite
with tension of the abdomen, feeling of pressure in the stomach;
loose green or mixed stools;  restlessness  and  anxiety during
Bleep.   Ignatia  is indicated, when  this affection  is  brought  on
by silent vexation, grief or shame.   Staphysagria is to be given,
when violent indignation is combined with  anger.   Again Pul-
satilla is often proper, when Chamomilla alone has been inade-
quate. Mercurius solubilis is a valuable remedy in these diseases,
when the evacuations from the bowels are  green, acrid,  or con-
sist  of mucus mixed with  blood, attended by pressure on the
rectum, anxiety  and trembling  with pain in the bowels, and fre-
quent fainting fits.

                 Fever, miliary.   Rash, &c.
   This is a very common disease attacking  all ages; it may be
occasioned by suppressed perspiration,  disturbance  of digestion,
or too free use of spirituous drinks, and at  times by eating cer-
tain articles of food, for instance, crabs; sometimes, however, it
occurs without any apparent cause.  It  is usually thought  to be
unattended by danger, and it is generally so in  fact: although
it may, when imprudently suppressed, by taking cold for instance,
be translated to  some more important part than  the skin, and
attended with very serious consequences.    The rule that in this
disease it  is necessary to  guard against cold, and keep warmer
than usual, and the knowledge  that a cure  is effected  by nature
in many cases, though increased transpiration, has led both phy-
sicians and laymen to the conclusion, that it must be removed by
inducing perspiration.  Hence  the  patient drinks as much warm
tea as possible, in order to bring about this result.  But that this 
FEVER,  MILIARY.
139
treatment is not always successful, is evident, from the fact that
one kind  of miliary eruption comes out in the cold, and on the
contrary disappears in the heat.  Being kept too warm is not at
all proper, as it increases the  fever, excites it when not present,
and prevents sleep.  The patient need only guard against taking
cold, and  take  one of the homoeopathic remedies recommended
below, suited to his condition.
  Ipecacuanha will mostly relieve the  symptoms which  occa-
sionally appear before the eruption  is fully developed, and which
appear  to  be of more consequence than they are in reality.  The
following are the most common : tightness of the chest; difficult
respiration;  dimness of sight; trembling;  nausea; vomiting;
cutting pains in the bowels;  diarrhoea;  general restlessness;
fainting, &c.  These symptoms show themselves chiefly in chil-
dren, very sensitive and plethoric persons, and females.
   Chamomilla will generally remove the most common  form
of this complaint, frequently met with in young children,  espe-
cially when  caused by taking cold; and  which consists of red
patches of round  pimples about the size of a pin's head, not, at
all, or but slightly, elevated, are constantly visible, and are not
changed by cold or heat.  At night especially it is  attended  by
itching or biting, which prevents sleep; toward evening there is
generally some shuddering,  and at night moderate heat;  in
children it occasions great restlessness, fretfulness, crying, &c.
Sulphur,  6th,  is  likewise beneficial in  this species of rash.
   Aconite will be useful in cases attended by much feverishness,
or heat, followed in six or eight  hours by one of the remedies
above mentioned.
   In the cases caused by taking  cold, Chamomilla,  if given in
the evening, will mostly induce a  moderate degree  of perspira-
tion by next morning, which should not be disturbed.
   Pulsatilla, 12th, is indicated in  cases, in which the  eruption
has been occasioned by disturbed digestion, or the use of  some
particular article of diet; and where it is not smooth,  but assumes
the character of Nettle-rash, and is accompanied by the following
symptoms: 
140
FELON.
   Red spots over the whole body, that are either smooth or flat,
or raised  in welts or ridges as from nettles, attended by  a fine
sticking or itching, as if  from numerous flea-bites, and is  espe-
cially troublesome towards midnight, hindering sleep;  with loss
of appetite, fulness at the pit  of the stomach; frequent shiver-
ing ; chilliness; irritability, fretfulness,  moroseness, and weak-
ness and numbness in the limbs.
   Rhus toxicodendron and Dulcamara are also valuable in this
species of  eruption.
   Nux vomica, 12th, is  preferable in eruptions similar to the
preceding, caused by excessive use of wine and other spirituous
liquors, or which depends on  some chronic disease, such as sup-
pressed haemorrhoids, &c, that appear from time  to time, and
affects  only particular parts, as, an arm, a knee, &c,  and con-
sists of smooth  red spots, attended by great itching, and followed
by pain aud soreness.

                Felon.  Whitlow.  Panaris.

   This is  a painful inflammatory swelling generally situated at
the end of the  finger, which comes on without any apparent ex-
ternal cause, and after it is cured often soon attacks  another, or
appears again on the same finger.   The domestic remedies used
in this kind of inflammation, which mostly consist of  irritating
external applications, are almost always unsuitable, and not only
retard  the cure, but  often  aggravate the disease.  It  is much
more easily and speedily managed  by homoeopathic remedies.
A few  doses  of Mercurius solubilis maybe first administered;
followed, if it does not answer, by Hepar sulphuris, 6th. If after
three or four days no favorable change is manifested in the dis-
ease, a dose of Sepia, in a high attenuation, is often of the great-
est benefit.  Mezereum is likewise  frequently useful in obstinate
cases which threaten the  loss of a joint.  Silicea is adapted to
the worst  forms of the disease where the tendons and bones are
implicated, a few doses  of which will  often effect  a  favorable
change. 
FLATULENCY.   FRIGHT.
141
  Poultices of flaxseed, oatmeal,  chewed  bread, or bread and
milk  with a little saffron, may be applied advantageously;  at
times also the application of  the rind of bacon is useful.

                         Flatulency.
  This complaint is considered more  fully under the  head  of
" Colic".  I shall  here  refer only  to the milder cases which are
unattended by cutting  pains in the bowels, and are easily re-
moved by medicine, and not those tedious ones that  depend on
haemorrhoidal and other chronic complaints.  Thus it often occurs
that after eating certain articles of food, such as cabbage of vari-
ous kinds, sourcrout, much fat, and drinking too freely of water,
or fresh, not well worked beer, and similar  errors of diet, a great
deal of flatulency, is generated which is often partly thrown off
by  belching,  partly by the bowels  without  occasioning pain, but
yet distends the abdomen, impedes respiration, and is otherwise
troublesome.
  In  these  cases  China  is particularly serviceable; or in per-
sons of choleric temperament Nux vomica may be  preferable;
and in females and persons of a quiet mild  disposition, as also
after  the use of pork and other fat food, Pulsatilla is useful.

                          Fright.
   Effects as injurious and often even more dangerous to health
than those from anger may result from fright.  It may be caused
by  any sudden and unexpected misfortune which produces an
instantaneous excitement of the whole  inner activity of the or-
ganism.  In very sensitive and irritable subjects it requires  a
length  of time  to quiet the  excited organism again, and  even
then  effects are often left behind  that  are  exceedingly trouble-
some and difficult to remove.   It  will  therefore not  be out of
place to give the symptoms, and the most appropriate remedies
in such cases.
   The  symptoms most frequently met with  after  fright are:
Tearing pressive pain  in the  forehead; sour eructations; sour
vomiting; disposition to lie down; breaking out of  cold sweat; 
142
FROST-BITE.
feeling of weight in the abdomen with anxiety, inward heat and
heaviness of the head; sudden stiffness of the whole body with
shortness of breath;  trembling of the limbs with spasmodic
breathing;  spasms of the whole body and twitching in the limbs
with external coldness, and a sort  of lethargic sleep with snor-
ing, &c.
  The symptoms here described are seldom all met with in one
subject affected with fright, but some persons suffer more  from
one, and some from another symptom.
   Opium, 3d attenuation, is the most  suitable remedy for the
first effects of fright (no matter what external symptoms are pre-
sented),  and if it can be given immediately will often remove
the effects entirely in a short time.
   Sambucus must be given instead of  Opium, if a  considerable
time,  perhaps several hours have elapsed after the fright, with-
out the patient  having taken the latter.  A drop of the undiluted
tincture may be administered at a  time.
   Aconite  is also one of the most efficacious remedies against
the effects of fright, and will often succeed in allaying the nerv-
ous excitement after the above remedies have failed.  It will in
all cases be preferable to Opium, if the latter  have not been
given immediately.

                        Frost - Bite.
   Persons apparently dead from exposure to cold may frequently
be restored by appropriate medical treatment. The safest remedy
is cold, which will soon restore the vital powers, if not altogether
extinct;  while heat  applied would completely extinguish the
last  spark of life.   The greatest  prudence is requisite  in the
treatment of frozen persons, as the limbs  and whole  body are
often  so rigid  that they may easily be broken  by removal, by
undressing, and the necessary manipulations. A most important
rule, also to be observed in warming the patient, is to begin at a
low  temperature, and rise gradually to the higher.   To effect
this the clothes should be  all removed, using the knife or scissors
freely, and the entire body except the nose and  mouth covered 
FROST-BITE.
143
with snow  to  the depth of one or two inches, which should be
pressed firmly, and fresh snow  added, as  fast as it melts  off.
When snow cannot be had, ice-cold water is the best substitute,
used as a bath, or by means of cloths wrapped round the body.
After  about an hour let  him be taken out  of the snow, and
washed freely  with  melted snow-water, and endeavor gradually
and carefully to move the limbs.  This treatment must be  con-
tinued until there are signs of returning animation, and then
discontinued.   The patient must now be wiped dry, and put to
bed, where practicable, in a chamber moderately warm, and the
pit of  the  stomach and  temples rubbed with wine, and harts-
horne  or spirits of camphor applied occasionally to the nose.
When the  functions of life are fully restored, mild internal reme-
dies are to  be used, at first wine, or still better, strong coffee (the
palliative effects of  which in sudden attacks of disease requiring
prompt assistance, for instance, sea-sickness,  poisoning by lau-
danum, by  white hellebore; in apparent death from drunkenness,
suffocation, freezing,  &c,  have  often been  tested), afterwards
gruel,  broths, &c, are most suitable.   If the patient complains
of a want of feeling in any of the single members, as the nose,
ears, hands, feet, they must be again treated as at first.
   Frost-bite of individual parts of the body, which when winter
sets in, causes itching, burning, chapping,  bleeding, &c, is  sel-
dom removed  by a single remedy, but several will be necessary
to effect a cure.  Those  most generally serviceable are: Nux
vomica, Pulsatilla, Thuya, and Arnica.
   The Tincture of Arnica (five drops in a tablespoonful of pure
rye-whiskey)  is particularly useful against the inflammation,
pain  and  itching from  frost-bite: the  affected  parts  may be
bathed with it two or three times a day, or it may be applied by
means of wet cloths.
   Nux vomica is indicated in persons of active, violent tempera-
ment,  when the parts are red and swollen with painful itching
or burning. Pulsatilla and Thuya in persons of phlegmatic tem-
perament when the sores  assume a bluish red appearance.   A
similar treatment is required in the so-called " Chilblains" which 
144         GIDDINESS.   GLANDS, SWELLING OF.

often become painful in summer after taking cold, errors in diet,
&e.  In this case the following remedies arc most  serviceable:
when cold is the exciting cause Dulcamara, Rhus toxicodendron,
and Nux vomica; when errors of diet, Bryonia,  or Pulsatilla;
when  anger, Chamomilla, Ignatia amara,  and Colocynth.  To
effect a radical cure in cases  of long standing, Sulphur, Nitric
acid, and  Petroleum will be found most efficient.
                            G.

                     GIDDINESS.
                         See Vertigo.
                   Glands,  swelling of.
  These swellings are not always visible, but may be discovered
by the touch of the finger; they consist of roundish, more  or
less hard bodies, in some cases  of a  stony hardness, from the
size of a pea to that of a hen's egg.  Commonly the tumor is
without pain, even pressure  on it excites but a dull pain, and
the skin covering it, is not discolored.  The tumor, however,
may inflame and become painful and red.
  As swelling of the glands in many cases is only the result of
a general diseased state of the body, it is therefore only prac-
ticable  here  to mention  a few of the remedies,  which have
proved most useful  in isolated forms  of the disease.
  Dulcamara, 3d, is  particularly useful against swollen and
hardened glands of the  neck and throat, unattended  by other
striking symptoms.  It may be administered by giving one drop
in water, or three or  four globules daily, until  the  disease is
entirely removed.  When the glands are of  a stony  hardness,
and fixed, with inability to move the neck, the alternate use of
Dulcamara and  Conium will be found  of  great advantage.
  Mercurius solubilis, 6th, must be given when suppuration of
the glands  is threatened, and repeated morning and  evening, 
GOUT.
145
for two  or three days; followed, if necessary, by Hepar sul-
phuris, 6th, in the same way.   If this  treatment should  not
succeed,  there is  often benefit derived from  alternating these
two  remedies day about.   Swelling of the glands occasioned
by blows,  bruises &c,  will be  removed by the timely use of
Arnica, internally a dose every day,  and externally by washing
with a lotion of  five to ten drops of  tincture of Arnica in  half
a  teacupful  of  water.   In cases where a  length  of  time  has
elapsed after the reception  of the injury, and  this remedy  has
not been applied, and the  glands  have also become very hard,
Conium maculatum is preferable, repeated  every three or four
days;  Conium is also the chief remedy against affections of the
glands of the female breasts occasioned by  blows or bruises.
   If the glands  begin to inflame, a dose of Bryonia, 12th,  will
often remove the evil; but if the inflammation assumes a deep
red, erysipelas character, extending  in rays, Belladonna, 15th,
will be most suitable.  Here also it  may be necessary to have
recourse to the aid of Mercurius solubilis or Hepar sulphuris.
   When these tumors are numerous, or the  patient labors under
other complaints, the layman should not undertake their treat-
ment without calling in the physician.
   The regimen in this species of disease consists in keeping the
affected parts warm, avoiding  all spirituous  and stimulating
drinks and, if possible, daily exercise in the open air.

                      Gout.  Podagra.
   In  common life the term gout is frequently applied to cases
which are far from being such :  it does not by any means con-
sist in the wandering pains in  the joints,  which  many people
carry to  the grave with them,  without having once suffered
from  a real fit of gout.  This is not  the place  to  speak of the
inflammatory gout and  the occasional fatality  of its symptoms,
for it can never  be safely entrusted to lay treatment.  It will be
proper however, to make some remarks about the shifting pains,
for which the advice of a physician is not always obtained,  and
which nevertheless often lay the foundation of  more serious  suf-
       19 
146
GOUT.
ferings, and  pass into  true  gout, when aided by a favorable,
often trifling exciting cause.
   These complaints indeed, when they have continued  for some
time and  become fixed in the organism,  do not yield  at once,
but require the frequent use of the proper remedies; they may
however, by an appropriate selection of the medicines,  be safely
and radically cured.
   I would also remark, that  these  tearing pains are often the
result of drugs, especially the so-called domestic remedies, which
have been improperly chosen  and used in too great  quantity.
If people would cease to use these articles  which  they call
domestic  medicines and consider harmless, and use  with the
greatest want of consideration as to quantity,  thus opening the
way for more serious  diseases, by the excessive quantities of the
remedies, there would be at least one-half the number of patients
less who complain of tearing  pains.
   One  of these domestic  medicines, which is in most common
use, is  Valerian, and this it is, which too often, and for a long
time, leaves  behind  it these tearing pains in  the limbs,  and
numerous other complaints.  It belongs to the most  powerful
medicines which we possess, and should never be tampered with
as an innocent tea, least of all for children, whose  tender organ-
ism  is much more susceptible to its action than that  of grown
persons.
   Still more injurious to the human system is quicksilver which,
under the names of Calomel, Mercurius dulcis, Hydrargyrum mu-
riaticum mite, &c., is given so plentifully. If it were known that
half a grain  of quicksilver taken by a healthy person  to test its
curative power  acts on him for two or three weeks and  longer,
and creates an artificial diseased state, it might readily be  con-
cluded  that these effects would be much greater on a diseased
body, would  continue longer, and must leave  behind  a  disposi-
tion to repeated returns of this artificial disease.   This  then  is
the case, and there is nothing more common, than for children,
to whom Calomel has been given in croup, to have black teeth,
swollen glands, ulcers of the mouth, most  obstinate   inflamma- 
GOUT.
147
tions of the eyes, atrophy or wasting away of the flesh, and de-
bility; and  for grown persons  who  have taken this  medicine
in syphilitic complaints, frequently to the amount of ounces, to
be visited with long continued  tearing pains, or even with gout
itself, spitting  of blood, complete  destruction of the  digestive
powers, &c.
   I would moreover take this opportunity to speak against  the
imprudent use of Mezereum, which is very often applied exter-
nally for the purpose of keeping up a perpetual blister, and even
laid upon the parts  already made sore.  This article, when it is
softened, gives  out an exceedingly acrid juice, which is absorbed
by the parts laid bare, and  by long continued  action on  the
system brings on tedious, irritable, violently acute and drawing
pains in the bones and sinews.   Would that the improper  use
of these  powerful medicines was henceforth abandoned!
   In  cases of  acute tearing pain, where neither Valerian  nor
quicksilver can be suspected as the sole or even partial cause,
they serve as excellent domestic remedies, and I shall here direct
their proper employment somewhat more distinctly.
   Valeriana, 6th attenuation, is especially indicated in tearing,
spasmodic, drawing, or cramplike pains, as well in the upper as
in the lower limbs,  which often  change from one to the other,
and is not confined to the joint, but attack the whole  length
of the limbs;  they are worse during  rest, while  standing or
sitting, or after exercise, and mostly relieved  by motion;  and
also  attended by a feeling of weakness and  lameness in  the
affected parts.  Frequently these pains are succeeded or accom-
panied by sticking or pinching pains which  come on  in  the
evening, and become very violent shortly before midnight; they
often  gradually abate,  and then  suddenly renew their attack
again.  These sufferings are mostly attended with general excite-
ment of  the  nervous system, great sensitiveness to ordinary
influences, anxiety  and sleeplessness, and often accompanied
with exacerbations of fever  in  the evening with a full, strong
pulse.   A few  doses of this  remedy  will generally relieve  the
patient for a month or more, after which the pains often appear 
148
GOUT.
 again, but in a milder degree  and may be again  removed  by
 repeated doses of the same medicine.  If, however, they do not
 yield now and have changed  their character,  one of the fol-
 lowing remedies will be more suitable.
   Mercurius, 6th attenuation, is best adapted  to drawing, tear-
 ing, sticking, burning or cramplike pains, occasioned by exposure
 to cold, damp air, and aggravated by the warmth  of the  bed;
 attended with chilliness, great prostration of strength, heaviness
 and weariness of the limbs, and with a puffy appearance of the
 skin on the hands and feet, or other parts affected, which renders
 motion difficult; also  pains which usually come on about two
 o'clock in the afternoon, and seem  to  be  seated in the bones,
 and especially in the joints, exciting in the latter, from time to
 time, painless throbbings, which extend from the joints even to
 the ends of  the fingers and toes, causing general restlessness
 and disposition to move from one place to another.  These throb-
 bings often extend from the bones to the tendons and muscles,
 and give rise to pain, stiffness,  difficult  and painful motion.
   It must  not be expected, that  the  evil can  be  removed  at
 once, as it in most cases returns frequently, though in a milder
 form.  In these returns, when the symptoms  are like those of
 previous  attacks, the same remedy must  be  resorted to again
 which gave relief before.
   The Magnet will be serviceable in drawing, tearing, obstinate,
 bruiselike pains, with numbness of the affected parts, which are
 mostly occasioned by  exposure to a current of cold air, are
 worse towards evening, and particularly in the night,—and affect
 all the limbs. At times they are of a boring character, at others
 the part feels as if severely bruised, or as if the  limb were dis-
 located ;  the  pains often disappear suddenly for a short time,
 and reappear as quickly: sometimes the disease appears to be
 seated in the  tendons and  ligaments, at others in the muscles •
it is likewise  frequently accompanied by a feeling of coldness  in
 the affected parts.  The attacks often come on suddenly without
 any apparent  cause;  the pains are generally most severe in the
articulations,  rendering motions  of the limb  exceedingly difficult 
GOUT.
149
and  painful, and  are  aggravated by moving the parts.  The
application of the  whole surface of the magnet for from five to
ten minutes by passing it gently over  the affected  parts, will
generally speedily  remove the pains. If they come on again,
let the magnet be  used a second or third time, but for a shorter
period, until the symptoms entirely disappear or assume another
character.
  Bryonia, 12th attenuation, is useful against pains  occasioned
by motion, accompanied by coldness of  the affected parts; the
pains are seated more in the whole limb than in the joints, and
more in the fleshy parts than in the bones, and are of  a drawing,
tearing, pressive or sticking character, with trembling of the
parts affected, or pain as if from being beaten, and heaviness of
the limbs.
  In cases similar to the above, occasioned by taking  cold,
Dulcamara will likewise be useful.
   Chamomilla, 3d, is most appropriate,  when the pain is more
in the tendons, ligaments, or bones and unattended by swelling;
if it comes on most  severely at night, or attacks  the spinal
column, beginning above and extending downwards, and when
it extends from the small of the back to the thigh. If this remedy
should not be sufficient, it  may be alternated with  Pulsatilla,
especially when  the pains are jerking and tearing, or drawing
in the muscles, and are mitigated in the open air, and aggravated
in a warm room or in bed.
  Rhus toxicod. is most suitable in tensive, tearing and drawing
pains, which make their appearance during rest, on rising from
a sitting posture, and are worse in the  open air, with a feeling
of numbness and deadness in the affected  parts, which are red
and shining, and painful on being touched.
  In the cases above mentioned, all outward applications, such
as cotton,  oiled silk, wool, flannel  underclothes, &c, must be
avoided, inasmuch as they only heighten the temperature of the
affected parts, increase their susceptibility, induce sweating, and
render them more susceptible  to pain.   The liability  to  more 
150
GOUT.
frequent returns will also be increased, and the disease become
more and more obstinate, and finally incurable.
   It is much better unless there be  considerable fever, or much
weakness which compells the patient to keep his bed, for him to
take considerable exercise in the open air, daily, even in winter.
By this means the skin is brought into action, by the operation
of its natural and healthy irritants, and kept  in contact with
habitual influences the long absence of which is unavoidably
attended with great sensitiveness of  the skin, and which operate
under such circumstances as morbid  influences.
   The Podagra, or  Gout, is indeed in close affinity to the pains
above described, but is of a  far more intense grade, and requires
a greater distinctness and development  as  a disease.  It is an
inflammatory affection  of the feet, especially the  joints of the
great toes attended with swelling, pains and inability to move
the parts implicated. As a disease which may be very dangerous
in its consequences, and requires a very  prudent  treatment,
which cannot  be entrusted to  the  laity, it does not properly
belong here; nevertheless I have  admitted it, because the lay-
man, particularly in the country,  seldom calls  in the aid of a
physician, but on the contrary much prefers to follow the advice
of neighbours and friends,  thereby often preparing for himself
inexpressible sufferings.  On this account I shall direct attention
to some  remedies  for  gouty patients  which are  seldom given
without benefit, provided due attention be paid to the rules and
directions of homoeopathic diet.
  Aconite, 12th attenuation, will  be indicated in the beginning
if there be considerable inflammation in the parts  affected, or  if
there be a general febrile condition, as is almost always the case
with irritable, full blooded sensitive persons.  After giving one
dose of this remedy, nothing else should be  given for 10 or 12
hours, after which if there be some improvement, another dose
may be given,  but  if on the  contrary the symptoms be worse
another medicine must be selected.
  Arnica, 6th attenuation,  is an  excellent remedy  to succeed
Aconite in this  form of disease, if  the patient complains of a 
GOITRE.
151
numbness, and pain, as if the part were dislocated; or of pain
and  restlessness, as if he lay on too hard a bed which  obliges
him  to be constantly moving the part affected.  A few globules
or a  drop of the liquid  on sugar or in a teaspoonful of water
may be given at a dose.
   Arnica is also beneficial when there are pricking, crawling, or
paralytic pains with great heat and shining redness of the parts;
the  pains  are  aggravated by speaking, sneezing, moving and
even from noise; or when this apparently local disease is brought
on by taking cold after excesses in eating and drinking.   Here
also  Nux vomica may be given  with benefit, one to six globules
of the 12th attenuation.
   If none of these have a satisfactory effect, Sulphur in tincture
may be administered with good results.  It  should  be given
several  times at intervals of one or two days between the doses.

                           Goitre.
   The term goitre  is  applied to a swelling  and enlargement of
the shield-like (thyroid) gland which is located in front and at
the head  of the windpipe.  When this  swelling becomes large
it disfigures the throat very much,  and by its pressure upon the
windpipe restricts  respiration,  particularly when  walking and
going  up  stairs.   Scrofula in early  life frequently  lays  the
foundation for this disease; difficult labors may also sometimes
induce  it in after-life.  This complaint is  most frequently met
with in mountainous countries,  and the female sex is more sub-
ject to it than  the male.
   The  best remedy in these cases is Spongia marina tosta, in
frequently  repeated doses.   A thorough cure is not, however,
always  effected, but still much is gained if the tumor can be
lessened and its further growth checked.  Indeed, in order to
accomplish this, it is frequently necessary to use lower and lower
attenuations, and even to recur to the  pure  tincture.  My advice
however is, to  begin with the 6th attenuation. 
152
GREEN SICKNESS.
                Green  Sickness.  Chlorosis.
  This malady is peculiar to the  female sex, and occurs during
the period of development from girlhood to womanhood, some-
times continuing months, or even years, and only disappearing
by the regular establishment of menstruation.  The chief symp-
toms are, a marked paleness, running into greenish yellow, and
bloodless color of the skin, which  becomes flabby, and feels cold;
the patients  are always chilly, the tongue is very pale, there is
general weakness of the muscles, the patients are easily fatigued,
hence aie languid and constantly seek for rest, complain of dif-
ficult breathing, especially on going up stairs, palpitation of the
heart; weak, small pulse; loss of appetite, oppression, belchings,
flatulency after eating, frequent burning in the stomach, nausea,
and sometimes vomiting, costiveness, sadness, and great inclina-
tion to sleep.  The exciting causes are, unwholesome air, damp-
ness, cold, indigestible  food  and stimulating drinks,  especially
strong teas, coffee and  spiced drinks; inactivity or too great
exertion, grief, solicitude, sorrow, and too early sexual instinct.
   Its treatment must be commenced by adopting a natural sys-
tem of diet; hence everything calculated  to excite the pro-
creative appetite is to be avoided, as, stimulating food and drinks,
excitement  of the imagination  by lively  impressions on  the
mind, reading  loose romances,  balls,  plays,  indolent  habits,
sleeping in soft beds, or sleeping too  long.  Likewise, regular
activity of mind and body must not be neglected.  If the disease
be brought on by great haemorrhage, by blood letting, excessive
purging, sexual indulgence, or the vice  of self-pollution, China
should be given daily; this remedy is also suitable when there is
swelling of the limbs, particularly the feet, blue circles round the
eyes, distention of the abdomen, costiveness, acute pains, drawings
and cramps in  the  bowels, indigestion, sour belchings, &c.  If
this remedy is not sufficient, and the patient be of a complaining,
sorrowful disposition, with weak or protracted menstruation, pale-
ness of the face, and laxity  of muscular fibre, Pulsatilla  should
b3  given daily.  In great excitement  of the sexual  functions,
Platina is indicated, one dose daily. Sulphur, either in .tincture, 
GRIPPE.
153
or in attenuation, is one of the best remedies in this complaint,
repeated every other day. Fcrrum metallicum is likewise useful
in many cases after or in alternation with Sulphur.  According
to my experience, however, Sulphur is the corresponding remedy
to Pulsatilla, and may  be given alternately with it,  that is, one
day Sulphur, and the next Pulsatilla.—In the well-defined and
chronic cases of chlorosis, Fcrrum is almost indispensable, espe-
cially when there  is violent palpitation of the heart  and strong,
irregular pulse.  In such cases it should be repeated morning
and evening, and continued for a length of time.  The advise of
a homoeopathic physician will be requisite in most cases of this
disease.
                           Grippe.
   This is an  epidemic  disease which  generally attacks very
suddenly,  and presents the following  symptoms:  cough, and
watery discharge from the nose, with drawing pains and stiffness
of the neck and great debility; to these may be frequently ad-
ded  numerous  other symptoms,  such as pains of  the  throat,
stitches in the sides, coughing up of blood, fever, headache, loss
of appetite, diarrhoea, and other abdominal complaints.  As the
grippe is generally more violent in its attack than a catarrh fever,
and is more apt to affect the chest, and lay the foundation for
consumptive diseases, I would therefore warn the layman to ob-
tain the advice of a physician while relief is yet possible, and
not to trust the treatment too long to his own powers.
   I shall hence only direct those medicines which have in gene-
ral proved most serviceable at the beginning.  Smelling Cam-
phor, 3d, several times, is often very beneficial in checking the
progress of the disease.  When inflammation of the organs of
the chest  predominates, one or two doses of Aconite must always
be first given at intervals of three hours; which may be followed
by Ntix vomica.—Mostly,  however, Mercurius  solubilis, parti-
cularly in severe affections  of the head, throat  and chest, with
a dry, shaking cough which  afterwards becomes loose, will relieve
the disease in doses repeated daily, or twice a day.  On the con-
trary when the windpipe is  much irritated, and inflamed, so that
       20 
154
GRIEF  AND  SORROW.
the severe pain will hardly allow the  patient to speak, and  his
voice is much changed, Phosphorus is the best  remedy.   When
the cough begins  to get looser,  and the  expectoration becomes
more  copious, Bryonia alba is the most appropriate remedy,
given once or twice a day.  See also " Catarrh " and " Cough".

                     Grief and Sorrow.
   Grief, when long indulged may make a deep  impression  on
the mind, and give rise to as many morbid symptoms as anger
and fright.  Its effects bear a close resemblance to those arising
from vexation, as manifested in persons who  arc not prone to
break  out into violence, or become enraged, but who conceal the
cause  within  themselves, thus keeping up a  constant remem-
brance of the occurrence.  In cases of this kind,  even when epi-
lepsies of an intractible character occur, Ignatia amara, 12th,
is the most suitable remedy, and  if the disease  is not entirely
removed by one  dose, it may be repeated daily, or every two or
three  days.
   If grief  and sorrow should occasion pressure at the stomach,
with vomiting, or dizziness with headache, Ignatia will  also be
 useful—more  frequently, however, a dose of Phosphoric acid
 will be indicated.
    Grief may also  be brought on by unhappy love, and is then
 likewise removed by Ignatia, repeated a few times; occasionally,
 if accompanied by fever, it may be necessary to alternate Igna-
 tia with Phosphoric  acid.—If jealousy be the  exciting cause,
 and especially when the patient is disposed to be violent, Ilyos-
 cyamus is most  appropriate, repeated once or twice a day.
    If  homesickness give rise  to unpleasant symptoms,  and the
 patient is unable to sleep, and has heat and redness of the cheeks,
  Capsicum, 9th,  is the most  suitable remedy; for which Phos-
 phoric acid may be substituted when hectic  fever,  morning
 sweats, great drowsiness, apathy and dullness  take place.
    Staphysagria is generally most serviceable against the  pro-
 tracted effects of grief and sorrow,  such as fretfulness, morose-
 ness, restlessness,  fear, melancholy, timid apprehension of the 
         GREEDINESS.  HAEMORRHOIDS.  HEADACHE.     155

future, drowsiness by day, want  of sleep by night, debilitating
sweats, falling  off of the  hair, languid speech, &c. Phosphoric
acid, when the patient from mere vexation will  not speak, and
becomes thin  and feverish.  Mercurius vivus,  if he  is  more
quarrelsome, perverse and irritable, and has frequent attacks of
anxiety.
                    Greediness.  Bulimy.
   Greediness or bulimy consists in a violent, irresistible longing
after food, which, if not  speedily gratified,  brings  on sudden
debility and even fainting.  The most common cause is a morbid
irritability of  the  nerves  of the  stomach  (a number of other
causes may, however, give rise to it, which  are also more appa-
rent  as they are accompanied by other symptoms), and  is  fre-
quently a forerunner of cramp of the stomach, with heartburn,
nausea, vomiting, and costiveness.  Nux vomica or  Veratrum,
in the higher attenuations, are the best remedies.
                            H.
               HEMORRHOIDS.
                     See Anus, itching of the.
                  Headache.  Cephalalgia.
          1.  From congestion  of blood  to  the head.
  Aconite, 6th attenuation, is most  suitable against headache
from congestion, presenting the following symptoms: confusion
of the head with vertigo, sensation of crawling in the forehead,
burning in the head, with coldness of the  remainder of the body;
pressure  and throbbing, relieved on  lying  down, increased  on
rising;  cheeks  puffed  up  and red;  great irritability  of the
nervous system; great  fretfulness; disinclination for business,
and sleepiness.
  Belladonna, 18th attenuation, when there are pressive and
distracting pains, as if the head would burst, or as if every thing
were coming out at the forehead or one side; great  soreness of 
156
HEADACHE.
the scalp, and even of the hair ;  distended veins of the lorchead
and hands;  ringing in  the  ears;  darkness  before the eyes, hy-
pochondriac disposition, absence of thirst;  or, when there are
one-sided, tearing, pungent  pains  every day, from about four
o'clock in the afternoon till the following morning,  which are
aggravated by motion, especially of the eyes, by going up stairs,
by the touch, in the open air, or by a current of air, or at night
when warm in bed.
   Pulsatilla, 12th attenuation, if  there be  giddiness as if from
intoxication;  paleness of the face, anxiety; disposition to shed
tears; palpitation of the heart;  bleeding at the nose; sensi-
bility of the eyes to light;  want of appetite: the symptoms
affect but one side of the head, are worse when sitting, and better
when moving about; also tearing  pains which are worse toward
evening, or when the headache is alleviated by pressing or squeez-
ing the head, or bandaging it tightly.
      2. From  dissipation, wine-drinking, loss  of sleep.
   Nux  vomica,  against heaviness in the  head, as if  drunk,
gloominess;  buzzing in the forehead, with sunken and pale coun-
tenance ; sensation of weight in the forehead, so that the patient
can hardly hold up his  head; inclination to vomit; weakness in
all the joints;  chilliness;  fretfulness;  pain as if a nail were
driven into the head, with  stitches and pressure  on one side of
the head;  the pains are worse  towards morning even so violent
as to cause  temporary loss of memory; daily headache early in
the morning on waking, after eating, in the open air, on stooping,
and after the use  of coffee.   In regard to Nux vomica, it may
be observed  that in cases of no great severity, it should be taken
in the evening, one or  two hours  before going to  bed.
                    3. From constipation.
   Nux  vomica, against obscure pain  in the forehead and  back
 part  of the  head; sensitiveness of  the brain,  particularly in
 walking and bending the head; pressure in the temples, relieved
 neither  by a recumbent nor erect  position;  dulness of the eyes;
 drooping of the eyelids;  want of memory, and sleeplessness. 
HEADACHE.
157
  Bryonia, 12th attenuation, if the constipation  occasions a
rush of blood to the head;  dizziness; pressing together  of the
temples;  sensation as if the head were confined and too heavy;
the pain is so severe on stooping that it seems as if every thing
were falling out at the forehead—attended also with bleeding at
the nose,  and frequent chilliness; the pains  are  mostly  aggra-
vated by motion, walking and touch; this remedy is best adapted
to persons of a quarrelsome, scolding disposition.
   Opium, 6 th attenuation, against  headache from  constipation
with determination of blood to the  head; great thirst with dry-
ness of the  mouth;  sour  belching and inclination to  vomit;
vomiting of very offensive substances; tearing and jerking pains;
outward pressure in the forehead; twitehings about the temples.
Only when there is obstinate constipation, with the most  violent
congestion of blood to the head, and unsteady vision, is  Opium
indicated. In such case the advice  of a  physician #is essential.
In some cases Ipecacuanha may also be suitable, especially when
there is much nausea and vomiting.
   Pulsatilla, 12th attenuation, is  particularly  serviceable in
females, and when the pains are chiefly confined to one  side of
the  head, with  chilliness;  absence of thirst; ill humor; dis-
position to shed tears, and  anxiety.   It is best suited to persons
of very quiet, mild dispositions.

   4.  From  irritability of the nervous  system, — hypochon-
                         driasis, &c.
   Moschus, 3d  attenuation, when there is obscure pressure over
the root of the nose; dizziness from  the least motion of the head;
confused feeling in the head as if the  senses would be lost;
painfulness of  the whole head,  with crawling and constriction
in the  back of the neck; congestion of blood to the head; drow-
siness, anxiety, and fretfulness.  As the  Moschus acts only for a
short time it  does not always afford entire relief, and  therefore
Nux vomica, 12th attenuation,  may afterwards  be given with
advantage. 
158      HEARTBURN.  PALPITATION  OF THE HEART.

             5.  From suppressed 2^ersj)iration.
   Chamomilla, against headache  from suppressed  perspiration
with tearing pains in the head and stitches in the temples; feel-
ing of weight over the root of the nose, as if catarrh  were coming
on; dulness in the forehead; bloated appearance of the face aud
eyes, and dimness of vision.
   When Chamomilla is insufficient, Sulphur may often be given
with advantage.

                   HEARTBURN.
                     Sec Stomach, cramps of.

                 Heart,  Palpitation  of the.
   This is a throbbing motion located above the diaphragm (the
muscular partition between the organs of the chest  and those of
the abdomen),  which is particularly evident  to the patient, and
is often very troublesome, even painful, and causes great anxiety.
It is generally excited and aggravated by certain positions, both
recumbent  and erect, and by others is relieved or removed.  In
but few cases do we find the palpitation so isolated that no other
spasmodic affections  are connected with it.   Nevertheless there
are some cases,  and  these are  generally where  there is great
plethora or fulness of  blood, and in a  close built, vigorous state
of body. In these cases by avoiding all spirituous and stimulat-
ing drinks, a few doses of Aconite (two daily), and when this
does not answer, a dose of Nux vomica, 12th, after a few days,
the latter taken only in the evening, will mostly effect a cure.—
If the palpitation is  caused by violent anger, after a dose or two
of Aconite, Chamomilla is the proper remedy. If  it depend on
excessive and  sudden joy,  Coffea is the remedy indicated. If
fright be the cause, it will be relieved by Opium.—If the  free
use of coffee or other stimulating or spirituous drinks has occa-
sioned determination of blood to  the chest,  with palpitation of
the heart, Nux vomica will generally be most appropriate, pro-
vided the patient avoids such diet as will be disadvantageous aud
hurtful.—In very sensitive weakly females,  who have yielding 
HICCUP.  HOARSENESS.  HOMESICKNESS.  HOOPING COUGH.  159

dispositions, this morbid condition, if none of the exciting causes
above mentioned exist,  may mostly be  relieved by Pulsatilla,
12th attenuation.
                           Hiccup.
   This is a common and  mostly unimportant affection;  it is
frequently occasioned in infants by slight exposure, changes of
temperature, &c, and may generally be left altogether to nature,
for as the child acquires strength of body, it becomes less  and
less frequent, and finally ceases.  Some young mothers however,
especially with the first child, become  alarmed if it take place
often, or continue for  any length of time, and are anxious to
have  it removed.—The best  remedy  is,  to  give  the child the
breast, or a few teaspoonsful of sweetened water.   If this should
fail, one or two globules of Nux vomica, put upon the tongue,
will generally afford relief.

                       HOARSENESS.
                          See Catarrh.

                 HOMESICKNESS.
                           See Grief.
                      Hooping Cough.
    This disease attacks a subject seldom or never twice.  For the
 most part, children only are visited by it, seldom grown persons.
 It commonly begins with a catarrh  (snuffling and cough) which
 continues several days  or weeks;  the  cough  being clear, sharp,
 and high toned.   This is followed  by  the spasmodic cough, the
 onset of which  is announced by  inward  uneasiness, anxious
 moving about,  or taking hold of something,  or by sneezing,
 yawning, tickling or pressure in the windpipe, and other pre-
 cursory symptoms. The cough consists of  several short, quick
 expirations, by jerks, with shaking, without being able to inspire
 perfectly, followed suddenly by  a long drawn, deep, braying,
 whistling, or shrieking, ringing inspiration,  and  then again the
 expiration : this is repeated several times successively, and  con-
 tinues one or more minutes.   The longer the attack continues, 
160
nooriNG couon.
the greater is the sense of suffocation; the child bends the head
forwards, sets the hands and head against something, or becomes
almost exhausted, with reddish blue or brown face; at times blood
issues from the mouth and nose. The attack commonly ends by
hawking and expectoration of mucus, or by ejection of the  con-
tents of the stomach;  at times with sneezing, when the suffoca-
tion subsides, and the child is again sprightly.
   In the first stage of the  disease, that of the catarrh, the medi-
cines recommended under "Catarrh", "Influenza", and "Grippe",
will be appropriate, and will often greatly modify it,  or prevent
it  entirely.  But if it has already passed to  the genuine hooping
cough,  "then" (says Hahnemann) "give a single dose (one to
three globules) of  a high attenuation of Drosera rotundifolia,
for the homoeopathic and complete cure of this epidemic  cough,
which  it will generally accomplish within seven or eight days,
by proper attention to diet.  But  if one dose is not sufficient to
complete the cure,  a second dose of the same remedy, after seven
or nine days, will do it."  According to later experience, how-
ever,  the  appropriate  remedy for a disease  must  be frequently
repeated, and  therefore here a fresh dose of Drosera ought  to
be given  every two or three days.— China, in the 6th attenua-
tion, is  especially suitable, when the cough commences with a
sudden, cramplike constriction of the glottis and general rigidity
of the body.—Belladonna is indicated when there is spasmodic,
dry cough, and may  be  alternated with the foregoing medicine
with advantage.—In the more violent grades of the complaint,
no remedy surpasses  the Cuprum metallicum, especially when
the breath during  the  cough is entirely suspended, the  patient
becomes rigid, and on the return  of  vital action and process of
breathing, vomits, and then breathes very slowly.  This remedy
is also suitable when the breathing is attended with a  rattling
in  the  windpipe,  as  if it were full of mucus.—In attacks of
hooping cough, coming on or worse at night, Conium macula turn
is one  of  the  most valuable  remedies, in a high attenuation.—
The catarrhal cough which often remains a long time after the
disease has been removed, is in many cases  relieved by Ipeca- 
HYDROPHOBIA.
161
cuanha,  repeated several times a day.—Should these  remedies,
however, be inefficient, the disease is in all probability connected
with some other morbid condition, the discovery of which should
only be entrusted  to an experienced physician, who will easily
find the most appropriate remedy.

                        Hydrophobia.
  As seldom as this disease occurs, it is nevertheless one which,
on account of the rapidity of its course requires the most prompt
assistance in order to afford any prospect of recovery.  For this
reason, I consider it a duty to describe the disease as accurately
as possible,  in order to give the layman a distinct image, so that
he may be on his guard against the danger  in which not  only
the patient, but also those  around him are placed, since the bite
of one suffering from this malady is as fatal as that of the animal
that bit him.
   The disease sometimes comes on in a few days, at others not
for a long time after the infection.  The wound frequently heals
up quickly after having suppurated but slightly. If the disease is
about to appear, there is general restlessness and anxiety, disturbed
sleep, fright'ul dreams, and increased irritability of the organs
of sense.  The eyes are bright and shining, reddened, and  very
sensitive to light;  the patient seeks darkness,  and suffers from
tingling in  the ears, and giddiness;  his countenance is pale, the
breathing is oppressed,  the appetite fails, and at times there is
a cramplike, bilious vomiting.—The wound which had previously
healed, now reddens again, soon becomes bluish, hot, itches, is
painful,  opens afresh, and  discharging a fetid,  discolored, black-
ish ichor, and forms an ulcer  with raised and spongy edges; the
surrounding parts also become swollen and painful.   From this
ulcer, drawing or pricking pains often  extend over  the  whole
limb.  The  anxiety and restlessness of the patient increases; he
complains of deafness,  dizziness,  humming  in the  ears,  sparks
before the  eyes, nausea, and  drawing pains  in the  back  of the
neck; he is fearful, sad, quiet and seeks solitude; respiration is
impeded;  he complains of coldness over the whole  body, but
        21 
162
HYDRornom.v.
especially of the limbs.  As the disease advances, hiccup, col icy
pains,  wild staring  look, and palpitation of the heart set in,
with spasms of the throat, which are aggravated by drinking, and
at times all efforts to drink  are fruitless;  at the same time con-
vulsions attack  the muscles of the neck and face.  The  patient,
however  can still swallow  solid food. The higher the disease
rises, the more  impossible it becomes  for the patient to drink,
and every attempt thereto  excites  the most  violent spasms in
the throat,  with  symptoms of suffocation and  spasms  of the
whole  body;  the very sight of water, the  noise of water falling,
the sight of shining objects, such as mirrors, glass, &c, even the
mere mention of water excites the most frightful spasms, amount-
ing  even to fury and madness.  The patient cannot even swal-
low  his  own saliva,  hence  he constantly spits about him,  and
suffers from greater dryness of the mouth and fauces, and intense
thirst,  without  the possibility of quenching it.  To this succeeds
the  most violent  paroxysms  of  true madness,  which  return
periodically,  generally  continuing  from  a quarter to  half an
hour, and becoming more and more frequent and violent.
   This is  the  deplorable picture  of  a disease, which  may be
brought  on merely by the bite of a mad dog.  According to the
old-school  practice,  the wound is cauterized,  burnt,  cut  out,
covered with Spanish flies,  and internally mercury, belladonna,
cantharides, &c, are  given  in  excessive doses, with the view of
preventing the outbreak of the disease, but  always with but
little  or no  good results.  It was reserved for the far-seeing
Hahnemann, who penetrated more deeply into the mysteries of
nature than any physician  before  him, to make known to his
colleagues  and  to the world, the specific preventive and remedy
against this  frightful disease, which he  does in  the following
words:  " The  most certain  preventive  of  hydrophobia   is  a
small  dose of Belladonna,  given every three or four days; one
or two doses of which will generally effect a cure/' By this he
means, two or  three globules, moistened with a high attenuation
of Belladonna.—In cases  where according to the usual  treat-
ment  large doses of Belladonna have previously been given as  a 
HUNGER, INORDINATE.   HEMORRHAGE.        163
preventive, and the disease notwithstanding  makes its  appear-
ance, this remedy is no longer appropriate, but generally Hyos-
ciamus or Stramonium are more suitable.
  In this disease, however, the aid of a physician is indispen-
sable, and the friends of the patient will do well to send for one
as speedily as possible.

                HUNGER, INORDINATE.
                         See Greediness.
                      Haemorrhage.
   Haemorrhages of all kinds are so dangerous, and  even after
the discharges of blood  has ceased, the results are  so critical
that in  general I could by no means advice the laity to under-
take the sole management  of it;  I  propose, however, as  the
danger is mostly pressing, aud in the country a physician is not
easily  procured, to notice a few of the remedies which will  be
most serviceable.   In these cases a physician's advice must  be
had as soon as possible, for there is not only danger of a return
of the haemorrhage, but often consumption, asthma, and similar
affections are brought on, if it be not very carefully treated.
   The symptoms accompanying haemorrhage, are so numerous,
that they cannot  be all  given within these  limits;  but I shall
endeavor to present a number of the most common,  which will
serve  as a guide to those  unacquainted with medicine.
   1.  In general  the premonitory  symptoms of haemorrhage,
which are among the most frequent, are :
   A feeling of irritation about the upper part of the chest; short,
 dry cough;  shortness of breath,  especially on going up stairs;
 a feeling when moving as if sufficient breath could not be taken
 into the lungs; tightness under the breast  bone, with more or
 less palpitation of the heart; inclination to take a deep breath;
 pressive pain in  the side towards  the breast bone which goes
 through to  the back and is  felt when at  rest, but  becomes
 more  severe on moving about; stiches in the chest; feeling of
 constriction in the chest; pressure and tightness under the ribs; 
164
HAEMORRHAGE.
with great fear  that  life is in danger, especially on moving and
speaking.
   After these symptoms have continued for some time, the irrita-
tion and cough increase, the latter becomes dry and hoarse, and
frequently gives rise to  pain, and is attended also with a taste of
blood in the mouth; then take  place also shivering  with alter-
nating flushes of heat; general debility; disposition to lie down;
trembling of the limbs, copious sweats; dimness of the eyes,
and vertigo.
   Finally the patient begins to cough  up blood, which continues
to increase, till at last large quantities  are brought up.
   In cases of this kind the patient should have, in an interval
of rest,  when the expectoration of blood has somewhat abated, a
few globules  of  China.   There  is  no  imminent danger  to be
apprehended  from the expected crisis of the disease, which mani-
fests itself by an increased discharge of blood, for it does not
continue long, and if the  hoemorrhage were checked at once, a
part of  the separated blood would coagulate in the cells of the
lungs, and bring on serious and dangerous subsequent complaints.
   In cases when, with symptoms similar  to the above, the  hae-
morrhage is  also preceded and accompanied  by a sensation* of
agitation or ebullition in the chest,  and the blood is discharged
by merely hawking, or with but  slight efforts  at  coughing,
attended likewise with  a feeling of fulness  and burning in the
chest;  palpitation  of the  heart; anxiety and restlessness, the
latter worse on lying  down; weak,  almost imperceptible pulse;
anxious expression and paleness of  the face,  and  th$ blood  is
thrown out by starts and in large quantities,—there is, according
to my experience,  no remedy more  beneficial, at  least for the
moment, than Aconite, 6th attenuation, which may be adminis-
tered by giving  a few pellets,  or a drop of the liquid on sugar;
or, still  better, by mixing a few  drops with half a  tumbler of
water, and give the patient a  teaspoonful of  the solution every
hour.  This mode of  application is  most suitable in acute cases,
in which the  doses are  to be  repeated frequently when the dis-
ease is violent, gradually lengthening the intervals as it becomes 
haemorrhage.
milder.—When the attacks of acute haemorrhage are no longer
renewed, but the attending symptoms are not yet removed, and
particularly if there is  reason to  fear a return from  the con-
tinuance of the irritating cough, and should the taste of blood,
or expectoration of mucus streaked with blood be still  present;
Ipecacuanha should be given,  and may be repeated every one
and a half or two hours, until every trace is obliterated.   If a
fresh attack occur,  let Aconite be alternated with Ipecacuanha;
and after the disease is fully overcome, and debility only  remains,
give a  dose or two of China.
   Pulsatilla,  12th  attenuation, will be preferable if the patient
be worse at night, and complains of chills and general debility;
tenderness and pain in the lower part of the chest,  with a depres-
sed state of mind, inclined to weeping.
   All  external remedies, especially the application of cold poul-
tices to the chest must be entirely avoided, for  though  the cold
may temporarily check the flow of blood, and  apparently  have
a good effect on  the vessels that separate it; yet  this is  soon
over, and the temporary improvement will probably be  followed
by  a  recurrence of the haemorrhage,  much more severe  than
at first.
   2.  Among the most  serious and most violent haemorrhages
are those which  take  place  from  the  womb during  gestation
(Uterine haemorrhage).   The  common treatment with cold ap-
plications,  cold injections of vinegar, rubbing with naphtha, are
usually of no benefit,  but often on the  contrary, excite pains
cramps, &c, and by this mechanical irritation  increase the flow
of blood.
   In very many cases of this kind, midwives unconsciously make
use of a homoeopathic remedy—Tincture of Cinnamon—which
is often productive of much  benefit;  and  this appears partic-
ularly  to have  been the case, when the flow of blood has been
occasioned by a misstep, a concussion  from carrying too heavy
a load, by overreaching  and similar causes. It  should not be
given,  however, in  teaspoonsful as is mostly done, least it bring
on an  aggravation of the disease, and  be rather  injurious  than 
166                    II.EMORRIIAOE.
beneficial. One drop of the tincture such as is prepared by every
apothecary, would be more effectual.  In some  cases Arnica is
also useful.
  Besides these the following  may be recommended,  their effi-
cacy having been established by experience.
  When the haemorrhage  is  continuous, and  large quantities
of blood of a bright red color are discharged, attended with cut-
tings in  the  abdomen, general debility and inclination to lie
down, let a drop of the 3d dilution of Ipecacuanha be given. In
very many cases of  this kind, this  remedy  is preferable to all
others, but it requires to be repeated at intervals of a quarter
to half an hour.
  When the haemorrhage is accompanied by pains resembling
those of labor, Chamomilla in the 3d dilution is of service; and
also when brought on by violent anger.
  If the discharge of blood is dark colored, in clots, and attended
with cutting pains deep in  the abdomen,  drawing toward the
back, Crocus in the 3d dilution  is the most suitable remedy.
When the discharge is of a bright red color, and attended with
pains like those of labor, Juniperus sabina, in the 6th dilution
may be preferred.
   But, on the contrary, if the uterine haemorrhage be attended
with cramps, so called, and bearing-down pains  in the lower part
of the abdomen and towards the rectum; if the discharge take
place in jets with each pain, and is also accompanied by cutting
pains  in the bowels and  tension of the abdomen, with much
weakness,  disposition to faint, and even fainting, coldness of the
body and limbs; frequent desire to make water, from sympathy
of the bladder with the adjacent womb, heaviness in the  head,
vertigo, confusion of thoughts, drowsiness; then let the patient
take  China, repeated  every hour.
   If, after this medicine has  acted a sufficient length of time,
the flooding is renewed,  or if it originate with  the following
 symptoms:
   Laborlike pains as in delivery, with drawing in the loins and
 small of the back;  trembling of the whole  body;  confusion and 
INFLAMMATION.
167
dulness of intellect;  incoherent talking and  delirium;  great
restlessness;  excessive activity and startings up; twiching of the
tendons, and convulsive motions of the limbs;  numbness of the
limbs, commonly said  to be asleep; drawing pains in the limbs;
faintness, general heat; swollen veins; more  rapid circulation
of the blood, with strong, frequent pulse; indistinct, dull features;
let the patient take a dose of Hyoscyamus, 6th dilution.
   At the same time  the  patient must be kept strictly quiet
physically and mentally, must be laid on a convenient couch, not
too warm, avoiding every unnecessary movement of the body,
and excitement of every description.  Her attendants must keep
themselves quiet, she must not distress herself too much about
her disease, and not be annoyed by strong odors nor too much
light; as in a highly excited  condition of the nervous system,
even  ordinary impressions may operate as morbific irritants  of
the organism, and bring on an injurious loss of blood.
   If  a copious flow of blood take place in a female, not preg-
nant, during menstruation, or at any other time from any cause,
for inst.  anger;  a fall, or concussion from  other  cause;  heavy
lifting; overreaching,  &c, the same remedies that are here men-
tioned will be of service, given in doses proportioned to circum-
stances.
                             I.
                       Inflammation.
  This condition is mostly characterized  by increased circulation,
by redness and heat of the inflamed organ, by swelling and hard-
ness, and by the accompanying pain, which may be itching, press-
ing, constrictive, or pungent.  The most  common causes of in-
flammation are, mechanical injuries, such  as cuts, sword-thrusts,
punctures, and gunshot wounds,  and splinters of bone;  chemical
irritants,  such as acids,  acrid  vegetable substances,  oils, and
animal poisons; and likewise  cold, dry  North and  East  winds;
mental emotions, such as  anger,  vexation fright, sudden joy, and
finally all kinds of bodily diseases. 
168      INTERMITTENT FEVER.   INFLUENZA.  ITCH.

  In the first class of inflammations, that caused by mechanical
injuries, anv foreign substance remaining in the wound must be
carefully removed, and the part washed with a lotion of Arnica
tincture (ten drops to half a teacupful of water) which remedy
should also be given internally in the 3d or 4th attenuation two
or three times a day to lessen the fever arising from the wound.
If acids, such as sulphuric, muriatic, nitric, phosphoric, &c., oc-
casion  the inflammation, large quantities of warm milk, emul-
sions of sweet almonds, or warm  soap  suds should be given;  a
teaspoonful of magnesia in a teacupful of water, taken after every
fit of vomiting, will also be beneficial.
  The chief remedy in inflammations of the internal organs which
arc brought on by other causes, is Aconite, repeated every three
or four hours, especially when there is  a hot, dry skin and  hard
and accelerated pulse.  When there is profuse night sweats, and
general debility, Mercurius solubilis is most beneficial.  Bella-
donna and Bryonia are likewise occasionally found to be service-
able.  See also the individual varieties of inflammation described
in this work.

                INTERMITTENT  FEVER.
                     See Fever, intermittent.

                      INFLUENZA.
                     See Qrippe and Catarrh.

                       Itch.  Psora.
  This peculiar and well known eruption, which appears in the
form of small pustules,  often deeply seated in the skin (the so-
called greasy  itch consists of vesicles containing pus), generally
shows itself  first about the joints between the fingers, whence it
spreads over the whole body with the exception of  the face.  It
gives rise to a voluptuous and rather agreeable itching by expo-
sure to external warmth, that of the bed for instance, which- after
scratching changes to  a  burning  sensation.   Itch, when of long
standing and  treated  by  ointments, changes its  character, and
becomes  scabby or tettery, and  appears, particularly about the 
JAUNDICE.
169
joints, in the form of large moist spots full of chaps which bleed
easily on being rubbed.
   The best remedy against this complaint is Tinctura Sulphuris,
a drop morning and evening in a tablespoonful of water.  After
continuing this remedy for six or eight days it may be discon-
tinued for  a few days, and then resumed again, taking however,
but one dose daily; as the disease yields, the remedy should be
given at longer and longer intervals, until a thorough cure is ef-
fected.  A confirmed case of itch, or one which has been badly
treated, will not often be removed by this remedy alone, but will
require  the alternate administration of Carbo vegetabilis, 18th
attenuation, or perhaps also a few doses of Psoricum,  18th at-
tenuation.
   In the dry, measly form of itch, the  treatment  should begin
at once with  Mercurius solubilis  and  Sulphur in alternation
every other day.   If pustules arise in the course of the treat-
ment, or if the itch is from the first moist and pustulous, Lyco-
podium, 18th attenuation,  will be indicated, a dose every two or
three days; followed, if necessary,  in about two weeks  by Cau-
sticum.
                             J.

                     Jaundice.  Icterus.
   As this disease may originate from  a variety of causes, and
the treatment must be regulated accordingly, which the layman
will  not often be able to do; I shall therefore  give here  but a
few directions.   Jaundice is characterized by yellowness of the
skin, which affects the whole body;  generally to be observed first
in the whites of the eyes, the wings of the nose, and corners of
the mouth.   The urine also is of a  yellowish red color, deposit-
ing a reddish sediment, and stains paper, linen, &c, yellow; the
stools are  white, gray, or clayey.
   If these symptoms occur  without fever after violent aDger,
Chamomilla, 3d attenuation, will  be the most suitable remedy,
       22 
170
JAUNDICE.
and will check the disease in its formation, and restores  the  in-
cipient morbid  changes to their healthy condition.   But where
the system is already in such a morbid condition that the merest
trifle may excite the most violent passion, from which then like-
wise the previous sufferings may proceed, we may look for some
other exciting cause, which will frequently be found  to be  an
erroneous diet.  The jaundice of children is often occasioned by
the abuse of laxative medicines, in which rhubarb is commonly
an ingredient, which ignorance and prejudice too commonly deem
necessary for new-born children, in order to promote the  dis-
charge of the meconium.  But even in later years, by the plenti-
ful use of chamomile-tea, we often see an irritable, fretful state
of mind induced, which may readily act as an exciting cause of
jaundice. In such cases Chamomilla will  do no good; but much
benefit will be derived from the use of Ignatia amara and Pul-
satilla,  given  in  the  attenuations already specified.   If these
remedies, however, should be insufficient for the entire removal of
the disease, China, 6th attenuation, will generally be succesful.
   Mercurius solubilis,  6th  attenuation, is one  of  the  most im-
portant remedies in this disease, and will  especially in cases of
obscure  origin in scrofulous subjects, where the  disease is  fre-
quently induced by a  slight exciting cause effect a speedy cure.
It may be repeated two or three times a day.  Sulphur is like-
wise useful in  some cases;  it  follows Mercurius solubilis with
advantage, especially  if  the  latter  has  produced  a favorable
change, but has not entirely removed the  complaint.
   China will be  useful in cases arising from abuse of mercury,
also in cases arising from other causes which the above remedies
have been insufficient to cure; it may often be alternated advan-
tageously with Mercurius solubilis.
   Bryonia or Nux vomica will be found useful in cases attended
by costiveness  with much sensitiveness from  pressure on  the
right side under the ribs, in the region of  the liver, also when
there is pain in this part on motion. 
KIDNEY, INFLAMMATION  OF THE.          171
                            K.
         Kidney, inflammation of the.  Nephritis.
  This affection is generally known by the following symptoms:
a dull heavy pain or weight is  experienced  on one side in  the
region of the loins—when one  kidney only is implicated.  This
is followed sooner or later by an acute pungent or lancinating and
deep-seated pain, which is accompanied by a sensation of internal
heat.   The pain frequently extends  from the loins along  the
ureters to the bladder and testicle  of the affected side, and often
to the groin and thigh,  where it gives rise to a numbness or pe-
culiar tremulous motion.   The testicle is also usually retracted.
The pain is aggravated by respiration, by  making a  quick or
false  step,  or by any kind of shock, and by pressure.   In most
cases  the urine is scanty and high colored  during the first few
days; sometimes bloody; and  it may be  altogether suppressed
when both kidneys are  affected.  In  other cases, however, it is
clear, watery, and deposits a whitish sediment.  The pain is at
times intermitting or remitting in  its  character;  when this is the
case,  and small grains of sand or gravel are found in the urine,
the disease is probably  caused by a calculus in the kidney.
  These symptoms are  accompanied by more or less fever,  and
generally also by nausea and vomiting, and  often by an uneasy
sensation  in the abdomen with flatulence,  and frequently by
diarrhoea.
   Nephritis commonly ends by resolution; occasionally,  how-
ever, it ends in suppuration.  When this is the case, the pain
becomes dull and heavy; the pulse soft and full;  there is alter-
nate  chilliness  and  fever, followed by sweats; and when, in ad-
dition to these symptoms, pus  is observed in the urine, there  is
no  doubt of the existence of suppuration.
   The most frequent causes of nephritis are:  blows on the lum-
bar region;  violent exercise, as dancing, riding on horseback or
in a  rough carriage without springs;  the  use of drugs which act
as irritants to the kidney, such as cantharides, oil of savin, oil
of turpentine,  &c.;  the presence of calculi  in the kidney,  espe- 
172          KIDNEY, INFLAMMATION  OF THE.

cially such as are pointed; and it is  not unusual to meet with
it either preceding or following an attack of rheumatism or gout.
The inflammation may also extend to the kidneys from the blad-
der or urethra.
   Treatment.—Aconite, Cantharides, Cannabis, Nux vomica,
Pulsatilla, Arnica, Hepar sulphuris, Mercurius virus, and Sul-
phur, are the chief remedies in this disease.
  Aconite is indicated in the commencement of this affection to
combat the inflammatory symptoms. It may be given every one
to three hours, according to the violence of the symptoms, and
continued  until the fever is abated.
   Cantharides will most  generally  be the preferable remedy
after Aconite, and especially when the  following symptoms are
present: difficult and very painful urination,  sometimes mixed
with blood;  burning pain in  the urethra; the urine passes in
drops;  inability to pass the urine;  pains of a  shooting, cutting
or tearing character in the loins and regions of the  kidney.  It
may be  repeated every one, two or three hours until relief is
obtained, or  one  of the following remedies appear  to be more
suitable.
   Cannabis, when cantharides  has been insufficient, and the
pain is more of a dragging nature, or when it  shoots along the
ureters,—from the region of the kidney down toward the groin.
   Nux vomica will be valuable when the disease occurs in per-
sons of plethoric habit, who are addicted to too great indulgence
in  wine and other stimulants;  also in persons of sedentary
habits, especially if it arise from suppressed haemorrhoids, and
there is constipation, nausea or vomiting, sense of faintness, dis-
tention of the abdomen,  &c.
   Pulsatilla, in persons of a mild disposition,  and especially in
females, when the nephritis arises from irregularity, or suppres-
sion of the menstrual function.
   Belladonna may be given when  the pains  extend from the
kidney to the bladder, and are of a  shooting character; and
when the  urine is  scanty, of a bright red or  yellowish color,
and deposits a red or whitish thick sediment,  accompanied by 
LABOR.   LAMENESS, SPONTANEOUS.          173
heat and swelling in the region of the kidney, and sometimes by
colic;  also anxiety, restlessness, and periodical aggravation.
   Arnica, in all cases of nephritis arising from blows, violent
concussion of the body, or any kind of external violence. It may
be taken internally in pellets, and also applied externally in the
form of a lotion.
   Hepar sulphuris  and Mercurius vivus are chiefly serviceable
in cases where the disease has gone on to suppuration, or to the
formation of an abscess, which may generally be known by the
following symptoms : alleviation or cessation of the pain; a sen-
sation  of throbbing in the region of the kidney; a feeling of
weight in  the loins; alternate chilliness and heat,  followed by
profuse sweats.  The Hepar should be administered by dissolving
a grain of the third trituration in a tumbler | full of water, and
giving a  teaspoonful of the solution every three  or four hours.
Unless Hepar speedily produce a decided improvement, it  may
be followed by Mercurius vivus, administered in the same man-
ner,  except that the globules, instead of the trituration, are to
be used.   These  two  remedies  may be,  in some cases, taken
alternately with advantage.
   Sulphur will be useful in protracted cases of acute nephritis,
in which the remedies given  have produced  but  partial relief,
and  also  in the  chronic forms of the disease—when  the symp-
toms are less violent in their  character.
   Nephritis arising from abuse of cantharides in blistering, will
be relieved by the use of camphor.  A drop or two of the  tinc-
ture on a lump of sugar may be taken three or four times a day.
                            L.
                          LABOR.
                       See Accouchment.
                  Lameness, spontaneous.
  I have mostly observed this ailment  to  attack children sud-
denly and without any pain, and when  called in time, I have
always succeeded in removing it by the  use of the two following 
174
LEUC0RRH02A.
remedies.  There is here no trace of fracture, dislocation or sup-
puration, but the child begins all at once to go lame, and  grows
worse from hour to hour; but still complains  of  no pain,  but
only pulls the leg along,  and  the  affection seems to depend
merely on a weakness in the  part3 surrounding the head of the
thigh bone.   A dose of Mercurius solubilis, 6th, and if this do
not answer  after two days, a dose of Belladonna  commonly re-
medies the  evil.  But if these should fail, let there be no delay
in obtaining the advice of an experienced physician, since the
disease may otherwise become fixed,  and then  be  very  difficult
to cure, for  the cause in such cases lies deeper, and the physician
alone by carefully  arranging and comparing all  the other relative
circumstances in  the case, is able  to  fathom it.  Very often
spontaneous lameness  arises from inflammation  of the thigh
joint, which the  layman  is not able to recognize, and there-
fore it is generally best to consult the physician  in the  begin-
ning, before  any  remedy is given  by one unacquainted with
medicine.
                   Leucorrhcea.  Whites.
   This term is applied  to  a  discharge  of mucus, generally
whitish, proceeding from the  vagina.  It is of so common occur-
rence that almost all  women, and not unfrequently small chil-
dren, are subject to it.   At first  the patient notices a slight dis-
charge of .whitish  matter, which escapes from the vagina, drop
by drop, and is unaccompanied by  any unpleasant sensation.
If neglected, as is  most generally the case  in the beginning, the
discharge increases in  quantity, and in some  cases it becomes
excessive.
   The quality,  too, is changed,  and it  becomes  greenish,  yel-
lowish, or of a dark-brown, almost black color, and gives rise to
pains, excoriation, and ulcers of the parts.  The general  health
also suffers; the appetite  fails; the pulse becomes weak;  the
face pale and bloated;  the eyes  become dull and heavy, and are
surrounded  by  yellowish circles; vision is  impaired;  there is
constant pain in the back and loins;  lowness of spirits;  exces-
sive debility, &c. 
LEUCORRHCEA.
175
  The exciting  causes of leucorrhcea  are numerous; anything
which affects  the  general health may produce it;  sometimes it
is owing to the presence of foreign bodies in the vagina; some
of the worse cases of the disease, for instance, owe their origin
to the long continued use of an instrument intended to remedy
falling of the womb.  Such cases can never be cured until the
exciting cause be removed.  The disease is sometimes in women,
and mostly in children, caused by inattention to cleanliness.
  In the treatment of this affection much benefit will be derived
from  syringing the parts frequently with cold water. The medi-
cines employed with most advantage are :  Calcarea carboniea,
Pulsatilla, Sepia, Sulphur, Natrum muriaticum, Cocculus, and
 Causticum.
   Calcarea  carboniea is  particularly suited  to  females of a
lymphatic constitution, light complexion, and who have copious
menstruation which is liable  to return too soon;  when the dis-
charge is milky, often passes with the  urine, and on lifting, and
usually comes on, or is worse  immediately before menstruation;
is often attended by itching and burning; shooting pains through
the parts, and falling of the womb.  It is also valuable in corro-
sive leucorrhoeas of young children.
   Pulsatilla, when the discharge chiefly takes place immediately
 before, during, and after menstruation; when produced by fright,
 and when  occurring in young girls who have not menstruated;
 the discharge thick like cream, sometimes corrosive and attended
 by itching of the parts.
   Sepia, against yellow, greenish, or fetid discharge, which some-
 times produces excoriations; with bearing-down pains;  frequent
 desire to pass urine; swelling of the  abdomen;  yellowish com-
 plexion.
    Cocculus, if the discharge be mixed with blood during preg-
 nancy, or like washing of meat, attended by colic and flatulency,
 and  taking place  principally before and after menstruation.
    Causticum,  against profuse leucorrhcea, having the smell of
 the menses, or which flows at night,  attended by pain in the 
176   LIGHTNING, STROKE OF.  LIVER, INFLAMMATION OF THE.

back  and  loins;  sallow complexion and excoriation  of the
parts.
  Natrum  muriaticum, when the  discharge  is copious, and
consists of transparent, whitish and thick mucus, or is acrid,
with yellow color of the face; also when accompanied by  head-
ache,  disposition to diarrhoea with slimy evacuations and colic.
  Sulphur, for inveterate cases of leucorrhoea;  the discharge
sometimes  yellowish, burning and corrosive, and preceded by
colic;  also when it results from repelled eruptions or ulcers.

                   Lightning, Stroke  of.
  Those who are struck by lightning, if not instantly killed, are
stunned, or apparently dead, with weak  or quite  imperceptible
pulsations  and respiration; the face is  red, or blue; the eyes
motionless, and often suffused with blood; at times blood  issues
from  the mouth,  nose,  and ears; or the patient is pale, the
limbs are relaxed,  or spasmodically contracted.
  Resuscitation must be attempted as speedily as possible.  The
best means of all is electricity, but as this is seldom at command,
the next best remedy is the earth bath.  For this  purpose, let a
hole be  dug in the earth, about  two feet deep, into which the
patient, being first undressed, is to  be  placed  in  a sitting pos-
ture and surrounded with earth.
  Should one  not  be in a situation to carry this method into
effect, let cold water be dashed upon the patient plentifully, and
rub the soles of the feet,  the palms of the hands,  and inside  of
the arms and legs, with a stiff-brush ; at the same time let spirits
of sal ammoniac (hartshorne)  be occasionally held to the nose,
and rub the pit of the stomach with vinegar or acetated naphtha;
inflation  of the lungs  and injections of cold water with salt or
vinegar will also be of service.

                Liver, Inflammation of  the.
  The morbid symptoms by which this disease is mostly known,
are : sticking,  burning,  cutting, constrictive, at  times  violent,
more frequently however dull,  pressive pains, seated in the right 
LIVER,  INFLAMMATION OF THE.           177
side, close under the ribs, and extending to the pit of the stom-
ach ; it is generally aggravated by taking a full breath, cough-
ing, lying on the left side, or on  being touched.   The parts
are externally tender,  swollen, tense, and sometimes  reddened;
there is usually connected with these a numb  pain  in the back
extending to  the  right shoulder and arm.  The  respiration is
labored, anxious, interrupted, or  sighing, with a dry, deep  and
hollow cough, which, together with the pain  and anxiety, is
increased by lying on the left side; on which account the patient
is obliged to lie on his back, or sit erect.  Violent fever, hiccup,
nausea and vomiting which  does not afford relief; fulness, burn-
ing and oppression in the pit of the stomach, bitter taste, yellow
coated tongue, more or less  yellowness of the  skin, costiveness,
or  hard,  gray,  and  clayey stools  are  likewise common con-
comitants.   This affection is easily induced in choleric tempera-
ments, especially those who have previously suffered from de-
rangement of the liver; it is also  excited by exposure of the
abdomen to cold during the heat of summer, by violent emotions
of the mind, vexation, anger, and likewise by external  violence
in the region of the liver.
   According to my experience, Aconite is one of the best re-
medies at the  beginning of the disease, and it must be repeated
every three  hours, until the febrile symptoms have abated. The
symptoms  especially indicating  its  employment  are:  severe
stitches about the  liver, insufferable pain with sighing;  restless-
ness and tossing to and fro,  anxiety and dread of death.
   Chamomilla may be advantageously used after Aconite, espe-
cially when the complaint  has been brought on by anger,  and
there are dull, oppressive pains under the ribs, which is aggra-
vated  either by external pressure,  motion,  or breathing; ob-
structed respiration, and yellowish skin.
   Pulsatilla,  12th attenuation,  is most  appropriate when the
anxiety is greatest  at night, attended by loose, green, mucous
stools and vomitmg.^-Bryonia is more suitable if there be cos-
tiveness  and spasms of the chest, and  if it  do not relieve or
entirely cure, should be followed by Nux vomica. If the patient
       23 
ITS
LOINS, FAIN  IN THE.
complain of  bitterness  in the mouth;  great thirst; constant
chilliness;  pressing pain about the liver, and has a yellow tinge
of the skin and eyes, Mercurius solubilis, 6th attenuation, will
be most efficacious.
  As inflammations of this kind are not to be classed with the
unimportant  ones, it will therefore be well to call in a physician
in time.
                     Loins,  Fain in the.
   Pains of the loins are of various kinds, and for the most part
depend on altogether different  causes;  generally the  cause lies
in some deep-seated malady,  the removal of which cannot be left
to the laity,  as it requires more prudence and anatomical knowl-
edge than can be expected  from one uninstructed in medicine.
On this account I shall  present here only some of those  pains
in  the loins which are most  frequently  met with, with their
obvious causes, at the same time remarking that on their return
the advice of the physician must be sought.
   Excesses in the use of spirituous and stimulating drinks are
very common causes of pains in the loins, also obstinate constipa-
tion, sedentary habits, and taking cold, may cause them. In all
these cases Nux vomica may be given with advantage, especially
when the pains seem as if the loins were beaten, and at  times
extend between the shoulders, and  also towards the sides, with
frequent ineffectual pressure in the rectum.  If the  pain is very
 severe,  of a wrenching or cutting character, and  turning and
 moving the  body, when lying as well as walking in an  erect
 position, is almost impossible.
   Occasionally, after heavy lifting, after a fall, push, or stroke
 on the back or loins, an acute cutting  pain takes place in  these
 parts, which is so severe that  the  patient cannot cough, sneeze,
 take a deep  breath, or walk, without the greatest suffering.  In
 cases of this  kind, a few doses of Arnica, 3d attenuation, will
 generally  afford speedy  relief.  If the  pain be occasioned  by
 overlifting or streching the arms, Rhus toxicod. will be prefer-
 able to Arnica. 
LOVE, DISAPPOINTED.  LUMBAGO.           179
                LOVE, DISAPPOINTED.
                          See Grief.

            Lumbago (Lumbago Rheumaticus).

  This is a rheumatic affection, and is characterized by a deep
seated violent  pain  in the loins,  sometimes attended with very
acute symptoms, although rarely accompanied with the same
phenomena as Inflammatory rheumatism.  There is no swelling
or redness of the lumbar  region.  The most excrutiating pain
is induced by  any change of posture, and it is difficult to move
any part without increasing the sufferings.
  Remedies.—Aconite, Bryonia, Nux vomica, Rhus toxicod.,
Belladonna, Pulsatilla,  and Mercurius  vivus,  are  most  ser-
viceable.
  Aconite must  be given at the commencement, especially if the
disease be accompanied by much fever.
  Bryonia,  when the pains in the back are exceedingly severe,
compelling the patient to walk in a stooping posture ; aggravated
by the least motion, or draught of air, and attended with a sen-
sation of general chilliness.
  Nux vomica  is especially indicated, when the part affected
feels as if bruised,  or as if caused by excessive fatigue;  and
when motion, and particularly turning in bed at night, aggravate
the pain;  also when accompanied by weakness, constipation and
irritable temper.
  Rhus toxicod., when the pains are  similar to those described
under Nux vomica, but are aggravated by rest.
  Belladonna may follow  or alternate  advantageously with
Aconite, particularly when the pains are deep seated, and cause
a sensation of  heaviness, gnawing, or stiffness.
  Pulsatilla, when  the pains resemble those mentioned under
Nux vomica, especially when occurring in females, or persons
of a mild disposition.
  Mercurius vivus,  against pains like those described above,  but
which are aggravated  at night. 
180
LUNGS.
                  Lungs, inflammation of.
  As inflammation of this kind always comes on suddenly and
with great violence, I shall therefore present the most prominent
symptoms of the disease, and likewise the remedies most suitable
at the beginning, so  that the relatives or friends of the patient,
if a physician cannot soon be  procured, may know what to do,
and may not administer any wrong or hurtful article, calculated
to counteract the treatment of a homoeopathic physician.
  The chief symptoms of inflammation of the lungs are: dis-
turbed, accelerated, interrupted sighing, panting, audible respira-
tion ; the chest labors violently, with great exertion; the patient
feels  a steady, fixed  pain in some  part  of the chest, which  soon
becomes active, sharp, burning  or cutting, or is pressive, dull,
and constrictive, with anguish.  The pain, cough, and difficulty of
breathing, are aggravated  by  respiration, assuming  the erect
attitude, turning or other motions. The irritation to cough, which
is experienced, and  with greatly increased pain, whenever the
patient attempts to take a deep breath, is always felt at the  most
painful spot.  There is always a greater or less degree of alarm
and anxiety connected with inflammations of this kind.  At times
the cough is infrequent  and  of short duration; at others violent,
constant and spasmodic.  At the commencement of the disease,
 the expectoration is often absent entirely, but at times it is pre-
 sent at the very beginning, and is of  a bloody, mucous (rusty)
 character.  There is also great heat, and burning, hot, dry skin;
 violent palpitation of the heart, puffed and red face;  very high
 colored urine, great thirst and constipation.
   Aconite,  6th  attenuation, is the most  suitable remedy  for
 checking  the  progress  of the disease  before the arrival of the
 physician.  It may be repeated, according to circumstances,  every
 two  or three hours.  In many cases the beneficial  effects of this
 medicine will be strikingly manifested in the first two hours, and
 even in some cases a single  dose is  sufficient to effect  a complete
  cure of this dangerous disease.  But as this result is in no case
  to be foreseen or to be predicted, let not the well-meant advice be 
MANIA A POTUA.  MEASLES.
181
neglected, to send immediately at the onset of the disease for an
experienced physician, who will direct what further is to be done.
  Should the arrival of the physician be  delayed, and the vio-
lence of the disease in the meantime has been moderated in  some
degree, but the improvement is slow, Bryonia is the next best
remedy, two or three drops  of which may be put in half a tea-
cupful of water, and a teaspoonful of the solution given every
three hours.
  If, on the contrary,  in spite of these medicines, the  disease
still progresses, and the difficulty of breathing,  acute  pain and
constant dry cough  become very severe,  accompanied with ex-
pectoration  of a rusty appearance, Phosphorus  must be given,
and repeated every three hours.
                            M.

               MANIA  A  POTUA.
                      See Delirium tremens.
                    Measles.  Rubeola.
  This well known disease, which is for the most part of a mild
character, always sets in with symptoms of catarrh, for instance
dry cough, hoarseness, rawness and tightness of the chest, with
pain in the  throat and some difficulty in swallowing, snuffling,
frequent sneezing, and acrid discharge  from the nostrils; red-
ness, heat and pain of the eyes;  sensitiveness to light; increased
flow of tears; swelling of the eyelids,  headache, &c.  After a
few days the febrile symptoms and heat of surface increase, and
red, uneven, raised spots in patches which mostly run together,
make their appearance, giving the skin a sort of marbled appear-
ance.  They show themselves  first in the face,  and last on the
feet.  The redness only  partially disappears on pressure, and
quickly returns.  At this period the fever is at its  height;  it
gradually abates, and by the sixth or seventh day the eruption
disappears, the skin going off in minute scales almost unnoticed.
  In a case of this kind,  where the disease  goes on  so quietly, 
182
MEGRIM.
there is often nothing medicinal requisite.  If the fever should
be considerable, it will be  much moderated and shortened by a
few doses of Aconite,  12th attenuation, three or four globules,
or one drop in half a teacupful of water, and a teaspoonful taken
every three hours.
   The  catarrhal  symptoms with which the disease  commonly
makes its appearance, are mostly relieved  by Pulsatilla, 12th
attenuation, which remedy will also frequently modify the disease
very materially.  This medicine often acts as a prophylactic or
preventive to measles, if given to children who have not yet had
the disease (when it prevails epidemically) every three or four
days in the dose above directed.
   If the catarrhal symptoms  become  still  more considerable,
without being followed by the eruption, a dose or two of Tinc-
tura sulphuris will generally bring it out.
   Should the measles be attended with violent fever, headache,
delirium and  sore throat,  one or two doses of Belladonna may
be given, either before or in alternation with the Aconite.
   Against the tedious cough  which at times  remains,  Ipeca-
cuanha, several times  repeated, is  generally the best  remedy;
and if it does not remove all the sequelae, it may be followed by
Hepar sulphuris.
                   Megrim.   Hemicrania.
                        See also Headache.
   This is a one-sided  headache, generally confined  to a  small
spot, and most commonly affects females rather than males.  If
the patient wishes to be freed from  this complaint, he  or  she
must  be entirely governed by the rules  of diet prescribed in
homoeopathy, and in particular strictly avoid coffee, as that ia
the most fruitful cause of its existence.  The  following symp-
toms are demonstrative of the  latter assertion.
   The patient complains of a severe one-sided, drawing, pressing
 headache, with a sensation as if a nail were driven into the head;
in other cases of  a feeling as  if the brain  on  the affected side
 were torn, bruised, or crushed to  pieces.  Against headache of
 this kind, Nux vomica is the most serviceable remedy, which 
MENSTRUATION.  MILKFEVER.
183
in some cases it will be necessary to follow by Ignatia or Pulsa-
tilla, and after these again another dose of Nux vomica.—This
medicine is also indicated when the one-sided, drawing or press-
ing headache commences early in the morning, gradually becomes
more and more severe, and finally attains such a height, that the
patient becomes  almost quite  unconscious, or throws  himself
about as if frantic.
   For the speedy relief of these  severe pains,  Coffea cruda,
3d attenuation, is the most suitable remedy, even for those suf-
ferers who have been using coffee daily as a drink.  This medicine
will often remove the  disease completely if frequently repeated,
and the use of coffee as a drink is meanwhile avoided, as I have
repeatedly experienced.
   Besides the three remedies mentioned here,  there are others,
which are useful  against such complaints; but these, to be used
successfully, require a  more accurate  examination of the symp-
toms as well as of the  exciting causes of the disease than can be
expected from the laity, for which reason  I have not introduced
them here.

       MENSTRUATION, IRREGULARITIES OF.
                       See Dysmenorrhoea.
                         Milkfever.
   This name has been  applied to several morbid symptoms,
which at times make their appearance with the first secretion of
milk in the breasts after delivery.   These  symptoms consist in a
slight chill, followed by heat, anxiety, thirst, restricted respira-
tion ; drawing pains in the back, extending towards the breasts;
headache; and finally sour perspiration. In many lying-in women
no such fever takes place; but where it occurs, it doubtless arises
less from the secretion of milk, than from the irritation caused
by too great a quantity pouring into the milk-vessels and power-
fully distending  the breasts. This fever may likewise be occa-
sioned by laceration of the perinaeum  and neck of the uterus, or
by wounds of the  sexual  organ.  In these last cases Arnica
montana,  3d attenuation, is the best remedy, but in the first, 
184
MILK-CRUST.
Rhus toxicodendron, or Belladonna and Bryonia, each in a high
attenuation. If emotions of the mind are the cause of such fever,
the reader will  find the proper medicine pointed out under the
appropriate head.
  If the milk  dries up at once in the breasts, it most readily
takes a direction back to the uterus, excites in it again the scarcely
extinguished activity, and often places the woman in imminent
danger; or it may take its course to other important organs, viz.
the peritoneum (lining membrane of the abdomen), the intestinal
canal,  the  head,  &c,  and thus excite the  many-formed, but
highly hazardous  puerperal or childbed fever.  This  may fre-
quently be checked in the beginning, and the secretion of milk
restored again  by the timely administration of Pulsatilla, 12th
attenuation. But if this remedy fail to effect this, then although
I have likewise cured childbed fever with it, the aid of the phy-
sician is indispensably necessary,  as other medicines, peculiarly
adapted to  each form of such fever, and precisely corresponding,
are required.

         Milk-crust.   Milk-scab.  Crusta Lactea.
               See also Face, scabs on the, in children.
  This is mostly an affection of young infants, and is  charac-
terized by an eruption of numerous small white pustules, appear-
ing in clusters upon a red ground. They generally make  their
appearance first on  the face, particularly the cheeks and fore-
head, from whence they sometimes spread over the entire body.
In  a  short time  they become  yellow,  or dark colored, burst,
and form thin yellow crusts.
  The eruption is often attended by considerable redness and
swelling of the surrounding parts, and with troublesome itching,
which  renders the child exceedingly restless and fretful, and
causes it to rub the affected parts constantly, by which the scabs
are torn off, and the disease aggravated.
   Treatment.—Aconite, Rhus toxicod., Sulphur, Hepar sulph.,
and Arsenicum, are the chief remedies.
  Aconite  should be  administered first, when  the eruption  is 
MISCARRIAGE.  MOUTH, ETC.  MUMPS.        185
surrounded by  redness and inflammation of the skin, and the
patient is very restless  and uneasy.  It may be repeated night
and morning.
  Rhus toxicod. may follow Aconite, if after the lapse of a few
days the  eruption appears  to be but  little improved.  Repeated
same as the last.
  Sulphur will be beneficial after Rhus toxicod. when the latter
fails to produce a favorable change, or when the  improvement
progresses but slowly. These two remedies may be administered
alternately in many cases with great advantage.
  Hepar, Sulphur, and Arsenicum, will be found useful in ob-
stinate or complicated cases.
  Lycopodium, Sepia, and Graphites, may also be serviceable
in tedious cases.

                     MISCARRIAGE.
                         See Abortion.
                MOUTH, BABY'S, SORE.
                         See Aphthsea.
     Mouth,  Scurvy, or Canker of the.  Cankrum oris.
  This is a disease of the  interior of the mouth, which usually
begins with burning, heat, redness and great soreness of the gums,
the inside of the lips and cheeks, and  the  tongue and palate;
it is attended by an intolerable putrid smell, painful swelling of
the glands of  the  throat,  and a discharge of  a copious, viscid,
very fetid mucus or saliva.  The gums  are  spongy,  and much
swollen;  small  suppurating  ulcers  also appear on  the gums,
which emit a highly offensive smell.  The remedy most effectual,
and which will generally remove  the disease in a few days, is
Mercurius solubilis, in the 6th attenuation.  It may be repeated
three or four times in a day.  If  the disease is somewhat better
after three or four days, Tinctura sulphuris  may be substituted
for the Mercurius solubilis with advantage.

                          MUMPS.
                      See  Ears, inflamed, Ac.
        24 
186  NAVEL-RUPTURE. NETTLE-RASH. NEURALGIA. NIGUTMJ
                      Navel-rupture.
  Navel rupture is often met with, and may arise in consequence
of pulling at the navel string, or long continued soreness of the
navel, of dressing the child too tight, and especially from frequent
crying.  The rupture may project from  half an inch to an inch
or more.  Though a well applied belly band is in many cases of
essential service, and is often sufficient of itself to heal a navel-
rupture, yet it does not always answer the purpose, as it is liable
to be displaced, especially when children cry much.  In trouble-
some cases I generally make use of a piece of linen laid in four
or six folds, or a well-padded half-penny, as a compress, which
I lay upon the  navel after having  carefully  reduced the rup-
ture, and fasten it by strips of adhesive plaster laid  crosswise
over it.  At times it is not amiss to wash the part several times
a day with spirituous preparations,  such as a few drops of rum
or brandy in water, &c.

                     NETTLE-RASH.
                       See Fever, miliary.

                NEURALGIA  FASCIALIS.
                      See  Facial neuralgia.
                    Nightmare.  Incubus.
   This affection comes on only during sleep,  generally when
lying on the back, and when the patient has a full stomach, or
is plethoric (full of blood). This sleep, however, is  not sound
and complete, but only a half-sleep, in which  the patient retains
so much consciousness, as  to  know that his  sufferings are  not
real, but  imaginary. Yet  notwithstanding this, he is not able
voluntarily to shake off this  condition; he cannot rest on  his
 couch, much  less rise up, neither  can he cry out.  Commonly
 this disease makes its attack in the first sleep, mostly after dream-
 ing, and  under the appearance  of  an animal or spectre which
 seems to  approach the bed and spring on the sleeper, causing a 
NIGHTMARE.                    187
sensation as of an oppressive load on the body, chiefly on the
breast, which is followed by great pressure, or an anxious feeling
of impending suffocation.  The attack continues but a short time,
but  is  often renewed several  times in the same night.  The
waking up  is mostly sudden,  and  leaves behind  a feeling of
languor;  and is  sometimes followed by sweating, chiefly about
the head, neck and  chest, trembling,  palpitation  of the heart,
and headache.
  As little danger as there may be in such a case, of itself, still
the patient would gladly  be freed from it, since it occasions un-
pleasant and  anxious interruptions of  sleep.  In order to be
relieved of this disagreeable malady, it is indispensable that the
person subject to it should abstain from the use of coffee and all
stimulating drinks, so that he may not increase the  congestion
and stagnation of blood in the abdomen, from which it often
originates.  However, it  is not often practicable, altogether to
obviate by these preventive rules alone, this morbid condition of
the vascular and nervous system, though not unfrequently an
essential abatement  is brought  about  thereby, but  it requires
also the  aid  of  suitable medicines.  The principal of these is
Nux vomica, administered in doses  of three to six globules of
the 12th attenuation, especially when  a too  free use of highly
seasoned food and spirituous drinks may have invited the attack;
or when excessive loading of the stomach may have occasioned it.
   If a day or two previous to an attack of nightmare there should
be agitation of blood; sudden flushes of heat in the face; pal-
pitations of the  heart, with anxiety and restlessness; oppressed
respiration; heat and thirst, Aconite,  12th attenuation, in doses
of three to  six globules, will be the most suitable  remedy.  It
may be repeated every 12 hours, until there be an abatement of
 the symptoms.
    One of the most valuable remedies in this form  of disease  is
  Opium, in the 3d attenuation; especially when  the patient lies
 in a state of lethargy, with snoring and  rattling in  the throat;
 open mouth and half-closed eyes; is not capable of being roused;
 the face  dripping  with cold  sweat,  anxious countenance, the 
188
OFFENSIVE BREATH.   ONANISM.
breathing often spasmodic and by starts, and occasionally also
convulsive jerkings of the limbs.
  It may be mentioned here that this form of disease sometimes
assumes a character, with the treatment of which a layman can-
not trust himself, since it often depends on deeply hidden causes
which require  an experienced physician to explore.
                             0.

                     Offensive Breath.
  This is a malady of frequent occurrence, and for young girls
of marriageable age it is peculiarly disagreeable and troublesome.
It is removed  most generally by a few doses of Aurum, 6th at-
tenuation, unless it be occasioned  by hollow teeth.—If Aurum
alone is not sufficient, Belladonna and afterwards Sepiia may be
given.—If bad breath is only perceived after eating, Nux vomica,
every evening, and in  five or six days a dose of Sulphur, will
be the best remedies.  On the contrary, if it is most observable
in the evening or at night, Pulsatilla, and afterwards  Sulphur,
will be applicable.

                 Onanism.  Self - pollution.
  The name itself sufficiently indicates the nature of  this evil,
which is more prevalent than many people imagine; and to the
great detriment  of the young, it  is  generally misapprehended
by parents and tutors, who think the ground of the evil is to bo
sought only in moral depravity.   But nevertheless this is not
always the case,  as any unprejudiced person  will admit with me,
when I affirm  that there may exist also a physical cause inducing
an itching at  the sexual organs,  by which the child  feels tor-
mented, desires to relieve itself, and debilitates itself. This irrita-
tion  is observable even  in first dentition, in worm diseases, in
predisposition  to affections of the brain, in scrofula, &c.  Occa-
sional causes are most of all to be met with in schools and  other 
OVERFEEDING OF CHILDERN.             189
institutions for education, and teachers should keep a strict watch
over the immoral children, to see that they do not find an oppor-
tunity to seduce the innocent, and infect them  with this vice.
The consequences of this  foul practice, when long persisted in,
are : debility both of body and mind.  At first a general wasting
away takes place, the bodily powers diminish, and mental slug-
gishness supervenes, with a dreamlike condition and lethargy;
gradually paleness of the face, circles about the eyes, indigestion,
want of attention, especially when this vice has been long prac-
tised, headache, &c, set in. These symptoms are not always all
met with at the same  time, and  they may be removed by the
powers of nature, if this vice is desisted from in time. Where
the  latter is  not  done, and the  subject continues to indulge
in  this practice, so destructive to  body and mind,  it is but
natural that the sufferings described, both physical and mental,
should continue to increase, and finally lead  to  entire dis-
organization.
   In reference to the treatment, if worms be the exciting cause,
the proper remedies will be found under" the articles  " Vomit-
ing", "Colic", and " Itching of the Anus". When, on the other
hand, agitation (ebullition) of blood, or determination of  blood
to  any particular  organ  be  the exciting cause, the necessary
remedies will be found under these heads.—If, however,  the
disease depends on an immoral course of life,  the following
remedies will be beneficial, providing the patient lives chastely,
curbs his passions, and combats this vice with the whole power
of his will.   The most specific remedy is China, 24th attenua-
tion, repeated every three or four days.  If this, after several
repetitions,  has not a salutary  effect, it  may be alternated
with Phosphoric acid and Conium, in the higher attenuations.

            OVERFEEDING  OF CHILDREN.
See Vomiting. 
190   PALTITATION  OF THE  HEART.  PLEURISY.   TOISONINd.

                            P.

           PALPITATION OF THE HEART.
                    See Heart, palpitation of.
                Pleurisy.  Pleuritis.
  The most striking symptom of this disease is a stitch in the
side more or less acute, which makes breathing exceedingly dif-
ficult  and painful,  preventing the patient from  taking a  full
breath. Some relief is obtained by grasping the  ribs and press-
ing firmly on them; the patient can lie well on the  sound side,
but not long on the affected  one.  At times a short dry cough
attends the disease,  but frequently it is absent, at least in the
commencement.  Heat is always present, sometimes in a great,
at others in a moderate degree.—Sharp north and west winds
(in Germany east winds) occasion pleurisy most readily.
  The  chief remedy is Aconite, a few globules of the 12th at-
tenuation, of which remedy Hahnemann says : " In measles, in
scarlet rash, in acute pleurisy, &c, its virtues are almost mira.
culous, if given alone to a patient who is kept  somewhat cool,
and avoids every other medicinal article, even vegetable acids,
a single dose will often be sufficient to affect a cure."
   In the majority of cases,  however, advantage  will be derived
from  Bryonia, or Sulphur, after the fever has been  subdued by
Aconite.
                         Poisoning.
   I think it advisable  to make some remarks on the symptoms
of poisoning, in order that the laity may do something against
it, while  the physician is being sent for.   Although I do not
deem it proper  to  give the  medical antidotes, as the laity are
anxious and alarmed in cases of this kind, and may easily mis-
take  the proper remedy, or perhaps may give them too indis-
criminately.
   Poison may be suspected,  when a  person otherwise in  good
health, without any known cause, is taken suddenly and unex-
 pectedly ill with unusual  and severe symptoms; at the same 
POISONING.
191
time strict regard  must be  paid  to what he has eaten, to his
occupation, circumstances and relations.
  Narcotic poisons are the most dangerous, and are mostly made
use of, as they occasionally kill suddenly and without any strik-
ing symptom.  They indeed act significantly by the medium of
smell.  To this class belong the vapor of charcoal, the mephitic
vapor of confined places, and the concentrated odors from flowers
which are otherwise not poisonous; also opium, berries of deadly
nightshade,  thorn apple,  henbane, hemlock, cocculus Indicus,
poison mushrooms,  &c.   The most common symptoms of this
class of  poisons are: pressing pain and great heaviness at  the
stomach, anxiety, nausea, vomiting, drowsiness, dulness  of the
head, confusion of ideas  and of the understanding, giddiness,
lethargy, and great inclination to sleep.  The  patient becomes
powerless, stammers incoherently, trembles; his pulse is variable,
mostly slow, but occasionally strong and quick.  To these  suc-
ceed stupor, laborious, rattling respiration, wild gestures, mania,
convulsive twitches, paralysis, &c.
   Acrid poisons may be known  by the following  symptoms:
the patient  complains of an  acute,  burning,  and very painful
sensation in the fauces, throat and stomach, also of a griping
pain  in  the  pit  of the stomach,  intense  anguish, nausea  and
vomiting, by which blood is often thrown up;  at times there is
violent diarrhoea, at others constipation,  with  distention  of the
abdomen, and the most severe cutting pains.
   The vomiting which  is a  usual accompaniment must not be
checked, but on the contrary it must be encouraged by tickling
the throat with a  feather, or by taking strong  black coffee, of
which the patient may drink abundantly.  Coffee is particularly
serviceable in poisoning from narcotic substances,  such as opium,
nux vomica,  thorn  apple,  poison sumach, bitter almonds, prussic
acid,  belladonna, valerian,  hemlock, and also that from  anti-
mony, phosphorus  and phosphoric  acid, when drowsiness,  in-
toxication, loss of consciousness, or confusion of mind are present.
One of the most appropriate remedies in such cases is likewise
rich cream, of which the  patient may tak   as much as he  can 
192
PUERPERAL FEVER.
possibly bear.   White of egg, mixed with water, should be given
freely as a drink,  in  cases of metallic  poisoning—from quick-
silver, verdigris, tin, lead, and sulphuric acid, which is attended
by constant pains  of the  stomach and  bowels, urging to stool,
or diarrhoea, and soreness of the rectum.—A solution of common
white soap, in four times its quantity of hot water, will also have
a good effect;  a teacupful of which  may be drank  at a time.—
Sweetened water is likewise beneficial.  The symptoms of poison-
in f from vegetable and animal substances (particularly  Spanish
flies) are removed, after the stomach has been cleansed by ex-
citing vomiting, or when vomiting  and diarrhoea,  paleness of
face, coldness  of the limbs,  and loss of consciousness already
exist with most  certainty by frequent small doses  of spirits of
camphor—a drop every three or four minutes—diminishing the
frequency as the symptoms  abate.  This is the best treatment
to pursue until the arrival of the physician, after which he will
direct what is best to be done.

            Puerperal Fever.  Childbed Fever.
  During lying-in, mostly through imprudence, a number of
complaints are  brought on, which, if only  in  some  degree
attended by fever,  receive the name of childbed fever. A disease
of this  kind, which  is dangerous  in the beginning, setting in
with debility, confusion of the head, and great anxiety of mind
—seldom appears later than the tenth or twelfth day. The chief
symptom of this complaint is  a burning or cutting, colicy pain
in the lower  part  of the abdomen,  or  about  the  navel,  which
appears at the same time with  the  fever, or even  before  it; at
first this pain is moderate,  abating, or disappearing entirely for
a short  time, but  soon  it grows  to  an alarming height,  and is
increased by the slightest  pressure  or motion; the abdomen is
also distended.  At times, also, this disease comes on like inflam-
mation  of the  lungs, brain, &c.  The milk generally soon dis-
appears, and afterwards the lochia also;  translations of the milk
likewise often take place (hence the expression : " the milk has
got into the head").  There are usually'also frequent,  copious, 
QUINSY.
193
debilitating sweats which have a sour smell, and seldom produce
even temporary relief.   The following are the principal exciting
causes: cold, suppression of the lochial discharge, and the secre-
tion of  milk; vitiated stomach; and especially emotions of the
mind,  such as grief, fright, anger, &c.  Difficult and tedious
labors, too great warmth, abuse of chamomile tea,  the applica-
tions of cold to the abdomen to check haemorrhage may likewise
give occasion to this disease.
   It  is not my intention  to commit the  management of this
dangerous disease to the laity, but only to indicate what will be
necessary at the onset, while the physician is being sent for. If
the disease presents an inflammatory appearance, a few doses of
Aconite at first  will  be  most  suitable, and which  are to be
repeated the oftener, the more violent the fever.  If there be fre-
quent  returns of anguish, Ipecacuanha  will be most appropriate
after the fever is moderated by the use of Aconite.  It may be
frequently repeated, and followed,  if  necessary, by  Bryonia.
When the  brain is attacked, Belladonna, in a high attenuation,
is most  serviceable after Aconite. — If the  disease  has  been
brought on by violent  anger, Chamomilla  must be given  after
Aconite;  and if the  lochia has been  suddenly  suppressed by
emotions of the mind,  such as fright, anger, &c, or by cold, the
disease will be best combatted by a dose  or two  of Pulsatilla.
If the disease arise from too free use of coffee or chamomile tea,
and there are severe  pains  of the back and loins, stitches and
pains as if from a  bruise in the lower part of the abdomen on
motion,  from touch, coughing and sneezing, with nausea  and
vomiting, or costiveness, &c. Nux vomica, 12th attenuation, is
the appropriate remedy.

                          QUINSY.
                    See Throat, sore—inflamed.
25 
194
RASH.   RHEUMATISM.
                          RASH.
                       See Fever, miliary.
                    Rheumatism.
  Rheumatism generally occurs  in the transition of winter into
spring, and of summer into autumn, when the weather is un-
settled, and the air  moist and cold; it is very frequently met
with, and mostly arises from exposure to cold.  Ordinarily it is
not considered of much  account, and the patient drinks freely
tea of some kind with  the view of producing  sweating, and
thereby removing the disease in  this case as in miliary fever—
few cases however are removed by exciting perspiration, and even
in these the appropriate homoeopathic remedies are most service-
able ; in most cases, however, sudorific  medicines are injurious,
and  at least change the  character of the malady, making it more
obstinate, giving rise to fever, headache, and  relaxations from
the great loss of moisture, and always leaves  behind a greater
predisposition to returns of the complaint.  Hence the patient is
exposed to the danger of  getting the so-called chronic Rheuma-
tism, which is  only moderated  for any length of time by  a
peculiarly favorable state of the atmosphere, but is again brought
on by the slightest change therein, sometimes more, sometimes
less  severe, and  the treatment of which is always  attended by
great difficulties.  Rheumatism is nearly allied to gout, and con-
sequently there is room  to apprehend that by neglect and numer-
ous  outward influences, a chronic  rheumatism may be invited
which may degenerate into gout. Under homoeopathic treatment
rheumatism itself disappears, and leaves no trace of its existence,
the patient need not keep his bed, but has only to guard against
taking cold, and endeavor to maintain a moderate degree of
perspiration.
   The treatment is always to be regulated according to the seat,
and  the different kinds  of pain.  Rheumatism with active fever,
evident signs of inflammation, (redness, swelling, &c.,) and very
acute tearing spasms, in subjects of  a full habit always requires 
RHEUMATISM.
195
the administration of Aconite, 12th attenuation,  repeated  every
four or six hours.  But if the pains are not entirely removed by
this medicine, a dose or two of Bryonia, 12th attenuation, will
mostly be sufficient, particularly when there are tearing, pres-
sive pains, with  shining  red swelling, and a feeling of stiffness,
which are aggravated by motion and at night.
   Chamomilla, 3d attenuation, is indicated, if  on  the contrary
there is general inquietude, heaviness in the limbs, pain  in the
joints as if they were beaten;  drawing or  tearing pains in the
joints, worse at night, and alleviated by sitting up and frequent
motion in bed;  the affected part, the arm, leg, or hips, feel as
if it were palsied, or disabled from over-exertion; pains in the
small of the  back as if beaten; the pains occasionally appear
in the teeth, and are of a drawing, gnawing character, affecting
the whole  side of the face, and extending even to the ears; the
patient fears to move, is inclined  to  lie down, is fretful,  chilly,
cannot sleep, is very weak and tired, especially soon after waking,
so as hardly to be able to stand.  Usually soon after this remedy
is taken,  a  mild  perspiration breaks out, whicb  must be en-
couraged.
   Dulcamara,  3d, and Rhus  toxicod., 12th attenuation, are
 also very important remedies  in complaints of  this kind. The
 first, especially in those which take place immediately after ex-
 posure of  the limbs to cold;  the latter in the tense acute pains,
 which are worse when at rest, or on rising from  a sitting posture
 than  by other motion;  and are aggravated also in  the open air,
 and on being touched.
   Belladonna is most suitable when there is rheumatic fever with
 headache and swelling of the  muscles of the neck and  throat,
 in which the least motion excites  the most  severe  pains, with a
 simultaneous  attack in one knee joint without  swelling, which
 can only be maintained in the bent posture;  also against press-
 ing or tearing pains seated deep  in the  bones, as if  an electric
 shock had been communicated to the neighbouring  joint, with
 painful dull  pressure, which  is only alleviated  by  counter-pres-
 sure, and is aggravated by motion. 
196
RHEUMATISM.
   Pulsatilla, 12th attenuation, against rheumatic drawing pains,
most  severe in the evening, which appear mostly in the limbs,
and especially in the flesh  near the joints, attended from time
to time with a sensation of burning or pain in the ankle, as
if beaten;  painful lameness of the arms and  hands;  feeling
of general debility;  restless sleep; tossing from side to side,
and inability to keep  warm in bed;  cold chills,  pain in the
muscles of the abdomen as if bruised,  particularly when cough-
ing,  sneezing or  laughing.   This kind  of rheumatism  often
changes from one limb to another,  and is  attended  by swelling
of the affected part. This remedy is also useful,  when both sides
of the neck are swollen and painful, with a sensation on motion,
as if there was a phlegmon or abscess there.
   Bryonia, 12th  attenuation, is  most useful against pains on
motion, breathing, &c. as if beaten in all the joints and ligaments
of the arm, the breast, the  back and the nape of the neck, which
are also felt when  sitting  and lying down, but  are aggravated
by motion;  pain  in the small of  the  back  as  if crushed by a
wheel, soreness and drawing pains  in the tendons of the  muscles,
where they are inserted on the ends of the bones, particularly
soon after rising from bed.  Pain  in  the  limbs on motion, as if
dislocated, stiffness of the body on motion, especially after rising
from sleep at noon.  Passing  the  whole surface of  the magnet
over the part may likewise be serviceable  in cases of this kind.
   Nux vomica, 12th  attenuation, is  indicated  when  there  is
constriction and pressure in the outer parts of the chest; stitches
in the muscles of the  chest, aggravated by breathing;  stitches
between the shoulder blades  on motion and breathing;  pain in
the shoulder joints and blades as  if bruised; attacks  of acute
pain in the back of the neck and  vertebrae, as if from a load on
the neck;  stiffness of the back; pain  in the abdominal musclea
and small of the  back  as  if bruised,  which renders turning in
bed  exceedingly  difficult  and painful; great  irritability;  the
patient complains loudly of his pains,  scolds and dislikes to be
spoken to, is restless during sleep, has chilliness, and cold hands
and feet. 
RINGWORM.  SCALD HEAD.
197
   Colchicum, 6th attenuation, is also  a very useful remedy in
rheumatism, especially  that which appears  in the damp, wet,
cold weather of autumn, and is often attended with swelling of
the joints, redness and severe tensive pains.
              Ringworm.   Herpes  Circinnatus.
   This is  a common affection,  especially in children, and con-
sists of an eruption of small circular rings of red spots, the skin
within the ring having a natural appearance at first, but sub-
sequently becomes rough, of a reddish  hue,  and scales off as the
eruption dies away.
   The disease generally appears on the face, neck, arms and
shoulders,  and frequently disappears of itself after two or three
weeks duration.
   Sepia:  A dose or two  of this remedy will generally remove
this affection.  Should  it fail,  the alternate administration of
Rhus toxicod. and Sulphur every four  or five days,  will mostly
prove effectual.
   Calcarea, Causticum, and Sulphur, have also been recom-
mended in obstinate cases.
                            s.
                Scald Head.  Tinea capitas.
  This is a disease of the hairy part of  the head, which mostly
appears between the first and twelfth year of age, and is known
by the following symptoms.  The child  complains of an itching
and  burning pain on certain parts of  the  head, where  small,
round, pointed efflorescences on an inflamed  rose-colored ground
make their appearance, which are  hard  at their  base, but soft
and  yellowish at their  points.   They  gradually become more
elevated, burst, and give out a viscous, thick, offensive discharge,
by which the complaint is more and more spread, the hair is
glued together and vermin are created.  Soon scaly, thick, raised,
hard crusts are formed, under which the secretion of matter still
goes on, contributing to  the thickening of the crusts or scabs. 
198
SCARLET FEVER.
 The discharge is also usually accompanied  by swelling of somo
 of the glands of the throat, neck, and head.
   The chief remedy in this  form of disease, according  to my
 experience, is Rhus toxicod.  in the 12th attenuation, a dose  of
 which may be given every  three  or four  days, or oftener.  To
 effect a complete cure, several doses  will be requisite.
   The attendant swelling and hardness of the  glands of the
 throat, neck and other parts of the body, with remarkable pale-
 ness of the face and flabbiness of muscles, are best relieved  by
 Dulcamara, in  a  low attenuation,  repeated at intervals  of  24
 hours.
   If these  remedies should  not be sufficient, a few doses  of
 Tinct. sulp>h., at long intervals, should be given, and will often
 speedily change  the character of the disease and cause  it to take
 on a more healthy action. If the eruption be of a moist nature,
 and Sulphur is  found ineffectual, Staphysagria, 12th attenua-
 tion,  is at times beneficial;   Baryta acetica,  6th attenuation,
 and Hepar sulphur, are also serviceable in some cases.

                       Scarlet  Fever.
  In order that the laity may  obtain some knowledge of the
 genuine scarlet fever, and may be able to distinguish it from the
 so nearly allied  scarlet rash,  but by no means to entrust  them
 with the management of a disease  often so fatal, I shall accu-
rately point out  the symptoms of this affection of the skin.
  The genuine scarlet fever generally attacks children  previous
to the twelfth year  of age; the redness  of  the skin is, like ery-
sipelas,  of  a fiery  color;  a bright  scarlet, which disappears  on
pressure with the finger at once,  leaving a white spot which im-
mediately becomes red again when the pressure is removed; this
smooth, shining, and perfectly even redness of the skin, is never
circumscribed, but  is imperceptibly lost in  the adjacent white
parts. The eruption usually appears first on the uncovered  parts
 on the face, on the neck and breast, on the hands and feet,  is at-
tended by swelling and gradually spreads over the rest of the body.
 At the same time with this redness the heat and fever appear. The 
SCARLET RASH.
199
greater and more extensive the redness of true scarlet fever, the
more violent is the fever. There is no sweating while the disease
continues; at times after the redness disappears, and the skin
begins to scale off, perspiration occurs.   The attendant inflam-
mation of the throat is always more or less active.
   Belladonna is  the  remedy recommended by Hahnemann as
the preservative against  this disease, when it prevails  as an epi-
demic, with which view  a few globules of  a high attenuation
may by given every four  or  five days.—But medicines which
prove themselves  preventives of diseases, must also possess  to
some extent  the  power  of curing them, when they make their
appearance.   And this is the case with Belladonna in scarlet
fever, which  acts not only as a defence but as a cure, whether
the disease be in its incipient stage, or have fully developed itself.
The proper dose is the same that has already been often directed.
   If scarlet  fever be  complicated with scarlet rash, or if  other
important morbid symptoms be connected with it, the presence
of a physician is indispensable.

                        Scarlet Rash.
   This disease, which  appears to  be so similar to scarlet fever,
presents  nevertheless some striking differences.
   The scarlet rash attacks persons of all ages;  the eruption
consists  of purplish red  spots or  patches, that leave  no white
mark on pressure with  the  end of the finger, but remain un-
changed—of a dark-red  color; these spots  are thickly covered
with dark-red pimples or granules, which are very little raised
above the level of the skin, but  are deeply imbedded  in it, and
may be distinctly seen and felt with  the finger.  This  eruption
attacks indifferently any part of the body, but prefers those that
are covered, and the bendings of  the  joints;  it is usually unat-
tended by swelling.   The accompanying fever has no  definite
regular course.  The sudden  recession of this eruption is often
attended by great danger. The eruption may be very extensive,
or scarcely perceptible, without regard to its favorable or unfavor-
able character.   Perspiration is  observable  only  on the  parts 
200
SCALDS.   SCIATICA.
covered by the eruption.   It is also  usually accompanied by a
more or less severe pain in the throat.
  In this disease, so different from genuine scarlet, fever, Bella-
donna  is neither useful as a preventive, nor as a cure ;  Aconite,
however, in the 12 th attenuation,  is serviceable both as  a pro-
phylactic  and cure; it may be given every six or eight hours,
if the  heat, restlessness, and anxiety, are not diminished after
the first dose.   Coffea  cruda, 3d attenuation, will  afford relief,
if the patient complain of severe pains, and is fretful and irrit-
able.  It  is, however, adviseable to consult a  physician  at  the
outset  of the disease;  the more so, as the frequently recurring
epidemics appear to assume a more and more threatening charac-
ter, and the disease is now seldom  as harmless, as was  formerly
the case.  If the disease be complicated with true scarlet fever,
Dulcamara, repeated every four or six  hours, is preferable to
every other remedy.

                       SCALDS.
                          See Burns.
               Sciatica.  Neuralgia sciatica.
  Sciatica, like lumbago, may be acute, but it is more frequently
chronic.   It is characterized by severe pain in  the region  of  the
hip joint  which shoots along the  course  of  the sciatic nerve to
the ham,  sometimes extending to  the foot,  and is accordingly
neuralgic  in its character.
  The  most common cause  of sciatica is  exposure to cold, espe-
cially to damp and  cold east winds in spring and autumn.
  The most serviceable remedies are: Aconite, Colocynth, Rhus
toxicod., Nux vomica, Ignatia, Chamomilla,  and Arsenicum.
  Aconite is  indicated  in the beginning when the  disease is
attended by fever.
   Colocynth  is  particularly applicable  when  the  affection is
seated  in the right hip, and has been excited by a fit of anger.
  Rhus toxicod., when the pains are aggravated  by  rest, and
relieved by motion  or warmth.
  Nux vomica, when the pain is attended by a sensation of stiff- 
          SKIN, ITCHING OF THE.  SLEEPLESSNESS.      201

ness or contraction of the limb; also when a feeling of paralysis
or torpor with chilliness, is experienced in the affected part.
   Ignatia,  against cutting pains, particularly  on moving the
limb.
   Chamomilla, when the pains are worse at night, and attended
with excessive sensibility.
   Arsenicum, in cases where the pains are acute and digging,
with a sensation of coldness in the part affected; also when the
pains are periodical. It is likewise useful in cases attended  by
emaciation.
                    Skin, Itching of the.
   Intense itching is sometimes occasioned  by colorless  smooth
and tender elevations of the  skin, without the formation of pus-
tules, scaling off, or becoming pointed and without presenting the
proper appearance of an eruption.  The uninterrupted scratching
often gives rise to pain, and to a serous discharge,  which thickens
in a small, thin, concrete scurf, sometimes forming real pustules.
This itching is constant, and most  troublesome in  the evening,
and when warm.—It is most  speedily relieved  by a few doses
of Sulphur, in the higher  attenuations.
   Itching of the skin of  a fine, pricking, burning character, as
if from fleabites, on the whole body, without any visible cause,
which comes on chiefly in the evening after going to bed, and
which readily disappears from the part that is  scratched, and
appears on another,  is  a characteristic indication  for Ignatia
amara, and consequently yields readily to this remedy.  It may
be given in the 12 th attenuation, and repeated two or three times.

                       Sleeplessness.
   This is an evil that no age is free from, and when of long
continuance, it  is exceedingly troublesome, and even prejudicial
to health.  It is very common with children, and is then mostly
owing to physical pain, and  occasionally to fear  from being
left in the dark.  In  grown  persons, excessive literary labor
continued late  at  night, is  frequently the cause; likewise the
use of too  strong coffee, which  many persons habituate them-
        26 
202
SLEErLKSSNESS.
selves to for the purpose of keeping awake, and to cause greater
activity of mind ; want of pure, wholesome air; weakness of the
digestive powers, and overloading the stomach, are also causes.
   Coffee is one of the most  fruitful sources of this malady, and
discontinuing the habitual use of it alone is frequently sufficient
to effect a cure.   For those who acknowledge that they have
made too free use of it, for  the purpose of keeping off sleep in
order to accomplish  a great deal of  mental labor, there is
no better remedy than Nux  vomica, 12th  attenuation;  the
coffee must  also  be dispensed with for a  time at least.  This
medicine not only destroys the injurious effects of coffee, but has
also a good effect against the sleeplessness,  as well as against
that excessive irritability which is brought on by frequent, long
continued mental exertion.  The second night after taking it,
some improvement will generally be perceived, which will in-
crease daily.
   When the  digestive powers have  been impaired by over-
loading the stomach,  or by making use of  highly seasoned  and
numerous incongruent articles of food, thereby causing costive-
ness, flatulency, sleeplessness, &c.;  Pulsatilla, 12th attenuation,
will be the most efficient remedy.
   The  complaints of  sleeplessness,  too long sleep, frequent
waking, falling  asleep too late, and  the  like, which are con-
sequent on advanced age,  are too numerous and require too
nicely detailed  statements  to  make them a  subject  of special
treatment here.
   The sleeplessness of children is not only of itself a hindrance
to their growth,  but is also very troublesome to  mothers; fre-
quently, however, they themselves  are to blame for giving their
children unsuitable, unnatural food, or stuffing them with chamo-
mile and fennel tea; all of  which disturb digestion, excite colic,
or gripings, and prevent sleep.
    Chamomilla,  the  3d attenuation,  may be given  with great
benefit in sleeplessness, provided chamomile  tea  has not been
taken, especially when attended with  flatulency,  distention  of
the abdomen, &c. 
SMALL POX.
203
  But if chamomile tea has been taken, and the child suffers in
no other way than  from great wakefulness, Coffea, 3d attenua-
tion, will be most suitable.  This remedy is also of great benefit
in the sleeplessness that follows  excessive joy, an agreeable sur-
prise, or long night watching.
   Sleeplessness, attended with constant crying, drawing up of
the limbs to the abdomen, turning and twisting of the body and
the head, or even with diarrhoea, is  frequently cured by a few
passes of Mesmerism.
   Belladonna will mostly relieve the sleeplessness  of children,
which usually  succeeds weaning, and is of  several days'  con-
tinuance, and which cannot be entirely ascribed to the weaning,
but is doubtless owing to  the unnatural irritation of the brain.
It  is  also applicable  in  sleeplessness  accompanied by great
anxiety, restlessness, frightful images, and fear of  surrounding
objects.
   Aconite is most appropriate  in sleeplessness  occasioned  by
mental emotions,  such as anxiety,  fright or fear,  for instance.
This  remedy may be given  in repeated doses, and if it fails, fol-
lowed by a dose or two of Opium, particularly when the sleep-
lessness is accompanied  by visions of ghosts, wonderful shapes,
&c, or when it takes place  in old people.
   Ignatia, likewise,  in repeated doses, will be beneficial when
the sleeplessness has been brought on by care, sorrow, affliction,
unpleasant thoughts, and other depressing emotions of the mind.
On the contrary,  Moschus will be most suitable when  nervous
irritation has given rise to it in hysterical and  hypochondriac
persons.
                         Small Pox.
   This is an eruptive, contagious disease, attended with fever,
which, as a general rule, attacks a person but  once during life.
It usually sets in with slight feverish symptoms, such  as head-
ache, weariness,  fretfulness, disposition  to sleep, congestion of
blood to the head with bleeding at the nose,  drawing pains in
 the limbs, &c.  After  these symptoms have continued with more
 or less  severity  for three or four days, red pimples make their 
204                    SORE THROAT.

appearance in the skin, first in the face, and then on  the  other
parts  of the body; these  gradually become more elevated, and
in about 4S hours from their  first appearance, change  to pus-
tules.  After three or four days more, the  pox-pustule is  more
fully developed, and fills, first at the top, with a transparent
serous fluid, which becomes thicker and less transparent  every
day, and about the eighth  or ninth day from the first appearance
of the eruption the pustules are matured,  being then filled with
a yellowish pus, and having a depression  in the centre.   These
now dry up gradually, leaving a brownish scab, with the falling
off of which the disease terminates. When the pustules are filled
with lymph, the surrounding parts become more inflamed,  there-
by exciting a-new the so-called suppurative fever; at this period,
also, in severe cases, the pustules begin to run into each other—
thence called confluent.
   At the commencement  of the disease, Aconite, 12th attenua-
tion, may be given every three or four hours, and if the fever be
high, and is attended with delirium, Belladonna, 15th attenua-
tion,  one or more doses according to circumstances.  This  latter
remedy is also often required in the suppurative stage, which is
not unfrequently accompanied with fever  and violent delirium.
Mercurius solubilis, 6th attenuation, will  be found useful after
Aconite,  or Belladonna,  to promote suppuration;  it  may bo
repeated two,  or  three, or more times.
   As many important  symptoms may  be connected with this
disease,  which cannot  be  detailed here, it is therefore advisable
to send in time for an experienced physician.

         Sore Throat. Inflammation of the Throat.
   What is commonly  called a sore throat, consists of an inflam-
mation of the membrane  which covers  the inside of this part,
 and often goes off without the use  of any medicine;  at  times,
 however,  it attains to a  dangerous height in a short time, and
 requires help. In children it ought never to be long neglected,
 since from the great  irritability of  their  nervous systems, this
 malady not only becomes more obstinate  and serious, and draws 
SORE  THROAT.
205
the whole body into the morbid sphere,  but also because  there
is a greater tendency to a repetition of the attacks of inflamma-
tion on every exposure to cold.  These  repeated attacks of in-
flammation of the throat not infrequently leave behind important
swellings and enlargements  of the tonsils of both sides of the
glottis, extending even  to the glottis itself, which can only be
permanently removed by a long continued and careful treatment.
  If  this  inflammation has spread  extensively, that is, if the
root of the tongue,  soft palate,  glottis and tonsils, and the whole
mucous membrane of the throat is affected;  the fever being, as
is usual in such cases, of a violent grade,  the most appropriate
treatment is  to commence by giving one or two doses of Aconite,
before administering the remedies suited  to the special inflam-
mation of  the throat.
   Chamomilla, 3d attenuation, is indicated, especially for chil-
dren, when there is dryness of  the throat, with thirst; disagree-
able  feeling of obstruction  in the  throat on swallowing, and
in bending the neck;  sensation  as if something were sticking
in  the throat  like  a foreign  substance, causing hawking and
unsuccessful efforts  to clear the  throat;  swelling  of  the sub-
maxillary glands, with  throbbing  pain;  fever towards evening;
alternate chills and heat with  fretfulness.—This condition does
not always yield to Chamomilla, but at times requires Ignatia
amara, 12th attenuation,  particularly when there is  swelling
of the interior of the throat in one spot, like a lump, and swal-
lowing causes soreness or rawness only at this spot.
   Mercurius solubilis, 6th attenuation, is  indicated when there
is profuse flow of saliva in the mouth,  which requires  constant
spitting; difficult swallowing with a sensation of burning in the
throat; the throat seems too narrow; pricking pains in the throat,
which extend to the ear; swelling of  the  tonsils, and  pricking
pain on swallowing; disagreeable taste in the mouth, with swell-
ing of the  root of the tongue, and back part of the gums; catar-
rhal fever, with alternate chilliness and heat in the evening.
   Pulsatilla, 6th attenuation,  when there is pain with rawness
and soreness in the throat, as if it were too dry; cutting pain in 
£00                    SORE  THROAT.

the throat;  want of proper moisture in the throat; the glands
of the throat somewhat swollen, sensitive to the touch, and seem
to occasion difficulty in swallowing;  pricking pain in the throat,
both on swallowing and without.  Chilliness which comes on in
the evening, and is followed by heat, with quiet sleep and absence
of thirst.
   Coffea, 3d attenuation, when  there is constant  pain in  the
side of the  palate next the throat,  which is increased by swal-
lowing;  swelling  of the  lower part  of the  palate, the  uvula,
which is lengthened, and seems to the patient to be a collection
of mucus at that spot, which causes him to swallow constantly;
feeling of dryness and heat of the throat; irritation which excites
coughing,  discharge  at the  nose, sleeplessness  and  heat  with
irritability, and disposition  to shed  tears.  The symptoms are
aggravated in the  open air^
   It is to be understood that those  only  who are not used to
poffee as a drink, can be benefited by it in cases  of  this kind,
which are generally also accompanied with running at the nose.
Belladonna, 18 th attenuation, is likewise frequently applicable
in cases  of this kind, especially when in  drinking, a cramplikc
constriction is felt in the throat,  with external swelling.
   Belladonna is  also  indicated in very  violent inflammations
of the throat, in which the patient is incapable of describing the
pain; and on opening his mouth and pressing down the tongue,
the glands of both sides of the throat (tonsils) are found to be
so red and swollen as to reach almost to the uvula; the root of
the tongue and palate  are likewise red and  swollen, rendering
 speech exceedingly difficult; accompanied also with burning heat
 of the whole body, and insatiable thirst.  Inflammations  of this
 kind, I  have often  allayed very speedily by giving a dose or
 two of Belladonna, followed  next  day by a few doses of Mer-
 curius solubilis, repeated every six or eight hours.
    Quinsey.—This  is an  inflammatory affection of the glands
 (parotids) behind and under the ears,  which become swollen,
 hard and painful.  It most frequently affects  children. The sub-
 maxilliary glands also frequently participate.  The disease begins 
SORES  FROM LYING A-BED.
207
for the most part with symptoms of catarrh.  The patient is dull
and ill-humored, and complains of drawing pains in the muscles
of the neck, of headache, and cold in  the head.  After some days
the above mentioned glands  begin  to swell, and they sometimes
become enlarged to such a degree that the under-jaw cannot be
moved, and chewing and swallowing is consequently prevented.
—Taking cold is the principal cause of the disease.  If the fever
be high, the treatment  should  commence with a dose of Aconite,
which is always of great  service.  If the fever is mild, Mercu-
rius solubilis is the most suitable medicine. But on the contrary
if the glands are inflamed and of a  rose color, Belladonna is
preferable to that remedy; while Rhus toxicod. is indicated on
the accession of nervous symptoms.   In any deviation from the
natural course of this disease, a physician had better be sent for.

            Sores from lying a-bed.  Bed-sores.
   The sores caused  by lying on a part, which  are generally the
result of protracted diseases, most commonly appear on the hips,
and are very troublesome to the patient  on account of the in-
tolerable burning.   In  cases where these sores are threatened,  it
is said  that a  vessel containing fresh water,   placed under the
 patient's bed, contributes much to  their  prevention; it is  also
 beneficial to lay the patient upon a deer-skin, and to use feather-
 beds as little as possible, as mattresses are undoubtedly preferable.
 If the sore is already formed, a circular cushion of leather stuffed
 with horse-hair, or an  inflated air-cushion, hollow in the middle,
 to receive the sore, is the means most likely to render his suffer-
 ing tolerable, while the reddened  or  already sore part is bathed
 three or four times daily with a lotion of 15 to  20 drops of Tinc-
 ture of Arnica to two or three ounces of  water.  Washing with
 lemon-juice,  a common practice,  I have seldom  found  of much
 service.  If the ulcer has already become gangrenous or mortified,
 poultices of seraped carrots, mixed with a portion of grated pota-
 toes,  are of  great  service.   In these latter cases, also, China,
 given internally, is exceedingly beneficial. 
208
SPASMS.
                  Spasms.  Convulsions.
  What is usually understood by the  term "spasms", or "con-
vulsions", is an affection of the nervous system, which is mani-
fested  by involuntary and irregular  motions  of  the muscles,
attended  for the most part with pain.  The causes are numerous,
and they are modified not only by the age of the patients, but
also by the sex and constitution, in various ways.
  Spasms are not always of such a character, that the laity can
treat  them judiciously; those only which have been suddenly
brought on by injurious external influences may be entrusted  to
lay treatment.  If they depend on protracted diseases, such, for
instance, as irregularity of the  menses,  indurations, &c, they
become too  lingering and complicated for one uninstructed  in
medicine to undertake. The spasms are then a mere symptom
of the  primary disease, and they may  indeed for the moment  be
mitigated and removed, but the radical cure must be left to the
physician.
   When spasms attain a high degree of violence, so that general
rigidity of the whole body, loss of consciousness, loss of respira-
tion, and symptoms of suffocation set  in,  the medicines given  in
ordinary cases must not be relied on,  but  the aid of a physician
must  be  immediately obtained,  for these symptoms in excess,
especially in  children and very sensitive  subjects, may be fatal.
  I shall  give the most common symptoms  of  this  complaint;
and the appropriate treatment.
   1.  Infancy  is,  more than all other periods of life, liable  to
spasms, on account of the greater susceptibility of the  nervous
system.  Even the most trifling  influences, that would have  no
effect on  grown persons, may induce spasms in  infants; a mild
attack of fever, worm affections, taking cold, pains in the bowels,
fear, fright, &c.  There are medicines peculiarly suited for chil-
dren, and applicable in many of their diseases,  to which I shall
here chiefly confine myself.
   Chamomilla  is preferable in  cases where  the  spasms arise
from cold, colic, fever, vexation and anger, and  the child is very
restless; when one cheek is red,  the other pale; where  they  lie 
SPASMS.
209
with half-shut eyes and without consciousness, have convulsive
jerking of the  arms and  legs, turn the head from  side to side,
or whine, and desire drink continually.  If the child refuses  to
take it, and it is feared the spasms  would be increased by com-
pulsion, or there be a difficulty in swallowing, merely  smelling
it will sometimes suffice.  The repetition of the medicine is in-
dicated, if after an  hour or two there be a new attack.
   Ignatia, 12th attenuation, is indicated when there is frequent
flushes of heat of the  whole body;  sudden awaking from sleep
in a fright,  from which  the  child does  not easily recover, with
screaming, and trembling all over; spasmodic twitehings of single
limbs and muscles.
   Ipecacuanha will be serviceable if, with the spasmodic symp-
toms, there be shortness of breath,  loathing of all food, but not
of water; nausea, vomiting and diarrhoea.  It may be repeated
in two hours.
   Opium, 3d attenuation, will mostly  afford relief when the
spasms are caused by fright and there  is general trembling  of
the body, striking with the hands and feet, also loud involuntary
cries.
   Mercurius  solubilis, 6th attenuation,  will be useful if the
spasms arise from worms, and  if, with the convulsive symptoms
of the limbs, there  be distention and hardness of the abdomen,
belching and eructations of watery substances,  general  heat and
febrile disturbance, loss of consciousness, and  general  debility,
especially after the convulsions have subsided.
    Cina is likewise one of the best remedies  in  convulsions
arising from worms.
   Coffea, 3d attenuation, is of great benefit in spasms occurring
in delicate, sickly children, without any assignable cause, and
which are attended by  no other symptoms.   In cases of this
kind, there is generally  some latent cause for the disease, which
is called into activity by the use  of diet, too irritating for the
nervous systems of children, and which cannot be remedied with-
out the advice of a physician.  Coffee, wine, chamomile and other
teas heavy articles of food, such as meal soup, black bread, and
    '   27 
210                       SPASMS.

the like, must on this account be excluded from the diet of chil-
dren, while the medicines are being taken so that their peculiar
action will not be injuriously disturbed.
   2.  Females very often suffer from spasms during menstrua-
tion, which are manifested by constrictive pains in the abdomen,
convulsive movements of the limbs, or by twitching and jerking
of the tendons.  Many have at the  same time the most severe
constrictive  bearing-down pains low in the abdomen, extending
to the privates and thighs, which oblige them to bend themselves
double, throw themselves  on  the floor with screams,  raving
delirium, and cold sweats.
   Those who arc not habituated to coffee as a drink, find it in
cases of this kind one of the best remedies.  It may be given in
the 3d attenuation, three or four globules for a dose, on a drop
on sugar, or in a teaspoonful of water.
   But when  coffee  has  been a customary beverage from youth
up, and it may even be considered as an exciting cause of the
disease;  when at the same time there is chilliness, disposition to
tears, and anxiety; the symptoms are most violent at night,  and
are milder in the day-time, Pulsatilla  is the most serviceable
remedy.  Frequently also in such cases, Chamomilla in the 3d
attenuation is beneficial, especially when there is much stretching
of the limbs, jerking of the limbs,  eye-lids, and  tongue;  dry
and burning heat of  the skin, with burning thirst;  sweating of
the forehead and hairy scalp; anxious, rapid and rattling respira-
tion, and distention of the abdomen,  accompanied by loose,
greenish stools.
   Cocculus,  in the 12th attenuation, may be given with decided
benefit in the most severe spasms  of the abdomen, which come
on irregularly,  and  often  with very slight  premonition, parti-
cularly when accompanied  with frequent returns  of sobbing;
choking or constriction of  the upper part of the  throat,  with
restricted respiration and inclination  to cough; anxiety; spasm
 of the chest;  attacks of nausea,  which bring on fainting and
 twitching of the limbs.
   Ignatia,  6th attenuation, is  indicated if the spasms come on 
SPASMS.
211
with nausea and fainting, confusion of ideas; general chilliness
and  paleness; great sensitiveness of the organs of sight, and
hearing to light and noise, &c, which are intolerable; painful
distention and hardness of the abdomen; twisting or rolling pain
in the abdomen;  painful pressure and drawing in the abdomen;
increased warmth  of the body, with frequent and full pulse, or
intermitting pulse, at times full and strong, at others weak and
small.  In hysterical spasms of this kind,  this is the principal
remedy.
   3.  Symptoms of a convulsive character, occasioned by fright,
attended by temporary loss of consciousness,  dimness of sight,
general  trembling, diarrhoea,  restricted respiration,  and great
prostration of strength, are  mostly relieved  by Opium, 3d at-
tenuation.
   4.  Weakly, irritable  men are  at times affected with spasms,
which come on with general relaxation and languor; trembling
of the legs; coldness and general shivering; difficult respiration;
constriction of the throat, and symptoms of suffocation; frequent
yawning; hurried, weak, trembling pulse.   Camphor is in cases
of this kind particularly beneficial. As the action of this  remedy
is of short duration, it is best to let the patient smell the tincture
from time to time until the symptoms entirely disappear.
   Nux vomica, 12th attenuation, is most appropriate when the
spasms are very violent,  attended with loud  complaints; cries
and raving; abuse of the bystanders; and when the patient is
of a  hasty, passionate temper.
   Those spasms,  however, which occur in the male sex,  and are
 owing to too great irritability of  the nervous system, are only
 palliated by the last mentioned remedy; on this account, if  the
 treatment is to be successful, it must be entrusted to a physician.
   Not unfrequently do these spasms depend on excessive loss of
 semen (too frequent coition  or onanism), in which  case  China,
 6th  attenuation,  is the most  suitable remedy, and will  effect a
 complete cure,  if the  patient has so much self-command as to
 avoid  these excesses  of the sexual appetite.   In such a case,
 however, it is necessary to repeat the dose  several times every 
212          SPRAINS.   STOMACH, DISORDERED.
other day, and at longer intervals as improvement is experienced.
Phosphoric acid and Staphysagria are likewise  valuable re-
medies in cases of this kind.
              Sprains.  Injuries by lifting,  &c.
                        Soe also Bruises.
   Sprains, as well as bruises, are dynamic injuries of the  liga-
ments (joint bands) or of the muscles, without, or with so incon-
siderable detriment to their integrity, as to require no mechanical
aid, which indeed is very seldom called for.   For if even some
small filaments of a ligament be torn, this can neither be ascer-
tained with certainty, nor, if  ascertained,  can they be  united
again by bandaging.  The removal of  the injury to the vital
powers of the affected joint is  all that can be done, and  to this
end it is only necessary to rest the  limb, guard it against fresh
distention, and to use internally the specific remedy—Arnica;
which remedy excites in a healthy  person, as has been proved,
pain and swelling  of the  joints, very nearly resembling  those
arising from a sprain or dislocation, and consequently removes
them  in the patient.  For this purpose a  few globules of the 6th
attenuation  of this medicine may be  taken,  and repeated every
three  or four hours  until better.  In some cases of sprain, parti-
cularly those from lifting, Rhus toxicod. is also worthy of notice.
   The patient should avoid using the sprained limb as long as
there  is any pain or want  of  firmness  in it, without however
being too careful of  it, for  when a limb is  allowed  to rest too
long, it often takes on a sort of weakness, or stiffness and sore-
ness which is not so readily got rid of.
                    Stomach,  disordered.
   Disordered stomach and diarrhoea are very often combined,
the latter frequently depending on the former.  I would  advice
the layman at the same time to refer to the article "Diarrhoea",
because in such cases, where the symptoms of diarrhoea coincide
with those of disordered stomach, and these with the symptoms
of diarrhoea, he may readily form quite a new image of the dis-
ease, and at the same time  find the remedy. 
STOMACH, DISORDERED.
213
   1. When this morbid  condition of the stomach arises from
general irritability of the nervous system, want of sleep, exces-
sive  mental labor; congestion of blood to the chest, and head;
from a stroke  on  the stomach, or from heavy lifting with pain
and weakness in the small of the back, and presents the follow-
ing symptoms:
   Vertigo; dull  headache,  particularly over  the eyes;  con-
fusion  and  heat  in the  head;  dryness  of the tongue;  offen-
sive  breath;  bitter, sour  or nauseous   taste  in the  mouth;
aversion  to the  smoke of tobacco,  at other  times agreeable;
longing for sour  things;  yellowish coated tongue;  belching;
fulness at the pit of the stomach after eating; nausea;  disposi-
tion  to vomit; eructations; flatulency; feeling of heaviness in
all the limbs;  languor and feeling of discomfort; colic; disten-
tion of the abdomen; disagreeable feeling of warmth; weakness
in the  legs; restless sleep; frequent waking; starting up in
sleep;  frightful, heavy dreams.—Arnica, 3d attenuation, will
generally be found serviceable.  Nux vomica, or Chamomilla,
Will also frequently be appropriate.
   2. Those complaints of the stomach, arising from a debauch;
excessive use of wine  and coffee,  or partly also perhaps from
taking cold, and which present the following symptoms:
   Feeling  as of fluctuation in the brain;  vertigo; confusion of
the head;  soreness and  heaviness in the back of  the head;
drawing pain3 in the teeth, at times in the upper, at others in
the lower molars;  ringing in the ears;  heat in the face; isolated
red pimples on the forehead, nose  and corners  of  the  mouth;
white  coated  tongue;  dryness  of the mouth  without thirst;
collection of mucus in the mouth; heartburn; want of appetite;
insipid taste of  all kinds of food; nausea; collection of water
in the mouth; vomiting;  colicy pains in the abdomen; pres-
sure in the stomach; tightness of the abdomen;  sluggish stools;
costiveness; restless sleep; disinclination to mental labor; gene-
ral lassitude;  drawing  pains  in the limbs; fretfulness; dispo-
sition to quarrel, and anxiety:  are  generally removed  by Nux
vomica, 12th attenuation. 
214
STOMACH, DISORDERED.
  3. If vexation, especially while eating and drinking has been
the cause of the complaint, and there is heat and redness of the
face; dull pain in the head;  redness and burning of the eyes;
general excitability of the  nervous  system; great irritability of
temper, want of appetite;  constant bitter taste in the mouth;
bilious belchings; vomiting of green  bilious matter; pain in
the abdomen; debility;  restless sleep,  with tossing  about and
frequent waking,— Chamomilla, 3d attenuation, is generally the
best remedy. But if chamomile tea has often been given in simi-
lar cases,  and on that  account leaves the disease  unchanged,
Pulsatilla, 12th attenuation, should be  given, and if this should
be insufficient,  Nux vomica, 12th  attenuation.  In some cases,
Bryonia may be  beneficial, especially when chillines and costive-
ness accompany the  symptoms above  mentioned.
   4. Pulsatilla,  12th attenuation, is most suitable in complaints
arising from overloading the stomach with various kinds of in-
compatible substances, or from flatulent vegetables or fats, parti-
cularly of pork and mutton;  sausages;  rancid butter;  pastry
shortened with  bad fat, &c,  especially against  the following
symptoms:
   Bitter, saltish taste in the mouth; a taste as from tainted meat,
or like tallow; accumulation of mucus in the mouth; every thing
tastes bitter; tobacco is quite tasteless; bread has a bitter taste;
itching sensation in  the throat; bilious belching; want of appe-
tite; aversion to  warm victuals; fulness in the stomach; disten-
tion of the  abdomen;  feeling  of  constriction under  the  ribs;
rumbling and  rolling in  the abdomen, constipation, or slow,
difficult and small stools; chilliness;  weakness; drawings in the
limbs as in ague; fretfulness, quiet vexation concerning the most
trifling occurences;  disinclination to conversation, and lassitude.
   5.  China, 6th attenuation, will  have the  preference against
a peculiar morbid state of the stomach which  comes on  at the
transition of winter into spring, and of autumn into winter, when
there is continued  wet,  cold  weather, in  localities where the
atmosphere is tainted with  the effusion from  standing water  in
ponds, A:c, and in those persons who  are obliged  to labor  in 
STOMACH, CRAMP OF THE.
215
such localities in a close room without the privilege of enjoying
the fresh air,  and at the  same time  are exceedingly liable to
agues. The attending symptoms are mostly the following:
   Indifference to  eating  and  drinking;  a feeling  of satiety;
retarded digestion, one  feels that what has been eaten, has not
been digested in the usual  time; belching, distention of the ab-
domen ; vomiting of undigested food;  craving for  something
strong and stimulating; feeling of weakness and languor; dis-
position to lie down;  dizziness and general sensation of heat;
dulness of the head;  dark urine  with sediment; numbness of
the limbs; great susceptibility to external  impressions, such as
air, &c.;  the limbs are sore as if from excessive fatigue, the
patient cannot let  them  remain quiet in one position, but is
alternately bending and stretching them; stiffness of the limbs
immediately after rising from bed; sleep disturbed and broken,
or heavy and restlessness; melancholy, and ill-humor.
   Disordered stomach  arising from some particular error of diet,
the symptoms of  which  does not  differ materially from those
already mentioned, will be relieved by the following  remedies:
   That which, as before mentioned, arises from fat of all kinds,
especially  pork, rancid butter, greasy pastry, is relieved by Pul-
satilla, or if this does not  suffice, by  Carbo vegetabilis. If other
kinds of food produce belchings, having the taste of what was
 eaten,  with  nausea, and  disposition to  vomit,  Antimonium
 crudum is the chief remedy—also after drinking bad wine.—
 If the disease is brought  on by taking coffee in too  great quan-
 tity, Nux vomica  is  most  appropriate,  especially  if there be
 headache, pain in the stomach, and toothache; Chamomilla when
 there is disposition to vomit, gagging and giddiness; Ignatia is
 sometimes suitable after Chamomilla.—If too free  use of milk
 occasions flatulency and weakness, Sulphuric acid  is  the  chief
 remedy.
                   Stomach, Cramp of the.
    There is perhaps no form of  disease, that occurs more fre-
 quently than this, and for which,  particularly in the country,
 medical aid  is so seldom sought, owing to the erroneous belief, 
216              STOMACH, CRAMP OF THE.

that cramp of the stomach is incurable, to which belief the often
wholly useless treatment of the  old school has given rise.   So
much the more acceptable, then, will it be to the layman, to
be made acquainted with  the practical treatment  drawn from
experience, which answers in most of the ordinary cases of this
disease, and will enable him to recur to those  remedies for  dis-
eases of this description, always  keeping the law of similarity in
view, which have been found most beneficial.
  Nux vomica, 12th attenuation, is the most suitable remedy
when the following symptoms, or even a part  of  them, are  pre-
sented, viz.: contractive, pressive or pinching pain in the stom-
ach, with the sensation  as  if the clothes were too tight, or as if
there was flatulence confined in the  left side under the ribs;  this
sensation, as well  as  the pain of the stomach, is  generally in-
creased after eating, and after drinking coffee, and  accompanied
also with a feeling of constriction of the chest, which often ex-
tends between the shoulders and into  the  small of the back, or
giving rise  also to a sensation  as if a cord were drawn around
the chest; these symptoms are mostly felt immediately on rising
from bed, or they sometimes even wake the patient out of sleep.
The following symptoms  also frequently accompany the pain in
the stomach: nausea, particularly at the commencement;  collec-
tion of water in the mouth; eructations of a sour or  bitter fluid
with or without a sense of burning in the throat; palpitation of
the heart, with  anxiety, sour  or nauseous  taste in the mouth;
costiveness; collection of wind in the abdomen ;  occasional  pain
in one side of  the head; at times also a pressive  pain in the
forehead. It may be repeated every evening, or every other even-
ing,  or still more frequently if the  pain be severe.  This remedy
is likewise especially  applicable  in  those kinds of  cramp of the
stomach, which are brought  on by the too  free use of  coffee;
and  also in those which commonly affect drunkards, appearing
at first only in  the form of vomiting;  it is also suitable in the
milder grade, that manifesting  itself as heartburn only, which
is a burning sensation  in the stomach, with a sharp, acrid fluid
 rising up into the throat. 
STOMACH, CRAMP  OF THE.
217
   Chamomilla, 3d attenuation, is preferable in a very irritable
state of the nervous system, and in persons naturally disposed to
inward  grief, especially when  the patient complains of a sensa-
tion as if a stone were pressing heavily on the parts about  the
stomach, attended with painful flatulent distention of the pit of
the stomach, and under the ribs of the left side, which the patient
describes as a feeling as if the heart were being forced out. This
pain is always accompanied by shortness of breath and anxiety,
is  mostly worst at night, causing great restlessness, anxiety  and
tossing about;  at the same time there  is frequently a throbbing
pain on the  top of the head, which obliges the patient to get
out of bed, in the hope of obtaining relief.  The  sufferings  are
somewhat mitigated  by rest and drawing  together the upper
parts of the body.  It is also important to know that this kind
of cramp of the stomach is mostly mitigated by drinking coffee,
while  that in  which Nux vomica is  beneficial,  is aggravated
thereby.  On this account Chamomilla is often applicable for
the cure of cramp of the stomach, occasioned by drinking coffee,
or it will be the most suitable remedy to resort to in cramps of
this kind, whiih Nux vomica alone is insufficient to  remove.
But if the disease be brought on by too free use of chamomile
tea, Chamomilla will be of no service,  but recourse must be  had
to  Ipecacuanha, Ignatia, Nux  vomica, Pulsatilla,  or Coffea
cruda, the last especially  when the  attacks of pain are almost
insupportable, with great  excitability of the nervous system.
   If,  on the contrary, the cramp is not entirely owing to  the
use of chamomile tea, but partly to that of coffee, Nux vomica
will generally be the most suitable remedy, though in some par-
ticular cases it requires the aid of Ignatia or Pulsatilla, or both
in succession.
   Cocculus, 12th attenuation, is also indicated in cramp of the
stomach, and is most appropriate when Nux vomica, apparently
suitable, is  inadequate alone to afford  relief.  It is best adapted
to  cramps resembling  those  in  which Nux  vomica is recom-
mended, especially when there is hardened faeces or costiveness,
or a pressing, constrictive  pain  extending over the whole ah-
        28 
218             STOMACH,  CRAMP OF TI1E.

domen, which is only mitigated by the discharge of flatulence,
or when attended by nausea,  and collection of water  in  the
mouth. Commonly in these attacks the patient is  fretful, re-
served, and morose.
  Ipecacuanha,  3d attenuation, is indicated in cramps of the
stomach, accompanied by nausea and vomiting, with  a dull pain
in the pit of  the  stomach, and great soreness  of  the stomach.
It may be repeated every  three or four hours.
   Belladonna is often serviceable in the most obstinate forms of
cramp of the stomach, particularly when  several of the  fore-
mentioned remedies have been used without much benefit;  like-
wise in nervous and irritable subjects who complain of a gnaw-
ing, pinching or constrictive pain in the pit of the stomach, or
in the region of  the  stomach,  which is alleviated by bending
the body backwards, or by holding the breath.   The pain is at
times  so violent as to cause temporary loss of memory,  and
even fainting; the attacks of pain often return  regularly while
dining.
  Bryonia is chiefly  beneficial when  the  cramp  consists of a
pressure, as  if from a stone, at the pit of the stohiach, which is
felt especially when eating, or immediately after, with a  feeling
of fulness about the stomach; also against constrictive, pinching
and cutting pains, which are relieved by pressing on the region
of the stomach, or after belching; or when the pains are aggra-
vated by motion, walking, &c, every misstep occasioning stitches
in the stomach;  likewise when  there is  costiveness, pressing or
constrictive pains in different parts of the head, which are miti-
gated by external pressure.
  Cramps of the stomach attended by nausea and vomiting,
with stitches  and soreness in the stomach,  requires at first such
remedies as are known to  be beneficial  in  such cases; the prin-
cipal are : Ipecacuanha, Nux vomica, and  Pulsatilla.
  Besides the varieties of cramp here mentioned, there are
numerous others which the remedies pointed out above  will not
remove;  but require  for  their  cure quite different medicines,
which  however cannot properly be given into the hands of the 
     SUMMER COMPLAINT.  SUN-STROKE.  TAPEWORM.    219

laity, since for their proper application a nice discrimination and
individualization  of each  case is required, which is only attain-
able by a competent physician.

                 SUMMER  COMPLAINT.
                       See Cholera infantum.
               Sun-stroke.  Coup  de  soleil.
  Serious results are often produced  by exposure to the sun in
the heat of summer; especially in tropical climates. Among the
most common of  these are sudden and  intense inflammation of
the brain, apoplexy, erysipelas, &c.
  The best remedies in cases of  this kind are :
  Aconite, when  there is full, bounding and frequent pulse, with
hot and dry skin, thirst, violent, acute  pains in  the head, &c.j
indicating inflammatory action of a high grade.
  Belladonna, after Aconite, if the latter be insufficient to re-
move the effects of  sun-stroke, or in alternation with it, especially
if there be violent throbbing pain in the head, particularly over
the eyes, with a feeling of fulness and  expansive pressure as if
every thing were about  to protrude  through the forehead, aggra-
vated by stooping, the slightest movement or noise, and by mental
emotions; great anguish, restlessness, or rage and violent delirium.
   Camphor, by  olfaction, or internally a drop of the spirits on
sugar,  is  likewise  beneficial in sun - stroke,  especially  after
Aconite and  Belladonna  have been used ineffectually.
   Ipecacuanha  will be useful  in  subduing  any gastric symp-
toms which may arise.
   In  some  inveterate  cases it  may also be necessary  to have
recourse  to Lachesis, Opium, or Carbo vegetabilis.
   The remedies  may be  repeated every one to four or six hours
according to the severity  of the  symptoms.

                             T.
                         Tapeworm.
   The symptoms  by which worms in  general, and particularly
 the tapeworm, may be known, manifest themselves first of all 
220
TAPEWORM.
chiefly in the lower intestines or abdomen, which is hard and
distended.  The patient complains of acute colicy pains, rolling
and rumbling in the bowels, collection of water in  the mouth,
nausea, vomiting,  and  sometimes voracious appetite  which is
soon satisfied.  The presence of  the tapeworm is  difficult to
determine, unless some pieces of it are discovered in the stools.
  The particular symptoms of the presence of this worm are : un-
dulatory motions in the bowels, causing the patient the sensation,
as if something was drawing itself together  in the intestines, and
lay  there  in  a lump;  also vertigo,  a peculiar feeling  of the
patient resembling intoxication, and crawling and itching in the
hands  and feet.—The  length of these worms is various, they
may be fifteen, twenty, thirty feet, and over. The color is gene-
rally whitish.  The head is elongated, with two lateral  impressions
or grooves.  The interval between the head and neck is in most
cases marked by a  furrow; the neck itself is often several feet in
length and thread-like, before it  terminates in the so-called  body
of the  worm, which is much broader.  The joints of which this
worm is formed are throughout broader than long.
  Homoeopathy from experience teaches that the tapeworm can
only exist in  a diseased  alimentary canal, and  disappears of
itself when this  is restored to a healthy state;  for the worm
does not live  immediately in the bowels,  but  in the  refuse of
the  food, the excrement,  which is its  most agreeable  residence
as long as it is nourished there;  and it irritates the insides of
the  intestines, and  becomes troublesome only when by disease of
the  patient their contents are altered, and the worm also becomes
in some measure sick;  just as the child in  the  womb is restless,
when the mother is diseased.
  In very many cases, the complaints brought  on  by this worm
are  removed by several doses, repeated daily, of Tinctura flic is
maris  (tincture of male fern),  particularly when  besides the
usual paleness of the face, with  blueness about the  eyes, there
are  pains in the region of the navel and in  the back, and periodi-
cal  headache.—Besides  this  remedy, and  when repeated doses
of it are ineffectual, the following are of service : 
TEETHING OF CHILDREN.
221
   Sabina, in contractive, pressive headache, extending from the
forehead to the nape of the neck, also when no previous disorder
of the abdomen is present, but the presence of the tapeworm is
already discovered by the evacuation of pieces.
   Sabadilla, in burning, boring, and almost intolerable pains
in the abdomen;  headache in the forehead and temples;  col-
lection of saliva in the mouth;  constant chilliness;  great sensi-
tiveness  to  cold;  singular ideas in  regard  to  his own ab-
domen, which  seems  as  if it were fallen in, or  his stomach
eaten up, &c.
   Valeriana, in  great excitability of the nervous system;  dul-
ness of hearing and dimness of vision; loss of smell;  nausea
and fainting fits;  fearfulness.—If all these means are fruitless,
the  administration of Mercurius solubilis, alternated with  Sul-
phur, will often be of use.
   A very good popular  remedy is for the patient to take for
eight days, successively, early in the morning, a tablespoonful of
pure olive oil, and an  hour afterwards drink half a glass of
Cyprus wine.—But should this also be found ineffectual, the
case had better, without making further  trials, be committed
to an experienced physician.

                    Teething of Children.
   Teething  in  children  is seldom unattended by suffering of
some  kind.   Often very dangerous  symptoms take place, for
which the physician must be called in.  In the milder cases, on
the contrary, the directions here given, may be of use. But first,
however, I shall make a few  remarks on the natural process of
teething.
   The first dentition usually commences at the end of the sixth,
 or in the course of the seventh month,  when the middle pair of
 incisors or cutting teetb above and below appear; the outer  pairs
 of incisors show themselves in the eigth month; the first double
 teeth  towards the end  of the first  year, the eye and  stomach
 teeth  in the beginning of the second year; lastly the second
 double teeth or grinders about  the end of the second year.  The 
222
TEETHING OF  CHILDREN.
corresponding teeth on both  sides mostly come together,  but
those of the lower jaw usually first.  The eye teeth often occasion
the most sickness.   At the first appearance of a tooth, the edge
of the jaw, where  it  is about  to  project, becomes gradually
broader, and at the  same time angular and sensitive.  The mouth
is usually hot, but not much swollen, and the  gum  is whitish,
particularly at the margins, as if a  tooth were shining through.
The child is restless, particularly at night; has flushes of  heat,
alternating with paleness; constantly carries the hand and every
thing to the mouth, likes to have his gums rubbed, bites  hard
on the  nipple, or cannot suck,  but soon lets go the breast again.
This condition continues with  more  or less severity for several
weeks, until the teeth are really about to make their appearance,
when the gum gradually swells, and becomes hot and painful;
the pain,  however,  is not  always alike severe, though at times
it suddenly becomes very  violent; the child slavers, the  saliva
runs from the  mouth copiously, and is often acrid  and makes
the mouth sore.
   Against these natural  concomitants of teething, nothing is
required; only in cases of very high excitement, and in the most
violent attacks, where the  children are  exceedingly cross and
fretful, and cannot  be quieted or put to sleep in any way, two
or three globules of Coffea, 3d attenuation, may be given, if the
mother and  child  have not been used to coffee as a drink—in
which  case relief is  more likely to follow a small dose of Aconite
or Chamomilla.
   In cases where long continued costiveness  is an  accompani-
ment of difficult dentition, Nux vomica, 12th attenuation, is
generally the best remedy.  If, on the contrary, diarrhoea be an ac-
companiment, nothing need be done, unless it become too violent.
   Many children, while teething, are subject to a dry, asthmatic
cough, which  mostly  yields to a few doses of Chamomilla, 3d
attenuation.  Chamomilla  is one of the most valuable remedies
in diseases of children, during dentition,  even  when attended
with slight twitehings, provided it has not previously, as is often
the case, been made Use of as tea or lavement. 
TOOTHACHE.
223
  Belladonna may  often follow Chamomilla with  advantage,
when the latter has been insufficient, especially when the child
is exceedingly restless, particularly at night, with tossing about,
burning heat over the whole body, and a great deal of thirst;
redness of the skin;  trembling of the limbs; anxiety; groaning;
sighing; short, hurried,  noisy  respiration and visible  constric-
tion of the chest;  redness  of the eyes; sudden and repeated
Btarts with crying out, and twitehings of the limbs.
  If spasms occur  during dentition, repeated doses of Ignatia
amara, in the highest attenuations, will be  found beneficial; it
may be given at first a  globule  every quarter of an hour, and
less frequently as the spasms abate.

             Toothache.  Odontalgia.
                   1. From decayed teeth.
   Chamomilla, 3d attenuation, is indicated against:  gnawing
pain,  as  if  a nerve were being scraped; grumbling, tearing  or
drawing  pain;  swelling of the gums; sensation as if the teeth
were  too  long;  looseness of the teeth;  intermitting attacks,
which are most violent at night when warm  in  bed,  preventing
sleep; swelling of the cheek; aggravation or renewal of pain by
eating or drinking anything warm or cold.
  The most violent pains may often be removed by mesmerism,
by applying the thumbs externally to the cheek over the aching
teeth, or by pressing a finger on the tooth itself. As soon as the
pain begins to increase, the application must be  discontinued,
and relief will follow in a short time.
   Coffea, 3d attenuation, will relieve the most violent  pains  in
persons who are not accustomed to drinking coffee as a beverage,
even  when  the  sufferers are almost distracted from pain, with
weeping, trembling,  &c.
  The north pole of the magnet will afford relief against: pains,
as if the tooth would be torn out; throbbing and pressing pains
in the hollow teeth; burning in the gums; redness and swelling
of the teeth;  the  pains  are aggravated by eating and drinking,
and relieved by walking  about. 
 224                    TOOTiiAeiiE.

   Likewise in toothache which attacks all the hollow teeth at
 the same time, the gums of which are swollen and painful  to the
 touch; jerking pains in the  periosteum, at times consisting of
 a quick  drawing  pressure, at others, of  a  boring, tearing, or
 burning,  sticking pain; and pain in the incisors on inspiration.
   Mercurius solubilis, 6th attenuation, is most useful in tearing
 pains  in  several teeth next the decayed ones, which extends to
 the  ear, and is worse  at night; severe shooting pain in the teeth;
 swelling of the gums, and profuse flow of saliva, with a feeling,
 as  if the teeth were loose.
                       2.  From cold.
   Chamomilla, 3d attenuation, when there  is : shooting, boring,
 throbbing or jumping pain  in all the teeth, especially at night,
 and which seem  to be elongated; the pain extends along  the
jaw  to the ear, and along the temple  towards the eye;  drawing
 and  tearing pain  in the teeth indiscriminately, in the whole row;
 swelling  of the  gums  and cheeks;   heat  and redness of the
 cheeks; general  weakness,  particularly of the joints;  glands
 under  the chin painful and  swollen;  fretfulness and disposition
 to shed tears.
  Rhus toxicod., 12th attenuation,  when there  are :  violent
jerking or dragging  pains,  as if the  tooth would  be torn out;
 throbbing and tearing in  all the teeth,  extending to the bones
of the jaw and temples;  painful sensation  as if the  teeth were
hollow and too long, and admitted the air; swelling of the gums;
the  pains come on or are  worse  in  the  open air, or at night,
when they are  often almost  unendurable;  external  warmth
affords relief;  the teeth become loose  and the carious ones have
a very  offensive odor.

               3.  From congestion  of blood.
  Pulsatilla, 12th attenuation, when there are : acute throbbing
pains,  aggravated by cold water, and by the warmth of the bed,
or in a warm room;  jerking  or tearing pain, as if the  teeth were
being pushed out; the pains are worse in the evening, coming
on with chilliness, and gradually disappear after midnight 
TOOTHACHE.
225
  Hyoscyamus, 6th  attenuation, is  serviceable,  especially in
toothache caused by cold air, with congestion  of  blood  to the
interior of the head, and looseness of the teeth;  a sort of buz-
zing pain in the tooth; sensation  when chewing,  as  if it  were
falling out; tearing or raging pain even in the gum.
   China, 6th  attenuation,  against throbbing  pain;  feeling of
numbness in the teeth; boring pain with swelling of the  veins
of the forehead and hands;  swelling of the gum; dryness in the
mouth and  thirst; intermitting attacks  of pain;  sleeplessness;
the pain comes on or is aggravated after eating, or at night, or
by the slightest touch, and in the open air; and is relieved by
pressing the teeth firmly together.
   Aconite, is chiefly serviceable in cases where the patient  is
almost distracted with pain, and  where Coffea  cannot be given,
because it is the daily drink; especially in throbbing toothache,
occasioned by taking cold; with congestion of blood to the  head,
and burning heat  in the face.
   Chamomilla is applicable when there is reason to believe that
coffee is the cause of the  toothache, as it comes  on  soon  after
drinking it,  and  is  attended  with general excitement of the
venous  system,—followed by  Nux vomica,  12th attenuation,
which is particularly suited to  persons of an active choleric
temperament, as well as those who drink much  wine,  brandy
and coffee, and lead a sedentary life.

  4. From general increased sensibility of the nervous system.
   Hyoscyamus, 6th  attenuation, against tearing pain in the
gums, particularly on the admission of cold air into the mouth;
drawing pain in  separate teeth,  changing from one to another;
attacks of toothache with general flushes  of heat; twitching  of
the tendons of fingers and arms;  disposition to convulsions,  or
actual convulsions; tearing pains extending even to the forehead.
   Nux  vomica will be serviceable in numb or dull pains, and
also,  at  times, in tearing pains  in  the teeth  and jaws, whkih,
commencing in a hollow tooth, often extends over the whole of
the affected side;  and is mitigated  by warmth, and  excited not
        29 
226   ULCERS ON THE EXTREMITIES.   URINARY COMPLAINTS.

so much by  cold air,  as  by cold  drinks, which at once  affect
it.  This remedy is also suitable when  there  is  drawing or
boring pain in a hollow  tooth, with the  sensation as  if the
tooth would be torn out; severe shooting  or jumping pains in
the tooth,  which affect the whole body, with painful  swelling
and suppuration of the  gums; at times also a sensation as  if the
teeth were  coming out  of their sockets and were too long.  This
kind of toothache commonly comes on early in the morning,  is
aggravated by chewing, is  also mostly renewed and aggravated
on opening the mouth  in the open  air, and by excessive mental
labor.
                            u.
               Ulcers on the extremities,  &c.
   These troublesome sores are found most commonly in persons
whose business requires much standing;  in  females who during
gestation have suffered much from varices (knots on the veins);
in subjects who suffer from maltreated itch,  and those who have
suffered from tetter for a long time.  Usually, sores of this kind
are found about the leg and ankle; they often acquire great ex-
tent, become deep, with hard, thick, puffed edges, a dirty appear-
ance, and secrete an offensive, foul ichor or pus.
   The remedies most commonly  resorted too are:  Hepar  sul-
phur., 6th attenuation, and  Tinctura  sulphur., repeated  every
three or four days, and  at times also  given in alternation.—In
cases attended by severe burning pain,  Arsenicum is the best
remedy, or  Carbo vegetabilis, when the ulcers bleed easily and
have a bad odor with burning pain, followed again, after  five or
six days, by a dose of Sulphur.

                    Urinary Complaints.
   Nocturnal urination or wetting the bed is a complaint of fre-
quent occurrence with children, and is exceedingly troublesome
to parents.
   It is generally the result of disease or constitutional weakness, 
VACCINATION.
227
though in some cases it may arise from indulgence in bad habits
or inattention to cleanliness.
   The remedies in general most useful  in  this complaint are:
Pulsatilla, Sepia, Silicea, and Natrum muriaticum, one or more
of which will mostly effect a  cure.
   Retention,  or painful emission of urine, is occasionally met
with in females after delivery, especially in first confinements and
in protracted and difficult labors.  Aged  persons are likewise
often troubled with complaints of this kind.
   The following are the most serviceable remedies in general:
Arnica, Pulsatilla, Belladonna, and Nux  vomica.
   Retention when met with in young infants should be attended
to at once; usually a dose or two of Aconite, or, if this should
 be unsuccessful, Pulsatilla will relieve it.   Two pellets may be
 given as a dose.
   The remedies mostly effectual in incontinence  of urine, or par-
 tial, or complete inability to retain, are:  Belladonna, Canthari-
 des, China, Pulsatilla, and Stramonium.
                            V.
                       Vaccination.
  The experience  of the  last fifty years has  demonstrated the
utility of vaccination in  preventing  and modifying small-pox
(variola). Previous  to its introduction the latter disease was the
terror of all nations, both  on account of its loathsomeness and its
virulence, often decimating towns and cities, and even destroying
whole tribes of savages, among whom  it was not unfrequently
introduced by  unprincipled  persons  by innoculation.  At the
present time, however, the small-pox is deprived  of most of its
terrors, and malignant and fatal cases are of comparatively rare
occurrence.
   The vaccine virus is obtained  from the cow, on the teats  of
which animals vesicles are occasionally met with of  a bluish ap-
pearance which, if not molested, go on to suppuration.   It was 
OOS                    VACCINATION.

from tho knowledge of the fact, that in certain agricultural dis-
tricts in England milkmaids who had been affected with the vac-
cine  disease5, contracted from the cow, were  not attacked  by
small-pox when exposed to it, that Jenner was led to make the
experiments in regard to the protective powers of vaccine, which
have immortalized himself, and conferred incalculable  blessings
on mankind.
  The vaccine disease is similar in  its  effects to  small-pox, and
therefore  acts homceopathically as a  preventive.   About the
third day after the insertion  of the matter  a  small  red pimple
appears in the skin, which  gradually increases  in  size, and a
vesicle  forms which is  at  first filled with a serous fluid;  this
fluid by degrees becomes more consistent and assumes a yellowish
colour,  and by the eighth day the inflammation is at its height,
when it presents  a deep red circular and  swollen areola about
the size, generally, of a quarter of a dollar, the centre of which
is filled with yellowish matter.
   There is at times considerable symptomatic fever and swelling
 of the glands of the arm-pits.  From the ninth  day the inflam-
 mation, and swelling gradually subside, and a  scab  is formed
 which falls off the latter part of the second, or during the third
 week from the time of vaccination.
   The most suitable age to vaccinate infants is perhaps from the
 fourth  to the sixth month, and the best seasons the spring or
 autumn.   It  may, however, be performed at any age, and when
 the small-pox is prevailing epidemically, all persons of whatever
 age who are not protected should be at once vaccinated.
   The virus should be obtained from a healthy child, one if pos-
 sible that is free from constitutional taint, especially  chronic
 eruptions, and the parents of which are also healthy.
   The symptomatic fever, and consequent irritability attending
 the inflammation when at its height, and which is at  times of a
 pretty high grade, may be allayed by a dose or two of Aconite.
    A few doses of Sulphur will generally remove any tendency
 to eruptions which  may be manifested after the vaccination. 
         VARIOLA.   VARIOLOID.  VARICOSE  VEINS.      229

                      VARIOLA.
                         See Small-pox.
                         Varioloid.
   Varioloid is merely a modified form of small-pox, occurring in
persons partially protected by vaccination, or by some peculiarity
of constitution.   Individuals who have not been vaccinated for
a number of years, when exposed to small-pox, are often liable
to have it in the modified form.  The period of incubation, as it
is called, or the time that elapses  between the exposure  to the
contagion and its external manifestation, is  about the same as
that of small-pox—namely 12-14 days. But the accompanying
fever is less violent, and the  course  of the disease shorter and
much  less violent.   Frequently,  indeed,  there are but  a  few
scattered pustules over the body, which fill  with  straw-colored
or yellowish matter, dry up in a few days,  and the  scabs fall off,
leaving scarcely any cicatrix.
   There are usually no permanent pits remaining after varioloid.
   Light cases  of varioloid require very little medicine;  in the
beginning, a dose  or two of Aconite may be  necessary to allay
the febrile irritation, followed in  a few day by Rhus toxicoden-
dron, or Sulphur to  accelerate  the maturation of  the  pustules
and dessication.  The latter remedy is also useful in relieving
the itching which is at times  troublesome during the dessication.
   In severe cases the treatment will not differ materially from
that recommended under small-pox (which see).
   The diet should  in this disease, generally consist of light nu-
tritious non-medicinal articles; and the apartment of the  sick
be kept at a moderate temperature, rather cool, and well aired.

           Varicose  Veins.  Knots on the Veins.
   These are elevated tumors, generally without pain, and yield-
ing upon pressure, caused by the gradual distention of a vein.
They are  at  first of a small  size, but gradually become larger,
and  assume a reddish, blue or  dark appearance.  They diminish
in size in the horizontal  posture, and increases by  standing and 
o;30                VERTIGO.  VOMITINO-

when the limbs hang  down.  These  tumors arc often found in
great numbers, and chiefly on the lower extremities;  they are
common  during gestation,  and also in  men whose business
requires much standing.  As long as the tumors are small, they
give no trouble; but when  large, they give rise to an intolerable
itching and occasional pain, and inflammation, and  sometimes
the veins burst.
   That bandaging the limb lightly, and washing with cold water,
rye-whiskey, rum, &c.,  as  outward mechanical means, are not
without benefit, I  am not  disposed to deny.  But the internal
administration of Arnica and Pulsatilla, day about,  with keep-
ing quiet, avoiding much standing (where possible), and proper
attention to diet, are of more utility.  If after some weeks  there
is no manifest change for the better,  Tinctura sulph.  and Lyco-
podium may be given in alternation every fourth day.  The com-
plete cure  of tumors of this kind  is often beyond the reach of
medicine.
                     VERTIGO.
                          See Giddiness.
                       Vomiting.
                  1.  From vitiated  stomach.
   The symptoms are: debility; heaviness and drawing,  or pain,
 in the head and limbs;  a  feeling in the stomach as if the food
 would have to be thrown  up again, with an unpleasant  taste in
 the mouth ; depraved appetite;  offensive eructations, as if from
 spoiled food; tenderness; nausea;  pressure  and fulness in the
 region of the stomach, especially after eating; vomiting of food,
 with general chilliness;  change of complexion; restlessness;
 lowness of spirits, with  cold hands and feet.
    If these symptoms are  the result of overloading the stomach,
 abstinence will be the best cure; that is, the patient  should take
 only a little weak soup, or gruel, instead of the usual meal, and
 after a time a few mouthfuls of black coffee, which will be espe-
 cially serviceable when there is a constant disposition to vomit,
  without real vomiting taking place. 
VOMITING.
231
  But if the depraved stomach be the result of eating fat meat,
such as pork, or other fat substances whereby a rancid taste and
belching is produced,  it is necessary to enjoin on the patient
moderation  in  eating and drinking, and to give him Pulsatilla,
12th attenuation, which in  a short  time  will  bring about  the
wished for restoration.
  If this medicine do not answer to carry off the vitiated con-
tents of the stomach, or there remains, after a full clearing out,
a constant loathing, nausea  and  inclination to vomit;  Antimo-
nium crudum  will in most cases remove them, especially when
the vitiation of stomach is brought on  by night revelling, exces-
ses in. wine or coffee, and afterwards exposure to cold.
   When  the following symptoms are present: dryness of the
mouth without thirst;  white coated tongue, with much mucus
in the mouth; heartburn;  bad taste;  collection of water in the
mouth; vomiting; pressure at the  stomach; distention of the
abdomen ; costiveness; vertigo and heaviness in the head; lassi-
tude ; indisposition  for thinking; restless, fretful, quarrelsome
temper; Nux vomica, 12th  attenuation, will be most appropriate,
of which a dose may be given  every six or eight hours. Anti-
monium crudum is also particularly suitable whenever the patient
has nausea and inclination to vomit; the tongue much coated
and blistered; frequent belchings; much thirst, chiefly at night;
 vomiting of slime and bile; pain in the stomach, as if it were
 too full;  the  stomach painful to the touch; much flatulency,
 and mostly loose stools.
    Ipecacuanha is  indicated when  there  are: accumulation of
 mucus and weakness of the stomach; constant nausea; vomiting,
 and tongue but slightly coated;  every thing disgusts the patient,
 even  tobacco; diarrhoea. It may be repeated every three hours.

                  2.  From mental emotions.
    When vomiting  or depraved  stomach  has  been chiefly  occa-
 sioned by vexation or anger, and the following morbid symptoms
 are present: bitter taste in the mouth, bitter, bilious eructations;
 vomiting of  green, bilious fluid which  has a bitter taste, and 
2.J2                     VOMITING.

leaves, after swallowing, a scraping,  unpleasant  feeling in tho
throat;  pressive pain in the stomach; general debility; entire
loss of appetite; the stomach seems quite full, and to press the
heart out of place; flushed  face; great thirst;  giddiness with
one-sided drawing pain in the head, or feeling of pressure and
weight combined; anxiety;  restlessness (a sort of acute bilious
fever);  Chamomilla, in the 3d  attenuation, will be the most
suitable remedy.
   But if, together with these symptoms, there be chilliness and
coldness of the body; costiveness, and constant thirst, the vexa-
tion still continuing, Bryonia, 6th attenuation, is most suitable.
   If the  disordered stomach arise from fright and anger com-
bined, Aconite is the  chief remedy,  which in a few hours will
generally remove every trace of indisposition.
   Continued grief and solicitude also readily occasion vitiated
stomach, which is removed most speedily and effectually  by a
few doses of Ignatia amara, 6th attenuation, given at intervals
of six or eight hours.
                      3.  From  worms.
   Eructations of a rancid taste; frequent nausea,  which at times
passes off  suddenly,  at others  remains,  and is  attended with
severe twisting or winding pains in the abdomen,  and disposition
to vomit; together with fainting fits,  pale  face, colorless lips,
and general coldness; vomiting  chiefly at night;  warm risings
in the chest, and difficult  breathing,  require Valeriana in the
3d attenuation,  and occasionally  also China,  6th attenuation.
   Vomiting from worms  will not be permanently relieved by
Valeriana,  if there  be general ill-health,  indicating a  great
number of intestinal worms.  And therefore the treatment must
be committed to a physician.
  4. When young children are over-fed, or nourished with heavy,
indigestible food, when they  are rocked too much;  dressed too
tightly; have injections too often given them, or their stomachs
injured by frequent evacuants,  giving rise to vomiting in which
all the food is thrown up, soon after it  has been eaten, producing 
WALK,  CHILDREN LEARNING TO.          233
emaciation and debility.   At times there is  also costiveness, or
diarrhoea, which more distinctly mark the disease.
  In such cases it is always serviceable to give one or two doses
of Ipecacuanha, 3d attenuation, and then to apply the remedies
best adapted to the whole of the symptoms, for instance, where
costiveness is present, Nux vomica is generally best, 12th attenua-
tion, or, where diarrhoea prevails, attended  with cutting pains,
Chamomilla, 3d attenuation.   These remedies may be repeated
on a return of the symptoms.  Pulsatilla, 12th, is;also often of
great service in cases accompanied by diarrhoea;  China, 6th, is
indicated when the sufferings  are brought  on by the frequent
use of purgative medicines, or at least have  been aggravated by
them.
5.  From  morbid irritability of stomach  in persons who are
           predisposed to cramps  and  nervous fits.
  Vomiting of white, tough slime, with vertigo;  ability to  take
but little on the stomach at a time; the slightest  excess excites
vomiting, cramps, and cutting pains in the abdomen; loseness
of the bowels, and in very delicate persons fainting, and general
weakness in the limbs.  Pulsatilla is one of the best remedies
in this form of the disease; in many cases  also, Cocculus, 12th
attenuation, in tincture or globules, is very  serviceable.
                            w.
                Walk, Children learning to.
  Not unfrequently do children learn  with  difficulty to walk.
It is  not so remarkable when  delicate, weak, poorly fed chil-
dren,  make no serious attempt  to walk  during the second year
of their  age;  but when  this occurs in those who  are well fed
and strong, muscular and nervous weakness is to be apprehended.
In both cases  the timely attention of parents, or relatives is de-
sirable.
  In  the first case little advantage is to be expected from medi-
cines, if strict attention be not paid to diet; the use of the follow-
ing articles should especially be prohibited: meal-soups, sucking
       30 
234                 WARTS  AND  CORNS.

bags, black bread, coffee, chamomile-tea, sleeping in feather-beds,
or being kept in chambers too warm, and from the free air, &c
Milk is the best drink; light broth with wheat bread, gruel, farina,
and sago the best food.   Next to proper attention  to diet, daily
lukewarm baths, in which  twice a week a decoction  of malt is
put, is highly to be recommended.   After continuing this treat-
ment for some weeks, the following medicines may be  adminis-
tered; though in the second case mentioned they may be com-
menced  with at once.   Belladonna  and  Causticum,  of which
alternate doses are to be given every  fourth day.  If, after three
or four weeks, no improvement is  manifested, let Sulphur and
 Calcarea be substituted  and  alternated in the same way, as di-
rected for the first two.

                     Warts and Corns.
   These excrescences on the hands, which are sometimes larger,
sometimes  smaller, isolated, and mostly without pain, are seldom
found worthy of notice, and often disappear of themselves  so
suddenly, that their possessor  cannot  say how he got clear of
them.   If, however, they make their appearance in great num-
bers, varying in size from that  of a pin's head to a bean, and are
consequently troublesome  and disfiguring, their extirpation is
particularly  desirable, especially by the female sex.  In such
cases a dose  of Lycopodium, 18 th attenuation, every five or six
days, until  six or eight doses  are taken, will often  cause their
removal; or where this remedy is of itself insufficient it may be
 frequently advantageously alternated  with  Calcarea carboniea
 in the same  attenuation.
   Corns, excrescences mostly  found  on the feet, which  are at
 times exceedingly painful  and troublesome,  are  generally pro-
 duced by wearing tight shoes' or boots'.  Though this  is not
 always the case.  In many persons there seems to be a constitu-
 tional predisposition to them.
   The remedies recommended above against warts will often be
 found beneficial in corns, and they may be administered  in the
 same way. 
WEANING.
235
  Relief may always be  had by paring the corns closely, and
then bathing them with  Tincture of Arnica.  The Tincture of
Sanguinaria canadensis  (blood-root)  has also been highly re-
commended for the eradication of corns, applied topically to the
corns individually.
                          Weaning.
  Generally the most suitable age to wean children is when they
are about eighteen months old; by the time they arrive at this
age, the teeth are usually sufficiently developed to masticate more
solid food, and the milk of the mother may be dispensed with.
  If the mother be delicate, the supply of milk begins to dimin-
ish in quantity and deteriorate in quality, or the menstrual  dis-
charge reappears,  the child may be weaned at an earlier period.
   On the other hand, the child should not be weaned while it is
suffering much from the  irritation  of  teething, or any other in-
fantile disease, unless the health of the mother renders  it abso-
lutely necessary.
   As the teeth  begin  to  appear the child should gradually be
accustomed to other food than the  mother's milk, so that, when
the period for weaning arrives, its digestive organs will  be  fully
prepared for the change of diet.
   The  most suitable  seasons  of the year  for weaning are the
 Bpring and autumn.
   After weaning, the child's  diet should consist  of  simple but
 nourishing food, such as  bread and milk, arrow-root, farina, &c.
 and the transition to a more substantial fare should be extremely
 gradual.
   The  mother, also, after the child is taken from  the breast,
 should  be particularly careful in her diet, and  until the secretion
 of  milk has ceased, live as low as  possible.   If  the  breasts be-
 come much distended and painful, they should be bathed with
 hot lard, and wrapped in raw cotton.   It will also be necessary
 to  have them drawn occasionally.  At the same time the internal
 administration of Pulsatilla and  Rhus toxicodendron will aid
 materially in stopping the secretion.  They may  be taken alter-
 nately  twice a day. 
236           WEN.   WOMB,  FALLING  OF THE.

                           Wen.
  This affection, called  also encysted tumor, is formed in  the
cellular texture of the  skin,  and enclosed in a special mem-
brane,  in the cavity of which the secretion of a peculiar matter
takes place.—Tumors of this kind are always small in the begin-
ning, aud develope  themselves  slowly  to a  greater compass.
Their form is invariably round and well defined, and they  are
mostly moveable  in  all directions;  generally  they  are  free
of pain.
  On account of the little  inconvenienee these tumors occasion
(unless they exist in great  number), they often  attain  a large
size,  or become ill-conditioned, before much attention  is given
to their removal;  and when at last this becomes desirable, ex-
cision  is thought  to be  the only  remedy,  and is  generally
resorted to.  I have therefore thought it best to make the laity
acquainted with a remedy which, with proper attention to diet,
in very few instances will  be  without benefit; and in no  case
will  the employment of this remedy be injurious to the general
state of health, even if it  have no special effect on the morbid
structure.
  I  have treated a  great  number of such tumors,  and used
several homoeopathic remedies, but from none have I witnessed
the beneficial results which I have obtained from Calcarea car-
boniea, whether given in the higher or lower attenuations—in
one  or more doses;  it has always had the same good effect,  and
sometimes dissipated these tumors in the space of six or eight
weeks.
          Womb,  falling of the. Prolapsus Uteri.
  This disorder is of very frequent occurrence in females.   The
chief symptoms are: sensation  of bearing-down or dragging about
the groins;  pain in the back and loins;  feeling of pressure low-
down  in the pelvis; sense of  numbness extending  down the
limbs, and sometimes frequent desire  to pass  water;  nervous
debility, faintness, &c.
   (James.  A relaxed state of the system, either natural, or a 
WORMS.
237
consequence of sedentary habits; indulgence in stimulating food
and drinks, &c, may predispose to prolapsus of the womb. Dif-
ficult labors,  or  getting up  too soon  after confinement, severe
and  long continued coughs; falls; injuries  from overlifting;
tight lacing; violent vomiting, and numerous other causes might
be mentioned as immediate causes of the disorder.
  The medicines most  efficacious in the treatment of prolapsus
are : Nux vomica,  Sepia, Belladonna, Aurum, and Calcarea
carboniea.
  A few doses of Nux  vomica taken  once a  day, in the com-
mencement of the complaint, will  often remove it.  Should it
however fail, or should  the displacement  have  existed for  some
time, one or more of  the  other remedies mentioned  may be
required.
   They may be administered, one at a  time, in the order named,
once a day for five or six days, and  then discontinued.  If ame-
lioration follow the use  of one of them, nothing more should  be
given until it  cease, when the same medicine  may  be repeated.
  If the disease  be produced by a fall, overlifting, or external
violence of any kind, Arnica will be the remedy most likely to
afford relief.

                  Worms.   Helminthiasis.
  Many complaints are ascribed to worms which arise from very
different causes.  When children have been fed upon pap, cakes
and  similar articles  of  a hurtful nature, or when the mother,
whilst  nursing, overloads  her stomach with meat,  fish or salted
and fatty articles, particularly with pies, the children must neces-
sarily become sick in consequence, or a  predisposition to sickness
be induced.   When,  besides this, the children are dosed with
vermifuges, injections, purgatives, &c,  the worms cannot fail to
prosper and increase.
  When children are supposed to have worms, the first thing to
be looked to, is a rational mode of living, by  which means  the
worms will soon diminish; and if symptoms  of the complaint
remain, the remedies will afterwards prove the more effective. 
238
WORMS.
Most persons are by far too much afraid of these little animals,
which  are  not  nearly as noxious as the remedies usually pre-
scribed  for them,  especially the nostrums puffed in the news-
papers.  Goodnatured persons  believe these things, and  pay for
the trash, when, if they knew what they or their children were
swallowing, they would rather pay twice as much to keep it out
of the house,  to say nothing of their bodies.
   It is true, these things sometimes kill the worms; but too fre-
quently they kill  the  children also, or affect the abdomen in
such a manner that the consequences  appear  many years after.
First, it should be considered  that all  children have  worms,
sometimes before they are born, and that it is frequently a pre-
monitory sign of a dangerous disease when these worms pass off
themselves; secondly, that  what these worms subsist upon in
the body is more hurtful than the worms themselves.  Almost
all the  symptoms attributed to worms  may arise  from  some
general disease of the system, which has a tendency to increase
them, especially if aided by an unwise mode  of living.  When
the worms have become very numerous, they give rise to various
complaints which, joined to the symptoms of the original malady,
sometimes become dangerous.  When  the worms are  expelled,
the symptoms which they gave rise to,  of course disappear, but
the real disease may increase.
   Sometimes diseases subsequently make their appearance which
are worse than the first, although  slower in their operation, per-
haps not manifesting themselves until  the tenth or twelfth year.
The expulsion of the worms is of no essential use. The remedies
here prescribed will  frequently cure the disease itself; and if
there are really too many worms, which  is rarely the ease, will
remove them also.  Children who have worms should have enough
to eat,  but not too  much bread, and few or no cakes  or pies, but
in preference a good  deal of ripe, cooked, or dried fruits, and,
in particular, carrots.
   When you are not certain of the existence of worms, and  the
child becomes emaciated, and vomits  frequently, give first Ipe-
cacuanha; or,  if the tongue is coated, Carbo vegetabilis; and 
WOUNDS.
239
if this has no effect, Pulsatilla;  if the child  has been much
troubled with diarrhoea, or has taken much aperient medicine,
give China ; and when the bowels are constipated, Nux vomica.
  When  the child passes worms occasionally, picks its nose fre-
quently, and the belly is much distended, give Cina, which is
one of the chief remedies for all complaints really arising  from
worms.
  For colic, caused by worms, with frequent inclination to vomit,
when much water  collects in the mouth, and  the parts around
the navel are hard;  also when the whole abdomen is hard and
distended, with  frequent ineffectual straining  to evacuate,  or
secretion of nothing but  slime, give at first Aconite, some hours
later,  Cina; and  if this be not sufficient, Mercurius vivus or
Silicea. In all complaints caused by worms, Aconite is of great
use in the beginning, and if this and the other remedies  men-
tioned above do not remove them, Sulphur should  be given,
and will be found to be of great value, particularly after  Mer-
curius  vivus.   These remedies will generally effect a cure.  In
rare cases attented with  much thirst, sudden starting, and fright,
Belladonna may be required. In very bad cases it may also  be
necessary to give a dose  or two of Lachesis.
   For the most suitable remedies in ascarides, the small worms
seated in the anus, see " Anus, itching  of the".   And for  those
appropriate in tapeworm, see that article.

                          Wounds.
   These mechanical injuries cannot be properly treated of  here,
as they invariably require mechanical aid; nevertheless homoeo-
pathy can do much to promote their more speedy and permanent
cure.  Nature  heals the wounds, as soon as art has made the
requisite applications; hence it is, above all, important that they
should be  properly  dressed.  Though this  consists merely in
cleansing the wound, stopping the  blood, bringing the edges of
 the wound  together, and keeping them in apposition by a simple
 adhesive plaster, or bandages. Where this treatment is found to
 be insufficient,  the wound being  too large, and the blood cannot 
240
WOUNDS.
be stopped by this means, the aid of a surgeon is indispensable,
who will probably,find ligatures and sutures necessary.  The
bandage  ought to be of a suitable width, neither too narrow nor
too broad, neither should it be too warm; it must not be taken
off and renewed daily, unless in case of necessity, but must be
left on  until the lips of the wound  are so firmly united, that
there is no danger of a fresh separation.
  All salves or other plasters, except the adhesive plaster, must
be discarded, otherwise  the skin,  already unusually sensitive  by
inflammation, will become irritated, and give rise to suppuration.
  As in contusions and sprains, it is also important here to pre-
vent traumatic fever, and to accelerate the process of healing, to
give Arnica, 6th attenuation, internally. Which remedy is almost
specific  in these  cases, and when  timely administered, it will
seldom be necessary to have recourse to any further means.  No
wound can  be expected to heal in  two or three hours, hence  it
is necessary to wait  at  least  as many days,  before making  use
of any  other medicines.  If the appearance of the wound  is
then good,  and  there are  signs  of reunion to the edges, with
healthy pus, and there is no pain or soreness of any consequence,
it would be highly improper to give any medicine with the view
of hastening the improvement, as  it would do more harm than
good.
  But should a  wound, in  which there is no  foreign body,
become very sensitive or painful, the bandage on which  is  not
too tight,  causing irritation by its stiffness or warmth,  it  can
often be  speedily relieved by a few passes of  mesmerism.  If the
pain should return, however, and  the  patient is irritable, sensi-
tive, fretful, restless,  and unable  to sleep, a drop  of  the  3d
attenuation  of tincture of  Coffea. will  frequently relieve him.
As  this  remedy acts but a short time, the evil may be renewed
the third time, when  China, 6th attenuation,  which operates for a
longer time, must be given, and will mostly effect a complete cure.
  If a large red circle appear around the wound, with swelling
of the part, and inflammation, Pulsatilla, 12th attenuation, will
generally have a good effect. 
        CONCUSSIONS OR CONTUSIONS OF THE  CHEST.    241

  If the wound shows a disposition to suppurate, notwithstand-
ing it has  been  properly  bandaged, Mercurius solubilis, 6th
attenuation,  is peculiarly indicated, and will  usually remove
this morbid condition in a short time.  In cases of suppuration
it is necessary, in order to prevent the adhesion of the bandage
to the sore, to make use of some simple ointment; for this pur-
pose the cacao butter, althea ointment, or simple  cerate, answer
best.  A little of which  should be spread  on  the dressing, and
be renewed once  a day until suppuration ceases.


          Concussion or Contusion of the  Chest. *

   By falls, blows, carrying heavy loads, which are  partly sup-
 ported on the breast, compressions by  wrestling, climbing, and
 in similar ways,  it not  unfrequently occurs,  that pains of the
 chest are occasioned, attended with fever, spitting of blood, and
 followed finally  by consumption.  For  the lighter cases of this
 kind,  which are  usually neglected, and on this account are more
 important,  I shall  here impart  a treatment, which will  often
 effect a  cure  in a short time.
   1.  In cases, when  after  an injury to some part of the chest
 there take  place pain  as if a boil or  other suppuration were
 threatened,  with throbbing pain, heat about the  part, fever,
 which shows itself by alternate heats and chills,  and is worse in
 the evening; loss of sleep with general heat  and sweating to-
 wards morning,  without thirst; short, dry cough, which increases
 the pain; Arnica should  be first given, and will mostly afford
 relief;  if this be insufficient, it may be followed  in a day or two
 by Pulsatilla, which will generally complete the cure.
    Sometimes the pain and fever are relieved by these medicines,
 but there is increased cough, with expectoration of a yellowish,
 thick mucus streaked  occasionally with blood, which lasts a
 considerable time.  For  cases of this  kind,  Mercurius solubilis,
    * This and the  three following articles were inadvertently omitted in
 their proper places, and I have consequently inserted them here.
         31 
212
CAROIALOIA.
6th attenuation, should be given.  When, however, the  mucus
has a sweetish taste, and there is tightness  of the chest, Nux
vomica, 12th attenuation, is mostly serviceable.
  2.  When the following symptoms are presented : pain at the
part injured, such as usually remains after a  blow, with inability
to take a deep breath,  to laugh or sneeze without increasing the
pain;  stitches  in  the  chest; sensation of fulness, as  if blood
was collected there  in large quantity;  spitting of blood, tight-
ness or constriction of the chest, which  impedes respiration; dry
heat at night in bed;  restless sleep; fright  and starting up in
sleep; Arnica is likewise serviceable.
   If there should still remain a degree of sensitiveness of the
lungs; tendency of a dry, short cough, which constantly restricts
breathing; if the  face is still pale, the appetite small,  the sleep
unsound;  China, 6th attenuation, will be most suitable.

                         Cardialgia.
   This affection consists of a sudden tense  and extensive swell-
ing at the pit of the stomach,  and in  the region of the lower
ribs in children previously in perfect health, attended by great
restlessness,  tossing about, screaming; drawing up of  the  legs,
anxiety,  and shortness  of breath, sometimes amounting to sus-
pension of respiration. The exciting cause is commonly a sudden
change of temperature, but frequently, however, a strong,  cold
wind.
   A similar state is also often met with in grown persons, after
a violent fit of anger,  which is accompanied  by a feeling of con-
striction in the pit  of the stomach, with difficulty of  breathing
and anxiety,  as  from a constant  pressure  on the breast, and a
 dry, exceedingly  distressing cough, great restlessness and dis-
position to complain.
    Both conditions  are generally  removed  by a dose  or two of
 Cliamomilla.  In some instances  it may be necessary to resort
 to Ignatia or Nux vomica. 
INFLAMMATION  OF THE CHEST.           243
           Inflammation of the Chest in general.
  An  inflammation of the chest comes on  for the most  part
suddenly with strong chills, followed by violent continued heat,
in which  the breath is hurried, interrupted, sighing;  at the
same time there is a painful, dry, short cough, and a steady fixed
pain in some part of the chest, which is acute, burning, cutting,
or shooting,  pressive, and constrictive  in  its character, and is
aggravated by motion, breathing, and coughing.  These are the
prominent symptoms of inflammation of the chest, with which
the laity should be  acquainted as well as of the danger attendant
thereon, so that he  may promptly send for a  physician. But in
order that not too much time be lost before the arrival of the
latter,  I would remark here that for a violent, acute pain, whether
confined to a small or large  portion of the  chest, attended  by
restricted respiration, constant inclination to cough, and with a
considerable degree of fever  heat and thirst, Aconite, 12th at-
tenuation, is  always the most suitable medicine at first, and may
be given every three  hours, until there be some improvement.
Bryonia, 12th  attenuation,  may be given after Aconite  with
great advantage, and is chiefly indicated against severe stitches
or burning pains in  the chest; great anxiety;  considerable degree
of fever,  though less active than at the commencement of the
disease; cough  somewhat looser and accompanied with mucous
expectoration streaked  with blood; and when the pains in the
chest are very much  increased by motion.  If this medicine does
not afford relief after having been repeated  three or four times
at intervals of three hours, Belladonna, 15th attenuation, should
be given every six  hours, and will mostly be found sufficient.
   A similar  treatment  is required in inflammation of the  chest
of children,  which frequently comes on in the form of catarrh,
and generally  arises from taking cold, and often begins with
spasmodic twitehings;  but most generally it is  entirely catar-
rhal, and is always attended with loss of appetite and some fever,
especially towards evening. At the same time there is a constant
dry cough, with distortion of the muscles of the face and crying.
Aconite is the remedy best adapted to afford  relief. 
244
MISCARRIAGE.
                 Miscarriage or Abortion.
   By unforeseen causes, such as a blow, a fall, bruise, &c , of
the abdomen  in  pregnant  women, it not unfrequently  happens
that premature birth is  brought on.  It is generally otherwise,
however, with miscarriage or abortion, which usually happens in
the second, third  or fourth month  of gestation, and seldom, or
never depends on mechanical causes, but is owing to a morbid
irritability of the uterus, which becomes much greater the more
frequently miscarriage has occurred in the same  subject. Often,
indeed, without the slightest cause, symptoms set in at the very
time at which miscarriage  occurred  in  a previous pregnancy,
which threaten the expulsion of the foetus, and which are often so
violent that it is desirable to have a suitable remedy at hand,
especially when the distance of the physician renders it impos-
sible to obtain him immediately.
   The most common and often very sensible premonitory symp-
toms of miscarriage are : severe drawing or cutting pains in the
abdomen,  which begin in the small of  the back and extend to
both sides, and from  thence toward the lower  part of  the ab-
domen, accompanied with a sensation as  if the bowels or bladder
were about  to be evacuated.   Often, at each  return  of these
pains, which always occur  periodically, there is a  discharge of
coagulated blood.  In these cases, Chamomilla,  3d attenuation,
is  indicated,  one drop in half a teacupful of water, a teaspoonful
of the solution given every half hour.
   But if the following symptoms  occur : severe tensive or press-
ing pains in  the whole abdomen, but especially  about privates;
cramplike contractive or swollen sensation, accompanied with a
constant bearing-down towards the privates, as if all the intestines
would fall out; severe pain in the small of the back,  as  if it
would break; then Belladonna, in the attenuation already often
mentioned, is the  chief remedy.
   On the contrary Hyosciamus,  6th attenuation,  is indicated
when  there  are general cramps of the whole body, which  are
interrupted  by pushing  the body or  by moving a  single limb,
after which a general stiffness of all the joints again takes place; 
       PRESERVATION OF HOMOEOPATHIC  MEDICINES.     245

loss of consciousness;  discharge of bright red blood, which is
increased with every new attack of cramp.—Ipecacuanha, in the
third attenuation,  is also  useful in  cases unattended  by rigid
spasms  and  unconsciousness, especially when there is cutting
pain in the bowels about the navel; urgent pressure towards the
uterus and rectum, with discharge of bright red blood.
  If the blood  is dark, clotted, tough, or ropy, with cutting
pains deep in the abdomen toward the small of the back, Crocus,
3d attenuation, will be most suitable.
  Predisposition to abortion in very strong, plethoric subjects,
may be removed in some instances  by avoiding  altogether the
use of coffee as  a drink.   If  obstinate costiveness occasion it, a
few doses of Nux  vomica will mostly  act as a preventive.   In
some cases  it may  also be  prevented by taking at the beginning
of pregnancy a dose of Tinctura sabinse, 6th attenuation,  every
three or four days.  One of the best preventives  of abortion is
Sepia taken in  very small doses, and  repeated every five or six
days.  The removal of the tendency to this disease, which is much
more injurious than a natural delivery, can only be effected by
the  cautious treatment of an experienced physician, since all the
medicines recommended here serve only as palliatives of abortion.
                   SECTION FOURTH.
       ON THE PRESERVATION OF HOMOEOPATHIC MEDICINES.

   Homoeopathic medicines  must  be carefully preserved,  in
order that no injurious influences can affect them by which their
strength may be impaired;  otherwise it  would be vain to hope
for the desired effect in diseases.
   Among the  things that have  the  most injurious  effect on
medicines, belong chiefly air, warmth, and the ligth of the  sun.
—In order  to  guard them from  these, they should be put in
vials, stopped with good corks, not wormeaten, and placed  in a
well  closed box, furnished with apartments, not exposed  to the
sunlight, and in  a cool place. Where this cannot be done, the 
246      DURATION OF EFFECT OF THE MEDICINES.

medicines must be renewed at least once a year. They must also
not be kept in a place where there are many strong exhalations
and odors;  consequently they  must be protected from  vapors
of burning  coal,  sulphur,  pitch; strong odor of coffee, burnt
sponge,  feathers,  hair and  other animal substances;  from too
strong fumes  of tobacco, the effluvia from sluices and marshes,
very odoriferous flowers, &.c.  And each vial, when not in use,
must  be constantly corked.
   In  regard to the preservation of the magnet,  it may  also be
remarked:   that it must  always lie  so that  its north  pole is
directed  to the north, and its south pole to the south, otherwise
it  loses its  virtue.   And, like the other articles, it must not be
exposed to  heat, particularly that of the sun, or suffered  to fall,
or be  struck or knocked against hard bodies,  nor its poles sud-
denly and frequently loosened  from the armature  to which it is
usually attached, for all these  diminish or destroy entirely  its
power. Hanging  it  up is of but little benefit; the better  plan
is, to  let  it lie in the direction  mentioned,  secured against dis.
turbance, and  with an armature upon its poles.
                    SECTION FIFTH.
   ON THE DURATION OF EFFECT  OF  THE MEDICINES GENERALLY.

  As I have only in some few instances, in the treatment of the
foregoing diseases, mentioned the length of time a medicine may
be expected to act, before a second should be given, it is there-
fore necessary that  I should here give some direction for the
use of the layman, so that  he may not be induced, after the
lapse  of  one or two hours, if in  that  time he perceive no im-
provement  in the disease, to resort to a new medicine; and in
this way  often change an  unimportant malady to one of some
consequence, and to  ascribe to the medicines the aggravations
attributable only to his haste,  impatience and ignorance,  and
which would have been avoided, if he had quietly awaited the
action of the remedy. 
        DURATION OF EFFECT OF  THE MEDICINES.       247

   1.  When there is an evident and progressive improvement,
however small  in  a disease, after giving a  remedy, no other
medicine should be given, nor should the same be repeated as
long as the improvement continues, since  all the benefit which
the medicine already given  is capable of producing, is  not yet
fully accomplished.  And each new dose of any medicine,  even
that last given, and which is acting beneficially, would disturb
the cure.
   2.  In every case  it is necessary to wait at least from eight
to twelve  hours after taking one  medicine before another is
taken;  if after  this time there is  no improvement manifested,
the medicine has  been erroneously chosen, and another better
selected will be needed.  Only in diseases which  become  sud-
denly worse and more painful, and  therefore in  very urgent
cases, is any exception to  be made  to this rule, as in such cases
the effect of the medicine is dissipated much sooner than in less
painful  and chronic diseases. In the first mentioned cases, there-
fore, after half an hour, or one, two or three hours, before the action
of the first  dose is  spent, a second, third, &c, may be given;  or
a new medicine administered if no improvement follow the first;
and the sooner,  the  shorter the duration of the action of the
given remedy is of itself,  as  for instance  Camphor,  Opium,
Coffea  arabica, Ipecacuanha,  Sambucus,  Aconite,  which  in
acute diseases does not exceed six to eight hours.
   3.  As long  therefore  as the progressive improvement from
the medicine last  given  continues, so long is it to be supposed
that, in this case at least, the action of the medicine is still going
on, and hence the  repetition of the dose is prohibited.
   4.  If the disease  is not entirely removed by one remedy, but
the symptoms after  some improvement remain stationary, the
same remedy must be repeated, or a new one exactly suited to
the condition of the disease  selected.
   5.  Among the symptoms which in  all, especially in acute
diseases, (or those which are rapid and violent in  their course,)
indicate improvement or the  contrary, the  state of  mind and
the  general  deportment of the patient are  the  most  certain 
248      DURATION OF  EFFECT  OF THE MEDICINES.

and clear.  In cases where the least amendment  is perceptible,
as for  instance increased cheerfulness, or greater complacency,
and freedom of mind, better spirits—a sort of returning natural-
ness.  On the  contrary, in cases where the  disease  begins to
grow worse, the opposite of these symptoms take place.   There
is a more confused, imbecile state of mind, exciting more sym-
pathy, and of the whole demeanor of the patient in all  positions,
lying or standing,  which are manifest to the  slightest observa-
tion, but are not easily described. 
             DIRECTIONS
                   TO
ENABLE PATIENTS RESIDING AT A DISTANCE FROM
      A HOMCEOPATHIC PHYSICIAN TO GIVE
                   A
   FULL DESCRIPTION OF THEIR DISEASES IN
                WRITING.
32
(249) 
 
DIRECTIONS
                              TO

ENABLE PATIENTS RESIDING AT  A DISTANCE FROM A HOMEOPATHIC
    PHYSICIAN TO GIVE A FULL  DESCRIPTION OF THEIR DISEASE
                         IN WRITING.
  Let the  patient first describe his complaints, as he  would
have done without these directions; detail  their beginning and
progress, and the probable cause.
  It is to be  understood that the age, sex, occupation, and ma-
trimonial relations are to be given,  if the physician  is  unac-
quainted with them all.
  Then the habit of the body should be given, whether large or
small, weak or strong, thin or stout ?  sensitive ? or  easily liable
to take cold ?
  Also the  complexion, whether pale, red,  or brown?
  The color and texture of the hair and eyes, whether the latter
are blue, brown ? &c.
  Bodily defects, for instance  if any rupture, falling  of  the
womb; whether crocked, hunch-backed, lame?  &c.
  The disposition, whether mild  or passionate ?  firm or yielding,
lively, communicative or quiet,  reserved, anxious, easily vexed,
very irritable, easily frightened ? &c.  Whether the mental emo-
tions are of long continuance, or soon pass off?
  Then let him distinctly describe all  the  diseased symptoms,
sensations, and pains, of which he has to complain.
  Where they are felt, what  part, which side, whether on the
surface or deeply seated, the size of the painful spot ? &c.
  The character of the pains and sensations, whether pressive,
stitching, tearing, throbbing, boring,  constrictive, expanding,
                             251 
252        DIRECTIONS  TO DESCRIBE ANY DISEASE.

drawing, griping, gnawing, cutting, pinching, crawling, jerking,
tickling, dull,  as if  asleep, as if dislocated, as  if  beaten  or
bruised, &c.—from several of these feelings  together—or with
whatever natural expressions he can describe  them ?
  Likewise whether  the  attack, sensation, or pain, is constant,
intermitting, or  remitting;  whether  it  comes  on,  increases,
diminishes, or disappears at  certain hours,  times of the day,
days, or in certain positions of the body ?
  Whether it comes on, disappears, increases  or abates by mo-
tion or rest, by lying down, sitting, stretching, bending, walking,
standing—by warmth or  cold,  in  the open air or in the room,
by  light or odors; by speaking, swallowing, eating or drinking
—or soon  after eating—by motion of the affected part, by touch-
ing  or pressing it,  by emotions of the  mind—fright, anger;—
by  working, thinking, reading, &c.
   If it is attended with  anxiety, or  anguish; whether it affects
 the reflective powers or  memory, or interferes with the  proper
 use of the senses, seeing, hearing ? &c.
   Whether  the motion  and natural direction of the  diseased
 part has been  injured (lamed) thereby ?
   Whether connected with complaints in other parts of the body,
 and if so,  in which ?
   Or whether the disease mentioned alternates with one in an-
 other part of the body ?
   Whether the  affected parts are red or swollen ?
   Whether the  swelling is hard or soft?  painful  to  the touch,
 or a dent  or pit can be made in it by pressure ?
  With regard to the individual organs or parts of the body and
their functions, which are not the chief seat of the malady, what
symptoms are there likely to be useful, viz:
  Disposition—whether patient, complaining,  sorrowful, angry,
suspicious, anxious, fearful ? &c.
  Whether it differs  materially during the sickness, or at its
onset from the healthy state ? 
DIRECTIONS TO  DESCRIBE ANY DISEASE.       253
   Conditions  of the mental faculties,  of  thought,  reflection;
disposition, and capability for mental and physical labor?
   Accurate description of the disorders of mind, disposition and
judgment, according to their outward manifestation ?
   Whether there be vertigo, or dulness of the  head, and of
what kind ?
   Eyes;  how is the power  of vision ?  Is there the appearance
as if looking through gauze  or  fog ?  Are  there dark or black
spots before  the eyes;  or  sparks or false colors ?  Do objects
appear  double  or wavering?  Is  the patient short-  or  long-
sighted?  The  pupil small,  large, or variable?   Is there  in-
creased secretion of tears ?  Are the eyes red, inflamed, intolerant
of light ?  Do  the eyelids  stick together ?  Do they open and
shut properly ?  Do they twitch  and tremble ?   Are there styes
on the lids, or spots in the cornea ?
   How is the hearing ?  Is  there roaring, buzzing, or ringing in
the ears?  Is the earwax dry or moist?  Is  there  running from
the ears; if so, has it an offensive  odor ?
   Is there any  obstruction  of the  nose ?  Dry or fluid catarrh,
sneezing, sense of smell, soreness and ulceration of the nostrils.
Bad smell from them; bleeding  at the nose ?
   Condition of the teeth.—Whether covered with tartar, loose,
or hollow; how many have fallen  out or been extracted, and why?
   Whether the gums  are  pale  or red, firm  or soft, spongy,
swollen, bleed readily, or have receded from the teeth ?
   Whether the mouth is too dry ? Whether there is much ex-
pectoration (viscid, slimy, of a bad smell,  bloody) ?   Whether
there are tumors or ulcers in the cavity of  the mouth, on  the
tongue, the tonsils, palate, roof of the mouth, or in  the  throat,
or a collection of mucus on these parts, blisters on the  lips ? &c.
   Whether the tongue is moist or dry, red, tender, chapt, sore,
clean or coated (white or yellow) ?
   Whether  speaking,  chewing, or motion of the tongue, are
 unmolested ?
   Whether swallowing liquids or solids is difficult ?
   Whether there is offensive breath ? 
254       DIRECTIONS TO  DE8CRIBE  ANY  DISEASE.
  Whether the taste is perfect or impaired;  slimy, saltish, bit-
ter, sour, or  putrid? Whether  food has its proper taste,  or
tastes slimy, bitter, sour, saltish? kc.
  In regard to food and drink.—Whether there is a preference
for any particular  article ?
  Whether  there  are  any  complaints  arising after  eating  or
drinking? and what?
  Whether there are eructations of food ? Or of wind, and  of
what taste ?   If  like the  food previously taken ?
  Or whether fluids arise from the stomach, or  collect in the
mouth ? Of what taste ?
  Whether there is vomiting?   If so, whether of water, saliva,
or mucus;  acrid, sour, of a putrid smell and taste; bitter, yel-
low, green, of fluid, or clotted blood, or of the food eaten ?
  Whether there is nausea, or sick stomach ?
  Whether the abdomen is tense, distended, full and hard, or
empty and sunken ?
  In pains and complaints of the stomach, bowels, and abdomen,
the precise  locality must be distinctly pointed out (whether at
the pit of the stomach, about the navel, under the ribs, in which
side ? &c).
  Whether there is flatulency ?  Rumbling, grumbling and rat-
tling in the  abdomen ?  Whether  the wind passes off,  or is re-
tained; and what kind of symptoms it appears to give rise to?
  If  the stools  are free  or difficult; how often; hard, soft, or
very  loose; claylike or  mucous, bloody,  &c; the color of the
evacuations;  whether they are preceded, accompanied or fol-
lowed by pain or uneasiness, and what kind?  Whether there are
worms evacuated—large  or small ?
  Whether there  are sores about the rectum  and  anus, and
warts  and tumors  occasionally appear;  whether the  tumors
bleed ? &c.
  Whether there is any difficulty attending urination,  either
before, during, or after ? and of what kind ?
  Whether there is much or little urine discharged ?
   Appearance of the urine (clear  like water;  of the natural 
DIRECTIONS TO  DESCRIBE  ANY  DISEASE.       255
color, or brown, red? &c); whether it changes soon, or the sedi-
ment is mucous,  sandy, white,  or red?  Whether it  contains
blood, pus, or gravel ?
   Whether the breath is short, or otherwise affected;  whether
the patient can go up stairs, or walk without difficulty.  Whether
he is obliged to lie with his head much raised in  bed;  whether
there is any panting, wheezing, or rattling to be  noticed in the
chest ?   Wrhether the  patient can take a deep breath,  or what
hindrance he feels ?
   State of the voice,—whether rough, hoarse, hollow? &c.
   Is there cough ?  And is it  light, short, or hard;  deep, or
long continued—with swelling of the face, and loss of breath ?
 How does the cough sound ?  Is it dry, or attended with expecto-
 ration ?
   Is the expectoration easy, or difficult; is it scanty, or copious;
 mucous,  purulent,  viscid, or tenaceous, bloody  (streaked with
 fresh or black  blood, or of clear blood), white, yellow,  green, or
 grey;  does it taste slimy, saltish, sweet, bitter, or putrid ?
   Does there  appear  to be  mucus in the fauces, windpipe, or
 deep in the chest?  At what spot does the irritation  to  cough
 seem to arise ?  From what part does the expectoration proceed ?
   Is there palpitation of the heart, and in what way ?  or throb-
 bing in other  parts of the body ?   Does the patient suffer from
 congestion or  agitation of blood ?—State of the pulse ?
    Are there swellings or suppuration of the glands  under the
 jaw, under  the arms, on the hairy scalp, or about the groins?
 Is there goitre, or enlargement  of the glands in front  of the
 windpipe ?
    Are there  in the  other  parts of the body,  especially the
 extremities, swellings of the bones, or of the joints, or  boils,
 tumors, swollen  or varicose veins ?  Are particular  parts and
 limbs red, swollen or painful ?
    Are the hands and feet swollen ?
    Are one or more limbs lame or palsied ?
    Are there cramps  in the muscles of some limbs;  or is there 
256         DIRECTIONS  TO DESCRIBE DISEASES.

trembling, twitching, jerking, numbness, or other symptoms in
them ?
   Is the skin pale or yellow ? &o.
   Is it dry, or disposed to perspire ?  Is it unhealthy ?
   Is there  itching  of the  skin (tickling, crawling,  gnawing,
biting, burning,  formication, or sticking)?   Is  it relieved by
scratching, or is it thereby changed to another place ?
   Are there knots, boils, tumors, abscesses, chilblain, or corns,
in the skin ? If so, what particular symptoms do they occasion ?
   Likewise  eruptions  on  the skin, pimples, spots, blisters, &c,
are to be described as to color, number, size;  whether they are
filled with water, or pus; whether they are covered with  scabs
and  scurf;  how long  they  have existed, and what parts  they
occupy 1
   Also ringworms, tetters, scurfs, scales;  brown and blue spots,
liver-spots,  freckles;  chaps, corroding blisters,  soreness of the
corners of the mouth, &c; warts; tumors on the bones; soreness
of the skin;  if the nails are ill-formed; if the hair falls off, and
the scalp contains scales and scurf.
   If there are ulcers; whether  the edges and bottom  are in-
flamed ; whether there is proud flesh  in them; whether they
have raised  edges, or bleed,  and the bottom appears red, black,
or fatty ?  Whether the matter is copious and thin, acrid or thick,
bloody, white, yellow, black, or offensive to the smell ?
  Is there chilliness,  or  rather a  feeling of heat?   Coldness,
heat, or perspiration of particular parts ?
  Is there sweating of the feet ? If so, is it warm,  cold, or of
a bad smell ?
  When the patient has fever, does it consist of cold, heat, and
sweat?  Alternately, or successively ?  And in what order ?  How
long does each last ?  How violent ?  Affect  the whole body, or
a part? With or without thirst? With pale or red face and skin?
  Do other symptoms accompany  each attack  of fever  (chill,
heat, and sweat) ? 
          DIRECTIONS TO DESCRIBE ANY DISEASE.       257

  Any other peculiar morbid symptoms,  for instance, fainting,
spasms, epileptic fits,  cramp of the stomach, tightness  of the
chest, &c, are to be accurately described in their beginning,
progress and  termination;  how and by  what means they are
occasioned and  relieved; whether  they are better or worse  at
certain hours  and times  of  the day, or in certain directions and
positions of the  body.
  How does the patient  sleep?  What length of time?  Is it
restless,  interrupted by  frequent  waking, and starting up  in
fright?  Does  he talk in his sleep; does he groan; has he night-
mare ?  Does he dream  much and with distress, and what?
Does he snore,  or sleep with his  mouth  open?  What posture
does he habitually lie in when asleep ?
  How is the strength of the patient ?  Is he obliged to remain
in bed, or can he continue up; is he languid, weary, indisposed
to exercise? &c.
  Has he wasted away?

  Finally, the patient must also mention, what diseases  he has
already had during his  life—especially the eruptive diseases—
itch,  scald-head, tetter,  erysipelas, small-pox,  scarlet - fever,
measles, pimples in the face, itching of the skin,  &c.
  Also,  whether he has had scrofula (disease of the glands),
rickets, gout, rheumatism,  haemorrhoids  (piles), difficult teeth-
ing, worms, spasms, epilepsy (falling sickness), whooping cough,
inflammation  of the lungs  or other organs, intermittent inflam-
matory or  nervous fever, jaundice, haemorrhage of any  kind,
diseases  of the  teeth, apoplexy, or  palsy, sweating of the feet,
ulcers, or the venereal disease ?
   He must likewise mention what  length of  time, and in what
manner  he was treated  in  these  diseases?  Whether he used
baths, mineral baths, water cure, herb or mercurial  medicines,
or vapor baths,  and also the mode and kind ?
   Also what  he has been using in the present disease ? Whether
he has used  bleeding, emetics and purgatives, sweating  medi- 
258       DIRECTIONS  TO DESCRIBE ANY DISEASE.

cines, drinks to purify the blood, teas  of Valerian, stomach
drops, China, &c, and if he  is  accustomed to any of these
remedies ?
  Whether he is in the habit of  drinking intoxicating liquors,
wine, brandy, strong beer, or coffee and tea; or eating very fat
food,  much acid, or high seasoned food ?
  Whether he eats and drinks much, and what ?
  He must state fully his manner of life  and diet; whether he
is  accustomed to  woolen clothing ?  Whether his dwelling is
healthy ?
  He must also state any afflictions and emotions of the mind
which are likely  to retard his recovery, or may have occasioned
his disease;  for instance unhappy love, disappointed hopes, morti-
fications, domestic  discords, or poverty.
  He must likewise state, whether or  not early debauchery  of
some  kind may not have contributed to his disorder.
  If he  has been  sickly from  his birth,  his disease is probably
hereditary;  if in infancy he had not had the breast, but was
raised up by hand, it should be mentioned.
  The male  sex  are  also to communicate what concerns their
sexual acts and sexual organs; the state of his procreativc appe-
tite, and his generative power.
  Whether involuntary emission  of semen takes place ?  How
often ? With or without dreams ?  With  a feeling of weakness
afterwards, or with alleviation ?
  Whether there are or have been swelling of the testes, stric-
ture of the urethra, buboes, swelling of the  penis and ulcers?
Also gonorrhoea, and its symptoms ?
  Females must  likewise state: at what age their menses first
came on?  If she remained regular from that time, or have the
menses been suppressed ?  How are they now ? regular, too fre-
quent, or too seldom?  Too profuse,  or  too weak?  How  many 
DIRECTIONS TO DESCRIBE ANY DISEASE.       259
days does it continue when in health, and how many when sick ?
What  attendant  symptoms are there,  either before  or after?
What influence has motion or rest ? &c.
  Is the discharge red, dark, clotted, or of a bad smell ?
  Is there  a discharge of mucus or whites ?  since when ? at all
times,  or  only before and after the menses? acrid or mild?
watery or thick ? white, yellow or greenish ? of an offensive odor ?
  Had  she ever  the green sickness  (chlorosis),  or hysterics?
How affected by the last ?
  Finally,  information in regard to  the sexual appetite, &c.;
influence upon the health, &c, is very desirable to the physician.
  If she is, or has been married ?
  Whether she has children ?  How often she has borne them ?
  Whether  the  labors were easy and natural, or difficult  and
attended by dangerous symptoms?  If the latter,  from what
cause, and what particular symptoms (for instance, haemorrhage) ?
  Whether she had complaints during pregnancy, and what ?
  Whether she nurses; how long, how often;  with unpleasant
feelings at the time, or afterwards ?
  Whether she has had sore nipples, or gathered breast ? If from
these or other causes she has lumps, or  hardness in the  breasts ?
  In  what year of her  age  did  the  menses cease altogether ?
and with what  complaints?  With what influence upon the
health ? 
 
ON
MESMERISM AND MAGNETISM. 
\ 
         DIRECTIONS
                 FOR THE
USE OF  MESMERISM  AND MAGNETISM.
  Mesmerism, so named from its discoverer, Mesmer; also called
animal magnetism, consists in the medicinal action of one living
body on another, and  by no means deserves the inconsiderate
detraction which it has so often been subjected to. Any remedy
may be misused, and this has  been the  case with  mesmerism
in a high degree;  but the blame  should  not rest on the instru-
ment, which is due to the person who  makes use of it.
   Almost every healthy and strong person possesses the faculty
of  operating curatively by mesmerism on others:  sickly  and
weakly persons, however, ought  not  to  undertake it, as they
either  weaken  the  patients,  or impart to them their own un-
healthy condition, and thereby aggravate  the disease.  The best
evidence that mesmerism does  not rest entirely on the imagina-
tion, is  that it acts generally so  beneficially in children,  and
often effects cures where  other remedies have failed; it  is how-
ever improper for  aged  or emaciated sickly persons, nurses, or
midwifes, to be entrusted with  its administration, but  it should
be  practiced by young healthy  persons alone.
   This  curative agent,  often  foolishly  abused, which by the
powerful will of a well-intentioned person flows into a  patient,
by means of contact,  operates  in  part homoeopathically, by ex-
citing  symptoms similar to those  of the disease to be remedied,
and when applied with this view, a single pass with the palm of
the hand, from the crown of the head downward, over the body
to the ends of  the  toes, given with moderately strong will and
not too slowly, wiU be sufficient;—thus, for instance, dangerous
uterine haemorrhage may often be relieved in  this way.  It  is
also partly beneficial  in  distributing unnatural  congestions, and
bringing about an equilibrium of vital energy;  thus in conges-
tion of blood to the head, and  in persons debilitated by anxiety, 
264          ON MESMERISM  AND  MAONETISM.

loss of rest, &c, relief is often  obtained  by one or two passes.
Partly also it acts by directly supplying the requisite amount of
vital power, to a  single  weak part or to  the whole organism—
an end, which can  be attained  by no other potency so surely,
and so safely,  without interfering with other medical treatment.
In an individual member, or  part,  this is effected by placing the
hand or points of the fingers on it, while  the will is powerfully
and with the right intention  fixed  on the  affected part,  which is
probably the most serious local symptom of an internal chronic
malady, for instance in old ulcers, amaurosis, palsy of  a  single
limb, kc.  But the most satisfactory effects of this agent is some-
times manifested  on the whole organism, in the resuscitation of
persons who  have  been for a  length of time asphyxiated or
apparently dead, by the application of the most powerful will of
a man  in the full enjoyment  of vital energy.
  This mesmerising depends  upon  an influx of more or less vital
fluid or power into the patient, and is hence called positive mes-
merism.  A practice opposite to  this,  as its effects are a counter-
part, may be called  negative mesmerism.   To this belong the
passes  which  are  used  to awake somnambulists.  This dispos-
sessing of a vigorous person, of the  excessive accumulation of
vital power in a single part or organ  by negative mesmerism is
most simply and effectually performed by a rapid motion of the
extended  right hand, parallel to the body, and about  an inch
distant, from the top of the head to the ends of the toes. The
quicker this pass is made, the  greater will be the discharge.  Thus,
for  instance, in spams or apparent death occurring in a female
previously healthy, when the  menses  has been suddenly checked
by violent mental emotions, the  excess of vital power probably
accumulated in the precordia is  discharged  by a quick negative
pass, and  put  in equilibrium  through the whole system, so that
usually restoration immediately follows. Thus, too, a moderately
quick negative pass will at times  relieve the anxiety, restlessness,
and loss  of sleep occasioned in very irritable  persons  by too
strong  positive passes. 
             ON MESMERISM AND MAGNETISM.          265

  It is also to be observed that the person to be mesmerised,
must not wear silk on any part of his body.
  Mesmerism can be  used  even during the action of another
remedy previously administered, when any sudden illness, such
as spasms,  takes place, which it is desirable to remove; since a
moderate application of mesmerism does not disturb the action
of the remedy.  In children this is often of great benefit.
  The patient, after  being mesmerized,  should remain a  short
time at rest, either sitting  up or lying down, and its  effects
attended to.  At times, as after other  medicines, there is at first
some aggravation of  the symptoms, soon followed by improve-
ment.  Many patients begin to perspire a little, and this must be
attended to, so as to  guard  against taking cold from a draught
of air, &e.
  The magnet possesses a similar and wonderful power over the
human organism, and in many diseases cures specifically, though
this has for a long time been doubted, laughed at, and ascribed
to imposture.  By the numerous  and continued observations of
Hahnemann, it  has been undeniably established that the magnet
is often one of the most powerful  and  beneficial remedies that
we can make use of, where other means have failed. It usually
acts very promptly, as may  be known by the aggravation of the
symptoms, and  consequently relieves  also as speedily.
   It should be applied  in  the following manner: The patient
is seated so that he always  has the point  of the magnet  to  be
touched before  him—whether the north or south pole,  or the
 whole surface is to be used—while the magnetic bar is placed
 with its north pole to the north, and the south pole to the south.
 The patient must neither  take it in  his hand, nor adjust  or
 remove it  himself, otherwise a different effect than was intended
 will be produced, or the effect will be entirely obviated.
    As it is necessary that  the diseased  part  should be placed
 immediately in  contact with the magnet, the patient has nothing
 more to do, than touch with the point of any finger that he may
 prefer, that pole which is most suitable for the particular form
 of  the disease.   If  the  middle is to be used, then the  patient
                                                   34 
 2C6          ON  MESMERISM AND MAGNETISM.

 should lay about three fingers flat upon the middle of  the  mag-
 net, so that he may have more than one  point  of  contact,  as in
 all probability the peculiar curative virtues of the  whole surface
 consist in the joint action of both poles; for it is observed, when
 the magnetic needle  is drawn lengthwise over the bar, that it
 turns itself now to one, now to the other pole, showing that it
 alternately finds a friendly and opposite pole near  it.
   The contact need  not  continue long.   Usually four or five
 minutes  are sufficient;  but it would be well for the layman to
 be aware of  the usual temporary aggravation of the symptoms
 which he is desirous to remedy.   As soon  as  this appears, he
 must withdraw from  the  magnet, and it must be taken out of
 the room.  The aggravation will then soon pass off, and the im-
 provement speedily follow.  I have cured pains in  carious teeth
 of a year's standing by one application of the magnet.
   If the wrong pole  should have been inadvertently  selected
 and applied,  it will be  known by the malady for  which it was
 used, becoming not worse, but for the moment  better.  The
 patient need not,  however,  be deceived  and think his disease
 cured, since it is only palliated, and will certainly soon return.
 But  let the opposite pole be applied for a few minutes,  or until
the affection  becomes  worse,  and  a  permanent  cure  may be
expected  with certainty. 
          TABULAR INDEX





                    OF THE





REMEDIES USED, THEIR ENGLISH NAMES, ANTIDOTES,





                     AND




       DISEASES IN WHICH EMPLOYED. 
 
TABULAR INDEX
REMEDIES USED, THEIR ENGLISH NAMES, ANTIDOTES,
         AND DISEASES IN WHICH EMPLOYED.

     (The English names are in Small Capitals, the Antidotes in Italics.)
Aconitum  napellus  (Aconite).
   Monk's hood.  {Camphora, Nux
   vom., Wine, Vinegar, Paris.)
Amenorrhoea  .   .    .   page 46
                              50
                              51
Anger    .    .   .
Anus, Itching of the
Apparent Death of new-born
  Children (Asphyxia)
Apoplexy
Asthma, or Spasms of the Chest
Bleeding at the Nose
Blood, Spitting of  .
Bowels, Inflammation of the
Brain, Inflammation of the
Catarrh, or Hoarseness  .
Catarrhal Inflammation  of the
  Eyes   ....  124, 126
Chicken-Pox (Varicella) .    .   81
Childbed-Fever     .    .    .193
Congestion  of  Blood  to  the
  Head  ....    8"
Congestion of Blood to the Chest
Cough
Croup    .....
Crusta Lactea ....
Dropsy of the  Chest (Hydro-
  thorax) .....
Dysentery    ....
Eruptions in general
Erysipelas    ....
Eyes, Inflammation of, in new-
  born Children
Eyes, Inflammation of, from
  difficult Teething .
Eyes, Inflammation of, from
  the presence of foreign bodies
Facial Neuralgia   .
Fever, bilious and gastric
   "   intermittent .
   "   milliary (Rash)  .
Fright   ....
 91
101
 99
184

113
114
129
120

122

122

123
131
137
136
139
142
Gout     ....  page 150
Grippe   ...    .    .   153
Haemorrhage  .     .    .    .164
Headache from  Congestion of
  Blood to the Head    .    .   155
Inflammation ....   168
      "      of the Chest   .   243
      "      of the Kidneys .   172
      "      of the Liver   .   177
      "      of the Lungs  .   180
Lumbago .    .     .    .    .179
Measles.....182
Night-Mare   . ■    .    .    .187
Palpitation of the Heart.    .   158
Pleurisy.....190
Rheumatism  .     .    .    .   195
Scabs of the Face in Children   130
Scarlet-Rash  .     .    .    .200
Sciatica.....200
Sleeplessness  ....   203
Small-Pox    . •   .    .    .204
Sore Throat  .     .    .    .207
Sun-Stroke   .     .    .    .219
Teething of Children   .    .   222
Toothache from Congestion of
  Blood.....225
Urinary Complaints.    .    .   227
Vaccination  ....   228
Varioloid.    .     .    .    .   229
Vomiting from mental emotions   232
Worms   .         .    .    •   239

Antimonium  crudum.   Crude
   Antimony. (He}), sulph., Here.)
Bilious and gastric Fever,  page 137
Delirium tremens, or Drunken-
  ness   .    .     .    .    •  103
Disordered Stomach    .    .   215
Summer - Complaint ( Cholera
  Infantum)  ....    83
Vomiting from vitiated Stomach  231 
27U
TABULAR  INDEX.
Arnica  montana.    Leopard's
   Bane.  (C'<i>nph-, Ignat., Ipecac.)
After-Pains
Apoplexy.
Bleeding at the Nose
Blood, Spitting of  .
  "   Vomiting of .
Bloody Urine .
Boil, or Furunculus .
Congestionof Blood to the Head
Contusion of the Chest  .  241, 242
page 45
     56
     62
     63
     o;>
     65
     66
Corns    ....
Disordered Stomach
Earache (Otalgia)  .
Glands, Swelling of.
Gout     ....
Inflammation of the Kidneys
Injuries of the Feet
Loins,  Pain in the  .
Milk-Fever
Sprains  ....
Swelling of the Cheeks  .
Urinary Complaints
Varicose Veins
Womb, Falling of tho
Wounds  ....
 94
213
117
145
150
173
134
178
lt?3
212
 79
227
230
237
240
Arnica Tincture.
Bed Sores
Breasts, gathered
Bruises
Congestion of Blood to the Head
Excoriations
Fatigue  ....
Frost-Bite
Inflammation from Injuries
Injuries of the Feet
Warts and Corns
page 207
 73
 89
129
133
143
168
134
235
Arsenicum album. White Arse-
   nic.  (China, Ferrum, Graphites,
   Hepar sulph., Ipecac, Kali carb.,
   Nux vom., Sambucus,  Veratrum.)
Amenorrhoea .    .     .  page 48
Anger
Anus, Itching of the
Apthae (Sore Mouth)
Blood,  Spitting of  .
Boil, or Furunculus .
Bowels, Inflammation of the
Cheeks, Swelling of the  .
Cholera Infantum, or Summer
  Complaint  .
Cholera Asiatica
Crusta Lactea ..."
Dropsy in general (Anasarca)
   "   of the Abdomen  (Asci
         tcs) .
 49
 51
 53
 64
 66
 77
 79

 84
 87
185
111

112
Dropsy of tho Chest  (Hydro-
  thorax).    •    •     •  l':«go 113
Eyes, Inflammation of, from a
  Stye.....121
Facial Neuralgia   .     .    .  131
Fever, intermittent .     .    .  137
Mania a potua.    .     .    .  104
Sciatica.....201
Scrofulous Inflammation of tho
  Eyes.....128
Ulcers on tho Extremities    .  226
Artemisia.
Colic from Worms
pago 95
Aurum metallicum.  Pure Gold.
   (Bellad., China, Cupr., Jlercuri/.)
Catarrh-Fever .    .     .  page  79
Eyes, Inflammation of, from  a
  Stye.....123
Facial Neuralgia   .     .    .132
Offensive Breath   .     .    .  1S8
Womb, Falling of the   .    .  237

Belladonna. Deadly Nightshade.
   (Coffea, Hyoscyamus, Hep. sulph.,
   Pulsatilla.)
Amenorrhoea   .    .     .  page  46
Apoplexy.....56
Boil, or Furunculus ...    66
Brain, Inflammation of the   .    68
Breasts, gathered  ...    69
Bowels, Inflammation of tho  .    77
Child-Birth, or Labor    .    .    44
Catarrhal Inflammation  of the
  Eyes   .     .    .     .  124, 126
Childbed-Fever
Colic during Menstruation
Congestion ofBlood to the Chest
Cough    ....
Crying of Infants  .
Dysmenorrhea, or painfnl Men
  struation
Ears, Inflammation of the
Epilepsy ....
Erysipelas
Erysipelatous Inflammation of
  the Breasts  .
Facial Neuralgia
Glands, Swelling of the
Headache from Congestion of
  Blood to the Head
Hooping-Cough
Hydrophobia  .
Inflammation  .
      "      of the Chest
             of the Kidneys
Lameness, spontaneous  .
193
 98
 91
101
102

114
119
120
120

 71
131
145

155
160
162
168
243
172
174 
TABULAR  INDEX.
271
Liimbago . Measles .	page	179 182
Milk-Fever		184
Miscarriage, or Abortion		244
Offensive Breath		188
Rheumatism		195
Scarlet-Fever .		199
" Rash .		200
Scrofulous Inflammation	af the	
Eyes		127
Sleeplessness .	.	203
Small-Pox	.	204
Sore Throat		206
Stomach, Cramp of the	.	218
Sun-Stroke		219
Teething of Children		223
Urinary Complaints.		227
Walk, Children learning 1	0	234
Womb, Falling of the		237
Worms		239
Baryta acetica.		
Feet, Sweating of .	■ page	135
Scald-Head		198
Bryonia  alba.  White Bryony.
   (Aeon., Cham., Ignat., Nux vom.)
Amenorrhoea  .    .    .  page 46
Anger    .....
  "   with Fright  .
Apthae, or Sore Mouth  .
Asthma, or Spasms of the Chest
Bowels, Inflammation of the  .
Childbed-Fever
Cholera Infantum, or Summer-
  Complaint   .
Constipation   ....
Disordered Stomach
Dropsy of the Abdomen (Asci-
         tes)  .
   "   of the  Chest  (Hydro-
         thorax)
   "   of the Feet.
Erysipelas    .    .    .    •
Erysipelatous  Inflammation &
  Swelling of the Breasts
Frost-Bite     .    .    .    •
Glands, Swelling of the .
Gout.....
Grippe.....
Headache from Constipation  .
Inflammation  .
       "       of the Chest
Jaundice.....
Liver, Inflammation of the
Lumbago .    '     '   , A,   '
 Lungs, Inflammation ol the  .
 Milk-Fever    ....
Pleurisy  ....  page 190
Rheumatism  .    .    .  195, 196
Stomach, Cramp of the  .    .   218
Vomiting from mental emotions   232
 50
 53
 59
 77
193

 84
 93
214

112

113
111
121

 71
144
145
149
154
157
168
243
170
177
179
181
 184
Calcarea carboniea.  carbonate
   op lime.   (Camp>h., Nitric acid,
   Sulphur.)
Abscess   .
Anus, Itching of the
Breasts,  gathered
Cheeks,  Swelling of the .
Epilepsy .....
Eyes, Inflammation of, in new-
      born Children
  "  inflamed from  diflSicult
      Teething
Specks on the Eye  .
Leucorrhcea, or Whites  .
Ring-Worm   ....
Walk, Children learning to
Warts and Corns
Wen.....
Womb, falling of the
page 43
  .   52
  .   70
  .   80
  .  120
122

123
128
175
197
234
234
236
237
Camphora.  Camphor.
Anasarca, or Dropsy    .  page 111
Inflammation of the Brain   .    68
Grippe.....153
Sun-Stroke    .     .    .    .219

Camphora Tincture.
Cholera Asiatica    .    .   page 86
Fainting.....132

Cannabis  sativa.  Hemp. (Cam-
   phora.)
Inflammation of the Kidneys,
                        page 172
Specks on the Eye  .    .    .128

Cantharides. Spanish Fly. (Cam-
   phora.)
Inflammation of the Kidneys,
                        page 172
Urinary Complaints    .    .  227

Capsicum annum. Cayenne Pep-
   per.  (Camph.)
Anus, Itching of the    .   page 51
Facial Neuralgia   .    .     •  131
Grief and Sorrow  .    .     .154

Carbo vegetabilis.   Vegetable
   Charcoal.  (Arsenic, Camphora,
   Coffea.)
Cholera Infantum  .    .   page 84
Dropsy of the Chest    .     .  113 
TABULAR, INDEX.
Excoriations  .    •     • P»ge 129
Itch......169
Disordered Stomach     .    .215
Sun-Stroke   ....  219
Ulcers on the Extremities    .  226
Worms.....23s

Causticum. Catstic.  (Coffea, Co-
   locynth, Nux vom.)
Amenorrhoea  .    .     •   page 47
Dysmenorrhea a, or painful Men-
  struation    .    •     •    .115
Itch......169
Leucorrhoea, or Whites  .    .  175
Ring-Worm    ....  197
Walk, Children learning to   .  234

Chamomilla.  Common Chamomile.
   (Avon., Cuvvulus, Coffea,  Ignatia,
   Nu.r vom., Pulsat.)
After-Pains   .    .     .   page 45
Anger   .    .    .     .    48, 49
  "   from Fright ...   50
Asthma, or Spasms of the Chest   60
Bowels, Inflammation of the .   77
Cardialgia    .    .     .    .242
Catarrh, or Hoarseness  .    .   77
Catarrhal Inflammation  of the
  Eves   .    .    .     .121, 126
Cheeks, Swelling of the .	79, 80
Childbed-Fever	193
Cholera Morbus	85
Cold in the Head, or Catarrh	87
Colic from cold or wet Feet	94
" during Menstruation	98
Congestion ofBlood to the Heac	I 90
Cough ....	100
Crying of Infants .	102
Diarrhoea ....	106
" from Cold	107
" from Fright	107
" from Vexation .	109
Disordered Stomach	213
Dysentery	114
Dysmenorrhoea, or painful Men	
struation	115
Earache ....	118
Epilepsy ....	120
Excoriations	129
Eyes, Daflammation of, from	
difficult Teething	123
" Inflammation of, in new-	
born Children	122
Fever, bilious and gastric	138
" milliary (Rash) .	139
Frost-Bito	144
l»out ....	149
Headache from suppressed Per-
  spiration   .    •     •  l'i'g'" F's
Jaundice .    .    •     •     .109
Labor, or Child-Birth    .     .    14
Liver, Inflammation of the   .  177
Miscarriage, or Abortion .     .  2-11
Palpitation of the Heart .     .  158
Rheumatism   .    .     •     .195
Sciatica.....201
Sleeplessness ....  202
Sore Throat  ....  20.'.
Spasms.....208
Stomach, Cramp of the  .     .217
Teething of Children    .   222, 223
Toothache from Cold    .     .  224
    "     from  Congestion of
            Blood .     .     .  225
    "     from decayed Teoth  223
Uterine Hicmorrhago    .     .  1 HO
Vomiting from mental emotions  2i!2
    "    from Worms   .     .  233

China officinalis. Peruvian Bark.
   (Amivn, Arsenic, Bcllad.,  Cnlc.
   carb., Carbo kcij., Ipecac, Suljih.)
Amenorrhoea .    .     .   pago 47
Asphyxia.
Bed Sores
Bleeding at the Nose
Blood, Vomiting of .
Chlorosis, or Green Sickness
Constipation
Contusion of the Chest  .
Diarrhoea from Cold
Disordered Stomach
Dropsy of theAbdomen(Ascites)
Dysentery
Epilepsy .
Facial Neuralgia
Fainting  .
Fever, intermittent .
Flatulency
Haemorrhage   .
llooping-Cough
Jaundice .
Poisoning by Arsenic
Self-Pollution  .
Spasms
Toothache from Congestion of
  Blood  .
Urinary Complaints
Uterine  Haemorrhage
Vomiting from Worms
Worms
Wounds  .
 55
207
 03
 65
152
 94
212
107
214
112
114
120
131
133
137
141
164
160
170
 58
189
211

225
227
166
2:;2
23!)
210
Cicuta virosa.  (Arnica.)
Kpilep.,y ....  pago 120 
TABULAR  INDEX.
273
Cina.  Worm-seed.  (Ipecac)
Childbed or Duration of Con-
  finement   .    .     .  page 82
Colic from Worms  ...  95
Spasms.....209
Worms.....239

Cinnamomum Tincture. Cinna-
   mon.
Labor, or Child-Birth    .  page 44
Uterine Haemorrhage    .    . 165

Cocculus indicus.   Indian Ber-
   ries.   (Camph., Nux vom.)
Cramp of the Stomach   . page 217
Dysmenorrhoea, or painful Men-
  struation   .... 115
Leucorrhoea, or  Whites   .    . 175
Spasms.....210
Vomiting  from Cramp  of  the
  Stomach   .... 233

Coffea cruda.  Mocha  Coffea.
   (Aconite, Cham., Nux vom.)
After-Pains  .    .     .  page 45
Anger.....48
Asthma, or Spasms of the Chest  58
Colic  during Menstruation    .  97
Congestion ofBlood to the Head  90
Crying of  Infants  .     .    . 102
Diarrhoea  from  disordered Sto-
  mach  ..... 108
Dysmenorrhoea     .     .    . 115
Hemicrania   .... 183
Labor, or Child-Birth    .    .  44
Palpitation of the Heart.    . 138
Scarlet-Rash .    .     .    .200
Sleeplessness  .... 203
Sore Throat  .    .     .    .206
Spasms   .    .    .     •    • 209
Stomach, Cramp of the  .     . 217
Teething of Children    .     . 222
Toothache from Congestion of
             Blood .     .     .225
    "     from decayed Teeth 223
Wounds.....240

Colchicum autumnale.  Meadow
    Saffron.  (Nux  vom.,  Cocculus,
    Pulsatilla.)
Dysentery    .   -    •  page 114
Fatigue.....133
Rheumatism  .... 197

Colocynthis.   Colocynth.  (Cam-
   phora, Caust., Coffea, Cham.)
Colic from Haemorrhoids,   page  97
Dysentery   .     •    •   .114
         35
Facial Neuralgia
Frost-Bite
Sciatica  .
page 132
  .  144
  .  200
Conium maculatum.  Hemlock.
   (Nitri spiritua duleis, Coffea.)
Amenorrhoea  .     .    .   page 48
Bruises.....73
Glands, Swelling of the .    .  144
Hooping-Cough     .    .    .  160
Scrofulous Inflammation of the
  Eyes.....127
Self-Pollution .     .    .    .189
Specks on the Eye  .    .    .  128

Crocus sativus.  Saffron. (Aeon.,
   Opium.)
Congestion ofBlood to the Head
  during Menstruation  .   page 90
Bleeding at the Nose    .    .   62
Miscarriage, or Abortion.    .  245
Uterine Haemorrhage   .    .  166

Cuprum metallicum. Pure Cop-
   per.    (Bellad., China.,  Ipecac,
   Mercury, Nux vom.)
Cholera Asiatica   .    .   page 87
Epilepsy.....120
Hooping-Cough     .    .    .  160

Drosera  rotundifolia.   Sun-dew.
   (Camph.)
Hooping-Cough     .   . page 160

Dulcamara. Bitter-Sweet. (Cam-
   phova,  Ipecac, Mercury.)
Abscess   ....   page 43
                              46
                              68
                              78
                              81
Amenorrhoea  .
Breasts, gathered
Catarrh, or Hoarseness  .
Cheeks, Swelling of the .
Cholera Infantum, or Summer
  Complaint
Diarrhoea from Cold
Dropsy of theAbdomen(Ascites)
Fever, milliary (Rash)
Frost-Bite
General Dropsy
Glands, Swelling of the
Gout
Rheumatism
Scald-Head
Scarlet-Rash  .
 84
107
112
140
144
111
144
149
195
198
200
Euphrasia officinalis.  Eye-
   Bright. (Pulsatilla.)
Catarrhal Inflammation of the
  Eyes   .    .    . page 125, 126 
274                    TABULAR INDEX.
Eyes,  Inflammation  of,  from
  the Presence of Foreign Bo-
  dies   ....  page 123

Fcrrum metallicum. Pi-re Iron.
   (Arnica, Arsenic, Bellad., Ipecac,
   Mercury, Pulsatilla.)
Chlorosis, or Green  Sickness,
                         page 153
Dropsy of the Abdomen .    .112

Filix Mas Tincture. Male Fern.
Tape-Worm   .    .    . page 220

Graphites.  Pure  Black Lead.
   (Arsenic, Nux coin.)
Amenorrhoea .    .    .  page 47
Breasts, gathered   ...   70
Crusta Lactoa ....  185
Erysipelas    .    .    .    .121

Hepar sulphuris calcarea.  Sul-
   phuret of Lime.  (Acetum, Bel-
   ladonna.)
Abscess  ....  page 43
Catarrh-Fever .    .    .    .79
Catarrhal Inflammation.of the
  Eyes.....125
Cheeks, Swelling of the .    .   80
Croup.....99
Crusta Lactea ....  185
Ears, Discharge from the (Otor-
  rhcea).....119
Felon (Whitlow, or Panaris)  .  140
Glands, Swelling of the .    .145
Kidneys, Inflammation of the   173
Measles.....1S2
Poisoning by Arsenic   .    .    58
Scald-Head   ....   198
Scrofulous Inflammation of the
  Eyes.....127
Ulcers  on the Extremities    .   226

Hyoscyamus  niger.   Henbane.
   (Bellad.,  Camph., China.)
Blood,  Spitting of  .    .   page 64
                           .    65
                           .   101
                           .   120
                           .   154
                           .   163
                           .    44
                             244
       Vomiting of
Cough   .
Epilepsy .
Grief and Sorrow
Hydrophobia .
Labor (Child-Birth).
Miscarriage, or Abortion .
Toothache from Congestion of
  Blood  .
Toothache from increased sensi"
  bility of the nervous system
L terine Ha2morrha"e
225

225
167
 Ignatia amara.   St.  L.natii'h
    Bean.  (/'iilsat., Chum., Coeval.,
    Arnica, Camph.)
 Anger    .    .    .    page 48,  19
 Anus, Itching of tho    .    .    52
 Apoplexy.....    56
 Asthma, or Spasms of the Chest    60
 Cardialgia    .    .    .    .242
 Catarrhal Inflammation of tho
   Eyes   ....  125, 120
 Congestion ofBlood to the Head
   from Passion     ...    90
 Diarrhoea from Fright  .    .107
 Disordered Stomach    .    .215
 Epilepsy.....126
 Excoriations  .    .    .    .129
 Eyes, Inflammation of, in new-
   born Children    .    .    .122
 Fever, bilious and gastric    .  138
 Frost-Bite    .    .    .    .lit
 Grief and Sorrow  .    .    .154
 Hemicrania   .    .    .    .183
 Jaundice.....170
 Sciatica.....201
 Skin, Itching of the    .    .201
 Sleeplessness  ....  203
 Sore  Throat   .    •    .    .205
 Spasms.....209
 Stomach, Cramp of the  .    .217
 Teething of Children    .    .  223
 Vomiting from mental emotions  232

 Ipecacuanha. Ipecacuanha-Root.
    (Arnica, Arsenic, China.)
 Asthma, or Spasms of tho Chest,
                          page  60
 Blood, Spitting of  .    .     .64
 Bloody I rine .    .    .     .66
 Bowels, Inflammation of tho  .    77
 Childbed-Fever     .    .     .193
 Cholera Infantum, or Summer-
          Complaint    .     .    84
    "    Morbus     ...    85
 Cholerine.....87
 Cough.....id i
 Delirium Tremens, or Drunken-
  ness   .....103
 Diarrhoea.....106
 Epilepsy .    .    .    .     .'  120
 Fever, bilious and gastric     .  137
   "  intermittent .    .     .  130
   "   milliary,  or Rash  .     .  139
Haemorrhage  .    .    .     .165
Headache from Constipation   .  157
Hooping-Cough     .    .    .  ji;0
Measles  .    .     .     .    .  1 s2
Miscarriage, or Abortion .    .'  245
Poisoning by Arsenic    .    .58 
TABULAR  INDEX.
275
Spasms.....page 209
Stomach, Cramp of the  .  217, 218
Sun-Stroke   .    .    .    .219
Uterine Haemorrhage   .    .  166
Vomiting from vitiated Stomach  231
    '•     from Worms   .    .  233
Worms   .    .    .    .    .  238
Jalappa.   (Camph.)
Crying of  Infants  .
.  page 102
Jodium.  Iodine.   (Btarch.)
Amenorrhoea  .    ...  page 48

Kali earbonicum. Carbonate of
   POTASSA.  (Camph., Coffea.)
Amenorrhoea  .    .    .  page 47
Dropsy of the Abdomen .    .  112
   "   of the Feet  and Hands  111
   "   of the Chest (Hydro-
         thorax)   .    .    .113

Lachesis trigonocephalus.
   Lance Headed Viper. (Arson.,
   Bellad., Nux vom., Rhus toxicod.)
Apoplexy....  page 56
Dropsy of the Chest, or Hydro-
  thorax).....113
Dysmenorrhoea, or painful Men-
  struation   .    .    .    .115
Sun-Stroke   .    .    .    .219
Worms   .'  .    .    .    .239

Lycopodium  clavatum.   Club
   Moss.   (Camph., Pulsat.)
Amenorrhoea  .    .    .  page 46
Crusta Lactea .    .    .    .  185
Excoriations  ....  129
Itch .    .   .    .    .    .169
Varicose Veins     .    .    .  230
Warts and Corns   .    .    .234
Mercurius solubilis.
   Oxide  of Mercury.
Abscess  .
Bleeding at the Nose
Bowels, Inflammation of
Canker of the Mouth
Catarrh, or Hoarseness
   "    Fever
Cheeks, Swelling of the
Childbed, or Duration  of
  finement
Cholera Infantum  .
Colic from Worms  .
Contusion of the Chest
Diarrhoea.
    "    from Cold
Black

   page 43
       63
the .   77
      185
       78
       79
    79, 80
 Con-
       82
       84
       95
      241
      106
      107
Diarrhoea from Fright   .  pago 107
Dropsy in general (Anasarca) .  Ill
   "  of the Abdomen (Ascites)  112
   "  of the Chest  .    .    .113
Dysentery    ....  114
Earache.....117
Ears, Discharge from the    .  119
Felon (Whitlow, or  Panaris)  .  140
Fever, bilious and gastric    .  138
Glands, Swelling of the .    .  144
Gout     .    ...    .    .148
Grippe.....153
Inflammation ....  168
Itch......169
Jaundice.....170
Lameness, spontaneous  .    .  174
Liver, Inflammation of the  .  178
Sore Throat......205
Small-Pox .   .    .    .    .204
Spasms   .    .    .    .    .209
Tape-Worm   .    .    .    .221
Toothache from decayed Teeth  224
Wounds.....241

Mercurius sublimatus corrosi-
   vus.  Corrosive Sublimate.
   ( White of Eggs,  China, Hepar
   sulph.)
Dysentery    .    .    .  page 114

Mercurius vivus.  Quicksilver.
   (Arnica, Bellad., Camph.)
Abscess   .....   page 43
Apthas, or Sore Mouth   .    .   53
Excoriations  ....  129
Grief and Sorrow   .    .    .  155
Kidneys,  Inflammation of  the   173
Lumbago .....  179
Worms.....239

Mezereum.  Mezeron.  (Camph.,
   Mercury,)
Facial. Neuralgia  .    .   page 131
Felon (Whitlow, or  Panaris)  .  140
Scabs of the Face in Children   130

Moschus.   Musk.  (Camph.)
Asthma, or Spasms  of the  Chest,
                         page 58
Fainting.....132
Headache from Irritability  of
  the nervous System   .    .  157
Sleeplessness  ....  203

Natrum muriaticum.  Muriate
   of Soda.  (Arsen.,  Camph.)
Amenorrhoea  .    .    .   page 47
Feet, Injuries of  the    .    .  134 
276
TABULAR INDEX.
Leucorrhcea, or Whites  .  pago 176
Urinary Complaints.    .     .  227

Nitric acid. Aqua Fortis.  (Cal-
   carea, Hepar sulph.)
Frost-Bite    .     •    •  page 144
Sweating of tho Feet   .     .  135

Nux vomica. Vomit Nut. (Aeon.,
   Camph., Coffea, Pulsat.)
Anger    .    .    •    page 48, 49
Anus, Itching of the    .     .   50
Apoplexy.....56
Apthaea, or Sore Mouth .     .   53
Asthma, or Spasms of the Chest   59
Bloody Urine ....   66
Blood, Vomiting of .    .     .65
Cardialgia    ....  242
Catarrh-Fever ....   79
   "    or Hoarseness  .     .   78
Catarrhal Inflammation of the
  Eyes  .    .    .  page  124, 126
Child-Birth, or Labor	44
Childbed-Fever	193
Cholera Infantum .	84
Cold in the Head	87
Colic from Flatulence	95
" from Haemorrhoids .	90
" during Menstruation	97
Congestion of Blood to the Ab	
domen.	92
" of Blood to the Ches	, 90
" of Blood to the Head	38, 89
Corns ....	94
Constipation	92
Contusion of the Chest .	242
Cough ....	100
Crying of Infants .	102
Delirium Tremens .	103
Diarrhoea from disordered Sto	
mach ....	108
Disordered Stomach	213
Dysmenorrhoea	115
Fatigue ....	133
Fever, bilious and gastric	137
" Intermittent .	. 136
" milliary.	140
Flatulency	. 141
Frost-Bite	. 143
Gout ....	151
Greediness	. 155
Grippe ....	. 153
Headache from Constipation	. 156
" from Dissipation anc	I
Loss of Sleep	. 156
" from Irritability o	f
the nervous System	i 157
Ilcuiicrania	. 182
Iliecup   .... page
Jaundico .
Kidneys, Inflammation of the
Liver, Inflammation of tho
Loins, Pain in the  .
Lumbago .
Mania a potu  .
Miscarriage, or Abortion
Night-Mare
Offensive Breath
Palpitation of the Heart
Rheumatism   .
Sciatica  .
Sleeplessness  .
Spasms
Stomach, Cramp of the  .  216,
Teething of Children
Toothache from  Congestion of
            Blood .
    "     from increased Sensi-
            bility of  the nerv-
            ous System .
Urinary Complaints
Vomiting from vitiated Stomach
    "    from Worms
Womb, falling of the
Worms.....
159
170
172
177
178
179
lilt
245
187
188
158
196
200
202
210
217
222

225
225
227
231
233
237
239
Opium.  White Poppy.   (Camph.,
   Calc carb., Hep. sulph.)
Amenorrhoea  .    .    .  page 46
Apoplexy.....56
Child-Birth, or Labor   .    .   44
Congestion of Blood to the Head
  from Fright ....   90
Constipation  ....   92
Diarrhoea from Fright   .    .107
Epilepsy.....120
Fainting.....132
Fright.....142
Headache from Constipation  .  157
Mania a potu ....  104
Night-Mare  .    .    .    .187
Palpitation  of the Heart.    .  158
Sleeplessness  ....  203
Spasms.....209
Sun-Stroke   .    .    .    .209

Petroleum.  Rock-Oil.  (Aconite,
   Nux vom.)
Frost-Bite    .    .    .  page 144

Phosphorus.  Phosphorus. (Cam-
   phora, Coffea, Nux  vom.)
Abscess  ....  page 43
Croup.....loo
Dropsy of the Feet and Hands 111 
TABULAR INDEX.
277
Erysipelatous Inflammation and
  Swelling of the Breasts, page 71
Grippe.....154
Lungs, Inflammation of the  .  181
Measles.....182

Phosphoric acid.  Phosphoric
   Acid.  (Camph., Coffea.)
Diarrhoea from Fright   . page 107
Fever, bilious and gastric     .  138
Grief and Sorrow   .    .    .  154
Self-Pollution  .     .    .    -189
Spasms.....212

Platina.  Platina.  (Pulsatilla.)
Amenorrhoea  .     .    .  page 46
Chlorosis, or Green Sickness  .  152
Psoricum.
Itch .
page 169
Pulsatilla.  Meadow Anemone.
   (Cham., Coffea, Ignat., Nux vom.)
Amenorrhoea  .    .    .   page 46
Anger   .    .    .    .    48, 49
Apoplexy.....56
Asthma.....58
Bleeding at the Nose    .    .   62
Breasts, gathered  ...   68
Catarrh.....78
Catarrhal Inflammation  of the
   Eyes  ....   125, 126
                               79
                               44
                              193
                              152
                               87
                               95
                               96
Cheeks, Swelling of the
Child-Birth
Childbed-Fever
Chlorosis ....
Cold in the Head
Colic from wet Feet.
  "  from Haemorrhoids .
  "  during Menstruation
  "  from Overloading the Sto
       mach  .
Constipation
Contusion of the Chest
Corns
Cough
Diarrhoea from Fright
     "    from disordered Sto
  mach
Disordered Stomach
Dysentery
Dysmenorrhoea
Earache  .
Ears, Inflammation of the
  "   Discharge from the
Eyes,  Inflammation of, from a
   Stye.....
Fatigue.....
 93
241
 94
100
107
108,  109
214,  215
  .   114
  .   115
  .   118
  .   119
  .   119
123
133
Fever, bilious and gastric, page 137
  "   milliary.    .    .    .139
Flatulency     .    .    .    .141
Frost-Bite     .    .    .    .143
Haemorrhage  ....  165
Headache from Constipation  .  157
    "    from Congestion  of
           Blood to the Head  156
Hemicrania   ....  183
Jaundice.....170
Kidneys, Inflammation of the  172
Leucorrhcea   ....  175
Liver, Inflammation of the   .  177
Lumbago .                    179
Measles.....182
Milk-Fever   .    .     .    .184
Offensive Breath   .     .    .  188
Palpitation of the Heart.     .  159
Rheumatism  .    .    .    .196
Sleeplessness  .... 202
Sore Throat   .    .    .    .205
 Spasms.....210
 Stomach, Cramp of the  .    . 217
 Toothache from Congestion  of
   Blood.....224
 Urinary Complaints.    .    .  227
 Varicose Veins    .    .    •  230
 Vomiting  from  Cramp of the
            Stomach    .     .  233
     "   from vitiated Stomach  231
     "   from Worms    .     .  233
 Weaning.....235
 Worms.....239
 Wounds.....240

 Rheum palmatum.  Rhubarb.
    (Camph., Cham., Nux vom.)
 Crying of Infants  .    .  page 102
 Diarrhoea  from Fright  .    .  107

 Rhus  toxicodendron.   Poison
    Oak. (Bellad., Bryonia, Camph.,
    Coffea, Sulp>hur.)
 Bruises   ....   page  73
 Corns.....94
 Crusta Lactea .    .   .    .185
 Erysipelas    ....  121
 Fatigue.....133
 Feet, Injuries of the    .    .   135
   "   Sweating of the  .    .  135
 Fever, milliary    .    .    •   140
 Frost-Bite    .   .    .    .144
  Gout.....149
  Loins, Pain in the .    .    .   178
  Lumbago.....179
  Milk-Fever   .   .    .    .184
  Rheumatism  ....   195
  Rins-Worm   .    .    .    .197 
27a
TABULAR  INDEX.
Scald-Head	. page 198
Sciatica .	. 200
Scrofulous Inflammation of the	
	. 127
Eyes	
Sore Throat	. 207
Sprains	. 212
Toothache from Cold	. 224
Varioloid .	. 229
Weaning .	. 235
Ruta gravcolens.	Garden Rue.
(Camph.)	
Bruises	. pago 73
Feet, Injuries of tho	. 135
Sabadilla.  (Camph., Puis.)
Tape-Worm   .     .    .  pago 221

Sabina.   Savine.  (Camph.)
Miscarriage, or Abortion .  page 245
Tape-Worm   .     .    .    .221
Uterine Hajmorrhago    .    .  166

Sambucus  nigTa.  Elder.  (Ar-
   senic, Camph.)
Cold in the Head   .    .   page 88
Fright.....142
Sudden Attacks  of Asthma in
  Children   ....   61

Sanguinaria canadensis Tinc-
   ture.  Blood-Root.  (Arsenic,
   Camph.)
Warts and Corns   .    .  page 235

Sarsaparilla.  (Camph.)
Scabs of the Face in Children,
                        page 130

Sccale  cornuturr.   Ergot  of
   Rye.   (Cam),}}., Opium.)
Labor, or Child-Birth   .  page 44.

Sepia succus.  Inky Juice of the
   Cuttle-Fish,  (Aeon.,  Vinegar.)
Amenorrhoea  .     .    .   page 47
Crusta Lactea ....  185
Dropsy of the Abdomen, or As-
  cites   .....112
Excoriations  ....  129
Fatigue.....133
Felon (Whitlow,  or Panaris)  .  140
Leucorrhcea, or Whites  .    .  175
Miscarriage, or Abortion .    .  245
Offensive Breath    .    .    .  188
Ring-Worm   ....  197
Urinary  Complaints     .    .  227
Womb, Falling of the   .    .  237
Silicea.   Silex.   (Cnmph.,  Hepar
   sulph.)
Abscess  ....  pa.^e 43
Erysipelatous Inaflnimation and
  Swelling of the Breasts    .   71
Excoriations  .    .     .    .12'.)
Felon (Whitlow or Panaris)   .  110
Urinary complaints .     .    .  227
Worms.....2:!U

Spigelia anthelmintica.   Pink-
   Root.  (Camph., Aurum,)
Dropsy of the Chest, or Hydro-
   thorax    .    .    .  page 113

Spongia marina tosta.   Burnt
   Sponge.   (Camph.)
Croup    ....  page 99
Gloitre    .   .    .     .    .151

Stannum.   Pure Tin.   (Coffea,
   Pulsatilla.)
Epilepsy     .    .    .  pago 120

Staphysagria-  Stavesacre.
   (Ambra, Camph.)
Anger    ....  page 49
Fever, bilious and gastric    .  138
Grief and Sorrow  .     .    .154
Scald-Hcad   ....  198
Spasms.....212
Stye.....124

Strammonium.   Thorn-Apple.
   (111 Iliul.,  Nux coin.)
Epilepsy .... page 120
Hydrophobia ....  163
Urinary Complaints.     .    .  227
Sulphur.   Brimstone.  (Aconite,
   Camph., Merc, Nux vom., Puis.)
Abscess .
Amenorrhoea  .
Anus, Itching of the
Apthac, or  Sore Mouth
Bowels, Inflammation of the  .
Catarrh .....
Catarrhal Inflammation of tho
   Eyes.....
Chlorosis or Green Sickness   .
Congestion of Blood to the Ab-
  domen .....92
Crusta Lactea .    .    .     .  ls5
Delirium Tremens .    .     .103
Diarrhoea.....106
Dropsy of  the Abdomen .     .  112
Earache (Otalgia) .    .     .  1)8
page 43
  .   47
  51, 52
  .   53
     77
     78
125
152 
TABULAR INDEX.
279
Eyes, Inflammation of, in new-
       born Children    .  page
  "   Inflammation of, from the
       Presence of foreign Bo-
       dies   ....
  "   Inflammation  of, from a
       Stye   ....
Excoriations   ....
Fever, milliary
Frost-Bite     ....
Headache from suppressed Per-
  spiration    ....
Itch......
Jaundice.....
Kidneys, Inflammation of  the
Leucorrhoea, or Whites  .
Offensive Breath
Pleurisy.....
Ring-Worm   ....
 Scabs of the Face in Children
 Scrofulous Inflammation of the
   Eyes.....
 Skin, Itching of the
 Specks on  the Eye  .
 Summer-Complaint, or Cholera
   Infantum   ....
 Tape-Worm   ....
 Ulcers on the Extremities
 Vaccination   .
 Varioloid.....
 Walk, Children learning to
 Worms.....
122
123

124
129
139
144

158
169
170
173
176
1S8
190
197
130

127
201
12S

  85
221
226
228
229
234
239
Sulphuric acid.
   (Pulsatilla.)
Disordered Stomach
Oil of Vitriol.

      page 215
Symphytum officinalis.  Com-
   PHREY.
Bruises   ....  page 73
Thuya occidentalis.  Tree of
   Life.  (Camph.)-
Frost-Bite     .    .    • page  143
Tinctura sulphuris.  (Aconite,
   Camph., Merc, Puis.)
Bloody Urine .    .    •   page 66
Boil, or Furunculus ...   66
Breasts, gathered   ...   69
Canker of the Mouth   .     .  185
Ears, Discharge from the (Otor-
  rhoea  .....  118
Frost-Bite     .    .    .    .143
Gout.....151
Itch......169
Measles.....182
Scald-Head    .    .    .    .198
Ulcers on the Extremities    .  226
Varicose Veins     .    .    .  230

Valeriana  officinalis. Valerian.
   (Bellad., Camph., Coffea.)
Anus,  Itching of the   .   page  52
Gout.....147
Tape-Worm   ....   221
Vomiting from Worms   .    .   232

Veratrum album.  White Helle-
    bore. (Aeon., Arsenic, Camph,,
    Coffea, China, Merc)
Amenorrhoea  .    .    .   page 47
Anger with  Fright              50
 Cholera  Asiatica
    "    Infantum .
    "    Morbus
 Cholerine....
 Diarrhoea from Fright
 Dysmenorrhoea
 Epilepsy ....
 Facial Neuralgia
 Fatigue  .
 Greediness
 Poisoning by Arsenic

 Viola tricolor.  Pansy.   (Camph.)
 Scabs of the Face in Children,
                          page 130

 Zincum metallicum. Pure Zinc.
     (Camph., Hepar sulph.)
 Epilepsy ....  page  120
 85
 87
107
115
120
131
133
155
 58 
 
A TREATISE
ON
ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY,
BY
W. P. ESREY, M. D.
WITH THIRTY ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
                 Anatomy and Physiology.
  The  growing  interest manifested in all classes to become
acquainted with the structure and formation of the human organ-
ism is sufficient excuse if any be needed for  the introduction of
some general  remarks on  anatomy and physiology into a work
of this  kind.   It is  indeed important that  those laymen who
occasionally prescribe for disease should have some acquaintance
with these  subjects, to enable them to discriminate with greater
accuracy between different morbid conditions, and to distinguish
really dangerous symptoms from those of but little consequence.
  No pretension is made to originality of matter in the prepa-
ration of this  treatise, but the  best standard text-books on the
subjects have  been freely consulted; and the chief aim has been
to condense into a small  compass as much useful matter as pos-
sible, though  from the very limited space  to be occupied, and
the wide field  to go over, the information on many points must
necessarily be  brief and imperfect.
  The subjects being very intimately allied—Anatomy being
the science which investigates  the structure and organization of
living beings,  Physiology the science which treats of the actions
or functions peculiar  to  living  organized beings while in health
—it has been thought best to consider them together, rather than
under  separate heads, as  is done in all  the more systematic
treatises.
  Comparative Anatomy treats of the structure of the  lower
orders of animals.
  Comparative Physiology considers the functions of the inferior
animals.
   Vegetable Physiology  treats  exclusively of plants.   It is  to
Human Anatomy and Physiology that this treatise will be  prin-
cipally devoted.
  The substances  in nature are divisible into two chief classes:
__the organized, or those which possess separate parts or organs 
2£4            ANATOMY AND  rilYSIOLOClY.

suited for the performance of certain actions  or functions,  and
the inorganic, or such as are without  this arrangement.   Tho
former includes animals  and vegetables, the  latter  the earths,
metals, &c.  All organized bodies have their origin from parents;
they must spring from beings like themselves, and they are con-
trolled by vitality, or the principle of life.  The several separate
organs have a mutual dependence on each other, and to preserve
the harmony of the whole,  the integrity of each part must be
preserved.
   Organized bodies have likewise a definite shape and size, and
an allotted time to  live  ; and after death they are decomposed,
and pass into the simple  combination of the inorganic elements.
   Inorganic bodies, on the contrary, do not spring from parents;
they are  not born;  but they have  their origin  in, and are
governed by certain fixed and invariable natural laws. The par-
ticles of which they consist are in a state of aggregation only.
And their growth, or increase of size, or change  of shape, takes
place by the accretion of matter to their surfaces.  The parts of
which an inorganic body is composed are all  alike in structure
and properties,  and may exist  as well  in detached portions,  or
when broken in pieces, as in large masses. And each body consists
wholly of matter, either  in the solid, liquid, or gaseous form.
   Organized bodies, on the other hand, are  always composed
of a combination of solids  and fluids;  they  differ in character
and properties, and are  arranged into  organs, so as to form of
the whole a  single  system.
   They also increase in  size by a process called nutrition, which
consists in imbibing substances from without, and changing them,
by means of internal organs, to their own nature.
   In respect to the chemical character of inorganic and organic
bodies, great difference  exists.   All the substances considered
elementary,  amounting to about sixty, are found in the mineral
 kingdom.   In  the  organized, only a few of these  elements are
 met with—about seventeen—and of these but four are considered
 essential, viz. carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, and nitrogen;  two of
 which, at least, will be  found in every organic compound.  The 
ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY.
285
other simple elements exist  in smaller quantities, and may  be
considered non-essential: they are, sulphur, phosphorus, chlorine,
sodium, calcium, potassium,  magnesium, silicon, aluminum, iron,
manganese, iodine, and bromium. The last two are found princi-
pally in marine  plants and  animals.  The composition of inor-
ganic bodies is more simple, some consisting of but one element;
and when composed of more the combination rarely exceeds three.
Organized bodies, on the contrary,  in most instances consist of
three or four elements;  the simplest vegetable consists of a
union of oxygen, carbon, and hydrogen; and the simplest animal
of oxygen, hydrogen, carbon, and nitrogen.
   As both animal and vegetables are included under the head
of organized bodies, it is necessary to point out some of the  dis-
tinctive characters between  these kingdoms.   Nutrition,  or  the
capacity of assimilating foreign matters to their own substance for
purposes of development and  growth, and reproduction, or the
power of  producing a living  being similar to themselves,  are
properties common to each.   Besides these there are other pro-
perties peculiar to animals, and  hence called animal properties
or functions.  These are sensation and voluntary motion.
   Though plants are not destitute of motion—their roots seeking
the most nutritious soil; the leaves and branches turning spon-
taneously to the light;  the  internal circulation of the sap;  and
some, as the sensitive plant, even seem to perform  movements
almost indicative of sensibility—yet these are quite different from
the motions of animals, not being the result of consciousness.
They result  from physical changes  produced  directly in  the
part of the plant touched,  and strictly organic;  and are indi-
cations  of irritability, but not of sensibility. A distinction is to
be made between these qualities. In the lower orders of animals,
indeed, the distinction is more difficult; naturalists having been
for a long time  undecided whether the zoophites—sponge, coral,
&c>—should  be considered as animals or vegetables.  They  are
as firmly attached to the soil as the latter, and like them receive
their nourishment from without.  Some species of plants, on the
other hand, as the Fucus natans, or  gulf weed, lives and fruc- 
286        ELEMENTARY COMPOSITION OF  MAN.

tines on the water, and are constantly borne about by the waves.
This motion, however, is very different from  that  of animals;
it is entirely passive.
  Animals likewise differ from vegetables very materially with
respect to nutrition.  In  the former a stomach is necessary, in
order to  receive the food, which is generally crude and unfitted
for  absorption, and  prepare it for the nutrition of the individual
by a process termed digestion.   The nourishment  of plants is
derived from inorganic substances, from the  excretions  of ani-
mals, and from decaying organic matter, while animals can only
be nourished by organized substances, either animal or vegetable.
The absorption of nutritive matters by the latter is from with-
out, by means of the roots; that of the former from within, by
vessels situated in the lining  membrane of the alimentary canal.
  Differences also exist in  the functions of reproduction; in the
animal, volition is required in almost every stage of the process;
in vegetables, on the contrary, the whole is effected without the
exercise of volition  or consciousness.
  The proportion of fluids to solids is, likewise, much greater in
animals than in vegetables,  which accounts for decomposition
taking place much sooner in the former than in the latter.
  All organized bodies are composed chiefly  of carbon, oxygen,
hydrogen, and  nitrogen, with alkaline and earthy salts.   Vege-
tables mostly consist of the three  first of these  elements,  and
nitrogen is combined with  them in the animal only.  Or, when
this latter element  is found in vegetables, it is in limited quan-
tity, and generally confined to one part.  It is this  difference of
composition  which gives to animal  substances  the peculiar smell
when burning by which they  are readily distinguished from vege-
tables.
             Elementary  Composition of Man.

  The human body is composed of fluids and  solids;  the blood,
chyle, lymph, and the various secretions constitute the former;
and the various textures, as the bones, muscles, viscera, &c., the
latter.  Water is one of the most important constituents of tho 
ELEMENTARY COMPOSITION OP  MAN.         287
human body; it is in large proportion in all the fluids, and also
in the solids, and gives to the latter softness and flexibility.
   The proportion of fluids is far greater than that of the solids,
being in the proportion of six or nine to one,  according  to  the
estimate of different observers, it  being exceedingly difficult to
arrive at an exact estimate. Chaussier found a dead body which
weighed one hundred  and twenty pounds; after being dried in
an oven, it weighed only twelve.  And a perfectly dry mummy in
the possession of Blumenbach, which contained all  the viscera,
weighed but seven pounds and a half.
   There exists in organic structures a class of compounds, called
proximate principles, or organic elements, which consist  of two
or more of the elementary substances, combined  in definite pro-
portions.
   The chief of these are : albumen, caseine, fibrine, gelatine, chon-
drine, elaine, stearine, margarine, haematosine, and globuline.
   Albumen.—Is  found  in two forms, fluid  and concrete;  the
former, which is met with in the white of egg, is colorless and
transparent, without smell  or  taste, and is coagulable by heat,
acids, and corrosive sublimate;  it is found in the blood, lymph,
and chyle. The latter, concrete  or solid albumen, is white, taste-
less  and elastic;  it is insoluble in water, alcohol, or oil, but
readily soluble in alkalies; it is found in the brain, spinal cord,
and  nerves,  and  in the  mucous membranes.   Hair,  nails and
horn, also, consist principally of albumen. It is one of the most
common of the  organic constituents.
   Caseine.—Exists abundantly in  milk,  and  is the basis of
cheese.  It may be obtained by allowing milk to remain  at rest
till it is coagulated,  taking off the  cream, then washing the clot
in water and drying it. It is readily coagulated by the action of
rennet; this is owing to the  pepsin  contained in the  latter.
Caseine is white, insipid, and inodorous, insoluble in water, but
readily soluble  in the alkalies, ammonia especially.  It contains
sulphur.  It has many properties analogous with albumen.
   Fibrine.—This principle exists in the chyle, lymph, and blood,
in solution;  it also forms  the  basis  of the muscles, where it is 
2^         ELEMENTARY COMPOSITION OF  MAN.

found in the solid form, and is one of the most abundant of tho
animal substances.   It  may  be obtained by beating blood with
a stick as it is flowing from a vein, or by washing a clot repeat-
edly in  clean water so  as to dissolve  out  the coloring matter.
  Fibrine  is solid, white, flexible, and slightly elastic, insipid,
inodorous, and  heavier  than water; it is insoluble in water, alco-
hol, and acids,  but soluble in caustic potassa.  Chemically speak-
ing, it does not differ essentially from albumen; the chief varia-
tion is  physiologically, in the spontaneous coagulation of the
fibrine ; in coagulating,  the fibres assume a definite arrangement,
crossing each other in  all directions.   It constitutes the buffy
coat of the blood.  In the reparation of injured parts it is thrown
out from the blood vessels as a secretion, and becomes organized.
It is often  called coagulable lymph under such circumstances.
   Gelatine.—Is the chief ingredient of the cellular tissue, skin,
tendons, cartilages, and  ligaments; it also enters  largely  into
the composition of bones.  It may be obtained by boiling any of
these substances for some time in water; clarifying the concen-
trated solution; allowing it to cool, and then drying  the sub-
stance obtained in the air. When dry and hard, it is called glue;
in a liquid form jelly.  Gelatine is soluble in hot water, in acids
and alkalies.   It  is insoluble in  cold  water, alcohol and ether,
and has a strong affinity for tannin.   The process of tanning
leather  results from the combination of tannin with gelatine.
The air-bags of fishes  consist  of pure gelatine, known as isin-
glass.   The  article known as portable  soup consists of dried
gelatine seasoned with spices.  Under the form of glue and sir:e.}
gelatine  is extensively  used in the arts,  its adhesive properties
rendering it  valuable.
    Chondrine.—Kesembles gelatine,  but does  not unite with
tannin,  and is precipitated by acetic acid, acetate of lead, alum,
and protosulphate of iron.  It is obtained by boiling  the carti-
lages, and allowing the solution to cool.
   Blaine, stearine, and margarine, are the proximate principles
of  fat.  The  first is fluid at ordinary temperatures; the second is
fluid, and is  the chief ingredient of vegetable  and  animal suet, 
ELEMENTARY COMPOSITION  OF MAN.        289
and of fat and butter; it is but sparingly present in human fat.
The third is of medium consistency.
  Hsematosine—Is the  red coloring matter of the blood, con-
tained in a capsule which is composed of globuline.
  There are other organic elements, called secondary organic
compounds, as  urea,  cholestrine, pepsine,  sugar  of milk, &c,
which are excretions of particular organs.  They will be treated
of under the head  of secretions.
  Of the inorganic, ultimate, or chemical elements it has been
already remarked  that oxygen, hydrogen, carbon, and  nitrogen,
are the most essential. Besides these there are phosphorus, lime,
sulphur,  iron, manganese, silicum,  chlorine, sodium, magne-
sium, &c.
   Oxygen—Is distributed throughout nearly all the solids and
fluids.  It is  indispensable to life, and  a supply is constantly
furnished from the atmosphere.  It is  mostly found combined
with other bodies,  often with carbon in the form of carbonic acid.
  Hydrogen —This gas is found universally distributed through-
out the animal kingdom.  It is contained in all the fluids and in
most of the solids, and is generally in combination with carbon.
It has been found pure in the  intestines, as well as combined
with carbon and sulphur.
   In the  form of  sulphuretted hydrogen gas, it has an offensive
smell.  The flatulence emitted from the intestines mostly consists
of this combination.
   Carbon.—Is met with  in  both fluids and solids in various
forms.  Generally it exists under the  form of carbonic acid.  It
is emitted by all  animals  in the act  of  expiration.  In animal
bodies  it mostly exists  in  combination  with alkalies, or earths,
though it has been found uncombined.
   Nitrogen.—Exists extensively in animal substances.  Its pre-
valence is so general that it frequently serves  as  a test  to dis-
tinguish them from vegetables.   It is this  principle that gives
to animal substances their peculiar smell when burning.
  Phosphorus—Occurs in combination with oxygen—phosphoric
add__in many animal substances, both  solids and fluids.  Com-
        37 
 290         ELEMENTARY COMPOSITION  OF MAN.

 bined with earthy matters this acid forms one of the chief ingre-
 dients of bones.  It is  likewise combined in  other parts with
 potassa, soda, ammonia,  and  magnesia.
   Calcium  or lime,  is  found in the state of oxide of lime only
 in  animals.   It is generally in  the  form of phosphate or car-
 bonate.  This earth  constitutes  the  hard parts  of animals, as
 bone, &c.
   Sulphur—Is sparingly met with in animal  fluids and solids,
 and is always combined with oxygen, and  united  to  lime, soda,
 or potash.   In the lower part of the  intestines, and  also as an
 exhalation from fetid ulcers, it  is met with in the form of sul-
 phuretted hydrogen gas.
   Iron—Is found in  the blood;  in bile and in  milk.  It is the
 coloring matter of the red globules of blood.
   Manganese.—This substance  has been found along with iron
 in the ashes of  the hair  in a state of oxide.
   Silicum.—Exists in the hair and urine.
   Chlorine.—Is contained in most of the animal fluids; it  is
 generally combined with hydrogen, forming muriatic acid which
 is united with soda.   Muriatic acid in a free state also exists in
 the stomach.
   Sodium.—As  an  oxide soda  is  found in  all of the fluids.
 It is  likewise united to albumen.  Most frequently, however, it
 is combined  with the phosphoric  and muriatic  acids; sometimes
 also with the lactic, sulphuric, and carbonic acid.
  Potassium—Is  likewise found in  animal fluids united with
 acids. It is,  however, more abundant in vegetables.
  Magnesium—Exists in the form of an oxide, magnesia, spar-
 ingly in the bones, and in some other parts.  It is always com-
 bined with phosphoric acid.
  Out of the proximate principles described, the various tissues
 of the human body are formed.   The  different solid parts are
 arranged in  a variety  of ways:  and of these the principal are in
filaments, or elementary fibres, tissues, organs, opparotusses, and
 systems. 
ELEMENTARY  COMPOSITION OF MAN.         291
  By a filament is understood the elementary solid, consisting
of minute particles  of matter arranged in a row.
  A fibre consists of a number of filaments united together and
enclosed in a sheath.
  By the term tissue is generally meant a particular arrangement
of fibres.
  Organs are formed by the union of tissues—the liver, stom-
ach, &c, are examples.
  An apparatus consists of the  union of several different organs
to accomplish one end—as  the  biliary apparatus, consisting of
the  liver, gall bladder, &c, all of which  aid  in the secretion of
food.
  A system is composed of a number of similar organs, united
for  one end—as the muscular or nervous system.

  Anatomists define a solid to be, a body the particles of which
adhere to each other, so that they will not separate by their own
weight,  but  require the application  of some external  force to
effect disunion.  And they likewise divide the various  solids of
which the human body is composed, into the following varieties,
viz. bone, cartilage, muscle, ligament, vessel,  nerve, ganglion,
follicle, gland, membrane, cellular membrane, and viscus.
  Bone.—This  is the hardest of the solids,  and forms the ske-
leton, serving as a protection to various  important  organs  and
for  attachments to muscles.
   Cartilage.—Ranks next to bone in hardness;  it is white and
elastic, covers the articulating extremities of bone  to facilitate
their movements; it serves also in some cases,  as in the ribs, to
prolong the bones; in the foetus it is a substitute for bone
There are several varieties of cartilage.
  Muscles.—What is called flesh in animals consists of muscles.
They are the agents of all  movements,  and  are composed of
bundles of red  and contractile  fibres, extending  from one bone
to another.
    Ligaments.—Are cords  or  bands, exceedingly  tough  and
difficult to tear.  They serve to connect different parts to each 
202        ELEMENTARY COMPOSITION OF  MAN.

other, as the bones and muscles. By some they are divided into
two varieties—those which connect the joints, and those attached
to the muscles,—the tendons and aponeuroses.
   Vessels.—These are in the form of canals or tubes, and servo
to carry on the circulation of the various fluids.  Aud are called
sanguineous, chyliferous, lymphatic, &c, according to the nature
of the fluid  they carry.
   Nerves.—The nerves are  solid cords  consisting of numerous
fasciculi or bundles.  They are  connected with the brain, spinal
marrow,  or  great sympathetic, and their function is to convey
impressions  to the nervous centres; and to endow each part with
vitality.  There are two chief divisions of nerves—those of the
brain and spinal marrow, and the organic or great sympathetic.
   Ganglions.—A ganglion  is a knot situated in the course of a
nerve and formed apparently by an interlacing of filaments. The
term is likewise  applied  to a  similar interlacing of lymphatic
vessels.
   Follicles or crypts.—Are  small  membranous  vesicles seated
in the substance of the skin or  mucous membrane.
   Their office  is to secrete a fluid to lubricate these parts.  It is
the secretion from these follicles chiefly that keeps the skin soft,
and gives to it its oily character.
   Glands.—Are likewise secretory organs, but differ from the
follicle—their organization being more complicated.  The liver,
for instance, is a gland, and its office the secretion of bile.  The
glands of the  human body are numerous and diversified in their
character.
   Membrane.—The membrane is formed by the cellular tissue,
and is one of  the most  important  and  extensive substances of
the body.  It is spread out  like a web, and serves to form, sup-
port, and envelope all the organs, to line the cavities and reser-
voirs. It is divided into simple and compound. The simple being
again subdivided into  three varieties, viz. the serous, mucous,
and fibrous.   The first of these, the serous, form all the sacs or
closed cavities of the body—as  those of the chest and abdomen.
The compound membranes are  formed by the union of the sim- 
ELEMENTARY  COMPOSITION OF  MAN.         293
pie, and are divided  into fibro-serous, sero-mucous,  and fibro-
mucous.  The pericardium is an example of the first of these;
the gall-bladder of the second;  and the ureter of the third.
   Cellular  or  laminated  tissue.—This is a kind of  spongy or
areolar  structure, which encloses all the solids, fills up the spaces
between them, serving at the same  time as  a bond of union
and a medium of  separation.   It will be  more  fully described
presently.
   Viscus.—The name viscus  is given  to those solids which are
the most complicated, both  as regards texture and  use.  The
brain, lungs, liver, &c., are examples.

   The  tissues have been variously classified : the classification
of Holler, which reduces them to three primary ones, has been
very generally adopted by anatomists and physiologists.  These
are the cellular or areolar, the muscular, and the nervous,  out
of which all the organs are formed, either from  the  first alone,
or by the union of the last two.
   1.  The cellular or areolar tissue.—This  tissue is the most
simple  and  abundant of the solids;  it exists in all organized
beings, and is an element in every solid, with the exception per-
haps  of the enamel of the teeth, where it has not as yet been
detected.  It is formed  by the interlacing and  crossing of nu-
merous fibres or  bands, of a  delicate whitish  color, so as to
leave numerous  interstices,  or areola,  which communicate with
each other.  A proof of this is furnished in anasarca or general
dropsy, where  the excess of fluid passes  readily from  one part
to another;  and by pressing with the finger,  the fluid is forced
into adjoining parts of the membrane, and a pit is formed which
gradually disappears again on removing the pressure.  They may
also be filled with air, as occurs occasionally in the disease called
emphysema; and it is a knowledge  of this fact that enables
butchers to inflate or blow their meat, to give to it a fat appear-
ance.  This membrane possesses elasticity and extensibility, but
not much vitality; it is composed chiefly of gelatine.  During
life the interstices are filled with a dilute serous or watery fluid, 
 294         ELEMENTARY  COMPOSITION OF  MAN.

 which passes from  the blood-vessels.   It  is the excess  of this
 fluid  caused  by disease  that constitutes  anasarca  or general
 dropsy.
   2.  Muscular tissue—Consists of an arrangement of exceed-
 ingly minute fibres or filaments of a peculiar substance.   These
 fibres are arranged in parallel layers in all the voluntary muscles
 and a few others; in  the involuntary, including those  of the
 alimentary canal, bladder, uterus, tY.e., they interlace.  They are
 soft, of a grayish or reddish color, and possessed of contractibil-
 ity or irritability, that is, they move responsive to chemical and
 mechanical irritants.  They  are composed principally of fibrine.
   Nervous tissues.—This tissue or fibre is of a pulpy consistence ;
 it is composed essentially of albumen united to a fatty matter,
 and is the organ of sensibility, or for receiving and conveying
 impressions to the mind.  The brain, nerves, &c, are composed
 of it, and it is not near so generally distributed as the preceding.
 The ultimate nervous fibre or filament is  said to be ten  or twelve
times larger than that of muscle.
   These  three varieties of tissues or fibres, by uniting in dif-
 ferent proportion, from the  first order of solids;  and these again
 by union constitute compound tissues, out of which  the various
 organs,  glands,  bones,  &c, are formed.   Thus,  for instance, a
 bone is composed of several tissues, the body being osseous, the
 interior nervous, the extremities cartilaginous, and  the exterior
fibrous.
   The primary form taken by organic matter,  as it passes from
 the state of a proximate principle to that of an organized struc-
 ture, appears to  be a cell;  this cell contains another within it,
 called  nucleus, which  again  contains a granular body,  called
 nucleolus.  Almost all the  organic tissues, however unlike, are
in the embryo composed of cells which are afterwards developed
 by a vital process into the  various structures that make up the
 perfect being.  Cells in great numbers are  found floating in the
 blood,  chyle and lymph, and their development goes on during
 the life of the organism.
   Physical and vitalproperties of the tissues.—The  tissues pre- 
             ELEMENTARY COMPOSITION OF MAN.         295

sent striking differences, as well in their properties, as in their
anatomical arrangement.   These properties  are divided into phy-
sical and vital.  The physical  belong as well to the dead as to
the living  tissue, and are dependent altogether on  the particular
arrangement or mode of cohesion  of  their constituent  particles
and their chemical composition. The  vital properties  are those
which belong exclusively to  the living  organism, and  which
terminate with organic life.
   The most marked of the physical  properties  are : elasticity,
flexibility, extensibility, and porosity.
   Elasticity is that power by which a tissue reacts  after the
withdrawal of an extending or compressing force. It is manifested
in the yellow ligament, in the  middle coat of the arteries, and
in the cartilages of the ribs, and the articular faces of the bones.
   Extensibility. — Tissues may  be  extensible without being
elastic;  those which are   so yield only to  long continued pres-
sure ; an example of this is furnished  in the resistance of fibrous
membranes to the growth  of a tumour.
   Flexibility, or the capability  of being bent, is witnessed in the
white fibrous  tissues, which are flexible, and not elastic nor ex-
tensible. The  tendons are examples.
   Porosity.—The tissues  even after  death  are porous, that is,
 they are  permeable  by  watery fluids.  This  property is  also
 termed imbibition.  The softness of tissues  is owing to the watery
 fluids which fill  their pores.
   The vital properties of tissues.—These properties which belong
 only to  organic life, manifest themselves  by a change of their
 molecules or elementary constituents, from the  application of  a
 stimulus.  This change may take place directly, with  a  visible
 alteration of the tissue impressed, or indirectly through the inter-
 vention of some other organ or tissue with which the  impressed
 tissue may be in connection.
   There are two  tissues  which have these properties, viz. the
 muscular  and the nervous.  In nerves  it  is manifested in three
 ways :  1) by causiug contraction  in the muscle supplied by it;
 2) by inducing contraction in muscles not supplied by it, through 
296
OF THE BONES.
a change  in  the nervous centres with which it  is connected;
3) by exciting sensation.
  When seated in muscle it is called contractility, and is charac-
teristic of that tissue.  Hence there are two vital  properties,—
sensibility and contractility—the first, seated in the nervous tis-
sue, the second in the muscular. Vegetables having no nervous
system cannot be sensible,  as  this property requires a brain, a
particular part of the nervous system, for its exercise.  The only
vital property, therefore, which belongs both to animals and vege-
tables is better expressed by the term excitability or irritability.
Plants are not sensible; being without consciousness,  they are
irritable.  Muscles, when removed from  the  body, are likewise
irritable, and not sensible.  Physiologists have variously termed
this one  vital prtpcrty, irritability,  excitability, contractility,
or incitability.
                        Of the Bones.

   Anatomists generally reckon two hundred and eleven  bones
in the human skeleton, though the number  varies, they being
more numerous  in youth than in old age;  some bones which in
the young consist of several pieces, as life advances become united
by  the ossification of the intervening cartilages.  Bones are of a
dull white  color, hard, and inflexible; by boiling and proper
preparation they  may be made of an ivory whiteness ; when held
together  by  their natural connection of ligaments and  cartilages
they form a natural  skeleton;  when joined by wires,  or other
means, an artificial skeleton.
  The regional division of the  skeleton is into  the head, trunk,
the superior, and the inferior  extremities.  Twenty-two  bones
belong to the head, fifty-six to the trunk, sixty-nine to  the supe-
rior, and sixty-four to the inferior extremities.
  The bones are  classified as long, thick and flat bones, and are
either symmetrical,  that is, they consist of two lateral portions
exactly alike; or else are in pairs, which have a perfect  corre-
spondence with each other.
  The symmetrical bones are, the frontal, occipital, sphenoidal, 
OF THE BONES.
297
ethmoidal, vomer, inferior maxillary, hyoid, the spinal, and the
sternal;  all of these  are  placed in the middle verticle line of
the body. The pairs are situated on both sides of the middle line.
   The long  bones are generally cylindrical or  prismatic; the
shaft of a long bone is called dyaphysis; its extremities, which
are generally enlarged for the purposes  of articulating with other
bones, epiphyses.
   The eminences and projections  on  the surfaces of bones are
called apophyses;  they are numerous, and  serve for the origin
and insertion of muscles, and for articular faces.
   The small foramina, or holes, on the surfaces of bones serve
for the transmission of blood-vessels; the largest is mostly about
the middle.
    Structure of bones.—The density  of bones, though always
 considerable, and greatly exceeding that of any other part of the
 body, is variable;  being different in different  bones, and also in
 the same bone.  This has  led  to the division  of their substance
 into compact and cellular, the former being external, the latter
 internal.  The cellular structure grows from  the  inner surface
 of the compact, and is composed of filaments  and small lamina,
 or plates, radiating in every direction.  The cells resulting from
 this arrangement communicate with  each  other,  and are  filled
 with marrow.  This structure  increases the strength without in-
 creasing the weight, and also diminishes the effect of concussion,
 as a fall, blow, &c.
    Development of bones.—-In the development of bones  three
 stages of ossification are apparent in the embryo.  The first is the
 mucous or pulpy stage, which continues for one month; the second
 is the cartilaginous, and the third the osseous which commences
 about the third month.   Up  to this  period  the vessels convey
 lymph  only;  subsequently they convey red  blood  to a central
  point (point of ossification), and there is a deposit of calcareous
  particles.   Most of the bones are formed of several pieces,  for
  each of which there is a distinct  point or  centre of ossification.
  These  pieces  gradually coalesce and  form  one bone.  Bones  in-
  crease  in length by continued deposit at their  extremities between
          38 
298                   OF  THE  BONIS.

the diaphysis and epiphysis, and  in thickness by external deposit
and by secretion from the periosteum.  The latter is proved  by
the experiment of feeding a  young  pig  on  food colored with
madder.  By suspending and resuming this  mode  of feeding,
alternate lamina of white and  colored bone will be produced.
   Composition of bones.—All  the bones are composed of the same
elementary  constituents; the  relative proportion of these con-
stituents, however, is not always  the same.  They consist of
earthy and  animal matters, united  generally in the proportion
of two parts of earthy to one of  animal. Or according to minute
chemical analysis they are composed of 32 parts of gelatine, 1 part
of insoluble animal matter, 51 parts of phosphate of lime, 11 of
carbonate of lime, 2 of fluate of lime,  1  of phosphate of mag-
 nesia, and 1 of soda and muriate of soda.
   The earthy matter is most  abundant in the bones of the head;
 the animal matter in  the  cellular structure.  In advanced age,
 and in some  forms of disease, the proportion of earthy matter is
 also increased.
    The animal matter may be removed by combustion,  and the
 bone will then  be quite white  and friable; the original form,
 however, will be preserved. Immersing a bone in dilute  acid will
 remove the  earthy matters, owing to their strong affinity for
 acids;  in  this  state the animal part remaining is cartilaginous,
 flexible, and elastic.
    Periosteum.—The periosteum is a dense, white, fibrous mem-
  brane, which covers the surface of the  bones; it adheres  with
  less tenacity in infancy than  in adult age. In old age it becomes
  ossified;  it  is  vascular,  and possesses but  little  sensibility in
  health; its  office is  to  assist in the secretion of the external
  laminae of bone; to protect it against suppuration in the vicin-
  ity, restrain  the  deposit of  bone within proper limits,  receive
  the insertion of muscles, tendons, &c.
    The delicate vascular membrane, lining  the cells, canals and
  cavities of bone is termed the internal periosteum.  It  contains
   marrow, a substance resembling fat, but of finer consistence.  In
   protracted chronic diseases the marrow is absorbed and its  place 
BONES OF THE TRUNK.
299
supplied with serum.  It, therefore, would seem to be like fat—
a reservoir of nutriment.
  Bones  are  supplied with arteries,  veins,  lymphatics, and
nerves.
  Formation of callus.—After a bone  is fractured, nature sets
to work to repair the injury, and the development of the medium
of union, called  callus, somewhat resembles the primitive forma-
tion of bone.   From  the vessels  ruptured about the seat of the
injury blood is at first effused; this is gradually absorbed, and
meanwhile coagulating lymph is effused.  This coagulates and
ossifies in the form of  a ring around the broken bone, the thickest
part being directly over the seat of the fracture; and also in the
form of a pin in the interior of the bone. The extremities of the
broken  bone now begin to unite or knit together,  and after this
is effected, the superfluous bony matter  (the ring and pin) being
no  longer of any service, are absorbed.  They act merely as
splints.  It is of the utmost importance that the parts be kept
at rest whilst this process is going on, otherwise the ossification
may be arrested, and  a crooked limb, or  even a false joint, result.

                    Bones of the Trunk.
   The trunk is formed by the spine,  the thorax and the pelvis.
   The  spine.—The spine extends from the head to  the lower
part of the pelvis at the posterior part of the trunk. It is formed
of 28 or 29 distinct  bones called vertebrae, and contains a bony
canal for the spinal marrow.  It has several curves; in the neck
it is convex anteriorly, and concave behind;  in the thorax con-
cave anteriorly and convex behind; in  the loins convex in front
and concave behind; and in the pelvis concave  in  front and
convex behind.   Of the 28 or 29 pieces of which  it consists, 24
are considered as true vertebrae on account of their mobility, and
the remainder—5—not being movable, are called false vertebrae.
They  are  divided into 7  for the neck, called cervical; 12  to
the thorax, called  dorsal; and 5  to the loins, called lumbar;
the false and the sacrum, and 3 or 4 coccygeal bones, situated at
the inferior extremity of the column. 
300
BONES OF THE TRUNK.
   A vertebrae consists of a body, 7 processes or extremities, and
a canal or foramen for the  reception of the spinal cord.   Tho
body is in front, and  in shape is somewhat ovoid;  it is convex
anteriorly, and concave behind;  its surfaces  above and  below,
articulate with a contiguous vertebrae by means of a cartilage,
and it  is the thickest  part.
   The processes, or extremities, are four oblique, which articu-
late with corresponding ones from the vertebrae above and below;
two transverse, one projecting on either side  from between the
oblique processes, and which serve  for  the  attachment of mus-
cles and ligaments; and one spinous process,  which is placed in
the middle of the bone behind, and which also serves for  the
attachment of muscles.
   Cervical vertebrae.—The first of these is called the atlas, on
account of its  supporting the head;  it has no body, but presents
the appearance of a large irregular ring, thickest at the sides. In
place of a body it is supplied with a bony arch which is occupied
by the processus dentatus of the second vertebrae.  The oblique
processes are peculiar, the two above are large, oblong and con-
cave, to  suit  the condyloid  processes of the occipital bone with
which  they articulate.  The  two lower ones are round, flat, and
horizontal, adapted to the rotary motion of  the head.
   The second is called dentata, from its tooth-like process pro-
jecting from the upper surface of the body.  The head rotates
on this process, which is kept in its place by the transverse liga-
ment of the neck—an exceedingly strong ligament extending
across  the  atlas and attached to a tubercle on each side of that
bone.  This process is smooth in front where it touches the arch
of the  atlas, and likewise behind where the transverse ligament
plays.  The spinous process  is long and forked.
   The remainder of the cervical vertebrae, except the last, do not
require special description;  their bodies  are small, flattened in
front, and gradually increase in size as they descend. The spinous
processes are short, thick, horizontal, and bifed or forked.  The
oblique processes are flat, oval, and  short.  The transverse pro-
cesses  are broad, and have a foramen at their base for the pas- 
BONES OF THE TRUNK.
301
sage of the vertebral artery.   The  foramen for the spinal cord
is very large.
  The spinous process of the  sixth vertebras is long and termin-
ated by a sharp point.  The seventh is the largest and looks like
a dorsal vertebrae; its body is larger than that of the others, and
its spinous process is the longest of all, and  is not bifurcated,
but terminates by a rounded tubercle easily felt under  the skin.
The foramen at the base of the transverse processes is too small
to receive the vertebral vessels.
  Dorsal vertebrae.—The dorsal vertebrae situated intermediate
between the neck  and loins, are also inferior in point of size.
They are 12 in number.  Their bodies are cylindrical, their trans-
verse diameter decreases from the first to the third,   and then
regularly decreases to  the last. They have articular marks on
the sides for the  heads of the ribs.   These marks or pits, except
in the first and the eleventh  and  twelfth,  are  each formed by
two contiguous vertebrae.  The first has a complete  pit in its
side for  the head df the rib.   The  eleventh and twelfth  have also
complete fossae or pits  for the ribs.  The  oblique  processes are
vertical, the two  upper looking backward, and the  two lower for-
ward.  The  transverse processes are long and terminate in an
enlarged extremity, which has an articular face in front  for the
tubercle of the rib.  The spinous processes are long, triangular,
and  broad  at the  base,  sharp-pointed,  somewhat rough  and
swollen  at the extremities, and overlap each other.
   Lumbar vertebrae.—These are five in number.   Their bodies
are larger than those of the other  true vertebrae, oval, and have
the  transverse diameter the longest.  The spinal foramen is tri-
angular, and larger than in the dorsal vertebrae. The groves for
the nerves to pass out are likewise large.  The oblique processes
are  vertical;  the superior looking  inwards and the inferior look-
ing outwards. The transverse processes are very long,  and stand
 out  at  right angles.  The spinous processes are short, thick,
 quadrangular, horizontal, and terminate by an oblong tubercle.
 The lumbar  vertebras  increase in size  successively—the first  is
 the smallest, and the fifth the largest;  the body of the latter  is 
302
BONES OF THE Till NK.
also wedge-shaped.  The third has the longest transverse and
spinous processes.
   Sacrum.—The  os sacrum  is much  the largest bone in the
spinal column.  It forms  the  upper and posterior boundary of
the pelvis;  it is triangular in shape,  with the base above, and
originally consist  of five  bones,  bearing  a strong resemblance
to vertebrae; hence  they received the name of false vertebrae;
The anterior face of this bone  is smooth and concave, and has
four  holes on  each side, which  communicate with the spinal
cavity and transmit the anterior branches of the sacral nerves.
Its posterior face is convex and rough, and is equally divided by
its spinous processes.   The marks of  the  original  separation of
this bone are evident, particularly on its front surface.  The base
has an articular mark to receive the last lumbar vertebrae: the
apex is below and  has an articular surface for the coccyx.  The
sacral canal, a continuation of the  spinal,  runs through the
length of the  sacrum.  The portion of the spinal cord lodged
within it is called the cauda equina,  from its fancied resemblance
to a horse's tail.
   Coccyx.—The coccyx, like the sacrum, is triangular; it has
its base upwards, and is flat.  It consists of three  or four bones
united in the same curve as that of  the sacrum.  These pieces as
life advances become joined together by bone, and  also joined to
the sacrum;  so that all the false vertebrae, from the base of the
sacrum to the point of the coccyx, are united into a single bone.
The coccyx forms the lower extremity of the spinal column, and
corresponds  with the tails of animals.
  The vertebral column affords a secure lodgment  to the spinal
marrow,  is a line of support to  the trunk in every  position, and
is the centre  of all its movements.  In the  erect posture, the
spine also supports the head.
  The motions  of  the spine are, flexion or bending forward ex-
tension or bending  backward, lateral bending and circumduction,
or that motion  in which the trunk is caused  to describe a cone,
the base of which is above,  and  the apex below.
  The first  of  these  motions, flexion, is the most  extensive; it 
BONES OF  THE TRUNK.                303
is produced mainly by the action of the abdominal muscles.  In
this position the inter-vertebral, elastic, cartilages are compressed
in front, and thickened behind, the anterior vertebral ligament
is relaxed, and the posterior vertebral ligament correspondingly
tense.
   Extension or backward bending is very limited, owing to the
mechanical obstruction offered by the spinous processes  of  the
back and  neck, which are very near to and overlap each other.
The abdominal  muscles also strongly  resist it.  The muscles,
arising either from the back of the pelvis or from the transverse
processes,  and going upwards to be inserted either into the ribs,
the transverse or spinous processes, which produce this  motion,
act  less advantageously than do the abdominal muscles in pro-
ducing flexion; the leverage in the latter case being much more
favorable.
   The lateral inclination of the spine is  considerable, it is
favored by the advantageous position of  the muscles on  the
side of the neck and trunk, as well as by the mechanical arrange-
ment of the parts; the  transverse  processes being so far apart
as scarcely to offer any resistance. The principal obstruction is
presented  by the ribs, which strike against  each other when  this
motion is  carried  too far.
   Circumduction is performed chiefly  on the lower  dorsal  and
 the lumbar vertebrae, and  is a  succession of the movements
 above described.
   The rotation of  the  spine is  very limited; it is  performed
 chiefly on the lower dorsal and upper lumbar vertebrae, and con-
 sists of a  series of oblique motions of the  body of one vertebrae
 upon  another.  In old age, when the  inter-vertebral substance
 has become hardened, it is almost inappreciable.
   The rotation of the head is effected by the motion of the atlas
 upon the dentata, which is  the only motion allowed to this  ver-
 tebrae, flexion and rotation being prevented by the confinement
 of the  transverse  ligament behind, and by the anterior bridge of
 bone in front.  The flatness of the articular surfaces of the two
 bones likewise prevent any lateral motion. 
304
BONES OF  THE TRUNK.
  pch-is.—The, bones of the pelvis are the sacrum, the coccyx,
and the two innominate or hip bones; the two first, which form
the posterior boundary, have already been described.
  Innominatum.—The innominatum is a large flat bone, and
is the  hip or haunch bone of common language;  it has  some
resemblance  to  the  figure 8.  From having originally consisted
of three pieces, though  these  pieces unite in the cavity of the
hip joint (acetabulum), and in the adult leave but a slight trace
of their former  distinction, anatomists  divide the innominatum
into the ilium, ischium, and pubes.
  Ilium.—This is the largest of the three pieces, and forms the
upper rounded part of the innominatum, or the wall of the upper
pelvis. It is the hip bone. Externally its surface is convex and
rough, with a semi-circular ridge  crossing it; the glutei muscles
arise from this surface.  Internally it is concave;  the  anterior
portion is smooth and gives origin to the iliacus internus muscle;
the posterior is  rough  and articulates with the sacrum, behind
which  arise muscles and ligaments.  The margin, called the crista
or spine of the  ilium,  is curved and  somewhat resembles the
italic f.   In front of the crista there are two eminences or pro-
jections,  one of which is called the anterior  superior spinous
process, and the other the anterior inferior spinous process; the
former gives origin  to  the sartorius and  tensor vaginae muscles
and Poupart's ligament;  the latter to the rectus  muscle; the
cavity  between the two  gives origin  to  the  gluteus medius.   A
large prominence called ilio-pectineal is situated below these pro-
cesses ; in a groove above  this,  the iliacus internus and psoas
magnus pass.
  The posterior margin of  the ilium is marked by two projec-
tions   called  posterior superior,  and posterior inferior  spinous
processes.  Just  below the latter there is a deep excavation called
sciatic notch, through which the pyriform  muscle, the sciatic
nerve, and several blood-vessels pass out.  The crista has three
lips, the internal of which gives origin to the transversalis muscle,
the middle to  the  internal  oblique, and into  the external the
external oblique is inserted. 
BONES OF THE TRUNK.
305
  Ischium.—This portion of the innominatum is the most in-
ferior and is the next in size to the ilium;  it consists of a body
and ramus or branch. The external surface of the body is rough;
the internal surface is smooth, and is called the plane of  the
ischium.  On the posterior margin  there  is a projection called
the spine, into which the lesser sacro-sciatic ligament is inserted;
beneath the spine there is a groove in which the tendon of the
obturator  internus muscle plays.  The inferior portion  of the
body is called the tuberosity of the  ischium; it gives origin to
the  biceps adductor, semi - membranosus and semi - tendinosus
muscles;  in  front there is a long ridge into  which the great
sacro-sciatic ligament is inserted. The ramus is short and thick,
and ascends forward and inward to join the ramus of the pubes,
and form a part of the pubic arch;  it is rough externally, and
smooth internally; the crus of the penis arises from the latter face.
   Pubis.—This bone is much the smallest of the three, and con-
stitutes the anterior boundary of the pelvis.   It consists of a
body and two branches, one of which runs downwards to join
the ischium, and the other backwards and upwards  to join the
ilium.  The body is joined to its fellow by a flat surface, called
the symphysis; the  superior portion of the body is horizontal
at right angles with the symphysis, and is bounded outwardly
by a projection, called the spinous process.  From this process
two ridges proceed outwardly; the posterior, is called the crista
of  the pubes, or linea pectinea, and to  it is attached a part of
Poupart's ligament.  Between these two ridges is a triangular
space from which the pectineus muscle arises, and  over  which
the femoral vessels pass.   The extremity of the superior ramus
is triangular, and much enlarged where  it contributes to form the
acetabulum, a hemispherical concavity for  the articulation of the
femur.  At the bottom of this cavity there is a rough depres-
sion occupied by a mass of fat generally called a gland of Havers.
The obturator  or thyroid foramen is the  large opening in the
lower part of the bone.   In shape it is mostly oval; it is filled
up, with the exception of a groove in the upper  part to transmit
the obturator vessels and nerve, by a membranous ligament.
        39 
306
BONES OF THE TRUNK.
   As a whole, the pelvis is a conoidal cavity, having  its base
above, and  its apex  below.  Internally it  forms an  irregular
floor for the support, in the erect position, of the abdominal vis-
cera.  Externally its projections furnish favorable points for the
attachment  of muscles.   There  are  marked differences in the
male and  female pelvis.   The diameters of the latter are larger,
and the depth less than in the male.   The, arch as it is called,
under the symphysis pubis, is regularly rounded in females; in
males, on  the contrary, it is  merely an acute angle. The sacrum
also, in women is shorter, more concave, and of greater breadth.
                          Thorax.
   The thorax is the upper  part  of the trunk, and in  shape is
conoidal, flattened  in front, and concave behind ;  it is formed by
the dorsal vertebra; behind, by the sternum in front, and at the
intermediate spaces by the ribs.
   The superior part, or apex, of the cone presents a heart-shaped
opening, and is much smaller than the  base;  the latter has a
large notch in front, into which  the lower end  of the  sternum
projects.
               Fig, i#                   Fig. 1.  A representation of
           -aT                      the thorax;  1, 2, 3  bones of
                                     the sternum;  4, 5  first and
                                     last dorsal vertebrae; 6,10 an-
                                     gle of ribs;  11 cartilages.
                                       Sternum.—This  bone
                                     is placed  in the  middle
                                     and front of the  thorax,
                                     and is oblong and  slightly
                                     curved;   its direction is
                                     also slanting,  the lower
                                     part receding much  far-
                                     ther from the spine than
                                     the upper. The concavity
                                     is in front.  In the  adult
                                     it is usually composed of 3
                                     pieces; an upper, middle,
                                     and lower, which are held
                                     together by cartilages and
                                     ligaments. Frequently in
 
BONES OF  THE TRUNK.
307
advanced life these pieces  are fused together and form but one
bone.
   The first or upper bone  is the  thickest, and has an irregular
square  figure;  the upper margin  projects  somewhat, and  is
slightly scooped  out.   On each  side are marks for articulating
with the clavicle, and first and second ribs.
   The second or middle bone is  longer and narrower than the
first; the lower part  increases somewhat in  breadth, and then
terminates  by being rounded off on  either side.   The sides  of
this piece present pits for  the articulation of part of the second,
the third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and part of the seventh ribs.
   The third bone of the sternum in young persons is very often
wholly cartilaginous,   and is called  the  zyphoid or  ensiform
(sword-shaped)  cartilage.   It is  thin, and varies very materially
in shape  in  different  individuals.   The extremity is  mostly
pointed, and inclined slightly forwards; sometimes it is forked,
and sometimes also turned backwards.
   Ribs.—There are twenty-four ribs in  all, twelve on  either
side;  the upper seven, from their cartilages articulating with the
sternum are called the  sternal or true  ribs; the lower five in
consequence of  their  cartilages  stopping  short of the sternum
 are called false ribs.
   In some rare  cases there have been eleven or thirteen ribs on
 a side.
   The ribs are  parallel, and directed obliquely downwards and
 forwards;  each having a  parabolic  curve, and gradually increas-
 ing in size to  the eighth, and afterwards gradually diminishing.
 The surface of each rib is convex externally, and concave inter-
 nally; the anterior or sternal extremity is larger and flatter than
 the posterior; the vertebral  or posterior extremity of the rib is
 its head, and presents two articular surfaces separated by a ridge.
 Surrounding the head the rib is very narrow, and called the neck.
 Near the  vertebral extremity is an oblique ridge caused by the
 insertion  of the sacro-lumbalis muscle; just at this  line a curve,
 somewhat abrupt, takes place, which is the angle of the rib.
    The upper margins of the ribs  are rounded, and  somewhat 
308
BONES OF THE TRUNK.
 rough for the insertion of the intercostal muscles;  the inferior
 margins have a thin cutting edge, just with and above which  is
 a groove running two-thirds of  their length, which contains the
 intercostal vessels  and nerve.   Each rib  is twisted  and bent,
 the spinal extremity being directed upwards, and the sternal ex-
 tremity downwards.   About an inch from  the head of each rib
 is a tubercle, or prominence, for articulating with the  transverse
 processes of the vertebrae; just beyond this is a smaller tubercle
 for the insertion  of the external transverse  ligament.
   The first rib is small, and more circular than the other; it  is
 flat above and below.
   The eleventh and twelfth are not connected  with the  others,
 and are thence called floating ribs; they  have  no tubercles, and
 but one articular surface on the head.
   The thorax performs two important offices in the human eco-
 nomy—first it protects the organs of circulation and respiration,
 and second, it assists in the function of respiration. Its structure
 affords a very secure defence to its viscera, from tha effect  of
 blows  on the outside.   Posteriorly the spinal  column, and the
 masses of longitudinal muscles which fill  up the gutters on each
 side of the spinous processes  furnish, ample  protection.  In front
 the protection  is less  secure, in consequence  of the  sternum
 being placed immediately under the skin. The effects of  blows,
 however, on this  part are much  diminished  by the  elasticity of
 the cartilages, and by the oblique downward direction  of the
 ribs themselves;  both  of  which circumstances  dispose  the ster-
 num to retreat backward, and to yield to the impelling  force.
 The arched form  of the thorax  is  likewise  a favorable one  to
 enable it to resist the force of blows, &c.
  The thorax aids respiration  by expanding and contracting;
 the expansion  takes place in three directions, vertically,  trans-
versely, and antero-posteriorly, or  from back to  front.   In the
vertical direction  the augmentation is effected by the diaphragm;
it is much more considerable in adults than in children,  owing
to the  viscera of the abdomen being comparatively larger  in the
 latter.   In the other directions  the dilatation is accomplished 
BONES OF  THE  HEAD.
309
chiefly by the action of the intercostal muscles, which contract
successively—beginning at the first rib which serves for a fixed
point—and elevate the ribs.   The obliquity of  the ribs and the
attachments  of their cartilages  to the sternum, which have  to
ascend in order to reach it, allow of this augmentation.   While
the enlargement is going on the sternum is slightly elevated and
projected forwards.
   In expiration all the diameters of the thorax are  diminished,
all its movements  being directly the reverse of those which take
place in inspiration.   The  chief cause of  expiration  is atmo-
spheric  pressure upon the external  walls of the thorax,  acting
in conjunction with the  natural elasticity of the lungs.  Some
slight aid is also furnished by muscular contraction and the elas-
ticity of the cartilages.

                     Bones of the  Head.
   In the head there are twenty-two  bones, which  are divided
into those of the cranium—eight in number,—and those of the
face—fourteen in  number.

                          Cranium.
   The  cranium is composed of one  frontal, two parietal, two
temporal, one sphenoid, and one ethmoid bone.
   The  frontal bone  is situated in  front of the cranium; the
occipital bone is at its hind part;  the two parietal bones, one  on
each side, form its superior lateral part; the two temporal  also,
one on each side, its inferior lateral part; the sphenoid  is situated
at the middle of its base; and  the ethmoid also at its base, and
just in front of the body of the latter bone.
   Frontal Bone.—This bone forms the forehead of common lan-
guage ; it is symmetrical and shell-like, and  is occasionally di-
vided into two parts by a suture, continuous with  that, dividing
the parietal bones.  The external surface is convex, and  the in-
ternal concave.   About the  middle  of the external surface  on
each side is a protuberance called the frontal, which is the origi-
nal centre of ossification.   The internal surface is  concave, and 
310
BONES OF TnE HEAP.
marked by numerous depressions, corresponding  with the con-
volutions of the brain.   Near the middle and  lower margin of
the external surface is a  ridge called  the nasal, or superciliary
protuberance; just below this there is a protuberance called the
nasal spine, which serves for an  abutment  to  the  nasal bones.
At the inferior margin of the bone on either side  are the two
orbital ridges,  which-»fonu the anterior  boundary of the eye.
These ridges are terminated outwardly by the external angular
processes,  and inwardly by the internal angular processes.  The
lachrymal gland is placed in a depression just within the external
angular process.
   The frontal sinuses consist of one or more large  cells placed
beneath the nasal protuberances;  they vary very much in size,
and in some rare instances  in the adult do not exist.
   This bone unites laterally with the parietal and  sphenoid;  and
below with the ethmoid and several of the bones of the face.
   Parietal Bones.—These, as stated, occur in pairs and form the
middle, superior and lateral portions of the cranium; they are
quadrangular, convex externally, and concave internally.  About
the middle of the external surface the bone is raised into the
parietal protuberance—the centre of ossification.  Immediately
below  this is a semi-circular ridge for the attachment of the tem-
poral fascia and muscle.   Internally, the surface of the bone is
marked by the convolutions  of the brain, and contains also a
number of furrows, produced by  the middle artery of the dura
mater.  The superior margin is the thickest, and much serrated;
when joined to its fellow it forms a deep  groove  for the  accom-
modation of the longitudinal sinus.  The inferior edge is thinner
and arched.   This bone articulates with its  fellow, with the
frontal, the  sphenoid, the temporal and the occipital bones.
   Occipital Bone.—This bone is placed at the posterior and in-
ferior part of the head, and is of an oval or trapezoidal shape;
it is convex externally and concave internally.  Both surfaces
contain a  number of ridges and  processes   A  large opening,
called  the foramen magnum, is found  in its lower  part.  This
hole is oval, the long diameter extending from before backwards ; 
BONES OF THE HEAD.
311
it transmits the medulla oblongata, the vertebral vessels, and the
spinal accessory nerves.  On each side is an oblong convex sur-
face, called condyloid process, for articulating  with  the atlas.
Near the middle  of the external surface of the  bone is a pro-
minence, called the external occipital cross, from which, on each
side, there proceeds a semi-circular ridge, which serves for the
origin  and  insertion  of muscles.   About an inch below this
ridge is another,  into which the superior oblique muscle is in-
serted.  In front  of the foramen magnum  is the basilar process,
the extremity of  which joins the sphenoid bone.  The internal
surface is likewise marked by a cross near its centre, called the
internal occipital cross, which is more prominent than the ex-
ternal ; from this cross three groves diverge, which contain the
two lateral and  the  superior longitudinal sinus;  inferiorly a
ridge proceeds to the foramen magnum to which the falx cere-
belli is attached.   In this way four  concavities  are formed, the
two superior of which contain the posterior lobes of the cere-
brum, and the two inferior the  hemispheres of the cerebellum.
   Superiorly the occipital bone joins the  parietal, laterally the
temporal, and in front the sphenoid.
    Temporal Bones.—These bones are placed on either side  of
the cranium, below the parietal, and form  portions of its inferior
lateral parieties and base.  They are divided into three portions,
the squamous, the mastoid, and the petrous.
   The squamous portion is thinner than the other bones of the
cranium, but is covered by the temporal  muscle, which  affords
sufficient protection to the brain.  Externally it is slightly con-
vex, and has grooves for the deep temporal  artery.  The zygo-
matic process projects  from its lower part, and forms a part  of
the zygomatic arch.   Beneath  the  base of  this process, which
is triangular, is  the  glenoid  cavity for the articulation of the
lower jaw.  Just behind this cavity is  another, which contains
 a portion  of the parotid gland.   Between these cavities is  the
 Glasserian fissure, which transmits the chorda tympani nerve,
 and the levator tympani muscle, to the ear.  The internal sur-
 face has a groove for the middle artery of the  dura  mater. 
312
BONES OF THE HEAP.
  The mastoid portion is behind, and is thick and cellular; its
upper part is  angular, has serrated  edges, and  is received be-
tween the parietal and occipital bones.  Below there is a large
conical projection,  called mastoid process, which receives the
insertion of sterno-mastoid and trachelo-mastoid muscles.  At
the base  of this  process  is a fossa from  which the digastric
muscle arises.  A foramen, called the mastoid, and which trans-
mits a blood-vessel, is found near the upper margin  of the bone.
  There  are numerous  and large cells in this portion  of tho
bone, which are  called  sinuses;  they communicate with  tho
tympanum by a large orifice.
  The petrous portion is triangular and pyramidal;  it arises by
a broad base from the inner portions of the mastoid and squam-
ous portions;  its  structure is extremely dense and  brittle.  In
the posterior surface of the petrous portion is a large foramen,
called the meatus auditorius internus, through which the seventh
or auditory, and  the facial nerves are transmitted.  The base
has a large oval  opening, between the  zygomatic and mastoid
processes, which leads to the tympanum, and is called the meatus
auditorius externus;  its margin is called  the auditory process,
its lower part  is rough  for the attachment of the  cartilage of
the external ear.   In the angle  between the squamous  and
petrous portions  is the  orifice of the  Eustachian  tube.  The
styloid process, which is round, tapering, and about an inch and
a half long, projects from a ridge on the inferior surface,  called
the vaginal process.  Immediately behind the base of the styloid
process is the stylo-mastoid foramen, through which the facial
nerve and stylo-mastoid artery pass.  The internal jugular vein,
and the eighth pair of nerves pass through the posterior fora-
men lacerum, which is formed by the  articulation  of this with
the occipital bone.   Just before  the  foramen  lacerum   is the
opening of the carotid canal, which  contains besides the  artery
the ganglion of Laumonier.
  The temporal bone articulates with the occipital,  the parietal,
the sphenoid, and the malar.
   Sphenoid Bone. — This bone  is  placed transversely  in the 
BONES OF THE HEAD.
313
middle of the base of the cranium.   In shape it bears resem-
blance to a bat;  it consists of a body and  four wings, two, a
large and a small one, being placed on each  side.  The body is
in the centre, and is cuboidal in shape. Besides the wings men-
tioned it has a number of angular margins,  and  additional pro-
cesses, two of the latter are directed vertically downwards.   A
deep depression exists on the superior surface of the body, which
is called the sella turcica, and contains the pituitary gland. On
either side of this depression are two grooves, called sulci caro-
tica, for the carotid arteries;  in front is  a  prominence, called
processes olivaris, upon which is a groove, indicating the posi-
tion of the chiasm of the optic nerves.  The  posterior clinoid
process projects over the depression behind.  In front  of the
body is a ridge, which articulates with the nasal lamella  of  the
ethmoid bone, on either side  of this are the orifices of the two
sphenoidal cells; these empty into the posterior ethmoidal cells,
and do not exist in infancy. The posterior surface of the body
is flat, and rough for articulating with the cuneiform process of
the occipital bone.  Generally  in the adult the bones are  anchy-
losed at this point.
   The small wings are in front of the large, and are triangular,
flat, and narrow.  Their posterior extremities form the anterior
clinoid processes, and are perforated by  the  optic  foramen,
which transmits the optic  nerve and ophthalmic artery.   They
articulate with the frontal  bone.
   The great wings are divided from the small, by the sphenoidal
fissure or foramen, through which  pass the third, fourth, first
branch of the fifth, and the sixth nerves; it has three surfaces.
One is anterior,  and called orbital,  from its forming a part of
the orbit;  another is external and called temporal; the third,
towards the brain, is concave,  and contains  a considerable por-
tion of the middle lobe of the cerebrum; its face is marked by
 the convolutions of the brain, and  by a furrow for the passage
 of the middle artery of the dura mater to  the  cranium.  The
 temporal surface is somewhat concave, and  covered by the tem-
 poral aud external pterygoid muscles.  The  orbital face is square
        40 
314
BONES OF THE FACE.
and slightly concave.  The inferior portion of the great wing is
elongated backwards, and called the spinous process.   From the
point of this process the styloid process projects downwards.
  The sphenoid bone  articulates above and in front with the
vomer, the frontal, ethmoid, malar, and parietal bones; behind
with the occipital, and by its pterygoid processes with the palate
bones;  and laterally with the temporal.
  Ethmoid Bone.—The ethmoid bone, so named from  its resem-
blance to a sieve, is placed at the base of  the skull and between
the orbitar processes of the frontal.  In shape it is cuboidal, and
in structure extremely cellular and light.   The superior surface
is called the cribriform plate, and is perforated  with holes which
transmit filaments of the olfactory nerve.  From the middle
line of this surface, a narrow, triangular, hollow process projects
called the crista galli, to which is attached the falx cerebri.  A
vertical plate of bone, called the nasal lamella, divides the bone
longitudinally into two halves;  it articulates  posteriorly with
the crista sphenoidalis, and  below with the vomer.
  The lateral surfaces of the bone are called  ossa plana; they
arc extremely thin and form a large portion of the orbits of the
eyes.   Attached to the internal face of the os planum on either
side of  the nasal lamella are two scrolls  or shells placed one
above the other, and called superior and middle  turbinated bones.
They are separated by a fissure which is the superior meatus of
the nose.   The middle meatus is between  the middle and in-
ferior turbinated bones.   The anterior ethmoidal  cells  empty
into the middle meatus; the  most anterior of them  is  funnel
shaped and receives the fluid from the frontal  sinus.    The pos-
terior ethmoidal cells and the sphenoidal sinus empty into the
superior meatus.
  The ethmoid articulates with  the frontal, sphenoidal, inferior
turbinate,  superior maxillary, nasal,  lachrymal, palate  bones,
and vomer.
                    Bones of the Face.
  The  face is composed of fourteen  bones  viz. the  superior
maxillary, the palate bone, malar, nasal, unguiform, inferior tur- 
BONES OF THE FACE.
315
binated, vomer, and inferior maxillary;  all of these except two,
the inferior maxillary and vomer, are in  pairs, there being  six
on either side.   The inferior maxillary bone  has  corresponding
or symmetrical sides.
   Superior Maxillary Bones.—These constitute the upper jaw
and  are the largest bones of  the face;  they articulate with
all the others except the  lower  jaw.   They  have an irregular
cuboidal body,  and four processes.  The body  is hollow, and
has  four surfaces.   The anterior or facial surface is  bounded
above by the lower margin of the orbit, below which is a fora-
men, the infra  orbitar, which transmits the infra orbitar nerve
and  an artery.   The posterior or temporal surface  is round; it
has a roughened prominent part,  called the tuber, through which
pass by several small foramina, the posterior dental nerve, artery,
and  vein to the floor of the antrum.   The superior or orbital
surface is triangular.  The internal or nasal surface has a large
opening of the antrum  highmorianum—the large cavity in the
centre  of the bone.  The walls  of this cavity are grooved  by
the passage of  the dental nerves.
   The nasal process arises by a broad and thin  base from  the
upper and anterior part of the bone;  it  articulates anteriorly
with the nasal  bone, and superiorly with the  frontal;  the pos-
terior edge forms a canal, by articulating with the os ungus, to
contain the lachrymal sac.
   The malar process is on the  upper and outer  surface of  the
bone;  it is rough and articulates with the malar bone.
   The alveolar process, contains the sockets of the teeth, eight
to each side; it is broader behind than  in front.  Just behind
the alveolar process, at the junction of the two bones, is the fora-
men incisivum which contains the naso-palatine nerve and gan-
glion.
   The palate process arises from the internal face of the body
of the bone, just within the circle of the alveoli;  it forms  the
horizontal roof  of the mouth, and floor of the nose.  The nasal
crista arises at  the junction with its fellow and articulates with
the vomer.   Behiud, this process unites with the  horizontal part 
316
BONES OF THE FACE.
 of the palate bone;  its  anterior extremity forms the  anterior
 nasal spine.
   Palate Bones.—These  bones, two in number, are placed be-
 tween the superior  maxillary and the sphenoid bones.  They
 are irregular in shape, and divided into two portions.
   The horizontal, or palate plate, is square, and in the same
 line with the palate process of the superior maxillary bone, form-
 ing a part of the floor of the  nostril and roof of the mouth.
 At its suture it forms  part  of the nasal  crista for articulating
 with the vomer.  Behind, it is elongated into the posterior nasal
 spine.
   The vertical or nasal plate forms the posterior and outer part of
 the nostril, and  is much thinner than the palate plate; its nasal
 surface articulates by a ridge with the inferior turbinated bone;
 externally it articulates by a roughened surface with the maxil-
 lary bone.  Posteriorly it has an elongated triangular  process,
 called pterygoid.
   The orbital portion, or plate, is hollow and irregular;  it forms
a small part of the orbit between  the  ethmoid and superior
maxillary bones.
  The palate  bone articulates  with the  upper maxillary, the
sphenoid, ethmoid,  inferior  spongy,  the  vomer,  and  with its
fellow.
  Nasal Bones.—These are placed between the nasal  processes
of the superior maxillary bones; they are oblong in shape, and
compact in structure, and  so placed together, as to form a strong
arch, called  the bridge of nose.  The upper extremity is  thick
and narrow, and articulates with  the  frontal bone.  The lower
is thinner and broader, and has  the  cartilages of the nose at-
tached.   They articulate  with  each  other, with  the nasal  pro-
cesses of the superior maxillary,  and with  the frontal bone.
   Unguiform Bones.—So called from its resemblance to a finger
nail, likewise called lachrymal.  It is placed at the internal side
of the orbit, between the  nasal process of the upper maxillary,
and the os planum of the ethmoid, and is  very small  and thin.
The external surface forms a part of the orbit of the eye.  It 
BONES OF THE FACE.
317
articulates loosely with the frontal, upper maxillary, os planum,
and the inferior spongy bone.
   Malar Bones.—The malar or cheek bones, two in number, are
quadrangular in shape.   They are situated at  the  external part
of the orbit of the eye, and form the prominence  of the cheek.
The cheek bone has three surfaces; the external or facial, which
is convex, and  forms part of the  face;  the internal or  orbital,
which is crescentic, and  contributes to  the orbit; and the pos-
terior, which is concave, and forms the anterior boundary of the
zygomatic fossa.  It has four margins, two of which are superior,
and two inferior.  The anterior of  the upper is curved  to  form
the external and part of the inferior margin of the orbit; the
posterior upper is irregular, and has attached to it the temporal
fascia.  The anterior inferior is serrated, and articulates with the
upper maxillary; the posterior inferior serves for  the  origin of
a part of the  masseter muscle.   The angles  of  this  bone are
called processes, the superior or frontal articulates with  the an-
gular process of  the frontal bone.   The temporal process  extends
backwards, and forms part of the .zygomatic arch;  the maxillary
articulates with the upper maxillary bone.
   The malar bone  articulates with  the maxillary, frontal,  sphe-
noidal, and temporal bones.
   Inferior turbinated Bones.—These, also, called  spongy bones,
are situated  immediately below the  opening  into the  antrum
Highmorianum.   They are scroll-like, and  extremely light and
porous.  The internal surface is convex, and looks towards the
nose; the external surface has a broad  hook which rests  upon
the lower margin of the orifice of the antrum  and partly closes
it.  Two processes arise from the superior margin of the  bone,
and join the ethmoid.   The lower margin  is  thicker than the
upper.
    Vomer.—Called so from its resemblance to a ploughshare.
It is  a single bone placed between the nostrils, and forms a large
part of the septum.   It is  formed  of two plates of compact
structure.   It is flat, has four margins,  and is frequently more
inclined to one side than the  other. The superior margin  is the 
318
BONES OF THE FACE.
thickest and contains a groove  for the reception of the azygos
process of the sphenoid; the inferior margin articulates with the
nasal crista of the upper maxillary aud palate bones; the ante-
rior  margin is directed obliquely downwards and  forwards, its
front half joins the cartilagiuous septum of the nose,  and its
posterior half unites with the nasal lamella of the ethmoid; the
posterior margin is concave, sharp, and  thin, and  divides the
posterior opening of the nose.
  Inferior Maxillary.—This bone, commonly called the lower
jaw, is also single.   It forms the lower  boundary of the face,
and is the only bone in the head capable  of motion.   Its shape
is that of a parabolic curve.  In infancy its halves are separable,
being joined in the middle only by cartilage;  two or three years
after birth, however, they become consolidated, and the cartilage
disappears.  It consist of  a body or  region which corresponds
with the teeth, and two rami or branches.
  The body is convex in front, having its upper part formed by
the alveolar cavities for receiving the teeth, and its lower part
presenting a thick  and rounded margin, which  is the  base of
lower jaw.  At the middle or symphysis  is a triangular promi-
nence, called the anterior mental tubercle.  Near to this tubercle,
on either side, there is a large  hole, called the anterior mental
foramen, which conducts the inferior maxillary artery and nerve
to the teeth.
  The internal or posterior face is concave, and has  also a pro-
minence at its symphysis,  called the posterior mental tubercle ;
a fossa exists on each  side  of this tubercle for the insertion of
the digastric muscle.  Exterior to this on either side is a larger
fossa for the sublingual gland.
  The alveolar  processes are thin with cutting edges; and con-
tain sockets  for sixteen teeth.  They come and  go with the
teeth; it is the absorption of these processes, after the loss  of
the teeth, in aged persons, and the consequent falling in of the
mouth that gives to the chin its prominent appearance.
   The ramus or extremity of the lower jaw is square, and ele-
vated above the body. In middle age it is at right angles to 
GENERAL REMARKS ON THE HEAD.         319
the latter, and in youth and old age oblique. The superior mar-
gin has a thin, concave edge, and  is bounded  in front by the
coronoid, and behind  by the condyloid process.  The first  of
these processes is triangular  and thin, and receives at its  point
the insertion of the temporal muscle; the second articulates with
the glenoid cavity of the temporal  bone, and is attached to the
ramus by a narrow neck on the inside of which  is a fossa for
the  insertion of the  external  pterygoid muscle.   Externally
the surface of the  ramus is rough;  internally there is a foramen
for conducting the  inferior  alveolar artery and nerve  to the
teeth.  The junction of the body and ramus is the angle of the
jaw; it is rough  for the attachment  of the stylo-maxillary
ligament.
   The lower jaw has a greater influence on the form of the face
than any of the other bones.  In some persons it is much smaller
in proportion than in  others.  The inclination of the  alveolar
processes externally or internally, frequently cause the chin to
recede or project unusually.   At times, also, the separation of
its sides, shorten the chin, and give increased width to the lower
part of the face.

               General Remarks on the Head.
   In the adult the bones of  the head consist of two tables, one
external, and the  other internal.   The  external table  is  hard
and fibrous, the internal thinner and more brittle, and hence has
received the name of  vitreous table.
   These tables are united by a cellular bony  substance, called
dipla:, which is traversed  by channels, filled with veins having
delicate parietes,  and provided with valves, and which like  all
other veins are intended to return the blood to the heart.
   They empty at the base of the  brain into  the emissaries of
 Santorini.
   The bones of the  cranium are  united by  seams or sutures
 which, except in old age,  are very  distinctly marked.  They are
 formed by the junction of the edges of the  bones, which are
 serrated  or notched, and  accurately and firmly fitted into each 
320
OKNERAL  REMARKS  ON THE HEAD.
 other.  Indeed, in some of the sutures uniting the flat bones of
 the  head, a  complete dove-tailing is, here and there, met with.
   This kind of union is often confined  to  the  external table
 and to the diploe, whilst in  the  internal table  the bones are
 united by a nearly straight joint.
   The principal sutures of the head are :  the coronal, so named
 from its corresponding in situation with the garlands, worn by
 the  ancients, which unites the parietal and frontal bones;  the
 saggital, which unites the two parietal bones in the adult, and
 in the child  extends through  the frontal bone to the root of the
 nose; the occipital, or lambdoidal, uniting the parietal and
 occipital bones, and also the latter to  the  temporal bones—the
 latter half is sometimes called the additamentum suturao lamb-
 doides;  and the squamous which joins the parietal and temporal
 bones on either side of the head.  One or more small bones are
 often met with in the upper part of the lambdoidal  suture, at-
 tached to the parietal and occipital bones by serrated margins;
 they are called Ossa  Wormiana, or Triquetra.
   Besides these sutures, which belong exclusively to the head,
 there are others uniting the bones of the  face.
   Much speculation has been entered  into in regard to the uses
 of the sutures; they appear, however, to be only a provision for
 the growing state, as  they cease when  this terminates.   In the
 foetus they are  often serviceable in facilitating delivery, by per-
 mitting the head of the child to accommodate itself to the pelvis
of the mother.
  The Fontanelles.—These are membranous spaces peculiar  to
the foetus and to early infancy.  They are owing  to a deficiency
of bone at their angles of junction.
   In the bones of the cranium the points of ossification begin-
ning at  the centre, and  going towards the  circumference, the
angles, being the  longest radii, are last  in  ossifying.   Hence
they are generally incomplete at birth.  The fontanelles are six
in number, two on the middle line of the head above, and two
on either side.  The anterior, known  in  common  language as
the « opening of the head", is the largest.   It is quadrangular 
GENERAL  REMARKS ON  THE  HEAD.          321
or lozenge shaped, the anterior angle generally being the long-
est, and is situated at the fore part of the sagittal suture. The
posterior fontanel is situated at the junction of the lambdoidal
and sagittal sutures; it is small and  triangular, of the two fon-
tanelles on either side, one is at the angle of junction of the tem-
poral, occipital, and parietal bones; the other at the junction of
the parietal and sphenoid bones. They are quite small and often
indistinct.   All of these fontanelles ossify speedily after birth,
and are often entirely closed by the end of the first year.
   Nasal cavities.—These cavities are large and irregular; they
are divided by the nasal  septum.  Each  nostril  or cavity has
three distinct passages, or meatuses, as they are sometimes called
—a superior, a middle, and an inferior.  The superior  meatus
is bounded by the superior and middle turbinated  bones; the
posterior ethmoidal and sphenoidal cells, and the spheno-palatine
foramen open into it.   The middle is between the  middle and
lower turbinated  bones, and  has  opening into it, the anterior
ethmoidal  cells,  the  frontal sinus, and generally the antrum.
The inferior is bounded above by the inferior turbinated bone,
and below  by the floor of the nostril; it is the largest, and at
its upper and anterior part is the nasal duct which communicates
with  the orbit of the eye.   The opening of the nostrils in front
is called anterior nares; the  opening behind posterior nares. The
mucous membrane lining the nostrils is called the Schneiderian
membrane; it extends into the various cavities which empty into
the nostrils,  and when in a state of irritation from cold, &c, the
secretions from it are often copious and exceedingly annoying.
   Orbits of the Eyes.—The orbital cavities are conical, having
the base outwards, and the apex backwards;  they are also some-
what  quadrangular.   Seven bones unite in forming  each orbit
namely, the frontal, malar, superior maxillary, ethmoid,  unguis,
sphenoid, and palate bones.
   The  roof or superior face of the orbit is  formed by the frontal
and the lesser wing of the sphenoid;  the  floor or inferior face
by the  upper maxillary, malar, and palate bones; the external
face by  the malar and greater wing of the sphenoid;  the internal
        41 
 322         GENERAL REMARKS ON THE HEAD.

 face by the unguis, or lachrymal, os planum of the ethmoid,
 and the body  of  the sphenoid.
   The apex of the orbital cavity contains the optic foramen for
 the transmission  of the optic nerve.  Several other foramina for
 the passage of blood-vessels and nerves also open into the orbits.
   The  Facial Angle.—The  bones of the face usually project
 beyond those  of  the cranium.  In general the races of man that
 are most perfectly developed have this projection less than those
 of  inferior  conformation.  The facial angle has been instituted
 to denote the  differences in this respect.   It is formed by two
 straight lines,—one drawn from the  lower part of the frontal
 bone, to the anterior nasal spine, at  the  orifice of the nose be-
 tween the roots of the middle incisor teeth of the upper jaw,—
 and the other  from this latter point through the external meatus
 of the ear.   The angle included between  these lines  has been
 found in Caucasian or European heads to be about eighty de-
 grees ; in the heads  of the Mongolian or copper-colored  races
 about seventy-five degrees; and in those of the Negro or Ethio-
 pian about seventy degrees.   The nearer  the angle approaches
 to a  right angle  the greater  is the degree of intellectual  culti-
 vation manifested.  Even in Europeans, however, this rule is
 liable to many exceptions, the  facial angle varying in its size
 from causes which have no connection with the development of
 the brain.
  The internal surface of the cranium is regularly arched above;
 below it presents three deep fossae on each side.   The  anterior
 fossae contains the anterior lobes of the brain, the  middle the
middle lobes, and the posterior is for the cerebellum.  The entire
Burface is marked by round superficial depressions made by the
convolutions of the brain, and is lined by the dura mater.   In
adults the diameters of the cavity of the cranium are, about six
and a half inches from front  to rear, five inches laterally, and
five vertically. 
HYOID BONE.   UPPER EXTREMITIES.         323
                        Hyoid Bone.
  This is an insulated bone placed in the neck at the root of the
tongue.   In shape it resembles the  letter  u, and has the con-
vexity in front.  It consists of a body and four cornua or horns;
the body is in the middle, is convex in front, concave behind,
and is the largest part of the bone; its  front gives origin and
insertion to muscles; two  of the cornua are called the greater,
and two  the lesser, the former are about an inch and a half long,
and mostly united to the body  by cartilage and ligaments; they
are flattened, project backwards, and terminate in a tubercle.
The lesser cornua are small cartilaginous bodies,  three or four
lines long, placed at the junction of the body and great cornua.
   They are frequently found ossified; a ligament, the stylo-hyoid,
is attached to each.

                     Upper Extremities,
   This part of the skeleton is  divided on either side  into the
shoulder, arm,  fore-arm, and hand.   Two bones belong to the
shoulder—the scapula and the clavicle.
   Scapula.—This bone, known as  the  shoulder-blade, in ordi-
nary language, is placed on the back  part  of the thorax, and
extends  from the second to the seventh rib.   Its shape is  trian-
gular, and it is also  thin and flat, presenting two surfaces—one
anterior, and one posterior;  three edges or margins—one  being
superior, another external, and the  third  internal, or posterior,
the latter being parallel with and near to  the spinal column;—
and three angles, one of which is superior, another inferior, and
the  third exterior or anterior.
   The posterior  surface or dorsum  is somewhat concave, and is
divided  by the spine into  two fossae, of which the lower is much
larger than the upper;  the latter, called fossa supra spinata, is
occupied by the  supra-spinatus muscle, and the former the fossa
infra spinata, by the infra-spinatus muscle. The spine is a rough
process  beginning at the posterior edge of the bone, and running
obliquely across it towards the anterior angle, and terminating 
324
CLAVICLE.
in the acromion process, which is flat and triangular, overhangs
the shoulder joint, and has a small articular  mark  in  front for
the clavicle.  The trapezius muscle is inserted into, and the del-
toid arises from, the edge of the spine.
   The internal edge, that parallel to the spine, is the longest, and
into it are inserted the rhomboid and serratus anticus  muscle.
   The superior edge is thin and small, and  has a  notch in it,
called the coracoid notch, through which the  scapular artery and
nerve pass.
   The external edge is thick, and gives origin to the teres minor,
and the long head of the triceps muscle.
   The anterior angle is converted into a  large  shallow cavity,
called glenoid, for articulating with  the head of the  humerus.
The long head of the biceps arises from a flat surface at its upper
end.  Immediately blow  the glenoid cavity the bone is narrowed
and thickened; this part is termed the neck, or cervix, and from
it a curved process projects  forwards and outwards called the
coracoid.  This process  serves  for  the attachment of muscles
and ligaments.

                          Clavicle.
   The clavicle is a  long bone placed transversely  at the upper
 and anterior part of the chest.   It  articulates with the sternum
 and the  acromion process of the scapula, and in shape is curved
 somewhat resembling the italic letter s.   The sternal two-thirds
 of the bone is convex, and the  outer third  concave anteriorly;
 it is cylindrical in the middle, flattened at the humeral, and tri-
 angular  at the sternal extremity.  In males it is shorter, thicker,
 and more crooked than in females.
   The  superior  face is smooth, and marked near the sternum
 with a  depression for  the origin of the sterno-cleido  mastoid
 muscle.   The inferior face  is roughened near  the sternum for
 the costo-clavicular or rhomboid ligament;  near the'outer extre-
 mity is  a rough  tubercle for the attachment of  the coraco-clavi-
 cular ligament;  between the ends a superficial fossa  exists, for
 the subclavius muscle.  From the sternal two-thirds  of the 
HUMERUS.
325
anterior edge the  pectoralis major muscle arises, and from the
humeral third of the same edge the deltoid has its origin. Near
the middle of the posterior edge one or more foramina are pre-
sented for nutritious vessels.

                          Humerus.

   The humerus, or arm-bone, is cylindrical, and  extends from
the shoulder to the elbow.   It consists of a superior extremity,
also called the head, a neck, an inferior extremity, and a body.
  Fig. 2.  The humerus.  1 the body;  2 the head ;
 3 the neck; 10 nutritious foramen;  13 external con-
 dyle; 14 internal condyle;  11 articulating face for
 the radius; 12 articular face for the ulna; 17 lesser   ,
 sigmoid cavity. The  remaining figures refer to ridges
 marks, &c, for the attachment of muscles.

   The superior extremity  or head  is  hemi-
 spherical, and articulates with the glenoid ca-
 vity of the scapula;  immediately beneath the
 head, and separated from it by a groove is the
 neck.    Below  this  groove are  two  knobs,
 called  tuberosities, one of which is  external,
 and the other internal;  they receive the inser-
 tion of muscles, and are separated from each
 other  by the bicipital groove, in which the
 tendon of the long head of the biceps  muscle
 plays.
    The inferior extermity is flat and broad, and
 is covered in front by the brachialis  anticus
 muscle,  and  behind  by the triceps.   It  pre-
 sents  a  hemispherical  head for articulating
 with the radius  and an irregular cylindrical
 surface for the ulna. Just above the articular  ,.,
 surface in front is a cavity, called the lesser
 sigmoid which  receives the coronoid  process
 of the ulna when  the fore-arm is much flexed.  Behind is a cor-
 responding though larger cavity, called the greater sigmoid, for
 the olecranon process when the fore-arm is extended.  Imme-
 diately above the  articular surface for the radius, and continuous
 with a  ridge three or four inches long is the  external condyle,
 from which and the ridge arise the supinator and extensor mus-
 cles.  The internal condyle is just above the internal margin of
 
326
BONES OF  THE  FORE-ARM.
the ulnar articular surface, and  is more prominent than the ex-
ternal.  It may be felt beneath the skin;  from this condyle and
the rid^o leading from it the flexor  muscles of the hand aud
fore-arm arise.
                  Bones of the Fore-Arm.

  The fore-arm extends from the elbow to the hand, and contains
two bones, the ulna, and radius.   The ulna is on the same side
as the little finger, and is the longer.  Both are straight bones.
                  Ulna.—The ulna is somewhat triangular, and
     Flg' 3'     its superior or humeral extremity is the larger,
               and has a hook-like process—the olecranon—be-
               hind, to which is attached the  triceps  extensor
               cubiti muscle.  A little below, and  in  front of
               the upper extremity is the coronoid process; the
               greater sigmoid cavity for articulating with the
               humerus  is between the olecranon  and coronoid
               processes;  and  on the outside of  the coronoid
               process is the lesser sigmoid cavity for articulat-
               ing with  the  radius.   The external  edge is the
               sharpest,  and to it is attached  the interosseous
               ligament.
                 Fig. 3.  Tho ulna  and radius. 1  body of the ulna;
               2 greater sigmoid cavity; 3 lesser sigmoid cavily ; 4 ole-
               cranon process ; 5 coronoid process ;  8 lesser extremity ;
               9 styloid process.  It Body of the radius; 11 rounded
               head;  12 neck; 13 tubercle;  15 inferior extremity; 16
               styloid process.
                  Radius.—This  bone is placed  on the  outer
               side of the ulna, is  shorter, and like it extends
               from the humerus to the wrist. It is  slightly
           %   curved, and the  inferior extremity is the larger.
  The upper extremity has a cylindrical head, surrounded by a
smooth rim or border, a part of which plays in the lesser sigmoid
cavity of the ulna while  the remainder  is in  contact with  the
annular ligament.  On the upper surface of the head is a fossa
for articulating with the humerus.  Below  the  head is the neck
which is about half an inch in length. Immediately beneath the
neck is a rough prominence  or tubercle for the insertion of the
biceps flexor cubiti.
   The lower extremity is flattened transversely.  It articulates
 
BONES OF THE HAND.
327
by a concave surface with the scaphoid and lunare bones of the
wrist.  On the internal face of the extremity is a small articular
surface for the ulna.   Externally is the styloid process  for the
attachment of the external lateral ligament.  Upon the back of
this extremity are several grooves, occupied by the tendons of
the muscles which go to the wrist and hand.
   The body of  the bone is irregularly triangular, and presents
three surfaces and three angles, which are principally occupied
with the origin and insertion of muscles.

                    Bones of the Hand.
   The hand  consists of the carpus or wrist, the metacarpus, and
the phalanges, or digiti, and is made up of twenty-seven bones
exclusive of  the sesamoid bones.
   Carpus.—The carpus or wrist is placed next to the fore-arm,
and consists  of eight bones arranged into two rows, called first
and second rows.  The bones in the first row are the scaphoid,
lunare, cuneiform, and pisiform; those in the second row are the
trapezium, trapezoides, magnum, and unciform.   They are dif-
ficult to  distinguish from each other.
   The scaphoides, placed on the radial side of the wrist, is con-
cave  above,  and convex below;  it  articulates above with the
radius, below and in  front with the magnum,  trapezium, and
trapezoides,  and on  the  inside with  the lunare.  It may be
known from the others in the row by its greater length.
   The lunare is at the ulnar side of the latter, and is of a semi-
lunar shape.  Above it is convex, and below concave.  It arti-
culates with  the radius above, with the magnum below, and with
the cuneiform on the inside.
   The cuneiform is  placed at the ulnar side of the lunare, and
is somewhat wedge-shaped.  It articulates  above with the lunare,
below with the unciform, and on the inside with the  pisiform.
   The pisiform, so named from its resemblance to  a pea, is the
smallest of the  carpal bones.  It has but one articular surface,
which joins the cuneiform, and may be readily felt  at the ulnar
side of the arist. 
32^      METACARPAL BONES.   PHALANGEAL HONKS.
  The trapezium is placed at the radial side of the second row,
and is very irregular in  shape; it articulates with the thumb,
scaphoid and trapezoides.
  The trapezoides is at the ulnar side of the trapezium, and the
smallest in the second row;  it is somewhat pyramidal, with the
apex towards the palm, and has four articular faces for the ad-
joining bones.
  The magnum is placed at the ulnar  side of the last, and  is
the largest bone in  the wrist.  On  the upper surface it has a
rounded head to articulate with the scaphoides and lunare. The
body is quadrilateral.
  The unciform is  at the ulnar side of the magnum, and nearly
as large;  it may be distinguished by its long crooked process.

                     Metacarpal Bones.
   Of these there are five;  they arc placed between the  wrist
and the  phalanges  of the fingers and thumb.   Those  for the
finger are parallel with each other; but the one for the thumb
diverges, and is so  placed that it can be brought in front of the
others during its motions.   Each has a rounded head for articu-
lating with its corresponding phalanx, a cylindrical shaft which is
smaller than the extremities, and a base which articulates with
the carpal bones. The first, that for the thumbs, is the shortest
and thickest; the second for the index finger is the longest; the
third, fourth, and fifth gradually diminish in size.

                     Phalangeal Bones.
   Each finger contains three bones, called phalanges; the thumb
has but two.  The first  row, that adjoining  the metacarpus, is
called the first  phalanx; the middle row the second;  and the
remaining row  the  third.
   The bones of the first phalanx are the largest; they are con-
vex posteriorly, and flattened anteriorly.  A superficial cavity
exists in the upper extremity of each for articulating with  the
 metacarpal bones.
   The bones of the second  phalanx  are smaller, and are also 
          REMARKS ON THE UPPER EXTREMITIES.       329

convex behind, and flattened in  front.   The  upper extremities
of each has  two superficial  cavities for articulating with the
bones of the first phalanx.
   The bones of the third phalanx are the smallest, and differ
materially from the others.   They have but one  articular ex-
tremity the upper, which has two  superficial cavities for the
corresponding faces of the second phalanx.
   The lower extremity is rounded, flattened, thin, and rough.
   The sesamoid bones are two in number; they are small and
hemispherical, and are placed on the inside of the hand, at the
lower extremity of the metacarpal bone of  the thumb; they
assist the  action of the short flexor muscle.  Sometimes they
are also found at the metacarpal bones of the fingers of  robust
persons.

            Remarks on the Upper Extremities.
   The relative proportion of the upper extremities to the lower
is much greater at birth than at any after period.  This relative
size gradually diminishes up to the age of puberty, by which
time  it has generally disappeared.  It is probably owing to the
lower extremities, receiving less blood in the foetal state than
the upper.
   At birth, also, the extremities of the clavicles, humeri, bones
of the fore-arm, carpus, and phalanges—all the long bones—are
cartilaginous, and larger proportionably than in the adult.  The
proportion of animal matter is  likewise  greater, which renders
them less liable to fracture.  They may, however, be bent easily,
and hence too much force should not be applied to them.  Bow-
legs are not unfrequently caused by permitting young infants to
stand on their feet too long at a time.   Distortion of the spine
may also  be induced by the same cause.
   The clavicle is susceptible of  motion in four directions—up-
wards,  downwards,  forwards, and backwards, and also  of cir-
cumduction, which is a rapid succession  of these motions; the
articulation at the externum is the centre upon which these move-
ments are performed.  It also assists in supporting  the shoulder,
       42 
330       REMARKS ON THE  UPPER EXTREMITIES.

and  by keeping it from falling forwards greatly facilitates the
motions of the joint.  In females the clavicles are longer in pro-
portion than in  males, to accommodate the breasts, and in conse-
quence  of this  increased length, some of the motions of the
shoulder are performed  with great awkwardness.
  The scapula, besides, having all the motions ascribed to the
clavicle, is capable of performing a  partial rotation;  it serves as
a movable basis for all the motions  of the arm.
  The humerus is susceptible  of  motion,  upwards, downwards,
forwards, and backwards, and also of circumduction and rotation.
The  motion of  circumduction is very extensive in the shoulder
joint;  it is a regular succession of all the  other movements, ex-
cept rotation, by which the arm describes a cone having for  its
apex the glenoid cavity.
  Rotation is the turning of the bone upon itself;  it is not ex-
tensive, rarely exceeding a half circle.
  In the  fore-arm there are two kinds of motion ;  in one  kind
the fore-arm  is flexed or extended on the arm, and the  ulna is
the principal agent.   In the other, the radius rotates upon the
ulna, the latter being almost stationary.   When  the hand, fol-
lowing the forward rotation of the radius, has its palm directed
downwards, it is said to be in  a state of supination.  This is the
most common and easiest position of the fore-arm.  In the back-
ward rotation of the radius, in which the  palm is  upwards, the
hand is in a state of supination;  in this position the radius is
parallel with the ulna;  in pronation the middle part of the ra-
dius crosses that of the ulna.
  The motions of the hand on the fore-arm are, flexion, extension,
lateral inclination, or abduction, and adduction, and circumduc-
tion ; those which take place between the first  and second  rows
of the carpus are chiefly flexion and extension.  The metacarpal
bone of the thumb moves freely on the trapezium;  its  motions
are,  flexion, extension, abduction, adduction, and circumduction.
The latter is the result of the others, and resembles that of the
shoulder joint.   The motions of the other metacarpal bones are
much  more limited, being confined  mostly to a moderate degree 
LOWER  EXTREMITIES.  THIGH BONE, OR FEMUR.   331
of flexion and extension.   The first phalanges admit of flexion,
extension, lateral motion, and circumduction;  the second and
third are restricted to the two first.  It will  thus  be perceived
from the nice mechanism of the upper extremities, and the num-
ber of pieces which enter into their structure, what a variety of
movements they are capable of performing.

                    Lower Extremities.

   The bones of the lower extremity are, the femur,  os femoris,
or thigh bone, the tibia,  fibula, patella; and the tarsal,  meta-
tarsal, and phalangeal bones belonging to the foot—in all sixty-
four.
                   Thigh  Bone,  or Femur.
   The thigh contains but one bone, which is      L Fig. 4.
the longest  in  the body, reaching from the
pelvis to the knee; it consists of a superior,
and an inferior extremity, and a body.
  Fig. 4.  Thigh bone, or Femur. 1 Body, or shaft;
2 head;  3 neck;  4 trochanter major; 6 trochanter
minor; 7 internal condyle;  8 external condyle.

   The  superior  extremity  has a  spherical
head, with a depression upon it for the liga-
mentum teres.   Between the head and body
at an angle of  about  thirty degrees with  the
latter is the neck, which is about two inches
in length.  At  the base of the neck on either
side are two prominences, called the trochan-
ters major and minor; the former, which is
situated externally, is  much the larger, and
receives the insertion of several muscles com-
ing from the pelvis;  the latter  is  placed in-
ternally, and has the psoas magnus and iliacus
internus muscles inserted into it. Between the
two trochanters behind is a ridge, into which
is  inserted the quadratus femoris.   A simi-
lar ridge  in  front  marks the attachment of
the capsular ligament.
   The  inferior extremity is much larger than
 the superior, and is divided by a fossa in front
 and a notch  behind into two parts, called the 
332
BONES OF  THE  LEG.
Fig. 5.
external and the internal condyle.  Of these
the internal from being placed the most  ob-
liquely, appears to be the larger.  These con-
dyles have articular faces for the tibia below,
and the patella in front.
   The body of the bone is nearly round, and
is slightly curved anteriorly;  its front surface
is covered by  the cruraeus muscle.

  Fig. 5.  Posterior view of femur, showing the ridgo,
called the linea  aspera, and the origin aud  insertion
of the muscles along its two lips.
  p insertion of tho pectineus; ab insertion of tho
adductor brevis; gm insertion of the gluteus rnaxi-
inus;  a m insertion of the adductor magnus; g m ori-
gin of the vastus externus; b origin of the short head
of the biceps flexor cruris.

   Posteriorly there is an elevated ridge, the
linea aspera,  which is considerably elevated,
and serves for  the origin and insertion  of
muscles.   Near  the middle of this ridge  is a
large foramen for the nutritious artery.
                     Bones  of the Leg.
  There are two bones to the leg,  the  tibia and the fibula, of
which the former is placed internally, and the latter externally;
they extend from the knee to the foot.
   Tibia.—This bone is much longer and larger than the fibula;
next to  the femur it is  the largest bone in the  body;  its  lower
half is commonly called the shin-bone.   The upper  extremity,
or head, is large, and contains  two  superficial cavities, divided
by a ridge, called the spinous process, for articulating with the
condyles of the femur.   At  the base of the spinous process in
front and behind the crucial ligaments are attached;  at its sum-
mit is a depression for the attachment of the posterior extremity
of the  external  semilunar cartilage.   Upon each  side  of the 
BONES OF THE LEG.
333
head is an enlargement, called the  internal and external con-
dyles, or tuberosities ; on  the back part of latter, looking down-
wards, is a small articular mark for  the  fibula.  In  front and
just below the head is a tubercle for the attachment of the liga-
ment of the patella.
   The lower extremity of the tibia is  much smaller than the
upper, and somewhat quadrilateral; it articulates by a trans-
verse cylindrical concavity with the astragalus;  externally there
is a triangular groove for articulating with the fibula; internally
a large process, called the internal malleolus; posteriorly a slight
groove for the tendon of the flexor longus pollicis muscle.  The
extensor tendons pass over the anterior surface.
   The body is triangular,  and consequently presents three edges
and three surfaces.  The anterior edge,  called the spine, or crest,
is sharp, superficial, and slightly curved;  the  external  has at-
tached to  it one edge of the interosseous ligament; the internal
edge is rounded,  and in it are inserted several muscles.   The
internal surface is only covered by the  skin; the external sur-
face is covered by the muscles of the leg;  the  posterior surface
gives origin to the tibialis  anticus  and flexor communis muscles.
      Fig.  6.                                         Fig- 1-
  Fig. 6.  Anterior view of the ti-
bia and fibula.  1 External face of
the body of tibia;  2 internal con-
dyle ; 3 external condyle; 4 spin-
ous process ; 5 tubercle ; 6 anterior
edge, or spine ;  7 lower extremity ;
8 internal malleolus;  9 fibula; 10
upper extremity ; 11 lower extrem-
ity, or external malleolus.


  Fig. 7.   Posterior view  of the
tibia and fibula  1 External con-
dyle ;  2 internal condyle;  3 fossa
for the insertion of the semi-mem-
branosus muscle;  4 fossa for the
attachment of the posterior crucial
ligament;  5 oblique ridge for the
origin of the soleus muscle; 6 ex-
ternal edge ; 7 posterior face of bo-
dy ; 8 internal malleolus; 9 groove
for the tendon of the flexor longus
pollicis; 10 fibula; 11 superior ex-
tremity; 13, 14 inferior extremity,
or external malleolus.
 
334
BONES OF  THE FOOT.
  Fibula.__The fibula is placed on the outside of the leg, with
its upper part somewhat posteriorly.   It is  a long, thin bone,
extending from the head of the tibia to the foot;   it is  rather
shorter than the tibia.  The upper extremity or head is enlarged,
and has a concave surface on its upper part for articulating with
the external condyle of  the tibia;  behind is a styloid process
for the insertion of the head of the biceps.  The lower extrem-
ity is also enlarged, and is called  the external  malleolus;  its
internal  surface is smooth, triangular, and slightly convex  for
articulating with  the astragalus;  its external  surface is also
triangular and superficial.  The pointed extremity  of the exter-
nal malleolus is sometimes called the coronoid process.
   The body is triangular, presenting  a twisted appearance, and
has three faces; the external face gives origin to  the peroneus
longus and brevis muscles in its upper two-thirds; the internal
face is towards the tibia, and is divided longitudinally by a ridge
to which is attached the interosseous  ligament;  the spaces in
front and behind this ridge give origin to muscles;  the posterior
face gives origin to the soleus and flexor longus pollicis muscles.
The anterior  angle is sharp and elevated in the middle.  There
is also a slight bend, towards the tibia, in this bone.
   Patella.—This is  a flat ovoid bone, situated at the fore part
of the knee joint; it is commonly called the knee-pan.  Its an-
terior face is convex and rough, and covered by the integuments;
its posterior  face  is smooth, and unequally divided by a  longi-
tudinal ridge. , The external part  is the larger, and articulates
with the trochlea  in front of the external condyle  of the femur;
the internal part is the  smaller, and articulates with the trochlea
of the internal condyle. The superior margin is thick, and  into
it is inserted the tendon of the rectus femoris;  the inferior mar-
 gin is thinner and pointed, and  has  the tendon  of the patella
 attached to it.

                     Bones of the Foot.
   The foot consist of the tarsus, metatarsus, and phalanges. In
 the tarsus, which forms the posterior half of the i'not, are seven 
BONES OF  TOE  FOOT.
335
bones, the  os calcis, astragalus, naviculare, cuboides, and  the
external, middle, and internal cuneiform.
   Os calcis.—This bone forms the heel, and is much the largest
of the bones of the foot.  In shape it is irregular;  its longest
diameter is lengthwise of the foot, and it is also thicker  verti-
cally than  transversely.  The superior surface has two articular
faces at its front part for the astragalus. Between these cavities
is a  deep groove, the posterior part of which is occupied by the
interosseous ligament. The internal surface is very concave,  and
is called the sinuosity;  over  it pass the  tendons, vessels,  and
nerves for  the  sole of the foot;  the external  surface is nearly
flat,  and is marked by the passage of tendons of the  peroneus
longus and brevis; the under surface is  slightly concave,  and
has  two tuberosities behind, of which the internal is the larger;
they give origin to the muscles of the foot.   This surface  has
also  a tuberosity in front.
   The anterior extremity forms the greater apophysis, and arti-
culates with  the cuboides;  the posterior  extremity is convex,
and  rough  to receive the insertion of  the tendon  Achillis.
   Astragalus.—This is next in size to the latter, and is placed
between it and the bones of the leg.  It consists  of a body  and
head.  Above,  the body articulates with the tibia, and on  either
side  with the malleoli.  The head is placed anteriorly and arti-
culates with  the scaphoides.
   Scaphoid.—This is an oval bone situated at the inner side of
the  tarsus, between the astragalus and  the cuneiform bones;
behind is a deep concavity for the astragalus, and in front three
triangular  articular surfaces for the three  cuneiform bones; at
the inner side is a large tuberosity for the insertion of the tendon
of the tibialis  posticus.
   Cuboid.—Is on the outer side  of the tarsus, between the os
calcis and the  metatarsal bones, and as its name indicates,  is
somewhat  cuboidal in shape.  The internal face is flat, and has
an articular  mark for the  cuneiform internum; the posterior
face is triangular, and articulates with the os calcis; the anterior
face articulates with the last two  metatarsal bones. 
330
BONES OF TnE METATARSI'S.
   Internal cuneiform.—This is the largest of the three cunei-
form bones, and is placed between  the  scaphoid and  the  first
metatarsal bone.   Anteriorly it joins the first metatarsal bone;
posteriorly the scaphoid;  internally it is marked by the tendon
of the tibialis posticus; externally it joins the second metatarsal
bone, and middle cuneiform.  As may be infered from the name,
in its general shape it resembles a wedge.
   Middle cuneiform.—Is the smallest of  the tarsal bones, and
is  also shaped like a wedge with the  base above;  it  is placed
upon  the scaphoid, at the  outside  of the internal cuneiform.
It articulates with these two bones and  likewise with  external
cuneiform.
   External cuneiform.—This is also wedge-shaped, and placed
upon the scaphoid, between the second cuneiform and the cu-
boides.  It articulates anteriorly with the third metatarsal bone ;
posteriorly with the scaphoid;  internally with the second cunei-
form, and the second  metatarsal boue; externally with the cu-
boides.

                 Bones of the Metatarsus.

   In the metatarsus are five parallel long bones;  they extend
from the tarsus behind to the toes in front,  and are called nu-
merically, beginning on the inner side of  the foot.
   The first is  shorter and  thicker than  the others;  its base
articulates with the internal cuneiform, and  its head, which  is
spherical, with the first phalanx of the  great toe.  Below its
head are the sesamoid bones.
   The second is the longest; its base articulates at the extremity
with the middle cuneiform, on  the inside with the internal cunei-
form, and on the outside with the external cuneiform and second
metatarsal.
   The  third has a triangular base which articulates  with the
third cuneiform, and also laterally with the  second aud fourth
metatarsal bones.
   The fourth articulates at its  base with the cuboid, and on
either side with the third and  fifth metatarsal bones. 
BONES OF THE TOES.
337
   The fifth is the shortest, and is readily distinguished by a
large tubercle, which projects outward from its base beyond the
external margin of the cuboides, into which the tendons of the
peroneus tertius and  brevis  are inserted.   Its base articulates
with the cuboid and fourth metatarsal bones; its  anterior ex-
tremity is more rounded than that of the others.

                    Bones of the Toes.
   There are five toes on each foot, which are named numerically,
beginning at the great toe.  Each toe is formed of  three bones,
called phalanges, except the great toe, which like the thumb, has
but two.
   The first row or phalanx bear a general resemblance to the
first row of the fingers, but are smaller; the bases articulate by a
deep cavity with the metatarsal bones;  the anterior extremities
have two small condyles  for the second row.
   The second  row or phalanx, also resemble, the second row of
the fingers, though they  are much shorter, scarcely having any
bodies; the bases  have  two cavities for articulating with  the
first phalanx, and  the anterior extremities two convexities for
the third phalanx.
   The third row articulates with the second, and are very small;
the fourth and fifth are generally but imperfectly developed.
   The phalanges  of the  great toe are much larger  than  the
others.   Two  sesamoid bones are connected with the tendon of
the flexor brevis pollicis of each foot;  they have articular faces
which join the head of the metatarsal  bone of the great toe.

            Remarks on the Lower Extremities.
   As before remarked the lower extremities are proportionably
smaller than the upper at birth, owing to their receiving up to
that  time a smaller quantity of blood.
   Like those of the upper extremities, the bones of the  lower
are but partly ossified at birth; the ends of all the long  bones
are cartilaginous, as are  also  the patella and tarsal bones with
the exception  of parts of the os calcis and astragalus. The meta-
       43 
33*       REMARKS ON  THE  LOWER EXTREMITIES.

tarsal and phalangeal bones are not so much developed  as  the
corresponding bones of the hand.
  At birth also the upper end of the femur is more at a right
angle to the body than it is in the adult; the body of the bone
islrat slightly curved, and  the  neck short; all of which tend
to make standing and walking difficult in young children.
  The bones of the lower extremities all become ossified about
the fifteenth year, and they have then nearly the same form as in
the adult.  The epiphyses are the only exceptions to this, which
where they join  the body of the bone are  often  cartilaginous,
and until  the twentieth or twenty-fifth year may be separated by
boiling.
  The motions of the thigh are the same as those of the arm,
viz. flexion, extension, abduction, adduction, circumduction, and
rotation, though they are much less extensive in consequence of
the acetabulum, the basis on which  they are performed, being
fixed.
   Flexion, by which the  thigh is carried forward, is  performed
with  great facility and ease;  extension, the reverse of this, is also
performed with much freedom, though it is less extensive than
the former;  abduction is  that motion by which the  thighs are
separated, and  adduction the act of  bringing them  together
again or crossing them;  the muscles concerned  in the latter are
called adductors.  Both of these motions are performed to a con-
siderable extent.   Circumduction—the regular succession in a
 circle of  the other motions  mentioned—is less extensive than in
the arm.   Rotation or the turning of the femur  upon itself, is
 effected with much facility,  especially rotation outwards,  or back-
 wards.
   The chief motions of the leg on the thigh are flexion and exten-
 sion; rotation is also performed in a slight degree. Those of the
 foot  upon the leg are flexion, extension, and some  lateral motion.

                    Of the Articulations.
   The connection of one bone with another is called an articula-
  tion, or joint.   Some articulations are movable, and others im- 
OF THE ARTICULATIONS.
339
movable; in the structure of the  former cartilage, ligaments,
and synovial membranes are  necessary.
   Cartilage is a smooth, white, flexible, and  elastic substance,
and ranks next to bone in hardness.  Chemically, it is composed
of gelatine and water with a small portion of phosphate of lime.
It resists the attacks of disease almost as firmly as bone;  it is
not highly  organized, being without red blood-vessels, nerves,
and lymphatics, and unless diseased has no sensibility.  In old
age it is disposed to ossify.  It is invested by a  fibrous  mem-
brane, called perichondrium, which corresponds with  the  peri-
osteum.
   That portion of cartilage, called articular, which covers the
extremities of bone, is thicker in the middle when it covers con-
vex surfaces, and thicker on  the edges when it lines cavities.
   Cartilages, which  are  movable  in  a joint, are called inter-
articular.
   Fibro-cartilage, which consists partly of cartilage, and partly
of ligament, and is much stronger than the former, is  found in
the external ear, between the vertebra, in the knee-joint, &c.
   Ligaments are composed of fibrous tissue, and are  inelastic.
Those connecting the joints pass from one extremity of the bone
to the other, mostly exterior to the synovial membrane.   They
are of two kinds, white and yellow;  the  tendons and most of
the ligaments are examples of  the former, and the ligamentum
nuchae of the latter.  When  ligaments are  cord-like, they are
called funicular, and when open at the ends like a bag, capsular.
   Synovial membranes are thin, closed serous sacks, which line
the movable joints.   They  secrete a viscous fluid, resembling
the white of an egg, called synovia, which lubricates  the joints
 and prevents friction.
   The  different kind  of articulations have  been divided into
 Synarthrosis, Amphiarthrosis, and Diarthrosis.
   Of the first, which implies immobility, there are several spe-
 cies—that which unites the bones of the skull is termed Sutura;
 that which unites the bones of the upper jaw Harmonia; that 
340               OF  THE  ARTICULATIONS.
 by which the vomer joins  the azygos, Schindylesis;  and  that
 joining the  teeth with the alveoli,  Gomjdiosis.
   In the second, which implies partial motion, the  bodies of
 the vertebrae and symphyses are included.
   In the third, diarthrosis, three species are included; Arthro-
 dia, that uniting the tarsal and carpal  bones;  Ginglymus, or
 hinge-like, as the elbow and wrist;  and  Enarthrodia,  or  ball
 and socket joint, as the  hip and  shoulder.
   In the articulation of the lower jaw there are: a capsular liga-
 ment, an internal  and  an  external  lateral ligament, a  stylo-
 maxillary ligament extending from  the styloid  process of the
 temporal bone to the angle of  the jaw;  an  inter-articular carti-
 lage—a thin oval plate dividing the joint into two cavities—with
 two synovial membranes, one on either side of the inter-articular
 cartilage;  or when the  cartilage is  imperfect but one synovial
 membrane.
   In the articulation of the  vertebrae  there  are: an anterior
 vertebral ligament, which is placed in front of the bodies of the
 vertebrae, and extends from the second cervical to the first sacral
 vertebra, gradually increasing in  breadth as it descends; a poste-
 rior vertebral ligament, which is placed at the posterior part of the
 bodies of the vertebra within the spinal canal,  and extends from
 the occiput  to the coccyx; it is narrow and thick in the thorax,
 wider below,  and  adheres more closely  to the  inter-vertebral
 substance than to the bodies of  the vertebrae, which  gives  it a
 serrated appearance.   Between the bodies of the vertebrae,  and
 adhering closely to  their  substances, are  twenty - three fibro-
 cartilaginous  disks;  these are arranged in concentric lamina,
 compressible,  and  gradually increase in thickness from above
 downwards.  Owing to this  compressibility, the trunk becomes
 shortened after the erect  position  has been maintained for several
 hours, but is restored to  its original length  again by an interval
 of rest in the horizontal  posture.
   The oblique processes are united by a capsular ligament.
   The spinous processes are joined together by the inter-spinal
ligaments, which fill  up  the spaces between them.   They are 
OF THE ARTICULATIONS.
341
however, wanting in the neck, and their place is supplied by the
ligamentum  nuchae, which extends from the seventh  cervical
vertebrae  to  the posterior occipital  protuberance, dividing the
muscles of the neck.
   The yellow ligaments, which are  elastic, are placed between
the bony  bridges of the vertebrae; there are twenty-three  pairs
of them.
   Between the occiput and atlas are: an anterior ligament, which
extends from the back parts of the occipital foramen to the  front
of the atlas; a posterior ligament, which extends from the back
part of the occipital foramen to the corresponding edge of the
atlas;  and a capsular ligament, surrounding the superior oblique
process of the atlas, and the condoloid process of the occiput.
   Between  the  atlas and  dentata are:  a transverse  ligament,
which passes across the atlas transversely from one  tubercle to
the other; two moderator  ligaments, extending from  the  sides
of the processus dentatus to the inner side of each occipital con-
dyle; a middle or straight ligament, passing from the  processus
dentatus to the anterior edge of the occipital foramen;  a  loose
capsular ligament surrounding  the oblique processes; and  some
ligamentous  bands, called  Lacerti ligamentosi,  reaching  from
the back part of the body of the dentata to the occiput.
   In the articulation of the bones of the pelvis, there are, unit-
ing the sacrum and ilium, an anterior sacro-iliac ligament, which
consists of short fibres passing  from  one  bone to  the  other;  a
posterior sacro-spinous ligament extending from the spinous pro-
cesses of the ilium to  the third and fourth transverse  processes
of the sacrum; and an anterior and posterior sacro-sciatic  liga-
ment; the posterior, which is much the  larger, arises  from the
posterior inferior spinous process of the ilium, the margin of the
sacrum, and  the first bone of the coccyx, and is inserted into
the inner  margin of the tuberosity of the ischium; the anterior,
which is in front of  the posterior, extends from the  side of the
sacrum to the spine of the ischium.  The articulating surfaces
of both the  sacrum and ilium are covered with cartilage.
   The obturator  ligament  passes  over the  thyroid  foramen 
342
OF THE ARTICULATIONS.
closing it up, with the exception of a small opening at its upper
part for the passage of the obturator vessels and nerves.
  In addition to the foregoing there is an iliolumbar ligament,
a lumbo-sacral  ligament, an  anterior  and posterior  coccygeal
ligament, and a sub-pubic ligament, the names  of which suffi-
ciently indicate their attachments.
  The articulation of the pubes—symphysis  pubis—consists
chiefly of a fibrocartilaginous substance, like that of the  ver-
tebrae.
  The Ribs in their articulation posteriorly with the vertebrae
have an anterior or radiated ligament, extending from the head of
the rib to the two contiguous vertebrae  and the intervening  car-
tilage; a capsular ligament enclosing the  head of the rib;  an
inter-articular ligament, extending from the  ridge  on the head
of the rib to the inter-vertebral substance;  a capsular ligament
connecting the transverse processes to  the tubercle of the  rib;
an internal, middle, and  external costo-transverse ligament,  ex-
tending from the transverse process  to the adjacent rib.
  In  the articulation  of  the  ribs anteriorly with  the  sternum
there is:  an anterior radiated  ligament, which passes  from the
cartilages of the true  ribs to the sternum; a  posterior radiated
ligament, having  the  same connections;  and  a costo-zyphoid
ligament, which  extends  from the  cartilages of the sixth  and
seventh ribs to the zyphoid or ensiform cartilage.
  In the articulation  of the  shoulder there are: uniting  the
clavicle and  sternum, a  capsular ligament, within which, and
dividing  the joint into two cavities,  is a wedge-shaped inter-
articular cartilage; an inter-clavicular ligament, connecting  the
two clavicles; and a rhomboid ligament, extending from inferior
edge of the clavicle to the cartilage  of  the first rib.
  Uniting the scapula and clavicle are:  a capsular ligament,
connecting the acromion  process of the scapula, and  the outer
end of the clavicle;  a coraco-clavicular ligament, consisting of
two  parts,  one called  conoid, the other  trapezoid, which extends
from the coracoid process to the  external extremity of the clav-
icle;  a bifid  ligament, which  goes from the coracoid process to 
OF THE ARTICULATIONS.
343
the clavicle and the cartilage of the first rib;  a coraco-acromial
ligament connecting  the coracoid and acromion processes;  and
a coracoid ligament which passes across  the coracoid notch.
   Uniting  the scapula and humerus, are, a loose capsular liga-
ment which  invests  the glenoid cavity and  the  neck of the
humerus; a coraco-humeral ligament,  a part  of the capsular,
which extends  to the  coracoid process; and a glenoid ligament
which consists of a ring of fibro-cartilage  attached to the edge
of the glenoid cavity, to increase its depth.
   In the articulation  of the  elbow joint there are,  a capsular
ligament, which surrounds the head  of the  humerus,  radius
and ulna; an internal lateral ligament, passing from the internal
condyle to the  coronoid and olecranon processes of the ulna; an
external lateral ligament, extending from the  external condyle
to the lateral ligament; an angular or coronary ligament, which
surrounds three-fourths of the head of  the radius, and extends
to either side of the lesser sigmoid cavity; and an interosseous
ligament, which fills up the space between the radius and ulna
throughout nearly their whole length.
   The articulation of the wrist, which is formed by the greater
sigmoid cavity of the  radius, and the scaphoid, semilunar and
cuneiform bones, has  a capsular ligament, an anterior and a pos-
terior ligament, and an internal and external lateral ligament.
The individual bones of the carpus are connected by  palmar and
dorsal ligaments.
   The bases of the metacarpal bones  are also attached  to  the
second row by palmar and dorsal ligaments.  The pisiform bone
and the thumb have distinct capsular ligaments.
   The fingers are attached to the metacarpal  bones by an inter-
nal  and external lateral  ligament; an anterior or palmar liga-
ment, and a posterior ligament furnished by the extensor tendon.
   The phalangeal bones are joined together by a similar arrange-
ment of ligaments.
   In the articulation of  the hip joint, formed by  the head of
the  thigh  bone  and the acetabulum,  the following ligaments
enter.  The  cotyloid  ligament,  which is a thick prismatic  ring 
344
OF THE ARTICULATIONS.
surrounding  the margin  of  the  acetabulum and increasing its
depth.  The  ligamentum  teres—round ligament—which is at-
tached to a  pit on  the head of  the femur, whence it passes in
two fasciculi to be inserted into the notch of the acetabulum;
the  cotyloid  ligament and  the  capsular ligament,  which en-
circles the acetabulum and the neck of the femur, and  is the
strongest ligament in the  body.
   In the articulation of  the lenee joint there are,  an anterior
ligament, called also  the ligament  of  the  patella, which  is a
continuation  of  the quadriceps muscle, is firmly attached  to the
patella, and inserted into  the tubercle of the  tibia; a posterior
ligament, also  called  ligament of Winslow, which extends ob-
liquely from  the external  condyle to the back  part of the inter-
nal tuberosity of the tibia; two semilunar cartilages, which are
prismatic rings attached to the margins of the tibia, to  deepen
its  articular  surface;  two crucial ligaments,  which cross each
other, the one extending from the front of the spine of the tibia
to the posterior  part of the inner face of the  external condyle,
the other  passing  from behind the spine of the tibia to the an-
terior part of the external face of the internal  condyle  of the
femur;  and an internal and external lateral ligament on either
side of the joint.
  The tibia and.fibula are united; at  the  superior  extremity,
by  an  anterior  and posterior ligament, which  pass  obliquely
between the heads of the  two bones before  and  behind; along
their length by an interosseous ligament, which fills up the space
between  the  bones,  except a small opening  at  the upper ex-
tremity to transmit the anterior tibial artery;  and at the lower
extremity,  by an  anterior and posterior ligament similar in ar-
rangement to those connecting the heads of the bones.
  The ankle joint is united by an internal and an external  late-
ral ligament; the  internal,  also called deltoid is triangular in
shape,  and has  its apex attached to the internal malleolus, and
its base to the os calcis, astragalus, and calcaneo-scaphoid  liga-
ment;  the external  consists  of three fasciculi which arise from 
OF THE SKIN.
345
the external malleolus, and are inserted into the astragalus and
os calcis.
   Articulation of the tarsus.—The astragalus is  united  to the
os calcis by a thick, strong, interosseous ligament, and by a pos-
terior ligament; the os calcis to the scaphoid by a superior and
an inferior calcaneo-scaphoid ligament; the os calcis and cuboid
by a superior and  inferior calcaneo-cuboid ligament;  and the
astragalus and scaphoid by a semicircular ligament which  passes
from the neck of the astragalus to  the edge of the concavity of
the scaphoid.  The three  cuneiform bones are joined to the
scaphoid, and to each other by dorsal, plantar and interosseous
ligaments.
   Articulation of the metatarsus.—The first of these bones has
a  strong capsular  ligament, attaching  its base to the internal
cuneiform; the second and  third have the base attached to the
middle and external cuneiform by dorsal and plantar ligaments;
and the bases of the fourth and fifth are joined to  the cuboid by
dorsal  and plantar ligaments. The heads of the metatarsal bones
are united to the phalanges by two lateral and a plantar liga-
ment,  and superiorly by an expansion of the extensor tendon j
and to each other by a strong transverse ligament.
   In the articulation of the phalanges there is an arrangement
of ligaments corresponding to that of the hand.

                        Of  the  Skin.

   The skin covers the entire body, and besides affording protec-
tion to the various parts, serves also as an organ of touch and
secretion.
   It is continuous with the mucous membrane, and at the ori-
fices of the canals leading  into the body, as the mouth, nose, &c,
is readily  converted into  it.  Its  color and thickness vary in
different races  and individuals, and in different parts of the same
individual. Climate has a great influence over it, the tendency
of parts exposed to tropical heat and light being to turn dark.
        44 
g^g                    OF THE SKIN.

   The skin  is covered  by a  great number  of wrinkles;  the
largest, those which appear on the forehead, face, etc., are caused
by the'eontractions of muscles,  and the flexion  of the joints;
others of a  finer description  are  produced  by the contractile
nature of the skin.
   Numerous hairs, perspiratory ducts, and pits showing the ori-
fices of sebaceous glands, and follicles, are contained in the skin;
the perspiratory ducts or pores are not visible  to the naked eye.
The facility with which  the skin slides  backwards and forwards
on most parts of the body is owing to  the looseness of the cel-
lular tissue beneath it.
   The skin consists of two layers,  the cutis  vera or  true skin,
also called  chorion, and the epidermis or cuticle.  Formerly  a
 third  layer, the rete mucosum, was admitted; but more recent
 observations have demonstrated this to  be merely a layer of the
 cuticle.
   Of the two layers the true skin is the thicker and deeper;  it
 is closely adherent to the cellular tissue, and  perfectly  white and
 Bemi-transparent in all persons.  The external surface  is covered
 with fine conical projections, called villi or papillae tactus ; the
 papillae are most numerous and distinct in those parts where
 there is much motion.  On the hands and feet they are arranged
 in double  rows,  which occasion  the  semi-circular   and spiral
 wrinkles of the cuticle  on these parts.  Each papillae  consists  of
 an artery, vein, and nerve, and the sensibility of a  part  is  in
 proportion to their number.
    The  texture of the  true skin  is fibrous; the irregular inter-
 lacing of fibres producing a mass  of net-work or areolae, through
 the  meshes  of which  the hairs,  nerves, blood-vessels, &c, are
 transmitted.  Its composition is of condensed cellular tissue, the
 yellow  fibrous element predominating where great elasticity is
 required, as in the arm pit; and  the white element where resis-
 tance is wanted,  as in the sole  of the  foot.  It unites readily
  with tannin, and forms leather. Boiling converts it into gelatine. 
OF THE SEBACEOUS GLANDS.
347
  Fig. 8.  Magnified representation of the
skin, a, Cuticle or epidermis; b, papillae tac-
tis or villi; c, cutis vera or true skin.

   The cuticle or epidermis varies in
thickness according  to  the amount of
pressure to which it is subject; in the
palms of the  hand, and the soles of
the  feet in individuals, who perform
manual labor, it becomes very thick.
It is not organized,  neither vessels nor
nerves being  traceable into it, but  is
composed of particles  arranged in la-
minae, or  layers; the  deepest being
granular, the  next somewhat flattened,
and those upon the surface mere horny
scales which are constantly being shed,
and  replaced  again by  others.   The
coloring matter  is  contained in the
lowermost layer, and is very abundant
in negroes, moles,  freckles, &c.   The
facility with which  the cuticle may be
divided into different  layers, owing to
its laminated arrangement,  formerly
caused the innermost layer to be con-
sidered distinct,  and to receive a sepa-
rate name, that of rete mucosum.

      Of the Sebaceous Glands.
  These consist of a blind, pouch-like
duct, which is lined by an epithelium
containing granules of sebaceous mat-
ter in its particles, and has an  orifice
opening  into  hair follicles,  or upon
the  general surface.   They are most
abundant on  the  scalp and face,  particularly about the nose.
There  are none on  the palms of the hands and  the  soles of
the feet.
  The secretion is of an oily nature, and serves to lubricate the
hair and skin; it  is this which gives  to linen  that has been worn
a long time a greasy appearance,  causes water when  applied to
the surface of the body to collect in drops, and gives rise  to the
 
348
OF THE NAILS AND nAIRS.
strong disagreeable smell in negroes, and persons who do not pay
proper attention  to  cleanliness.  Parasitic animalculao are fre-
quently found in  the ducts of these glands.

                       Of the Nails.
  The nails take  the place of  the  cuticle on the ends  of the
fingers and toes, and like the latter are readily separable  from
the true skin by maceration.  They correspond  with the hoofs
and talons of the  lower orders of animals.
  They consist of a root, body, and free extremity.  The root is
that part which is concealed;  it has a thin irregular edge,  is
white, thin,  soft, and about one-fifth of  the whole length of the
nail.  The body is that portion between the root and free extrem-
ity ; its under surface adheres closely to  the skin, which produces
it, and is hence called the  matrix;  it is  also soft and marked
by longitudinal grooves.
  The white part of the nail  near the root is called the crescent
or lunula, and is  caused  by the absence of vascularity.  At its
root the nail is received into a groove formed by the cutis  vera.

                       Of the Hairs.
   Hairs are found on almost every part of the skin except the
palms of the hands  and soles of the feet.  They vary in size and
color  in different  races, sexes, and individuals, and in different
parts  of the body. Those on the head attain  the greatest length,
and grow more  closely together  than  any  others—in females
they grow longer, and are more abundant than in males.  Those
of the face (the beard), when allowed to grow, are next in length
and are  thicker  than the others,  and more disposed to curl.
Generally the eyes and hair correspond  in color, and the darker
the hair the coarser.  It has been computed that a fouth of an
inch square  has upon it 147 black hairs, or 162 hazel, or 152
white.  In some  individuals the hairs  are  so much developed
as almost to conceal the skin.
  Each hair consists of a bulb and  a shaft or stalk;  the bulb is
the extremity contained within a  follicle of the skin,  and  the 
OF THE HAIRS.
349
   shaft is the part that projects beyond the surface.  The human
   hair is solid and not globular as is generally supposed.  It is con-
   tinuous with the cuticle lining the  follicle,  and is  arranged  in
*  lamina or scales, which overlap each  other like the shingles of
   a house; the middle portion has a looser and more porous struc-
   ture than the external,  and has  received the name  of medulla,
   while the external is termed  the cortex.   The hair is  nourished
   from  the bottom of the follicle, as the nail is from the matrix,
   or the cuticle from  the true skin.
     The hairs, when large, are used as organs of touch, and in
   some  animals, the whiskers of the cat, for instance, possess some
   degree of sensibility, which is owing  to the projection of a
   conoidal  papilla of  the follicle  furnished with  nerves, into the
   bottom of the  bulb. As a general rule,  however, they are void
   of sensibility.   The hairs receive no blood-vessels; their moisture
   is chiefly owing to  the secretion  of  the sebaceous follicles passing
   through  them by capillary attraction.  In those instances in which
   the hair  has suddenly become white from mental emotion, it has
   been  by some,  supposed to be owing to  the secretion  of a fluid
   acid,  which penetrates the tissue of  the  hair in this  way,  and
   destroys its color.
      The erection of the hair  in  some animals is  caused by the
   contraction of  the  subcutaneous muscle; and a similar effect in
   man, produced by great fright, is owing to the contraction of the
   occipito  frontalis muscle. Moisture lengthens the hairs and dry-
   ness  shortens them.
      When the hair falls off, it is occasioned by the drying up  of
   the fluids of the follicle or its death;  in the baldness  of old per-
   sons, the latter generally takes place, and consequently all efforts
   to restore it will be fruitless.  But when the hairs fall off from
  . sickness, the follicles remain, and  a new crop is soon produced.
    When  the hair becomes white from age, the change of color
    begins at the free extremity; but  if  the color is restored again,
    the change begins at the root.   In the disease known as  Plica
    Polonica, which consists in a matting together of the hair  by a
    glutinous substance from the cutaneous  glands, if the hairs are 
350
OF THE TEETH.
cut close to the skin they bleed;  this is owing to the elonga-
tion of the vascular papilla at their roots by disease.

                       Of the Teeth.
  The permanent teeth are thirty-two in number, sixteen being
placed in the alveolar processes of each jaw.   They are the har-
dest part of the human body.  The part of a tooth  above the
gum is called its crown;  the narrow portion surrounded by the
gum its neck;  and the portion within the alveolus its fang, or
root.   There are four classes of teeth, as follows: two incisors,
or cutting teeth, on each  side of each jaw next the middle line;
one cuspid, or pointed place  next to these outwardly; two bi-
cuspid, or double pointed; and three molars,  or grinding teeth.
Fig. 9.  Permanent teeth.
  The incisors have a bevelled edge which in early life is ser-
rated; their roots are single  and conoidal;  those  of the upper
jaw are the largest.
  The cuspid (pointed), or canine, which are placed between the •
incisors and bi-cuspides, have a conoidal body and longer roots
than any of the others.  Those of the upper jaw are commonly
known as eye-teeth, and those of the lower  as stomach-teeth.
  The bi-cuspides are next in size to the molars; their bodies
have two conical tubercles, or grinding points, the external  of 
OF THE TEETH.
351
which  is the  larger.   The root  is flat and deeply grooved on
either side.   The two posterior superior  have each two  roots;
the others generally but one.
   The molars, of  which there are  six in  each jaw, have large
quadrilateral bodies, surmounted  by four or five grinding points;
their roots  are shorter than  those of the bi-cuspides, and  are
divided into two, three, four,  or even five branches.  The third,
called the wisdom-tooth, is generally smaller than the other two.
   In the centre of each tooth is a cavity, which is filled by a
pulp, chiefly composed of an artery, vein, and nerve, which enter
through the  small orifice at  the extremity of the root.  This
pulp is soft, of a gray color, and extremly sensitive.
   Three textures enter into  the structure of each tooth—the
ivory, or bony portion, the  enamel, and the cementum.  The
first, which forms the principal part of the tooth, is arranged in
radiating fibres;  it  contains  neither  blood-vessels, nor  nerves,
nor are its particles absorbed  as  those of  bone.   Chemically, it
consists  of  phosphate of lime, gelatine, and water.  The  enamel
is the hardest portion, it covers the body of the tooth, is white,
brittle, and  semi-transparent, thicker on  the grinding  surface,
and terminates by a  thin edge at the neck.   It is also arranged
in radiating  fibres,  and  has  neither blood-vessels, nor  nerves.
The cementum is a thin coating  extended over the root of the
 tooth, which in structure resembles bone.
   The periods at which  the permanent  teeth make their ap-
 pearance are as follows: the four first molars, and the two  inferior
 incisors from the 6th to the  8th year;  the two superior central
 incisors from the 7th to the  9th year; the four lateral  incisors
 from the 8th to the  10th year;  the  four first bi-cuspides from
 the 9th to  the 11th  year;  the four cuspidati from the  12th to
 the 13th year; the four second bi-cuspides from the 11th to the
 13th year;  the four second  molars from the 12th to the 14th
 year; and  finally the four last molars from the 18th to the 30th
 year,  or even later in some instances. 
352                  OF TnE MUSCLES.
  Fig. 10.  The dceiiluous, or milk-teeth,  a a central incisors; bb lateral
incisors;  c c cuspidati, or eye- and stomach-teeth; d d first molars;  e e
second molars.

  The rudiments of all the teeth, both of the  first  and second
set, fifty-two in number, are contained in the gum of the infant.
The first set,  called the  deciduous, or milk-teeth, are twenty in
number, viz. four incisors, two cuspidati, and four molars in each
jaw.  As with the temporary teeth there is a good deal of irre-
gularity in the time of their appearance; usually the four cen-
tral incisors appear from the  5th to the 10th month; the four
lateral  incisors from  the 8th to the 13th month;  the four first
molars  from the 10th to the  14th month;  the  four cuspidati
from  the 12th to the  18th month;  and the four  second molars
from  the 24th to the 30th month.  The teeth of the lower jaw
generally make their appearance a short time before  those of the
upper.  About the seventh year, the time at which  the first of
the permanent teeth make their appearance,  the  first set begin
to loosen and fall out, generally, in the order in which they came.

                      Of the  Muscles.
   The muscles are the organs  by which the  various motions of
the body are performed; they  are constituted  of the substance
commonly called flesh, and possess the  power  of shortening
themselves, called contractility, and which  produces motion. 
OF THE MUSCLES.
353
Each muscle is composed of a number of fasciculi (bundles of
fibres) of various size;  these  again  are  made  up of filaments.
Every muscle and fasciculus is enveloped, and  held together by
a portion of cellular membrane, called its sheath, which is tough
and  elastic, and becomes more delicate the smaller the fasciculus
or filament it surrounds.
   The uses of the sheaths are  to facilitate  the sliding of the
muscles upon each other, and by their pressure to add to  their
strength and tenacity.   Towards their extremities the  muscles
are attached to a white, shining, fibrous structure termed tendons,
which serve to fasten them securely to  the  surfaces of bones;
the extremity, which is the more fixed, is  termed the head, or
origin, and that which is the more  movable, the  tail, or inser-
tion;  and the middle is the belly, or swell.  The fibres of the
most simple muscles are longitudinal.   In others  the fibres are
disposed in rays  which converge to a  tendinous point, hence
called radiate  muscles;  others again have their fibres converg-
ing to one or both sides of  a tendon like the plumes of a  pen;
these are called the penniform, and  the bi-penniform.
   There  are  two  classes of muscles, the voluntary, or those
which are influenced by the will, and the involuntary, or those
not governed  by the  will.   The first class, which is much the
most numerous, are placed between the  skeleton and the  skin,
and constitute the chief bulk of the body; the second class are
contained  within the great cavities of the skeleton, and  enter
into  the  formation of the digestive, circulatory, and urinary
organs, performing most of the internal movements of the ani-
mal economy.   The  color  of the muscles of  voluntary motion
is of a decided red, that of the involuntary muscles is lighter;
the fibres of the latter,  also, cross each other and interlace.
   The muscles are divided into four parts, viz.  those of the head
and neck; those of the trunk;  those of the upper extremities;
and those  of the lower extremities.
45 
3.")4          MUSCLES OF THE  HEAD AND  NECK.
Muscles of the Head and Neck.
Fig. 11.
                      First, of the Face.

  The occipito frontalis is a thin muscle passing from the back

to the front of the head immediately beneath the scalp; it has

four bellies, and arises from the superior semi-circular ridge of

the occiput, and is inserted into the superior margin of the orbi-

cularis oris, and corrugator supercilia, and into the internal  an-

gular process of the  os frontis and nasi.  It pulls the  skin of

head backwards aud forwards, and elevates the eye-brows, mak-

ing transverse wrinkles.
                                     Fig. 11.  View of the muscles
                                   of the head and neck.  1, 2, 3
                                   Occipito frontalis;  4 orbicularis
                                   palpebrarum; 5 corrugator super-
                                   cilii; 6 compressor naris ;  7 orbi-
                                   cularis oris; 8 levator labii supe-
                                   rioris alaeque nasi;  9 levator an-
                                   gulioris; 10 zygomaticus minor;
                                   11 zygomaticus major; 12 depres-
                                   sor labii inferioris; 13 depressor
                                   anguli oris ; 14 levator mentii; 15
                                   masseter; 16 temporalis ; 18  buc-
                                \£ cinator; 24 mylo-hyoidcus; 25
                                   stcrno-cleideo-mastoideus.

                                     The compressor naris arises
                                   from the root of the ala nasi,
                                   and is inserted into its fellow
                                   on the dorsum of the nose,
                                   and into the lower  part of
                                   the  os nasi.   It serve both
                                   to  compress  and  dilate the
                                   nostril.

   The orbicularis palpebrarum is a  sphincter surrounding  the

 orbits of the eyes; it arises from the nasal process of the supe-

 rior maxillary bone, the os unguis, the internal angular process

 of  the os frontis, and the superior margin of the internal palpe-

 bral  ligament;  and  is inserted into the orbital and nasal  pro-

 cesses of the superior maxillary,  and into the inferior margin of

 the palpebral ligament.   It closes the eyes.

   The corrugator supercilii arises  from  the  internal  angular
 
MUSCLES OF THE  HEAD AND NECK.         355
process of the os frontis, and  is inserted  into the occipito fron-
talis and orbicularis.   It is small and  pointed, and makes the
vertical wrinkles of the forehead.
   The levator labii superioris alasque nasi  is placed at the side
of the nose; it arises from the nasal and orbitar processes of the
superior maxillary bone, and is inserted into the upper lip  and
the wing of the nose.   It draws  the upper lip and wing of the
nose upwards.
   The levator anguli oris is small and concealed  by the  last;
it arises  from the superior maxillary bone below the infra-orbital
foramen, and is inserted into the angle  of the mouth.  Its use
is to elevate the angle of the mouth.
   The zygomaticus minor arises from the fore part of the malar
bone, and is inserted into the upper  lip.   It draws the corner
of the mouth obliquely upwards and outwards.
   The zygomaticus major arises from the malar bone outside of
the last, and is inserted into the  corner of the mouth.  Its use
same as the last.
   The depressor labii superioris  alasque nasi arises from the al-
veolar processes of the incisor and canine teeth, and is inserted
into the wing of the nose and upper lip.  It depresses the upper
 lip and  the wing of the nose.
   The depressor anguli oris  arises from  the base  of  the lower
jaw at the side of the chin, and is  inserted  into the corner of
 the mouth.  It draws the corner of  the mouth downwards.
    The depressor labii inferioris  arises from the base of the lower
 jaw, beneath the last, and is inserted into the whole side of the
 lower lip.   It draws the lip downwards.
    The levator menti, or labii inferioris arises from the alveolar
 processes of the lateral incisor and canine teeth, and  is inserted
 into the lower lip.   It elevates the lip.
    The buccinator arises from the coronoid process of the lower
 jaw, the tuber  of the upper jaw, and  the  alveolar processes of
 both jaws, and is inserted into the corner of the mouth and lips.
 It draws the corner  of the mouth backwards. 
356          MUSCLES  OF THE nEAD AND NECK.

  The orbicularis oris is a circular muscle, which surrounds the
mouth, constituting the  principal part  of the  lips;  it has  no
Ion" origin but is attached to the surrounding muscles, and acts
as the antagonist to most of them.
  The masscter arises from the upper maxillary, malar, and the
zygomatic process of the  temporal bones, and is inserted into
the angle and outer surface of the lower jaw.  It closes the jaws,
and also draws the lower jaw backwards and forwards.
  The temporalis arises from the temporal fascia, and from the
sides of the temporal, frontal, and parietal bones, and  is inserted
into the coronoid process of the lower jaw.  It pulls the lower
jaw upwards.
  The ptcryegoideus cxternus arises from the pterygoid, spinous,
and temporal processes of the sphenoid bone, and from the tuber
of the upper maxillary, and is inserted  into the  neck of the
lower jaw.   It draws the lower jaw upwards.
  The pterygoideus internus  arises from the pterygoid fossa,
Eustachian tube,  and internal pterygoid process, and  is inserted
into the inner surface of the neck of the  lower jaw.   It draws
the jaw upwards.

                    Second, of  the Neck.
  There  are two layers of cellular tissue in the neck, called the
superficial, and the deep seated fascia;  the first is immediately
beneath the skin, and a continuation  of the  fascia covering the
whole body;  the second is  more  condensed, and extends from
the ligament nuchae to  the sternum, investing the several muscles
and blood-vessels.
   The p>l'atisma myoides is a broad thin muscle, placed between
two laminae of  the superficial fascia, and is attached to the cel-
lular tissue below the clavicle,  and to the muscles at the side  of
the face and  lower jaw.   It elevates the skin of  the neck.
   The  sterno-eleiilo-mastoijfeus arises  from  the upper part  of
the  sternum, and the sternal  end of the clavicle, and passing
obliquely across the neck is inserted into the mastoid  process,
and the adjoining ridge of the occipital bone.  It  forms a pro- 
MUSCLES OF THE  HEAD AND NECK.         357
minent ridge on the outside of the neck.  Its use is to draw the
chin to the sternum.
   The sterno-hyoideus arises from  the sternum, clavicle, and car-
tilage of the first rib, and is inserted into the lower edge of the
hyoid bone.   It draws the hyoid bone towards the  sternum.
   The sterno-thyoideus arises  from the sternum and cartilage of
the first rib, and is inserted into the side of the thyroid cartilage.
It draws this  cartilage downwards.
   The thyro-hyoideus arises from  the side of the  thyroid car-
tilage, and is inserted into the base and cornu of the os hyoideus.
It draws the os hyoideus and  thyroid cartilage  together.
   The omo-hyoideus arises from the upper edge of the scapula,
and is inserted into the base of the os hyoideus.   It  draws the
os hyoideus downwards.
   The digastricus  arises from the fossa at the  base of the mas-
toid process of the temporal bone, and is inserted into the base
of the lower jaw at the side of its symphysis;  its middle is ten-
dinous, and passes through the stylo-hyoid muscle.  Its use  is
to raise the  hyoid bone, and open the mouth, even when the
lower jaw is  fixed.
   The stylo-hyoideus arises from the middle and lower part of
the styloid process  of the temporal bone, and is inserted into the
base and cornu of  the os hyoides.  It draws the os hyoides up-
wards and backwards.
   The stylo-glossus arises from the upper  and internal part of
the styloid process, and  is inserted into the side of the root of
the tongue.   It draws the tongue backwards.
   The stylo-pharyngeus  arises from the inner side of the root of
the styloid process, and is inserted into the side of  the pharynx
between  the superior and middle constrictors, and is inserted
into the posterior margin of the thyroid cartilage.  It draws the
larynx and pharynx upwards.
   The mylo-hyoideus arises from the root of the alveolar process
of the lower jaw, and is inserted into  a  white tendinous  line,
placed between  it  and its fellow.  It forms the floor of^the 
3"l8          MUSCLES OF  THE  HEAD AND  NECK.

mouth.   Its use is to draw the  os hyoides upwards and project
the tongue.
   The geniodiyoideus is placed beneath the last, and arising
from the tubercle  on the posterior  side  of the chin, is inserted
into the body of the hyoid bone.
   The following seven pairs of  muscles are  placed  at  the front
and sides of the cervical vertebrae.
   The longus colli arises from the three upper dorsal vertebrae,
and the transverse processes of  the five lower cervical vertebrae;
and is inserted into the bodies of all the cervical vertebrae.   It
bends the neck forwards and to one side.
   The rectus capitis anticus major arises  from the  transverse
processes of the third, fourth, and fifth cervical vertebrae, and is
inserted into the cuneiform process of the os occipitus.  It bends
the head forwards.
   The rectus capitis anticus minor arises from the front of the
first cervical vertebrae, and is inserted into the basilar process of
the occiput.  It bends the head forwards.
   The rectus ctq^ilis lateralis arises from the front of the trans-
verse process of the atlas, and is inserted into the ridge leading
from  the condyle  to the  mastoid process of the occiput.  It draws
the head slightly  to one side.
   The scalenus anticus  arises from  the transverse processes of
the fourth,  fifth, and sixth cervical vertebrae, and is inserted into
the upper surface of the first rib near its middle.  It bends  the
neck  forwards, or elevates the first rib.
   The scalenus medius  arises from  the transverse processes of
all the cervical vertebrae, and is inserted into the upper  surface
of the first rib from the middle to the  tubercle.  Its use  same
as the last.
   The scalenus posticus arises  from the transverse processes of
the fifth  and sixth cervical vertebrae,  and  is  inserted into  the
upper face  of the second rib, beyond its tubercle.  It bends the
neck, and raises the second rib.  The use  of the three scalenii
muscles, acting together, is to elevate the ribs, and bend the neck
 to one side. 
MUSCLES  OF THE TRUNK.
359
                  Muscles  of the Trunk.

          First,  those of the front of the Thorax.
  The pectoralis  major  forms the large fleshy cushion of the
chest.   It arises from  the first two bones of the sternum, the
cartilages of  the fifth and sixth ribs,  the  anterior two-thirds of
the clavicle, and the tendon of the external oblique muscle, and
is inserted by a broad  thin tendon into the outer edge of the
bicipital groove of the humerus.  It draws the arm inwards and
forwards, and depresses it when raised.
  The pectoralis minor is beneath the last;  it arises from the
upper edges of the third, fourth, and fifth ribs, and  is inserted
into the inner faces of the coracoid process of  the scapula.  It
draws  the scapula inwards and downwards.
  The subclavius arises from the  cartilage of the first rib, and
is inserted into the lower face of the  clavicle.  It is  placed im-
mediately beneath the clavicle, and draws it downwards.
  The  serratus magnus, or  serratus major anticus  is a broad
muscle at the sides of the ribs;   it arises  from the nine upper
ribs by fleshy digitations, the five lower of which are connected
with the internal oblique muscle, and is inserted into  the  base
of  the scapula.  It draws the scapula forwards.
   The intercostales  fill up the spaces—eleven in number—be-
tween the ribs.  There are two to each space, an external, and
an  internal.   The external arises from the transverse process of
the vertebrae, and the inferior acute edge of the  rib, and is in-
serted into the superior rounded edge of the rib below; its fibres
passing obliquely forwards and downwards.  The internal arises
from the inferior edge of the rib, and is inserted into the supe-
rior rounded edge of the rib below;  its fibres  pass obliquely
backwards and downwards.   The use  of  the intercostales  is to
draw the ribs together.
    The triangularis sterni is on the posterior surface of the car-
tilages of the ribs; it arises from the ensiform cartilage and the
second bone of the sternum, and is inserted into the cartilage of 
360
MUSCLES OF  THE TRUNK.
the third, fourth, fifth, and sixth ribs.   Its use is to depress the
ribs, and thereby diminish the cavity of the thorax.

                             Fig. 12.
  Fig.  12.  View  of the muscles in front  of the thorax and  abdomen.
1 Pectoralis major; 2 deltoid;  3 latissimus dorsi; 4 origin of the serratus
magnus ;  5 subclavius;  6 pectoralis minor; 7 coraco-brachialis ;  8 biceps;
9 coracoid process of the scapula;  10 serratus magnus;  11 external inter-
costal muscle; 12 external oblique; 13 aponeurosis of the external oblique;
14 and  15 Poupart's ligament;  16 rectus;  17 pyramidalis;  18 internal ob-
lique ;  19 tendon of the internal oblique and transversalis; 20 passage of
the spermatic cord.

               Second, muscles  of the abdomen.
   Between the skin  and the muscles of the abdomen is a layer
of condensed  cellular  substance, called  the fascia superficialis 
MUSCLES OF  THE  TRUNK.
361
abdominis: it may be traced upwards over the thorax to the
neck and  face, and  downwards  to  the thigh.  It is generally
blended with fat, and in the groin encloses the lymphatic glands,
and the external pudic vessels between its laminae.
   There are five pairs of abdominal muscles, viz. the  external
oblique,  internal oblique, rectus abdominis, pyramidalis,  and
transversalis.
   The obliquus exlernus  arises from the eight inferior  ribs, by
tendinous and fleshy heads, the  five upper  of which are  inter-
locked with those of the serratus  anticus,  and the three  lower
with  those  of the latissimus dorsi;  its fibres pass obliquely
downwards and forwards, and are inserted into the whole length
of the linea alba, and into the anterior half  or two-thirds of the
crest  of  the ilium : the  tendon  also  extends anteriorly to the
body  and symphysis of the  pubes,  forming thereby Poupart's
ligament.
   The linea alba, in the  middle line of the body, is formed by
the union of the tendons  of the three broad muscles on  either
side of the abdomen.  On either side of the linea alba,  and two
or three  inches from it,  is another line formed  by the same
tendons, called linea  semilunaris.  The use of  the  external
oblique is to compress the viscera of the abdomen, and  approxi-
mate  the pelvis and thorax.
   The obliquus internus lies beneath the last, and its fibres pass
in an  opposite direction; it arises from  the three inferior spinous
processes  of the lumbar vertebrae, all those of the  sacrum, the
crista of the ilium, and the upper half of Poupart's ligament;
and is inserted into  the cartilages of the six inferior ribs, the
ensiform cartilage, and into  the whole length of the linea alba.
At the linea alba the tendon is divided into two laminae, which
enclose the rectus muscle.  Its use is the same as that of the
internal oblique.
   The transversalis abdominis is underneath the last, and arises
from the transverse processes of  the last dorsal and four  upper
lumbar vertebrae, the crest of the ilium, the outer half of Pou-
part's ligament, and from the cartilages of the six or seven lower
       46 
362               MUSCLES  OF THE TRUNK.

ribs; and is inserted into the ensiform cartilage, and linea alba.
At the pubes it is inserted  in common with the tendon of the
internal oblique behind the external abdominal ring. Just above
this insertion it is divided into two lamina to enclose the pyrami-
dalis muscle.  It compresses the viscera of the abdomen.
   The rectis  abdominis  arises  from the symphysis and body of
the pubes, and passing upwards between the layers of the tendon
of the external oblique, increasing in breadth as it ascends, is
inserted into  the  ensiform  cartilage, and  tho fifth,  sixth  and
seventh ribs.  It has several tendinous intersections crossing it,
called  linea transversae.   Its use is to draw the thorax towards
the abdomen.
   The pyramidalis is placed at the lower and front part of the
rectus, and is about three inches long; it arises  from the body
of the pubes, and is inserted into the linea alba.  Sometimes it
is wanting.  It gives strength to the lower part of the abdomen.
   The cremaster is commonly considered as a portion of the in-
ternal oblique, as previous to the  descent of the testicle it forms
the lower edge of this muscle.  It envelops the testicle and cord,
and is inserted into the tendons of the internal oblique and trans-
versalis.  It draws  up  the testicle.
   The fascia transversalis is placed between  the  abdominal
muscles and the peritoneum; it is thin and tough,  and  has an
opening in it, to transmit the spermatic cord, which is called the
internal abdominal ring.

Third, muscles of the upper and posterior part of the abdomen.
   The diaphragm is  a  movable, muscular  septum, or division,
placed between the cavities of the thorax and abdomen.  Above,
it is in contact with the pericardium and lungs, and below, with
the liver, stomach, and spleen.  It consist of two portions, called
the greater and lesser muscle.   The greater arises from the ensi-
form cartilage, and the  six  inferior ribs  on  each side, its fibres
converge towards  the centre to be inserted into the cordiform
tendon.  The lesser has two bellies, called the crura, the one on
the right side being the larger; it arises  from the second, third, 
MUSCLES OF THE  TRUNK.
363
and fourth lumbar vertebrae, and is also inserted into the cordi-
form tendon.  This tendon, so called from its resemblance to a
heart,  is large and  shining, and nearly horizontal in the erect
posture; it has its apex toward the sternum, and its notch to-
wards  the  spine;  its summit is about on a line with  the lower
end of the  second bone of the sternum.
  There are three openings or foramina in the diaphragm; the
first, situated in the  back part of the muscle near the spine, is
called  the  foramem  oesophageum.  It is elliptical in shape, and
transmits the oesophagus  and par vagum nerves.  The  second,
called  the foramen quadratum,  is in the centre of the cordiform
tendon and transmits the ascending vena cava.  The third, the
hiatus aorticus, is in front of  the vertebrae, and between the
crurao; it  gives passage to the aorta,  thoracic duct,  and great
splanchnic nerves.
   The quadratus lumborum arises from  the crista of the ilium,
and is inserted into  the last dorsal  and all the lumbar vertebrae,
and into the  lower edge of the last rib.   It bends the loins  to
one side, and pulls down the last rib.
   The psoas parvus arises  from  the last dorsal  and the first
lumbar vertebrae, and is inserted  into the linea innominata and
fascia iliaca. It draws up the sheath of the femoral vessels. Some-
times it is absent.
   The psoas magnus arises from the transverse processes of all
the lumbar vertebrae, and from the bodies  of the  four upper
lumbar and  the last dorsal vertebrae;  and is  inserted into the
lesser  trochanter of  the femur,  and for about an inch below it.
   The iliacus internus arises from the transverse process of the
last lumbar vertebrae, the costa and crest of the ilium, and from
the capsula of  the hip joint; and is inserted into the tendon of
the psoas magnus.   It assists the latter muscle in bending  the
body forwards  and drawing the thigh upwards.

                Fourth, muscles  of the  bade.
   The trapezius is  a broad muscle immediately under the skin
of the back; it arises from the occipital  protuberance and  the 
364
MUSCLES OF THE  TRUNK.
superior semicircular ridge of the occiput, from the spinous pro-
cesses of the neck by the ligamentum nuchae, and from all those
of the  back;   and  is  inserted  into  the  external third  of the
clavicle, and the acromion process and spine  of the scapula.  It
draws the scapula towards the spine.
  The latissimus dorsi covers  the whole of the lower part of
the back ; it arises  from the seven  inferior  spinous processes of
the back, from all those of the loins and sacrum, and from three
or four  of the last  ribs; and is  inserted into the posterior ridge
of the bicipital groove along with the teres minor.  It draws tho
humerus downwards and backwards.
  The  serratus inferior posticus  arises from  the two inferior
spinous processes of the back, and the three superior of the loins,
and  is  inserted into the four inferior  ribs.  It draws the riba
downwards.
  The rliomboideus minor arises from the three inferior spinous
processes of the neck;  and is inserted into the base of the sca-
pula opposite the spine.
  The rhomboideus major  arises  from the last spinous process
of the neck, and the four superior of  the  back; and is inserted
into  the base of the scapula below the spine.  These two muscles
draw the scapula upwards and backwards.
  The serratus superior posticus arises from the three inferior
spinous processes of the neck, and the two superior of the back;
and  is inserted into the second, third, fourth and fifth ribs.  It
draws the ribs upwards.
  The levator scapulae arises from  the three, four, or  five supe-
rior transverse  processes of the neck;  and is inserted into  the
angle of the scapula and its base above  the spine.   It draws the
scapula  upwards.
  The splenius arises from  the spinous processes of the five in-
ferior cervical  and the four superior dorsal vertebrae;  and is in-
serted into the occipital  bone between  the  semicircular ridges,
and  into the  transverse processes  of the two superior cervical
vertebrae.  The part which goes to the head is called splenius 
                   MUSCLES  OF THE  TRUNK.                365

capitus, and  that which  goes  to the neck, splenius colli.   It
draws the head and neck backwards.

                              Fig. 13.
  Fig. 13. View of the muscles of the back.  1, 2 The trapezias; 3 acro-
mion process and spine of scapula ; 4 latissimus dorsi; 5 deltoid; 6 infra-
spinatus, and teres minor and major; 7 external oblique;  8 gluteus medius ;
9 glutei maximi; 10 levator anguli scapulae;  11 & 12 rhomboideus minor
and major ; 13 splenius capitis ; 14 splenius colli; 15 vertebral aponuerosis
16 serratus posticus inferior; 17 supra spinatus ; 18 infra spinatus ; 19 teres
minor;  20 teres major; 21 long head of the triceps;  22 serratus magnus;
23 internal oblique.

   The sacro-lumbalis and longissimus dorsi arise in common

from  the spinous and  transverse processes of the  loins and 
366
MUSCLES OF THE TRUNK.
sacrum, and from  the crest of the ilium; and the first is in-
serted into the angles of the ribs.  The latter,  which is nearest
the spine, is inserted into all  the  transverse  processes of tho
vertebrae of the back except the first, and into the under-edges
of all the ribs beyond their tubercles, except the two last.  They
keep the spine erect, and draw down the ribs.
   The spinalis dorsi arises  from the three lower spinous pro-
cesses of the back,  and the two upper of the loins; and is in-
serted into the nine upper spinous  processes of the back except
the first; it is almost entirely tendinous. Its use is to keep the
spine erect.
   The cervicalis descendens arises from the four superior ribs,
and  is inserted  into the fourth, fifth, and sixth transverse pro-
cesses of the back.  It draws the neck backwards.
   The transversalis cervicis  arises from the five superior trans-
verse processes of the back;  and is inserted into the five middle
transverse  processes of the neck.  It draws the head and neck
backwards.
   The trachelo-mastoid arises  from the three upper transverse
processes of the back, and the five inferior of  the neck; and is
inserted into the mastoid  process.
   The complexus arises from transverse processes  of the four in-
ferior cervical, and of the  superior  dorsal vertebrae; and is
inserted into the os occipitus between its semicircular ridges.  It
draws the head backwards.
   The semi-spinalis cervicis arises from the transverse processes
of the six upper dorsal vertebrae; and is inserted into the spinous
processes  of the five middle cervical vertebrae.  It  draws the
neck obliquely backwards.
   The semi-spinalis dorsi arises from the transverse processes
of the seventh, eighth, ninth, and tenth  dorsal vertebrae, and is
inserted into the spinous  processes of the two lower cervical, and
five upper dorsal vertebrae.  It draws  the  spine obliquely back-
wards.
   The multifidus spinas  arises from the oblique and transverse
processes of all  the sacral, lumber and  dorsal vertebrae, and is 
MUSCLES OF THE  TRUNK.
367
Fig. 14.
 inserted  into the  spinous processes of all the vertebrae of the
 loins and back, and of the four inferior of the neck.  It twists
 the spine backwards, and keeps it erect.
  Fig. 14. Posterior views  of  the  neck,
 thorax, abdomen, and pelvis.  1, 2, 3 Sacro-
 lumbalis, and longissimus dorsi; 4 spinalis
 dorsi; 5 cervicalis descendens;  6 trans-
 versalis  cervicis;   7 trachelo mastoid;
 8 complexus; 10 semi-spinalis dorsi; 11 se-
 mi-spinalis cervicis; 12 rectus capitis pos-
 ticus  major;  13 rectus capitis posticus
 minor;  14 obliquus superior; 15 obliquus
 inferior; 16 multifidus spinas; 17 levatores
 costarum; 18 inter-transversalis.

   The rectus capitis posticus major
 arises from  the spinous  process of
 the dentata, and is  inserted into the
 inferior semicircular ridge  of  the
 occiput  and  a part  of  the surface
 below it.  It  turns the  head,  and
 draws it backwards.
   The rectus capitis posticus minor
 arises from the tubercle of the atlas,
 and is  inserted  into  the  occiput at,
 and below the inferior  semicircular
 ridge. It draws the head backwards.
   The obliquus superior arises from
 the transverse process of  the atlas,
 and is  inserted  into  the outer end
 of  the inferior semicircular ridge of
 the occiput.  It draws the  head back-
 wards.
   The obliquus inferior arises from
 the spinous process of the  dentata,
 and is inserted into the  transverse
process of the first cervical vertebrae. It rotates the first vertebrae
 on  the second.
   The  inter - spindles are  short  muscles, placed  between  the
spinous processes of all  the vertebrae.  They are double in the
neck; tendinous  in the back;  and single  and well  marked in
the loins.  They keep the spine erect.
   The inter-transversalis  are placed between all the transverse
processes.  They draw these processes together.
 
368       MUSCLES OF THE  UPPER EXTREMITIES.

   The  levatorcs  costarum.   There  are  twelve of these small
muscles on either side of the  spine;  they arise from the trans-
verse processes of the last cervical, and the eleven superior dorsal
vertebrae, and are inserted into the upper edge of the  two next
ribs below.  They elevate the  ribs.

             Muscles of the upper  extremities.
   The  muscles  of  the upper extremity are covered with the
brachial fascia, which extends  from  the  shoulder to the hand.
It forms  at the  wrist the anterior  and posterior annular liga-
ments,  which  holds down the flexor  tendons of the hand  and
fingers. In the hand it forms  the palmar aponeurosis.
               First,  muscles of the  shoulder.
   The deltoid passes over the top of  the shoulder,  giving to  it
its rotundity:  it  arises from the spine of the scapula, the acro-
mium process, and the outer third of the clavicle,  and is inserted
into the triangular roughness near the middle of the humerus.
It raises the humerus.
   The supra-spinatus scapulae arises from the whole of the fossa
Bupra-spinata,  and is inserted into the inner facet of the greater
tuberosity of the humerus.  It raises the arm, and turns it out-
wards.
   The infraspinatus scapulae arises from the whole of the fossa
infra-spinata, and is inserted into the  middle facet of the greater
tuberosity of the humerus.  It rolls  the humerus outwards  and
backwards.
   The teres minor arises from  the lesser costa of  the  scapula,
and is inserted into the outer facet of the  greater tuberosity of
the humerus.   It rotates the humerus outwards, and draws  it
downwards and backwards.
   The teres major arises from the posterior surface  of the angle
of the scapula, and from a part of its inferior costa; and is in-
serted into the posterior ridge  of the bicipital groove along with
the tendon of  the latissimus dorsi.
   The  subscapularis arises from the  whole of the inferior or
thoracic surface of the  scapula, and  is inserted into the lesser 
MUSCLES OF THE  UPPER EXTREMITIES.       369
tuberosity of the humerus.  It rotates the humerus inwards and
draws it downwards.
                Second,  muscles  of the arm.
  The  biceps flexor cubiti has  two heads, one the long head,
arising from the superior extremity of the glenoid cavity of the
scapula, and passing through the joint and bicipital groove ; the
other,  called the short head, arising from the coracoid process
of the scapula.  It is  inserted into the posterior rough parts of
the tubercle of the radius.  Its use is to flex the fore-arm.
  The  coraco-brachialis arises in common with the short head
of the biceps from the middle facet of the coracoid process of
the scapula, and is inserted by  a  rough ridge into the  internal
side of  the middle of the humerus.  It draws the arm upwards
and inwards.
  The brachialis internus  arises  from the anterior and  lower
half of the humerus,  and  is inserted  into the  rough surface
at the  root of the coronoid process of  the ulna.   It flexes the
fore-arm.
  The triceps extensor cubicti arises by three heads,  the first,
called the longus, from a rough  ridge on the inferior edge  of the
scapula; the second, the brevis, from a ridge  on  the back part
of the humerus just below the head; and the  third, the brachia-
lis internus, from the inner side of the  humerus near the inser-
tion of the teres major.  It is inserted into the back-part  of the
olecranon process.  It  extends the fore-arm.
   The anconeus arises from the external condyle of the humerus,
and is inserted into the ulna below the olecranon process.  It
extends the fore-arm.
               Third,  muscles of the fore-arm.
   There are eighteen  of these; eight on the  front of the fore-
arm, which are  the flexors, and  ten on the  back part,  which
are the extensors.  The  last arise principally from the external
condyle.
   On the  front are :
   The pronator radii teres, arising from the internal condyle of
        47 
370        MUSCLES  OF THE  UPPER EXTREMITIES.
the humerus, and the coronoid process of the ulna; and is in-
serted into the middle and back part of the radius.
   The flexor carpi radialis, arising from the internal condyle
of the humerus, the  adjacent  fascia,  and from the upper part
of the ulna, and is inserted into the base of the metacarpal bone
of the fore-finger.  It flexes the hand.
Fig. 16.
Fig. 15
                                                Fig. 15.  View of the
                                              superficial  muscles on
                                              the  front of the fore-
                                              arm.  1  Lower part  of
                                              the  biceps;  2 part  of
                                              the  biachiali.s anticus;
                                              3 part of  tho  triceps;
                                              4 pronator  radii teres;
                                              5 (lexor carpi radiulis ; 6
                                              palmarus longus; 7 part
                                              of the flexor  sublimus
                                              digitorum; 8 flexor car-
                                              pi ulnaris; 9 palmar fas-
                                              cia; 10 palmaris brevis
                                              muscle;   11  abductor
                                              pollicis ;  12 part of tho
                                              ilexor  brevis  pollicis;
                                              13 supinator longus; 14
                                              extensor  ossis  metacar-
                                              pi, and extensor primi
                                              internodii pollicis, curv-
                                              ing around the edge  of
                                              the fore-arm.
                                                Fig. 16.  View of the
                                              deep seated muscles on
                                              the  front of the fore-
                                              arm. 1 The internal la-
                                              teral ligament  of the
                                              elbow-joint;  2 anterior
                                              ligament; 3 orbicular li-
                                              gament of the head  of
                                              the radius; 4 flexor pro-
                                              fundis digitorum mus-
                                              cle ; 5 flexor longus pol-
                                              licis;  6  pronator qua-
                                              dratus; 7 adductor pol-
                                              licis ;  8  dorsal interos-
seous muscle  of the middle finger and  palmar interrosseous of the  ring
finger;  9 dorsal interrosseus muscle  of  the ring finger and palmar inter-
osseous of the little finger.

   The  flexor carpi ulnaris, arising from  the internal  condyle

and from the ridge  at the internal  side  of the  ulna;  and is in-
 
MUSCLES OF  THE UPPER EXTREMITIES.        371
serted into the os pisiforme, and sometimes also into the base
of the metacarpal bone of the little finger.  It bends the hand,
and draws it towards the ulna.
   The flexor sublimis digitorum perforatus arises from the in-
ternal condyle of the humerus, the coronoid process of the ulna,
and the tubercle of the radius;  and is inserted by four tendons
into the second phalanges of the fingers.  It bends the hand and
fingers.
   The flexor  profundus  digitorum perforans arises from the
anterior flat surface of the ulna, from the coronoid process, and
the interosseous  ligament;  and  is  inserted by  four tendons,
which pass through the  slit in those of the flexor sublimis, into
the third phalanges of the fingers.  It bends the last phalanges
of the fingers, and also  the hand.
   The flexor longus pollicis arises from the middle two-thirds of
the radius, the interosseous ligament, and the  internal condyle
of the humerus;  and is inserted into the base of  the second
phalanx of the thumb.  It bends the last joint of the thumb.
   The pronator quadratus arises from the inner surface of the
ulna, near its lower extremity, and passing obliquely across the
fore-arm, is inserted into the corresponding surface of the radius.
It rotates the radius inwards.
   On the back of the fore-arm are:
   The supinator radii longus, arising from the ridge leading to
the external condyle;  and is inserted into a rough ridge just
above  the  styloid process of the radius.  It rotates the  radius
outwards.
   The extensor carpi radialis longus arising from the ridge of
the external condyle of the humerus;  and is inserted into the
posterior part of  the root of the metacarpal bone of the fore-
finger.  It extends the hand.
   The extensor carpi radialis brevis, arising from the external
condyle  of the  humerus, and from  the external lateral liga-
ment ; and  is inserted into the posterior part of the base of the
metacarpal bone of the second finger.  It extends the hand.
   The extensor carpi ulnaris, arising from the external condyle 
372         MUSCLES OF  THE  UPPER EXTREMITIES.
and from the fascia, is inserted into the ulnar side of the  base

of the metacarpal bone of the little finger.  It extends the hand.

        Fig- 1' •          Fig. 17.  View of the muscles on the back of
                      the fore-arm.  1 Lower part of biceps ; 2 part of
                      the brachialis anticus ;  3 insertion of the triceps
                      into the olecranon ;  4  supinator longus; 5 ex-
                      tensor carpi radialis longior;  6 extensor  carpi
                      radialis brevior; 7  tendons showing the inser-
                      tion of the two last muscles;  8 extensor com-
                      munis digitorum; 9 extensor minimi digiti; 10
                      extensor carpi ulnaris; 11 anconeus;  12 part
                      of the  flexor  carpi  ulnaris; 13 extensor ossis
                      inetacarpi and extensor primi internodii; 14 ex-
                      tensor secundi internodii; 15 posterior annular
                      ligament, beneath which are the tendons of the
                      extensor communis.

                         The extensor  digitorum  communis,
                      arising from the  external condyle;  and
                      is inserted  by four tendons, which are
                      connected by slips,  near the roots of the
                      fingers,  into all  the  phalanges  of the
                      fingers.   It extends  the  joints  of  the
                      fingers.

                         The supinator radii  brevis,  arising
                      from the external condyle and  from the
                      ridge on the posterior radial edge of the
                      ulna; and is  inserted  into  the tubercle
                      and the oblique rough ridge of the radius.
                      It rotates the radius outwards.

                         The  extensor  ossi inetacarpi pollicis
                      man us, arising  from the  posterior part
                      of the ulna, the interosseous  ligament,
                      and from the back part  of the radius .

and  is  inserted into  the base of  the  metacarpal bone of the

thumb, and into the trapezium.  It extends the metacarpal bone

of the thumb.

   The extensor minor pollicis manus, arising from the back of

the ulna below its middle and from the interosseous ligament;

and is inserted into the first phalanx  of  the  thumb.   It extends
the first phalanx.

   The extensor major pollicis manus, arising from the back of

the ulna above  its  middle,  the  interosseous ligament and  the
 
MUSCLES OF THE HAND.
373
back of the radius; and is inserted into the base of the second
phalanx of the thumb.  It extends the second phalanx.
  The indicator, arising  from the back of the ulna and from
the interosseous  ligament; and is inserted into the back of the
fore-finger, as far as the base of the third phalanx.  It  extends
the fore-finger.

               Of the Muscles of the Hand.
  The palmaris brevis is just beneath the skin at the inner side
of the hand; it arises from the anterior ligament of the wrist,
and from the palmar aponeurosis; and is inserted into the skin
at the inner margin of the hand.   It contracts the skin of the
hand.
  The lumbricales are four small muscles, resembling earth-
worms, which arise from the tendons  of the  flexor profundus,
and are inserted into the radial side of the first phalanx of each
finger. They bend the first phalanges.
  The abductor pollicis manus arises from  the annular ligament
and from the ends of the  scaphoid and trapezium; and is in-
serted into the base of the first phalanx of  the thumb. It draws
the thumb from the fingers.
  The opponens pollicis arises  from the trapezium and the an-
nular ligament;  and is  inserted  into  the radial  edge of the
metacarpal bone of the thumb.   It draws  the metacarpal bone
inwards.
  The flexor brevis pollicis  manus  has two  bellies, the first
head  arises from the trapezium,  trapezoides,  and annular liga-
ment, and is inserted into the outer  side of the first  phalanx
of the thumb ;  the second head arises from the magnum, unci-
forme, and the base of the metacarpal  bone of the middle finger,
and is inserted into the  inner  side  of the  base of the first
phalanx  of the  thumb.   The  sesamoid bones are included  in
these tendons.   It bends the first phalanx to the thumb.
  The adductor pollicis manus arises  from the ulnar margin of
the metacarpal  bone  of the middle-finger,  and is  inserted into 
374
MUSCLES OF  THE  HAND.
the inner side of the base of the first phalanx of the thumb.  It
draws the thumb towards the fingers.

              Fig. 18.               Fig. 18.  View of tho muscles of
                                 the palm of the hand. 2 Abductor
                                 pollicis manus; 3 opponens polli-
                                 cis; 4, 5 flexor brevis pollicis ma-
                                 nus;  6 adductor pollicis manus;
                                 77  lumbricalos;  10 abductor mi-
                                 nimi digiti manus; 11 floxor par-
                                 vus minimi digiti.

                                   The following  three mus-
                                 cles are situated at the ulnar
                                 side of the hand, constituting
                                 the ball of that side.
                                   The abductor minimi di-
                                 giti manus arises from  the
                                 pisiform bone  and  annular
                                 ligament, aud is inserted in-
                                 to  the ulnar side of the first
                                 phalanx  of the  little finger.
                                 It draws the little finger from
                                 the rest.

   The flexor parvus minimi digiti manus arises from the unci-
form bone and annular ligament, and is inserted into the ulnar
side of the base  of the first phalanx of the little finger. It bends
the little finger.
   The adductor metacarpi minimi digiti arises from the unci-
form  process  and annular ligament, and is  inserted into the
metacarpal bone of the  little finger along its whole length.  It
brings the metacarpal bone towards the wrist.
   There are seven interosseous muscles, which fill up the inter-
stices of the  metacarpal bones.  Three of them are adductors
and placed on the palmar side;  and four are abductors placed
on the dorsal side.
   The adductors arise from the base of the metacarpal bone of
one finger, beginning at the  index,  and are inserted into the
base of the first  phalanx  of the same finger.
   The adductors are  penniform, and arise by two heads  from
the adjoining sides of the metacarpal bones, and are  inserted
 
MUSCLES OF  THE LOWER EXTREMITIES.       375
into the bases of the first phalanges; two of them, the second
and third, go to the middle finger.

         Of the Muscles of the lower extremities.
   Like the  rest of the  body the lower extremities are invested
by cellular membrane, reaching from the crest of the ilium to
the foot.  It has received the general name of fascia lata, and
is exceedingly strong and dense. That portion  in front of  the
thigh is termed iliac and pubic; that which surrounds the knee
involucrum; that of the leg crural; and that in the sole of the
foot plantar fascia.  In front of the ankle it forms the annular
ligament, and  under the  sinuosity of the os calcis, where it
binds down the flexor tendon, the ligamentum lancinatum.   It
also furnishes sheaths for the muscles.
   The  tensor vaginae femoris muscle  arises  from the anterior
superior spinous process of the ilium;  and is inserted into  the
fascia of the thigh.   It makes the fascia tense, and  rotates  the
foot inwards.
   The sartorius arises from the anterior superior spinous process
of the ilium; and is inserted into the inner side of the head of
the tibia.   It is the longest muscle  in the body.   It bends  the
leg, and draws  it inwards.
   The rectus femoris arises from the anterior inferior spinous
process of the ilium, and is inserted into  the upper surface of
the  patella, and through  the ligament of  the patella into  the
head of the  tibia.  It extends the leg.
   The vastus externus  arises from the trochanter  major and
linea aspera, and is inserted into  the  outer and upper part of
the patella.  It  extends the leg.
   The vastus internus arises from the whole length of the linea
aspera, and  covering the entire inside  of the thigh is inserted
into the internal edge of the tendon of the rectus, and into  the
external and upper  part  of the patella.  It likewise extends
the leg.
   The cruraeus arises from the front of the  thigh and from the 
376       MUSCLES OF TnE LOWER EXTREMITIES.

linea aspera; and  is inserted into  the upper surface of the
patella.  It extends the  leg.
   The four last  named muscles form a common  tendon (the
ligamentum patella)), in which is included the patella, before it
is inserted into the head of the tibia.   In consequence of this
arrangement, and of these muscles, having a common use, they
are often described as the quadriceps femoris.
   The gracilis arises from the front and ramus of the pubes,
and is inserted into  the inside of the head of the tibia. It flexes
the leg.
   The pectineus arises  from the upper face  and  front of the
pubes, and is inserted into the linea aspera below the trochanter
minor. It draws the thigh inwards and forwards.
   The adductor  longus  arises from the upper front part of the
pubes, and is inserted into the inner edge of the middle third
of the linea aspera.
   The adductor brevis arises from the body and ramus of the
pubes, and is inserted into the inner edge of  the  linea aspera,
along its upper third.
   The adductor magnus arises from the body of the pubes, and
the ramus of the pubis and ischium; and is inserted into the
whole length of the  linea aspera.  These three adductors have
the same use, that of drawing the thigh forwards and inwards.
   The gluteus magnus or maximus arises from the crista of the
ilium,  the sides of the sacrum and coccyx, and from the great
sacro-sciatic ligament; and  is inserted into the upper part of
the linea aspera, and the fascia of the thigh. It draws the thigh
backwards, and keeps the trunk erect.
   The gluteus medius arises  from the  crest  of the ilium, its
dorsum between the crest and semicircular ridge, from the space
between the anterior spinous processes, and from the fascia femo-
ris;  and is inserted into the  upper surface of the  trochanter
major and the shaft  of the bone in front of it.   It draws the
thigh backwards and outwards.
   The gluteus minimus  arises from  the dorsum  of the ilium
between  the semicircular ridge and capsular  ligament; and is 
MUSCLES OF  THE LOWER EXTREMITIES.       377
inserted into the upper part of the trochanter major.  It abducts
the thigh, and also rotates it inwards.—The three gluteii mus-
cles  form most  of the fleshy part of the hip.
   The pyriformis arises from  the anterior face of  the second,
third and fourth bones of the sacrum, and is inserted into the
superior middle  part of the  trochanter major.  It rotates the
limb outwards.
   The Gemini are two small muscles; the upper  arises from
the root of the spinous process of the ischium;  the lower from
the back part of the  tuberosity of the  ischium; they are both
inserted into the root of the trochanter major.  They also rotate
the limb outwards.
   The obturator internus arises from the margin of the thyroid
foramen, the posterior face of the thyroid ligament, and from the
iliac fascia; and is inserted into the pit on the back part  of the
femur at the root of the trochanter major.  It rotates the limb
outwards.
   The quadratus femoris arises from the  tuberosity  of the
ischium, and is inserted into  the ridge  between the two tro-
chanters of the os femoris. It rotates the limb outwards.
   The obturator externus arises from  the anterior margin of the
thyroid foramen, and from the anterior face of the thyroid liga-
ment; and  is inserted into  the  cavity at the root of the tro-
chanter major of the os femoris.  It rotates the thigh outwards.
   The biceps flexor cruris forms the outer hamstring; it arises
by two heads; a long one from the tuberosity of the ischium in
common with  the semi-tendinosus,  and a short one from the
lower part of the linea aspera.  It is  inserted into  the head of
the fibula. It flexes the leg on the thigh.
   The semi-tendinosus arises  from the tuberosity of the ischium,
and is inserted into the side of the tibia just below its tubercle.
It flexes the leg on the thigh.
   The semimembranosus arises  from the outer and upper part
of the tuberosity of the ischium; and is inserted into the inner
and back part of the tibia just below the joint. It  flexes the
leg on the thigh.
       48 
878
MUSCLES  OF  THE  LEO.
                    Muscles of the Leg.
  The tibialis anticus  arises from the outer side of the head
and from the spine  of the tibia,  and from the interosseous liga-
ment;  and is inserted, at the inner side of the sole of the foot,
into  the  base of the internal cuneiform bone and tho base of
the metacarpal bone of the great toe.  It bends the foot, and
presents the sole obliquely outwards.
  The extensor longus digitorum pedis  arises from the head of
the tibia, from the head and anterior margin of the fibula, and
from the interosseous ligament; and is inserted after dividing
into  four tendons, into the phalanges of  the toes.  It extends
the toes, but flexes the foot.
  The peroneus tertius arises from the lower third of the ante-
rior angle of the tibia; and is inserted  into  the base  of the
metatarsal  bone  of the little toe.  It  is rather a part of the
extensor longus than  a  distinct muscle.   It assists in bending
the foot.
   The extensor proprius  pollicis  pedis arises from  the lower
three-fourths of the fibula, and  the  interosseous ligament; and
is inserted  into the base of  the first and second phalanx of the
great toe.  It extends the great  toe.
  The peroneus longus arises from the outside of the head and
upper third of the fibula;  and  is  inserted into the base of the
metatarsal bone of the great toe.  It extends the foot, and in-
clines the sole outwards.
   The peroneus  brevis arises from the lower two-thirds of the
outer surface of the fibula; and is inserted into the base of the
metatarsal bone  of the little toe.  It extends the foot and pre-
sents the sole obliquely downwards.
   The gastrocnemius has two heads, one  of which arises from
each of the condyles of the humerus; it is inserted by the tendo
Achillis into the os calcis.
   The soleus arises from  the  posterior part of  the  upper two-
thirds of  the fibula, and  from the middle  third of the tibia;
 and is inserted into the tendo Achillis. 
MUSCLES OF  THE LEG.
379
Fig. 19.
Fig. 20.
  Fig. 19.  View of the
anterior muscles of the
leg. 1 Tendon of the qua-
driceps femoris; 2 ante-
rior angle of the  tibia;
3 tibialis anticus;  4 ex-
tensor longus  digitorum
pedis;   5  extensor pro-
prius pollicis pedis; 6 pe-
roneus tertius; 7 pero-
neus longus: 8 peroneus
brevis;  9, 9 borders of
the soleus; 10 gastrocne-
mius.

  Fig. 20.  View, of the
deep seated muscles on
the  back  of  the  leg.
1  Lower   extremity of
the femur; 2 ligament of
Winslow;  3 tendon of the
semi-membranosus; 4, 5
internal and external la-
teral ligaments; 6 popli-
teus  muscle;   7  flexor
longus digitorum;  8 ti-
bialis profundus; 9 flexor
longus pollicis; 10 pero-
neus longus; 11 peroneus
brevis;  12 lower end of
the  tendo Achillis;  13
tendons  of the tibialis
posticus and flexor longus
digitorum. To show these
muscles,  the  gastrocne-
mius, plantaris and soleus
muscles  have   been  re-
moved.

    The plantaris arises by a very long tendon from the femur,

just above the external condyle; and is inserted into  the os

 calcis in front of the tendo Achillis.

    The last three muscles have the same action, to wit, to extend

 the foot. They constitute the calf of the leg and are sometimes

 called the triceps surae.
    The popliteus arises from the external face  of the  external

 condyle, and is  inserted  into  the  oblique ridge on the back of

 the tibia, just below  its head.   It bends the  leg, and rotates it

 inwards.
    The flexor longus digitorum  pedis perforans  arises from the

 back of the  tibia below its oblique ridge, and after dividing into
 
380              MUSCLES OF THE FOOT.

four tendons is inserted into the bases of the last, phalanges  of
the four lesser toes.  These tendons perforate those of the flexor
brevis.   It flexes the toes, and extends the foot.
  The flexor longus pollicis pedis arises from the  posterior face
of the tibia, commencing about three inches  below its head, and
continuing nearly to the ankle; and is inserted into  the second
phalanx of the great toe.  It bends the great toe.
  The tibialis posticus arises by two heads from  the tibia and
fibula, also from the interosseous ligament;  and is inserted into
the tuberosity of the scaphoid bone.  It extends the foot.

                    Muscles of the Foot.

  The extensor brevis digitorum pedis  arises from the  greater
apophysis of the os calcis; and is inserted by four tendons into
the backs of the four greater toes.  Its tendons join those  of
the extensor longus.  It extends the toes.
  The flexor brevis digitorum pedis arises from  the  tuberosity
of the os calcis and  the plantar fascia, and is inserted into the
second phalanges of the four smaller toes.  Its tendons are per-
forated  by  those  of the flexor longus.   It bends the second
joint of the toes.
  The flexor accessorius arises from the inside of the sinuosity,
and the front of the tuberosity of the os calcis;  and is inserted
into the outside of the tendon of the os calcis at its division.
It assists in flexing the toes.
  The  lumbricales pedis are four small muscles, which arise
from the tendon of the flexor longus; and are inserted into the
inside  of the first phalanx of each of the  lesser toes.   They
assist in flexing the toes.
  The abductor pollicis pedis arises from the internal tuberosity
of the os calcis, the internal side of the navicular and internal
cuneiform bones, and from  the  plantar fascia;  and  is inserted
into the inner side of the base of the first phalanx of the great
toe, including the internal sesamoid bone.  It draws the great
toe from the others. 
MUSCLES OF THE  FOOT.              381
  The flexor brevis pollicis pedis has two bellies; it arises from
the calcaneo-cuboid ligament, and the internal cuneiform  bone;
and is inserted by two tendons  into the  internal  and external
sesamoid bones, and into the first phalanx of the great toe.
  The adductor pollicis pedis arises from the calcaneo-cuboid
ligament, and the basis  of the  second, third, and fourth meta-
tarsal bones of the lesser toes;  and is inserted into the external
sesamoid bone, and the tendon  of the flexor  brevis.   It  draws
the great toe towards the others.
  The abductor minimi digiti pedis arises from the outer tube-
rosity of the os calcis, and the metatarsal bone of the little toe;
and is inserted into the  base of the first  phalanx  of the little
toe.  It draws the little toe  from the others.
   The flexor brevis minimi digiti pedis arises from the calcaneo-
cuboid ligament, and the fifth metatarsal bone; and is inserted
into the head of the metatarsal  bone, and the base  of the first
phalanx of the little toe.  It bends the little toe.
   The transversalis pedis is a  small muscle, which  lies across
the anterior extremities of the metatarsal bones;  it arises from
the capsular ligaments of the first joints of the fourth and fifth
toes; and is inserted into the external  sesamoid  bone.   It  ap-
proximates the heads of the metatarsal bones.
   The interosseus muscles are seven in number;  four  of them
are upon the dorsal, and three upon the  plantar surface  of  the
foot.   There are two to the  first smaller toe, two to the second,
two to the third, and one to  the fourth or little toe. The dorsal
interossei arise by double heads from the adjacent sides  of  the
metatarsal  bones; and  are  inserted into the base of the first
phalanx.   The first is an adductor being inserted into the inner
side of the second toe;  the other  three are inserted  into  the
outer side of the second, third,  and fourth toes, and are conse-
quently abductors.
   The plantar interossei arise from the base of the metatarsal
bones of the three outer toes;  and are  inserted into  the inner
side of the base of the  first phalanx  of the same toes.   They
draw the toes inwards, or adduct them. 
3*2
ORGANS OF  DIGESTION.
                   Organs of Digestion.
   Ar.mth.__The  mouth  is bounded anteriorly and laterally by
the lips and cheeks;  its roof is formed by the hard and soft
palate;  and its floor by the mylo-hyoid muscles; posteriorly it
extends to  the  pharynx,  and communicates with  the  fauces.
The space between the lips and the teeth  is sometimes called
the vestibule of  the mouth.   The mouth is lined by a  mucous
membrane, beneath which are a number of muciparous  glands.
This membrane  is thrown into folds (frena) at several points,
the one beneath  the tongue is called frenum linguae.
   The lips (labia) are composed of muscular fibres and  fat, and
covered externally by skin.   The upper is  longer and  thicker
than the lower, and has a vertical depression on the middle front
surface, called philtrum.
   The gums are formed of the lining membrane  of the mouth
much thickened.
   Tongue.—The tongue is the special organ of taste, and is also
of material importance in  speech and mastication.   It is a mus-
cular body, symmetrical, oblong, and flattened; its size and
shape are variable.
   The posterior  extremity is  called its base, or root, the  anterior
its point,  or tip, and the middle its body.  The root is attached
to the hyoid bone.
   The  mucous  covering is very thick on  the upper surface of
the tongue, and  thin on the lower.   On the upper surface are a
number of large papillae; those on the posterior border, eight
or nine in number, arranged like the letter V, are the largest,
and called the papillae maximas;  others are termed capitatse,
mediae, villosas,  and filiform; the  latter are the smallest, and
are found  principally at the middle of the  tongue.  The papillao
mediae are the most abundant.  The structure of all is the same.
Their orifices are easily seen by the naked  eye.
   The  following muscles compose the  tongue : the stylo-glossus,
 the hyo-glossus,  the genio-hyo-glossus, lingualis, superficial is lin-
guae, transversalis linguae, and verticales linguas.  The first three
 form the principal part of its bulk. 
ORGANS OF DIGESTION.
383
  Palate.—The palate is divided into two parts, the hard, and
the soft palate.  The first separates the mouth  from  the nose,
and is composed of the palate processes of the upper  maxillary
and palate bones, covered by the common lining membrane  of
the mouth.   It has transverse ridges extending  to the alveolar
processes, and also one in the median line.
   The second, or soft palate, called also pendulous palate, con-
sists of a loose membrane stretched transversely across the back
of the mouth, at the posterior margin of the hard palate.  Its
middle  portion, called the uvula, is free and projects downwards
for a half or three-fourths of an inch; on each side of the uvula
there are two crescenting folds of mucous membrane, called the
lateral  half-arches, the space between which is the  fauces.
Between the anterior and posterior arches on each side are the
tonsil glands, which consist of a collection  of mucous follicles.
Each tonsil is about the size and shape of an almond.
   There are several small muscles entering into the composition
of the soft palate.
   The  constrictor isthmi faucium, a small muscle on each side,
arising from the middle of  the anterior half-arch, and inserted
into the side of the  root of the tongue. It diminishes the open-
ing into the pharynx.
   The palato-pharyngeus, is situated in the posterior half-arch,
 arising from its middle to be inserted into the side of the pharynx.
 It draws the soft palate downward and the pharynx upwards.
    The circumfiexus, or tensor palati, arises from the  spinous
 process of the sphenoid bone and  the Eustachian tube, and is
 inserted into  the middle of the soft palate, and into the cres-
 centic  edge of the palate bone; its tendon winds round the hook
 of the internal pterygoid process. It extends or spreads out the
 palate.
    The levator palati arises from the petrous portion of the tem-
 poral  bone  and the Eustachian tube, and  is inserted  into  the
 soft palate.  It draws the palate upwards.
    The azygos uvula is in the centre of the soft  palate and uvula.
 It shortens the uvula. 
384 SALIVARY GLANDS, ETC.—THE PHARYNX AND OESOPHAGUS.

              Salivary Glands of the Mouth.
  There are three salivary glands situated  on each side of tho
neck, bordering on the mouth, for the secretion of saliva.  They
are the parotid, submaxillary and sublingual.   Their color is
of a light pink.
  The parotid is the largest, and is very  irregular in shape. It
occupies the space behind the  ramus of the lower jaw, and the
mastoid process. Externally it is covered by the skin; it  is of
a lobulated structure. Its duct, called the duct of  Steno, is about
the size of a crow's quill, and passes along the outer face of the
masseter muscle, in a line drawn from the lobe of the ear to the
end of the nose, and perforates the cheek by a very small orifice,
opposite the second molar tooth of the upper jaw. The external
carotid artery and the temporal vein pass  up through its deeper
portion; and the portia dura nerve also traverses  it from behind
forward.
  The submaxillary  gland is not more than half the size  of the
former, and is somewhat ovoidal in form, and lobulated in struc-
ture.   It is situated in the depression on the inner face of the
lower jaw, and covered externally by the  skin, superficial fascia
and platisma myoid muscle.
  Its duct, called the duct of Wharton, empties into the mouth,
under the tongue, at the anterior margin of the fracnum linguae,
by  a very small orifice.
  The sublingual gland, which is smaller than the last, oblong
in shape, lobulated in  structure, is situated under the tongue,
covered only by the  lining membrane of the mouth.  It dis-
charges by several ducts near the duct of the submaxillary gland,
              The Pharynx  and CEsophagus.
  The pharynx is a large membranous cavity situated between
the vertebral column and the posterior  part of the nose and
mouth, and extending from  the base of  the cranium to the
fourth or fifth cervical vertebrae.  It  is about five inches  long,
and funnel shaped, being larger above than below;  its muscular
attachments keep it always open. 
THE PHARYNX AND CESOPHAGUS.          385
  It has three coats, a muscular, a cellular and a mucous one.
The muscular coat is internal, and consists of three muscles on
each side, placed one above the other, and called constrictors.
  The inferior constrictor arises from the side of the cricoid and
thyroid cartilages, and is inserted into its fellow of the opposite
side on the back of the  pharynx;  the upper fibres are oblique,
the lower horizontal.
  The middle constrictor arises from the cornu of the os hyoides
and the lateral thyreo-hyoid ligament, and is  inserted into its
fellow at the posterior  median line.
  The superior constrictor  arises  from the pterygoid process of
the sphenoid bone, from the upper and lower jaw, from the buc-
cinator muscles and the root of the tongue; and is inserted into
its  fellow behind, and also into the cuneiform process of  the os
occipitus.  Its fibres are more horizontal than those of its fellows.
   The successive contractions of these muscles convey the food
from the mouth  into the oesophagus.
   The stylo-pharyngeus muscles, described among those  of the
neck, by contracting shortens the pharynx.
   The cellular coat  connects the muscular with  the mucous,
and  merely  serves for  the transmission of nerves and  blood-
vessels.
   The internal or mucous coat, which is a continuation of that
of  the mouth, nose and Eustachian tube, like it is covered  by a
delicate epidermis, and studded with mucous follicles and glands.
   The CEsophagus is  the canal situated between the spine and
larynx,  which  conveys the food from the pharynx to the sto-
mach.  Its length is about nine or ten inches; and its diameter
when inflated, near an  inch, though this is  not uniform, as it
gradually increases  as  it  descends.  In  descending, it  passes
through the  posterior mediastinum, and at its lower part, where
it  passes  through the diaphragm,  inclines  slightly to the  left
side.  Its upper part is the narrowest portion of the  alimentary
canal;  and consequently foreign bodies,  if not  arrested  in the
neck, readily pass through the remainder of the alimentary canal.
    It is  composed, like the pharynx, of three coats, a muscular,
         49 
386
THE ABDOMINAL VISCERA.
Fig. 21.
a cellular, and a mucous. The muscular is external, and thicker

than any other portion  of the canal;  it  consists of two layers,

the fibres of  the external  layer being longitudinal; those  of

the internal, circular.

  The cellular coat unites the others.  The mucous coat is con-

tinuous with that of  the pharynx, has a  thick epithelium, con-

tains numerous mucous glands and follicles, and when in a state

of rest, presents a number of longitudinal folds.

                                 Deglutition, or swallowing, is
                               effected by  the contraction  of
                               the longitudinal muscular fibres,
                               which shorten the passage, and
                               by the  successive contractions of
                               the  circular fibres from above
                               downwards.  In vomiting, the
                               contractions  commence  below
                               and go upwards.
                                 Fig. 21.  Lateral view of the pha-
                               rynx. 1 Trachea; 2 cricoid cartilage ;
                               3 crico-thyroid membrane ;  4 thyroid
                               cartilage;  5 thyro-hyoid membrane;
                               6 os hyoides ;  7 stylo-hyoid ligament;
                               8 oesophagus; 9 inferior constrictor;
                               10 middle  constrictor;  11  superior
                               constrictor; 12 stylo-pharyngeus mus-
                               cle;  13 upper concave margin  of the
                               superior constrictor; 14 pterygo-max-
                               illary ligament; 15 buccinator mus-
                               cle;  16  orbicularis oris;  17  mylo-
                               hyoideus.
                Of the Abdominal Viscera.

  The cavity of the abdomen extends from the diaphragm above
to the pelvis below; and is divided for descriptive purposes into
nine different  regions, by the drawing of two parallel vertical
lines through the anterior inferior spinous processes of the ilia,
and  intersecting these by two other  horizontal  lines, the one
drawn over the crests of the  ilia, and the other over the most
prominent part of the cartilages of the ribs.  This makes three
regions above, three in the middle, and three below.  The region
in the centre of the upper row is called the epigastric, and con-
tains  the left lobe of the liver and a  portion of the stomach; 
THE ABDOMINAL VISCERA.              387
those on either side are termed the right and left hypochondriac,
the first contains the right lobe of the liver,  and the second con-
tains  the  spleen, and a portion of the stomach and liver.  The
central  region of  the middle row is called the umbilical, and
contains the small intestines; those on  the sides are the right
and left lumbar, the first contains the right kidney and ascend-
ing colon, the second the left kidney and descending colon. The
region in the centre of  the  lower row, is the  hypogastric, and
contains a portion of the small intestines and the bladder; those
on the sides are the right and left iliac regions, or the iliac fos-
sae, of which the first or right contains the ccecum or caput coli,
and the second the sigmoid  flexure of the colon.
   Peritoneum.—The whole  of the interior surface  of the ab-
domen  is lined, and  the contained viscera covered  by a thin,
transparent,  serous  membrane,  called  the  peritoneum, which,
like all the serous membranes, is a closed sack.  Its office is to
secrete  a  small quantity of fluid to  lubricate the viscera, and
thus enable them to move readily upon each other, and the walls
of the cavity; it also forms  ligaments and connections by which
the viscera are held in their  places.  Although the viscera appear
to  be contained within  the cavity of the peritoneum,  they are
not so in  reality, but are all on its outside.  A familiar and good
illustration of  the  manner in which  the  various  viscera are
covered by the peritoneum, is afforded in the application of a
double  night cap to the head.   One part of the cap is close to
the head  and compares with the peritoneal  coat  of  one of the
viscera; the other is loose and compares with the peritoneum,
where it comes  in contact with the walls of  the abdomen.
   Those  portions  of  the peritoneum, which pass between one
viscus and another, generally consists of two  lamina,  and are
called omenta.
   There  are  four of these  processes  or omenta, viz. the lesser
omentum, or gastro-hepatic, passing between  the stomach and
liver, and attached to the lesser curvature of the stomach; the
great omentum, or gastro-colic, which extends  between the sto-
mach and colon, being attached to the greater curvature of the 
3S8
THE ABDOMINAL VISCERA.
former, and including  the  latter between its lamina—it is  tho
largest  of the omenta, and is spread over the intestines like an
apron — it is known as the caul, and in corpulent persons con-
tains a great deal of fat; the colic-omentum or mesocolon, which
holds the large intestine  to the posterior wall of the abdomen;
and the gastro-splenic, which extends  from the stomach to  tho
spleen.
  The mesentery serves to connect the small intestines to  the
walls of the abdomen;  it consists of two laminae of peritoneum,
and its inferior edge equals in length the entire intestine. The
superior mesenteric arteries  and veins, lymphatic glands and
vessels, branches of the sympathetic  nerve, fat, &c, are con-
tained between the  lamina of the mesentery.
  Stomach.—The stomach is situated in the epigastric and left
hypochondriac regions.  It is a conoidal sac, having an upward
curve; it has  an anterior  and posterior face, being somewhat
flattened in front and behind; two curvatures, the upper of which
is the lesser, and  the lower the greater; two orifices,  of  which
one,  called  the cardiac, is at the superior part of the left  ex-
tremity, and is a continuation of the oesophagus into the stomach,
and the other, the pyloric, is at the right extremity, and is con-
tinuous with the small  intestine; and two extremities, of which
the left is  much the  largest,  and is  a rounded cul-de-sac or
tuberosity,  and the left is a gradual  diminution of the organ
from its middle to the  duodenum.  Near the right  end of the
stomach is a dilatation, which is sometimes called  the antrum
pylori.
  The stomach is retained in its place by the  hepatico-gastric
and the gastro-splenic omentum, and by its continuity with the
oesophagus  and duodenum.  Its dimensions are variable, depend-
ing much upon the mode of life; generally,  however, its capa-
ciousness is between that of a pint and a quart.  It is composed
of four coats, a peritoneal, muscular, cellular, and mucous.
  The peritoneal coat  affords  a  complete investment for the
Btomach, and is  closely attached to it,  except at the curvatures
where its looseness allows of the distention of the other coats. 
THE ABDOMINAL VISCERA.
389
  The muscular coat is  thicker than that of the intestines, but
not so thik  as  that  of the oesophagus; its  fibres are arranged
both in a longitudinal and circular direction.  The longitudinal
fibres are chiefly found along the lesser curvature, and the cir-
cular fibres, which cover  the  entire organ, are most numerous
near the pyloric extremity.
                            Fig. 22.
  Fig. 22.  A vertical and longitudinal section of the stomach and duo-
denum.  1 OSsophagus;  2 cardiac orifice of the stomach; 3 greater end of
the stomach; 4 Lesser or pyloric end; 5 lesser curvature; 6 greater curva-
ture ; 7 antrum pylori; 8 folds or rugae of the mucous membrane; 9 pyloris;
10 oblique portion of the duodenum; 11 descending portion; 12 pancreatio
duct, and ductus communis  choledochus;  13 opening of these ducts; 14
transverse portion of the duodenum;  15 commencement of the jejunum;
the valvules conniventes are shown in the duodenum and jejunum.

   The cellular  coat connects  the muscular with  the  mucous,
and serves for  the transmission of blood-vessels and nerves to
the mucous coat.
   The mucous coat,  also called villous, is the most internal,  and
is continuous with that of the oesophagus; it is of  a light pink
color, and presents a velvety appearance, hence the name vil-
lous has been applied to it. When the stomach is not distended,
this coat is thrown  into longitudinal folds or rugae, which  are 
390                   THE INTESTINES.

most numerous along the greater curvature, and near the pyloric
orifice.  A circular fold of mucous membrane at the pyloric ori-
fice, which lessens its size, is called the pyloric valve. The office
of this coat is to secrete the gastric juice.

                      The Intestines.
   The whole length  of the  intestinal canal  is  from thirty to
thirty-five feet.   It extends from the pyloris to the anus, and is
divided into large and small intestine.

                      Small  Intestine.
   The small intestine commences at the pyloris, and terminates
by a lateral  opening into  the  large  intestine  in the right iliac
region.  It comprises four-fifths of the length of the whole .canal,
and is from  twenty to twenty-four feet  long. It is cylindrical in
shape, and about an inch in diameter, although there is a gradual
decrease in diameter from above downwards.
   Like the stomach, the small intestine has four distinct coats.
   The peritoneal coat is the most external; and after completely
investing the  intestines, it is continued in two laminae  to be
attached to  tho lumbar vertebrae, thereby  constituting  the
mesentery.
   The muscular  coat is next to the peritoneal, and is  thin and
pale;  the superficial  fibres are longitudinal, though indistinct;
the internal are circular.
   The cellular coat, like that of the stomach, connects  the peri-
toneal with the mucous,  and serve to transport blood-vessels,
nerves and lacteals.  When dried  it appears like cotton, as also
does  the corresponding  coat in  the  other portions of the ali-
mentary canal.
   The mucous coat is internal, and much longer than the others,
which allows it be thrown into numerous folds or  duplicatures;
 these  folds  generally pass quite around the intestine, and over-
 lap each other, like  the shingles  of a house.   They are called
 valvules conniventes, and  their office  is to retard the  progress
 downwards of alimentary matter, and to increase the absorbing 
SMALL INTESTINE.
391
and exhaling surface.  The surface of the mucous membrane is
covered with numerous papillary projections, called villi; and
each villius is composed of an artery, vein and lymphatic.  The
lymphatics do not open directly upon the surface of the mucous
membrane, but the chyle is conveyed out of the intestine by the
intervention of cells.
  The cellular  coat is studded with mucous glands, whose ducts
open upon the surface  of the mucous coat.  They are mostly
microscopical.  Some of them, which are visible  to the naked
eye, and  called the glands  of Brunner, are found  scattered
throughout the intestine, although existing in most abundance
in the  duodenum.   Others still larger, called Peyer's glands,
are found chiefly in the lower part of the small intestine.  They
consist of a cluster of smaller glands, and are consequently often
called aggregated.  Those of Brunner are also sometimes called
solitary.
  The small intestine is divided by anatomists, though without
much reason, as it  is a continuous tube,  into the duodenum,
jejunum,  and ilium.
  The duodenum, so named from its being about twelve fingers'
breath, or twelve inches long, is that portion next the  stomach.
Its  direction  is curved, forming a segment of a circle,  the con-
cavity of  which looks  towards the left side.  The mucous coat
of the duodenum is tinged with bile, and contains a great num-
ber of valvulae  conniventes, and the glands of Brunner.
  The ductus communis choledochus,  from the liver  and  pan-
creas, empties  into  the duodenum, about four inches from the
pylorus.
  The jejunum and ilium form the remaining three-fifths of
the small intestine, the former being  two,  and the latter one-
fifth of the  length; the  only  differences in their appearance
are that the jejunum contains a large  number of valvulae conni-
ventes,  and is rather larger in its diameter than the ilium.
  The small intestine,  as stated, is attached to the posterior part
of the abdomen by a process of peritoneum, called the mesentery.
This attachment, called the root of the mesentery, is about six 
392                  LARGE INTESTINE.

inches in length, and extends from the left side of the  second
lumbar vertebras to the right iliac  fossa.
                      Large Intestine.
  The large intestine receives the  effete matters from the small,
and comprises about one-fifth of the length of the whole intes-
tinal canal.  It commences  at  the inferior end of the small in-
testine, and describing a circle, which surrounds two-thirds of
the abdomen,  terminates  at the anus.  Its diameter is much
greater than that  of the  small intestine, and it also presents a
sacculated appearance.
  It is composed, like the small intestine, of four coats.
  The peritoneal  coat  is continuous  with  the mesocolon  and
affords a complete  investment, except at  the lower part of the
rectum, and the descending portions of the colon, where the latter
comes in contact with the abdomen.
  The muscular coat consists of longitudinal and circular fibres;
the former are collected into three fasciculi,  or  bands, which ex-
tend to the rectum.
  The cellular coat unites  the muscular and mucous coats, and
contains the blood-vessels and nerves.
  The mucous coat is smooth, having neither villi nor valvulae
conniventes.  It contains numerous follicles,  called the follicles
of Lieberk'dhn.  It also contains some  solitary glands.
  The large intestine is divided into  three  parts, the coecum,
the colon, and the rectum.
  The ccecum is the commencement of the  large intestine, and
is about two inches in length.   It  is confined by the mesocolon
in the right iliac fossa.  It is often called the caput coli, or head
of the colon.  Attached to its rounded extremity is a worm-like
process of intestine, from three to four inches  long, called the
appendix vermiformis. This appendix is usually filled with flatus.
  At the side of the coecum is an elliptical  opening, called the
ilio-colic  valve,  by which the small intestine empties into the
large. When the ccecum is distended, this valve becomes closed,
and prevents the return of foecal matter into the small intestine. 
THE LIVER.
393
  The colon comprises the principal part of the large intestine;
it commences  at  the  ilio-colic valve, and ascends on the right
side of the abdomen to  the margin of the false  ribs, it then
passes transversly across, beneath the stomach, to the left side,
whence it descends to the left iliac fossa, and terminates in the
sigmoid flexure.
   The rectum commences at the left sacro-iliac symphisis, at
the termination of the long, loose convolution of the colon, called
the sigmoid flexure, and  passes down in front of the sacrum to
the anus.
   Its muscular coat  is much  thicker and redder than that of
any other portion of the intestines; the external fibres are longi-
tudinal, and  the internal circular.  At  the lower extremity of
the rectum, the circular fibres are multiplied so much as to form/
a complete internal sphincter muscle.
   The mucous coat  is thick, red, and spongy,  and five or six
inches above the  anus on each side, is thrown into a semi-circular
fold,  somewhat  resembling  the valvulae conniventes, which in
some degree prevent  the  involuntary discharge of  faeces.  Just
above  the anus  are  a number of small pouches, having their
 orifices pointing downwards.  The rectum is larger in the middle
 than at the ends.

                          The Liver.
    The liver occupies the whole of the right hypochondriac, and
 a portion of  the epigastric and left hypochondriac regions.  It
 is the largest glandular organ  in the body, and secretes the bile.
 In shape it is oblong and oval;  its weight is from four to five
 pounds, and  it measures  about ten inches in length, six or seven
 in width, and  four  or five in  thickness.   Its long diameter is
 across the body.  Its color is a reddish brown, with occasional
 blue or black spots on its under surface and about its edges.
    The upper surface is  regularly convex,  fitting closely to the
  concave under  surface  of the diaphragm ; and the lower con-
  cave ; the right end is also much thicker than the left.  A broad
  ligament, called suspensory, formed from its peritoneal covering,
         50 
394
ME LIVER.
holds the liver in contact with the diaphragm. The anterior part
of this ligament is the ligamentum teres, and the posterior the
coronary ligament.  In the anterior edge of the liver is a notch,
and in the posterior edge a deep depression for the spinal column.
On its under surface, extending  from  the notch in front to the
depression behind,  is  the umbilical fissure, or sulcus, so called
from having accommodated the umbilical vein in the foetal state;
at right angles with this is the transverse fissure, which contains
the hepatic  artery and duct, surrounded by cellular membrane,
and called the capsule of Glisson.
                           Fig.  23.
  Fig. 23.  Representation of the upper surface of tho liver.  1 Right lobe;
2 left lobe; 3 anterior, free border, and fundus of gall bladder; 4 posterior
border; 5 broad ligament; 6 round ligament;  7, 7 lateral ligament; 8 origin
of the coronary ligament;  9  inferior vena cava;  10 point of the lobulus
Spigelii.
  The liver is divided  into two lobes, a right and left lobe, the
division being  marked above  by the  suspensory ligament, and
below  by  the umbilical  fissure.  The  right lobe is much  the
larger, and has several  elevations on its under surface;  the prin-
cipal of which are the  lobulus Spigelii, lobulus quadratus, and
the gall bladder.
  Four sets of vessels ramify through the substance  of the liver,
making it extremely vascular.
  The portal vein collects the blood from the stomach, intestines, 
THE LIVER.                      395
pancreas, and  spleen, and after reaching  the  transverse  fissure,
divides into two branches, called the right and left sinuses, one
of which is distributed to each lobe of the liver.
   The hepatic artery, also, conveys blood to  the liver; it is  a
branch of  the coeliac, and at the transverse fissure divided into
three  or more branches previous  to penetrating the  substance
of  the liver.
   The hepatic veins arise by capillaries in the acini of the liver,
and after collecting into three  large trunks, empty into  the
ascending vena  cava at the posterior margin of the liver.  These
veins  are destitute of valves, and have very thin parietes.
   The hepatic duct also commences by  capillaries in  the  liver;
when it reaches  the transverse fissure it is  about the size of a
writing quill.  It joins the duct of the gall bladder at an acute
angle;  and  the union of the  two forms the ductus  communis
choledochus, which empties into the  duodenum three  or four
inches from the stomach.
                             Fig. 24.
  Fig. 24.  Representation of the under surface of the liver.  1 Right lobe;
2 left lobe; 3 lobulus  quadratus;  4 lobulus Spigelii;  5 lobulus caudatus;
6 longitudinal fissure;  7 pons hepaticus;  8 fissure for  the ductus venosus;
9 inferior vena cava; 10 gall bladder; 11 transverse fissure; 12 vena cava;
13 depression for the curve of the colon;  14 double depression made by the
right kidney and its supra-renal capsule; 15 rough surface on the posterior
border of the liver;  16 notch separating the lobes anteriorly;  17 depression
on the posterior border for the spinal column. 
396
THE GALL BLADDER.
  The minute structure of the liver is made up of a numerous
collection of irregular lobules, or acini.   This arrangement  is
best seen on tearing the organ.  Each  lobule is said to be about
the size  of a millet  seed, and to represent of itself a  perfect
gland, being formed by the termination of the blood-vessels, and
by the origin of a branch of  the  hepatic duct, called the porus
biliaris.  These lobules are held together by means of a cellular
tissue, which is called the parenchyma.

                     The GaU Bladder.
  The gall bladder is  the reservoir for the bile; it is attached
to the under surface of the right lobe of the liver to the right
of  the umbilical  fissure, and has its long diameter inclining
slightly to  the right side.  It is a pyriform sac, and about three
inches in length. Its rounded extremity, called the fundus, pro-
jects somewhat beyond the anterior border of the liver.  Its pos-
terior extremity, or neck, is narrow  and twisted  to retard the
passage of  a fluid  through it.
   It  has three coats,  a peritoneal, a cellular, and a mucous one.
The peritoneal  coat  is but  a partial  one, covering its inferior
surface only.
   The middle is of strong cellular membrane; and the internal
mucous coat is thrown into irregular delicate folds, and tinged of
a deep green or yellow color  by the bile.
   The duct of the gall bladder, called the cystic, is shorter and
smaller than  the  hepatic, which it joins at an acute angle; the
union of the two forming the ductus communis choledochus, which
is from two to three inches long, and  about the  size of a goose
quill. As  mentioned it empties into the duodenum, in an oblique
manner, after passing  through the right extremity of the pan-
 creas. Its orifice is very small, and marked by a tubercle on the
 inner side  of the duodenum.
   The bile is of a deep yellow, sometimes green color, and bitter
 taste. When recently secreted, it is  thin and fluid; but after
 remaining for some time in the gall bladder it becomes as thick
 as molasses, and increases, also, in the intensity of its color and 
THE SPLEEN.—THE  PANCREAS.
397
in bitterness.  This is owing to the absorption of its watery par-
ticles by its mucous coat.
   The chief use of the bile is to aid digestion by dissolving the
fatty matters, and rendering them capable of being taken up by
the lacteals.
                        The Spleen.
   The  spleen is situated in the posterior part of the left hypo-
chondriac region.  Immediately above it is the diaphragm, below
it the colon, and to the right the large end of the stomach and
the  pancreas.  It is of a semi-oval figure, and of a deep blue or
brown color. Its external surface is convex;  its  internal slightly
concave, and has an imperfect fissure in its  centre, where the
blood-vessels enter.  Sometimes, also, its margins are  notched.
The usual size of the  spleen is four or five inches in length, by
two or  three in breadth. In some individuals several spleens are
found, the additional ones in such cases being quite small.  It is
kept in its place by ligaments, formed of the peritoneum, which
pass between it and the diaphragm, stomach and colon.
   In structure it presents a dark, brown pulp, which is held to-
gether  by cells formed of the  internal coat.  It has two coats,
an external peritoneal one, and an  internal thin, gray  and elas-
tic one.
   The  splenic artery,  which is the largest branch of the coeliac,
furnishes it with blood; its vein empties into the vena portarum.
   The  spleen has no secretion, and  its use is not well ascertained.

                        The Pancreas.
   The  pancreas secretes saliva, and is the largest salivary gland
in the  body. It is placed horizontally across the spine, in front
of the last dorsal and first lumbar vertebrae,  and behind the
stomach.  Consequently it is in the lower back  part of the epi-
gastric region.  Its length  is from  six to seven inches, and its
width  about two.   It is flattened before and behind.  The  ante-
rior face looks obliquely upwards, and the posterior face obliquely
downwards.  The right  extremity is enlarged into a head or 
3«|v;              TIIYSIOLOGY OF  DIGESTION.

tuber,  sometimes called  the  lesser pancreas, and  is in contact
with the curvature of the duodenum; the left extremity is con-
nected with the spleen.
  The color of the pancreas, like that of the other salivary glands,
is of a light gray or pink hue;  and its  structure is  lobulated,
the lobules being held together by intermediate cellular tissue.
  It has no peritoneal coat, but is included between two lamina
of the mesocolon.  Its duct, called sometimes the duct  of  ^Yur-
sungius, empties into the duodenum near the orifice of  the duc-
tus communis choledochus, and sometimes into the latter.  The
arteries of the pancreas are branches of the splenic, and  its veins
also empty into the splenic.

                  Physiology of Digestion.
  Before the food is fitted for purposes of nutrition,  it has to
undergo several changes  in the digestive organs.
   The first stage in the process of digestion is called prehension,
or the taking  of  food into the  mouth.  This is chiefly accom-
plished by the hand, some assistance being rendered by  the front
teeth,  lips, checks and tongue.
   The second stage is mastication (chewing), by which the food
is rendered sufficiently fine  to be taken into the stomach, and
acted  on  by its juices.   The food is kept between the  teeth by
the lips and cheeks externally, and by the tongue internally, and
the closure of the soft palate upon the tongue prevents it from
passing into the oesophagus.   The motion of the lower teeth upon
the upper  reduce it to the requisite fineness.
   While the food is being masticated, it is mixed with the saliva
and juices of the mouth, which  soften it and aid in its reduc-
tion.  This is called iusafivalion.
   The third stage  is deglutition  or swallowing, which,  when
the food has been sufficiently comminuted and moistened in the
 mouth, is  effected by a simultaneous action  of the muscles of
 the tongue, cheeks, floor of the mouth, soft palate and  pharynx.
 The elevation of the soft palate prevents the food from passing
 into the posterior opening of the nostrils (nares);  and  it is pre- 
PHYSIOLOGY  OF DIGESTION.
399
vented from passing from the pharynx into the trachea by the
closure of the glottis (opening of the trachea) by the epiglottis.
After entering the oesophagus, the alternate relaxing and con-
traction of the circular bands of muscular fibres gradually force
it downwards into the stomach. In the effort of  vomiting, the
action of the oesophagus is reversed—the contraction of its mus-
cular fibres commencing at its lower extremity. The spasmodic
cough which sometimes  takes place while eating or drinking, is
owing to some particles of the aliment entering the  larynx or tra-
chea, which  cannot occur unless  the glottis is opened by the
inhalation of air.  An attempt to speak when the mouth contains
food is generally the cause.
   The fourth stage in the process of digestion is chymification,
or the conversion of the food into a homogeneous pulpy mass,
generally of  the consistence of cream, called chyme. This change
is  effected in the stomach; as soon as the food enters this organ,
it  is  thoroughly mixed with  the  gastric juice, by the alternate
contraction  and  relaxation of the fibres of the muscular coat,
which produce a great variety of motion.  The contraction of the
muscular coat as well as the secretion of the gastric juice  from
the follicles of the mucous coat,  is occasioned by the stimulus
of the food.  No gastric  juice is contained in the organ when in
a state of rest, but its secretion is always excited by the presence
of a foreign  body.   While the process is  going on,  the food is
prevented from escaping from the stomach  by the  closure of its
orifices.
   The gastric juice is colorless, slightly viscid, and has an acid
reaction.  By analysis it  has been  found to contain  free muriatic
and acetic acids, and phosphates and muriates of potassa, soda,
magnesia and lime.   Although the presence of dilute acids in
the gastric fluid is essential to its action, the active agent is an
organic compound, called pepsin.
   This  agent undergoes no change itself,  but induces changes
in other substances, disposing  them to dissolve in the acids  of
the stomach, and form with them definite chemical compounds.
   The degree of solubility of different substances in the juices 
400
THE KIDNEYS.
of the stomach varies.  As a general rule, animal  food  is more
soluble than vegetable—though this is not  invariably the case.
Fatty substances undergo  but little change in the stomach; they
require admixture  with  the bile, whereby a saponaceous com-
pound is  formed,  to fit them for absorption by the chyliferous
vessels.
   The time required by the rstomach to convert the food into
chyme, varies from  three  to five hours according to the nature
of the food.
   The fifth stage is chylification. After  the food is reduced to
chyme in  the stomach, it  passes through the pyloric orifice into
the duodenum, where it is mixed with the  bile and pancreatic
juice, and by  their action converted into  chyle and  residual
matters. The chyle is a whitish or whey-like fluid, with a creamy
pellicle.  As the contents  of the intestine are gradually carried
along the  canal by an action, called peristaltic—induced by the
alternate contraction and  relaxation of the muscular coat—the
chyle is absorbed by the lacteals through the villi of the mucous
coat, and the residual foecal matters pass into the large intestine,
where  it  accumulates  until  finally expelled from the  system.
After leaving the  intestinal  canal, the chyle is carried by  the
lacteals through the mesenteric glands or ganglia, and  emptied
into the receptaculum chyli at the commencement of the thora-
cic duct, along which  it passes to  enter  the circulation at  the
junction of the internal jugular and subclavian  veins.

                       The Kidneys.
   The kidneys are two glands,  for  the secretion of urine, one of
which is situated on each side of the  spine, in the back part of
the lumbar region.^ They extend  from  the last dorsal to  the
third lumbar vertebrae; the right  one being  somewhat  lower
than the left, to accommodate the  right  lobe of the liver.   In
shape the  kidney is oval, resembling the kidney bean; its posi-
tion is  upright, with the  excavation,  called hilum, presenting
towards the spine.  It is a hard, solid  body of a reddish brown
color.  The length is about four  inches, and  the breadth two. 
THE KIDNEYS.
401
The kidneys are placed without the cavity of the peritoneum,
and surrounded with an abundance  of fat,  and cellular tissue.
Their proper covering is a dense  fibrous capsule which envelops
them completely, and penetrates into the fissures.
   The kidney consists of two different structures, which may be
readily seen by cutting it open longitudinally.  One, the exter-
nal, is called cortical, the other, the internal, medullary. The
cortical substance is about one-fourth of an inch thick, and forms
the whole circumference of the kidney.  It consists of a number
of tortuous  tubes of Ferrein, which secrete the urine,  between
which are numerous minute blood-vessels.
   The medullary substance is of a darker color than the cortical,
and consists of from twelve to eighteen cones (named after Mal-
pighi), which are arranged in three rows with their apices con-
verging towards the hilum or fissure.  These apices  are  called
papillae renales,  in consequence of their projecting like so many
small nipples. Each cone forms a sort of distinct gland, and
can be subdivided into numerous tubes, called the tubes of Bel-
lini,  into which the tortuous tubes of Ferrein, from the cortical
substance, empty.  As the urine oozes from  the  orifices  of  the
papillae, it is received into a membranous cup, the infundibulum,
which surrounds each papilla. From these infundibulae, four or
five of which are united into a common  trunk for  that purpose,
and called  a calyx,  the urine passes into a common receptacle,
called the pelvis, which is formed by the junction of about three
calyces.
    The pelvis is in the centre of  the kidney, and of  a conoidal
shape; from  it  the excretory duct of the  kidney, called  the
ureter, conveys the urine to  the  bladder.  The ureter is cylin-
drical, and about the size of a writing quill;  it has  two coats,
an internal mucous one, and an external fibrous one.  They are
thin, white, and  extensible.
    The ureter descends between the peritoneum and psoas magnus
muscle, and enters the inferior fundus of the bladder obliquely,
by a very small  orifice.
        51 
402       SUPRA-RENAL  CAPSULES---TnE  BLADDER.

                  Supra-Renal  Capsules.
  There  are  two small bodies, placed one upon the upper end
of each kidney.  They are of a yellowish brown color, and tri-
angular pyramidal shape, the base being concave to rest upon
the kidney. They have no excreting duct, nor is their use known.
It is supposed, as they are larger  in the  foetus  than the adult,
that their use is confined  to foetal  life.

                       The  Bladder.
  The bladder receives and serves as  a reservoir for the urine.
It is placed in the pelvis  immediately  behind the pubes.  When
distended, its shape is generally oval, the large end being down-
wards; in women and young  children it  is nearly spherical; it
is also, mostly,  more capacious in woman  than in  man.  Tho
dimensions of the bladder varies; when healthy it will gene-
rally hold near a pint. It is  bounded in  front by the  pubes,
above by the small intestine,  behind  by  the rectum, and below
by the prostate gland and seminal vesicles.  A conical ligament,
called the urachus, extends from  the  superior extremity of the
bladder to the  umbilicus; on each side  of the urachus, in  the
folds of the peritoneum, are the round  ligaments, which were the
umbilical arteries in foetal life.
  Besides these ligaments, the pelvic aponeurosis also assists to
retain the bladder in its place. Its upper extremity is called the
superior fundus, its lower extremity the inferior fundus, and
between the two is the body.  The neck is at the junction of the
bladder with the urethra.
  The walls of the bladder consists of four coats, viz. a peritoneal,
a muscular, a cellular,  and a mucous one.
  The peritoneal coat covers  the  superior  fundus, and the pos-
terior part of the body. The muscular coat consists of pale fibres
which pass in various directions.   It  is  somewhat thicker  than
that of the intestines;  and its contractions  expel the urine.
   The cellular coat connects the muscular and mucous coats,
and is dense,  strong,  capable of much  distention, and impervious
to water.  Through it the vessels  and  nerves are transmitted. 
THE PROSTATE GLAND.
403
  The mucous coat, also called the villous, is much more smooth
than that of the intestines; it is of a light pink color, and con-
tains  a great  number  of small mucous follicles.  An angular
space within  the  cavity of the bladder, included  between the
orifices of the ureters and the orifice of the urethra, is  called
the vesical triangle.  A projection in the anterior angle, caused
by the third lobe of the prostate, is called uvula vesicas.
  The sphincter vesicae  consists of a semi-circular and transverse
band of muscular  fibres surrounding the neck of the bladder.
Its  office is to keep the  orifice closed.
  The urethra is  the  membranous  canal which conducts the
urine from the bladder, in the male it also conducts the semen;
it consists of an internal  mucous coat,  continuous with that of
the bladder, and an external muscular one.  Its course is curved.
In  the male,  the portion which extends from the neck of the
bladder through the  prostate gland, is called  the prostatic por-
tion, and is about an inch in  length; in it are the uvula vesica,
and the caput gallinaginis or verumontanum—the  latter is a
triangular  elevation of mucous  membrane,  at the base of which
are the orifices of  the ejaculatory ducts. The next  portion  is
about three-fourths of an inch  in length, quite narrow, and  is
the membranous portion; the remaining portion, which  is the
longest, passes through  the  penis;  when it enters this  organ,
there  is an enlargement,  called bulbous.  The urethra  of the
female is much shorter than that of  the male;  it passes from
the neck of the bladder downwards and  forwards under  the sym-
physis pubis, and has its sexternal orifice at the superior, anterior
angle of the vagina.  The orifice is marked by a slight elevation.

                    The Prostate  Gland.
   This is a hard body, about the size and shape of a horse chest-
 nut, fixed to the neck of the bladder.  It rests upon the rectum
 behind, and in front is bounded by the triangular ligament.  It
 consists of three  lobes, through  the middle  one of which the
 urethra passes.   It  secretes a thick,  white  mucous,  which is
 discharged into the urethra. 
404
ORGANS OF  RESPIRATION.
                  Organs of Respiration.
  These are the larynx, the trachea, and the lungs.
  Larynx.—The larynx is a cartilaginous tube, forming the
commencement of the windpipe.  It is placed  in the upper and
anterior part of the neck immediately below the os hyoides. The
oesophagus is situated immediately behind it, separating it from
the vertebrae of the neck;  and on each side are placed the pri-
mitive carotid  arteries and  the internal jugular veins.  It gives
passage to the  air to and from the lungs, and also regulates the
voice; its superior portion  is prismatic, and its inferior circular.
In males it is larger, proportionably, than in females.
  The five following cartilages compose it, viz.  one thyroid, one
cricoid, two arytenoid, and  one epiglottis.
  The thyroid  is the largest of  the five, and is  placed at the
upper and anterior part  of  the neck, about one inch below the
os hyoides.  It consists  of two symmetrical, quadrilateral plates
which unite in an acute angle at the  median line,  and consti-
tute the prominence in the upper part of the throat known as
the pomum Adami (Adam's apple), which is much larger in
men than women.   In the  upper  part  of this prominence is a
deep notch.  On either  side the  superior margin is curved like
the letter S, and to it is attached  the middle thyreo-hyoid liga-
ment; the inferior  margin  is also curved, but in a less degree,
and to it is attached the middle crico-thyroid ligament.  The
posterior margin is elongated above and below into processes or
cornua, of which the superior are the longer, and called cornua
magna, and  are attached to the  lateral thyreo-hyoid ligament;
and the inferior, which are short and curved, are  called the
cornua minor,  and articulate with the lateral crico-thyroid liga-
ments.
  The cricoid cartilage  is situated below the thyroid, and forms
the base of the  larynx;  it is an oval ring, with the lower margin
nearly straight  and horizontal, and connected to the first ring of
the trachea; the superior margin is oblique on account of the
breadth being  three times  as great behind as  in front;  on each 
ORGANS OF RESPIRATION.
405
side of  the superior part of the posterior margin is a small con-
vexity for articulating with the arytenoid cartilages. Externally
the  posterior surface is flattened, and from it arises the crico-
arytenoid muscle.
   The arytenoid cartilages are placed at the upper and posterior
portion of the  larynx, and  in  shape resemble triangular pyra-
mids curved backwards.  Their bases articulate with the cricoid
cartilage. When joined together, the two cartilages resemble the
mouth  of a  pitcher, from which they received their  name; to
the anterior surface, which is uneven, the superior and  inferior
thyreo-arytenoid ligaments.
   The epiglottis cartilage is situated on the posterior face of the
base of the hyoid bone,  and is partially enclosed  by the  two
sides of the thyroid cartilage.  Its form is that of an oval disk;
the upper edge is thin and rounded;  the lower part is also thin
and elongated, and attached to the thyroid cartilage. Its attitude
is vertical, immediately behind the base of the tongue, and pro-
jecting  somewhat above it; the anterior surface is slightly con-
cave, and the posterior convex.
   Besides these cartilages there is sometimes a small one, called
corniculum laryngis, attached to the apices of each of the ary-
tenoid cartilages.
   Numerous ligaments hold these cartilages together.  Four of
these within the larynx, are the thyreo-arytenoid ligaments ; the
two inferior are commonly called  the vocal cords,  and  extend
one  on  each side from the  angle of the thyroid to the base of
the arytenoid cartilages;  the space  included between them is
the rima glottidis.  The  two superior  ligaments, also  one on
each side, are placed three or four lines above the inferior, and
extend from the angle of thyroid to the middle of the arytenoid
cartilages.  All of  these ligaments  are small, round,  fibrous
threads, covered  by a reflection of the lining membrane of the
larynx.   The action of the small muscles of the larynx render
them more or less tense.
   The following pairs of  muscles  belong to the larynx, viz. the
thyreo-hyoid,  the  cryco-thyroid, the posterior  crico-arytenoid, 
406               ORGANS  OF RESTORATION.

the  lateral erieo-arytennid, the  thyreo-arytenoid, the  oblique
arytenoid, the transverse arytenoid, the thyrco-ej>iglottidcus, aud
the a ryte n o-cp iglott ideus.
   Their names sufficiently indicate their attachement; they serve
to move the various cartilages, and  modulate the  voice.
   The  larynx is lined internally by a mucous membrane  con-
tinuous above with  that  of the pharynx, and below with that
of the trachea.
  Fig. 25.  A view of the larynx, trachea, and bronchia, with an outline
of the lungs. 1, 2, 3 Outline of the  lungs; 5 thyroid  cartilage; 6 cricoid
cartilage; 7 trachea;  8 right bronchus;  9 left bronchus;  10  muscles con-
necting the thyroid and cricoid cartilages; 19, 19 the subdivisions of tho
right and left bronchial tubes;  20, 20 capillary vessels. 
           THE TRACHEA.—THE THYROID GLAND.       407

                        The Trachea.
   The trachea is a cylindrical canal, four or five inches in length
by about three-fourths  of an inch  in  diameter, extending from
the larynx as low as the third  dorsal vertebras, and terminating
in two ramifications called bronchia.   It is  composed  of  from
sixteen to twenty  distinct rings of  cartilage united by an elastic
ligamentous  tissue.  These rings are  deficient in the posterior
third of their circumference, which is completed by a muscular
structure, whose fibres  are transverse,  and the contractions of
which, diminish the diameter of the larynx, and thereby facili-
tate expectoration. Each ring is about a-fourth of an inch broad,
and half a line thick.  The trachea is lined by a  mucous mem-
brane continuous with that of the larynx.
   The  structure and arrangement of the bronchia is the same
as  that  of the trachea. The right bronchus  is larger and of a
larger diameter than the left.  At the orifice of each branch there
is a semi-lunar cartilage, which forms somewhat more than half
of  its circumference, and the office of which is to keep the ori-
fice open.   The bronchia, after ramifying  into numerous sub-
divisions, terminate in the lobules of  the lungs.  The structure
of the smaller ramifications is somewhat modified; the cartilages,
instead  of being  formed of one piece, are composed of several
pieces,  and  are placed farther  apart;  finally, they disappear
entirely, and the bronchia are membranous only.

                    The Thyroid  Gland.
   This gland is situated in front of the first and second rings of
the trachea, and at the  sides of  the larynx.   It  consists of two
lobes, one on  each side, united by a thin, narrow portion stretched
across in front of  the upper part of the  larynx, called the isth-
mus.  It is of a dark brown color, and  granular structure.   It is
also covered by a capsule which gives it a polish. Its use is not
known.
  In  some districts of country it becomes very much enlarged,
constituting the disease  known as bronchocele or goitre. 
408
THE LUNGS.
                        The Lungs.
   The lungs  arc the essential organs  of respiration,  and are
 situated one on each side of  the  chest, occupying the principal
 part of its cavity. They are conical in shape, and separated from
 each other by the  heart and by a membranous septum, called
 the mediastinum; the diaphragm separates  them  from the ab-
 domen. On the external surface they are concave, corresponding
 with the walls of the chest; internally they are concave to receive
 the convexity of the heart.  The superior extremity is a tapering
 cone, terminating above the level  of the first rib;  the  inferior
 extremity is broad and concave, and  rests upon the diaphragm.
 The color of the lungs is a  light pink, with specks or patches of
 black.
   The right lung is somewhat shorter than the left, though more
 voluminous;  and is divided into  three lobes, while the left has
 but  two.
   Each lung is supported in  its place by its root, which is com-
 posed of the pulmonary artery, pulmonary veins, bronchial tubes
 and vessels, and the pulmonary plexus of nerves.
   In structure the lungs are divided  into numerous lobules, and
 these again into minute air-cells, all of which are held together
 by cellular tissue, through which  the blood-vessels, nerves and
 lymphatics ramify.  The shape of  the air-cells is polyhedral, and
 a  certain  number of them communicate with  each  other, by
 lateral openings, and with a single branch of the bronchial tube.
 They are lined by mucous membranes. The intermediate cellular
 substance is called parenchyma.
   The  pulmonary artery, which conveys  the dark, venous blood
to the lungs, terminates in capillaries which ramify on the walls
of the air-cells; from these walls  arise the pulmonary veins, by
which the arterial blood, purified in its passage  through the
capilaries, is returned to the heart.
   The bronchial arteries are the nutritious arteries of the lungs;
they arise from the thoracic aorta.
   The  lymphatics, which are numerous, arising from the surface 
THE PLEURA.
409
and the substance of the lungs, terminate in the bronchial glands,
which are placed at the roots of the lungs, and at the bifurcation
of the bronchia.
   The nerves are branches of the sympathetic and eighth pair.

                             Fig.  26.
  Fig. 26.   Front view of the heart and lungs.  1 Right ventricle of the
heart; 2 left ventricle; 3 right auricle; 4 left auricle;  5 pulmonary artery;
6 right pulmonary artery; 7 left pulmonary artery; 8 remains of the duc-
tus arteriosus of the foetus;  9 arch of the  aorta;  10 superior vena cava;
11 arteria innominata; 12 right subclavian vein;  13 right common carotid
artery and vein; 14 left vena innominata;  15 left carotid artery and vein;
16 left subclavian vein and artery; 17 trachea; 18 right bronchus;  19 left
bronchus;  20, 20 pulmonary vein; 7, 19, 20 form  the root of the left lung;
and 18, 20 the root of the right lung;  21 superior lobe of the right lung;
22 its middle lobe; 23 its inferior lobe; 24 superior lobe of the  left lung;
25 its inferior lobe.

                          The Pleurae.

  Each lung is invested by a serous membrane which maintains
its structure and gives to  it its shining appearance.  After en-
closing the lung as  far as  the  root, it is reflected upon  the
parietes of the chest.   The portion that covers the lungs is  called
        52 
410   MEDIASTINUM.—THYMUS GLAND.—RESPIRATION.

the pleura pidmonalis, and that in contact with the chest the
pleura costalis.  The diaphragm and the root of the lung is also
covered by it.
                     The Mediastinum.
  The space included between  the pleura of the two lungs is
called the mediastinum.  It is in the middle line of the thorax,
and is divided into the anterior, middle and posterior.
  The anterior mediastinum is the  triangular  space between the
sternum and heart; it contains the remains of the thymus gland,
and some loose cellular tissue.
  The  middle  mediastinum contains the heart, the  ascending
aorta, the superior vena cava, the bifurcation of the trachea, the
pulmonary arteries and veins, and the phrenic nerves.
  The posterior mediastinum extends from  the heart  to the
spinal column,  and  contains the descending aorta, the superior
intercostal,  and greater  and  lesser azygos veins, the  thoracic
duct, the oesophagus,  the great splanchnic nerves, and the  pneu-
mogastric nerves.
                    The Thymus  Gland.
   The thymus gland is placed in the anterior mediastinum ; it
is of a triangular shape and pink color.  Its structure is lobu-
lated.  Its use  is not known;  up to the second year of age it
grows, after which it gradually diminishes and almost  entirely
disappears.  In all probability it is  of importance in foetal life.

                 Physiology  of Respiration.
   The  function  of  respiration  consists  in the  conversion of
venous into arterial blood.  This  change,  by which carbonic acid
is given off from, and oxygen taken into  the system, takes  place
in  the  lungs.   In  the periphery  of the  body  the circulating
fluid  becomes dark  colored, and is taken  up by the radicles of
the veins,  and after  being mixed with the lymph and chyle, is
carried to the  lungs, where  it is brought  into contact with the
atmospheric air, which restores its red color, and fits it  for pur-
poses of nutrition. 
PHYSIOLOGY OF RESPIRATION.            411
   The manner in which this is accomplished is  the following:
the walls or sides of the air cells are very thin and transparent,
and the capillaries are so placed between two adjacent cells, as
to come in contact with  the air from both.  The carbonic acid
of the venous blood then  passes out through the walls of the
air cells by exosmose or exudation, to unite with the nitrogen
of the air,  for which  it has a  strong affinity, and be exhaled
from  the lungs;  and  the  oxygen  of the air contained  in the
air cells passes through  their parietes by endosmose, or imbibi-
tion,  to unite with the blood, giving to  it its bright red arterial
color, thus vitalizing it, or fitting it for the various purposes of life.
   The carbonic acid given off in respiration is chiefly furnished
by the continual  decay of the tissues.  The carbon  of the food,
however, is also directly converted into  carbonic acid to a con-
siderable degree,—varying in quantity according to the amount
of animal heat required.
   Inspiration, or the action by which air is taken into the lungs,
and expiration, or the action by which the air received in inspi-
ration is expelled from the lungs, are performed by the expan-
sion and contraction of the  chest.
   In  the first inspiration, the diaphragm is the  principal  agent
in the dilatation  of the chest; when in a state of rest, this mus-
cle is  much arched, but by contracting it becomes  more  plane,
and by flattening its  arch  increases  the cavity  of the thorax,
while at the same time, by  forcing down the abdominal viscera,
it causes the  protrusion of the abdomen, witnessed in inspira-
tion.  The intercostal  and other of the muscles of the chest
produce the lateral dilatation, which is however  slight in  ordi-
nary  natural  inspiration, but is considerable when the inspira-
tions  are deep and forced.  In  a natural,  quiet inspiration,
the expansion ^of  the  chest  is  almost  wholly  accomplished
by  the  diaphragm.   This  is also the case in old  persons, the
ossification  of the  cartilages  of  the  ribs  preventing  lateral
expansion.
   In  general there  are from sixteen to eighteen  inspirations per
minute, though the number varies greatly under different cir- 
412
TIIYSIOLOGY  OF RESPIRATION.
cumstances. The average proportion, numerically, of the pulsa-
tions of the heart to  the  respiratory  movements is about four
and a  half to one.  At about every fifth inspiration the move-
ments of the thorax are considerably increased.
  In the second,  or expiration, the parts concerned  in inspira-
tion return again to their  natural  state;   the elasticity of the
cartilages of the ribs, the rings of the  bronchia, and of the  air
cells themselves, all aid in  accomplishing this, as  does also the
contraction of the abdominal, and some of  the thoracic muscles.
  After  each expiration, a short interval  of repose  succeeds;
the length of  this interval has been estimated as follows.  By
representing  the  whole period of time occupied in one respira-
tory act, from the beginning of one inspiration to the beginning
of the next,  by ten, the inspiration may by  estimated at five,
the expiration at  four, and the interval of repose at one.
  The amount of air inhaled at each inspiration is estimated to
be about  twenty cubic  inches, which,  allowing sixteen  inspira-
tions  per minute, would give 19,200 cubic inches in  one hour,
passing through  the  lungs of an individual, or  460,800 cubic
inches in  twenty-four hours.
  A certain portion of  air, called residuary, always remains in
the lungs,  and upon it their lightness depends. It has been cal-
culated that  after an  ordinary expiration  more than a hundred
cubic  inches  remain,  and after  the  strongest expiration  more
than thirty.  After the  lungs have been once inflated  by a full
inspiration, no power whatever can remove the air from them
so as to cause them to sink in water.  The residuary air will
not support life a longer time than three or four minutes.
   " The  movements of respiration are partly voluntary, and
partly involuntary.  Partly voluntary,  in  order  that they may
be  inservient to the production of vocal sounds,  and to  the
actions of speaking,  singing, &c.  Partly involuntary, lest in
sleep or in moments of forgetful ness, the movements of respira-
tion should be suspended,  and fatal results ensue."
   The nerves which  govern  the respiratory  movements  are
 derived from  the medulla  oblongata at the base of the brain. 
            CIRCULATORY SYSTEM.—THE HEART.         413

                    Circulatory System.
  The organs concerned in  the circulation, are the heart,  the
arteries, the veins, and the lymphatics.

                        The Heart.
  The heart, the centre of the circulation, is a hollow muscular
organ, situated in the thorax between the sternum and the spine;
being  bounded  at the  sides by the lungs, and resting on the
centre of the diaphragm below.  In  shape it is  conoidal, having
the apex inclined to the left side, and in contact with the walls
of the thorax about the junction of the fifth rib with its cartil-
age.  The  side which rests upon the diaphragm is somewhat
flattened.  The length of the heart is about five inches and a half,
and its diameter at the base three inches and a half. Its ordi-
nary weight is  about six ounces.   It has four cavities,  two of
which are  called auricles, and two  ventricles.   The heart  has
two functions, viz. to receive the blood and throw  it into  the
lungs, and  to receive it again after  it has  been oxygenated in
the lungs, and distribute it throughout the body.  The  auricles
are the receptacles  of  the  blood, and  the  ventricles propel it
through the system.
  The auricles form the base, and  the ventricles  the  body of
the organ;  the anterior extremity of the left ventricle, which
extends somewhat beyond the right, constitutes its apex.
  A membrane, called  the pericardium, surrounds the heart,
and also invests the roots of the large vessels connected with it.
This  membrane consists of two  layers, an  internal and an ex-
ternal one;  and is  only attached to the base of the heart,  the
remainder of the organ being only loosely enveloped by it.
  The right auricle  is an oblong cuboidal cavity, having supe-
riorly an elongated  process, which  bears  some  resemblance to
the ear of an animal, from which the term auricle has probably
originated;  anteriorly  it has a convexity or pouch, called its
sinus.  Posteriorly, at its superior angle, the descending vena
cava enters, and at  its inferior angle the ascending vena cava.
Its  parietes  are thin, and composed of muscular fibres arranged 
414
THE nEART.
in parallel lines, resembling the  teeth of a comb, whence their
name musculi pectinati.  Between the orifices of the two vena
cava, an elevation exists called the  tuberculum Loweri.  A de-
pression on  the partition between the two auricles is called the
fossa ovalis; in foetal life an opening existed at this place, called
the foramen ovale.   Between  the right  auricle and ventricle is
a round hole about an inch in diameter, called the ostium veno-
sum, for the passage of the blood.
   The right ventricle receives the blood from the right auricle.
It is a somewhat triangular cavity, having its base downwards,
with thick  parietes, and is  also  larger  than  any of the  other
cavities of the heart.  It is placed anterior to the left ventricle,
from which it is  separated by  a thick septum.  The internal
surface of the cavity is composed of large fleshy fibres, called
columnae carnae, from a number of which  several tendinous
chords  (chordae tendinese) proceed to be inserted into the loose
edge of the  tricuspid valve.  This valve is situated between the
auricle  and  ventricle, opening into the latter, and is formed of
a doubling of the lining membrane of the ventricle.  It is cir-
cular, and attached tround  the  ostium venosum;  at its loose
margin are  three points or  processes, from  which it derives its
name tricuspid. When the  heart contracts, this valve closes the
ostium  venosum, and prevents the blood from  returning into the
auricle, and hence  it passes into the pulmonary artery.   The
orifice of the pulmonary artery is circular, and about an inch in
diameter; it is furnished with  three valves,  called from their
shape semilunar; they are formed from the internal coat of the
artery,  and  open outwards; in the centre of their loose  edges is
a small cartilage, called the corpus aurantii,  the office of which
is to perfect the closure of the valves.  The use of the valves is
to prevent the blood returning from the artery into the ventricle,
when the latter dilates.  Behind each valve is a pouch,  called
the sinus of  Valsalva.   The pulmonary artery  passes upwards,
and backwards to the under side of the arch of the  aorta, and
 there divides into two branches,  one for each lung, the branch
 for the right  lung being the longest and largest.  The diameter 
THE HEART.
415
of the pulmonary artery is the same as that of the  aorta, but
its parietes are thinner.
   The left auricle is concealed by the right and by the ventri-
cles.  Its shape is quadrangular or square, and into each of its
four angles one of the pulmonary veins enter.   Its parietes are
muscular, smooth, and  rather  thicker than those of the right
auricle.  Its ear-like appendage is narrower and more crooked
than that of  the  right  auricle, and  the musculi pectinati  also
enter into its  structure.  The opening  between it and the left
ventricle is likewise called ostium venosum.  The partition  be-
tween the auricles is sometimes imperfect in the adult.
   The left ventricle  is  a conical cavity, and forms the apex  of
the heart.  Its parietes are much thicker than those of the right
ventricle.  Internally,  its  surface is roughened by numerous
columnee carnae, which become  tendinous (chordae tendinse)
where they are attached to the bicuspid or mitral valve.  This
valve, which consists of two folds or leaflets of the lining mem-
brane of the ventricle, has  its base attached to the margin of the
ostium venosum, and its edges  opening downwards into the ven-
tricle : consequently when the ventricle contracts, it  closes the
opening, and  the blood passes  out by the aorta.  The orifice of
the  aorta  is  supplied  with three semilunar  valves, arranged
precisely like those at the  mouth of the pulmonary artery.
   The  nutritious vessels  of the  heart  are the right and left
coronary arteries.  The veins  accompanying them empty into
the right auricle.  The nerves are branches of the sympathetic,
supplied by the cardiac plexuses.
   The pericardium is a  membranous  sac, consisting of two
layers, in which the heart is loosely enveloped.  The external
layer  is fibrous,  white,  and  inelastic;  the internal  layer is
serous, lines  the external, and is reflected over the heart  and
roots  of the vessels.  It gives to the heart its  smooth shining
appearance, and the fluid it secretes  lubricates the surface of the
organ and allows it to  move freely in the pericardium.
   The cavities of the heart  are lined  by a serous membrane
 similar to that of the blood-vessels. 
416     BLOOD-VESSELS.—THE ARTERIES.—THE AORTA.

                       Blood-Vessels.
  There are two sets of blood-vessels, one of which, the arteries,
carries  the red or oxygenated blood from the heart and distri-
butes it to the different parts of the body;  and the  other, the
veins, carries dark blood, collecting it  from the various parts of
the body, and returning it to the heart.
                       The Arteries.
  The  arteries  are  composed of three  coats, an  external, a
middle, and a serous one.
  The  external coat is formed  of cellular tissue,  and is firm
and strong, not yielding on the application  of a ligature.
  The  middle coat  is fibrous  and elastic, having  its  fibres
arranged circularly.  It  is readily divided by a  ligature.
  The internal coat is  a delicate serous membrane, easily torn.
Its  secretion lubricates the surface of  the artery, and facilitates
the passage of blood.
  The small arteries which ramify on  the coats of the arteries
to nourish them, are called rasa vasorum. The sympathetic fur-
nishes the arteries with nerves.

               The Aorta, and its Branches.
   The aorta is tho main trunk of the  arterial  system; it arises
from the upper and posterior end of the left ventricle, and pass-
ing upwards and backwards towards the left side forms a curva-
ture, called its arch, the summit of which is about an inch lower
than the upper  end of  the  sternum.   Near the origin  of the
arch there is generally an enlargement or dilatation  of the aorta,
called its greater sinus.  After forming its arch the aorta  passes
to  the  left side  of  the spine, about the third or fourth  dorsal
vertebra, and descends through the thorax to the hiatus aorticus
of the diaphragm, through which it passes into the abdomen,
and terminates in front of a space between the fourth and fifth
 lumbar vertebrae, by dividing  into two large  trunks  called the
 primitive iliacs.  In its descent through the  thorax and abdomen,
 it is in contact with the left side of the bodies of the  vertebrae. 
THE AORTA,  AND ITS  BRANCHES.           417
It receives the name of thoracic aorta, while passing  through
the thorax, and abdominal, while passing through the abdomen.
  The coronary arteries are the first branches given off by the
aorta;  they are distributed to the heart.
  The arteria innominata  is the next branch;  it is given off
from  the arch  of the  aorta, and after ascending  about an inch
and a half obliquely towards  the right side, divides in  front of
the trachea into the right carotid, and right subclavian.  The
right carotid ascends nearly  as  far as the  os  hyoides,  and
divides into the external and internal carotids.
  The left carotid arises from the arch of the aorta, and passing
to  the  left side of the neck divides, as the right, into the ex-
ternal and internal carotids.
   The  external carotid is distributed to  the more superficial
parts of the head and neck, and the internal goes to the brain
and eye.
   The  following principal branches  are given off from the ex-
ternal carotid, viz. the superior  thyroid which goes to the thyroid
gland;  the lingualis to the  tongue;  the facial to the face; the
inferior pharingeal to the pharynx;  the occipital to  the integu-
ments on the back part of the head; the posterior auricular to
the integuments of the side of the head; and the anterior, pos-
terior, and middle  temporal, which go to the muscles and integu-
ments on the side and back part of the head.
   The  internal maxillary artery commences at  the bifurcation
of  the external carotid, and winds around the neck of the lower
jaw to  supply the back portions of the mouth and palate.   Its
course is very tortuous, and  it gives off numerous branches, of
which  the following are  the principal: the tympanitic, to the
tympanum, or drum of the ear, through the glenoid fissure;  the
meningeaparva,  to the dura mater  through the foramen ovale;
 the meningea magna or media, to the dura mater through the
 spinal foramen; the inferior dental, to the teeth through  the
 posterior mental  foramen; the deep temporal, two in number,
which go to the temporal muscle; the pterygoid and buccal to
the muscles and  lining membrane of the cheek; the superior
         53 
418                SUBCLAVIAN ARTERY.
 alveolar or maxillary to the molar teeth, antrum and gums;
 the  infra orbital enters the infra-orbital  canal, and is distri-
 buted to the canine and incisor teeth, to the antrum,  and to the
 muscles in front of the upper jaw; the  superior palatine goes
 to the mouth and palate; the superior pharyngeal to the pha-
 rynx and Eustachian tube ; and the spheno-palatine to the lining
 membrane of the nose,  entering through  the  spheno-palatine
 foramen.
   The vertebral and internal carotid arteries supply  the brain;
 the  former enter through the foramen  magnum occipitus, and
 uniting form  a large trunk, called  the basilar, which  passes
 along the  median line of the pons varolii, giving off  several
 branches;  the principal  being the superior cerebellar, and the
 posterior cerebral arteries.
   The  carotid enters the  cranium through the carotid canal,
 and  divides into the ophthalmic, middle cerebral, and anterior
 cerebral arteries.
   The  arteries  are  united  in front and behind by branches
called anterior and  posterior communicating,  and  by  this  a
 circle, called the circle of Willis, is formed.

                    Subclavian Artery.
   On the  left side  the  subclavian arises from  the arch of the
 aorta, and on the right from the  innominata. The right  is con-
 sequently shorter, and more superficial than the  left.
   The subclavian  passes out  of the thorax over the first rib,
and usually gives off five  branches, viz.
   The vertebral, which is the first and largest, and which passes
through the foramina of the spinous processes of the  six upper
cervical vertebrae, and enters the cranium through the occipital
foramen.
   The inferior thyroid, which goes to  the  thyroid gland, and
also gives  off the ascending cervical to  the muscles of the neck.
   The superior intercostal, to the two upper intercostal spaces.
   The internal mammary, which enters the thorax,  and pass- 
SUBCLAVIAN ARTERY.
419
ing down over the cartilages of the  ribs, gives  off branches to
the thorax, diaphragm, and abdomen.
   The posterior cervical, which passes to the back of the neck
to be distributed on the muscles there.
   After giving off these branches the subclavian artery goes to
the axilla or arm-pit, passing between the first rib and the sub-
clavius  muscle, where  it loses the name of subclavian and takes
that of  axillary.
   The  axillary artery, also  usually sends off five branches,
though  there is  much irregularity in this respect.
   The supra-scapular, to the muscles of the scapula.
   The  external mammaries,  mostly four  in  number,  to  the
shoulder, axilla, and muscles on the front of the thorax.
   The scapular to the arm-pit, and  the  muscles on the back of
the thorax.
   The  anterior circumflex to  the parts in front  of the joint;
and the posterior circumflex  to the posterior parts of the joint
and the deltoid muscle.
   From the axilla to the elbow joint the artery descends  at  the
inner side of the arm  on the  edge  of the biceps flexor muscle,
and is called brachial.
   The  brachial artery gives off four branches.
   The profunda major to the outer portions of the arm.
   The profunda minor to the internal face of the triceps at its
lower part, and to the internal condyle.
   The  nutritious artery  to  the bone  through the nutritious
foramen.
   The  anastomotic, which passes around the internal condyle,
and anastomoses with the ulnar recurrent.
   At the elbow joint the brachial artery divides into the radial
and ulnar arteries.
   The radial is the smaller of the two, and except at the wrist
is the more superficial.  It descends at the outer side of the arm
between the  tendons  of the  supinator radii longus and flexor
carpii radialis muscles.  In its course it gives off  the following
branches, viz. 
420
SUBCLAVIAN ARTERY.
   The radial recurrent, which is distributed  about the joint,
and anastomoses with the profunda major.
   The superficialis vohv, which is distributed to the  palm of
the hand.
   The dorsalis carpi to the back of the wrist.
   The magna pollicis to the thumb;  this is one of the terminal
branches of the radial.
   The radialis indicts is connected at its origin  with the last,
and is distributed on the radial side of the fore-finger.
   The palmaris profunda  is the third terminal  branch of the
radial; it crosses the hand beneath the flexor tendons, forming
the arcus profundus, from which branches are sent to the inter-
ossei muscles, and uniting  at the ulnar side of the hand with
the cubitalis manus of the ulnar artery.
   The ulnar artery is deep seated; it passes from the  internal
condyle along  the inner side of the arm between  the tendons of
the flexor carpi ulnaris, and flexor sublimis muscles.  At the
wrist  it is superficial, and  its pulsations may be  distinctly felt;
it passes over the annular ligament, and, in the palm, forms the
superficial arch.
   The following are the branches it sends off:
   The ulnar recurrent, which is distributed  to the  muscles of
the internal condyle, and anastomoses with the anastomotic.
   The interosseus, which divides into an anterior and a poste-
rior interosseous branch; the anterior descends the arm, in con-
tact with the interosseous ligament,  giving off branches in its
course to the deep seated muscles; near  the wrist it perforates
the ligament, and is distributed to the back of  the  wrist and
hand; the posterior branch soon perforates the interosseous liga-
ment, to be distributed to the extensor muscles of the fore-arm.
   The dorsalis manus is given off  at  the lower end of the fore-
arm, and distributed upon the back of the hand.
   The superficial arch  (arcus sublimis) is formed by  the con-
tinuation of the radial artery beneath the palmar fascia,  from it
a branch is sent  to the ulnar side of the little finger, followed
by three others (digital arteries), each of  which  on  arriving at 
BRANCHES OF  THE THORACIC AND ABDOMINAL AORTA.   421

the heads of their metacarpal bones, divides into two branches, a
digito-radial, and a digito-ulnar, to supply the sides of the fingers.

              Branches of the Thoracic Aorta.

   In descending through the  chest the aorta gives  off the fol-
lowing branches.
   The  bronchial arteries,  generally  but  one  for  each lung,
though  sometimes two or more, pass into the root of the lungs,
and  are distributed along  the ramifications of the  bronchia.
They are the nutritious arteries of the lungs.
   The oesophageal arteries, mostly five or six small  twigs, arise
one after the other from the aorta, and go to the oesophagus.
   The intercostal arteries, ten on each side, supply the ten infe-
rior intercostal spaces, the two upper spaces being supplied by
the subclavian.   Those for  the right side are longer than the
left in consequence of having  to cross the spine behind the oeso-
phagus and  the  vena  azygos.   Each  artery  passes  along the
grooves in the lower margin of the rib for about two-thirds of
the length of the latter.

             Branches  of the Abdominal  Aorta.

   The aorta  in its descent through the abdomen gives off several
branches viz.
   The phrenic, two in number, which go to the diaphragm, and
are chiefly distributed on its concave surface.
   The cceliac, a large trunk, about half an inch in length, which
is given off opposite the junction of the last dorsal with the first
lumbar vertebra.  It divides  into three branches—the  gastric,
hepatic, and  splenic.
   The gastric  is the smallest branch and goes to the lesser cur-
vature of the stomach.
   The hepatic goes to the liver, entering through the transverse
fissure; it gives off a  branch to  the  greater curvature of the
stomach,  called  the right gastroepiploic;  and another to the
gall  bladder, called the cystic. 
422
BRANCHES  OF THE A15DOMINAL  AORTA.
                                           lie. 27.  The abdominal
                 Fig- 27.                  aorta and its branches.
                                          1 Phrenic arteries ; 2 coc-
                                         li:ic artery;  3 gastric ar-
                                         tery ; i hepatic artery ; 5
                                         splenic artery;  6 supra-
                                         renal artery of tho right
                                         side; 7 right renal artery ;
                                         8 lumbar arteries;  9 su-
                                         perior mesenteric; 10 sper-
                                         matic arteries; 11 inferior
                                         mesenteric;  12 sacra me-
                                         dia; 13  common iliacs;
                                         ] I internal  iliac  of  tho
                                         right side; 15 external ili-
                                         ac; 16 epigastric artery;
                                         ] 7 circumflex iliac ; 18 fe-
                                         moral artery.

                                            The  splenic,  which
                                         is the  largest  branch
                                         of the  cceliac,  goes to
                                         the spleen; it gives off
                                         several small branches
                                         to  the pancreas, and
                                         the vasa  brevia,  and
                                         left gastric arteries to
                                         the  left  half  of  the
                                         greater   curvature  of

     Kl-I 4*'"'  \         \k^\          *^e  stomach.
     <  i&S                   I             The superior mesen-
                                         teric arises from  the
                                         aorta  about  half  an
                                         inch below the coeliac,
                                         and is nearly as large;

it is distributed to the whole of the small  intestine,  and to  the

right side of the large; three branches go  to the latter, viz. the

ileo-colic to the ccecum, and  a portion of the ileum; the colica

dextra to  the  ascending  colon;  and  the  colica  media to  the

transverse colon.

  The capsular arteries, generally but one on each  side, go to

the supra-renal capsules.

  The renal or emnlgent  arteries, mostly one for  each side, are

large, and go outwards transversely to the kidneys; before  en-

tering  the fissure of the kidneys they divide into three  or four
branches.
 
BRANCHES  OF THE  ABDOMINAL  AORTA.       423
Fig. 28.
  Fig. 28.  Distribution of the superior mesenteric artery. 1, 2 Duodenum ;
3 pancreas;  4jejunum; 5 ileum; 6 coecum and appendix vermiformis;
7 ascending colon ; 8 transverse colon ; 9 commencement of the descending
colon; 10 superior mesenteric artery;  11 colica media; 12 the branch which
anastomoses with the colica sinistra;  13 the branch of the superior mesen-
teric, which anastomoses with the pancreatico-duodenalis; 14 colica dextra;
15 ileo colic; 16, 16 branches to the small intestines.

   The spermatic  arteries arise  from  the aorta just below the
emulgents, or sometimes from the latter, and pursuing a tortuous
course, pass through the abdominal rings, and divide into several
branches before reaching the  testicle.   In the female the  sper-
matics are chiefly distributed to  the ovaries.
   The inferior mesenteric usually arises from the aorta about an
inch above its termination. It is much smaller than the superior
mesenteric, and divides into three principal branches, called the 
424         THE  PRIMITIVE,  OR COMMON  ILIAf'S.

superior, middle, and inferior left colic arteries, which are dis-
tributed to the left side of the colon.  It also gives off a branch,
the superior hemorrhoidal, to the upper part of the rectum.
  The lumbar arteries, commonly five on each  side, correspond
with the intercostales, and are distributed chiefly to  the loins.
  The middle sacral artery is a small artery arising from  the
bifurcation of the aorta, and  passing down the sacrum  to  the
coccyx.
             The Primitive,  or common  Hiacs.
  The aorta, as mentioned, divides at the fourth lumbar vertebra
into  the two iliacs, which pass outwards and downwards  to  the
sacro-iliac junction, where they divide into  the internal and ex-
ternal iliac.
  The internal iliac, or hypogastric, is a short trunk descending
from the sacro-iliac junction  into the cavity of the pelvis, and
giving off  numerous branches, of which  the following are  the
principal:
   The iliodumbar, which is distributed to  the loins.
   The lateral sacral, which divides  into four branches to enter
the anterior sacral foramina.
   The obturator  artery, which passes out  of the pelvis at the
obturator  foramen, and is  distributed by  two  branches to the
obturator and adductor muscles.
   The middle hasmorrhoidal, which goes to the rectum to the
vesiculae seminales, and to the prostate gland.
   The vesicle arteries consisting of several branches, which go to
the bladder.
   The gluteal artery, which is a large trunk and one of the ter-
minating branches of the internal iliac, passes out of the pelvis
at the upper part of the sacro-sciatic notch, to be distributed by
two or three branches to the  glutei  muscles.
   The ischiatie artery, which is the anterior of the two  termi-
nal  branches of  the internal iliac, passes  out of the  pelvis
 through the sciatic notch, supplying the floor of the pelvis and
 back of the thigh.  Before leaving the pelvis the ischiatie artery 
     THE EXTERNAL ILIAC.--THE FEMORAL ARTERY.     425

gives off a large branch, called the internal pudic, which is dis-
tributed to the muscles of the perineum and to the penis.
  The internal pudic gives off several branches, viz.
  The lower hasmorrhoidal, to the anus and rectum.
  The transversus perineal, to the muscles and integuments of
the perineum. In the lateral operation for stone it is always cut.
  The urethro-vulvar, to the corpus spongiosum of the penis.
  The dorsi penis, to the back of the penis.
  And the cavernous artery, to the corpus cavernosum.

                    The External Iliac.
  The external iliac artery extends from the sacro-iliac junction
to Poupart's ligament,  under which  it  passes to  the lower ex-
tremity, and is then called the femoral artery.  Near Poupart's
ligament  it gives  off two branches; one, called the epigastric,
ascends obliquely upwards and inwards, to be distributed upon
the anterior parietes of the abdomen.   In  its course it passes
between the two abdominal rings, and consequently in the opera-
tion for hernia is in danger of being cut.
  The other, the circumflex iliac, also passes obliquely upwards
to the crest of the  ilium, and is distributed to  the muscles of
the loins and abdomen.

                   The Femoral Artery.
   This artery is a continuation of the external iliac; it extends
from Poupart's ligament down the inner side of the thigh, about
two-thirds of its length, where it perforates the tendon of the
adductor magnus muscle, and takes the name of popliteal. The
femoral artery sends off the following branches :
   The superficial artery  of the abdomen goes obliquely to the
integuments of  the lower part of the  abdomen,  and is  there
distributed.
   The external  pudics, two or three small arteries which  go to
the  integuments.
   The  profunda, a large artery going  to the muscles  of the
upper part of the thigh.  It gives off a large branch called the
        54 
42Q   THE  POPLITEAL ARTERV.—THE ANTERIOR TIBIAL,  ETC.

external circumflex, which supplies the muscles on the outside
of the thigh;  and another,  called the internal circumflex, to
the muscles on the inside of the thigh. Several smaller branches,
called  perforating arteries, are given  off by the profunda and
the internal circumflex.
   The anastomic artery is sent off by the femoral, and descend-
ing to the knee anastomoses with the  internal articular arteries.

                   The  Popliteal Artery.
   The popliteal is a continuation of the femoral artery, and ex-
tends from the adductor tendon  to  the opening in the inter-
osseous ligament below  the head of the tibia, where it  divides
into  the auterior and posterior tibial.
   It gives  off the superior, middle, and inferior articular arteries
to the knee joint; and the gemellar, two in number, to the
heads of the gastrocnemius  muscle.
                    The Anterior Tibial.
   The anterior tibial artery perforates the interosseous ligament,
 and descends  the leg in front of  it to the ankle joint, giving
 off  in its course numerous branches, as follows:
   The recurrent tibial, which goes  upwards, and anastomoses
 with the arteries about the knee joint.
   The internal malleolar, to the inner side of the ankle joint.
   The external malleolar, to the  outer side of the ankle joint.
   The tarsal,  to the external ankle and to the tarsus.
   The metatarsal, to the toes by  three branches.  It forms  an
 arch at the roots of the  metatarsal bones.
   The dorsal, to the outer  side of the great toe, and the inner
 side of the second toe.
   And the pedal, a branch  passing through the first interosseal
 space to the sole of the foot to join the external plantar artery.

                     The Posterior Tibial.
   This artery descends from  the  head  of the tibia to  the os
 calcis in  a line from  the  middle of the ham to the external
 ankle.  It is beneath the muscles of the calf of the leg. 
      THE  VEINS.—'VEINS OF  THE  HEAD AND NECK.     427

  The peroneal arises  from the posterior tibial, and dividing
into several branches is distributed to the muscles on the back
of the leg.
  On reaching the os calcis, the posterior tibial artery divides
into the internal and external plantar arteries.
  The internal plantar is a small  artery, which passes along
the inner margin of the foot, and is distributed to the great toe.
  The external plantar is considerably larger than the last, and
passes obliquely across  the sole of the foot to the outer margin,
forming an  arch  from  which branches  (digital arteries)  are
given off to the interosseous spaces, and to the  toes.

                         The  Veins.
  The veins collect the blood  from the  different parts of  the
body, and convey it to the heart, They are much more numerous
than  the  arteries; the deep seated arteries generally having
two accompanying veins called venae comitas.  All  the venous
blood is emptied into the right auricle through  two large trunks,
called  the ascending and  descending vena cava. The veins of
the head,  upper  extremities,  and  thorax,  unite to form  the
descending vena cava.
  The parietes of the veins,  like the arteries,  are formed of
three coats; these coats, however, are much thinner than those
of the arteries, which render the veins flaccid  when empty and
easily distinguishable from the arteries, the elastic  middle coat
of which enables them  to retain the cylindrical shape.
   The veins are likewise furnished with numerous valves, formed
of  two or three crescentic folds of the lining membrane, which
open  towards the heart.
   In the  brain  and the  bones the canals  or channels which
convey the venous  blood, are termed sinuses, and are lined  by
the internal coat of the veins.

               Veins  of the Head and  Neck.
   Most of the veins of the head and neck have the  same names
as  the arteries they accompany. 
428           VEINS  OF THE HEAD AND NECK.

  The internal maxillary, occipital, temporal, and other of the
principal trunks  join  together  to form the external jugular,
which is a superficial vein extending from the parotid gland to
the subclavian vein, into which it empties behind the outer end
of the clavicle.  The external jugular  is covered externally  by
the skin, superficial fascia, and platysma-myoides muscle.
  The internal jugular vein is larger than the external; it ex-
tends from the base of the occiput to  the posterior face of the
clavicle near its sternal end, where it unites with the subclavian
to form the vena innominata.  It receives the blood from the
sinuses of the  cranium, and from some  of the superficial veins.
 
SINUSES  OF  THE DURA  MATER.          429
                Sinuses  of the Dura Mater.
  The channels, or passages, by  which the  blood is removed
from  the brain, are formed between the lamina of  the  dura
mater, and termed sinuses.
  The principal are:
  The superior  longitudinal sinus, a channel  of a triangular
shape, commencing at the foramen coecum by  a small vein  from
the root of the  nose, and gradually increasing in size forms an
arch in the middle  line of  the arch of the cranium, which ter-
minates at the internal occipital cross in an enlargement called
the torcular herophili, where it receives the  blood from other
sinuses.
  The inferior longitudinal sinus, is situated  between  the lobes
of the cerebrum in the falx cerebri; it also forms an arch, and
empties  into  the straight  sinus  at  the  anterior edge  of the
tentorium.
  The straight  or fourth sinus, extends along the median line
of the tentorium, from the falx cerebri to the torcular herophili.
  The vena azygos, is a short trunk formed by the venae Galeni
which empties into the fourth sinus.
   The lateral sinuses, on  either side,  commence at  the torcular
herophili, and  pass over the occipital,  parietal, and  temporal
bones to  the posterior foramen  lacerum,  through which  they
pass  out  of  the cranium, and form  the commencement of the
internal jugular vein.
   The circular  sinus, surrounds the pituatary gland in the sella
turcica, communicating on either side with the  cavernous sinuses.
  The cavernous sinuses,  receive  the blood from the ophthalmic
veins; they are venous cells of a  spongy structure, situated on
either side of the sella turcica.
   The superior and inferior petrosal sinuses, are small channels,
traversing the petrous portion of  the  temporal bone to empty
into the lateral sinus.
   The anterior,, occipital sinus, passes across the basilar process
of the occipital bone, forming a communication between the two
inferior petrosal sinuses. 
430      THE VEINS OF THE  LPPKR EXTREMITIES.

   The posterior occipital sinus  extends from the  torcular hero-
phili in the lower edge of the falx cerebri to the  foramen mag-
num, where  it divides  and empties into the lateral sinus on
either side.
   The name  of emissaries of Sanforiua has been given  to  the
small veins,  which pass through  the minute foramina  in  the
bones of the  cranium, to communicate with the  sinuses  of the
brain.

           The  Veins  of the Upper Extremities.

   These veins are superficial and deep seated;  the latter  accom-
pany the arteries, and take the same  name; two veins usually
accompany one artery.
   The superficial veins  lie between the  skin  and the brachial
aponeuroses.  They anastomose frequently with each other, com-
mence generally on the back  of the fingers,  and finally unite
into two principal branches, called the cephalic and basilic vein.
   The cephalic vein commences on the thumb, fore-finger, and
back of the hand, and passes up the radial  side of the fore-arm
to the elbow, where it  is joined by the median cephalic, and
pursuing  its  course up the  outer side of  the arm, empties into
the subclavian vein  beneath the clavicle.
   The basilic vein commences on the little  finger, and passes up
the ulnar side of the  fore-arm  to the elbow, where it receives
the median basilic, and continuing its course up  the  arm along
the inner margin of the biceps muscles, where it is joined by
the venae comites, and becomes the axillary vein.
   The median vein collects  the blood from  the palm  of the
hand, wrist, and front of the fore-arm, and ascends in front of
the fore-arm  to within a few inches of the elbow joint, where it
divides into two  branches, one  of which called the median ce-
phalic runs outwardly to join the cephalic vein;  the  other, the
median basilic, goes inwards to join the basilic vein.
   The axillary vein is formed by the union of the basilic  and
the brachial veins;  it passes up the arm in the same sheath with 
THE VEINS OF THE LOWER EXTREMITIES AND ABDOMEN.  431

the axillary artery to the axilla, where, like the artery, it takes
the name of subclavian.
   The superior or descending vena cava is formed by the junc-
tion of the right and left innominata; it empties into the right
auricle of the heart.

           The Veins of the Lower Extremities.

   The veins of the lower extremity, like those of the upper, are
superficial  and deep seated, and  the  latter  generally take the
name of the artery they accompany.
   The popliteal vein commences behind the head  of the tibia,
and extends upwards along with the popliteal artery to the per-
foration  in the tendon of the adductor magnus muscles, after
which it takes the name of femoral.
   The femoral vein is a continuation of the popliteal, and passes
upwards along with the  artery of the same name to Poupart's
ligament, where it becomes the external iliac vein.
   The small or external saphena vein is superficial, commencing
by the union of several small branches at  the outer side of the
top of the foot and ankle, and passing up the posterior and outer
side of the leg to the  ham, empties into the popliteal vein.
   The great or internal saphena vein is also superficial; it com-
mences by a number of  roots from the sole, and the inner and
upper part of the foot, and ascending along the internal face  of
the leg, and thigh to within  about an inch and a half of Pou-
part's ligament empties into the femoral vein.

                   Veins of the Abdomen.
   The principal of these are the external and internal iliacs;
the spermatics of the  testicles;  the renales or  emulgents from
the kidneys;  the hepatic in three branches, from  the liver, all
of which empty directly into the ascending vena cava; the vesi-
cal plexus from the bladder, and the uterine plexus from the
uterus, which empty into the  internal iliac; and the haemorrhoi-
dal veins from the rectum, which empty into the inferior me-
 senteric. 
432
THE PORTAL VEIN.
  The inferior or ascending vena cava commences between  the
fourth and fifth lumbar vertebras, by the union of the iliac veins,
and ascending along the spinal column at the right of the aorta,
receives in its course the abdominal veins,  and passing through
the diaphragm into the chest, empties into the right auricle of
the heart.
                      The Portal Vein.

  The portal vein collects the blood from all the viscera of the ab-
domen, and entering the transverse fissure of the liver, is included
with  the biliary duct and hepatic artery,  in a common invest-
ment of cellular tissue, called the capsule  of Glisson; it  rami-
fies through the substance of that organ previous to entering the
general circulation.
   The veins which contribute to form the portal are: the supe-
rior and  inferior mesenteric, the splenic, the gastric, and  the
pancreatic;  the trunk of the portal vein, which  is about four
inches in length, extends from the posterior  face of the pancreas
to the transverse fissure of  the liver.

           Peculiarities of the Foetal Circulation.
   The circulation of the  foetus, in consequence  of the absence
of  respiration, differs  very materially from that  function in the
adult.  For its nutrition  and development an alliance  through
the circulatory organs of  the mother is necessary.
   The peculiarities of the foetal circulation  consist in:  the duc-
tus venosus, a vein leading from  the umbilical  vein along the
margin  of the liver to the  ascending vena cava;  the communi-
cation of the right and left auricles  through the foramen ovale;
 and the ductus arteriosus, a branch from  the pulmonary artery,
 which conducts the blood returned from the head into the aorta
just  behind  the origin of the left subclavian artery.  When the
 current of the blood  is changed  after birth, by respiration, the
 ductus venosus and arteriosus, shrivel up into ligamentous cords,
 and  the aperture between the auricles is closed by the  adhesion
 of its valve. 
       PECULIARITIES OF THE FCETAL  CIRCULATION.     433

  The placenta is the organ through which the effete blood of
the foetus is regenerated, or aerated. It is closely attached to the
uterus of the mother, and the change in the blood is probably
effected by interstitial circulation, as there appears to be no direct
connection of blood-vessels between the mother and foetus. The
umbilical cord extends from  the  placenta to the umbilicus of
the child, and consists of one umbilical vein and two umbilical
arteries; the latter are twisted around the former, and conduct
the blood to the placenta; the former conveys the  aerated blood
back again to the child. Thus it will be observed,  that the um-
bilical vein  and   the  ductus venosus carry arterial blood;  and
the umbilical arteries  and the ductus arteriosus carry venous
blood.
   Commencing at the placenta, the circulation of the foetus
pursues the following course.   The blood passes along the um-
bilical vein  to the umbilicus of the  child; it then penetrates the
abdomen, after which it divides into two currents,  one of which
goes through the ductus venosus into the ascending vena cava;
the other passes  through the vena portarum  to the liver.  The
portion sent to the liver, after ramifying through that organ, is
collected by the  hepatic veins, and likewise discharged into the
ascending cava.
   The  contents  of  the ascending cava are  emptied into the
right auricle of  the heart, from which it  passes  into the left
auricle through the ostium venosum.  From the left auricle it
passes into the left ventricle, by which it is distributed by means
of the aorta throughout the system.  That portion of the blood
which goes to the head and upper extremities, is collected" in the
descending vena cava, and also discharged into the right auricle,
from  whence it passes into the  right ventricle, from  which a
small portion goes into the pulmonary artery,  and the remainder
into the  aorta through the ductus arteriosus.
   It  will be perceived, therefore,  that all parts  of the body
receive mixed arterial and venous blood, with the  single excep-
tion of the  liver, to which organ  the blood is  sent from the
placenta unmixed.
       55 
434
THE  LYMPHATICS.
   The umbilical arteries are continuations of the internal iliacs ;
they pass up at the sides of the bladder and  go to the navel,
from which  point, as mentioned, they form part of the umbilical
cord.   After  the  change  in  the  circulation,  at  birth,  they
become the round ligaments of the bladder.

                     The Lymphatics.
   The lymphatics,  so called from  the transparent color of the
fluid they carry, are found in all parts of the body;  their office
is that of interstitial absorption, by which  the effete parts  of
the body are removed, and room  made  for new  depositions.
They are small, transparent, cylindrical vessels, rarely exceeding
a line in diameter.  Like  the arteries,  they have three coats,
and when distended they present a knotted appearance, which
is owing to  their being furnished with valves and sinuses.
   In the intestines the  lymphatics, which commence in the vil-
lous coat, are frequently called lacteals, and contain the chyle.
   The lymphatic is also spoken of as the absorbent system.
   Numerous lymphatic glands  exist in the mesentery, groin,
axilla, and neck, into which  the lymphatic vessels  enter, and
pass out again.  They form frequent anastamoses with each other,
and become larger and less numerous, as they proceed from their
origins.
   All  the lymphatic vessels from the various parts  of  the body
collect into two large trunks, one  of which  is placed on each
side of the body.
   The trunk on the right side receives the lymphatics from the
right side of the head and neck, and the right  upper extremity
and lung; it is short, and discharges its contents into the venous
system at the  junction of the right internal jugular and sub-
clavian vein.   The trunk  on the  left side, called  the thoracic
duct, receives  the contents of the lymphatics and chyliferous
vessels of  the rest of  the  body; it is the principal lymphatic
vessel of the body, and  commencing in the abdomen with an
enlarged extremity, called receptaculum  chyli, which receives
the contents of the lacteals and the lymphatic  vessels  of  the 
PHYSIOLOGY OF THE CIRCULATION.         435
lower extremities, it passes into the thorax  through the dia-
phragm, and ascending  through the posterior mediastinum  in
front of the  spinal column, along with the aorta, empties  its
contents at  the  junction of the  left subclavian and internal
jugular veins.

               Physiology of  the Circulation.
   By the circulation of the blood is understood that function
by which the arterial blood, fitted  for nutritive purposes in the
lungs, is distributed to every part of the body. The organs and
vessels, by which this function is  accomplished, viz. the  heart,
arteries, veins, and  the  capillary vessels, intermediate between
the arteries and  veins, constitute the vascular system.
   The  heart is  the  centre  of  the circulation, and may be con-
 sidered  as a double  organ, or as two distinct hearts  brought
 together for convenience of package,—the right one containing
 black or venous blood only, and the left one red or arterial blood
 only.   The circulation from the two hearts, or the two sides of
 the heart, are entirely distinct; that from the  right is called  the
 lesser or pulmonic circulation, and that from the left, the greater
 or systemic.
   Commencing at the heart, the route  of the circulation is as
 follows; the venous blood from all parts of the body is collected
 in the right auricle, from which it passes through the auriculo-
 ventricular  orifice into the right ventricle; thence it is sent
 through the  pulmonary artery to the lungs to be aerated, after
 which  it is collected by the pulmonary veins,  and carried to
 the left auricle, out of which it  passes through the auriculo-
 ventricular orifice into  the left  ventricle, from whence it is  dis-
 tributed by means of the aorta throughout the system.
    The chief propelling  power of the  circulation is the  alter-
 nate contraction and dilatation of  the  heart.  This motion of
 the heart  is constant and unremitting during life; its cessation,
 even for a short time,  terminating existence.   It is independent
 of the nervous system,  and also of  the  stimulus of the  blood,
 as it continues after all nervous communication is  cut off, and 
 436          physiology of the cthculatton.

 when the heart is empty, and in fact after it has Won removed
 from the body.   The ventricles are the principal agents in tho
 propulsion of  the blood,  for which purpose  they have strong
 muscular parietes; the  auricles  have but slight contractile
 powers, their chief use being as receptacles.  The contraction of
 the auricles and ventricles is not synchronous.  The two auricles
 act together,  as  do also  the  two  ventricles.  The contraction
 of the auricles  which forces the blood into the ventricles, is im-
 mediately followed by the contraction of the ventricles,  during
 which the auriculo-ventricular valves are closed  to  prevent the
 regurgitation of  the  blood into the auricles, and  consequently
 it passes into the aorta and pulmonary artery.  Dilatation of all
 the cavities  succeeds their contraction.   The term systole has
 been given to the contraction  of the  heart, and  that of diastole
 to its dilatation.  The pulse  is caused by the  projection of the
 blood into the arteries from the ventricle,  and corresponds  with
 the contraction or systole.  The contractile  nature  of the  mus-
 cular coat of  the arteries aids in the propulsion of the blood,
 and also in the production of the pulse.  In  the capillary and
 venous circulation there is no pulse.
  By the time the blood reaches the capillaries,  the force of the
 heart is  lost.   Of the circulation  carried on  in this system of
vessels but little more can be said  than  that it  is due  to  vital
action.  The nutritive properties of the arterial  blood  are  here
yielded up, and the effete portions enter the veins to be returned
to the heart and  lungs, there to be given off, or  again vitalized.
  The forces which aid in returning the blood to the heart are:
the suction power of the heart, muscular motion, and inspiration.
When the heart dilates, and when the chest  is  expanded by the
descent of the diaphragm, a vacuum is created, which the blood
rushes towards the chest to fill.
  At every contraction of a muscle, the veins of the part are
pressed upon,  and  their valves  allowing  the flow of the blood
but in one direction, towards the heart, it must consequently be
driven on in that direction.
  The muscular force of the heart has been variously estimated 
PHYSIOLOGY  OF THE CIRCULATION.          437
by different observers, some allowing it to be equal to but ten or
fifteen pounds, other estimating it at thirty or forty. A true esti-
mate is of course exceedingly difficult to arrive at, as it is greatly
modified by age., sex,  temperament, and a variety of causes.
  The usual number of contractions of the heart, or pulsations,
per minute, in the adult  is from  seventy to  seventy-five. In
youth they are more frequent, and in old age less so.
  In  the female sex the pulse is also more  rapid than in  the
male.  Temperament,  muscular exertion, mental emotion, &c,
all exercise a controlling influence over the action of the heart.
  On applying the ear over the region of the heart, two distinct
sounds are perceptible, during each beat of the heart. The first
is a dull, lengthened sound; the second quick  and sharp;  they
follow each other  in quick succession, and  are succeeded  by a
short interval of repose, after which they recur  again, and so on.
The first is synchronous with the contraction, and the second with
the dilatation of the ventricles.  About one-half the whole period
between the commencement of one pulsation, and the commence-
ment of the next is occupied by the first sound; one-fourth by
the second; and the remaining fourth is the period of repose.
The causes of the  first sound are : the rush of the blood through
the orifices of the aorta and pulmonary artery; the passage of
the blood over the rough internal surfaces of the ventricles; the
flapping of the auriculo-ventricular valves; the sound of muscular
contractions;  and the  impulse of the heart against the chest.
  The second sound is caused  by the closure of the valves, at
the mouths of the aorta and pulmonary arteries.
  At each contraction of the heart, it is projected forwards, and
strikes against the parietes of the thorax, in  the region of the
fifth and sixth ribs; the  shock  this occasions  is called  the im-
pulse of the heart.
  There is some variation in the capacity of  the cavities of the
heart, the right auricle  and ventricle  being  somewhat more
capacious than the left.
  Tht circulation was discovered by William Harvey of London,
in 1719. 
438      NERVOUS SYSTEM.—THE SPINAL MARROW.
                     Nervous System.
   In this system  are  included the  brain, spinal marrow, and
nerves.
   The material or tissue of which it is composed, is called ncu-
rine, and is of a soft, pulpy consistence.
   This  tissue consists  of two portions, one of which is white or
medullary, and of fibrous structure; the other gray or ciueritious,
and globular in structure.
   The  nerves  are composed of the medullary  substance, and
consist  of parallel  fasciculi or bundles of fibres, capable of being
subdivided into filaments. Each nerve, as well as each particular
fibre, is enveloped in a sheath, called the neurilemma.
   A ganglion is a knot occurring in the course of a nerve, and
by which they obtain an increase of volume and power.  (Janglia
arc of different sizes and shapes, and consist of a union of white
 and gray matter.
   An anastomose is the junction of the filaments  of  the same
 nerve,  or of different nerves.
   A plexus is the junction or interchange of the larger fasciculi
of the same nerve, or of different nerves, forming a network.

                    The Spinal Marrow.
   The  spinal marrow is contained within the vertebral canal, and
 extends from the atlas or first vertebra  of  the neck to the first
 or second lumbar vertebra.  Its general form is cylindrical,
 though it is somewhat flattened in  front and behind, and has
 an enlargement in  the neck and loins.  Its diameter, with the
 addition of its  membrane,  is much  smaller  than  that  of  the
 spinal canal, by which provision  injury from pressure is guarded
 against.
    It is divided, longitudinally, into two symmetrical parts, by
 an anterior and a posterior fissure. The posterior fissure is some-
 what deeper than the  anterior.   It has also a lateral  fissure on
 each side, placed  somewhat posterior to the middle, and passing
 inwards aud forwards.
    The spinal  marrow is composed of medullary and cineritious 
THE SPINAL  MARROW.
439
matter, the former being internal, and the latter external; the
cineritious matter is also much more abundant than the medullary.
  From the sides of the spinal marrow,  thirty pairs  of nerves
are sent out,  which, like the vertebrae, are divided into cervical,
dorsal, lumbar, and sacral.  Of these, eight pairs belong to the
neck, twelve to  the  thorax,  five to the loins, and five to the
sacrum.  Sometimes there is an additional  pair, making thirty-
one in all.
  Each nerve arises by two roots, one of which comes from the
anterior cord of  the  spinal marrow, and  the  other  from the
posterior cord.  The posterior root is larger than the anterior,
and upon  it is a ganglion;  the roots are  separated by a process
of pia mater, called the ligamentum denticulatum,  and after
penetrating the dura mater by separate foramina, unite to form
a single trunk.
  The lumbar and  sacral pairs arise  from  the lower  extremity
of the spinal  marrow, and form a cluster resembling the tail of a
horse, hence the name of cauda equina has been applied to them.
  Three membranes envelop the spinal cord; one, the external,
is called the dura mater; another, the internal, is the pia mater,
and the third, which is between the others, is the arachnoidea.
The dura mater is  continuous with that  of the  brain, and ter-
minates below in  a  closed extremity; it is a white fibrous mem-
brane, affording a loose investment to the  spinal canal, except
at the first cervical vertebra, to which it adheres firmly.  Between
it  and the parietes of the canal is placed a quantity of loose
cellular tissue containing fat and  serum.
  The tunica arachnoidea  is placed next to the dura  mater;  it
is very thin and transparent.
  The pia mater adheres closely to the spinal marrow; it is a
cellular membrane, made up  almoet entirely of blood-vessels;
it sends processes into the anterior and posterior fissures of the
medulla spinalis; below it terminates in  round cord-like pro-
cesses continuous with the  roots  of the nerves constituting the
cauda equina. It  is also continued along the nerves constituting
their  neurilemma or sheath. 
440
THE BRAIN.
                      The  Brain.
   The brain is contained within the bones of  the cranium, aud
is  oval in shape.
   It is composed of cineritious and medullary matter, and con-
sists of four principal parts, viz. the medulla oblongata, which
is  a continuation  of the spinal marrow, or its superior part; tho
pons Varolii, called also protuberant! 'a annularis, which is placed
at the superior extremity of the medulla oblongata; the cerebrum,
which  occupies seven-eighths of the cavity of  the cranium; and
the cerebellum, which is situated at the base of the  cranium.
   Like the spinal marrow, the brain also  is enclosed in three
membranes,—the dura mater, tunica arachnoidea, and pia mater.
   The dura mater is the most external, lining the whole of the
cavity of the cranium, to the bones of which it  is firmly attached.
Its structure is fibrous.  It consists of two lamina,  from the in-
ternal of which several processes are formed,.  One of these, the
falx cerebri, is situated under the middle line  of tho  head, and
extends from  the crista galli in front to the tentorium behind,
separating the hemispheres of the brain.  Its breadth in front is
about an inch, and behind about two, or two  and a half inches.
Another process is called  the  tentorium, and like the last is
crescentic  in  shape; it is stretched horizontally across  the cra-
nium, separating the cerebellum from the posterior  lobes of the
brain.  In front it is continuous with the falx  cerebri. The falx
ccrebelli is a small triangular process, extending from the lower
surface of  the tentorium to the foramen magnum;  it separates
the two lobes of the cerebellum.
   The tunica  arachnoidea is placed between the dura mater
and pia mater; it is a thin, transparent, serous membrane, and
adheres closely to the pia mater.
   The pia mater is a cellular membrane, placed  next  to the
substance of the  brain, and extending to the  bottom of the fis-
sures between the convolutions, consequently its internal surface
is  very irregular; its external surface, being in contact with the
arachnoid membrane is smooth and shining. 
     THE MEDULLA OBLONGATA.—THE PONS  VAROLII.    441

   This membrane is made up almost entirely of blood-vessels.
Clusters of small, white, granular bodies, called glands of Pac-
chioni  are  contained  in  its meshes, the  use  of which is not
known.
                  The Medulla Oblongata.
   The medulla oblongata, as mentioned, is the upper part of the
spinal cord; it extends from the margin of the  atlas to the pons
Varolii, and is about an inch in length, and three-fourths of an
inch in breadth  at  the base; it gradually increases in size as it
ascends. Like the medulla  spinalis, it is divided by an anterior
and a posterior fissure into symmetrical halves,  and each  half
consists of three  portions,  viz. the corpora pyramidalia,  two
cord-like cylindrical portions, one  on  each side of the  anterior
fissure, and united at their lower extremities  by an  interchange
of fibres.  The corpora olivares,  are* two oval bodies  situated
posterior to  the pyramidalia and  separated from  them by a
fissure.  The corpora restiformia are elliptical elevations, situated
at the posterior part  of the medulla oblongata, and separated
from  each  other by the posterior fissure.  They are about one
inch in length, and  united  below  by  transverse fibres of medul-
lary matter.

                      The Pons Varolii.
   The pons Varolii, or annular protuberance, is a large cuboidal
mass of medullary matter, placed  at the top and in  front of the
medulla oblongata, and resting on  the basilar process at the base
of the cranium; its internal fibres  are longitudinal, being a con-
tinuation of those of the medulla oblongata; externally they are
transverse.  A superficial fossa divides  it into  two symmetrical
halves.   Four crura proceed from  it,  two to the cerebrum,  and
two to the  cerebellum.

                      The  Cerebellum.
   The cerebellum  is situated in the posterior fossa  of  the  cra-
nium, beneath the posterior lobes of the  cerebrum, and separated
from it by  the tentorium.
       56 
442
THE CEHKBRUM.
  It is oblong and flattened, having its long diameter transverse,
and constitutes about one-sixth part of the brain.  It is divided
by a  longitudinal fissure  into  two lobes  or  hemispheres.   On
making a vertical section through one of the lobes, an arbores-
cent arrangement is presented, caused by the  intermingling of
the gray and white matter,  to  which the name  of  arbor  vit.e
has been given.   A  fasciculus  of medullary  matter, called the
crus cercbclli, connects each  lobe  of the  cerebellum with the
pons A'arolii;  another fasciculus, called  the valve of the  brain,
extends from the corpus restiforme of the  medulla oblongata to
the under surface of the cerebellum.
  Externally the cerebellum is formed of cincritious, and inter-
nally  of medullary matter.

                      The Cerebrum.
  The cerebrum  is  a large ovoid  mass, six  or seven  times as
large  as the cerebellum, and weighing from three to four pounds.
It is  divided into two parts or hemispheres by the deep fissure
above  (superior longitudinal fissure), and each  hemisphere is
subdivided on its under surface  into three lobes—anterior, poste-
rior, and middle.  The anterior and middle lobes rest upon the
anterior and middle fossa of the cranium, and the posterior lobes
upon  the tentorium. The fissure  of Sylvius is between the an-
terior and middle lobes.  The surface of the cerebrum consists
of a number of convolutions or gyri, separated from each other
by deep fissures (sulci), which  give it an exceedingly irregular,
tortuous appearance.
  The periphery of the convolutions to the depth  of about a
fourth of an inch is  composed of cineritious substance, and the
interior of medullary substance.
  The longitudinal fissure completely separates the two anterior
lobes  from each other, extending between them to the base of
the brain;  the posterior lobes are also separated in  the  same
manner. But between the middle lobes, a broad arched band of
medullary  matter, called the corpus callosum, extends from side
to side at the bottom of  the longitudinal fissure, connecting the 
THE CEREBRUM.
443
two hemispheres.  This band  is mostly composed of transverse
fibres.   The crura cerebri, coming from the anterior margin of
the pons Varolii, also pass from  the middle  fissure  to  each
hemisphere.   They  are two thick, cylindrical,  white cords of
longitudinal  fibres,  which terminate in the convolutions  after
expanding in all directions so as to constitute the principal part
of the hemispheres.  Between the crura are two white globular
bodies,  about as large as a pea, called the eminentia mammil-
lares.   In front of these  is a soft mass of cineritious matter
called  the tuber cinereum.  The term infundibulum has  been
given to a reddish, hollow, conical  body, the base of which is
on the tuber cinereum and the apex,  extending to the pituitary
gland.  This  latter is a light colored, vascular body, consisting
of two  lobes situated in the sella Turcica.   A  triangular  arch
of medullary matter, the base of which is continuous with the
posterior  part  of  the corpus  callosum, and the apex joined to
the eminentia mammillares by  two  crura, is called the fornix.
A vertical septum,  consisting of two  lamina,  and  separating
the lateral ventricles, having its upper extremity attached to the
fornix,  and  its lower  to  the corpus  callosum,  is called the
septum lucidum.
   The velum interpositum is a reflection of the pia mater imme-
 diately beneath the fornix; the plexus choroides  is a net-work
 of veins  contained in its edges.  The pineal gland is a small,
 reddish, .conical body, placed upon the tubercula quadrigemina,
 and connected with the optic thalamus; it often contains par-
 ticles of calcareous matter.  The ancients imagined it to be the
 seat of the soul.  The tubercula quadrigemina are four promi-
 nences situated on the  upper part of  the crura cerebri, and
 behind the optic thalamus; a  passage  under them  is the  aque-
 duct of Sylvius.  The  thalami optici, two in number, are situ-
 ated on the superior face of the  crura cerebri;  they are convex
 above and internally, and are composed of  a mixture of medul-
 lary and cineritious matter.  Their  posterior extremities  have
 three rounded prominences, called corpora  geniculata.
   The corpora striata  are  two oblong masses  of gray matter, 
444
NERVES OF TnE  CRANIUM.
Bituated in front of the thalami optici, and at the bottom of the
lateral ventricles.
  In the brain are five ventricles, or cavities;  two of them are
called lateral,  and the others, the third, fourth and fifth.
  The lateral ventricles are situated in the  centre of the  hemi-
spheres, and are separated from each other  by the septum luci-
dum.   They are horizontal and very irregular  in  shape; the
roof is formed by the corpus callosum, and  the floor by the for-
nix, thalami optici, and corpora  striata.  Each  contains three
depressions, called cornua, of which one is  anterior, one  poste-
rior, and one inferior;  an oblong eminence  on  the inner side of
the posterior cornua is called hippocampus minor, or ergot; and
a ridge on the floor of the inferior cornua is called Jupjux-arnpus
major.  The lateral ventricles communicate with each other, and
with the third ventricle by the  foramen of Monro.
  The third ventricle is situated between the thalami optici;  it
is a narrow, oblong cavity bounded above by  the velum  inter-
positum and the fornix, and below by the tuber cinereum, crura
cerebri, and eminentia mammillares.  It communicates with the
lateral ventricles by the foramen of Monro, and with the  fourth
by  the aqueduct of Sylvius.
   The fourth ventricle is an irregular triangular  cavity, situated
between the pons Varolii, cerebellum, and medulla oblongata;
above, it is bounded by the valve of the  brain and the tubercula
quadrigemina;  its floor is formed by the calamus  scriptorius.
It communicates with the third ventricle.
   The fifth ventricle is placed between the lamina of the septum
lucidum,  and has no communication with the other ventricles.

                  Nerves of the Cranium.
   There  are  nine pairs of  nerves arising from the cranium,
which are designated numerically, as well  as  by their function
or distribution.
   The olfactory nerve, or first pair arises  by three roots from
the base  of the  brain at the  corpora  striatum  which  unite  in
the fissure of Sylvius.  It passes forward, converging towards its 
NERVES OF  THE  CRANIUM.             445
fellow, to the cribriform plate of the ethmoid bone, where it
forms a large, soft bulb from which it sends filaments  into  the
nose to supply the Schneiderian membrane.
   The optic nerve or second pair, arises by a single  broad root
from the thalamus opticus and the tubercula quadrigemina, and
going forward to the anterior part of the third ventricle, forms
a junction with  its fellow in the form of the letter X, called the
chiasm or crossing of the optic nerves, after which it enters the
orbit of the eye  to join the retina.
   The motor occuli, or  third pair, arises from the crus cerebri,
and passing  into the orbit through the sphenoidal  foramen, is
distributed to most of the muscles of the eye-ball.
   The patheticus, or fourth pair, arises by two roots from the
 valve of the brain, and entering the orbit through the sphenoidal
 foramen, is distributed to the superior  oblique muscle of the
 eye-ball. It is  the smallest of the nerves, coming from the en-
 cephalon, and is not larger than a sewing thread.
   The trifacial, trigeminus, or fifth pair, arises by  three roots,
 from the medulla oblongata, and emerging from the side of the
 pons Varolii, enters a canal of the dura mater at the fore part
 of the petrous  portion of the temporal bone, where it forms a
 ganglion, called the ganglion of Gasser,  from which proceed
 three branches, viz. the ophthalmic, superior maxillary,  and
 inferior maxillary.
    The  ophthalmic  branch emerges through the sphenoidal
 foramen, and is distributed to the orbit,  lachrymal gland, and
 integuments and muscles of the forehead.
    The superior maxillary branch passes  through  the foramen
 rotundum, and is distributed to the upper jaw and face.
    The inferior  maxillary branch emerges  at the foramen ovale,
 and is distributed to the  tongue, and to the muscles and teeth
 of the lower jaw.
    The motor externus oculi, or sixth pair, arises from the corpus
 pyramidale by  two roots, and passing forward through the caver-
 nous sinus, it enters the orbit through the sphenoidal foramen,
 and  is distributed to the abductor occuli muscle. 
446
THE SPINAL  NERVES.
  The seventh pair includes the facial and auditory nerves,
and arises from the corpus restiforme and  calamus scriptorius.
Both branches enter the  internal meatus.   The fascial, which is
likewise called port ia dura, passes out through the stylo-mastoid
foramen, and penetrating the  parotid gland, is distributed by
numerous branches to the face.  The auditory is also called the
portio mollis.  It is distributed to the internal ear.
  The eighth pair includes the glossopharyngeal, the pneumo-
gastric, and the spinal accessory.   It arises  by filaments from
the corpus olivare, medulla oblongata, and  the medulla spinalis.
The glossopharyngeal passes  through the  posterior foramen
lacerum, and is distributed to the side and root of the tongue,
and to the tonsils and pharynx.  The pneumogastric also passes
out through the posterior foramen lacerum, and descending the
neck, included in the sheath with the vessels, enters the thorax
and  is distributed to the lungs and stomach.   The spinal acces-
sory also emerges  from the posterior foramen lacerum, and is
distributed to the muscles and integuments of the  neck.
  The hypo-glossal nerve, or ninth pair, arises by several fasci-
culi from the medulla oblongata, and passing through the pos-
terior  condyloid foramen of the os occipitus, is distributed to
the muscles of the tongue.

                    The Spinal Nerves.

   The nerves arising from  the spinal cord are divided into the
cervical, dorsal, lumbar, and sacral. As mentioned  in the account
of the spinal cord, they arise by two roots, one coming from the
anterior portion  of the  cord, the other from the posterior por-
tion—the anterior is the motor  root, the posterior the sensitive
root.  After the union of the roots in the intervertebral foramen,
the spinal nerves divide into two trunks, the posterior of which
are much the smaller and go to the muscles of the back; the
anterior are large, and  uniting  with the ganglions of the sym-
pathetic, form plexuses, from which the principal nerves of the
muscles of the trunk and extremities are derived. 
CERVICAL NERVES.
447
                 Cervical  Nerves.
  The first nerve given off from  the  medulla spinalis, is called
the sub-occipital;  it passes out between the occiput and atlas;
its anterior fasciculus is the smaller, and following the course
of the vertebral arteries, is partly distributed  to the muscles on
the front of the vertebrae, and partly joins the pneumogastric
and  hypoglossal nerves, and  the cervical ganglion of  the sym-
pathetic;  its posterior  fasciculus is distributed to the muscles
on the back of the neck. The next seven are the cervical nerves
proper, of which the three superior anastomose freely with each
other, and form a cervical plexus at the side of the neck, from
which numerous branches are sent to the  muscles and skin of
the neck.  The phrenic nerve, also, arises from this plexus, and
passing down through  the  anterior  mediastinum, divides into
several branches, and is distributed to the diaphragm.
   The four inferior cervical nerves and the  first dorsal, after
sending off filaments to the  sympathetic, unite to form in the
axilla the brachial plexus.  From this plexus the following
branches  are given  off which supply the  shoulder, axilla, and
upper extremity. The scapular branch goes backwards, passing
through the coracoid  notch, and supplies  the  muscles of the
shoulder and scapula.  It is  quite small.
   The subcapular and thoracic branches, generally five or six
in number,  supply the muscles of the parietes of the thorax and
those under the shoulder.
   The circumflex, or axillary branch, winds around the hume-
rus  in company with  the posterior axillary artery, and is  dis-
tributed to the deltoid muscle. The internal cutaneous and the
external musculo-cutaneous  are two small branches, which pass
down the arm, and are distributed to the  muscles and integu-
ments of the fore-arm.
   The radial nerve, also called musculo-spiral, winds around
the humerus, passing between the heads of the triceps muscle,
which it  supplies with branches, and then descends to the fore-
arm  and  is spent upon its  muscles,  and upon the  wrist and 
448         DORSAL NERVES.--LUMBAR NERVES.
thumb.   The radial nerve also descends to the fore-arm, pass-
ing under the internal coudyle, and is distributed to the integu-
ments on the ulnar side of the back of the hand, the little finger
and the ulnar side of the ring finger.  The median nerve is tho
largest  of the  branches  given off by the  brachial plexus;  it
descends the arm at the inner edge of the biceps muscle, along
with the brachial artery; on reaching the elbow it passes between
the heads of the pronator teres muscle, and descending the fore-
arm between the flexor sublimus and profundus muscles, giving
off branches  in its  course, is finally distributed to the thumb,
and to the fore, middle, and one side of the ring finger.

                Dorsal or Thoracic  Nerves.
  There are twelve pairs  of these; the first pair passing out
through the intervertebral foramen between the first  and the
second dorsal vertebrae, and the twelfth between the last dorsal
and first lumbar vertebra.  The posterior branches go backwards
between the transverse processes  of the  vertebrae, and  are dis-
tributed to  the muscles on the back of the thorax and those
lying along  the spine.  The anterior branches which are the
larger, pass  along the  intercostal grooves, and are distributed
to the muscles of the thorax.
  The first dorsal nerve sends a branch  to the axillary plexus.
The second and third send branches, called intercostal humeral,
to be distributed upon the integuments of the arm.

                     Lumbar Nerves.
  Of these there  are five on each  side; the posterior branches
are small, and go to supply the muscles of the loins; the ante-
rior branches unite  to form the lumbar plexus, which is placed
between the psoas  magnus and  quadratus lumborum  muscles.
From this plexus a number of branches are given off: two  or
three of these arc  quite small, and go to the muscles of the
abdomen.  The external spiermatic branch goes to the groin,
and supplies the glands and the cremaster muscle. The external
cutaneous goes to the commencement  of Poupart's  ligament,  at 
SACRAL NERVES.
449
the commencement of which it emerges from the abdomen, and
is distributed to the integuments and muscles on the inside of
the thigh.
  The anterior  crural  is  the  largest branch arising from the
lumbar plexus;  it passes out of the abdomen under  Poupart's
ligament, at the outside of the femoral artery. Just above this
ligament several branches are given off which  are distributed
to the muscles and integuments of the pelvis and thigh.  Three
of these branches are called  the anterior, middle, and internal
cutaneous nerves, and are distributed to the integuments. The
saphenus nerve  is a  branch of the anterior crural, that accom-
panies the femoral artery till the latter perforates the adductor
tendon, after which  it accompanies the saphena vein to the foot,
giving off in its  course branches to the integuments of the inner
side of the leg, and  to the  upper and inner parts of the foot.
  The obturator branch accompanies the obturator artery, and
passing  out  at  the  obturator  foramen, is  distributed  to the
adductor and obturator  muscles.

                       Sacral Nerves.
  There are generally  five pairs of  sacral  nerves, sometimes
however there are   six.  Their anterior fasciculi  unite with a
part of the last dorsal, to form the sacral or  sciatic plexus,
which is situated at  the side of the rectum, in front of the pyri-
formis muscle.
  A number of  branches are given off from the plexus, of which
a few small ones go  to the viscera and muscles within the pelvis.
There are also given off the two glutei nerves which pass out at
the  sciatic notch, and are distributed to the glutei muscles; the
inferior long pudendal, which winds around the tuberosity of
the  ischium, and is   distributed to the integuments of  the peri-
neum; the posterior  cutaneous, which is distributed to the integ-
uments  on the back of the thigh  and leg; and  the superior
long pudental or internalpuelic, which accompanies the internal
pudic artery,  and supplies the organs of generation and the
perineum.
       57 
450
THE SYMPATHETIC NERVE.
   The great sciatic, or ischiatie nerve, also arises from the sacral
 plexus.  It is much the largest nerve in the body, and  passing
 out  from the pelvis under the pyriformis muscle, it descends
 the back part of the thigh about half way to the knee, and then
 divides into two large branches, called peroneal and popliteal.
 In its course the sciatic gives off several branches to the integu-
 ments and muscles of the upper part of the thigh.
   The popliteal  nerve continues  straight  down to  the middle
 and  posterior part of the knee joint, and at the head of the tibia,
 divides into the external peroneal and  the  anterior  tibial, the
 first  of which descends upon the fibular side of the  leg  to the
 foot  and ankle, and the last passes down in front of the inter-
 osseous ligament,  and is distributed to the muscles upon the
 foot.  The posterior tibial nerve is a continuation of the popli-
 teal, and descending the back  part of the leg  along with the
 posterior tibial artery to the sole of the foot, divides into the
 external and internal  plantar  nerves  which supply the sole.
 The  external saphenus is  also a branch of the popliteal, near
 the ankle it becomes superficial, and is  distributed  to the exter-
 nal aukle and foot.

                  The Sympathetic Nerve.
  The  sympathic nerve consists of two series or chains of gang-
lia placed on either side of the lateral part  of the bodies of the
vertebrae, and extending from the base of  the cranium to the
coccyx.  With the  exception of the neck, there is a ganglion for
each intervertebral space;  the ganglia are united to  each other
by nervous cords, and send off numerous  filaments to the adja-
cent  organs.   Each ganglion is considered as a distinct nervous
centre.  This  nerve supplies all  the internal organs, and  by
means of plexuses  is connected and distributed with all the other
nerves  of the body.  Besides the ganglia situated along the spine,
there are others placed  about some of the large vessels  of the
abdomen, and also in other parts of  the body.
  In the cranium  are five ganglia  belonging to the  sympathetic,
viz. the ganglion of Ribes, situated upon the anterior communi- 
THE SYMPATHETIC NERVE.
451
eating artery, and connected with the carotid plexus by means
of a filament of the sixth nerve.  The carotid plexus surrounds
the carotid artery in the carotid canal, and is joined by the deep
petrous branch of the vidian nerve;—the lenticular ganglion,
situated between the optic nerve and the external rectus muscle,
and communicating with the nasal nerve, a branch of the third
pair,  and  with  the  carotid plexus;—the  spheno-palatine  or
Meckel's ganglion, which gives off the vidian nerve, the deep
petrous portion of which, as mentionned, joins the carotid plexus,
and the superficial petrous joins the submaxillary ganglion; this
ganglion also communicates with  the  superior maxillary nerve,
and from it the palate, gums, and fauces, are supplied. A small
oval ganglion, called the otic ganglion, is attached to the inner
surface of the inferior maxillary nerve below the foramen ovale,
from which communicating branches go to the superior and in-
ferior maxillary, and  to the vidian and tympanitic nerves, and
which also supplies  the tensor  tympani, and the tensor  palati
muscles.  A ganglion, called the ganglion of Laumonier, is also
frequently found in the carotid plexus.
   In  the  neck are three ganglia, called the superior, middle,
 and inferior cervical. The first  is long and spindle shaped;  it
 is situated along the sides of the third and fourth cervical verte-
 brae, behind  the sheath of the vessels of the neck.  Its branches
 are numerous, and communicate with the first, second, and third
 cervical nerves, with the carotid  plexus and the second cervical
 ganglion, with the facial eighth  and ninth pair, and the pharyn-
 geal  plexus,  and with the cardiac ganglion, by means of the
 superior cardiac nerve.
    The middle cervical  ganglion is  smaller and more flattened
 than  the  preceding;  it is placed in front of the fifth or sixth
 cervical vertebra. In  some instances it is wanting. It has, also,
 numerous connections;  its branches join  the anterior fasciculi
 of the  third, fourth, and fifth  cervical nerves,  and also  the
 superior  and inferior cervical ganglia and  the  middle cardiac
 plexus.
    The inferior cervical ganglion is placed near the head of the 
452
THE  SYMPATHETIC  NERVE.
 first rib and varies in form and size; it is  mostly larger  than
 the last. Like the two last, it also gives oft' numerous filaments;
 it is  connected with  the  sixth, seventh, and eighth nerve, and
 from  it  proceeds the inferior cardiac  nerve,  which joins the
 middle cardiac nerve and  the cardiac plexus.
   The cardiac plexus is situated beneath the arch of the aorta.
 It is formed almost entirely by branches from tho three cervical
 ganglia,  the most of them coming from the middle one, or the
 middle cardiac nerve.  It is a single plexus, formed by the nerves
 from both sides of the neck.  Filaments from  the par vagum
 and the descendens  noni nerves are also blended with it. From
 this plexus the heart is supplied with nerves.
   In the thorax are twelve ganglia, which  are situated at the
 commencement of each intercostal space near the  heads of the
 ribs.  They are smaller than the cervical ganglia, and  are con-
 nected with each other, and also with the  anterior fasciculi of
 the spinal nerves.
   The great splanchnic nerve is formed by filaments  derived
 from the sixth to the tenth ganglion; it descends  through  the
 posterior mediastinum,  and  penetrating the diaphragm along
 with the aorta, forms on each side of the aorta  a large ganglion
 composed of a number of smaller  ones, called the  semilunar
ganglions.
   The small splanchnic nerve is derived from the  tenth and
eleventh thoracic ganglia,  after passing through the diaphragm,
it joins the semilunar ganglion and the  renal plexus.
   The solar plexus is a network of  nerves situated on the sides
of the aorta,  and extending  downwards as far as the  renal
arteries.  It is composed of the several filaments connecting the
semilunar ganglion. From it proceed a number  of smaller gang-
lia, which accompany the several  arteries. The diaphragmatic
plexus accompanies the phrenic arteries; the superior coronary
plexus accompanies the corresponding artery to the stomach;
the splenic plexus accompanies the splenic artery to the spleen, &c.
The superior and inferior mesenteric, the renal plexuses, &c,
are distributed in the same manner. 
PHYSIOLOGY  OF THE  NERVOUS SYSTEM.       453
   Along the sides of the lumbar vertebrae are placed the lumbar
ganglia, generally five in number.   They are also united to
each other, and to the spinal nerves.
   The sacral ganglia,  mostly three in number, are situated on
the anterior face of the sacrum.  The lumbar and sacral ganglia
unite with branches from  the lumbar and aortic plexuses, and
form  the  hypogastric plexus, from which all the pelvic viscera
are supplied.

            Physiology of the  Nervous  System.
   The certebrum.—In  the cerebral hemispheres, the highest
and most important of the functions of the animal economy—
those of the  mind—are seated.  In them the faculty of atten-
tion, or the  power of directing  the mind to impressions made
on the senses, resides.  The cineritious or gray matter which is
found in the convolutions on the periphery of the cerebrum, is
the portion which possesses these elevated functions.  This gray
matter,  wherever found, whether in  the brain and  spinal mar-
row, or in the ganglions along the course of the nerves, is con-
sidered  as a  nervous  centre, or the generator of nervous in-
fluence, while the white or medullary matter carries this influence
to the different parts of the body.
   The more numerous and complex the  convolutions  in gene-
ral, the greater the degree  of intelligence.
   In infants they are imperfectly developed, and their  increase
is proportionate to the mental  improvement;  if their growth
be arrested by any cause, the mental powers are feeble.  Idiots,
besides  having small brains,  have  but a limited development
of the convolutions.   The arrangement of the brain into convo-
lutions admits of a large surface of cineritious matter in a small
space. It also allows of a more ready access to the blood-vessels
on the one side, and a more free communication on the other,
with the fibres by which its influence is distributed. The entire
surface of a human cerebrum  of average size, when the convo-
lutions are unfolded, has been estimated  to  be equal to about
670 square inches. 
454        PHYSIOLOGY OF the nervous system.

  The hemispheres possess but little or no sensibility, they may
be wounded, and  partially or entirely removed, without giving
rise to pain;  when severely injured, however,  a state of stupor,
attended by  general  functional derangement, mostly  results.
Instances have occurred in which portions of the cerebrum have
been removed without destroying life or impairing the intellect.
   The cerebellum.—With respect to the functions of this portion
of the brain there is much diversity of opinion;  the majority
of observers, however, agree in regarding  it as  the seat of  the
animal or lower propensities.   It is urged  in support  of this
view, that in individuals who have given free indulgence to their
passions, the relative size of this organ is much increased.
  On the other hand, some contend that  is  has  but  little  or
nothing to do with these propensities, but that its function is to
regulate and  harmonize the  muscular movements,  especially
those of a voluntary character.  Like the cerebrum, the cere-
bellum is void of sensibility.
   The  medulla  oblongata.—Placed intermediate  between  the
brain  and spinal marrow, the  medulla oblongata serves as a
medium through which  they  act on each other.  The  corpora
pyramidalia, or anterior pyramids, connect the motor fibres of
the cerebrum with the  anterior  lateral  columns of the spinal
cord;  near the lower extremity  of the medulla oblongata, these
fibres decussate,  or cross from  side to  side, a large portion of
those, coming from the right side of the cerebrum, passing over
to the left side of the cord, and  vice versa.  Hence the frequent
occurrence of paralytic affections on the side of the  body  opposite
to that affected  in the brain.  It  is also alleged that, besides
being the point at which sensation  terminates  and  excitement
to motion begins, the medulla oblongata  possesses the power of
originating motion in itself, independent of  the cerebrum, and
that it presides, especially, over respiration and deglutition.
   The medulla spinalis.—The functions of the spinal  cord are
to convey nervous influence to and from the brain, and also to
 originate nervous influence independently of the brain.  All the
 nerves of the body are united  into one  common trunk in  the 
physiology  of the nervous  system.       455
white or medullary matter of the cord; though each filament of
every nerve runs a separate and distinct course from its starting
point to its  termination.   Hence the brain influences not only
the nerves at the base of the cranium, but all the spinal nerves
through the medium  of the  spinal cord.   As  previously men-
tioned,  the spinal nerves  arise by two roots  from the anterior
and posterior columns of the spinal cord;  a part of the fibres of
the posterior root, which is distinguished by having a ganglion
on it, pass on to the brain conveying impressions to this organ;
and part terminate in the  gray matter of the  spinal cord, con-
veying  impressions to it.   This  root is called the sensory root;
it is also the afferent  root.   The anterior is the efferent or motor
root; part of its fibres come from the brain, conveying voluntary
motion, and part of them  originate in the gray matter of the
spinal marrow.  To these fibres of both roots, which appear to
act independent of the brain, constituting with the gray matter
of the  spinal cord a distinct  nervous centre, the term reflex
system has been applied.
   Thus it will be seen that each nerve has four sets of fibres:
one set, called sensory, passing upwards to the brain, conveying
sensations to that organ; a second set, called motor, conveying
the influence of volition and emotion from the brain; a  third
set, called excitor, terminating in the spinal cord and conveying
impressions to it;  and a fourth set also of motor fibres, conveying
the motor influence from the spinal marrow to the muscles.
   In the reflex  system,  or that of which  the spinal cord is the
centre,  it  will  be understood  that  the cord  has the power of
reflecting  the action of the sensitive upon the motor nerves,
without itself possessing sensation, that  being a  faculty which
belongs exclusively to the  brain.
   The sympathetic nerve.—This  nerve is both motor and sen-
sory; it exercises a  controlling influence over the involuntary
functions, and being  connected also with the cerebro-spinal sys-
tem, it  brings the organic functions in relation to the animal. 
450
SENSATION.—SENSE  OF TOUCn.
                         Sensation.
  Sensation is defined to be "the perception of an impression;"
it is to the brain alone that this faculty belongs, hence the term
sensorium is often applied to this organ.   There are two kinds
of sensations, one internal, the other external;  the  first arise
from impressions made within the body, as the  sensations of
hunger or thirst, or such as arise from some temporary want of
the system; the second are those  which arise from impressions
made on the external surface of the body, as the sense of touch
or sight.  Sensation occurs in the brain, and  not in the  part
impressed.
  Sensations are likewise  divided into general and special.   By
general sensation, which is distributed all over the body, we feel
those impressions  made by surrounding objects, which produce
the various modifications  of pain and pleasure,  variations  of
temperature, and the sense of contact and resistance.  By special
sensation is understood that which  arises  from impressions  of a
peculiar  character upon nerves which are adapted  to receive
them alone. Each  nerve  of special  sensation requires its own
peculiar stimulus to call  it  into action, and is consequently in-
capable of taking part in the action of another.   Thus light is
required for the eye, sound for the ear, &c.  Nerves  of special
sensation  have no  general  sensibility, they may be wounded
without causing the individual any pain.
  There are five special senses, viz. touch, taste, smell, hearing,
and seeing.

                     Sense of Touch.

  This sense enables us to become acquainted with the hardness
or softness, the roughness  or smoothness, shape, size, and weight
of a body.  The idea of  resistance would seem to be the only
idea conveyed to the mind by  the  sense of touch, as by it these
properties  of bodies are  made known.   The sense of touch is
more highly developed in the  lips, tip of the tongue,  and the
palmar surface of the extremities of the fingers, these parts being 
SENSE OF TASTE.
457
abundantly supplied with nerves of general sensation, than in
other parts of  the body; it  is also more  generally distributed
throughout the animal kingdom than any of the other senses.
The nerves of touch are the  posterior roots of the spinal nerves,
and portions of the  fifth and eighth pairs of cranial  nerves;
these are  also the nerves of general sensation;  they are dis-
tributed to the papillae of the skin, and covered by the epidermis
to protect  them from too violent external impressions from ex-
ternal bodies.  All bodies to be cognizable to the  sense of touch,
must be brought into contact with the sensory surface; the only
exception to this  rule  is with respect to the sense of tempera-
ture, for which, in the opinion of some physiologists,  there is a
special set  of nerves.

                       Sense of Taste.
   The mucous membrane of the tongue and fauces is the organ
of taste, the anatomical character of which  has been previously
described.
   As in the sense  of  touch, so in  that of taste,  the substances
to be examined must be  brought in contact  with the organ.
When substances having a strong savour are brought in contact
with the tongue, the papillae become erect and  turgid, giving to
the surface of the  organ a decided roughness.  For the exercise
of this function it is necessary that the substance to  be tasted
should  be soluble; otherwise the feeling  of contact merely is
excited.  Impressions of taste remain longer than those of the
other senses;  though the  after-taste may be different from the
original.
   There is no special nerve of taste;  the tongue  being supplied
by the  fifth and  eighth pairs, which would  seem  to  convey
impressions of taste  as well as  give  to the tongue its general
sensibility.  The first of these nerves is distributed more to the
front, and the second more to the back of the organ;  those im-
pressions which produce nausea are conveyed by the latter. The
motions of the tongue are performed through  the ninth pair,
though this nerve  has nothing to do with the sense of taste; as
        58 
458                   SENSE OF SMELL.

its division causes loss of motion of the  organ, without at all
impairing the special sense.
  Both the senses of touch and taste are deadened by cold air;
the latter  is also considerably impaired  by any injury  of the
sense of smell.

               Sense of Smell, or Olfaction.
  The nose is the organ of smell;  it consists of two portions,
one external, projecting upon  the face,  the  other an internal
cavity.  The external portion is formed  by the nasal bones, the
nasal process of the superior maxillary bones, by five  cartilages,
and by the integument.  The bones have been already  described.
Two of the cartilages  are placed  on either side, and one in the
middle; the latter constitutes the cartilaginous septum between
the nostrils, and is thick, flat, and triangular.  The lateral  car-
tilages are also triangular, and articulate  above and behind with
the bone, in front with  the septum, and below with the  alar
cartilages.  The alar cartilages form the lower part of the nose,
called the nostrils;  they are irregularly semi-eliptical, and keep
the nostrils open.  The mucous membrane lining the nose is
thick, soft, and red; it is termed pituitary or Schneiderian, and
is continuous with the  mucous membrane of the mouth, Eusta-
chian tube, lachrymal canal, and frontal sinus. The hairs situated
at the entrance of the  nose are called vibrissue.
   By the  sense of smell we  are  made acquainted  with the
odorous particles of bodies suspended or  dissolved in  the atmo-
sphere. Being seated in the nose, at the  entrance of the respira-
tory passages, it serves as a protection against the introduction
of injurious matters.  Another use  of this sense, and the prin-
cipal one, is to aid the impression of taste in conveying intelli-
gence of  the properties of food.  The sense of  smell is limited
to that portion of the mucous or Schneiderian membrane of the
nostrils which covers the superior and part of the middle  tur-
binated bones, the olfactory nerve being  distributed only to this
portion.  Hence this region is called the olfactory region.   The
advantage of having the sense situated  high up in the nostril, 
SENSE OF HEARING.                459
is to protect it from mechanical injury, and also from the contact
of too cold or too dry air, both of which impair it  very  mate-
rially.   Odorous particles  are  brought  in contact with  the
Schneiderian membrane  by the act of inspiration,  and  are so
minute that they can not be detected by the most delicate expe-
riments.  The fifth pair of nerves give  to the mucous membrane
of the nose its general sensibility.
  The sense of smell, like that of taste, is not an  intellectual
one; it is however, susceptible of cultivation;  individuals by it
are frequently capable of recognizing others.  It is usually much
more acute in the lower  orders of animals than in man.

              Sense of Hearing, or  Audition.
   The ear is the organ of hearing.  It consists of three parts;
the external ear, the middle ear or tympanum, and the internal
ear.  The external  is  composed of the pinna, which is  the
movable part on the side of the head, and the meatus, or canal,
a passage leading from the pinna.  The outer rim of the  pinna
is called  the helix, within which  is  a  prominence called  the
anthelix.   At the upper part this prominence divides, leaving
a space termed the  scaphoid fossa.  The deep, central cup within
the anthelix, is  the concha.  A small eminence, situated at  the
end of the helix, and in front of the  concha,  and containing a
small tuft of hair, is the tragus—so named from its resemblance
to  a goat's  beard.  Opposite to this  eminence, and below  the
concha, is the antitragus. The pendulous portion is  the lobe; it
consists of cellular  and adipose tissue.  The oval, elastic plate of
fibro-cartilage is attached in front, by the anterior ligament to
the zygomatic process, and behind, by the posterior  ligament to
the mastoid  process.  Several small muscles enter into the com-
position  of the  pinna, but  as they are, comparatively,  of  but
little importance, their description  may be dispensed with.
   The  meatus  is about an inch in length; it is a bony canal
lined by cartilage, narrow in the middle, and curved  downwards.
The skin  lining it is studded with  hairs, and glands which
secrete wax  or cerumen. 
460
SENSE  OF nEARTNG.
  The middle ear, or tympanum, is an irregular cavity situated
in the petrous portion of the temporal bone, and filled with air
which enters by the Eustachian tube; it contains  a chain  of
small bones, and openings into the  mastoid cells.  In front it is
bounded by the membrana tympani, or drum of the ear.
  The membrana tympani, or drum, is a  thin, transparent, oval
membrane which  separates the external  ear from the cavity of
the tympanum. It is placed obliquely across this cavity, and is
slightly convex internally, and concave externally.  It consists
of three lamina; the external  is continuous with the  cuticle, the
internal with the mucous membrane lining the cavity, while the
middle  is strong and fibrous, and attached by its circumference
to the bone.
  The  middle  ear  has two  orifices  communicating with it;
one, the fenestra ovalis, leading to the  vestibule; the other,
the fenestra  rotunda, opening into the cochlea; both of these,
however, are closed by membranes to prevent the escape of fluid
contained in the inner chambers.   The Eustachian tube is  a
straight canal, about two inches in length, which empties into
the pharynx; its  commencement is bony, and  its termination
cartilaginous.
  The bones of the tympanum are four in number, viz. the
malleus, or hammer, which is imbedded in the tympanum; the
incus, or anvil, somewhat resembling  a molar tooth ;  the orbi-
culare;  and  the stapes or stirrup.   These bones articulate with
each other in the order named, and are also connected by three
small muscles, called the tensor and laxators tympani, aud the
stapedius.  The contractions  and relaxations of these muscles
move the bones, and relax or make tense  the tympanum.
  The internal ear, or labyrinth,  is composed  of three parts,
viz. the vestibule,  the semicircular canals, and the cochlea.
  The vestibule is a small triangular cavity situated within the
wall of the tympanum;  into it behind, the semicircular canals
open by five orifices, and in front  the cochlea  by a single one.
The fenestra ovalis  is on its  outer wall,  and on  its inner are 
SENSE  OF HEARING.
461
several small holes for the passage of a portion of the  auditory
nerve. The aqueduct of the vestibule also opens into it.
  The semicircular  canals are  three bony passages,  the  ex-
tremities of which open into the vestibule by five orifices. Two
of these canals are vertical, and one horizontal.
  The cochlea resembles  a  snail shell, and forms the  anterior
portion  of the labyrinth; it consists of a bony and gradually
tapering canal about an inch and a half in length, which makes
two turns and a half spirally around an axis called the modiolus.
The canal of the cochlea is divided into two passages by a bony
and membranous  plate,  called the lamina  spiralis; these pas-
sages  communicate with each other at the apex of the  cochlea.
The aqueduct of the cochlea  opens by one extremity into  the
upper part of the canal, and by the other upon the inferior sur-
face of the petrous bone.
  The membranous  labyrinth has the same form as the bony
vestibule, cochlea, and semicircular canals, which cavities it lines;
it consists of  several layers, and  contains a limpid fluid called
after  Cotonius.
  The auditory nerve divides in the internal meatus into two
branches, which ramify through the membranous labyrinth and
terminate on the inner surface of the membrane.
  The sense of hearing is that function by which the mind takes
cognizance of the vibratory motions of bodies which give rise to
the phenomena of sound.  These vibrations may be communi-
cated to  the ear through the air,  or through the intervention of
some  solid substance  brought into  contact with the  organ of
hearing.
  The precise function of all the parts of the  ear is not known.
  The function of the external ear is to  collect and concentrate
sonorous vibrations or sounds, and conduct them inwards.
  The use of the membrana tympani is  to receive  the sounds
and transmit  them  to the  chain  of bones, and also to modify
their  intensity.   It is not, however,  essential  to hearing as it
may be perforated or destroyed without very materially impair-
ing the sense. 
462
SENSE  OF VISION.
   The chain of bones  serves to conduct the sounds across the
cavity of the tympanum to the  internal ear.
   The tympanum isolates the  chain of bones,  and  allows free
vibration to the membranes at each end of it.  The  use  of the
Eustachian tube is to admit air  into the cavity of the tympanum,
which prevents undue tension of the membrane,  by rendering the
pressure on both sides  equal; and to carry off the secretions of
the middle ear which it discharges into the throat.
   In regard to the functions of the internal ear, or labyrinth,
but  little  is known; in it the sounds reach the auditory nerve,
and  are thus transmitted to the brain.
   The idea of  the distance and  direction  of sounds is  mostly
acquired by habit.   The acutencss of hearing varies very much
in different individuals, and  may be  much increased by culti-
vation.
                      Sense of Vision.

  By this sense we are enabled to perceive  the form, size, color,
position, &c, of the bodies which surround  us.  The medium
through the agency of which this  is accomplished, is called light.
The  eye is  the organ of sight.
  The globe, or ball of the eye, is  a spherical body about an inch
in diameter, from  before  backwards and somewhat  less  trans-
versely.  It is  surrounded by  a  fibrous membrane  continuous
with the sheath of the optic nerve behind.
  The sclerotic  coat  is a dense,  white, fibrous membrane, which
invests  about four-fifths of the eye, giving to  it its form, and
serving for  the attachment of the muscles.   Behind  it  is per-
forated by the optic  nerve.  In front it receives the cornea by a
circular, bevelled edge.
  The cornea is the transparent, projecting portion which fills
up the circular  opening in the anterior part of the sclerotica; it
constitutes about one-fifth of the eye-ball, and  is composed of
several lamina,  or layers.
  The choroid  coat  is a  thin  vascular membrane which  lines
the sclerotica, and is of precisely the same extent as that tunic. 
SENSE OF VISION.
463
It consists of three layers, and is filled with black coloring matter
called pigmentum nigrum.
   The ciliary processes  are situated at the anterior portion of
the choroid coat surrounding the lens.  They consist of seventy
or eighty short triangular folds.
   The iris is a thin circular membrane, varying in color in dif-
ferent  persons,  hence its  name, forming  a vertical septum, or
partition, between the anterior and posterior chambers of the eye.
In its centre is an opening, called the pupil.   Its posterior sur-
face is  in contact with the ciliary processes, and thickly coated
with pigmentum nigrum.  Its external  border is attached to the
ciliary ligament at the base of the ciliary processes.
   The  retina is a  soft white membrane, situated within the
choroid coat; it  extends from the  optic  nerve behind to ter-
minate in an irregular  edge  around the centre of the cilia in
front.   Internally it is in contact with the vitreous humor.  It
is a nervous structure, and generally considered as an expansion
of the optic nerve.   This nerve enters the ball of the eye on the
inner side of its axis; and through it  the central artery of the
retina enters, and after  passing  through the vitreous humor, is
distributed to the  retina  and lens.  The point where  the optic
nerve  is  connected with the retina  is incapable  of vision. Im-
mediately at this point,  also, there exists upon the retina a yel-
low spot, called after Soemmering.
   A thin membrane between the choroid cou,t and the  retina, is
the membrana Jacobi.
   The aqueous  humor is a transparent, albuminous fluid, filling
the chambers of the eye.   The  anterior chamber  is  the space
between the cornea in front, and the iris and pupil behind;  the
posterior chamber is between the iris and  pupil in front, and the
crystalline lens and ciliary processes behind. Both chambers are
lined by a delicate membrane which secretes the aqueous humor.
If the aqueous  humor is by accident discharged, it will be
replaced again without loss of sight.
   The crystaline lens  is  placed immediately behind the pupil,
and is surrounded by the ciliary processes; it is a double convex 
464
SENSE OF VISION.
 lens, with the posterior surface more convex  than the  anterior.
 It is soft aud transparent, and composed of  concentric  laminae
 or layers which increase in hardness as they approach the centre.
 The lens is invested by a transparent membrane, called  its cap-
 sule. In childhood it is spherical, and in old age it is flattened.
   The vitreous humor is more dense than the aqueous,  being of
a jelly-like consistence.   It is transparent and globular  in form,
constituting  the  principal bulk  of the eye.  It is held in cells
formed  by  a  delicate membrane,  called  the hyaloid.   If the
vitreous  humor is  let out, it cannot be restored,  and the eye is
entirely  destroyed.
                          Fig.  30.
   Fig. 30.  An  antero-posterior vertical section of the  eye.  1 The scle-
rotic coat;  2 the cornea;  3 the choroid coat;  4, 5 the ciliary body and
processes;  6 the iris;  7 the pupil; 8 the retina; 10 anterior chamber;
11 posterior chamber; 12 crystalline lens; 13,14 vitreous humor; 15 central
artery of the retina; 16 optic nerve.

   The eyebrows are elevations of integument,  covered with stiff
short hairs: they protect the eye from too vivid light and from
the perspiration that accumulates on the forehead.
   The eyelids or palpebrse,  are  composed of  skin,  muscular
fibres, and  cartilage; the  latter, called tarsal cartilages,  are
small and  crescentic in shape, and placed in the edges of  the
lids; they serve to preserve the shape of the lid.  When the lids
are m contact,  they have a triangular canal between them. 
SENSE  OF VISION.
465
  The cilia or eyelashes are short, curved hairs placed in  the
margins of the lids to protect the eyeball.  A mucous membrane,
called the conjunctiva, lines the lids, and also extends over the
anterior surface of the ball.
  The Meibomian glands are small bodies, twenty or thirty in
number, placed between the conjunctiva  and  the  inner surface
of the lids.  They discharge a viscid fluid by numerous orifice
along the edges of the lids, and their secretion prevents the over-
flow of tears at night.
  A small red elevation in the internal angle of the eye, about
the size of a grain of barley, is the caruncula lachrymalis.   It
consists of a number of small glands.
  The lachrymal gland is situated at the upper and outer por-
tion of the orbit;  it is of a light  pink color, and about the  size
of a filbert.  It secretes the tears,  which are discharged through
ten or twelve ducts opening along  the edge of the upper lid.  By
this secretion the eye is constantly kept moist.
  The lachrymal canals, one for each lid, commence by a very
minute orifice, called puncta lachrymalia, near  the inner angle
of the eye.  They conduct the tears into the lachrymal sac. The
lachrymal sac is the enlarged upper extremity of the nasal duct.
This latter is a canal, about three-fourths of an  inch  in length,
passing downwards and backwards from  the inner angle of the
eye through the bones of the face to the inferior meatus of the
nose.  It carries off the tears.
   The  movements  of the eye  are performed  by six muscles,
which arise from the walls of the orbit, and are  inserted into
the sclerotic coat.  Four of them are straight,  and  are called the
superior,  inferior, internal, and external: and  two are oblique
—a superior and inferior.  The superior oblique  muscle plays
over a tendinous pully attached to the upper margin of the orbit.
   In order to  comprehend fully  the functions of  the different
parts of  the eye, a knowledge of  the laws of  light and optics is
necessary,  for  which the reader is  referred to  the  works of
natural philosophy, as these  subjects belong rather  to natural
philosophy than to physiology. 
463                  SENSE OF VISION.

  The use of the sclerotic  coat is to give form to the body of
the eye, and also to protect the inner and more delicate parts.
  The choroid coat serves  chiefly to transmit  the nerves and
blood-vessels.
  The pigmentum nigrum on  the inner  surface of the choroid
coat  absorbs  the  rays of light after they have made their im-
pressions on the retina.
  The use of  the  iris  is to regulate the quantity of light ad-
mitted through the pupil, which it is enabled to  do by its power
of contraction and expansion.
  The aqueous humor, crystalline  lens,  and vitreous humor, are
transparent media through which the rays of light pass to reach
the retina; their office is  to  refract rays of light so that they
will  fall upon the retina in the  most favorable manner; the most
of the refracting power is possessed by the lens.
   The use of the  retina is  to  receive the impressions of light,
and  transmit them to the brain.
   In near-sighted persons the refracting power of the eye is too
great, the rays of light being brought to a focus before reaching
the retina. This defect is remedied  by the use of a double con-
cave lens.  In far-sighted persons,  on the contrary, there is not
sufficient refractive power, and the  focus is formed behind the
retina.  To  obviate this defect,  convex lenses should be used
to concentrate  the rays.  The former defect, that of near-sighted-
ness or myopia commonly occurs in young persons, and is often
corrected  by  age;  the  latter,  far-sightedness or presbyopia, is
most frequently met with in persons somewhat advanced in years.
   The fifth pair of nerves furnishes the eye with general sensi-
bility ;  the optic nerve being a nerve of special  sensibility only. 
INDEX  OF DISEASES.
Abdomen, congestion of blood
  to the  .     .    .     .   page 91
Abdominal dropsy  .     .    .111
Abortion, see Miscarriage    .  244
Abscess.....42
Accouchement....   43
Administration of medicines .   39
After-Pains    ....   44
Ague, see Intermittent fever .  135
Aliment, forbidden ...   37
Amenorrhoea  ....   45
Anasarca.....  110
Anger   .     .    .     .    .48
    combined with fright    .   49
Anus, itching of the     .    .   50
Aphthae  .....   52
Apoplexy.....   55
Apparent death from drowning  116
    from the vapor of coal   .   55
    of new-borti children    .   53
Appetite, loss of, see Stomach,
  disordered  ....  212
Arsenic, poisoning by        .56
Ascarides, see Itching of the
  anus.....50
Ascites.....Ill
Asiatic Cholera    ...   86
Asphyxia.     .    .     .    .   53
Asthma  .     ...    .58

               B.

Baby's, sore mouth ...   52
Backache, see Loins, pain in the 178
                              207
                              137
                               43
                              244
                               62

                              185
                               63
                               64
                               65
                               66
                               76
Bed-Sores
Bilious fever  ....
Birth, see Accouchement
    premature, see Miscarriage
Bleeding at the nose
    of the gums, see Scurvy of
      the mouth
Blood, spitting of
    vomiting of
Bloody urine  .
Boil .
Bowels, inflammation of the
Brain, inflammation of the, page 67
Breasts, gathered  ...   68
Breath, offensive  .    .     .  188
    shortness of, see Asthma .   58
Bruises   .    .    .    .     .71
Bulimy   .....  155
Burns.....73

               c.

Canker of the mouth    .     .  185
Cankrum oris ....  185
Cardialgia    ....  242
Catarrh  ....     77, 87
Catarrh fever ....   79
Catarrhal inflammation of the
  eyes.....124
Cephalalgia   ....  155
Cheeks, swelling of the .     .   79
Chest, concussion of the .     .  241
    congestion of  blood to the   90
    dropsy of the  .    .     .  112
Chicken-Pox  .   .    .     .81
Chilblains, see Frost-Bite     .  142
Childbed......81
    fever.....192
Childbirth    .   .    .     .43
Children learning to  walk     .  233
    overfeeding of .    .     .  230
    teething  ....  221
Chills and fever   .    .     .  135
Chlorosis.....152
Cholera Asiatica  .    .     .86
    infantum ....   82
    morbus   ....   85
Cholerine.....82
Cold in the head  ...   87
Colic     .    .   ...     .94
    from cold ....   94
    from flatulence ...   95
    from haemorrhoids  .     .   96
    from menstruation  .    97, 114
    from overloading the  stoin-
     . ach    .   .            95
    from suppressed  perspiration 94
    from unwholesome food  .   95
    from wet feet  ...   94
    from worms   . •   .     .95 
468
INDEX OF
DISEASES.
Concussion of the chest .	page	241
Confinement, duration of		81
Congestion of blood to the	ab-	
domen .		91
of blood to the chest		90
of blood to the head		88
Constipation		92
Convulsions		208
epileptic .		120
Corns ....	9*4,	234
Cough ....		100
hooping		159
Coup de soleil .		219
Cramps of the stomach .		215
Croup ....		98
Crusta lactea, see Scabs on	the	
face of cjiildren .		184
Crying of infants		102
               D.

Delirium tremens  .     .    .  102
Depraved stomach, see Stomach
  disordered   ....  212
Diarrhoea.....104
    from anger    .     .    .  107
    from disordered stomach .  108
    from fright    .     .    .107
    from taking cold    .    .107
    from vexation .     .    .  109
Directions for patients  to de-
  scribe  their disease in writ-
ing.....	251
Disappointed love .	151
Discharge from the ears .	118
Disordered Stomach.	212
Distress, see Grief .	154
Dropsy.....	110
abdominal	111
general ....	110
of the. chest	112
of the peritoneum	111
Drowning, apparent death from	116
Drunkenness ....	102
Duration of Confinement	81
of the. effect of medicines	246
Dysentery ....	113
Dysmenorrhoea-	114
Dyspepsia, see Disordered and	
Weak .stomach .	212
               E.

Earache.....117
Ears, discharge from the .    •  118
    inflammation of the .    .119
Epilepsy.....120
Epileptic convulsions    .    .  120
Eruptions in general	page	128
Erysipelas		120
Erysipelatous inflammation of		
the breasts .		70
Excoriations		129
Exertion, inordinate, see	Fa-	
tigue ....		133
Eyes, inflammation of the	.	121
from a stye		123
from catarrh	.	124
from difficult teething		122
from the presence of	fo-	
reign bodies .		123
in new-born infants .		121
F.
Face, scabs of, in children	129
Facial neuralgia	130
Fainting.....	132
Falling of the womb	230
Fatigue ....	133
Feet, injuries of tho	131
sores on the, see Ulcers	226
sweating of the	135
Felon ....	140
Fever, bilious .	137
catarrh	79
childbed .	192
gastric	137
intermittent	135
milk ....	183
miliary	138
puerperal . .	192
scarlet	198
Film, or specks on the eye	. 128
Fire, St. Anthony's .	. 120
Fits, see Spasms	. 208
Flatulency	. 141
Forbidden, aliment .	37
Fright	. 141
Frost-Bite	. 142
Furunculus	. 66
a.
Gastric fever   ....
Gathered breasts
General dropsy
Giddiness,  see Congestion of
  blood to the head and head-
  ache
Glands, swelling of
Goitre
Gout
Greediness
Green sickness
137
 68
110
144
151
145
155
152 
INDEX  OF
DISEASES.               469
Grief		page	154	Inflammation of the eyes from	
Grippe, or Influenza . ~ ~			153	scrofula. . . page 127	
				of the eyes from the pre	
H.				•sence of foreign bodies of the • eyes- of new-borr	123
Haematamesis ....			64	•children	121
Haemorrhage ....			163	of the kidneys .	171
uterine ....			165	of the liver . .	176
Haemorrhoidal colic . .			96	of the lungs . .	180
Haemorrhoids, see Anus, itching				of the throat	204
of the .-			50	Influenza, see Grippe and Ca	
Head, cold in the			87	tarrh . . . .77. 153	
Headache			155	Injuries from lifting	212
from congestion of blood to				of the feet	134
the head ...			155	Inordinate Hunger .	155
from constipation			156	Intermittent fever .	135
from dissipation			156	Introduction .	1
from irritability of the nerv-					168
ous system			157	Itching of the anus.	50
from loss of sleep			156	of the skin . .	201
from suppressed perspira-					
tion ....			158	J.	
from wine-drinking .			156		
hypochondriacal			157	Jaundice ....	. 169
Heart, palpitation of the .•			158		
Heartburn, see Stomach, cramps				K.	
of the .....			215		
Helminthiasis .	# #		237	Kidneys, inflammation of the	171
Hemicrania	# <		182	Knots on the veins .	. 229
Hernia, umbilical	. ,		186		
Herpes cireinatus	.		197	L.	
Hiccup			159		
Hoarseness, see catarrh .			77	Labor, see Accouchement	43
Home sickness, see Grief			154	Lameness, spontaneous .	. 173
Homoeopathy ....			19	Leucorrhcea . . .	174
Hooping-Cough			159	Life of Hahnemann	3
Hunger, inordinate, see Greedi-				Lifting, injuries by .	. 212
ness .....			155	Lightning, stroke of	176
Hjrdrophobia ....			161	Liver, Inflammation of the	176
Hydrops.....			110	Loins, pain in the .	178
Hydrothorax ....			112	Love, disappointed, see Grief	154
				Lumbago ....	179
I.				rheumaticus	179
				Lungs, inflammation of the	180
Icterus.....			169		
Incubus .-		.	186	M.	
Infantile Cholera			82		
Infants, crying of			102	Mania a potu .	102
Inflammation .			167	Measles ....	181
of the chest			243	Megrim, see Headache .	182
of the bowels			76	Menstrual colic . . 96, 114	
of the brain			67	Menstruation, irregularities of	
of the ear.			119	see Dysmenorrhoea	114
of the eyes			121	painful	114
of the eyes from a stye			123	Mesmerism and magnetism	. 262
of the eyes from catarrh .			124	Milk-Crust	184
of the eyes from difficult				fever.	183
teething			122.	scab ....	184
 
470
INDEX OF  DISEASES.
Miliary fever .    .     •  pag° I38
Miscarriage   .                244
Mouth, baby's sore, see Aph-
      tha*    ....   52
    canker of the  .     .    .  185
    scurvy of the  .     .    .185
    sore  .....   52
Mumps, see Ears, inflamed   .  119

               N.

Navel, rupture of the    .    .  186
Nephritis.....171
Neuralgia fascialis .     .    .  130
Kettle-Rash, see Fever, miliary  138
Nightmare    ....  186
Nipples,   sore,   see  Gathered
  breasts.....68
Odontalgia	. 223
Offensive breath	. 1SS
Onanism ....	. 188
Otalgia ....	. 117
Otorrhoea.	. 118
Overfeeding of children,	see
Vomiting	. 230
P.	
Pain in the loins . .	. 178
Painful menstruation	iH
Palpitation of the Heart.	. 158
Panaris ....	. 140
Peritoneal dropsy .	. Ill
Pleurisy . . . .	. 190
Pleuritis . . . .	. 190
Podagra .	. 145
Poisoning	. 190
by arsenic	. 56
Pox, small	. 203
Preservation of medicines	. 245
Prolapsus uteri	. 236
Psora . . . .	. 168
Puerperal-Fever	. 192
Q-	
Quinsy, see Sore throat .	. 204
R.	
Bash, see Fever, miliary .	. 138
scarlet	. 199
Regimen of the sick	35
Rheumatic lumbago	. 179
Rheumatism .	. 194
Ring-Worm    .    .     .  page 197
Rose.....L20
Rubeola  .     .    .     .    .  1M
Rupturo of the navel    .    .  186

               S.
       129
       l'.»7
        73
       198
       198
       199
       200
       200
       127
       IS5
       188
        58
         3
       201
       201
       203
    .    52
breasts  68
       204
Scabs on the face in children
Scald-Hoad
Scalds, sec Burns
Scarlatina
Scarlet-Fever  .
    rash .
Sciatic neuralgia
Sciatica  .
Scrofula of the eyes
Scurvy of the mouth
Self-Pollution  .
Shortness of breath
Sketch of Hahnemann
Skin, itching of the
Sleeplessness  .    .
Small-Pox
Sore mouth
    nipplas, see Gathored
    throat
Sores from lying a bed  .    .  207
    on the feet    .    .    .226
Sorrow.....154
Spasms.....208
    of the chest   ...   58
Specks, or film on the eye    .  128
Spitting of blood   ...   63
Spontaneous lameness   .    .  173
Sprains.....212
St. Anthony's  fire   .    .    .  120
Stomach, cramp of the  .    .  215
     disordered     .    .    .  212
Stroke of lightning .    .    .  176
Stye......123
Summer-Complaint ...   82
Sun-Stroke    .     .    .    .219
Suppression of the menses    .   45
Sweating of the feet    .     .  135
Swelling of  the cheeks  .     .   79
     of the glands   .    .    .  144
Tabular index of the remedies
  used,  their  English  names,
  antidotes, and diseases  in
  which employed  .     .    .  269
Tape-Worm   .    .     .    .219
Teething.....221
Thrush.....52
Throat, inflammation of the  .  204
    sore.....204 
INDEX OF  ANATOMY  AND PHYSIOLOGY.
471
Tinea capitis  .    .    .  page 197
Toothache from cold    .    .  224
    from congestion of blood .  224
    from decayed teeth  .    .  223
    from increased sensibility
      of the nervous system .  225

               U.

Ulcers on the extremities    .  226
Urinary complaints .    .    .  226
Urine, bloody ....   65
Uterine  Haemorrhage   .    .  165
Uterus, prolapsus of    .    .  236

               V.

Vaccination  ....  227
Varicella ...    .    .    .81
Varicose veins....  229
Variola,  see Small-Pox  .    .  203
Varioloid ......  229
Veins, knots on the .    .    .  229
Veins, varicose    .    .  page 229
Vertigo, see Congestion of blood
  to the head and headache  .   88
Vomiting from mental emotions  231
    from morbid irritability of
the stomach .	. 233
from vitiated stomach . 230	
from worms	. 232
of blood .	. 64
W.	
Walk, children learning to . 233	
Warts ...	. 234
Weaning .	. 235
Wen	. 236
Whites .	. 174
Whitlpw ..	. 140
Womb, falling of the	. 236
Worms	. 237
tape .	. 219
Wounds .	. 239
INDEX  OF ANATOMY  AND  PHYSIOLOGY.
A.		Bones of the hand .	page 327
		of the head	. 309
Abductor brevis	. page 376	of the leg .	. 332
longus	. 376	of the lower extremities . 331	
magnus	. 376	of the metatarsus	. 336
minimi digiti manu	i. .374	of the toes	. 337
minimi digiti pedis	. 381	of the trunk	. 299
pollicis manus .	. 373	of the upper extremities . 323	
pollicis pedis	. 380, 381	Bracbialis internus .	. 369
Abductors	. 374	Branches of the abdominal aorta 421	
Albumen .	. 287	of the thoracic aorta	. 421
Anatomy and Physiolog	y .283	Buccinator	. 353
Anconeus, , .	. 369		
Astragalus , .	. 335	C.	
Azygps uvulae .	. 383		
		Calcium, or Lime . .	. 290
B.		Carbon ....	. 289
		Carpus ....	. 327
Biceps flexor cruris .	. 377	Cartilage ....	291, 339
flexor cubiti	. 369	Caseine ....	. 287
Blood-Vessels .	. 416	Cellular, or areolar tissue	. 293
Bone	. 291	Cervical nerves	. 447
Bones of the face	. 314	vertebras .	. 300
of the foot	. 331	Cervicalis descendens	. 366
of the fore-arm	. 326	Chlorine ....	. 290
 
472        INDEX  OF  ANATOMY  AND  rnYSIOLOGY.
Chondrine
Circulatory system .
Circutnflexus  .
Clavicle  .
Coccyx
Comparative anatomy
    physiology
Complexus
Composition of bone
Constrictor isthmi faucium
Coraco brachialis
Corrugator  supercilii
Cranium .
Cremaster
Crureus  .
Cuboid bone
Cuneiform
Cuticle, or Epidermis
page 2SS
  .  413
  .  383
  .  3S1
  .  302
  .  283
  .  283
  .  366
  .  29S
  .  385
  .  369
  .  351
  .  309
  .  362
  .  375
  .  335
  .  327
  .  347
               D.

Deltoid muscle
Depressor anguli oris
    labii inferioris  .
    labii superioris alaeque
Development of bone
Diaphragm
Digastrieus
Dorsal, or thoracic nerves
    vertebra;  .

               E.

Elaine
Elasticity of tissues
368
355
355
355
297
362
357
448
301
288
295
Elementary composition of man  286
Ethmoid bone ....  314
Extensibility of tissues  .    .  295
Extensor brevis digitorum pedis  380
    carpi radialis brevis .    .371
    carpi radialis longus .    .371
    carpi ulnaris    .    .    .371
    digitorum communis.    .  372
    longus digitorum pedis   .  378
    major pollicis manus     .  372
    minor pollicis manus     .  372
    ossimetacarpi pollicis manus 372
    proprius pollicis pedis    .  378
External ouneiform .    .    .  336
Facial and auditory nerves,  or
      seventh pair .    .    . 446
    angle     .    .    .    .322
Fascia superficialis .    .    . 360
    transversalis  .    .    . 362
Fibrine.....287
Fibro cartilage     .    •  VnS°
Fibula
Flexibility of tissues
Flexor accessorius  .
    brevis digitorum pedis
    brevis minimi digiti pedis
    brevis pollicis manus
    brevis pollicis pedis .
    carpi radialis
    carpi ulnaris
    longus digitorum pedis per-
      forans  .
    longus pollicis  .
    longus-pollicis pedis .  371,
    parvus minimi digiti manus
    profundus digitorum  perfo-
      rans    ....
    sublimis digitorum perfora-
      tus
Follicles  .
Fontanels.
Formation of callus.
Frontal bono  .
339
334
295
380
380
381
373
381
370
370

379
379
380
374

371

371
292
320
299
309
Ganglions     ....
Gastrocnemius.
Gelatine.....
Gemini.....
General remarks on the head  .
Genio hyoideus
Glands   .     .     .
Glosso pharyngeal, pneumogas-
  tric, and  spinal accessory,  or
  eighth pair of nerves
Gluteus magnus
    medius
    minimus  .
Gracilis  .
Gums

                H.

Haematosine  ....
Humerus .....
Hydrogen     <
Hyoid bone   «...
Hypo-glossal  nerve,  or ninth
  pair.....
Iliacus internus
Ilium
Indicator .
Inferior constrictor
    maxillary .
292
378
288
377
319
358
292
446
376
376
376
376
382
289
325
289
323

446
363
304
373
385
318 
INDEX OF ANATOMY AND  PHYSIOLOGY.         473
Inferior turbinated bone .  page 317
Infra spinatus scapula   .    .  368
Innominatum  ....  304
Intercostales  ....  359
Internal cuneiform  .    .    .  336
Inter-spinales ....  367
Interosseus muscles .    .    .  381
Inter-transversalis  .    .    .  367
Intestines     ....  390
Iron......290
Ischium.....305
Large intestines    .    .    .   392
Larynx.....404
Latissimus dorsi    .    .    .   364
Levator anguli oris .    .    .   355
    costarum  ....   368
    labii superioris alaeque nasi  355
    menti     ....   355
    palati     ....   383
    scapulae   ....   364
Ligaments    .     .    .  291,  339
Linea alba    .     .    .    .361
Lips......382
Longus colli   ....   358
Lumbar nerves     ...   448
    vertebrae  ....   301
Lumbricales   ....   373
    pedis.....380
Lunaro.....327
               M.

Magnesium   ....  290
Magnum .....  328
Malar bones   ....  317
Manganese    ....  290
Margarine     ....  2SH
Masseter.....356
Membrane     .    .    .    .292
Metacarpal bones  .    .    .  328
Middle constrictor .    .    .  385
    cuneiform ....  336
Multifidus spinae.  .    .    .  366
Motor oculi externus, or sixth
      pair  of nerves    .    .  445
    oculi, or third pair of nerves 445
Mouth.....382
Muscles.....291
    of the  abdomen     .    .  360
    of the  arm    .    .    .  369
    of the  back    .    .    .  363
    of the  foot    .    .    .  380
    of the  fore-arm     .    .  369
    of the  hand   .    .    .  373
    of the  head  and  neck    .  354
        60
Muscles of the leg  .    .  page 378
    of the lower extremities  .  375
    of the pharynx.    .     .  385
    of the shoulder.    .     .  368
    of the soft palate   .     .  383
    of the trunk    .    .     .  359
    of the upper extremities  .  368
Muscular  tissue     .    .     .  294
Mylo-hyoideus      ...  357

               N.

Nasal bone    ....  316
    cavities   ....  321
Nerves.....292
    of the cranium .    .     .  444
Nervous system     .    .     .  438
    tissue     ....  294
Nitrogen.....289
Obliquus externus  .    .    .  361
    inferior   ....  367
    internus   ....  361
    superior   ....  367
Obturator externus .    .    .  377
    internus   ....  377
Occipital bone ....  310
Occipito frontalis   .    .    .  354
Oesophagus    ....  385
Of the abdominal viscera    .  386
    articulations   .    .   338-345
    bones.....  296
    hair.....348
    muscles   ....  352
    nails.....348
    sebaceous glands    .    .  347
    skin.....345
    teeth.....350
Olfactory nerves, or first pair .  444
Omo-hyoideus ....  357
Opponens pollicis   .    .    .  373
Optic nerve, or second pair   .  445
Orbicularis oris    ...  356
    palpebrarum   .    .    .  354
Orbits of the  eye   .    .    .  321
Organs of Digestion     .    .  382
    of respiration  .    .    .  404
Os calcis .....  335
Oxygen  .....  289
Palate
    bones
Palato-pharyngeus
Palmaris brevis
383
316
383
373 
474        INDEX OF ANATOMY  AND PHYSIOLOGY.
Parietal bones . . • VaSe	310
Parotid gland ....	384
Patella.....	334
Patheticus, or fourth pair of	
nerves .	455
Peetineus .	376
Pectoralis major . . .	359
minor ....	359
Peculiarities of the foetal circu-	
lation .....	432
Pelvis.....	304
Periosteum ....	298
Peritoneum ....	387
Peroneus brevis	378
longus ....	378
tertius ....	378
Phalangeal bones	328
Pharynx and CEsophagus	384
Phosphorus ....	289
Physical and vital properties of	
tissues .....	294
Physiology of digestion .	398
of the circulation	435
of tho nervous system	453
of the respiration	410
Pisiform bone ....	327
Plantar interossei .	381
Plantaris .....	379
Platisma myoides	356
Popliteus .....	379
Porosoty of tissues .	298
Potassium ....	290
Pronator quadratus .	371
radii teres ....	369
Psoas magnus ....	363
parvus ....	363
Pterygoideus externus	356
internus ....	356
Pubis.....	305
Pyramidalis ....	362
Pyriformis ....	377
Q	
Quadratus femoris .	377
lumborum ....	363
R.	
Radius . . . . .	326
Rectus abdominis	361
anticus capitis major	358
anticus capitis minor	358
capitis lateralis.	368
capitis posticus major	367
capitis posticus minor	367
femoris .	375
Remarks on the lower extremities 337
Remarks on the upper extremi-
  ties    .     .    .    •  page 329
Rhomboideus major     .     •  364
    minor     ....  364
Ribs......307

                S.

Sacral nerves  ....  449
Sacro lumbalis and longissimus
  dorsi.....365
Sacrum  .....  302
Salivary glands of the mouth .  384
Sartorius muscle   .    .     .  375
Scalenus anticus   .    .     .  358
    posticus   ....  358
Scaphoid.....335
Scaphoides    ....  327
Scapula  .....  323
Semi-membranosus .    .     .  377
    spinalis cervicis     .     .  366
    spinalis dorsi  .    .     .  366
    tendinosus    .    .     .377
Sensation.....456
Sense of hearing, or Audition .  459
    of smell, or Olfaction     .  458
    of taste   ....  457
    of touch   .    .    .     .456
    of vision  .    .    .     .462
Serratus magnus  .    .     .  359
    posticus inferior    .     .  364
    posticus superior   .     .  364
Silicum.....290
Sinuses of  the dura mater    .  429
Small intestines    .    .    .  390
Sodium  .    .    .    .    .290
Soleus.....378
Sphenoid bone     .    .    .  312
Spinalis dorsi ....  366
Splenius .....  364
Stoarine.....288
Sterno-clcido-mastoideus.    .   356
    hyoideus  ....   357
    thyroideus     .   .    .   357
Sternum.....306
Stomach.....388
Structure of bone  .   .    .  297
Stylo-glossus  ....   357
     hyoideus ....  357
     pharyngeus    .   .   357, 385
Subclavian artery and its divi-
   sions   .   .   • .    .    .  418
Subclavius    ....  359
 Sublingual gland  .    .    .  384
 Submaxillary  ....  384
 Subs cap ularis  ....  368
 Sulphur.....290
 Superior maxillary bones     .  315 
INDEX OF ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY.       475
Superior radii brevis	page 372
radii longus	. 371
Supra-renal capsules	. 402
spinatus scapula	. 368
Sutures of the head	. 320
Synovial membrane.	. 339
T.	
Temporal bone	. 311
Temporalis	. 356
Tensor vagina femoris	. 375
Teres major	. 368
minor	. 368
The anterior tibial artery	. 426
aorta and its branche	S . 416
arteries	. 416
bladder	. 402
brain	. 440
cerebellum	. 441
cerebrum .	. 442
external iliac artery	. 425
femoral artery .	. 425
gall bladder	. 396
heart	. 413
kidneys	. 400
liver .	. 393
lungs	. 408
lymphatics	. 434
mediastinum	. 410
medulla oblongata	. 441
pancreas .	. 397
pleura	. 409
pons varolii	. 441
popliteal artery	. 426
portal vein	. 432
posterior tibial .	. 426
primitive, or common	iliacs 424
prostate gland .	. 403
spinal marrow .	. 438
spinal nerves	. 446
spine.	. 299
spleen	. 397
sympathetic nerve	. 450
thymus gland .	. 410
veins. . .	. 427
Thigh bone, or Femur	page 331
Thorax ....	. 306
Thyro-hyoideus	. 357
Thyroid gland .	. 407
Tibia	. 332
Tibialis anticus	. 378
posticus	. 380
Tongue	. 382
Trachea .	. 407
Trachelo-mastoid	. 366
Transversalis abdominis	. 361
cervicis	. 366
pedis .	. 381
Trapezium	. 328
Trapezius.	. 363
Trapezoides	. 328
Treatise on Anatomy and	Phy-
siology .	. 281
Triangularis sterni .	. 359
Triceps extensor cubiti	. 369
Trifacial, or fifth pair of nerves 448	
TJ.	
Ulna	. 326
Unciform bone.	. 328
Unguiform bones	. 316
V.	
Vastus externus	. 375
internus .	. 375
Vegetable Physiology	. 283
Veins of the abdomen	. 431
of the head and neck . 427	
of the lower extremities . 431	
of the upper extremities . 430	
Vessels	. 292
Viscus	. 293
Vital properties of tissues . 295	
Vomer	. 317
             z.
Zygomaticus major
355 
ENGLISH BOOKS  ON HOMCEOPATIIY.
            I.  BOOKS FOR  DOMESTIC PRACTICE.

Dr, C. Hering-'s  Domestic Physician,  revised with  additions  from
   the author's manuscript of the Seventh German "Edition.  Containing also
   a Tabular Index of the medicines and the diseases in which they are
   used.   Fifth American Edition. 1851.  Bound, §2.   Published by Ilado-
   macher & Sheek, 239 Arch St., Philadelphia.
      4K3" Dr. C. Bering's Domestic Physician is also to be hod of the subscribers in
    German (sixth edition), French (second edit.), and Spanish.  (See their respective
    catalogues.)
    JKg- from tho North American Homoeopathic Journal, vol. I, p. 114.
     It is only necessary for us to announce tho publication of tho fifth edition of
    this deservedly popular domestic manual.  The appearance of seven  successive
    editions in Germany, of five in this country, and its recent translation into the
    French language, are a sufficient testimony to its value.  We notice the addition
    of nearly a hundred pages of new matter, the more full description of some dis-
    eases, and the introduction of several which did not appear in  the last edition.
    The part relating to the diseases  of women and  children, which was then contri-
    buted by another hand, is supplied in the present issue by the author himself; a
    great improvement, as it gives to  the work a desirable completeness, which the
    productions of different individuals can never present.
     We arc also happy to say, that tho paper, printing, and typographical arrange-
    ment of the copy before us, aro  very decided advances upon previous  editions;
    though wo beg the respectable publishers not to suppose that they have yet  at-
    tained  the maximum of what is desirable in these respects.
    JO~ From the North-Western Journal of Homoeopathy, vol. Ill, p. 266.
     We are indebted to Messrs. Rademacher & Sheek, of Philadelphia, for a copy of
    the Fifth Edition of Dr. Hering's Domestic Physician.  This is an improved and
    enlarged edition of this highly popular manual, more than one hundred pagea
    having been  added. Perhaps no other work of the kind has had so extensive a
    circulation, six editions having appeared in Germany, (the seventh being in print),
    two in France, one in Spain, and it is now about to be published in Italy and
    Russia. The favor with which it has been received both by physicians  and lay-
    men, renders any commendation from us quite unnecessary.
Dr. Caspari's Homoeopathic  Domestic Physician,   edited by  F.
  Hartmann, M. D., "Author of  the Acute and Chronic Diseases."  Trans-
  lated  from the  eighth German edition,  and enriched by a Treatise on
  Anatomy and Physiology, embellished with 30 illustrat., by W".  P. Esrey,
  SI. D.   With additions and a  preface by C. Hering, M. D.  Containing
  also  a Chapter  on Mesmerism  and Magnetism;  directions for patients
  living some  distance from a homoeopathic physician, to  describe  their
  symptoms ; a Tabular Index of the medecines and the diseases in which
  they are used;  and a Sketch  of the Biography  of Dr. Samuel Hahne-
  mann, the Founder of Homoeopathy.  1851.  Bound, SI 50.  Published by
  Rademacher & Skeek, 239 Arch St., Philadelphia.
     ■83-  The Treatise on Anatomy and Physiology, with 30 illustrations, by W. P.
    Esrey,  M. D., is also to be had separately at 50 cents.
    #9- From the British Journal of Homoeopathy, vol. Vm,  p. 548.
     This  is a nice,  simply arranged work on domestic homoeopathy, written  in  an
    easy and comprehensible style, and which, as the announcement "eighth edition"
    shows,  has become extremely popular in Germany, and to our mind it is arranged
    on a much better principle for popular use than any of those that have yet ap-
    peared m this country. It is constructed somewhat on the plan of our old  friend
    Buchan, and whilst on the one hand it avoids the needles prolixity of some  of our
    domestic works,  on the other it does not attempt to cure all diseases of ordinary
    occurrence by means of a dozen or twenty medicines.   What chiefly interests  ua
    however in this work is a description of our illustrious master given by Dr Hart-

    L^cinTer^g wi^ntm;<li8CipleS' "* Wh° ** bnWUt opportunities of seeing 
2
Laurie, Dr. J., Homoeopathic  Domestic Medicine, with the Treatment
  and Diseases of Females, Infants, Children, and Adults.  Sixth American
  edition, much enlarged, with additions by A. Gerald Hull, M. D.  1850.
  Bound, $1 50.
Hempel's Homoeopatic Domestic Physician.  1850.  Bound, 50 cents.
Ed. C. Chcpmell's Domestic Homoeopathy restricted to its  legitimate
  sphere of practice, together with rules for diet and regimen. First Ame-
  rican edition, with additions  and improvements  by Samuel B. Barlow,
  M. D. 1849. Bound, 50 cents.
Pocket-Homceopathist, and Family Guide.  By J. A. Tarbell, M. D.
  1849. Bound, 25 cents.
Mariner's Physician and Surgeon; or, a Guide to the Homoeopathic Treat-
  ment of those diseases  to which  Seamen  are liable.  By Geo. W. Cook,
  M. D. 1848. Bound, 37£ cents.
Laurie's Homoeopathic Domestic, by A. Gerald Hull, M. D. Small edition.
  1848. Bound, 75 cents.
The Family Guide  to the Administration  of  Homoeopathic Eemedies.
  Third edition after the second London edition, with additions.   25 cents.
J. A. Tarbell, M. D. Sources of Health, and the Prevention of Disease.
  1850. Bound, 50 cents.
Epps', Dr. J., Domestic Homoeopathy; or, Rules for the Domestic Treat-
  ment  of the  Maladies  of Infants, Children,  and  Adults,  &a.  Fourth
  American from  the fourth London edition.  Edited and enlarged by Geo.
  W. Cook, M. D. 1849. Bound, 75 cents.
A Treatise on  the Use of Arnica, in cases  of Contusions,  Wounds,
  Sprains, Lacerations  of the Solids, Concussions, Paralysis, Rheumatism,
  Soreness of the Nipples, &c.  <fcc,  with a number of cases illustrative of
  the use of that drug. By Charles Julius Hempel, M. D. 1845. 19 cents.
    II.  BOOKS  FOR  HOMCEOPATHIC PRACTITIONERS.

Diseases  of Females and Children.  By  Walter Williamson, M. D.,
  Professor of Materia medica, Ac, in the Homoeopathic Medical College
  at Philadelphia.  1848.  Bound, 38 cents.  Published by Rademacher &
  Sheek, 239 Arch St., Philadelphia.
Transactions  of the  American Institute of Homoeopathy.  Or
  Manual of the new Medicines, tried and arranged by Drs. C. Hering, W.
  Williamson, C. Neidhard, J. Jeanes,  S. Dubs, and J. Kitchen.  With a
  Repertory  by. W. P. Esrey, M. D.  1846.  Bound, $1  50.  Published by
  Rademacher & Sheek, 239 Arch St., Philadelphia.
     >Kg=- The medicines treated of in the Transactions are,
       Benzoic acid, tried and arranged by J. Jeanes, M. D.
       Elaterium, tried and arranged by C. B. Matthews, M.D.
       Eupatorium per/., tried and arranged by W. Williamson, M. D.
       Fluoric acid, tried and arranged by C. Hering, M. D.
       Kalmia latifolia, tried and arranged  by C. Hering, M. D.
       Lobelia cardinalis, tried by S. Dubs, M. D.
       Lobelia inflata, tried  and arranged by J. Jeanes, M. D.
       Oxalic acid, tried and arranged by C. Neidhard, M. D.
       Podophyllumpeltatum, tried and arranged by W. Williamson, M.D.
       Sanguinaria canadensis, tried by  C. Bute, M. D.
       Triosteumperfoliatum, tried and arranged by W. Williamson, M.D.
Jahr's New  Manual of Homoeopathic Practice; edited, with Annotations,
  by A. Gerald Hull, M. D.  From  the last Paris edition.  This  is the
  fourth American edition of a very  celebrated work, written in French by
  the eminent Homoeopathic Professor Jahr, and it is  considered the best
  practical compendium  of this  extraordinary science that has yet been
  composed.  After a very judicious  and instructive introduction, the work 
3
  presents  a Tabic of the Homoeopathic Medicines, with  their names in
  Latin. English, and German; the order in which they are to  be  studied,
  with their most important distinctions, aud  clinial illustrations  of their
  symptoms and effects upon the various organs and functions of the human
  system.   The second volume embraces an elaborate Analysis  of the indi-
  cations in disease, of the medicines adapted to cure, and a Glossary oi
  the technics used in  the work, arranged so luminously as to form  an ad-
  mirable guide to  every medical student.  The whole  system  is  hero dis-
  played with a modesty of pretention, and a scrupulosity in statement, well
  calculated to bespeak candid investigation.  This laborious work  is indis-
  pensable  to the students and practitioners of Homceopnthy,  and highly
  interesting to medical scientific men of all classes. 2 vols.  1850.  $6.
Jahr's New Manual:  originally published under the name of Symptomen-
  Codex (Digest of Symptoms). This work is  intended to  facilitate a com-
  parison of the parallel symptoms of the  various Homoeopathio  agents,
  thereby enabling the practitioner to discover the characteristic symptoms
  of each drug,  and to determine with ease and correctness what remedy is
  most homoeopathic to the existing group of symptoms.   Translated, with
  important and extensive additions from various sources, by Charles Julius
  Hempel, M. D., assisted by James M. Quin, M. D., with revisions and cli-
  nical notes by John F. Gray, M. D.; contributions by Drs. A. Gerald Hull,
  George W. Cook, and B. F.  Joslin of New York;  and Drs. C. Hering, J.
  Jeanes,  C. Neidhard,  W. Williamson,  and J. Kitchen  of Philadelphia;
  with a Preface by C. Hering, M. D. 2 vols.  1848.  Bound, $11.
Hempel's Boenninghausen for Homoeopathic Physicians; to be used at
  the bedside of the  patient, and  in studying  the Materia Mediea. Pura.
  1 octavo vol., most complete edition, including the Concordances of Ho-
  moeopathic Remedies. Translated and  adapted to the use of the American
  profession, by C. J. Hempel, M.D.  1847.  Stitched, $1  50, bound, $2.
Becker, M. D., on Consumption.  Transl. from the German.  1848.  38 cts.
--------on Diseases of the Eye.  Transl. from the German. 1848.  38 cts.
------— on Constipation.  Translated from  the German. 1848.  38 cents.
--------on Dentition.  Translated from the German. 1848. 38  cents.
--------on Consumption, Diseases of the Eye, Constipation, and Dentition
  (containing all four  above works), bound in  one vol., $1.
Hartmann's Acute and Chronic Diseases, and their Homoeopathic Treat-
  ment.  Third German edition, revised and considerably enlarged by the
  author.   Translated, with additions, and adapted to the use of the Ame-
  rican profession, by C. J. Hempel, M. D. 4 vols.  $5  75.
J. Epp's,  M. D., Affections of the Head and  the nervous  System.   $1.
Hartmann, Dr.  P.,  Practical Observations  on some of the chief Homoeo-
  pathic Remedies. Translated from the German by A. II. Okie, M. D.  Two
  series. Bound, $2.
Laurie, Dr. J., Elements of Homoeopathic  Practice  of  Physic.   An Ap-
  pendix to Laurie's Domestic, containing also all the Diseases  of the Urin-
  ary and  Genital Ortjam.  1849.  Bound, $1  25.
Bryant, Dr. J.,  A Pocket-Manual, or Repertory of Homoeopathic Medi-
  cine, alphabetically and nosologically arranged; which may be  used as
  the physician's Vade-Mecum, the traveller's Medical Companion, or the
  Family Physician:  containing the principal remedies  for the  most im-
  portant diseases, symptoms, sensations, characteristics of diseases, Ac;
  with the principal  pathogenetic effects  of the medicines  on  the most
  important organs and functions of the body;  together with diagnosis,
  explanation of technical terms, directions for the selection and exhibition
  of remedies, rules of diet, Ac, Ac.  Compiled from the best homoeopathio
  authonti.■<.  1851. Bound,  $1 25.
 B"nF'iJ°S.1Jn', M* D-' H°mceopathic Treatment of Diarrhoea, Dysentery
   Lnolera  Morbus, and Cholera, with repertory. Bound, 50 cents. 
4
       F. Humphreys, M. D., the Cholera and its  Homoeopathio Treatment.
         1849. Bound, 38 cents.
       Jahr's Clinical Guide, or Pocket-Repertory for the Treatment of Acute and
         Chronic Diseases.   Translated from the German, by C. J. Hempel, M. D.
         1850. Bound, $1  50.
       Hahnemann's Organon of Homoeopathio Medicine, third American edit.,
         with improvements, and additions from the last German edition, and Dr.
         C. Hering's introductory remarks.  1848. Bound, $1.
       G. L.  Rau's  Organon of the Specific Healing Art of Homoeopathy, by C.
         J. Hempel, M. D.  Bound, $1 25.
       Hahnemann, Dr. S.,  Materia Medica Pura. Translated by C. J. Hempel,
         M. D.  4 vols.  1846.  Bound, $6.
       E. Stapf's Addition to the Materia Medica Pura. Translated by C. J.
.         Hempel, M.D. Bound, $1 50.
       Hahnemann, Dr.  S.,  the  Chronic  Diseases, their Specific Nature, and
         Homoeopathic Treatment.  Translated and edited by C. J. Hempel, M. D.,
 ^t       with a  Preface by C.Hering, M. D.,  Philadelphia.  8vo.  5 vols.  1849.
  C      Bound,  $7.
 *»    Homoeopathic Cookery.  Second edition, with  additions, by  the  Lady
         of an American homoeopathic physician.  Designed chiefly for  the use of
  ^    such persons as are under homoeopathic treatment. Bound, 50 cents.
       Rueckert's Therapeutics;  or,  Successful  Homoeopathic Cures, collected
         from the  best homoeopathic periodicals, translated and edited by C. J.
         Hempel, M.  D. 1 large 8vo vol.  1846.  Bound, $3  50.
       Bcenninghausen's Essay  on the Homoeopathic Treatment of Intermittent
         Fevers.   Translated and edited by C. J. Hempel. M. D. 1845. 38 cents.
       Homoeopathic Treatment of Diseases of  the  Sexual  System,
         being a complete Repertory of all the symptoms occurring in the Sexual
         Systems of the Male and  Female.  Adapted to the use of physicians and
         laymen.  Translated, arranged, and  edited, with  additions  and improve-
         ments, by F. Humphreys,  M. D. 1850.  Bound, 50 cents.
   V-  RuoflTs  Repertory  of  Homoeopathic Medicine,  nosologically  arranged.
 ' *  V    Translated from the  German by A. H. Okie,  M. D.,  translator of Hart-
    * r   mann's Remedies.  Second American edition, with additions and improve-
         ments, by G. Humphrey,  M. D. 1845.   Bound, $1  50.
       Jahr, Dr.  G. H. G.,  Short Elementary Treatise upon Homoeopathia,
 »*   '• , and the Manner of its Practice;  with some of the  most important effects
   ■^  j  of ten of the principal homoeopathic remedies, for the use of  all honest
    J^-- '■• men who desire to convince themselves by experiment of the truth of the
     T   doctrine.  From  the  second French  edition, corrected  and  enlarged.
         Translated by Edward Bayard, M. D.  Bound, 37i cents.
 x   ^   Wm.  Henderson,  M. D., Homoeopathic Practice.  1846. 50 cents.
       Forbes, M. D., Homoeopathy, Allopathy, and Young Physic. 1846.  19 cts.
   \ ^ Wm. Henderson, M.  D. Letter to J. Forbes. 1846. 19 cents.
           JB3f The above three books bound in one vol., $1.
       Joslin, B. F., M. D., Principles of Homoeopathia. In a series of lectures.
         1850. Bound, 75 cents.
       F. A.  Guenther's New Manual  of  Homoeopathio  Veterinary Medicine;
         or, the  Homoeopathic Treatment of the Horse,  the Ox, the Sheep, the
         Dog, and  other Domestic  Animals.  1847. Bound,  $1  25.
       E. E. Marcy, M. D., the Homoeopathic  Theory and Practice of Medicine.
         1850. Bound, $2.
       Jahr's and Gruner's New Homoeopathic  Pharmacopoeia and  Posology,
         or, the Mode of Preparing Homoeopathic Medicine, and the Administra-
         tion of Doses, compiled and translated  from the  German works of  Buch--
         ner, Gruner, and the French work of Jahr, by C. J. Hempel, M. D  1850
         Bound, $2. 
5
✓  1/
Jahr'i
   KVMl'Ill!** Wltiii^vM nmi |«ii.ii"i"^i..ii .v......... .......
   Edited by ('. J.  Hempel, M. D.  IS.'.O.  Bound, $1.
 An Epitome of Homoeopathic Practice.  Compiled chiefly from Jahr,
   Riiekert.  Beauvais,  Bonninghausen, Ac.  By J. T. Curtis, M. D., and J.
   Lillie, M. D. Second enlarged edition.  1850.  Bound, 75 cents.


   Dr. C. Hf.rikg's Domkstic Physician is also to be had,  handsomely
 bound, in the following languages:

           IN  FRENCH,  2d   Edition.
 Medccine  homoeopathiquc domestique, par le docteur C. Herinc: (do
   Philadelphie), redi^e,  il'iipies les  nieilleurs ouvrages homoeopathiques et    y
   d'apr&s su propre experience, avecdes additions des doctcurs Goullon, Gross
   et St.-i.pf, traduite de l'alleniand et publico par le docteur L. Marciiant.    4
   Deuxi&mo  edition, eorrig6o  et augmont6e.   Paris, 1850,  1 vol. in-12 de
   500 pages.  $2.
      Cet ouvrage enscigne la manitro de so soulagcr dans un grand nomber de ma-  *V
    ladies, goit par des moyens domestiques, soit, lorsque ceux-ci sout insufilsants, par
    des remedes homeeopathiqucs qui no  nuisent jamais et sont toujours utiles  lors-
    qu'ils sont ronvenahlcment administres.  C'est pour ccla que la mCdecine hoinazo-
    pathiqur. domtstique. s'adresse a tous; d'abord it coux qui sont convaincus par  leur
    proper experience des avantages reels des principes Hahnemanniens, ct  puis a  A
    coux  qui  n'ont pas eu occasion d'acquerir cetto conviction, de ineme aussi qu'a
    ceux qui n'ont entendu que mal parler de l'homoeopathie.                      I

          IN  GERMAN.  7th  Edition.            f

 .©crinfL Xr. (fouftaittitt, bcr  &omoopatt>ifd)c £au3arjt.  9iad)  ben
   beften  luMiuuHMthiidicn 4Berfc» unb et'gnen (Srfafyrunflen bearbcitet;  mtt  ^
   ben 3iif'T5f» b« ^ octoren  (SjouUon,  (^3ro§ unb ©tapf.  7te »om $er- /
   faffer felbft iibergearbeitete unb »ermet)rte Sluflnge.  3ena, 1851.  Sleg,
   geb. XI 50.

                    IN SPANISH.                    J
Mcdicina homcopatica domestica, 6 guia de las familias, para axfj
  puedan tratarse por si mismos homeopaticamente en las indispositioi
  ligeras y prestar  auxilios  eficaces  a los enfermos en los casos urgenfes
  hasta  la llegada del  medico, por  el  doctor C. Hekin(;.   Redactado coi
  arreglo £ las mejores obrys homeopiiticas yfl.su propia esperiencia co
  aditiones de los doctores Goullon, Gross y Ssapf.  Tradueida al castL-*  y
  lano por D. Roman Fernandez del Rio, doctor  en medicina y cirurgia ""
  etc. Madrid, 1850.  £2 50.
  *5~ Dr. Heriuc's Domestic Physician is also in the course of translation into the
         Itus>.inii di  Greek languages, and will be for sale by the subcribers
         soon after its publication.

                      JUST PUBLISHED:
The Lesser Writings of Samuel Hahnemann, collected and translated
  by R.  E. Dudgeon, M. D.  With  Additions by E. E. Marcy, M. D.,
Author of "The Homoeopathic Theory and Practice of Medicine  and Kditor of The
                  North American Homoeopathic Journal."
A large  8° volume with a beautiful Likeness in steel of Hahnemann.
    Price in  England $0.   Republished with Additions, bound, $3.

                                        Rademacher & Sheek,
                                          239 Arch St., Philadelphia.
/ i 

•  '1   $   >.
X

(V



f  Si



6

y
^
^

3 

 
 
NLM027031365